Function
Hakko Electronics Co., Ltd.
Record of Revisions
Reference numbers are shown at the bottom left corner on the back cover of each manual.
Printing Date
Reference No.
Revised Contents
September, 2002
1044NE0
First edition
April, 2003
1044NE1
Second edition
[A partial revision]
Address revised
Preface
Congratulations on purchasing the drawing/editing software (V-SFT) for the MONITOUCH V series.
For a clearer understanding, the MONITOUCH V series Reference Manual focuses on the outline of
each function and the way of using the drawing/editing software (V-SFT) according to the operating
procedures.
Notes:
1. The copyright of the software is possessed by Hakko Electronics Co., Ltd.
2. Reproduction of the contents of the software and this manual, in whole or in part, without
permission of Hakko Electronics Co., Ltd. is prohibited.
3. The specifications of the software and the information in this manual are subject to change
without prior notice.
4. If the specifications of the software do not correspond with the contents of this manual, the
software specifications have priority.
5. No liability is assumed by Hakko Electronics Co., Ltd. with respect to the influence brought
by the result of using the software or this manual.
6. You may use this software on a single central processing unit.
About Trademarks
• Windows, Word and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
• All other company names or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective holders.
• Programmable logic controllers (PLCs) are products of their respective manufacturers.
♦ About Manuals
This manual describes functions and capabilities of drawing software “V-SFT” for the
MONITOUCH V series.
Following manuals are available for the MONTOUCH V series.
Manual Name
Reference No.
Contents
Reference Manual
(Operation)
1043NEx
The V-SFT structure, operations, editing procedure, etc.
required when creating screen data are explained.
Reference Manual
(Function)
1044NEx
Functions of the MONITOUCH V7 series and V6 series are
explained in details.
V7 Hardware
Specifications
2010NEx
Hardware specifications, connection with PLCs and wring
diagrams of the MONITOUCH V7 series are contained.
V6 Hardware
Specifications
2006NEx
Hardware specifications, connection with PLCs and wring
diagrams of the MONITOUCH V6 series are contained.
Temperature Control
Network
1033NEx
The temperature control network function is explained.
This manual should be used together with “Reference Manual (Operation).” Be sure to save these
manuals in the same place.
♦ V Series Models
The following V series models are available:
Generic Name
Series
V7 series
Model
V7 Classification
V712iS
V7i or V7i series
V712S
V7
V710iS
V7i or V7i series
V710S
V7
V710iT
V7i or V7i series
V710T
V7
V708iS
V7i or V7i series
V708S
V7
V708C
V7
V612T
V series
V610S
V610T
V610C
V608C
V6 series
V606C
V606M
V606iT
V606iC
V606iM
V608CH
V609E
Please note that the V series model names are used as listed above in the manuals.
♦ Denotations
The following marks are used in this manual to attract attention of the reader.
: Describes important information that must be heeded.
: Indicates cross references.
: Describes the reference or supplemental information.
♦ V Series Functions
The V series is equipped with the following functions. Depending on the V series model, some
functions may not be available. Please check the V series model you are using. For more
information, refer to the related chapter.
Function
Chapter
2
V7i
V7 Series
V708C
V7
V612/V610
V6 Series
V608/V606i V608CH
V606 V609E
Overlap
Superimpose
Video Display
3
Switch
4
Lamp
5
Data Display
6
Message Display
7
Entry Mode
8
Graph
9
Graphic
Coordinate output
Password: Variable
10
Sampling
11
Clock Display/Calendar
12
Memo Pad
13
Macro
14
Data Sheet
15
Print
16
Barcode
17
Animation
18
Video Display
19
JPEG Display
20
Sound Replay Function
21
Recipe Function
22
Data Logging (SRAM/CREC)
23
CF Card
24
SRAM
25
Memory Card Mode
(* Unavailable with matrix type.)
Linear
Planar
CF Card
CF Card
CF Card
SRAM
CREC
26
Ethernet Function
Screen Data Transfer/ PLC Connection
E-Mail/ Web Server
27
E-Mail
28
Web Server
29
Language Selection
Multi-language Selection
Display Change
Available
Optionally available
Not available at present
Notes on Safe Use of
MONITOUCH
In this manual, you will find various notes categorized under the following levels with the signal words
“DANGER,” and “CAUTION.”
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury and could cause property damage.
Note that there is a possibility that the item listed with
ramifications.
CAUTION may have serious
DANGER
• Never use the input function of MONITOUCH for operations that may threaten human life or to
damage the system, such as switches to be used in case of emergency. Please design the
system so that it can cope with malfunction of a touch switch.
• Turn off the power supply when you set up the unit, connect cables or perform maintenance and
inspection. Failure to do so could cause an electric shock or damage to the unit.
• Never touch any terminals while the power is on. An electric shock may occur.
• You must put a cover on the terminals on the unit when you turn the power on and operate the
unit. Without the terminal cover in place, an electric shock may occur.
• The liquid crystal in the LCD panel is a hazardous substance. If the LCD panel is damaged,
never swallow the leaked liquid crystal. If the liquid crystal spills on your skin or clothing, use
soap and wash off thoroughly.
CAUTION
[Notes on System Design]
• Never bundle control cables and input/output cables with high-voltage and large-current carrying
cables such as power supply cables. Keep these cables at least 200 mm away from the power
supply or high-voltage cables. Otherwise, malfunction may occur due to noise.
• For use in a nuclear energy facility, or other facility of such official importance, please consult
your local distributor.
[Notes on Installation]
• Operate (or store) MONITOUCH under the conditions indicated in this manual and related
manuals. Failure to do so could cause fire, malfunction, physical damage or deterioration.
• Understand the following environmental limits for use and storage of MONITOUCH. Otherwise,
fire or damage to the unit may result.
- Avoid locations where there is a possibility that water, corrosive gas, flammable gas,
solvents, grinding fluids or cutting oil can come into contact with the unit.
- Avoid high temperature, high humidity, and outside weather conditions, such as wind, rain or
direct sunlight.
- Avoid locations where excessive dust, salt, and metallic particles are present.
- Avoid installing the unit in a location where vibration or physical shock may be transmitted.
• Equipment must be correctly mounted so that the main terminal of MONITOUCH will not be
touched inadvertently.
• Tighten the MONITOUCH mounting screws to the specified torque. Excessive tightening may
distort the panel surface. Loose tightening may cause MONITOUCH to come off, malfunction or
be short-circuited.
• Tighten terminal screws on the power input terminal block equally to a torque of 0.5 N•m.
• Check the appearance of MONITOUCH when it is unpacked. Do not use the unit if any damage
or deformation is found.
• MONITOUCH has a glass screen. Do not drop or give physical shock to the unit.
[Notes on Cable Connection]
• Connect the cables correctly to the terminals of MONITOUCH in accordance with the specified
voltage and wattage. Over-voltage, over-wattage or incorrect cable connection could cause fire,
malfunction or damage to the unit.
• Be sure to establish a ground of MONITOUCH. The FG terminal must be used exclusively for
the unit with the level of grounding resistance less than 100Ω.
• Prevent any conductive particles from entering into MONITOUCH. Failure to do so may lead to
fire, damage or malfunction.
CAUTION
[Notes on Maintenance and Operation]
• Hakko Electronics Co., Ltd. is not responsible for any damages resulting from repair, overhaul or
modification of MONITOUCH that was performed by an unauthorized person.
• Do not use thinners for cleaning because they may discolor the MONITOUCH surface. Use
alcohol or benzine commercially available.
• Do not use a sharp-pointed tool when pressing a touch switch.
• Only experts are authorized to set up the unit, connect the cables or perform maintenance and
inspection.
• MONITOUCH is equipped with a lithium battery. Lithium batteries contain combustible material
such as lithium or organic solvent. Mishandling may cause heat, explosion or ignition resulting
in fire or injury. Read this manual and related manuals carefully and handle the lithium battery
correctly as instructed.
• If a data receive error occurs when MONITOUCH and the counterpart (PLC, temperature
controller, etc.) are started at the same time, read the manual for the counterpart unit and handle
the error correctly.
• Switch resolution of the MONITOUCH V7 series is determined by
the analog-type resistance film. Do not press two or more
positions on the screen at the same time.
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
If two or more positions are pressed at the same time, the switch
located between the pressed positions activates. Please take
note of this.
F4
F5
SWITCH
F6
F7
POWER
[Notes on Disposal]
Pressing two positions at the same time
activates the switch in the center.
• At the time of disposal, MONITOUCH must be treated as industrial waste.
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1
System Setting
System Setting Items ........................................................................................................... 1-1
Starting the System Setting ................................................................................................. 1-2
Initial Setting Items............................................................................................................... 1-2
PLC Type ..................................................................................................................... 1-3
Communication Parameter .......................................................................................... 1-3
♦ [Read Area] ([Main 1] tab window) ................................................................... 1-4
♦ [Write Area] ([Main 1] tab window) ................................................................. 1-10
♦ [ Read/Write Area GD-80 Compatible] ([Main 1] tab window) .................... 1-13
♦ [Calendar] ([Main 1] tab window) .................................................................... 1-13
♦ Notes on Calendar Memory............................................................................ 1-14
Edit Model Selection .................................................................................................. 1-14
Unit Setting ................................................................................................................ 1-15
♦ Memory Expansion......................................................................................... 1-15
♦ Backlight ......................................................................................................... 1-15
♦ Buzzer ............................................................................................................ 1-17
♦ System/Mode Switch ...................................................................................... 1-17
♦ Blink/Flash ...................................................................................................... 1-18
♦ Touch Switch .................................................................................................. 1-18
♦ DIO Memory ................................................................................................... 1-18
♦ Overlap ........................................................................................................... 1-18
♦ E-Mail ............................................................................................................. 1-18
♦ Environment Setting ....................................................................................... 1-19
Font Setting................................................................................................................ 1-20
Language Selection ................................................................................................... 1-20
Modular Jack.............................................................................................................. 1-21
Setting Items for other Functions ....................................................................................... 1-23
Function Switch Setting ............................................................................................. 1-23
♦ Setting Procedure ........................................................................................... 1-23
♦ Setting Items................................................................................................... 1-23
Buffering Area Setting................................................................................................ 1-24
Memory Card Setting ................................................................................................. 1-24
CF Card Setting (V7 and V608CH only) .................................................................... 1-25
Printer Setting ............................................................................................................ 1-25
Video Setting.............................................................................................................. 1-25
Sound Setting (V7i only) ............................................................................................ 1-25
Barcode Setting ......................................................................................................... 1-25
V-Link Setting............................................................................................................. 1-25
Macro Setting............................................................................................................. 1-25
Time Display Format.................................................................................................. 1-26
SRAM/Clock Setting .................................................................................................. 1-26
Attribute Table............................................................................................................ 1-26
MR400 Format Table ................................................................................................. 1-26
Temp. CTRL/PLC2Way Setting ................................................................................. 1-26
Network Table Setting (Ethernet)............................................................................... 1-26
1
Contents
Chapter 2
Overlap
Outline of Overlap ................................................................................................................2-1
Overlap Is: ...................................................................................................................2-1
Overlap and Screen......................................................................................................2-2
Video Input (V6/For Channel Selection) .......................................................................2-3
Overlap Display Formats ......................................................................................................2-4
Normal Overlap ............................................................................................................2-4
Multi-overlap .................................................................................................................2-4
Call-overlap ..................................................................................................................2-5
Video Input (V6/For Channel Selection) .......................................................................2-5
Normal Overlap ....................................................................................................................2-6
Setting Procedure.........................................................................................................2-6
Setting Items for Normal Overlap .................................................................................2-6
Displaying and Erasing Normal Overlap.......................................................................2-8
♦ Internal command .............................................................................................2-8
♦ External command ............................................................................................2-8
♦ Macro command ...............................................................................................2-9
Memory Related to Normal Overlap .............................................................................2-9
Multi-overlap .......................................................................................................................2-10
Setting Procedure.......................................................................................................2-10
Multi-overlap Setting (Multi-overlap Edit)....................................................................2-10
Macro Setting in Multi-overlap Edit.............................................................................2-11
♦ Setting Procedure ...........................................................................................2-11
[Overlap (Multi)] Dialog (Screen) ................................................................................2-12
Displaying and Erasing Multi-overlap .........................................................................2-14
♦ Internal command ...........................................................................................2-14
♦ External command ..........................................................................................2-14
♦ Macro command .............................................................................................2-15
Memory Related to Multi-overlap................................................................................2-15
Call-overlap ........................................................................................................................2-16
Setting Procedure.......................................................................................................2-16
Multi-overlap Setting (Multi-overlap Edit)....................................................................2-16
[Overlap (Call)] Dialog (Screen) .................................................................................2-16
Displaying and Erasing Call-overlap...........................................................................2-17
♦ Internal command ...........................................................................................2-17
♦ External command ..........................................................................................2-17
♦ Macro command .............................................................................................2-17
Memory Related to Call-overlap .................................................................................2-17
Feature of Overlap − SYSTEM Switch − ............................................................................2-18
The SYSTEM switch is: .............................................................................................2-18
♦ Moving the overlap..........................................................................................2-18
♦ Erasing the overlap .........................................................................................2-18
♦ Setting the SYSTEM switch ............................................................................2-18
Feature of Overlap − Superimpose − .................................................................................2-19
Setting Procedure.......................................................................................................2-19
Calling Methods..........................................................................................................2-21
♦ The same as usual overlap: ...........................................................................2-21
♦ Calling from the video items: ..........................................................................2-21
Notes ..........................................................................................................................2-21
2
Contents
Video Input (V6 with Video Input Device/For Channel Selection)...................................... 2-22
Setting Procedure ...................................................................................................... 2-22
Video Setting.............................................................................................................. 2-22
♦ With the V6 series: ........................................................................................ 2-22
♦ With the V7 series: ........................................................................................ 2-23
[Overlap (Video)] Dialog............................................................................................. 2-24
♦ With the V6 series: ........................................................................................ 2-24
♦ With the V7 series: ........................................................................................ 2-24
Video Display Setting (Macro Command).................................................................. 2-25
♦ Video Display Default Setting ......................................................................... 2-25
♦ Changing the Default Settings........................................................................ 2-26
Displaying and Erasing Video Display ....................................................................... 2-28
♦ Internal command ........................................................................................... 2-28
♦ External command.......................................................................................... 2-28
♦ Macro command............................................................................................. 2-28
Memory Related to Video Input ................................................................................. 2-28
Overlap Size Limits ............................................................................................................ 2-29
Chapter 3
Switch
Outline.................................................................................................................................. 3-1
Basic Function of Switches .......................................................................................... 3-1
Lamps in Switches ....................................................................................................... 3-2
Notes.................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Minimum Switch Unit ................................................................................................... 3-3
Placement .................................................................................................................... 3-3
Switch Output............................................................................................................... 3-4
♦ Two-point Pressing........................................................................................... 3-4
Switch Area.................................................................................................................. 3-5
[Switch] Dialog ..................................................................................................................... 3-7
[Main] Tab Window ...................................................................................................... 3-7
[Character] Tab Window ............................................................................................ 3-16
[Detail] Tab Window................................................................................................... 3-16
[Color] Tab Window ................................................................................................... 3-18
Flowchart ........................................................................................................................... 3-19
When the switch is ON (pressed): ............................................................................ 3-19
When the switch is OFF (released): .......................................................................... 3-20
Switch Function Examples................................................................................................. 3-21
To Switch the Screen (= Screen, Return) .................................................................. 3-21
To Print out the Screen Display (= Hard Copy): ........................................................ 3-22
[Occupy]..................................................................................................................... 3-22
To Display Normal Overlap (= Overlap): ................................................................... 3-23
To Erase the Overlap (= Overlap).............................................................................. 3-24
To Display Multi-overlap (= Multi-overlap): ............................................................... 3-25
To Process Arithmetic Operation: ............................................................................. 3-26
♦ Notes .............................................................................................................. 3-27
Digital Switch ............................................................................................................. 3-28
♦ Digital Switch Setting ...................................................................................... 3-28
♦ Custom Parts .................................................................................................. 3-29
♦ Notes .............................................................................................................. 3-30
Switch Coordinate Information (V7) ........................................................................... 3-30
3
Contents
Chapter 4
Lamp
Outline ..................................................................................................................................4-1
[Lamp] Dialog .......................................................................................................................4-2
[Lamp] Dialog ...............................................................................................................4-2
♦ [Main] Tab Window ...........................................................................................4-2
♦ [Character] Tab Window ...................................................................................4-5
♦ [Color] Tab Window...........................................................................................4-7
Draw Mode: XOR .................................................................................................................4-8
Part file: Std.V7P / Std.V6P (No. 0001 to 0003)
Parts_j.V7P / Parts_j.V6P (No. 0000 to 0003)..............................................................4-8
♦ Character ..........................................................................................................4-8
♦ Color..................................................................................................................4-8
Part file: Std.V7P / Std.V6P (No. 0000, 0004 and later)
Parts_j.V7P / Parts_j.V6P (No. 0004 and later)..........................................................4-10
♦ Character ........................................................................................................4-10
♦ Color................................................................................................................4-10
♦ Note on XOR...................................................................................................4-10
Draw Mode: REP................................................................................................................4-11
Part file: Std.V7P / Std.V6P (No. 0001 to 0003)
Parts_j.V7P / Parts_j.V6P (No. 0000 to 0003)............................................................4-11
♦ Character ........................................................................................................4-11
♦ Color................................................................................................................4-12
Part file: Std.V7P / Std.V6P (No. 0000, 0004 and later)
Parts_j.V7P / Parts_j.V6P (No. 0004 and later)..........................................................4-12
♦ Notes on REP .................................................................................................4-12
Other Notes ........................................................................................................................4-13
Chapter 5
Data Display
Outline ..................................................................................................................................5-1
Outline of Numerical Data Display................................................................................5-1
Outline of Character Display.........................................................................................5-2
Outline of Message Display..........................................................................................5-3
Outline of Table Data Display.......................................................................................5-3
Num. Data Display ...............................................................................................................5-4
[Num. Display] Dialog ...................................................................................................5-4
♦ [Main] Tab Window ...........................................................................................5-4
♦ [Type] Tab Window ...........................................................................................5-5
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window.................................................................................5-9
♦ [Detail] Tab Window ........................................................................................5-12
Character Display ...............................................................................................................5-14
[Char. Display] Dialog.................................................................................................5-14
♦ [Main] Tab Window .........................................................................................5-14
♦ [Type] Tab Window .........................................................................................5-15
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window...............................................................................5-16
♦ [Detail] Tab Window ........................................................................................5-16
Message Display ................................................................................................................5-17
[Message Display] Dialog ...........................................................................................5-17
♦ [Main] Tab Window .........................................................................................5-17
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window...............................................................................5-17
♦ [Detail] Tab Window ........................................................................................5-17
4
Contents
Table Data Display............................................................................................................. 5-18
Table Data Display Area ............................................................................................ 5-18
♦ [Table Data Display] Dialog ............................................................................ 5-18
[Table Data Display] (Num. Display) Dialog............................................................... 5-19
♦ [Type 2] Tab Window...................................................................................... 5-19
[Table Data Display] (Char. Display) Dialog .............................................................. 5-20
♦ [Type 2] Tab Window...................................................................................... 5-20
[Table Data Display] (Message Display) Dialog......................................................... 5-21
♦ [Type 2] Tab Window...................................................................................... 5-21
[Table Data Display] (Text in Drawing) Dialog ........................................................... 5-22
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window .............................................................................. 5-22
Notes.................................................................................................................................. 5-23
When Placing a Data Display Part on A Switch or Lamp Part ................................... 5-23
When Placing Data Display Parts on A Switch or Lamp Part .................................... 5-23
When Placing a Data Display Part on Switch or Lamp Parts..................................... 5-23
Chapter 6
Message Display (Relay/Message)
How to Display Messages.................................................................................................... 6-1
Relay Mode.................................................................................................................. 6-2
Message Mode ............................................................................................................ 6-2
Relay Mode.......................................................................................................................... 6-3
Outline.......................................................................................................................... 6-3
Relay Mode Setting Procedure .................................................................................... 6-4
Registering Messages ................................................................................................. 6-4
[Relay] Dialog............................................................................................................... 6-5
♦ [Main] Tab Window ........................................................................................... 6-5
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window ................................................................................ 6-7
♦ [Detail] Tab Window ......................................................................................... 6-8
Display Area Parts ....................................................................................................... 6-9
♦ Outline of Display Area Parts ........................................................................... 6-9
♦ Note When Placing Display Area Parts .......................................................... 6-10
♦ [Mode Display Area] Dialog ............................................................................ 6-10
Message Scroll Up/Down........................................................................................... 6-11
♦ Notes on Setting Switch Parts ........................................................................ 6-11
To Display Relay Messages on Switches or Lamps .................................................. 6-11
♦ [Relay] Dialog Settings ................................................................................... 6-11
♦ Switches for Display ....................................................................................... 6-12
♦ For [Action Area: Lamp].................................................................................. 6-12
Displaying Detailed Explanation to Messages (= Relay-sub function)....................... 6-13
♦ Outline of Relay-Sub Mode ............................................................................ 6-13
♦ Relay-sub Mode Setting Procedure................................................................ 6-14
♦ Registering the Sub-display Data ................................................................... 6-14
♦ [Relay-sub] Dialog .......................................................................................... 6-15
♦ Setting for “Sub-display” in the [Relay] Dialog ................................................ 6-16
♦ Display Area Part for Relay-sub Mode ........................................................... 6-17
♦ Roll Up/Roll Down Switch for Relay-sub Mode .............................................. 6-17
Calling Screens (Screen-call) .................................................................................... 6-18
♦ Outline of Screen-call Function ...................................................................... 6-18
♦ [Relay] Dialog for Screen-call ......................................................................... 6-19
♦ Screen Block Editing ...................................................................................... 6-19
5
Contents
Message Mode...................................................................................................................6-20
Outline ........................................................................................................................6-20
♦ How to Specify the Message Number.............................................................6-20
♦ How to Specify the Block Number...................................................................6-21
Message Mode Setting Procedure .............................................................................6-22
Registering Messages ................................................................................................6-23
[Message] Dialog........................................................................................................6-23
♦ [Main] Tab Window .........................................................................................6-24
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window...............................................................................6-26
Display Area Parts......................................................................................................6-26
To Display Messages on Switches (or Lamps) ..........................................................6-27
Other Switches that can be Used in Message Mode..................................................6-27
♦ Roll Up, Roll Down ..........................................................................................6-27
♦ Plus Block, Minus Block, Block Call ................................................................6-27
Chapter 7
Entry Mode
Outline ..................................................................................................................................7-1
Entry Mode Usage................................................................................................................7-2
Direct Data Entry for Data Display Parts (= [Type: Data Display]) .......................................7-3
When the Entry Target is a Numerical Data Display Part: ...........................................7-3
♦ Setting Items .....................................................................................................7-3
When the Entry Target is a Character Display Part: ....................................................7-4
♦ Setting Items .....................................................................................................7-4
When the Entry Target is a Table Data Display Part: ..................................................7-5
♦ Setting Items .....................................................................................................7-5
How to Change Over Entry Targets (= [Type: Block]) ..........................................................7-6
♦ Setting Items .....................................................................................................7-6
[Type: Direct] ........................................................................................................................7-7
♦ Setting Items .....................................................................................................7-7
Data Reading Steps .....................................................................................................7-7
Entry Dialog Setting..............................................................................................................7-8
Type: Data Display/Block .............................................................................................7-8
♦ [Main] Tab Window ...........................................................................................7-8
♦ [Detail] Tab Window ........................................................................................7-14
When [Direct] is Chosen for [Type]: ...........................................................................7-16
♦ [Main] Tab Window .........................................................................................7-16
♦ [Detail] Tab Window ........................................................................................7-19
Entry Keys (Keypad) ..........................................................................................................7-20
Placement from the Parts File ....................................................................................7-20
♦ Notes...............................................................................................................7-20
Set and Place the Switches One by One ...................................................................7-21
Use the Graphic Library for Character Entry Key .......................................................7-22
♦ Placement of the Character Entry Switches....................................................7-22
♦ Graphic Library Edit ........................................................................................7-23
Switch Functions List..................................................................................................7-25
Entry Target (Numerical Data/Character/Table Data Display Part)....................................7-26
In the case of Numerical Data/Character Display Part ...............................................7-26
♦ [Main] Tab Window .........................................................................................7-26
♦ [Type] Tab Window .........................................................................................7-26
♦ Placement .......................................................................................................7-26
6
Contents
In the case of Table Display Part ............................................................................... 7-27
♦ [Table Data Display] Dialog ............................................................................ 7-27
♦ Placement....................................................................................................... 7-27
♦ [Type 1] Tab Window...................................................................................... 7-28
♦ [Type 2] Tab Window...................................................................................... 7-28
Entry Display...................................................................................................................... 7-29
♦ [Main] Tab Window ......................................................................................... 7-29
♦ [Type] Tab Window......................................................................................... 7-29
Entry Data Range .............................................................................................................. 7-30
♦ [Main] Tab Window ......................................................................................... 7-30
♦ [Type] Tab Window......................................................................................... 7-30
Data Block.......................................................................................................................... 7-31
Setting Items .............................................................................................................. 7-31
[Data Block] Dialog .................................................................................................... 7-32
♦ [Main1] Tab Window ....................................................................................... 7-32
♦ [Main2] Tab Window ....................................................................................... 7-33
Display Area............................................................................................................... 7-34
♦ Notes .............................................................................................................. 7-34
Switches..................................................................................................................... 7-34
♦ Notes .............................................................................................................. 7-34
Data Block Edit (Entry Target) ................................................................................... 7-34
Placement of Keypad on Overlap ...................................................................................... 7-35
Notes.......................................................................................................................... 7-35
♦ Setting on an overlap...................................................................................... 7-35
♦ Setting on the base screen............................................................................. 7-35
Overlap Calling and Deleting ..................................................................................... 7-36
Item Select Function .......................................................................................................... 7-37
Item Select Switch ..................................................................................................... 7-37
Item Select Memory Setting....................................................................................... 7-38
♦ When Entry Targets are Placed in Data Blocks: ........................................... 7-38
♦ When Entry Targets are Table Data Display Parts: ....................................... 7-40
Contents of Item Select Memory................................................................................ 7-41
♦ For Numerical Data/Character Display Parts as Entry Targets ...................... 7-41
♦ For Cells in Table Data Display Part as Entry Targets ................................... 7-42
Password Entry.................................................................................................................. 7-43
Setting Items .............................................................................................................. 7-43
Entry dialog ................................................................................................................ 7-43
Character Display (Password Entry).......................................................................... 7-44
♦ [Type] Tab Window......................................................................................... 7-44
♦ [Detail] Tab Window ....................................................................................... 7-44
How to Operate.......................................................................................................... 7-44
Chapter 8
Graph Display
Outline.................................................................................................................................. 8-1
Bar Graph Outline ........................................................................................................ 8-1
Pie Graph Outline ........................................................................................................ 8-2
Panel Meter Outline ..................................................................................................... 8-2
Statistic Graph Outline ................................................................................................. 8-3
Trend Graph Outline .................................................................................................... 8-3
Closed Area Graph Outline.......................................................................................... 8-4
7
Contents
Bar Graph.............................................................................................................................8-5
[Bar Graph] Dialog........................................................................................................8-5
♦ [Main] Tab Window ...........................................................................................8-5
♦ [Setting] Tab Window ........................................................................................8-6
♦ [Disp. Prop.] Tab Window .................................................................................8-7
♦ [Alarm Setting] Tab Window..............................................................................8-8
♦ [Alarm Color] Tab Window ................................................................................8-9
♦ [Alarm Setting 2] Tab Window.........................................................................8-10
Examples with Alarm Setting......................................................................................8-10
Pie Graph ...........................................................................................................................8-11
[Pie Graph] Dialog ......................................................................................................8-11
♦ [Main] Tab Window .........................................................................................8-11
♦ [Setting] Tab Window ......................................................................................8-12
♦ [Disp. Prop.] Tab Window ...............................................................................8-13
♦ [Alarm Setting] Tab Window............................................................................8-14
♦ [Alarm Color] Tab Window ..............................................................................8-15
Examples with Alarm Setting......................................................................................8-16
Panel Meter ........................................................................................................................8-17
[Panel Meter] Dialog ...................................................................................................8-17
♦ [Main] Tab Window .........................................................................................8-17
♦ [Setting] Tab Window ......................................................................................8-18
♦ [Disp. Prop.] Tab Window ...............................................................................8-19
♦ [Alarm Setting] Tab Window............................................................................8-20
♦ [Alarm Color] Tab Window ..............................................................................8-20
Examples with Alarm Setting......................................................................................8-21
Statistic Graph (Bar, Pie)....................................................................................................8-22
Setting Items...............................................................................................................8-22
[Stat. Bar Graph] [Stat. Pie Graph] Dialog..................................................................8-22
♦ [Main] Tab Window .........................................................................................8-22
♦ [Setting] Tab Window ......................................................................................8-23
♦ [Data 0 (to 7) Prop.] Tab Windows..................................................................8-23
Numerical Data Display (% Display)...........................................................................8-24
♦ Notes...............................................................................................................8-24
Trend Graph .......................................................................................................................8-25
[Trend Graph] Dialog ..................................................................................................8-25
♦ Memory Setting for Trend Graph ....................................................................8-25
♦ [Main] Tab Window .........................................................................................8-25
♦ [Setting 1] Tab Window ...................................................................................8-26
♦ [Setting 2] Tab Window ...................................................................................8-29
♦ [Setting 3] Tab Window ...................................................................................8-30
♦ [0] to [15] Tab Window ....................................................................................8-31
[ Use XY Parameters].............................................................................................8-32
[ Use XY Parameters] ............................................................................................8-33
Asynchronous Display of Multiple Trend Graphs .......................................................8-34
♦ Notes on Setting..............................................................................................8-35
8
Contents
Closed Area Graph ............................................................................................................ 8-36
[Closed Area Graph] Dialog ....................................................................................... 8-36
♦ [Main] Tab Window ......................................................................................... 8-36
♦ [Display Property] Tab Window ...................................................................... 8-37
♦ [Alarm Setting] Tab Window ........................................................................... 8-38
♦ [Alarm Color] Tab Window.............................................................................. 8-39
Notes.......................................................................................................................... 8-40
Chapter 9
Graphic Display
Displaying Graphics ............................................................................................................. 9-1
Graphic Mode ...................................................................................................................... 9-2
Outline.......................................................................................................................... 9-2
Setting Items ................................................................................................................ 9-3
[Graphic] Dialog ........................................................................................................... 9-4
♦ [Command: Internal] ......................................................................................... 9-4
♦ [Command: External] ........................................................................................ 9-5
Display Area Parts ....................................................................................................... 9-6
♦ [Mode Display Area] Dialog .............................................................................. 9-6
♦ Changing the Display Area Size ....................................................................... 9-7
Switch .......................................................................................................................... 9-7
♦ Notes on Setting ............................................................................................... 9-7
Graphic Relay Mode ............................................................................................................ 9-8
Outline.......................................................................................................................... 9-8
Setting Items ................................................................................................................ 9-9
[Graphic Relay] Dialog ............................................................................................... 9-10
Display Area Parts ..................................................................................................... 9-15
♦ [Mode Display Area] Dialog ............................................................................ 9-15
Graphic Colors ................................................................................................................... 9-16
Display Modes ........................................................................................................... 9-16
XORed Colors............................................................................................................ 9-17
Canceling the XOR Display (Transparent Pattern) ............................................................ 9-18
Screen Edit ................................................................................................................ 9-19
♦ Transparent Setting ........................................................................................ 9-19
♦ Notes .............................................................................................................. 9-20
Chapter 10 Sampling
Outline................................................................................................................................ 10-1
Sampling Mode Types ....................................................................................................... 10-1
Trend Sampling.......................................................................................................... 10-2
♦ Setting Items................................................................................................... 10-2
Data Sampling ........................................................................................................... 10-3
♦ Setting Items................................................................................................... 10-3
Bit Sampling............................................................................................................... 10-4
♦ Setting Items................................................................................................... 10-4
Relay Sampling.......................................................................................................... 10-5
♦ Setting Items................................................................................................... 10-5
Alarm Display............................................................................................................. 10-5
♦ Setting Items................................................................................................... 10-8
9
Contents
Buffering Area ....................................................................................................................10-9
[Buffering Area Setting] Dialog .................................................................................10-10
♦ Info. Output Memory .....................................................................................10-10
♦ [0] to [11] Tab Window ..................................................................................10-11
Buffering Area Capacity............................................................................................10-17
Buffering Area Setting Example ...............................................................................10-18
Trend Sampling ................................................................................................................10-19
Setting Items.............................................................................................................10-19
Trend Sampling ........................................................................................................10-19
♦ [Main] Tab Window .......................................................................................10-19
♦ [Setting 1] Tab Window .................................................................................10-20
♦ [Setting 2] Tab Window .................................................................................10-22
♦ [Setting 3] Tab Window .................................................................................10-22
♦ [0] to [15] Tab Window ..................................................................................10-23
Trend Sampling Area and Plot Points ......................................................................10-25
Data Display Function for Trend Sampling...............................................................10-26
♦ Sample Count Display...................................................................................10-26
♦ Sample Time Display ....................................................................................10-26
♦ Sample Buffer Mean, Min., Max. and Total Displays ....................................10-27
Switches for Trend Sampling....................................................................................10-29
♦ Notes on Setting............................................................................................10-29
♦ Sampled Data Display By Switches ..............................................................10-30
Data Sampling..................................................................................................................10-31
Setting Items.............................................................................................................10-31
[Data Sampling] Dialog ............................................................................................10-31
Sampling Display Area .............................................................................................10-34
♦ [Main] Tab Window .......................................................................................10-34
♦ [Detail] Tab Window ......................................................................................10-35
♦ Size Setting of Sampling Display Area Part ..................................................10-39
Data Display Function for Data Sampling.................................................................10-40
♦ Sample Count Display...................................................................................10-40
♦ Sample Time Display ....................................................................................10-40
♦ Sample Buffer Mean, Min., Max. and Total Displays ....................................10-41
Switches for Data Sampling .....................................................................................10-42
♦ Notes on Setting............................................................................................10-42
♦ Sampled Data Display By Switches ..............................................................10-43
Bit Sampling .....................................................................................................................10-44
Setting Items.............................................................................................................10-44
[Bit Sampling] Dialog ................................................................................................10-44
♦ [Main 1] Tab Window ....................................................................................10-44
♦ [Main 2] Tab Window ....................................................................................10-47
♦ [Char. Prop. ON/OFF] Tab Window ..............................................................10-48
Display Area Parts....................................................................................................10-49
♦ Notes on Placement......................................................................................10-49
♦ [Mode Display Area] Dialog...........................................................................10-49
Data Display Function for Bit Sampling ....................................................................10-50
♦ Sample Count Display...................................................................................10-50
♦ Sample Time Display ....................................................................................10-50
♦ Sample Status Display ..................................................................................10-51
10
Contents
Switches for Bit Sampling ........................................................................................ 10-52
♦ Notes on Setting ........................................................................................... 10-52
♦ Sampled Data Display By Switches ............................................................. 10-53
Print.......................................................................................................................... 10-54
♦ Sample Print ................................................................................................. 10-54
♦ Real Time Print ............................................................................................. 10-55
Relay Sampling................................................................................................................ 10-56
Setting Items ............................................................................................................ 10-56
[Relay Sampling] Dialog .......................................................................................... 10-56
♦ [Main] Tab Window ....................................................................................... 10-56
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window ............................................................................ 10-57
♦ [Detail] Tab Window ..................................................................................... 10-57
Display Area............................................................................................................. 10-58
Switches for Relay Sampling ................................................................................... 10-58
♦ Notes on Setting ........................................................................................... 10-58
Differences between Relay Mode & Relay Sampling .............................................. 10-59
♦ Message Display .......................................................................................... 10-59
♦ Setting Procedure ......................................................................................... 10-60
Alarm Display................................................................................................................... 10-62
Setting Items ............................................................................................................ 10-62
[Alarm Display] Dialog.............................................................................................. 10-62
♦ [Main] Tab Window ....................................................................................... 10-62
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window ............................................................................ 10-64
Display Area ............................................................................................................ 10-65
♦ Notes on Setting ........................................................................................... 10-65
Switches for Alarm Display ...................................................................................... 10-65
♦ Notes on Setting ........................................................................................... 10-65
Other Function ......................................................................................................... 10-66
Alarm Display Internal Memory ($s)......................................................................... 10-67
Command in Bits for Alarm Display ......................................................................... 10-68
Time Display Items .......................................................................................................... 10-70
Setting Procedure .................................................................................................... 10-70
Example of Time Display Item ................................................................................. 10-70
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
Outline................................................................................................................................ 11-1
[Time Display] Part............................................................................................................. 11-2
[Time Display] Dialog ................................................................................................. 11-2
♦ [Main] Tab Window ......................................................................................... 11-2
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window .............................................................................. 11-3
[Calendar] Part................................................................................................................... 11-4
Display on the Computer ........................................................................................... 11-4
[Calendar] Dialog ....................................................................................................... 11-4
♦ [Main] Tab Window ......................................................................................... 11-4
♦ [Year] [Month] [Day] [Hour] [Minute] [Second] Tab Window ........................... 11-4
♦ [Week] Tab Window ....................................................................................... 11-6
♦ [Day-of-Week Message Setting] Tab Window ................................................ 11-6
SRAM/Clock Setting .......................................................................................................... 11-7
Calendar Memory Setting .................................................................................................. 11-7
Time Display Format Setting.............................................................................................. 11-8
11
Contents
[Time Display Format] Dialog .....................................................................................11-8
♦ Example of Time Display Item ........................................................................11-9
Correcting Calendar Data.................................................................................................11-10
Correcting Calendar Data with Bits in the Read Area ..............................................11-10
Correcting with Macro Command .............................................................................11-11
Correcting on the Main Menu Screen.......................................................................11-12
Chapter 12 Memo Pad
Outline ................................................................................................................................12-1
Setting Items ......................................................................................................................12-2
[Memo Pad] Dialog.............................................................................................................12-2
Display Area Parts..............................................................................................................12-2
Switches for Memo Pad Function.......................................................................................12-3
Notes on Switch Setting .............................................................................................12-3
Memo Pad Usage...............................................................................................................12-4
Memo Pad Data Storage Area ...........................................................................................12-5
Memo Pad Storage Area Size ....................................................................................12-5
Saving in RAM............................................................................................................12-5
Saving in a CF Card ...................................................................................................12-5
Saving in SRAM .........................................................................................................12-5
♦ [SRAM/Clock Setting] Dialog ..........................................................................12-5
Timing in Saving Data ........................................................................................................12-6
Notes on SRAM Use ..................................................................................................12-6
System Memory ($s) ..........................................................................................................12-6
Chapter 13 Macro
Notes on Macro Commands...............................................................................................13-1
Macro Set-up......................................................................................................................13-2
Macro Commands ..............................................................................................................13-3
Macro Command List .................................................................................................13-3
Arithmetic Operations .................................................................................................13-6
Logical Operations......................................................................................................13-7
Statistic Operations ....................................................................................................13-8
Bit Operations.............................................................................................................13-9
Conversion ...............................................................................................................13-10
Transmit....................................................................................................................13-12
Comparison ..............................................................................................................13-13
Macro Operations .....................................................................................................13-13
FROM .......................................................................................................................13-15
♦ Setting Position .............................................................................................13-15
Printer .......................................................................................................................13-16
Others.......................................................................................................................13-17
♦ Comment.......................................................................................................13-17
♦ Brightness Adjustment ..................................................................................13-17
♦ Trend Sampling.............................................................................................13-17
♦ Read from User Log FA-M3 ..........................................................................13-18
♦ System Call ...................................................................................................13-19
Indirect Memory Designation....................................................................................13-30
12
Contents
Initial Macro...................................................................................................................... 13-32
Setting Items ............................................................................................................ 13-32
Macro Setting........................................................................................................... 13-32
♦ [General] Tab Window .................................................................................. 13-32
Global Macro.................................................................................................................... 13-33
Setting Items ............................................................................................................ 13-33
Macro Setting........................................................................................................... 13-33
♦ [General] Tab Window .................................................................................. 13-33
Macro Execution ...................................................................................................... 13-33
Event Timer Macro........................................................................................................... 13-34
Setting Items ............................................................................................................ 13-34
Macro Setting........................................................................................................... 13-34
♦ [Event Timer Macro] Tab Window ................................................................ 13-34
Notes........................................................................................................................ 13-34
Interval Timer ................................................................................................................... 13-35
Setting Items ............................................................................................................ 13-36
Interval Timer Setting............................................................................................... 13-36
Interval Timer Examples .......................................................................................... 13-39
♦ (1) Screen Change Switch that must be Held Down for Five Seconds ........ 13-39
♦ Graphic Movement on the Screen................................................................ 13-40
Macro Mode ..................................................................................................................... 13-42
Setting Items ............................................................................................................ 13-42
Macro Mode Setting................................................................................................. 13-42
Chapter 14 Data Sheets
Outline................................................................................................................................ 14-1
Printing Data Sheet............................................................................................................ 14-2
Command from Read Area ........................................................................................ 14-2
♦ Printing Procedure .......................................................................................... 14-2
Macro Command ....................................................................................................... 14-3
♦ Printing Procedure .......................................................................................... 14-3
Printed Data Sheet............................................................................................................. 14-4
Chapter 15 Print
Outline................................................................................................................................ 15-1
Printer Setting .................................................................................................................... 15-2
[Main] Tab Window .................................................................................................... 15-2
[Serial Port] Tab Window ........................................................................................... 15-4
Hard Copy.......................................................................................................................... 15-5
Sample Print ...................................................................................................................... 15-5
Data Sheet Print................................................................................................................. 15-5
Sato’s Barcode Printer MR400 .......................................................................................... 15-6
Memory Card ............................................................................................................. 15-6
Card Slot Number Setting and Memory Card Formatting .......................................... 15-6
Format Table Types................................................................................................... 15-7
♦ MR400 Format Table (Register) ..................................................................... 15-7
♦ MR400 Format Table (Call) ............................................................................ 15-7
Format Table (Register Setting)................................................................................. 15-8
♦ Setting Example ............................................................................................. 15-9
13
Contents
MR400 Format Table (Call Setting)..........................................................................15-11
♦ Setting Example 1 .........................................................................................15-12
♦ Setting Example 2 .........................................................................................15-12
Macro........................................................................................................................15-14
♦ [MR_REG].....................................................................................................15-14
♦ [MR_OUT] .....................................................................................................15-15
♦ Barcode Type “CODE 39” .............................................................................15-15
Chapter 16 Barcode
Outline ................................................................................................................................16-1
Barcode Setting..................................................................................................................16-2
[Barcode Setting] Dialog.............................................................................................16-2
♦ I/F Memory ......................................................................................................16-4
Barcode Setting Example...................................................................................................16-5
Connecting MONITOUCH and Barcode Reader ................................................................16-6
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
Outline ................................................................................................................................17-1
Setting Items for Animation ................................................................................................17-2
Structure of Animation........................................................................................................17-3
Registration of Animation ...................................................................................................17-4
[Animation] Area .........................................................................................................17-4
♦ Setting Procedure ...........................................................................................17-4
Frame Edit ..................................................................................................................17-7
To Check the Registered Contents: ..........................................................................17-8
♦ [Test] Field ......................................................................................................17-8
[Animation] Dialog ..............................................................................................................17-9
[Main] Tab Window.....................................................................................................17-9
[Animation Table] Tab Window.................................................................................17-12
♦ [Display] Field................................................................................................17-13
Notes on Animation ..........................................................................................................17-16
About Transparency .................................................................................................17-16
♦ Transparent Color Setting .............................................................................17-16
♦ Transparent Color Setting for the Screen .....................................................17-17
Structure of Layers ...................................................................................................17-18
Limitations ...............................................................................................................17-19
Example of the Animation Setting ....................................................................................17-20
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Outline ................................................................................................................................18-1
Easy Display by Connecting to Video.........................................................................18-1
Superimpose ..............................................................................................................18-2
Up to Four Channels are Available to Display Simultaneously ..................................18-2
Snap Function ............................................................................................................18-3
JPEG Display .............................................................................................................18-4
Double-click Operation ...............................................................................................18-4
Setting Items for Video Display ..........................................................................................18-5
Video Setting ......................................................................................................................18-5
14
Contents
[Video] Dialog..................................................................................................................... 18-6
[Main] Tab Window .................................................................................................... 18-6
[Display] Tab Window ................................................................................................ 18-6
[Movement] Tab Window ........................................................................................... 18-8
[Snap] Tab Window.................................................................................................. 18-11
Display Area..................................................................................................................... 18-13
Notes When Placing ................................................................................................ 18-13
Switches........................................................................................................................... 18-13
Macro ............................................................................................................................... 18-14
Contents of the Default for the Video Screen .......................................................... 18-14
Macro Setting........................................................................................................... 18-15
Superimpose (Overlap).................................................................................................... 18-18
Setting Procedure .................................................................................................... 18-19
Calling Methods ....................................................................................................... 18-20
♦ The Same as Usual Overlap: ...................................................................... 18-20
♦ Calling from the Video Items: ...................................................................... 18-20
Notes........................................................................................................................ 18-21
Settings for the Video Menu Window............................................................................... 18-22
Setting Procedure .................................................................................................... 18-22
[Tool] Menu Setting.................................................................................................. 18-23
Confirming the Registered Video Menu ................................................................... 18-24
Calling Methods ....................................................................................................... 18-24
♦ Clicking the video display ............................................................................. 18-24
♦ Calling with switches or an external command............................................. 18-24
Superimpose Setting................................................................................................ 18-24
Notes and Limitations on Video Display .......................................................................... 18-25
Placement ................................................................................................................ 18-25
♦ V710iT (VGA type) ....................................................................................... 18-25
♦ V7xxiS (SVGA type) ..................................................................................... 18-27
Display Speed.......................................................................................................... 18-28
♦ V710iT (VGA type) ....................................................................................... 18-28
♦ SVGA type (V7xxiS) ..................................................................................... 18-30
Display Priority ......................................................................................................... 18-31
Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7 Only)
Outline................................................................................................................................ 19-1
Easy Display of JPEG File ......................................................................................... 19-1
Displaying Video Image as JPEG File ....................................................................... 19-2
Setting Items for JPEG Display.......................................................................................... 19-3
Displaying the Prepared JPEG File ................................................................................... 19-4
JPEG file Available to Display.................................................................................... 19-4
[JPEG Display] Dialog................................................................................................ 19-4
Display Area............................................................................................................... 19-5
♦ Notes When Placing ....................................................................................... 19-5
Switches..................................................................................................................... 19-6
CF Card Manager ...................................................................................................... 19-6
Displaying as Wallpaper .................................................................................................... 19-7
JPEG file Available to Display.................................................................................... 19-7
[Wallpaper Setting] Tab Window ([Screen Setting] Dialog) ....................................... 19-7
CF Card Manager ...................................................................................................... 19-8
15
Contents
Displaying Video Image......................................................................................................19-9
JPEG file Available to Display ....................................................................................19-9
[JPEG Display] Dialog ................................................................................................19-9
Display Area ...............................................................................................................19-9
Switches ...................................................................................................................19-10
Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function
Outline ................................................................................................................................20-1
WAV File ............................................................................................................................20-2
WAV File Format ........................................................................................................20-2
WAV File Name ..........................................................................................................20-2
WAV Folder ................................................................................................................20-2
Sound Item .........................................................................................................................20-3
Setting Items...............................................................................................................20-3
[Sound] Dialog ............................................................................................................20-3
♦ [Main] Tab Window .........................................................................................20-3
♦ [Replay Sequence] Tab Window.....................................................................20-4
♦ [Detail] Tab Window ........................................................................................20-4
Setting Example .........................................................................................................20-5
Replaying a WAV File Linking to Animation .......................................................................20-6
Setting Items...............................................................................................................20-6
[Animation] Dialog ......................................................................................................20-6
♦ [Main] Tab Window .........................................................................................20-6
♦ [Animation Table] Tab Window .......................................................................20-6
Replaying a WAV File Linking to Sampling ........................................................................20-7
Setting Items...............................................................................................................20-7
Buffering Area Setting ...............................................................................................20-7
Message Edit..............................................................................................................20-8
Sound Setting.....................................................................................................................20-9
Output of Sound Information ($s) .......................................................................................20-9
Saving a WAV File to a CF Card......................................................................................20-10
CF Card Setting........................................................................................................20-10
Saving to a CF Card .................................................................................................20-10
Chapter 21 Recipe Function
What is Recipe Function? ..................................................................................................21-1
Types..................................................................................................................................21-1
Recipe Function by CF Card (V7 Only) ......................................................................21-1
Memory Manager Function.........................................................................................21-2
Data Management by Non-volatile Memory ($L, $LD) of SRAM................................21-2
Backup Function using the Flash ROM Area .............................................................21-2
Chapter 22 Data Logging
Outline ................................................................................................................................22-1
Storage Target ...................................................................................................................22-2
Types..........................................................................................................................22-2
How to Recognize a Storage Target: ........................................................................22-3
♦ Setting Items ...................................................................................................22-4
16
Contents
CF Card and SRAM Area .................................................................................................. 22-5
CF Card ..................................................................................................................... 22-5
♦ Memory Capacity............................................................................................ 22-5
♦ Lifetime ........................................................................................................... 22-5
SRAM or SRAM Cassette.......................................................................................... 22-5
♦ Memory Capacity............................................................................................ 22-5
♦ Lifetime ........................................................................................................... 22-6
SRAM Memory Card.................................................................................................. 22-6
♦ Memory Capacity............................................................................................ 22-6
♦ Lifetime ........................................................................................................... 22-6
Calculation of File Size .............................................................................................. 22-7
When Storing to a CF Card: .............................................................................................. 22-8
Setting Procedure ...................................................................................................... 22-8
Buffering Area Setting and Memory Card Setting...................................................... 22-9
Cache Setting ............................................................................................................ 22-9
Setting and Importing Procedures on the V Series.................................................... 22-9
♦ Note ................................................................................................................ 22-9
♦ Formatting .................................................................................................... 22-10
Importing Data ......................................................................................................... 22-10
♦ When Using Macro: ..................................................................................... 22-10
♦ When Using Memory Card Editor: ............................................................... 22-10
When Storing in Built-in SRAM or SRAM Cassette: ....................................................... 22-11
Setting Procedure .................................................................................................... 22-11
Buffering Area Setting and Memory Card Setting.................................................... 22-11
Formatting Built-in SRAM or a SRAM Cassette....................................................... 22-12
♦ The First Format: Initialization ...................................................................... 22-12
♦ The Second Format: Formatting in the Memory Card Mode ........................ 22-12
Setting and Importing Procedures on the V Series.................................................. 22-13
♦ Note .............................................................................................................. 22-13
Importing Data ......................................................................................................... 22-13
When Storing to CREC: .................................................................................................. 22-14
Setting Procedure .................................................................................................... 22-14
Buffering Area Setting and Memory Card Setting.................................................... 22-14
Memory Card Mode ................................................................................................. 22-15
Setting and Importing Procedures on the V Series.................................................. 22-15
♦ Note .............................................................................................................. 22-15
Importing Data ......................................................................................................... 22-16
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Outline................................................................................................................................ 23-1
Connection................................................................................................................. 23-1
Functions ................................................................................................................... 23-2
Before Using the CF Card Function................................................................................... 23-7
Recommended CF Cards .......................................................................................... 23-7
Required Environment ............................................................................................... 23-7
♦ When Connecting to Your Personal Computer: ............................................ 23-7
♦ When Connecting to the V7 Series: .............................................................. 23-8
Notes.......................................................................................................................... 23-8
Contents of a CF Card ....................................................................................................... 23-9
Access Folder Name Setting ................................................................................... 23-10
17
Contents
Saving Multiple Screen Data ............................................................................................23-11
Writing from a PC to a CF Card................................................................................23-11
Reading from a CF Card to a PC .............................................................................23-13
Auto Uploading of Screen Data........................................................................................23-14
Writing from a PC to a CF Card................................................................................23-14
♦ Storage Target on a CF Card........................................................................23-14
Operation on the V7 Series ......................................................................................23-15
♦ Notes on Writing............................................................................................23-15
Saving Sampling Data (Data Logging) .............................................................................23-16
Screen Data File Setting...........................................................................................23-16
♦ Setting Items .................................................................................................23-16
♦ Available Macro Commands .........................................................................23-17
Operation on the V7 Series ......................................................................................23-18
♦ Note...............................................................................................................23-18
Cache .......................................................................................................................23-19
♦ Cache Function .............................................................................................23-19
♦ Adjustment of Cache Size.............................................................................23-19
♦ Cache Action.................................................................................................23-20
♦ Alarm Sample................................................................................................23-20
♦ Conditions of Output to a CF Card................................................................23-21
How to Import to Your Personal Computer...............................................................23-21
♦ When Creating a CSV File: ..........................................................................23-21
♦ When Using Memory Card Editor: ...............................................................23-21
Transferring Recipe Data .................................................................................................23-22
CF Card → V7 Series...............................................................................................23-22
♦ Importing All Contents of a CSV File.............................................................23-22
♦ Importing a Part of the Contents of a CSV File .............................................23-23
CF Card ← V7 Series ...............................................................................................23-25
Transferring Recipe Data by the Memory Manager Function...........................................23-27
Screen Data File Setting...........................................................................................23-27
Operation on the V7 Series ......................................................................................23-27
♦ Storage Target on a CF Card........................................................................23-27
How to Import to Your Personal Computer...............................................................23-28
Storing a Pattern (Bitmap) File .........................................................................................23-29
Screen Data File Setting...........................................................................................23-29
Importing to a CF Card .............................................................................................23-29
♦ Storage Target on a CF Card........................................................................23-30
Operation on the V7 Series ......................................................................................23-30
Storing a JPEG Data ........................................................................................................23-31
Screen Data File Setting...........................................................................................23-31
♦ [JPEG] Folder................................................................................................23-31
♦ JPEG File Name ...........................................................................................23-31
Importing to a CF Card .............................................................................................23-31
♦ Storage Target on a CF Card........................................................................23-32
Operation on the V7 Series ......................................................................................23-32
Saving a Video Image ......................................................................................................23-33
Storage Target on a CF Card ...................................................................................23-33
Saving a Screen Image ....................................................................................................23-33
Available Macro Commands.....................................................................................23-33
18
Contents
Backing up Memo Pad Data ............................................................................................ 23-34
Operation on the V7 Series...................................................................................... 23-34
♦ When to Save: ............................................................................................. 23-34
Storage Target on a CF Card .................................................................................. 23-34
Multi-Language Display Selection.................................................................................... 23-35
Screen Data File Setting .......................................................................................... 23-35
♦ Setting Items................................................................................................. 23-35
♦ Available Macro Commands......................................................................... 23-35
Importing to a CF Card ............................................................................................ 23-36
♦ Storage Target on a CF Card ....................................................................... 23-37
Operation on the V7 Series...................................................................................... 23-37
Storing a Sound (WAV) File............................................................................................. 23-38
Screen Data File Setting .......................................................................................... 23-38
♦ [WAV] Folder ................................................................................................ 23-38
♦ WAV File Name ............................................................................................ 23-38
Importing to a CF Card ............................................................................................ 23-39
♦ Storage Target on a CF Card ....................................................................... 23-39
Operation on the V7 Series...................................................................................... 23-39
Backing up SRAM Data ................................................................................................... 23-40
Web Server ...................................................................................................................... 23-40
Attribute Table.................................................................................................................. 23-40
Attribute Table Window............................................................................................ 23-40
♦ Start .............................................................................................................. 23-40
♦ Quit ............................................................................................................... 23-41
[SMPL_CSV]............................................................................................................ 23-41
♦ To Check/Change the Setting: .................................................................... 23-42
♦ CSV File Examples....................................................................................... 23-44
[LD_RECIPE/LD_RECIPESEL/SV_RECIPE] .......................................................... 23-45
♦ Registration Number..................................................................................... 23-46
♦ To Check/Change the Setting: .................................................................... 23-47
CF Card Manager ............................................................................................................ 23-48
Start and Quit........................................................................................................... 23-48
♦ Start .............................................................................................................. 23-48
♦ Quit ............................................................................................................... 23-49
Writing to a CF Card ................................................................................................ 23-49
Converting a File (BIN file) on a CF Card ................................................................ 23-50
♦ Property of a BIN File ................................................................................... 23-51
Other Functions ....................................................................................................... 23-52
♦ CF Card Copy............................................................................................... 23-52
♦ Backing up a CF Card .................................................................................. 23-53
To Check the Status of the CF Card ($s): ....................................................................... 23-54
List ........................................................................................................................... 23-54
Detail........................................................................................................................ 23-54
Chapter 24 SRAM
Outline................................................................................................................................ 24-1
SRAM Supported Types .................................................................................................... 24-2
SRAM Setting Procedure................................................................................................... 24-2
19
Contents
SRAM Memory Capacity ....................................................................................................24-3
Contents in the SRAM Area .......................................................................................24-3
♦ The Maximum Available Size by Function ......................................................24-3
♦ Calculation of Size ..........................................................................................24-4
Lifetime .......................................................................................................................24-5
Formatting SRAM (Initialization).........................................................................................24-5
Settings for Each Function .................................................................................................24-6
[SRAM/Clock Setting] Dialog......................................................................................24-6
Memory Card Emulation Area ....................................................................................24-7
♦ Data Protection When a Power Failure Occurs ..............................................24-7
♦ Using Memory Card Editor (Option)................................................................24-7
Storage Area for Memo Pad.......................................................................................24-8
♦ Save Timing ....................................................................................................24-8
♦ System Memory ($s) .......................................................................................24-8
♦ Notes on Power Failure...................................................................................24-8
Nonvolatility Memory (Word)/(DWord)........................................................................24-9
♦ Difference between Word and Double-word ...................................................24-9
♦ Non-volatile Memory Setting ...........................................................................24-9
♦ System Memory ($s) .....................................................................................24-10
♦ Data Protection When a Power Failure Occurs ............................................24-10
Errors on the V series.......................................................................................................24-10
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Outline ................................................................................................................................25-1
Memory Manager Function.........................................................................................25-2
Data Logging Function ...............................................................................................25-3
Memory Card Editor ...................................................................................................25-4
Recognition of Storage Media ............................................................................................25-5
Memory Manager Function.........................................................................................25-5
Data Logging Function ...............................................................................................25-6
Setting Items...............................................................................................................25-6
♦ Modular Jack...................................................................................................25-6
♦ SRAM/Clock Setting........................................................................................25-6
♦ Buffering Area Setting .....................................................................................25-6
SRAM and CF Card Area...................................................................................................25-7
SRAM or SRAM Cassette ..........................................................................................25-7
♦ Memory Capacity ............................................................................................25-7
♦ Lifetime............................................................................................................25-7
SRAM Memory Card ..................................................................................................25-8
♦ Memory Capacity ............................................................................................25-8
♦ Lifetime............................................................................................................25-8
CF Card ......................................................................................................................25-8
♦ Memory Capacity ............................................................................................25-8
♦ Lifetime............................................................................................................25-8
Calculating the File Size .............................................................................................25-9
Memory Card Emulation Area Map ....................................................................................25-9
Memory Card Mode Setting Procedure............................................................................25-10
Memory Card Setting .......................................................................................................25-11
[Memory Card] Dialog...............................................................................................25-11
Memory Card Setting Example.................................................................................25-15
20
Contents
Memory Card Mode ......................................................................................................... 25-16
[Memory Card] Dialog .............................................................................................. 25-16
♦ [Main] Tab Window ....................................................................................... 25-16
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window ............................................................................ 25-17
Display Area Parts ................................................................................................... 25-18
♦ Notes on Setting ........................................................................................... 25-18
♦ Display Area Function .................................................................................. 25-18
Data Display for Memory Manager Function ........................................................... 25-19
♦ [Memory Card No.] [Memory Card File No.] [Memory Card Record No.] ..... 25-19
♦ [Memory Card Name] [Memory Card File Name]
[Memory Card Record Name]....................................................................... 25-20
Switches for Memory Manager Function ................................................................. 25-20
♦ Switch Setting Procedure ............................................................................. 25-20
Notes on Switch Setting........................................................................................... 25-21
♦ Examples of Switch Operations.................................................................... 25-22
Entry Key (Entry Mode) Setting ............................................................................... 25-23
♦ Placing Entry Keys on Multi-overlap ............................................................. 25-23
♦ Placing Entry Keys on Call-Overlap ............................................................. 25-25
♦ Placing Entry Keys on Normal Overlap ........................................................ 25-26
♦ Placing Entry Keys on Base Screen ............................................................. 25-27
Setting and Importing Procedures on the V Series.......................................................... 25-28
Chapter 26 Ethernet Function
Outline................................................................................................................................ 26-1
Screen Data Transfer................................................................................................. 26-1
Ethernet Communication with PLC and Other V Series ............................................ 26-2
E-Mail......................................................................................................................... 26-3
Web Server ................................................................................................................ 26-4
Chapter 27 E-Mail
Outline................................................................................................................................ 27-1
Setting Items ...................................................................................................................... 27-2
IP Address/Gateway Setting .............................................................................................. 27-2
When Using a Network Table: .................................................................................. 27-2
When Not Using a Network Table: ............................................................................ 27-2
E-Mail Setting..................................................................................................................... 27-3
Receiver’s Mail Address Setting ........................................................................................ 27-4
Buffering Area Setting................................................................................................ 27-4
Receiver’s Mail Address ............................................................................................ 27-4
Message Edit ..................................................................................................................... 27-5
System Memory ($s).......................................................................................................... 27-5
Chapter 28 Web Server
Outline................................................................................................................................ 28-1
Notes.................................................................................................................................. 28-4
Browser Setting.......................................................................................................... 28-4
Files Available to Use on the Web Server ................................................................. 28-5
21
Contents
Table Data Display Monitor ................................................................................................28-6
Creating SHT Files .....................................................................................................28-6
♦ Procedure........................................................................................................28-6
Saving on a CF Card ..................................................................................................28-8
♦ When Using CF Card Manager: .....................................................................28-8
♦ When Using Explorer: ....................................................................................28-9
Accessing with a Web Browser ................................................................................28-10
Memory Access................................................................................................................28-11
Memory Access Flowchart .......................................................................................28-11
CGI Function (MemAcs.cgi) .....................................................................................28-11
Memory Access Parameter List................................................................................28-12
Memory Access Example .........................................................................................28-13
♦ Creating HTM Files .......................................................................................28-13
♦ Saving on a CF card: ...................................................................................28-14
♦ Accessing with a Web Browser.....................................................................28-14
JPEG File Display ............................................................................................................28-16
When Not Using a HTM file: ....................................................................................28-16
When Using a HTM file: ...........................................................................................28-17
♦ Creating HTM Files .......................................................................................28-17
♦ Saving on a CF card: ...................................................................................28-18
♦ Accessing with a Web Browser.....................................................................28-18
Chapter 29 Language Selection
Outline ................................................................................................................................29-1
Multi-language Selection (for V7) ...............................................................................29-1
Displayed Character Selection (V Series) ..................................................................29-2
Multi-language Screen (for V6)...................................................................................29-2
Language Selection Types and Fonts................................................................................29-3
V7 Series (Change in RUN mode) .............................................................................29-3
♦ When Using a CF card (Multi-language selection): ........................................29-3
♦ When Not Using a CF Card (Displayed character selection): ........................29-3
V6 Series ....................................................................................................................29-3
♦ When Changing in RUN mode (Displayed character selection): ...................29-3
♦ When Changing Screen Data (Multi-language screen): .................................29-4
Setting Procedure...............................................................................................................29-4
Multi-Language Selection (for V7) ..............................................................................29-4
Displayed Character Selection (for V Series) .............................................................29-5
Multi-language Screen (for V6)...................................................................................29-5
Multi-language Selection ....................................................................................................29-6
Font Setting ................................................................................................................29-6
Language 1 Edit .........................................................................................................29-7
Multi-language Edit.....................................................................................................29-7
♦ When Using the Multi-language Window: ......................................................29-7
♦ When Editing a CSV File: ...............................................................................29-9
Checking the Screen ................................................................................................29-13
♦ Checking Procedure......................................................................................29-13
♦ Items Supported for Language Display
(and Language Selection Display) ................................................................29-13
Macro Command [CHG_LANG] ...............................................................................29-14
22
Contents
CF Card Manager .................................................................................................... 29-15
♦ How to Store on a CF Card .......................................................................... 29-15
♦ Structure in the CF Card............................................................................... 29-17
English/Western Europe HK Gothic and English/Western Europe HK Times ......... 29-18
♦ Manual Font Setting ..................................................................................... 29-18
♦ Auto Font ...................................................................................................... 29-19
Displayed Character Selection......................................................................................... 29-20
Font Setting.............................................................................................................. 29-20
Language 1 Edit....................................................................................................... 29-21
Edit for Language 2, etc........................................................................................... 29-21
Checking Methods ................................................................................................... 29-21
♦ Checking Procedure ..................................................................................... 29-21
♦ Items Supported for Language Display
(and Language Selection Display)................................................................ 29-21
Macro Command [CHG_LANG]............................................................................... 29-21
Multi-language Screen ..................................................................................................... 29-22
Editing Methods ....................................................................................................... 29-22
♦ How to Change the Data: ............................................................................ 29-22
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Memory Type ..................................................................................................................... A1-1
System Memory ................................................................................................................. A1-2
Appendix 2 Process Cycle
Process Cycle .................................................................................................................... A2-1
♦ Processing in V Series ................................................................................... A2-2
♦ One-cycle Processing..................................................................................... A2-4
If Communication Speed is Slow: ..................................................................................... A2-5
♦ Conventions for Screen Creation ................................................................... A2-5
♦ Other Notes .................................................................................................... A2-6
Appendix 3 Error
Errors Displayed on the V7 Series..................................................................................... A3-1
Communication Errors ............................................................................................... A3-1
Error Messages for Network Communication ............................................................ A3-3
Check......................................................................................................................... A3-5
♦ Error Details and Solutions............................................................................. A3-5
Warning.................................................................................................................... A3-13
SYSTEM ERROR .................................................................................................... A3-13
Touch Switch is Active ............................................................................................. A3-14
Errors Displayed on the PC when a Screen is Created ................................................... A3-15
Error Check...................................................................................................................... A3-15
23
System Setting
Chapter 1 System Setting
1
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
System Setting
The “system setting” includes the settings that are required for MONITOUCH to
communicate with the PLC, screen data settings and other settings as well as
those for the MONITOUCH system.
Before transferring screen data to MONITOUCH, be sure to check the system
setting.
System Setting Items
The following setting items are included in the system setting.
See:
Setting Item
Contents
Chapter 1
For more
information:
PLC Type
Select the PLC model that MONITOUCH is connected to.
Page 1-3
Hardware
Specifications
Comm. Parameter
Perform communications parameter settings.
Page 1-3
Hardware
Specifications
Edit Model Selection
Select the MONITOUCH model.
Page 1-14
−
Unit Setting
Perform unit settings, such as backlight or buzzer.
Page 1-15
−
Page 1-20
Operation,
Appendix 1
−
Font Setting
Set the font to be displayed on MONITOUCH.
Modular Jack
Perform modular jack settings.
Page 1-21
Function Switch Setting
Set the function switches to be used commonly for all screens.
Page 1-23
−
Buffering Area Setting
Set buffering areas.
−
Chapter 10
Memory Card Setting
Make the setting for memory card emulation.
−
Chapter 25
CF Card Setting
Make the setting for the CF card.
−
Chapter 23
Printer Setting
Make the setting for the printer.
−
Chapter 15
Video Setting
Make the setting for video display.
−
Chapter 18
Make the setting for sound output function.
−
Chapter 20
Barcode Setting
Make the setting required for barcode reader connection.
−
Chapter 16
V-Link Setting
Make the setting for V-Link.
−
Hardware
Specifications
Macro Setting
Make the setting for macro.
−
Chapter 13
Time Display Format
Set the time display format.
−
Chapter 11
SRAM/Clock Setting
Make the setting for the SRAM cassette.
−
Chapter 24
Attribute Table
Set attribute tables as required when using the CF card.
−
Chapter 23
MR400 Format Table
Make the setting required for MR400.
−
Chapter 15
Temp. CTRL/PLC2Way
Setting
Make the setting required for temperature control/PLC2Way
function.
−
Hardware
Specifications
Network Table Setting
Make the setting for Ethernet/Net10/OMRON CS1 DNA.
−
Hardware
Specifications
* Sound Setting
* Not available with the V6 series
1-1
System Setting Items
POWER
Chapter 1 System Setting
Starting the System Setting
Click the [System Setting] menu on the V-SFT editor.
The setting items are displayed in the drop-down menu. Select the desired
menu item.
Initial Setting Items
The system setting cannot be altered on MONITOUCH.
The system setting must be set for each screen data file and is transferred to
MONITOUCH with the screen data.
There are several setting items that must be correctly set at first.
•
•
•
•
•
•
PLC Type
Comm. Parameter (including [Read Area], [Write Area])
Edit Model Selection
Unit Setting
Font Setting
Modular Jack
These settings must be reviewed before transferring data to MONITOUCH.
1-2
Chapter 1 System Setting
1
PLC Type
When [Universal Serial] or a network-compatible model (JPCN-1, T-Link,
CC-Link, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP or NET/10) is selected for [PLC Type],
there are separate communication unit manuals that you should read. Be sure
to refer to the relevant manual.
The explanation in this chapter is given for the case where a PLC model other
than [Universal Serial] and network-compatible models is selected.
Communication Parameter
Communication parameters must be set for communications between
MONITOUCH and the connecting apparatus. If communication parameters are
not set correctly, MONITOUCH may not establish communications with the
connecting apparatus. Be sure to check the communication parameter settings
before establishing communications.
In this chapter, the following important items are described.
• [Read Area] (Refer to page 1-4.)
• [Write Area] (Refer to page 1-10.)
• [Calendar] (Refer to page 1-13.)
For information on other setting items, refer to “Chapter 3 Serial
Communications” in the V7 Hardware Specifications Manual.
1-3
Initial Setting Items
Depending on the MONITOUCH model, the compatible PLC models vary.
For compatible PLC models, refer to the Hardware Specifications Manual or
“Chapter 5 Transfer” in the Reference Manual (Operation).
Chapter 1 System Setting
♦ [Read Area] ([Main 1] tab window)
The read area is the area where the PLC gives commands for display or
operation to MONITOUCH. At least 3 words of consecutive memory addresses
are secured. MONITOUCH always reads data from these 3 words to display
and operate according to the commands.
RUN
. . .
. . .
STOP
Display the error screen.
(A command is sent from
the read area.)
Monitoring
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
The error screen is displayed
Error Display
SYSTEM
F1
A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5
B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5
F2
Power Supply Error
D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5
F1
F2
F3
F3
Turn off the power of
the unit urgently.
F4
C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5
SYSTEM
F5
F4
F5
F6
F6
F7
F7
POWER
POWER
Memory addresses are allocated as shown below.
Address
Read area =
Name
Contents
Operation
n
RCVDAT
Sub command/data
V series ← PLC
n+1
SCRN_COM
Screen status command
V series ← PLC
n+2
SCRN_No
Screen number command
V series ← PLC
Data in these memory addresses is saved at $s460 to 462 of the V series internal
memory. For more information on the internal memory ($s), refer to “Appendix 1
Internal Memory.”
[Read Area] n (sub command/data)
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Free
BZ0 ([0 → 1] leading edge)
BZ1 ([0 → 1] leading edge)
System reserved (setting [0])
Calendar setting ([0 → 1] leading edge)
System reserved (setting [0])
• Bits 0 to 7 (free)
When data is saved in this area, the same data is written to [Write Area] n
(CFMDAT, refer to page 1-10) after the screen has been displayed. Utilizing
this operation, these bits can be used for watch dog monitoring or display
scanning. For more information, refer to the example on the next page.
1-4
Chapter 1 System Setting
Change data in [Read Area] “n.”
(Bits 0 to 7)
Monitoring
RUN
. . .
. . .
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
SYSTEM
F1
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5
B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5
F2
F3
F4
C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5
D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5
Data in [Write Area] “n” changes.
(Bits 0 to 7)
F5
F6
F7
POWER
• Data in bits 0 to 7 of [Read Area] “n” is set at regular intervals (for example, approx.
20 seconds) on the PLC, and it is compared with data in bits 0 to 7 of [Write Area] “n.”
When [Read Area] “n” (bits 0 to 7) equals [Write Area] “n” (bits 0 to 7), it proves that
the V series is correctly operating (communicating).
Display Scanning
When data is received from the PLC and is saved in bits 0 to 7 of [Read Area] “n,” the
same data is written to bits 0 to 7 of [Write Area] “n” on completion of screen display
operation. This operation can be utilized for display scanning. Change data in bits 0 to
7 in [Read Area] “n” when giving a graphic change command and check that the same
data is saved in bits 0 to 7 in [Write Area] “n.” This can prove that the graphic change
command is received and executed correctly.
[A-1] to [A-5]
Change data in [Read Area] “n.”
+
ON-display commands
(Bits 0 to 7)
RUN
. . .
. . .
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Monitoring
A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5
Data in [Read Area] “n”
Data in [Write Area] “n”
=
(Bits 0 to 7)
(Bits 0 to 7)
B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5
D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5
F5
F6
F7
[A-1] to [A-5] ON-display
Normal termination
POWER
• Bits 8 and 9 (buzzer)
BZ0: A beep sounds at the leading edge [0 → 1]. (ffeee)
BZ1: Short beeps sound at the leading edge [0 → 1]. (peep-peep)
• Bit 10 (system reserved)
Not used at present. Be sure to enter “0.”
1-5
1
Initial Setting Items
Watch Dog
• When the PLC is communicating with MONITOUCH, there is no means for the PLC to
know whether or not MONITOUCH is performing operations correctly. To solve this
one-way communication, change data in bits 0 to 7 in [Read Area] “n” and check that
the same data is saved in bits 0 to 7 in [Write Area] “n.” This proves that the V series
is correctly performing operations through communications with the PLC. This
verification is called “watch dog.”
Chapter 1 System Setting
• Bit 11 (calendar setting)
This bit is not valid when the V7 series built-in clock, V6 series SRAM cassette
built-in clock or handy type built-in clock is used.
For information on the built-in clock, refer to “Chapter 24 SRAM.”
When the built-in clock is not used, this bit should be used differently
depending on whether the connecting PLC is equipped with the calendar
function.
- When MONITOUCH is connected to a PLC with calendar function
When connected to a PLC with an internal calendar, the calendar data of
the PLC is automatically read. Additionally, the PLC calendar information
is read once a day for revision. Also at the leading edge [0 → 1] of bit 11,
the calendar information is read from the PLC.This can be used in
situations such as one where the PLC calendar data has been modified.
- When MONITOUCH is connected to a PLC without calendar function
Allocate a tentative calendar data area by specifying a memory address
for [Calendar] in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog, and use this bit in
combination.
For more information, refer to page 1-13.
• Bits 14 and 15 (system reserved)
Not used at present. Be sure to enter “0.”
1-6
Chapter 1 System Setting
1
[Read Area] “n + 1” (screen status command)
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
Initial Setting Items
0
Overlap 0
Overlap 1
Overlap 2
System reserved (setting [0])
Global macro execution ([0 → 1] leading edge)
Data Sheet output ([0 → 1] leading edge)
Screen hard copy ([0 → 1] leading edge)
Backlight (level)
System reserved (setting [0])
Screen internal switching (level)
Screen forced switching ([0 → 1] leading edge)
Data read refresh ([0 → 1] leading edge)
• Bits 0 to 2 (overlap 0 to 2)
- Normal overlap or call-overlap
Each bit from 0 to 2 corresponds to overlap 0 to 2. Each overlap is
shown at the leading edge [0 → 1] and is hidden at the falling edge [1 →
0]. These bits are used for controlling show/hide operations of overlaps.
- Multi-overlap
For multi-overlaps, specify the multi-overlap number using [Memory] in
the [Overlap(Multi)] dialog. The multi-overlap is displayed when the
corresponding bit shows “1” (level) and is not displayed when the bit
shows “0” (level).
As an exception, a multi-overlap may appear/disappear at the edge.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 2 Overlap” (page 2-14).
• Bits 3 and 7 (system reserved)
Not used at present. Be sure to enter “0.”
• Bit 8 (global macro execution)
The macro set in macro block editing is executed once at the leading edge [0
→ 1] of this bit.The macro block number is specified in the memory address
that is set for [Global Macro Memory] in the [Macro Setting] dialog selected
from the [System Setting] menu. For more information, refer to “Chapter 13
Macro.”)
• Bit 9 (data sheet output)
This bit becomes valid when the data sheet function is set. The data sheet is
printed out at the leading edge [0 → 1] of this bit. For more information, refer
to “Chapter 14 Data Sheets.”)
• Bit 10 (screen hard copy)
This bit becomes valid when a printer is connected. A screen hard copy of
the V series is made at the leading edge [0 → 1] of this bit. It is also possible
to make a screen hard copy using an internal switch [Function: Hard Copy].
For more information, refer to “Chapter 15 Print.”
1-7
Chapter 1 System Setting
• Bit 11 (backlight)
When [Auto 1] or [Auto 2] is selected in the [Backlight] tab window of the
[Unit Setting] dialog from the [System Setting] menu, this bit takes effect.
When this bit shows “1” (ON level), the backlight is always turned on. When
this bit shows “0” (OFF level), the backlight is turned off if all the
requirements for [Auto 1] or [Auto 2] are satisfied. For more information,
refer to page 1-16.
• Bit 12 (analog RGB output)
For more information, refer to the EU-01 Instruction Manual separately
provided.
• Bit 13 (screen internal switching)
This bit controls screen switching by internal switches.
[0]: Screen switching by internal switches is allowed.
[1]: Screen switching by internal switches is prohibited.
* An “internal switch” means a switch you can create for internal processing
within the MONITOUCH by selecting [Screen] or [Return] for [Function] of
the switch.
• Bit 14 (screen forced switching)
This bit is used when the screen number is specified from the PLC. Use this
bit when the same screen number that was previously used should be
specified.
If the screen display was once switched by an internal switch, generally it
cannot be returned to the former screen that was specified by an external
command, because the external screen command number remains the
same as before in [Read Area] “n + 2” (explained later). In such a case, it is
possible to forcibly switch the screen to the screen number contained in
[Read Area] “n + 2” at the leading edge [0 → 1] of bit 14.
RUN
. . .
. . .
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Screen No. 5
D000
D001
D002
5
No. 2
Read area “n + 2”
= external screen command
Data in the read area “n + 2” remains “5”
even if the actual screen has been switched
by an internal command.
No. 2
Screen No. 2
To show screen No. 5 again using an external
screen command, set [0→1] to bit 14 of read
area “n + 1.”
Screen forced switching (bit 14)
15
14 13
12 11
10
D000
D001 0
D002 0
09 08 07
1 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
06
05 04
0 0
5
03 02 01 00
0 0
0 0
Screen No. 5
0
No. 2
1-8
Chapter 1 System Setting
[Read Area] “n + 2” (screen number command)
15 14 13 12
0
0
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
Screen number
System reserved (setting [0])
• Bits 0 to 12 (screen number command)
Specify the screen number to be displayed in these bits. Even if the screen
display has been switched by an internal switch, it is possible to switch the
screen by an external command from the PLC. External commands have
priority over internal switches.
Important!
If a screen number that does not exist in MONITOUCH is set in [Read Area]
“n + 2” at the start of communications with the PLC, the error message
“Screen No. Error” is displayed on MONITOUCH and the screen is not
displayed correctly.
SYSTEM
F1
Check
F2
F3
F4
Screen No. Error
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Before starting communications with the PLC, check the data in [Read Area]
“n + 2” and confirm that the screen number to be displayed at first is set.
• Bits 13 and 15 (system reserved)
Not used at present. Be sure to enter “0.”
1-9
1
Initial Setting Items
• Bit 15 (data read refresh)
When this bit is set [0 → 1], all display items are refreshed at a high speed.
(This also applies even when [Low Speed] is selected for [Process Cycle] for
data display.
For information on the process cycle, refer to “Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”
Chapter 1 System Setting
♦ [Write Area] ([Main 1] tab window)
This is the area where data is written from [Read Area], such as the displayed
screen number, overlap display status, buzzer sounding status, etc. 3 words of
consecutive memory addresses are secured. MONITOUCH writes information
to these 3 words during communications with the PLC.
RUN
. . .
. . .
STOP
Backlight OFF!
(The unit status is set to the write area.)
Monitoring
A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5
B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5
C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5
D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
F1
F1
F2
F2
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
F5
F6
F6
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
F7
F7
POWER
POWER
The backlight goes off when the screen
is not touched for a certain time.
Memory addresses are allocated as shown below.
Address
Write area =
Contents
Operation
n
CFMDAT
Name
Same as data in read area “n”
V series → PLC
n+1
SCRN_COM
Screen status
V series → PLC
n+2
SCRN_No
Displayed screen number
V series → PLC
Data in these memory addresses is saved at $s464 to 466 of the V series internal
memory. For more information on the internal memory ($s), refer to “Appendix 1
Internal Memory.”
[Write Area] “n” (output of [Read Area] “n”)
When the V Series has completed a display operation, sub command/data in
[Read Area] “n” is written into the PLC.
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Free
BZ0
BZ1
System reserved (setting [0])
Calendar setting
System reserved (setting [0])
1-10
0
0
Chapter 1 System Setting
1
[Write Area] “n + 1” (screen status)
Data of the screen status displayed on the V series is written in this area.
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
Initial Setting Items
15 14 13 12
0
Overlap 0
Overlap 1
Overlap 2
System reserved (setting [0])
Serial extension I/O
Global macro execution
Printer busy
Print data transferring
Backlight
System reserved (setting [0])
Screen internal switching
Screen forced switching
Data read refresh
• Bits 0 to 2 (overlap 0 to 2)
The overlap status is written in these bits. If overlap 0 - 2 is displayed on the
V series, the corresponding bit is set (1: ON); if not, it is reset (0: OFF).
Ex.:
When bit 0 to 2 (overlap) in [Read Area] “n + 1” is set to show the overlap
externally, the same bit in [Write Area] is also set (1: ON). If an overlap is
displayed by an internal switch (Function: Overlap = ON), the bit in [Read
Area] “n + 1” remains “0,” but the one in [Write Area] is set to “1.”
When an external command is received in read area “n + 1”:
RUN
. . .
. . .
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
A-Line Paint Process
Change Screen
D001
A-Line
B-Line
C-Line
D-Line
Num.
Display
Monitor
Error
Detail
Alarm
Display
When an overlap is displayed on the screen,
bit 0 to 2 in write area “n + 1” is set to “1.”
Error
15 14
0
0
13
12
0 0
11 10 09
0 0
A-Line Paint Process
Change Screen
A-Line
Num.
Display
Change
Screen
B-Line
C-Line
D-Line
Monitor
Error
Detail
Alarm
Display
08
07 06
05 04
03 02
01
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 1
00
(Write area “n + 1”)
Error
When an overlap is displayed by an internal switch:
1-11
Chapter 1 System Setting
• Bits 3 and 6, bit 12 (system reserved)
Not used at present. Be sure to enter “0.”
• Bit 7 (serial extension I/O)
This bit indicates the state of the serial extension I/O (V-I/O) connected to the
V series. When this bit shows “0,” the V-I/O is in normal operating condition;
when it shows “1,” there is an error.
• Bit 8 (global macro execution)
This bit indicates the status of bit 8 (global macro execution) in [Read Area]
“n + 1.” When the bit in [Read Area] is “1,” this bit shows “1”; when it is reset
to “0,” it shows “0.”
• Bit 9 (printer busy)
This bit indicates the printer status connected to the V series. When this bit
shows “0,” the printer is not busy; when it shows “1,” it is busy.
• Bit 10 (print data transferring)
When a print command such as screen hard copy, sample print or data sheet
is executed, the print data transferring status is written in this bit. At the start
of print data transfer, this bit changes “0” → “1”; on completion of print data
transfer, it changes “1” → “0.”
Data of bits 9 and 10 is output to internal memory address $s16.
For more information on the internal memory ($s), refer to “Appendix 1 Internal
Memory.”
• Bit 11 (backlight)
The backlight ON/OFF status is written in these bits. When the backlight of
the V series is turned on, it shows “1,”; when it is turned off, it shows “0.”
Even if bit 11 (backlight) in [Read Area] “n + 1” is reset (0: OFF), this bit
shows “1” if the backlight is on.
Data of bit 11 is output to internal memory address $s17.
For more information on the internal memory ($s), refer to “Appendix 1 Internal
Memory.”
• Bit 13 (screen internal switching)
This bit indicates the status of bit 13 (screen internal switching) in [Read
Area] “n + 1.” When the bit in [Read Area] is “1,” this bit shows “1”; when it is
reset to “0,” it shows “0.”
• Bit 14 (screen forced switching)
This bit indicates the status of bit 14 (screen forced switching) in [Read Area]
“n + 1.” When the bit in [Read Area] is “1,” this bit shows “1”; when it is reset
to “0,” it shows “0.”
• Bit 15 (data read refresh)
This bit indicates the status of bit 15 (data read refresh) in [Read Area]
“n + 1.” When the bit in [Read Area] is “1,” this bit shows “1”; when it is reset
to “0,” it shows “0.”
1-12
Chapter 1 System Setting
1
[Write Area] “n + 2” (displayed screen number)
15 14 13 12
0
0
Screen number
System reserved (setting [0])
• Bits 0 to 12 (screen number)
These bits indicate the screen number that is currently displayed on the V
series.
• Bits 13 and 15 (system reserved)
Not used at present. Be sure to enter “0.”
♦ [ Read/Write Area GD-80 Compatible] ([Main 1] tab window)
When converting screen data files created on GD-80 into those of the V series,
this option is automatically checked. The contents of [Read Area] and [Write
Area] with the GD-80/81S series are different from those with the V series.
When this option is checked, [Read Area] and [Write Area] will have the same
contents as the GD-80/81S series.
For more information on [Read Area] and [Write Area] of the GD-80/81S series,
refer to the GD-80 User’s Manual.
♦ [Calendar] ([Main 1] tab window)
When the connecting PLC is not equipped with the calendar function and when
the V7 series built-in clock, V6 series SRAM cassette built-in clock or handy type
built-in clock (refer to “Chapter 24 SRAM”) is not used, it is possible to allocate a
tentative calendar area using this [Calendar] setting to have the calendar
function.
Follow the steps below.
1. Set the desired memory address (this will be the top memory address) for
[Calendar].
The allocation of memory is shown below.
Memory
Contents
n
Year (BCD 0 to 99)
n+1
Month (BCD 1 to 12)
n+2
Day (BCD 1 to 31)
n+3
Hour (BCD 0 to 23)
n+4
Minute(s) (BCD 0 to 59)
n+5
Second(s) (BCD 0 to 59)
The day of the week is automatically recognized so that it is not necessary to set any
data.
2. Save calendar data in the calendar memory described above.
1-13
Initial Setting Items
0
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Chapter 1 System Setting
3. Calendar data is read into V series at the leading edge [0] → [1] of bit 11
(calendar setting) in [Read Area] “n” (sub command/data). In the case of a
PLC without an internal calendar, an error will occur in the clock data
because calendar data is not automatically read when connecting to the PLC
and is not updated every day. It is recommended that accurate calendar
data is taken by setting new data in the calendar area regularly, or by
re-setting the calendar in [Read Area].
* If calendar data is forcibly read by setting bit 11 of [Read Area] “n” during
constant sampling, sampling timing may shift, resulting in disturbing the
sampling process. If this bit is set during constant sampling, we recommend
resetting sampling as well.
♦ Notes on Calendar Memory
These notes apply when connecting MONITOUCH to a PLC without internal
calendar and selecting [1 : n] for [Connection] on the [Detail] tab window of the
[Comm. Parameter] dialog.
• Set the PLC memory address either for [Read Area] or [Calendar] in the
[Comm. Parameter] dialog.
• If internal memory addresses are set for [Read Area], [Write Area] and
[Calendar], no initial connection check is performed; the calendar information
is read only when the V series establishes communications with the PLC for
the first time. If a timeout is detected during access to the PLC, no
communication error occurs on the V series.
Edit Model Selection
Select the V series model.
Edit Model Option
1-14
Model
Display Colors
V712S
(800*600)
V712iS, V712S
32k colors
V710S
(800*600)
V710iS, V710S
32k colors
V710T
(640*480)
V710iT, V710T
32k colors
V708S
(800*600)
V708iS, V708S
32k colors
V708C
(640*480)
V708C
128 colors
V612
(800*600
12.1-inch)
V612T
128 colors
V610S
(800*600
10.4-inch)
V610S
128 colors
V610
(640*480
10.4-inch)
V610T, V610C
128 colors
V608
(640*480
7.7-inch)
V608C
128 colors
V606
(320*240
5.7-inch)
V606C, V606M
16 colors,
8 gradations
V606i
(320*240
5.7-inch)
V606iT, V606iC, V606iM
16 colors, 16 colors,
8 gradations
V608CH
(640*480
7.7-inch)
V608CH
128 colors
V609E
(640*480
8.9-inch)
V609E
2 colors
Chapter 1 System Setting
1
Unit Setting
♦ Memory Expansion
[Size]
• V7 series:
• V6 series:
None/8M
None/2M (Memory Extension 1)/4M (Memory Extension 1)
2M (Memory Extension 2)/4M (Memory Extension 2)
When the screen data file capacity exceeds the capacity of MONITOUCH,
use the add-on memory cassette (V7EM-F) or the expansion memory
(V6EM/4) optionally available. To know the memory capacity or free capacity
during screen editing, select [Tool] → [Memory Use].
For more information on the screen data file capacity, refer to “Appendix 1 Fonts” in the
Reference Manual (Operation). For [Memory Extension 1] and [Memory Extension 2] for
the V6 series, refer to the V6EM/4 V6EM/4i (FPROM cassette) Instruction Manual
separately provided.
♦ Backlight
[Action]
Select the operation of the backlight attached to the V series unit.
• [ON]
Always turns backlight on.
• [Auto 1]
Turns the backlight on when bit 11 (backlight) in [Read Area] “n + 1” (screen
status command) is set (1: ON). When bit 11 is reset (0: OFF), the backlight
is turned off after a lapse of the time specified by [Backlight OFF Time] (refer
to [Backlight OFF Time] below) if all the following conditions are raised.
Conditions:
- Bit 11 (backlight) of [Read Area] “n + 1” (screen status command) is reset
(OFF).
- Screen display stands still.
- All touch switches are turned off.
1-15
Initial Setting Items
Make the setting for the V series unit. It is necessary to make the setting for the
functions you use. Be sure to check the setting before transferring a screen
data file. Clicking [Unit Setting] in the [System Setting] menu brings up the
following dialog.
Chapter 1 System Setting
• [Auto 2]
Turns backlight on when bit 11 (backlight) in [Read Area] (screen status
command) is set (1: ON). When bit 11 is reset (0: OFF), the backlight is
turned off after a lapse of the time specified by [Backlight OFF Time] (refer to
[Backlight OFF Time] below) if all the following conditions are raised.
Conditions:
- Bit 11 (backlight) of [Read Area] “n + 1” (screen status command) is reset
(OFF).
- All touch switches are turned off.
• [Manual]/[Manual 2]
When [Manual] or [Manual 2] is chosen, the backlight is turned on and off by
the [SYSTEM] switch + the [F•5] switch, or by the leading/falling edge of bit
11 in [Read Area] “n + 1.”
* The [SYSTEM] switch + the [F•5] switch is not valid when bit 11 (backlight) in
[Read Area] “n + 1” is set (1: ON).
When [Manual] or [Manual 2] is chosen, [Backlight Power ON Time Control]
(refer to the below) becomes active.
For the difference between [Manual] and [Manual 2], refer to the following
explanation.
Note on Backlight OFF
When [Auto 1], [Auto 2] or [Manual] is selected and the backlight is turned off,
all the touch switches on the V series are not valid, and no switch data will be
output to the PLC. With a touch on any part of the screen, the backlight is
turned back on. However, no switch data will be output even if the touched
part happens to be a switch. The first touch turns the backlight on. Only the
switch operations that are made 500 ms after the backlight is turned on are
written in the PLC. Only for [Manual 2], switches are valid even while the
backlight is off.
[Backlight OFF Time] (sec)
When [Auto 1] or [Auto 2] is chosen, [Backlight OFF Time] becomes active.
When [Auto 1] or [Auto 2] is chosen for [Backlight], the backlight is turned off
after a lapse of a certain time when all the required conditions have been
raised. Specify this time delay.
[Backlight Power ON Time Control]
When [Manual] or [Manual 2] is chosen for [Backlight], this setting item
becomes active.
• [OFF]
When the V series is turned on, the backlight is off.
• [ON]
When the V series is turned on, the backlight is on.
[Display] (Normal/Reverse)
This setting is valid for monochrome V series.
Choose whether screen data should be displayed in normal or reverse video
on MONITOUCH. It defaults to [Normal].
1-16
Chapter 1 System Setting
♦ Buzzer
1
♦ System/Mode Switch
This is the setting for the [SYSTEM] switch and [Mode] (F•1) switch on the V
series.
[
System Switch Prohibited]
When this option is checked ( ), the [SYSTEM] switch is prohibited in the
RUN mode, and no menu is displayed if it is pressed.
To reset the [SYSTEM] switch prohibited state:
To activate the [SYSTEM] switch with the screen data as is, hold down the
[SYSTEM] switch on the V series, and press the [F•7] switch ([F•5] switch for
V606/V606i) for the length of time specified for [Change-over Time] (refer to
the next page).
The Main Menu screen is displayed on the V series.
When this option is checked, [
[
Mode Switch Prohibited] becomes inactive.
Mode Switch Prohibited]
When the [SYSTEM] switch is pressed and the menu is displayed, the [F•1]
switch works as a mode select switch that changes over the RUN ↔ STOP
mode. When the [ Mode Switch Prohibited] option is checked, this switch
does not work as a mode select switch in the RUN mode. It is possible to
prevent accidental mode change from RUN to STOP (the Main Menu screen
displayed).
To reset the [MODE] switch prohibited state:
To activate the [F•1] switch (= [MODE] switch) with the screen data as is, press
the [SYSTEM] switch on the V series to bring up the menu. Then, hold down
the [F•1] switch and press the [F•7] switch ([F•5] switch for V606/V606i) for the
length of time specified for [Change-over Time] (refer to the below).
The Main Menu screen is displayed on the V series.
[Change-over Time] (sec)
If there is no change-over time for mode change, there is a possibility that an
inadvertent contact with the [F•1] switch (= [MODE] switch) may wrongly
activate a mode change. To avoid such a problem, it is possible to set up the
switch change-over time so that the RUN mode can only be changed to the
STOP mode when the [F•1] switch is held down for a certain time.
Set the length of time the switch should be held down.
(This change-over time is valid for resetting the [SYSTEM]/[MODE] switch
prohibited state.)
1-17
Initial Setting Items
Choose the desired length of buzzer that is given when a switch is pressed.
[Standard]
100 msec
[Short]
10 msec
[OFF]
No buzzer
Chapter 1 System Setting
♦ Blink/Flash
The blink/flash time for the blink color can be set.
[OFF Time]/[ON Time] (× 100 msec)
When “0” is set for both fields, the selected color flashes at 0.5-second
intervals.
♦ Touch Switch
This setting is valid when using the matrix touch switch type of the V6 series.
When the matrix touch switch is used, select [Matrix Switch].
♦ DIO Memory
This memory setting should be made when using the serial extension I/O (V-I/O)
for the V7/V6 series or the extension I/O unit (E-I/O) for the V6 series. For more
information, refer to the Instruction Manual attached to V-I/O or E-I/O.
♦ Overlap
Select the unit for coordinates when multi-overlap is displayed by an external
command and its coordinates are specified externally. This setting is available
only when overlap coordinates are specified by the PLC or a macro command.
[Overlap Coordinates]
• [Column/Line]
Like the V6 matrix touch switch, the overlap is placed by specifying
coordinates in lines and columns. The 1-byte (16 × 20) dot is the unit for
basic grids.
• [Dots]
Multi-overlap coordinates can be specified in the unit of 4 dots for X and in
the unit of 1 dot for Y.
♦ E-Mail
This is the function available only with V7i, and is required when [ Use E-Mail]
is checked for the alarm function. For more information, refer to “Chapter 27
E-Mail.”
1-18
Chapter 1 System Setting
♦ Environment Setting
1
Setting Item
Contents
Use continuous buzzer sound
Display an overlap by level of ON bit
Clear characters when cursor is on the 1st character in Entry Mode.
Output the number of data ready by a bar-code reader by words
Make messages same as in GD-80 if [Action Area] is [Switch/Lamp].
Num. Display: displays the significant figures when overflowing
Num. Display: displays special characters instead of A to F in BCD
GD-80 compatible
Skip ten key block which doesn’t exist when operating +/- block
switch.
Regard the origin of graphic relay on an overlap as that of a screen.
Not paint when switch/lamp OFF color is the same as back color.
Make the upward switch effective when switches are overlapped.
Make action of bit item same as that in GD-80.
Make action of offset for graphic call same as that in GD-80.
Transfer Comment
Refer to “Chapter 5 Transfer” in the
Reference Manual (Operation).
Use Internal Flash ROM as Back-up Area
Refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
Print out bit sampling as displayed.
Refer to “Chapter 10 Sampling.”
Covert DIO Input memory to bit memory.
For more information, contact your local
distributor.
Validate Text Processing setting when using JIS code character
strings.
GD-80 compatible
Relay: Priority Display on Screen Call
Use 128 Colors
V6 compatible
Use 3D Parts
For V708C and V6 series
1-19
Initial Setting Items
The following options are included. These options are classified into three
groups: GD-80 compatible settings, other settings, and additional settings. For
the GD-80 compatible settings, these options are automatically selected when
the GD-80 data is converted into that for the V series. For other settings, refer to
the related section.
Chapter 1 System Setting
Font Setting
Select the language to be displayed on the V series unit.
[Display Language]
When the V series is changed from the RUN mode to the STOP mode, the
Main Menu screen is displayed. This is the screen that shows the basic
settings. Select the language to be displayed on this screen. When
[Japanese], [Japanese 32] or [Gothic] is selected for [Font], either
[Japanese] or [English] can be selected for [Display Language]. When any
font other than the above is selected for [Font], select [English] for [Display
Language].
[Font]
The following fonts are supported.
Japanese
Japanese 32
*
English/Western Europe
*
Chinese
*
Chinese (simplified)
*
Korean
Gothic
English/Western Europe HK Gothic
English/Western Europe HK Times
* However, when editing special characters of Western European languages or
characters of Chinese, Chinese (simplified) or Korean, it is necessary to install the
relevant IME on your computer and create the appropriate language environment.
For more information, refer to “Appendix 1 Fonts” in the Reference Manual
(Operation).
Language Selection
[Changing Characters]/[Initial Displayed Language]
For more information, refer to “Chapter 29 Language Selection.”
1-20
Chapter 1 System Setting
1
Modular Jack
Make the setting for modular jacks of the V series unit.
Screen data transfer can only be performed using this modular jack.
• [Editor Port]
This is the default setting. This is the port used for data transfer from the
personal computer. It can also be used for on-line editing and simulation.
When data transfer from a personal computer is started when the PLC and
the V6 are engaged in communications, the Main Menu screen is
automatically displayed on the V series. When an option other than [Editor
Port] is selected, it is necessary to select the Main Menu screen manually
([SYSTEM] + [F•1] switch) on the V series before transferring screen data.
• [Memory Card]
Select this option when connecting to the card recorder (CREC).
• [Barcode]
Select this option when connecting to the barcode reader.
• [V-I/O]
Select this option when connecting to the serial extension I/O (V-I/O).
• [Multi-Link]
Select this option when [Multi-Link2] is selected for [Connection] in the
[Comm. Parameter] dialog and “1” is set for [Own Stat. No.] for the V series.
When connecting the V series to the PLC with [Multi-Link2] selected for
[Connection], select [Multi-Link] for [Modular Jack 1] (or [Modular Jack 2]) for
the master station (Own Stat. No. 1) of the V series. Set either for [Modular
Jack 1] or [Modular Jack 2].
• [Temp. CTRL/PLC2Way]
Select this option when using the temperature control network or PLC2Way
function. For more information, refer to the V7 Hardware Specifications
Manual.
• [V-Link]
Select this option when using V-Link. For more information, refer to “Chapter
3 Serial Communications” in the V7 Hardware Specifications Manual.
• [Touch Switch]
This option is valid for the V series compatible with analog RGB input.
• [Ladder Tool]
This option is valid when [Mitsubishi: QnH (Q) series CPU] is selected for
[PLC Type]. It is possible to transfer ladder data using the screen data
transfer cable (V6-CP). For more information, refer to the V7 Hardware
Specifications Manual.
1-21
Initial Setting Items
[Modular Jack 1]
Chapter 1 System Setting
• [Printer (Serial Port)]
Select this option when connecting to the serial printer. For more
information, refer to “Chapter 15 Print.”
[Modular Jack 2]
This modular jack cannot be used for transferring screen data between the
computer and the V series.
• [Not Used]
This is the default setting.
• [Memory Card]
Select this option when connecting to the card recorder (CREC).
• [Barcode]
Select this option when connecting to the barcode reader.
• [V-I/O]
Select this option when connecting to the serial extension I/O (V-I/O).
• [Multi-Link]
Select this option when [Multi-Link2] is selected for [Connection]. This is the
same as [Multi-Link] for [Modular Jack 1] described above.
• [Temp. CTRL/PLC2Way]
This is the same as [Temp. CTRL/PLC2Way] for [Modular Jack 1] described
above.
• [V-Link]
This is the same as [V-Link] for [Modular Jack 1] described above.
• [Touch Switch]
This is the same as [Touch Switch] for [Modular Jack 1] described above.
• [Ladder Tool]
This is the same as [Ladder Tool] for [Modular Jack 1] described above.
• [Printer (Serial Port)]
This is the same as [Printer (Serial Port)] for [Modular Jack 1] described
above.
1-22
Chapter 1 System Setting
1
Setting Items for other Functions
There are function switches [F1] to [F7] ([F1] to [F7] for V606/V606i) provided on
the surface sheet of the V series. These function switches work for the
dedicated functions while the menu is displayed by pressing the [SYSTEM]
switch. When the menu is not displayed and MONITOUCH is engaged in
communications with the PLC, these settings are valid for all the screens.
If you would like to change the function switch setting for a screen, select [Local
Function Switch Setting] from the [Edit] menu and make the desired setting for the
screen. For the screen with the local function switch settings, the local function switch
settings have priority over those set by selecting [Function Switch Setting] from the
[System Setting].
Note that the available functions for function switches are limited.
♦ Setting Procedure
1. Select [Function Switch Setting] from the [System Setting] menu.
The [Function Switch Setting] dialog is displayed.
2. When [ Use Function Switch] is checked, the following settings are
available on the [F1] to [F7] tab windows.
♦ Setting Items
[Function]
The following function can be set for function switches.
[None]
[Screen]
No.
[Overlap]
No. Action ([ON]/[OFF]/[ALT])
[Hard Copy]
[Word Operation]
Operation setting
[Return]
[Occupy] (Valid when [Multi-Link] is selected for [Connection])
[Action] ([Momentary]/[Set]/[Reset]/[Alternate]/[Momentary W])
This option is active when [Output Memory] is checked. Select the write
operation to the output memory.
[
Output Memory]
Check this option when you would like to write output information to the
specified memory address when the function switch is pressed. Specify the
memory address where output information should be written. Select the
desired output operation for [Action] described above.
1-23
Setting Items for other Functions
Function Switch Setting
Chapter 1 System Setting
[
Use ON Macro]
Check this option when you would like to execute a macro command when
the function switch is pressed. Check the box and click the [ON Macro Edit]
button. The macro edit window is displayed. Set the desired macro
command.
For information on macro commands, refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
[
Use OFF Macro]
Check this option when you would like to execute a macro command when
the function switch is released. Check the box and click the [OFF Macro
Edit] button. The macro edit window is displayed. Set the desired macro
command.
For information on macro commands, refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
[
Interlock]
Set interlock for each function switch. If it is checked, the following setting
items become active.
• [Memory]
Set the memory address for interlock.
• [Condition ([ON]/[OFF])
Choose the condition to be raised with data in the memory address set for
[Memory].
• [When the switch is OFF] ([Effective]/[Ineffective])
Select whether interlock memory should be valid or invalid during switch
deactivation when [Momentary (Momentary W)] is selected for [Action].
[Ineffective] is recommended.
Some setting items are common with those for the ordinary switch function. For more
information on other setting items not mentioned above, refer to “Chapter 3 Switch.”
Buffering Area Setting
Make the setting when using the sampling mode.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 10 Sampling.”
Memory Card Setting
Make the setting when using the memory card mode or data logging function.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode.”
1-24
Chapter 1 System Setting
1
CF Card Setting (V7 and V608CH only)
Valid when using the CF card.
Setting Items for other Functions
For more information with the V7 series, refer to “Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only).”
For more information with V608CH, refer to the V608CH Specifications Manual.
Printer Setting
Make the setting for printing on the V series unit.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 15 Print.”
Video Setting
Make the setting when using the video display function.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only).”
Sound Setting (V7i only)
Make the setting when using the sound sampling mode.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function.”
Barcode Setting
Make the setting when connecting the barcode reader.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 16 Barcode.”
V-Link Setting
Make the setting when using V-Link.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 3 Serial Communications” in the V7 Hardware
Specifications Manual.
Macro Setting
Make the setting when using the initial macro, global macro or event timer
macro.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
1-25
Chapter 1 System Setting
Time Display Format
Valid when using the time display item.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar.”
SRAM/Clock Setting
Make the setting when using the SRAM or built-in clock.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 24 SRAM.”
Attribute Table
This setting may be required when using the CF card.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only).”
MR400 Format Table
This setting is required when connecting Sato’s barcode printer “MR400” to the
V series.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 15 Print.”
Temp. CTRL/PLC2Way Setting
Make the setting when using the temperature control network or PLC2Way
function.
For more information, refer to the V7 Hardware Specifications Manual.
Network Table Setting (Ethernet)
Valid when Mitsubishi Net10 or OMRON SYSMAC CS1 DNA is selected for the
PLC type for data read/write operation through Ethernet.
For more information, refer to the V7 Hardware Specifications Manual.
1-26
Basic Functions
Chapter 2 Overlap
2
Overlap
Outline of Overlap
Outline of Overlap
Overlap Is:
It is possible to show a screen covering a part of an ordinary screen. This
sectional screen is called “overlap.”
A-Line Paint Process
A-Line Paint Process
Change
Screen
Coating Machine
Change
Screen
Change Screen
Count (times):
000,000
Timer (sec):
00 sec.
A-Line
B-Line
C-Line
D-Line
Num.
Display
Monitor
Error
Detail
Alarm
Display
Error
Error
With the V series, a maximum of three overlaps can be displayed at one time on
the base screen.
Troubleshooter
Error!!!
ContentsOperation box error
Details
Contents
Pusher error
Change
Screen
UP
DW
Change
Graph Display ........................
2 Screen
Saddle
stopDisplay
during.................
ascending
Num. Data
3
Location Alarm Display ......................... 4
Intermediate
stopper
timing
error
Setting Change
................
5 - 7B-Line
C-Line
A-Line
Production Process Lis .... 8 - 9
Counter
error
Troubleshooting ................... 10
Timer error
Num.
Display
Error
Detail
Troubleshooter
Alarm
Display
Instructions
When several overlaps are displayed at the same time, it is possible to move
one that is partly behind another overlap to the front by touching.
Troubleshooter
Error!!!
Change
Screen
ContentsOperation box error
Contents UP DW
Pusher error
Details
Change
Graph Display ........................
2 Screen
SaddleData
stopDisplay
during
ascending
.................
3
Location Num.
Alarm Display ......................... 4
Intermediate
stopper
timing
error C-Line
Setting Change
................
5 - 7B-Line
A-Line
Troubleshooter
Production Process Lis .... 8 - 9
Timer error
Troubleshooter
Error
Detail
Change
Screen
ContentsOperation box error
Contents UP DW
Pusher error
Details
Change
Graph Display ........................
2 Screen
SaddleData
stopDisplay
during
ascending
.................
3
Location Num.
Alarm Display ......................... 4
Intermediate
stopper
timing
error C-Line
Setting Change
................
5 - 7B-Line
A-Line
Production Process List ... 8 - 9
Counter
error ................... 10
Troubleshooting
Num.
Display
Error!!!
Counter
error ................... 10
Troubleshooting
Alarm
Display
Instructions
Timer error
Troubleshooter
Num.
Display
Error
Detail
Alarm
Display
Instructions
2-1
Chapter 2 Overlap
However, when a value
other than “0” is entered
in system memory
address $s77, only the
switches (including the
SYSTEM switch) on the
overlap displayed to the
front are available.
Ex.: $s77 = 1
menu
Only the switches on this
overlap are available.
For more information on the system memory ($s), refer to “Appendix 1 Internal
Memory.”
Overlap and Screen
A maximum of three overlaps can be displayed on one screen. This is because
overlap areas are secured preliminarily as screen components. Like the base
screen, each overlap can be composed of a maximum of 256 divisions (No. 0 255) and can therefore hold the same number of parts as the base screen.
Layer
Troubleshooter
Error!!!
ContentsOperation box error
Contents
Pusher error
Change
Screen
Error!!!
Base screen
Pusher error
UP DW
Saddle stop during ascending
Details
Change
Graph Display ........................
2 Screen
Saddle
stopDisplay
during
ascending
Num. Data
.................
3
Location Alarm Display ......................... 4
Intermediate
stopper
timing
error C-Line
Setting Change
................
5 - 7B-Line
A-Line
Production Process Lis .... 8 - 9
Counter
error ................... 10
Troubleshooting
Timer error
Num.
Display
Troubleshooter
Error
Detail
Alarm
Display
Intermediate stopper timing error
Counter error
Timer error
Troubleshooter
Instructions
Overlap No. 0
Instructions
Troubleshooter
Contents
Screen
Details
Location
Overlap No. 1
Contents
UP DW
Graph Display ........................ 2
Num. Data Display ................. 3
Alarm Display ......................... 4
Setting Change ................ 5 - 7
Production Process List ... 8 - 9
Troubleshooting ................. 10
Overlap No. 2
Change Screen
2-2
Change
Screen
Operation box error
A-Line
B-Line
C-Line
Num.
Display
Error
Detail
Alarm
Display
Chapter 2 Overlap
Video Input (V6/For Channel Selection)
• The video input function on the overlap can only be used with V610 or V612
equipped with video input device (optional).
• Images taken by a video camera are displayed directly on one overlap area.
Monitor Screen
Outline of Overlap
Change
Screen
Change Size
Contrast
Color Gain
Brightness
Adjust & Save
1CH
2CH
3CH
4CH
2
Instructions
With the V7 series:
To show a video image, we recommend using a “video display” item instead of an
overlap.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only).”
However, when using the channel selection macro, use the overlap video function.
For more information, refer to page 2-22.
2-3
Chapter 2 Overlap
Overlap Display Formats
There are four display formats for overlap areas that belong to the property.
Overlap
Normal overlap area (Refer to page 2-6.)
Multi-overlap area (Refer to page 2-10.)
Call-overlap area (Refer to page 2-16.)
Video input (Refer to page 2-22.)
Normal Overlap
When an overlap is to be displayed on one specific screen, it is called “normal
overlap.”
Use one of the three overlap areas (layers) on the screen, as a normal overlap
area. A maximum of three sheets of normal overlap can be used on a screen.
Screen
Layers
Overlap 0 (normal)
Overlap 2
Overlap 1
Change Screen
A-Line
B-Line
C-Line
Num.
Display
Error
Detail
Alarm
Display
When registering an overlap as [Normal] in the overlap 0 area,
normal overlap is called up.
Multi-overlap
[Multi-overlap] is set when multiple overlap screens are displayed on the screen,
or when more than three overlaps are displayed on the screen.
Multi-overlap Edit
Change Screen
A-Line
Num.
Display
B-Line
Monitor
C-Line
Error
Detail
Contents
D-Line
Alarm
Display
Setting Change
UP DW
Graph Display ........................ 2
Num. Data Display ................. 3
Alarm Display ......................... 4
Setting Change ................ 5 - 7
Production Process List ... 8 - 9
Troubleshooting ................ 10
999
Max.:
000
Min.:
Entered: 000
Setting data 1
000
7
8
9 DW
Setting data 2
000
4
5
6
Setting data 3
000
1
2
3
CL
Setting data 4
000
0
+/-
.
CR
A-Line Paint Process
UP
Change
Screen
Coating Machine
Count (times):
000,000
Timer (sec):
00 sec.
Error
2-4
Screen
Troubleshooter
Contents
Details
Location
Chapter 2 Overlap
Call-overlap
The call-overlap format is used for a commonly used sectional screen, such as a
menu screen, which should allow access from any screen display. If you
register once, you can use the overlaps on different screens an infinite number
of times. Moreover, this also conserves memory.
Screen 2
Change
Screen
Change Screen
B-Line
Count (times):
C-Line
000,000
An error A-Line
is detected
B-Line
in the C-tank.
Stop the machine,
and check
around the
Num.
Monitor
C-tank. Display
D-Line
Alarm
Display
Change Screen
Location
Contents
A-Line
B-Line Production
C-Tank Error!!!
Coating
MachineScreen
Change
Num.
Error
Monitor 00 sec.
Timer (sec):
Display
Detail
Screen 3
Overlap Display Formats
Screen 1
A-Line Paint Process
C-Line
A
Error
Detail
D-Line
BAlarm C
Display
No. 1 servo
A-Line
No. 2 servo
No. 3 servo
No. 1 motor
Num.
No. 2 motor
Display
No. 3 motor
0000
B-Line
0000
0000
0000
Monitor
0000
0000
C-Line
D-Line
Error
Detail
Alarm
Display
Error
Change Screen
The “Change Screen” overlap is
common to all these screens.
A-Line
B-Line
C-Line
D-Line
Num.
Display
Monitor
Error
Detail
Alarm
Display
Overlap
Video Input (V6/For Channel Selection)
Select [Video] to display the image taken by a video camera. Use one of the
three overlap areas (layers) on the screen as a video area. Only one video area
can be set on the screen. By changing the channel, the image displayed on the
video screen can be displayed on four channels.
When registering an overlap as [Video] in the overlap 0 area,
video overlap is called up.
Screen
Layers
Overlap (Video)
Overlap 1
2
Overlap 2
When you have displayed the video, the image will always be displayed in the
forefront of the screen. The overlap screen stacked on the very bottom of the
video display cannot be brought to the forefront even by touching on the overlap
screen.
2-5
Chapter 2 Overlap
Normal Overlap
Use “normal overlap” when showing a stationary overlap on one of overlap
layers of the screen. To show a normal overlap, select [Normal] for one of the
screen overlap No. 0 to 2, and then place accordingly.
Setting Procedure
For more information on placing and editing normal overlaps, refer to “Chapter 2
Screen Composition” in the Reference Manual (Operation).
Setting Items for Normal Overlap
Double-click the normal overlap item placed on the screen, or click the normal
overlap item and then [Change the Setting of a Part Placed] icon. The Overlap
(Normal)] dialog is displayed.
[Overlap No.]
This option determines the overlap area (No. 0 - 2) where the normal overlap
is to be contained.
This is the same number as selected on the [Overlap Setting] dialog.
2-6
[
Item Select]
This is required when using entry mode on the overlap. For more
information, refer to “Chapter 7 Entry Mode.”
[
Use System Button]
When this option is checked ( ), the overlap is equipped with the SYSTEM
switch. For more information, refer to page 2-18.
Chapter 2 Overlap
[
Superimpose]
Check this option when using the superimpose function.
For more information on the superimpose function, refer to page 2-19.
2
With the V6 series:
The superimpose function is not available.
This is the function available only with the V7 series.
Normal Overlap
[Frame Type]
The setting method varies depending on the part selected.
• Part files: Std.v7p, Std.v6p, Parts_j.v7p, Parts_j.v6p
3Dnow_P2.v7p, 3DStd.v7p
etc.
When part No. 0 to 4 is selected:
[Frame Type]
Select the desired frame type from the options shown below:
No frame/Line/Paint/Tile/Shadow
No frame
Line
Tile
Paint
Shadow
[Frame Prop.]
When a frame other than [No frame] is chosen, this setting becomes
available. The frame color can be selected.
[Area Prop.]
Color and tile pattern for the inside of the frame (= inside of overlap part) can
be selected.
• Part files: Std.v7p, Std.v6p, Parts_j.v7p, Parts_j.v6p
3Dnow_P2.v7p, 3DStd.v7p
etc.
When a part other than No. 0 to 4 is selected:
[Frame Type]/[Frame Prop.]
These options are not available.
[Area Prop.]
Color and tile pattern for the inside of the frame (= inside of overlap part) can
be selected.
2-7
Chapter 2 Overlap
Displaying and Erasing Normal Overlap
To display or erase the normal overlap on the screen, the following three
commands can be used.
♦ Internal command
The overlap is displayed or erased by pressing the switch placed on the screen.
The following switches can be used.
Switch Function
Attached Setting
Displaying a normal overlap
Operation
Overlap
ON
Erasing the normal overlap
Overlap
OFF
For more information on the overlap switch, refer to “Chapter 3 Switch.”
♦ External command
The overlap is displayed or erased by activation of a bit in the PLC memory.
The overlap command memory area is allocated in the read area specified in the
[Comm. Parameter] dialog. Bit 0 of read area “n + 1” (screen status command)
is for overlap No. 0, bit 1 for overlap No. 1 and bit 2 for overlap No. 2.
For more information on the overlap switch, refer to “Chapter 3 Switch.”
MSB
[Read Area] n
+1
LSB
15 14 13 12
0
0
0
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Overlap No. 2
[0 → 1] edge: ON
[1 → 0] edge: OFF
Overlap No. 1
Overlap No. 0
At the leading edge (0 → 1) of the bit, the corresponding normal overlap is
displayed on the screen. Likewise, at the falling edge (1 → 0) of the bit, it is
erased from the screen.
Bit 0 of read area “n + 1”: 0 → 1
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Bit 0 of read area “n + 1”: 1 → 0
. . .
RUN
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
D0002
D0002
A-Line Paint Process
Coating Machine
A-Line Paint Process
Change
Screen
Coating Machine
Change Screen
C-Line
D-Line
Count (times): 000,000
Num.
Error
00 sec. Detail
Timer
(sec): Monitor
Display
Alarm
Display
A-Line
Error
2-8
B-Line
Count (times):
000,000
Timer (sec):
00 sec.
Error
Change
Screen
Chapter 2 Overlap
♦ Macro command
Using a macro command, the normal overlap can be displayed or erased. Use
the OVLP_SHOW command. Additionally, the display location can also be
specified. (Use the OVLP_POS command.) For more information, refer to
“Chapter 13 Macro.”
• Item selection memory
This is valid when [ Item Select] is checked. Use this setting in the entry
mode. For more information, refer to “Chapter 7 Entry Mode.”
• Read area (n + 1)
Use this memory when displaying and erasing the overlap according to the
command from the PLC. The overlap is displayed or erased when the
leading or falling edge is detected.
2-9
Normal Overlap
Memory Related to Normal Overlap
2
Chapter 2 Overlap
Multi-overlap
Multi-overlap is used to switch displays between multiple overlaps on one
overlap layer. To show a multi-overlap, select [Multi] for one of the screen
overlap No. 0 to 2. The multi-overlap screen created and saved in the
multi-overlap area can be displayed by specifying the number with a switch or an
external device. In the case of an external device, it is possible to show multiple
multi-overlaps depending on the conditions.
Setting Procedure
A normal overlap should be registered on the multi-overlap edit window. For
more information on placing and editing multi-overlaps, refer to “Chapter 4
Registration Items” in the Reference Manual (Operation).
Multi-overlap Setting (Multi-overlap Edit)
Double-click the normal overlap item placed on the screen, or click the normal
overlap item and then [Change the Setting of a Part Placed] icon. The [Overlap
(Normal)] dialog is displayed.
[ Use System Button], [Area Prop.] (Foreground, Background, Tile) are the
same as those for a normal overlap.
Refer to page 2-18.
For [
2-10
Superimpose], refer to page 2-19.
Chapter 2 Overlap
[
Continue Reading PLC Memory When Set to OFF]
This setting item becomes active when you select a multi-overlap.
* When a call-overlap is selected, reading of the PLC memory continues.
• Unchecked (Discontinue)
When an overlap screen that has been read once is erased, its information is
also completely erased. Thus, when displaying the same overlap screen
again, the overlap display is slowed down somewhat. However, the screen
is displayed smoothly.
Macro Setting in Multi-overlap Edit
Overlaps registered on the multi-overlap edit window can be used with the
OPEN or CLOSE macro command. These macro commands can be executed
when the registered overlap is displayed (OPEN macro) or erased (CLOSE
macro) from the screen.
♦ Setting Procedure
On the multi-overlap edit window:
[Edit] → [OPEN Macro Edit]/[CLOSE Macro Edit]
* With overlaps defined as [Type: Call], the OPEN or CLOSE macro command is not
valid.
* If you delete the multi-overlap that was set with OPEN or CLOSE macro command,
be sure to delete the command as well. If it is not deleted, an error will occur.
2-11
2
Multi-overlap
• Checked (Continue)
After the overlap screen is displayed on the screen, even in the event that
the overlap screen is erased, reading of the PLC memory into the items on
the overlap continues. Because information is already being read, when that
same overlap screen is displayed again, that screen’s display is processed
rapidly. However, the screen display when the overlap is not being displayed
is slowed down.
Chapter 2 Overlap
[Overlap (Multi)] Dialog (Screen)
Click the [Overlap] icon, and select [Multi] on the [Overlap Setting] dialog. The
[Overlap (Multi)] dialog is displayed.
[Overlap No.]
This option determines the overlap area (No. 0 - 2) where the multi-overlap is
to be contained. The default is the same number as selected on the
[Overlap Setting] dialog.
[Item Select]
This is required when using entry mode on the overlap.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 7 Entry Mode.”
[Command]
Choose either [Internal] or [External] for commanding the display/erase of
multi-overlaps.
• Internal
An overlap can be displayed/erased by pressing a switch placed on the
screen. The following switches can be used:
Operation
Switch Function
Attached Setting
Displaying a multi-overlap
Multi-overlap
Overlap number
Multi-overlap number
MLIB placement
Erasing the multi-overlap
Overlap
OFF
For more information on the overlap switch, refer to “Chapter 3 Switch.”
2-12
Chapter 2 Overlap
• External
The overlap number to be displayed is specified from the memory. In this
case, the display position can also be specified by an external command.
Multi-overlap ON/OFF is determined by data contained in read area “n + 1.”
The number and coordinates of the multi-overlap are specified in the
memory described below.
Multi-overlap number
Display position
Multi-overlap display
Non-display
[Memory] (Refer to page 2-13.) “n + 1”
[Memory] (Refer to page 2-13.) “n + 2,” “n + 3”
[Read Area] “n + 1” bits 0 to 2 ON
[Read Area] “n + 1” bits 0 to 2 OFF
[Memory]
Contents are shown below:
Memory
Contents
Command
Operation
n
Multi-overlap number currently displayed on the
screen
For non-display “−1” is input.
Internal,
external
V → PLC
n+1
Multi-overlap number to be displayed
External
PLC → V
n+2
X coordinate of the multi-overlap to be displayed
External
PLC → V
n+3
Y coordinate of the multi-overlap to be displayed
External
PLC → V
Memory area “n + 1” is used when [External] is chosen for [Command] while
memory areas “n + 2” and “n + 3” are used when [Coordinate Designation] is
checked.
• Coordinate Designation
When [External] is selected for [Command], coordinate designation becomes
available. The overlap display position can be determined based on external
commands. When the check box is unchecked ( ), the overlap is displayed
in the location set on the multi-overlap edit window. When the check box is
checked ( ), the overlap display position can be specified by the X and Y
coordinates in the memory addresses as described above for [Memory].
Coordinate units for coordinate designation
For V7 and the standard V6, you can select either [Column/Line] or [Dots] for the
measurement unit for coordinate designation. With the matrix-switch V6, this is fixed to
[Column/Line].
Setting Procedure
1. Select [Unit Setting] from the [System Setting] menu.
The [Unit Setting] dialog is displayed.
2. Select [Column/Line] or [Dots] for [Overlap Coordinates] on the [Overlap] tab
window. [Column/Line] is the default setting.
For [Dots], when the origin coordinate is (0, 0), the X coordinate will be in units of 4 dots,
and the Y coordinate will be in units of 1 dot.
2-13
Multi-overlap
External commands for multi-overlap (from two memory addresses at the same time)
2
Chapter 2 Overlap
Displaying and Erasing Multi-overlap
To display or erase the multi-overlap on the screen, the following three
commands can be used.
♦ Internal command
When [Internal] is selected for [Command] in the [Overlap (Multi)] dialog, the
overlap is displayed by the switch (function: Overlap) and is erased by the switch
(function: Overlap OFF).
Operation
Switch Function
Attached Setting
Displaying a multi-overlap
Multi-overlap
Overlap number
Multi-overlap number
MLIB placement
Erasing the multi-overlap
Overlap
OFF
♦ External command
When [External] is selected for [Command] in the [Overlap (Multi)] dialog, the
overlap is displayed or erased by the command in [Memory] “n + 1” and [Read
Memory] “n + 1.”
[Memory] “n + 1” specifies the multi-overlap edit number, and bits 0 to 2 of [Read
Memory] “n + 1” are used for displaying or erasing the multi-overlap.
Bit 0 of read area “n + 1”: 0 → 1
Multi-overlap number in [Memory] “n + 1”
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
Troubleshooter
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
RUN
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Contents
Details
D0304
D0002
3
D0304
Location
3
Multi-overlap edit No. 3
A-Line Paint Process
Coating Machine
A-Line Paint Process
Change
Screen
Change
Screen
Coating Machine
Troubleshooter
Contents
Count (times):
000,000
Count (times):
000,000
Timer (sec):
00 sec.
Timer (sec):
00 sec.
Details
Location
Error
Error
• Notes when displaying multi-overlap externally
Unlike normal and call-overlap, when multi-overlap is displayed by an external
command, it remains displayed even after you switch to another screen and then
return.
• Edge detection
The multi-overlap can be erased with a switch (function: overlap OFF). In this case,
the overlap can be erased if the bit remains ON. To display the overlap again, it is
necessary to reset this bit (OFF) and set it (ON) again.
Only in such a case, each bit in [Read Area] “n + 1” is detected at the leading and
falling edges.
2-14
Chapter 2 Overlap
♦ Macro command
Using a macro command, the multi-overlap can be displayed or erased.
Use the SET_MOVLP command.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
2
Memory Related to Multi-overlap
• Memory ([Overlap (Multi)] dialog)
This area must be set when [External] is selected for [Command].
• Read area (bits 0 to 2 in “n + 1”)
Use this memory when displaying and erasing the multi-overlap according to
the command from the PLC. These bits are level-detected. As an
exception, these bits are edge-detected only when the overlap is displayed
again after it is erased with a switch (function: Overlap OFF).
2-15
Multi-overlap
• Item selection memory ([Overlap (Normal)] dialog)
This is valid when the entry mode is used on the overlap and [ Item Select]
is checked. For more information, refer to “Chapter 7 Entry Mode.”
Chapter 2 Overlap
Call-overlap
With multi-overlap, it is possible to display and switch between numerous
multi-overlap screens on one overlap layer, but call-overlap is limited to only one
screen.
To show a call-overlap, select [Call] for one of the screen overlap No. 0 to 2. In
the overlap layer, set the overlap number that was created and registered on the
multi-overlap edit window. The call-overlap can be displayed or erased by a
switch or a command from the PLC.
Setting Procedure
A multi-overlap should be registered on the multi-overlap edit window. For more
information on placing and editing overlaps, refer to “Chapter 4 Registration
Items” in the Reference Manual (Operation).
Multi-overlap Setting (Multi-overlap Edit)
For more information, refer to page 2-10.
With overlaps defined as [Type: Call], macro commands are not valid. If you
delete the multi-overlap that was set with OPEN or CLOSE macro command,
be sure to delete the command as well. If it is not deleted, an error will occur.
[Overlap (Call)] Dialog (Screen)
Click the [Overlap] icon, and select [Call] on the [Overlap Setting] dialog. The
[Overlap (Call)] dialog is displayed.
[Overlap No.]
This option determines the overlap area (No. 0 - 2) where the multi-overlap is
to be contained. The default is the same number as selected on the
[Overlap Setting] dialog.
2-16
Chapter 2 Overlap
[Item Select]
This is required when using entry mode on the overlap.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 7 Entry Mode.”
2
Mark
MLIB
Call-overlap
[MLIB Placement]
Determine the overlap display position.
The relationship between the
placement and the overlap is that the
left corner of the mark becomes the left
corner of the multi-overlap as shown in
the diagram to the right.
Multi-Overlap
Displaying and Erasing Call-overlap
To display or erase the call-overlap on the screen, the following three commands
can be used.
♦ Internal command
The overlap is displayed or erased by pressing the switch placed on the screen.
The following switches can be used.
Switch Function
Attached Setting
Displaying a call-overlap
Operation
Overlap
ON
Erasing the call-overlap
Overlap
OFF
For more information on the overlap switch, refer to “Chapter 3 Switch.”
♦ External command
The call-overlap is displayed or erased by activation of a bit in the PLC memory.
The displaying and erasing method is the same as that for normal overlap.
Refer to page 2-6.
♦ Macro command
Using a macro command, the call-overlap can be displayed, erased or moved.
Use the OVLP_SHOW and OVLP_POS commands.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
Memory Related to Call-overlap
• Item selection memory ([Overlap (Normal)] dialog)
This is valid when the entry mode is used on the overlap and [
is checked.
Item Select]
• Read area (n + 1)
Use this memory when displaying and erasing the call-overlap according to
the command from the PLC. The overlap is displayed or erased when the
leading or falling edge is detected.
2-17
Chapter 2 Overlap
Feature of Overlap − SYSTEM Switch −
Irrespective of the overlap display format (normal, call or multi), the feature of
the SYSTEM switch is commonly available.
The SYSTEM switch is:
The SYSTEM switch can work in two ways.
♦ Moving the overlap
Pressing the top left corner (2 × 2 switch grids) of the overlap once makes the
overlap frame flash. While the overlap frame is flashing, pressing another
position on the screen moves the overlap to the position, aligning the top left
corner of the overlap part with it. (The frame stops flashing when it has been
moved.)
Overlap
Press somewhere outside the overlap on
the screen while the frame is flashing:
The overlap moves to the position
with its top left corner aligned
(flashing is canceled).
If a part of the overlap should extend off the screen, the V series automatically
adjusts the position closest to the pressed position but within the screen space.
To stop the overlap frame flashing (to cancel the movable state), press the top
left corner of the overlap again.
♦ Erasing the overlap
Pressing the top left corner (2 × 2 switch grids) of the overlap twice
consecutively (within one second) erases the overlap from the screen.
Pressing on switch grids (2 × 2)
consecutively twice:
The overlap disappears from the screen.
Blip!
Blip!
Overlap
♦ Setting the SYSTEM switch
The SYSTEM switch function can be set with [
[Normal Overlap] dialog.
2-18
Use System Button] in the
Chapter 2 Overlap
Feature of Overlap − Superimpose −
With the V6 series:
The superimpose function is not available.
Overlap
(with superimpose function)
Video display
• The superimpose function can be set for any overlap (normal, multi, or call).
• The level of transparency for the overlap can be determined by [Blend Value]
on the [Superimpose Setting] tab window.
* The color and blend value for transparency should be set on the [Screen
Setting] dialog.
Setting Procedure
There is a setting item [ Superimpose] in the [Overlap] dialog. The
superimpose function is selected when this box is checked.
2-19
2
Feature of Overlap − Superimpose −
For example, when a video display item is placed over the entire screen (640 ×
480 dots) on V710iT (VGA), it is displayed on top so that no switches on the
underlying screen can be used. To enable switch operation while keeping the
video display on the screen, an overlap with the superimpose function can be
called up on the video display item.
Chapter 2 Overlap
In the case of normal overlap on the screen, when [Superimpose] is checked,
the [Superimpose Setting] button becomes active.
Click the [Superimpose Setting] button. The [Screen Setting] dialog is
displayed.
For call-overlap or multi-overlap, click [Screen Setting] from the [Edit] menu on the
screen where you set [Call] or [Multi], then click the [Superimpose Setting] tab.
[Transparent Color]
When you use the superimpose function, one color is always transparent
when the overlap is displayed on the video display. This is due to the system
structure. You need to specify that color. To avoid displaying the video
image transparent, set one color that you do not use on the overlap.
Color Adjustment
Video
Overlap
(Superimpose)
If you use the color (ex. black) that is set for
[Transparent Color] on the overlap (ex. switch
OFF color), the background (ex. video display)
is displayed as is.
[Blend Value] (0 (Light) to 255 (Deep))
Set the blend ratio of the overlap to the video display.
When the blend value is closer to [0], overlap is displayed faintly. The
overlap becomes more visible as you increase blend value closer to [255].
Only one type of this setting is available for one screen.
You cannot change the setting for each overlap.
2-20
Chapter 2 Overlap
Calling Methods
♦ The same as usual overlap:
The calling method of [ Superimpose] (checked) is the same as
[ Superimpose] (unchecked). The calling method varies depending on the
type of overlap (normal, call, multi). Refer to the calling methods for each type.
Depending on the setting of the video display item, you can call an overlap with
the superimpose function by clicking on the video display.
Note that the method above is only available for normal or call-overlap.
Click the [Detail] icon of the video display item to be clicked. The [Video] dialog
is displayed. Click the [Movement] tab to set the following items.
[
Display Operation Screen When Clicking (Superimpose)]
By checking this box, the specified overlap is displayed when you click the
video image.
• [Overlap No.]
Specify the number of overlap to be displayed.
Notes
Only one overlap with [ Superimpose] is available for a screen. If you display
multiple overlaps with [ Superimpose] simultaneously, only the first displayed
overlap becomes active.
2-21
Feature of Overlap − Superimpose −
♦ Calling from the video items:
2
Chapter 2 Overlap
Video Input (V6 with Video Input Device/For Channel
Selection)
The video input function can be used with V610 or V612 equipped with video
input device (optional).
For more information on the V7 video function, refer to “Chapter 18 Video
Display (V7i Only).”
When changing the channel during video display or when changing the size with
the V7 series, this overlap video input should be used.
With V6, select [Video] for one overlap layer to set a video input.
Setting Procedure
• System Setting
Video Setting
• Screen Edit
[Overlap] icon
Overlap Setting
Type: [Video]
[Overlap (Video)] dialog
Video Setting
♦ With the V6 series:
Set the following items on the dialog.
This dialog can be displayed by following [Overlap] icon → [Overlap Setting: Video] →
[Overlap (Video)] dialog and [Video Setting] button.
[Video Input] ([NTSC]/[PAL])
Select the video input signal type.
2-22
Chapter 2 Overlap
♦ With the V7 series:
Set the following items on the dialog.
2
[Video Input] ([NTSC]/[PAL])
Select the video input signal type.
[Limitation of Snap Files at AUTO] (0 to 255)
If you select [AUTO] to save video snap images into a CF card, the images
are automatically saved with consecutive numbers. You can specify the
maximum number to be saved. For more information, refer to “Chapter 18
Video Display (V7i Only).”
[When Exceeding the Limitation of Snap File] ([Stop]/[Continuous])
Set the processing rule when you exceed [Limitation of Snap Files at AUTO]
mentioned above.
[Stop]:
snap action stops.
[Continuous]: Images are saved and overwritten continuously, starting from
the fist name.
For more information on the snap action, refer to “Chapter 18 Video Display
(V7i Only).”
2-23
Video Input (V6 with Video Input Device/For Channel Selection)
This dialog can be displayed by following [Overlap] icon → [Overlap Setting: Video] →
[Overlap (Video)] dialog and [Video Setting] button.
Chapter 2 Overlap
[Overlap (Video)] Dialog
♦ With the V6 series:
[Overlap No.]
This option determines the overlap area (No. 0 - 2) where the video display is
to be contained. This is the same number as selected on the [Overlap
Setting] dialog.
[Placement]
Determine the video display position. The
relationship between the placement and the
video display is that the left corner of the mark
becomes the left corner of the video display as
shown in the diagram to the right.
Mark
VIDEO
Video Screen
♦ With the V7 series:
Most of the setting items on the dialog are the same as those on the [Video]
dialog for a video display item. For more information, refer to “Chapter 18 Video
Display (V7i Only).” The setting items different from those for a video display
item are explained.
[Main] Tab window
[Overlap No.]
This option determines the overlap area (No. 0 - 2) where the video display is
to be contained. This is the same number as selected on the [Overlap
Setting] dialog.
[Placement]
Determine the video display position.
The relationship between the placement and the video display is the same
as shown for the V6 case.
[Display] Tab window
[Display Channel Count]
This is fixed to “1.” However, it is possible to change the channel to be
displayed using [SEL_CH] of the VIDEO macro command.
2-24
Chapter 2 Overlap
Video Display Setting (Macro Command)
The size and color of the vide display can be set using the macro commands for
video display. When no macro command is used for video display setting, the
default settings are used with V6. With V7, settings on the [Overlap (Video)]
dialog are used and default settings are used for other items such as brightness,
contract or color darkness. When a macro command is executed, it has priority.
Video Input (V6 with Video Input Device/For Channel Selection)
♦ Video Display Default Setting
The default settings are shown below.
Setting Item
Options
Default
Size
160 × 120, 320 × 240
640 × 480, 640 × 240
320 × 240
Display channel
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4
1 (CH)
Dithering
(Image refining and correction)
0 (no), 1 (yes)
1 (yes)
Brightness
0 (dark) to 255 (bright)
V7: 128, V6: 171
Contrast
0 (weak) to 255 (strong)
V7: 128, V6: 24
Color strength
0 (light) to 255 (deep)
V7: 128, V6: 44
The video display status is output to the internal system memory ($s). It is
output as shown below.
Address
Contents
$s170
Video
$s171
Video
Dithering
$s172
Video
Brightness
$s173
Video
Contrast
$s174
Video
Color strength
2
Channel number
2-25
Chapter 2 Overlap
♦ Changing the Default Settings
Use macro commands. The size, channel number, brightness, contrast and
color strength of video display can be set.
Select the [Video] macro command. The following [Video] dialog is displayed.
Command selection:
• SIZE (160 × 120, 340 × 240, 640 × 480, 640 × 240)
Determine the video window size.
• SEL_CH (1 to 4)
Specify the channel number of the input port.
• DITHER (ON, OFF)
This is valid for the V6 series only. The setting refines and corrects the video
image.
• BRIGHT (0 to 255)
Determine the brightness of video image.
• CONTRAST (0 to 255)
Determine the contrast of video image.
• COLOR (0 to 255)
Determine the color strength of video image.
• VIDEO_INF (SAVE, DEFAULT)
It is possible to save the current video display state or to reset to the default
settings. When [SAVE] is selected, the current video display state is saved
so that even if a power failure occurs, the video image can be displayed in
the same state as before. When [DEFAULT] is selected, the display state is
reset to the default.
The V series may stop for a second when this command is executed.
• Example
Channel No.
= 2 (CH2)
Size
= 640 × 480 dots
To change to the above state, you should use the following macro
commands:
Video SEL_CH 2
→ CH2 selection
Video SIZE 640 × 480 → Size selection
Video_INF SAVE
→ Saving the state in the memory
2-26
Chapter 2 Overlap
Designating the Memory Address
The following data should be set.
Video MEMORY F0 (= n)
F0 memory
n
n+1
Setting
Command No.
Setting
SIZE
0
0: 160 × 120, 1: 320 × 240,
2: 640 × 480, 3: 640 × 240
SEL_CH
1
1 to 4
DITHER
2
0: OFF, 1: ON
BRIGHT
3
0 to 255
CONTRAST
4
0 to 255
COLOR
5
0 to 255
VIDEO_INF
6
0: SAVE, 1: DEFAULT
• Example
Channel No.
= 2 (CH2)
Size
= 640 × 480 dots
To change to the above state, you should set [$u00100] for “F0” for the
[Video MEMORY] macro command and set as shown below.
Channel No. 2 selection
$u00100=1(W)
$u00101=2 (W)
Video MEMORY $u00100
→ Command (SEL_CH) selection
→ 2CH selection
→ Command execution
Window size change
$u00100=0(W)
$u00101=2 (W)
Video MEMORY $u00100
→ Command (SIZE) selection
→ 640 × 480 dots selection
→ Command execution
Saving in memory
$u00100=6(W)
$u00101=0(W)
Video MEMORY $u00100
→ Command (Video_INF) selection
→ SAVE selection
→ Command execution
2-27
Video Input (V6 with Video Input Device/For Channel Selection)
Command Name
2
Command No.
Chapter 2 Overlap
Displaying and Erasing Video Display
To display or erase the video display on the screen, the following three
commands can be used.
♦ Internal command
The video image is displayed or erased by pressing the switch (function:
Overlap) placed on the screen.
The switch setting method is the same as that for normal overlap. Refer to page
2-6.
♦ External command
The video image is displayed or erased by activation of a bit in the PLC memory.
The displaying and erasing method is the same as that for normal overlap.
Refer to page 2-6.
♦ Macro command
Using a macro command, the video image can be displayed, erased or moved.
Use the OVLP_SHOW and OVLP_POS commands. For more information, refer
to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
Memory Related to Video Input
Read area (n + 1)
Use this memory when displaying and erasing the overlap according to the
command from the PLC.
2-28
Chapter 2 Overlap
Overlap Size Limits
• There is a limit to the size of a normal, call-, or multi-overlap that can be
displayed on one screen.
2
(Unit: bytes)
Maximum
screen size
Model
V606/V606i
76,800
V608C
307,200
V6
Area 1:
Area 2:
Total:
V610C/V608CH
153,600
−
368,640
307,200
675,840
−
−
921,600
V610T
V610S
V612T
V7
Maximum overlap size
(for video)*
Maximum overlap size*
480,000
Area 1:
Area 2:
Total:
88,576
1,047,424
1,136,000
614,400
Area 1:
Area 2:
Total:
88,576
740,224
828,800
V609E
256,000
Total:
256,000
−
V7xxxS (800 × 600)
480,000
Total:
1,136,000
−
V710iT/V710T/V708C
(640 × 480)
307,200
Total:
921,600
−
* Overlap size of a screen with video settings, etc.
• Normal, call-, and multi-overlap calculation method (unit: dots)
Overlap size = Overlap width × Overlap height
• Areas 1 and 2 are discontinued areas. Depending on the overlap size, there
are cases when settings cannot be made on the overlap even if it falls within
the total acceptable value. In this case, the error message “There is an error
in the data. No. 54” is displayed on the MONITOUCH. In the case of
multi-overlap, the overlap becomes inactive and is not displayed. If the limit
is exceeded, reduce the size of the overlap.
Example: For V608
If you have three normal overlaps shown below, the total size falls within
range, and thus, there is no problem.
640
448 × 400 = 179,200 ( 2 )
448
Overlap No. 0
Overlap No. 2
480
448
448 × 400 = 179,200 ( 3 )
400
Overlap No. 1
400
640 × 480 = 307,200 ( 1 )
(Base)
1 ( = 307,200) <
= 307,200
2 + 3 ( = 358,400) <
= 368,640
2-29
Overlap Size Limits
• Set the size of the normal or call-overlap placed on the screen, or of the
multi-overlap (when displaying several multi-overlaps, the maximum size
displayed) so that the combined size does not exceed the maximum overlap
size shown here.
Chapter 2 Overlap
Please use this page freely.
2-30
Chapter 3 Switch
Switch
Outline
3
Basic Function of Switches
Outline
1. Sends ON/OFF information to the specified bit in the PLC memory.
PLC memory
.....
Turns it on.
SYSTEM
ation
form
ON in
F1
F2
F3
F4
M0 to 15
M16 to 31
M32 to 47
.....
F5
Overlap
F6
F7
RUN
STOP
POWER
PLC
2. Can execute the following processing:
1) Changing the screen display
Animation
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
F1
F1
F2
F2
Z
F3
Z
Z
Z
F3
F4
F4
Labeller
F5
Screen 1
OK
F5
F6
F6
Hard
Copy
Change
Screen
F7
F7
POWER
POWER
2) Displaying an overlap
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
F1
F1
Overlap
Display
F2
F3
F4
F2
F3
F4
F5
Overlap
F5
Overlap
F6
F7
F6
F7
POWER
POWER
3) Performing operations, and writing the results into the PLC memory
PLC memory
.....
SYSTEM
D100
F1
65+36=
F2
F3
F4
=101
D200
D300
.. ...
6
65+3
F5
Word
Operation
F6
F7
RUN
STOP
POWER
PLC
3-1
Chapter 3 Switch
4) Print, etc.
Animation
Animation
SYSTEM
F1
Z
Z
Z
Z
F2
Labeller
Z
Z
Z
Z
F3
OK
Hard
Copy
F4
Labeller
OK
Change
Screen
F5
F6
Hard
Copy
Change
Screen
F7
POWER
3. 1 and 2 at the same time
PLC memory
.....
SYSTEM
F1
ation
form
ON in
F2
F3
F4
M16 to 31
M32 to 47
.....
F5
Overlap
Turns it on.
M0 to 15
F6
F7
RUN
STOP
POWER
PLC
SYSTEM
F1
F2
Overlap
Display
F3
F4
F5
Overlap
F6
F7
POWER
4. A macro can be executed when a switch is pressed or released.
Lamps in Switches
Switches can be equipped with lamps, which light up (in ON color) when the
switch is pressed and go off (in OFF color) when it is released.
Switch
Switch
Switch
Lamp activation can be commanded from the PLC memory.
Switch
PLC memory
. . .. .
M0 to 15
M16 to 31
M32 to 47
.. . ..
Switch
RUN
STOP
PLC
When lamp activation is commanded externally, it is also possible for one lamp
to use eight patterns (or eight colors).
Example: 3 patterns
STOP
3-2
READY
RUN
Chapter 3 Switch
Notes
Do not use switches where they could cause injury to people or damage
machinery. Moreover, do not use switches as emergency switches.
3
Minimum Switch Unit
V7 series/V612/610/608
Maximum number per screen
V606/606i
768
192
14 dots
18 dots
Minimum unit
Placement
When placing two or more switches, do not allow them to overlap each other.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to do so:
Note that the overlapping area cannot be detected by the system. Only the
switch that is placed earlier becomes valid. The order of placement can be
checked by selecting [Display] → [Item List]. (
For information on the
item list, refer to Chapter 1 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Example: When switches No. 0 and 1 have been created in the ascending
order of the number:
When pressing here:
Switch No. 0
Switch No. 1
Switch No. 0
Switch No. 1
• When placing switches on an overlap:
If the following two conditions exist at the same time, “Error: Action area
setting” will be given. Remove either condition.
- X size of the switch is
minimal.
- Shift the overlap
Shift the overlap
position by 1-byte from
position by 1-byte.
the switch grids.
Minimal X size
3-3
Notes
The minimum switch unit is 18-dot × 14-dot. The maximum number of switches
that can be placed varies depending on the V series model. Refer to the chart
below.
Chapter 3 Switch
Switch Output
The V6 (standard) and V7 switch resolution is of an analog type using
resistance film.
Two or more points on the screen are pressed at the same time, the center of
the pressed points is output.If the center of the pressed points happens to be a
switch, this switch may activate. Do not press two or more points on the
screen at the same time.
This doesn’t occur with the matrix type V6
series.
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Switch
F6
F7
POWER
When two points are pressed at the same time, the switch
in the center may activate.
♦ Two-point Pressing
When two-point pressing is necessary on the V series equipped with analog
resistance film:
Use function switches. The above problem does not occur when two-point
pressing is made on a function switch and a switch on the screen. (
For
more information on the function switch, refer to “Chapter 1 System Setting.”)
In the case of matrix type V6 (model: V6
M):
1-output or 2-output of the switch can be set for each screen. Select [Edit] → [Screen
Setting] →[Screen Setting] dialog. Set [1 Output] or [2 Output] for [Switch Output].
• Switch 1-output (when [1 Output] is chosen):
The pressed switch is turned on/off. If two switches are accidentally pressed at the
same time, neither switch works.
• Switch 2-output (when [2 Output] is chosen):
The pressed switch is turned on/off. If two switches are pressed at the same time,
both switches work as intended. If three or more switches are accidentally pressed at
the same time, none of the switches work.
* However, when an area that is out of
the switch area is pressed on the
screen, the switch will not activate
regardless of [1 Output] or [2
Output].
3-4
Chapter 3 Switch
Switch Area
• [Detail] tab window of the [Display Environment] dialog
Select [Display] → [Display Environment/Change All Display Environment].
The [Display Environment] dialog is displayed.
3
Notes
• Touch area (switch operating area)
When [Area] is chosen for [Detail Display] in the [Detail] tab window, a dotted
box is shown. This dotted box shows the switch operating area. Pressing in
the switch operating area activates the switch. The area outside the
operating area in the switch is called “part area.” Pressing in this area out of
the touch area does not activate the switch.
Touch area
(switch operating area)
Part area
• When you select [DIV No.] in the [Detail] tab window, each switch’s DIV
number is displayed in the lower left, as shown below. When you select
[Memory], the [Output Memory] and [Lamp Memory] set under the switch is
displayed. As with [DIV No.] and [Area], or [Memory] and [Area], two items
can be selected at the same time. ([DIV No.] and [Memory] cannot be
selected at the same time.)
DIV No.
Memory
3-5
Chapter 3 Switch
• Click on the [Grid] tab in the [Display Environment] dialog.
When you check [ Grid Dsp.] ( ) and set [Grid Type: Switch], the switch
grids shown in the diagram below are displayed on the screen.
Switch grids
• [ Place Switch on Switch Grids]
As default, [ Place Switch on Switch Grids] is checked in the [Grid] tab
window of the [Display Environment] dialog. Switches can be
enlarged/reduced in the unit of switch grids.
When [ Place Switch on Switch Grids] is unchecked:
Switches can be enlarged/reduced in the unit of dots.
To freely place switches or perform enlargement and reduction without
involving the switch grid, uncheck [ Place Switch on Switch Grids].
When you uncheck [ Place Switch on Switch Grids] for the matrix type V6, the switch
area (operating area) placement may slip as shown below. Take caution when
performing movement, enlargement, and reduction.
3-6
Chapter 3 Switch
[Switch] Dialog
[Main] Tab Window
3
[Switch] Dialog
[OFF/ON/P3/P4/P5/P6/P7/P8]
The switch part can be previewed.
[Parts Select]
Click this button when changing the part. (
For information on changing
the part, refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[
Output Memory]
Check this item when you want to write switch activation information to the
memory. Specify the output memory address. When the internal memory or
a memory card is chosen, the processing speed will be faster.
• When the PLC memory is chosen:
- Depending on whether the specified output memory address is
bit-writable or not, the selection for [Output Action] should vary.
- Refer to the Hardware Specifications Manual whether the memory is
bit-writable or not.
3-7
Chapter 3 Switch
[
Lamp Memory]
• In the case of [ Lamp Memory]
When the switch is pressed, the lamp lights up automatically. When it is
released, it goes off. The lamp turns the ON color when it is pressed; and
turns the OFF color when it is released.
• [In the case of [ Lamp Memory]
The settings for [Lamp Memory] become active. The lamp lights up (in ON
color) automatically and goes off (in OFF color) according to the ON/OFF
status of [Lamp Memory]. For 3-notch switch parts, the lamp in the switch
can be changed in three patterns of OFF → ON → P3 (pattern 3).Likewise, it
is possible to show the lamp in the switch in eight patterns.
* Depending on the number of notches of the part, the available number of bits
vary. (Refer to page 4-3.)
For parts of three to eight patterns, the external command must be used (that
is, the [Lamp Memory] box must be checked).
When the PLC memory is used for [Lamp Memory], set up consecutive addresses for
high-speed processing.
[Output Action]
This item becomes valid when [ Output Memory] is checked. Select the
write operation to the output memory. Select from [Momentary (Momentary
W)], [Set], [Reset] and [Alternate].
• Switch output action list
Switch Action
Output Processing
Set
When the switch is pressed, the specified bit is set (ON).
(Remains ON if the switch is released)
Reset
When the switch is pressed, the specified bit is reset (OFF).
(Remains OFF if the switch is released)
Momentary
Momentary W
When the switch is held down, the specified bit is set (ON),
and when it is released, it is reset (OFF).
(Remains ON while the switch is held down)
Alternate
Each time the switch is pressed, the specified bit is alternately
set (ON) and reset (OFF).
• [Momentary] and [Momentary W]
The switch works in the same way for both settings. However, the
processing method is different depending on the memory type.
3-8
Chapter 3 Switch
• For bit-writable memory:
The operation result will be directly written on the bits of [Output Memory] as
shown below, regardless of whether [Momentary] or [Momentary W] is
chosen.
Refer to the regarding whether the memory is bit-writable or not.
3
Example: When [M10] is specified for [Output Memory]:
Write the ON state of M10.
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
SYSTEM
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
• For non-bit-writable memory:
Switch activation is processed in the unit of bits within V series, therefore, if
the non-bit-writable memory is specified for [Output Memory], different
processing methods are employed for the [Momentary]/[Momentary W]
selection. Processing when [Momentary] is chosen:
1. One word of [Output Memory] is read.
2. The result of [Output Action] is written into one word of [Output Memory].
(Other bits are kept intact.)
Example: When [D100-10] is specified for [Output Memory]:
1. Reads data in D100
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
0 0 00 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
0 0 00 0 1 0 00 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
F6
F7
2. Writes data while setting D100-10 to ON.
POWER
Processing when [Momentary W] is chosen:
The result is directly written into one word of [Output Memory]. (Other bits
are cleared.) Therefore, be sure to secure a one-word area.
Example: When [D100-10] is specified for [Output Memory]:
Writes one-word data while
setting D100-10 to ON.
0 0 00 0 1 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
In the case of matrix type V6 (model: V6
M):
Select [Screen Setting] → [Switch Output], and select [2-output]. When the output
memory is set within the same word for switches of [Momentary W], the two-point output
may not be available. Use [Momentary] in such a case. (For switch output, refer to
page 3-4.)
3-9
[Switch] Dialog
F1
Chapter 3 Switch
• For bit-writable memory, you can choose either [Momentary] or [Momentary
W]. For non-bit-writable memory, it is recommended to choose [Momentary
W] for a high-speed processing.
GD-80 series handles switch output in the unit of words as [Momentary W].
Therefore, if data of GD-80 is imported, it is recommended to choose [Momentary W].
[Draw Mode]
Select [XOR] (Highlight) or [REP] (Replace).
(
For XOR refer to page 4-8. For REP, refer to page 4-11.)
[Function]
Select the function to be provided to the switch, that is, how the switch
should work when it is pressed.
Click the [Modify] button. The [Switch Function] dialog is displayed.
Normal:
Entry:
Sample:
Memory Card:
Memo Pad:
Table Data Display:
Digital Switch:
Video:
JPEG:
For basic switch functions common to any switch
For switches to be linked with a part in entry mode
For switches to be linked with a part in sampling mode
For switches to be linked with a part in memory card
mode
Only active when linked to the memo pad mode
Linked to entry mode when making the table data
display an entry target in entry mode
For switches to be linked with a numerical data display
part
For switches to be linked with the video function
For the switches to call or delete a JPEG file
List of Switch Functions
- Respective switch functions are listed on the following pages.
- When nothing is entered under the “Linked Part” column, the switch
activates alone. When something is entered, the switch will not work
unless a link is established with a corresponding part.
- For more information, refer to the relevant pages.
3-10
Chapter 3 Switch
• Normal
Name
Auxiliary Setting Item
Contents
−
No Function
Activation of the specified bit in memory
Screen
Screen number
Screen shift to the specified screen
−
Hard Copy
Print-out of displayed screen
Setting of ON/OFF/ALT/ICON
Overlap number
See:
−
−
−
−
Page 3-21
3
Page 3-22
Page 3-23
−
Control of normal/multi-overlap
Multi-overlap
Multi number, overlap number
Multi-overlap coordinate
Page 3-25
−
Multi-overlap control
Word Operation
WORD operation dialog
Operation of memory data
−
Plus Block
Display of block numbered one greater
Minus Block
−
Display of block numbered one less
Roll Up
−
Scrolling upward
Roll Down
−
Scrolling downward
Block Call
Block number
Change of display block
Mode
Display order
Display of corresponding messages
Item Select
−
Entry select switch if data is placed in it
Return
−
Return to the previous screen
−
Page 3-26
Message mode
Graphic mode
Data block mode
Bit sampling
Data sampling
Trend sampling
Alarm display
Memory card mode
Memo pad
JPEG display
Chapter 6
Chapter 9
Chapter 7
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
Chapter 25
Chapter 12
Chapter 19
Relay mode
Relay-sub
Message mode
Bit sampling
Data sampling
Trend sampling
Relay sampling
Alarm display
Memory card mode
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
Chapter 25
Message mode
Data block mode
Graphic mode
Memo pad
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 9
Chapter 12
Relay mode
Message mode
Relay sampling
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Chapter 10
Entry mode
Chapter 7
Bit sampling
Data sampling
Trend sampling
Alarm display
Memory card mode
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
Chapter 25
3-11
[Switch] Dialog
Overlap
Linked Part
Chapter 3 Switch
Auxiliary Setting Item
Name
Contents
−
Reset
Clear in sampling buffer
Linked Part
See:
−
Chapter 10
−
Page 3-22
−
Chapter 22
−
Occupy
Communication of 1 : 1 (only available with
multi-link)
−
CF Card Format
Sampling file format in the CF card
• Entry
Name
Auxiliary Setting Item
Contents
Linked Part
See:
−
Char. Entry
Entry of text on switches
−
Write
Write of entry data into memory
−
Clear
Clear of entry
Toggle Sign
−
Inverse of entered sign (for numeric entry)
Space
−
Entry of one-byte space (for character entry)
Backspace
−
Backspace (for character entry)
DEL
−
Deletion of one character the cursor is sitting
over (for char. entry)
+1
−
Increase by one the number the cursor is
sitting over (for num. entry)
−1
−
Decrease by one (−1) the number the cursor is
sitting over (for num. entry)
→
−
Move of cursor to the left (for character entry)
←
−
Move of cursor to the right (for character entry)
↑
−
Move of cursor to the previous option (−1)
↓
−
Move of cursor to the previous option (+1)
3-12
Entry mode
(DEL key available
for alarm display)
Chapter 7
(Chapter 10)
Chapter 3 Switch
Auxiliary Setting Item
Name
Linked Part
Contents
See:
−
«
Move to the previous screen page (−1)
−
»
Move to the following screen page (+1)
Graphic Library
Entry mode
(DEL key available
for alarm display)
Chapter 7
(Chapter 10)
3
Graphic library
Character change by GLIB reading
80-compatible HEX key
selection
To be used for data converted from the GD80 series
Refer to the File Conversion Manual.
[Switch] Dialog
80-compatible HEX key
• Sample
Name
Graph Return
Auxiliary Setting Item
Contents
−
Return to the latest sampling data
Display Change
−
Display change by ON/OFF
Sample Print
−
Print of sampling buffer data
Display Order Change
−
Display order change of occurrences to begin
with the oldest or to begin with the newest
Linked Part
See:
Bit sampling
Data sampling
Trend sampling
Alarm display
Bit sampling
Alarm display
Chapter 10
Bit sampling
Data sampling
Bit sampling
Relay sampling
Alarm display
3-13
Chapter 3 Switch
• Memory Card
Auxiliary Setting Item
Name
Contents
Linked Part
See:
Memory card mode
Chapter 25
Linked Part
See:
−
File Select
File selection available from the list
−
Record Select
Record selection available from the list
Card No. Edit
Multi number
Edit mode available with the specified
multi-overlap open
Card Name Edit
Multi number
Edit mode available with the specified
multi-overlap open
File Name Edit
Multi number
File edit available with the switch lit
Record Name Edit
Multi number
File edit available with the switch lit
−
Card Format
Formatting of memory cards
−
Data transfer V > PLC
Transfer of the selected record to PLC
−
Data transfer V < PLC
Transfer of the selected record from PLC
• Memo Pad
Auxiliary Setting Item
Name
Contents
Pen Color
Pen color
Pen Size
Pen thickness
Pen color selection
Pen thickness selection (1 dot, 2 × 2 dots)
−
Line
Straight line
Delete Area
−
Deletion of the memo pad in the selected area
Delete All
−
Deletion of all memo pads on the screen
3-14
Memo pad
Chapter 12
Chapter 3 Switch
• Table Data Display
Auxiliary Setting Item
Name
Contents
Linked Part
See:
−
Move Cursor R
Cursor movement to the right within the chart
−
Move Cursor L
Cursor movement to the left within the chart
−
Table Move+
Entry mode
(Table data display)
Chapter 7
3
Table movement in the positive direction
[Switch] Dialog
−
Table Move−
Table movement in the negative (−) direction
• Digital Switch
Auxiliary Setting Item
Name
Digital Switch +
Contents
Linked Part
See:
Target digits (1 to 17)
Increment of the selected digit by one
Digital Switch −
Target digits (1 to 17)
Decrement of the selected digit by one (−1)
Chapter 3
−
Digital Switch
Toggle Sign
Digital switch
Inverse of the sign
• Video
Auxiliary Setting Item
Name
Pose
Contents
Linked Part
See:
Auto/CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
Posing of the video display that is linked
Restart
Auto/CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
Video item
Chapter 18
Posing cancel of the video display that is
linked
• JPEG
Name
Auxiliary Setting Item
Contents
See:
−
File Delete
Deletion of JPG file
File Call
Linked Part
JP/VD (0 to 32767)
Video item
JPEG display
Chapter 18
Chapter 19
Call of the specified JPG file
3-15
Chapter 3 Switch
[Character] Tab Window
Same as those in the [Lamp] dialog (
Refer to “Chapter 4 Lamp.”)
[Detail] Tab Window
3-16
[
Use ON Macro]
If you want to execute a macro command when the switch is pressed, check
this option ( ). The [ON Macro Edit...] button becomes active.
(
Refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”)
[
Use OFF Macro]
If you want to execute a macro command when the switch is released, check
this option ( ). The [OFF Macro Edit...] button becomes active.
(
Refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”)
[
Use Interlock]
If you want to attach the interlock function to the switch, check this option
( ). The setting items vary depending on the interlock condition.
Chapter 3 Switch
When bit activation is used as the condition:
[Memory]
Set the memory address for interlock.
[Condition]
Select the condition for [Memory].
[ON]:
When [Memory] is OFF, switch operation is prohibited.
When [Memory] is ON, switch operation is allowed.
[OFF]:
When [Memory] is OFF, switch operation is allowed.
When [Memory] is ON, switch operation is prohibited.
3
When the switch is ON:
When the switch is OFF:
V series
OFF
V series
[Switch] dialog
• Output Memory
• Output Action
• Interlock
• Memory
• Condition
M0
Momentary
Control
panel
M1
ON
When the switch is OFF.
Control
panel
Press
Effective
Release
Condition met
Condition not met
M1
ON
ON
Lamp ON graphic
Lamp ON graphic
Condition met
Output memory
M0 remains ON.
Condition met
M1
ON
Lamp ON graphic
When the switch is OFF.
Ineffective
OFF
Output memory
M0 is OFF.
Lamp OFF graphic
Condition met
Ineffective
M1
ON
Lamp ON graphic
Condition met
OFF
Output memory
M0 is OFF.
Lamp OFF graphic
Ineffective
M1
ON
Lamp ON graphic
OFF
Output memory
M0 is OFF.
Lamp OFF graphic
Switch flowchart (page 3-19)
[
Use Error Buzzer]
Set whether or not an error buzzer sounds when the switch is pressed while
the condition is not met.
[ Use Error Buzzer]:
The buzzer will not sound.
[ Use Error Buzzer]:
The buzzer will sound.
3-17
[Switch] Dialog
[When the switch is OFF] ([Effective]/[Ineffective])
This is valid when [Momentary/Momentary W] is selected for [Output Action].
When you remove your finger from the switch (= when the switch is turned
off), set whether or not the system should determine the condition set above.
[Effective]: The system determines the condition even when the switch is
OFF. If the condition fails, the switch will not be turned off even
when you remove your finger.
[Ineffective]: The system does not determine the condition when the switch
is OFF.
Chapter 3 Switch
When using a comparison expression as the condition:
[Data Length]
Set data length of the value used for the condition.
Word/Double Word
[Condition]
Select the condition.
[When the switch is OFF]
Same as [Condition: ON/OFF] (
Refer to page 3-19.)
[Display Type]
Set the display type for [Constant A/B] of the condition.
DEC (w/o sign) / DEC (w/ -sign) / BCD
[Condition 1/2]
Set an inequality sign as the
condition for comparison.
None/</<= / = / !=
[Constant A/B]
Set the value to be used as the
condition.
[Memory]
Specify the memory address to
be a comparator.
[
Use Error Buzzer]
Set whether or not an error buzzer sounds when the switch is pressed while
the condition is not met.
[ Use Error Buzzer]:
The buzzer will not sound.
[ Use Error Buzzer]:
The buzzer will sound.
[
OFF Buzzer]
Set whether or not a buzzer is given when the switch is pressed. When this
is checked ( ), no buzzer sounds.
[
Define MLIB Placement]
This is valid when [Multi-overlap] is selected for [Function]. (
page 3-25.)
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
Refer to
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
[Color] Tab Window
Same as those in the [Lamp] dialog (
4-7).)
3-18
Refer to “Chapter 4 Lamp” (page
Chapter 3 Switch
Flowchart
When the switch is ON (pressed):
Switch ON
No
3
Interlock
Yes
Flowchart
Interlock
condition
not satisfied
satisfied
external
Lamp
Buzzer
Lamp ON graphics
Buzzer ON
No
Yes
Buzzer ON
external
Lamp
internal
Output
Lamp ON graphics
A
ON macro
Execution
Continue
ON macro?
No
Yes
B
ON macro
End
* [Output Action] or [Macro] should be selected for execution.
* Macro B is started after macro A is finished with “SWRET.” For more
information on macro commands, refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
* The switch function is executed after the ON macro command is executed.
However, the [SET_SCRN], [SET_MOVLP], [OVLP_SHOW] and [OVLP_POS]
commands are executed after the switch function has been executed.
3-19
Chapter 3 Switch
When the switch is OFF (released):
• Set/Reset/Alternate
Switch OFF
external
Lamp
internal
Lamp OFF graphics
OFF macro
End
• Momentary/Momentary W
Switch OFF
No
Interlock
Yes
Ineffective
When the switch
is OFF
Effective
Interlock
condition
not satisfied
satisfied
external
Lamp
internal
Lamp OFF graphics
external
Lamp
Output
internal
Lamp OFF graphics
OFF macro
End
3-20
Chapter 3 Switch
Switch Function Examples
To Switch the Screen (= Screen, Return)
Use the [Function: Screen] or [Function: Return] switch.
• [Function: Screen]
Set the [Screen No.] as an auxiliary setting item. When you press the switch,
the screen of [Screen No.] that you specified is displayed.
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F1
Press the switch.
Screen 1
F2
F3
Screen No. 1
F4
F4
F5
F5
F6
F6
F7
F7
POWER
POWER
• [Function: Return]
When you press the switch, the screen that was displayed before the current
screen is displayed. You can go up to 8 screens back. However, it is not
possible to return to a screen that was changed and displayed externally.
Screen 1
SYSTEM
Screen No. 0
F1
Screen 8
Press the switch.
SYSTEM
F1
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F2
F2
F3
F3
Screen No. 1
F4
Screen No. 8
F4
F5
F5
Screen 1
Return
F6
Screen 8
Return
Press the switch.
POWER
F3
F4
F5
Return
F6
F6
F7
F7
POWER
Press the switch.
F7
Return
POWER
Press the switch.
* When the screen display reverts, the initial screen state is displayed, that is, the
state when no scrolling nor block change has been commanded.
* When the screen display is changed, all the switches and switch outputs should
be turned off. This is to prevent accidental activation of any switch that may be
caused by inadvertent contact with the screen.
It is possible to change the screen display without using the switch function but using an
external command from the PLC. (
Refer to “Chapter 1 System Setting.”)
3-21
Switch Function Examples
Screen 1
SYSTEM
Screen No. 0
3
Chapter 3 Switch
To Print out the Screen Display (= Hard Copy):
Use the [Function: Hard Copy] switch. Create the [Function: Hard Copy] switch
on the screen. When you press that switch, the displayed screen is printed.
During printing, other operations on the screen will function.
Animation
Animation
Hard
copy
Unloader
Unloader
Z
Labeller
Z
Z
Z
Press the switch.
Z
Z
Z
Z
OK
Hard
copy
Labeller
Change
Screen
OK
Hard
copy
Change
Screen
When the screen is printed with the [Function: Hard Copy] switch, that switch is also
printed out. There is a way to print with an external command if you do not want to print
out the switch. (
Refer to “Chapter 1 System Setting.”)
[Occupy]
1. Only when [Multi-link] is chosen for [Connection] by selecting [System
Setting] → [Comm. Parameter] → [Detail] tab. [Occupy] can be chosen.
2. In the case of multi-link, multiple MONITOUCHs are connected to one PLC
(n : 1). Selecting [Occupy] limits communication between one MONITOUCH
and the PLC (1 : 1). Other MONITOUCHs are stopped. On the top left
corner of these MONITOUCHs, “Occupied by other station” is displayed.
SYSTEM
Occupied by another station
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
3. Pressing the [Occupy] switch lights up the lamp in the switch. (This lamp
lights up even when [Lamp Memory] is set.) Pressing the [Occupy] switch
again resets the condition, and the lamp in the switch goes off.
Communications are started between one PLC and multiple MONITOUCHs
again.
3-22
Chapter 3 Switch
To Display Normal Overlap (= Overlap):
Use the [Function: Overlap] switch. There are auxiliary setting items [Action]
and [Overlap No.].
• [Action]
Select from [ON], [OFF], [ALT], or [ICON].
Switch Action
3
Overlap Action
When the switch is pressed, the overlap of the specified number is
displayed.
OFF
When the switch is pressed, the overlap of the specified number is
erased.
ALT
When the switch is pressed once, the overlap of the specified number is
displayed, and when pressed again, it is erased.
ICON
1. Switch movement
• Pressing the switch once makes the frame flash. When the switch is
flashing, the switch move mode is in effect.
• Pressing a position on the screen while the switch is flashing moves
the switch to the position. If part of the switch extends off the screen,
the V series automatically adjusts the position.
• When the switch is pressed again, the switch move mode is
canceled.
2. Overlap display
• Pressing the switch twice erases the switch, and the overlap of the
specified number is displayed.
• When the specified overlap disappears, the switch is displayed again.
• If the overlap is equipped with the SYSTEM switch (with [ Use
System Button] checked), pressing the top left corner of the overlap
twice erases the overlap from the screen.
• If [ Use System Button] is checked, create a [Function: Overlap =
OFF] switch with a number specification for erasing the overlap. This
switch erases the specified overlap.
When pressing a switch twice, be sure to do so within 1 second. Tap it twice
rhythmically.
• [Overlap No.]
A maximum of three overlaps can be displayed on one screen. Set [Overlap
No.] for each [Overlap] switch so that you can determine which switch acts
for which overlap.
There are three types of overlaps: normal, call and multi. The [Function:
Overlap] switch is used for displaying normal overlaps and call-overlaps. To
display multi-overlap, refer to “To Display Multi-overlap (= Multi-overlap):” (page
3-25).
3-23
Switch Function Examples
ON
Chapter 3 Switch
Example 1 [Function: Overlap = ALT]
Press the
switch.
Change
Screen
Animation
Animation
SYSTEM
F1
Unloader
SYSTEM
F1
(1)
F2
F2
Change Screen
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
F3
RUN Manual
Screen
Op.
F4
Labeller
OK
Data
Disp.
Graph
Disp.
Z
Z
Animation
Disp.
F5
Instructions
F6
Change
Screen
Change
Screen
F3
F4
OK
(2)
F5
Z
F7
F6
F7
Change
Screen
Press the
switch again.
POWER
POWER
Example 2 When the overlap is displayed, the information that the switch was
pressed is transmitted to the PLC.
Set [Output Memory] in the [Function: Overlap = ON] switch.
Select from [Momentary W], [Set] and [Alternate].
It is possible to bring up an overlap without using the switch function but using an
external command from the PLC. (
Refer to “Chapter 2 Overlap.”)
To Erase the Overlap (= Overlap)
Use the [Function: Overlap = OFF] switch. This is valid for normal, call- and
multi-overlaps. There are auxiliary setting items [Action] and [Overlap No.].
• [Action]
Select [OFF].
• [Overlap No.]
A maximum of three overlaps can be displayed on one screen. Set [Overlap
No.] for each [Overlap] switch so that you can determine which switch acts
for which overlap.
It is possible to erase an overlap without using the switch function but using an external
command from the PLC. (
For overlaps, refer to “Chapter 2 Overlap.”)
3-24
Chapter 3 Switch
To Display Multi-overlap (= Multi-overlap):
Use the [Function: Multi-overlap] switch. There are auxiliary setting items
[Overlap No.], [Multi No.] and [Placement].
• [Overlap No.]
A maximum of three overlaps can be displayed on one screen. Set [Overlap
No.] for each [Overlap] switch so that you can determine which switch acts
for which overlap.
• [Placement]
You can set the display location of the overlap screen (on the multi-overlap
edit window) when it is displayed on the screen.
Overlap Coordinates with the V6 series:
(0, 0) is the origin point, with 4-dot intervals in the X direction, and 1-dot intervals in the
Y direction.
Bring up the [Detail] tab window of the [Switch] dialog.
- [ Define MLIB Placement]
The [Placement] button becomes active. When you click the [Placement]
button, the mouse cursor is displayed.
When you click on the desired location on the screen, the MLIB mark is
displayed on the screen. This mark belongs in the upper left of the
overlap screen.
MLIB
- [ Define MLIB Placement]
The overlap is displayed in the same location as on the multi-overlap edit
window.
It is possible to bring up an overlap without using the switch function but using an
external command from the PLC. (
For overlaps, refer to “Chapter 2 Overlap.”)
3-25
Switch Function Examples
• [Multi No.]
For multi-overlap, the actual overlap screen should not be created and
registered on screen, but in multi-overlap edit window. [Multi No.] sets which
screen to call up among those which were registered on the multi-overlap
edit window.
3
Chapter 3 Switch
To Process Arithmetic Operation:
When the switch is pressed, a specified arithmetic operation can be processed.
In the [Main] tab window of the [Switch] dialog, select [Function: Word
Operation]. The [Word Operation] tab window is displayed. The contents are
described as follows:
A
B
C
[Mode]
Select the desired operation mode from eight options: [Transfer], [Add],
[Subtract], [Multiple], [Divide], [OR], [AND] and [XOR]. Refer to the table
below.
Mode
Contents
Transfer (A → B)
Operation memory [A] is transferred to operand memory [B].
Add (A + B → C)
Operation memory [A] and operand memory [B] are
arithmetically computed, and its result is written in output
memory [C].
In the case of divisions, the quotient is written in output
memory [C] and the remainder is written in [C + 1].
Subract (A − B → C)
Multiple (A ∗ B → C)
Divide (A ÷ B → C)
OR (A ∪ B → C)
AND (A ∩ B → C)
XOR (A @ B → C)
Operation memory [A] and operand memory [B] are logically
computed, and its result is written in output memory [C].
[Operation Type]
This option becomes valid when [Add], [Subtract], [Multiple] or [Divide] is
chosen for [Mode]. Choose BCD (binary coded decimal) or DEC (decimal)
for the format for writing into the specified memory.
[Operation Memory] (= [A])
Specify the operation memory address.
3-26
Chapter 3 Switch
[Operand Memory] (= [B])
Specify the operand memory address.
[Output Memory] (= [C])
This item becomes active in instances other than [Mode: Transfer]. Specify
the memory address where the operation result is output.
[Comparison]
Set the condition for executing word operation.
3
• [None]
Operation is executed when the switch is pressed.
When the condition is met:
When the condition is not met:
Switch Function Examples
• [=, ≠, <, >, ≤, ≥]
Conditional expression:
[Comparison Memory] [Comparison]
[Constant]
Word operation is executed.
Word operation is not executed.
[Comparison Memory]
Specify the memory address that stores a comparator.
[Constant]
Specify a constant.
Example:
Comparison:
Comparison Memory:
Constant:
<
D100
500
(Conditional expression)
= [Comparison Memory] [Comparison] [Constant]
=
D100
<
500
When data in D100 is less than “500,” operation is executed.
♦ Notes
If the value in output memory [C] is changed by an external command, the latter
value has priority.
The MONITOUCH processes operations in the following order:
1. Data is read out from [Operation Memory] and [Operand Memory].
2. Operation processing
3. The result is written into [Output Memory].
3-27
Chapter 3 Switch
Digital Switch
A digital switch can be created easily with [Num. Data Display] and [Switch]
parts.
+
+
+
+
1 2 3 4
-
-
-
Switch [Function: Digital Switch]
Num. Data Display [Display Function: Digital Switch]
-
♦ Digital Switch Setting
Switch
[Division No.]
Specify the division number for the related numerical data display.
[Function]
[Digital Switch] Tab Window
• Digital Switch +:
• Digital Switch −:
• Digital Switch Toggle Sign:
Increases the selected digit by one.
Decreases the selected digit by one (−1).
Inverses the sign.
Num. Data Display
[Division No.]
Specify the division number for the related switch.
[Display Function]
Select [Digital Switch].
[
Move up/down the figure]
• When this item is unchecked:
Only the selected digit changes.
• When this item is checked:
A carry is performed.
• When [Alarm] is selected on the [Detail] tab window, the maximum and minimum
values can be set.
• [Use Operation] and [Specify Range] can be used.
3-28
Chapter 3 Switch
Example: Without a carry
- Without sign or with + sign
Pressing the [+] key on the first digit changes “129” → “120.”
Pressing the [−] key on the first digit changes “120” → “129.”
Only the third digit changes in order
of 0, 1, 2, 3, ... 9, 0, 1.
+
+
3
+
1 2 0
-
Only the first digit changes in order of
0, 9, 8, 7, ... 2, 1, 0.
- With − sign
Pressing the [+] key on the first digit changes as shown below.
“−008” → “−009” → “000” → “001” → “002”
Change the sign using a switch ([Function: Digital Switch Toggle Sign]).
Example: With a carry
- Without sign or with + sign
Pressing the [+] key on the first digit changes
“129” → “130.”
Pressing the [−] key on the first digit changes
“120” → “119.”
- With − sign
Pressing the [+] key on the first digit changes
“−129” → “−128.”
Pressing the [−] key on the first digit changes
“−129” → “−130.”
Carry UP
+
+
+
1 2 0
-
-
-
Carry DOWN
♦ Custom Parts
The custom parts (file name: Digital_SW.V7F) containing registered digital
switches are supplied by us.
With the V6 series, the file name is “Digital_SW.V6F.”
Usage
1. Select [Tool] → [Custom Part] → [Open]. Open the “Digital_SW.V7F” file.
Drag the desired digital switch to the screen edit window.
2. While the digital switch is chosen, right-click it and choose [Change All].
3. The [Change All] dialog is displayed. Check [
and specify a division number not in use.
Change All Division No.],
4. When changing numerical data display memory, double-click the desired
display. The [Num. Display] dialog is displayed.
3-29
Switch Function Examples
-
Chapter 3 Switch
♦ Notes
If multiple numerical data display parts (function: digital switch) of the same
division number exist, the part that is placed first becomes valid.
Switch Coordinate Information (V7)
The current touch switch information is output to system memory addresses
$s900 to 902. This information is useful when linking an image processing
device.
X: 320 Y: 300
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
• $s900
Touch switch status
15 14 13 12 11
0
0
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0: Switch OFF
1: Switch ON
Not used
• $s901
X coordinate (absolute)
• $s902
Y coordinate (absolute)
3-30
1: Dragging
Chapter 4 Lamp
Lamp
Outline
• Lamps are turned on/off in response to bit activation in the PLC.
PLC memory
4
SYSTEM
F 1
.....
F 2
F 3
LAMP
F 4
F 5
Outline
ON
M 0~15
n
matio
infor
F 6
M16~31
F 7
M32~47
POWER
RUN
.....
RUN
. . .
. . .
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
PLC
• Lamp colors to be used when a bit is set and reset can be specified.
Different text can be displayed when the lamp is turned on and off. (When
[REP] is chosen for [Draw Mode])
OFF
ON
• It is also possible for one lamp to use three kinds of graphics and colors,
such as “Standby” → “Executing” → “Finished.” (= “3-notch”, “P3”)
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
Standby
Executing
Finished
• Also, it is possible for one lamp to use max. eight kinds of graphics and
colors (= “8 notch”, “P8”).
White
Yellow
Sky blue
Green
Violet
Red
Blue
Black
4-1
Chapter 4 Lamp
[Lamp] Dialog
[Lamp] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[OFF/ON/P3/P4/P5/P6/P7/P8]
The lamp part can be previewed.
[Part Select]
Click this button when changing the part. (
For information on changing
the part, refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Function]
• Normal
The lamp works independently irrespective of other parts.
• Mode
Messages can be displayed on the lamp in a link with relay or message
mode.
[Display Order]
When [Mode] is chosen, [Display Order] becomes active. Specify the order
in displaying messages. (
For more information on the message
display, refer to “Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message).”)
4-2
Chapter 4 Lamp
[Lamp Memory]
Specify a memory address for illuminating the lamp. Depending on the
number of notches of the part, the required number of bits vary. The number
of notches can be known from the number of tabs in the [Lamp] dialog.
4
Lamp Memory: n (bits)
n+6
n+5
n+4
n+3
n+2
n+1
n
Graphic
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OFF
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
ON
0
0
0
0
0
1
−
P3
0
0
0
0
1
-
−
P4
0
0
0
1
−
−
−
P5
0
0
1
−
−
−
−
P6
0
1
−
−
−
−
−
P7
1
−
−
−
−
−
−
P8
Notches
2 notches
3 notches
4 notches
5 notches
6 notches
7 notches
8 notches
0: Bit OFF, 1: Bit ON, −: Bit ON/OFF ignore
Example:
When the 3-notch lamp shown below is placed:
Lamp Memory: M100
OFF
ON
M100=1
P3
SYSTEM
F1
M101=1
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F2
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
F5
F6
P3
F7
POWER
F6
F7
POWER
If you place multiple lamps on the screen allocating memory in consecutive
addresses, check the notch number of selected parts. The required number of
bits depends on the notch number.
When the PLC memory is used for [Lamp Memory], set up consecutive addresses for
high-speed processing.
4-3
[Lamp] Dialog
The relation between [Lamp Memory] and the number of notches is shown
below:
Chapter 4 Lamp
[Draw Mode]
• XOR (highlight)
When the lamp memory is ON, the frame and text are displayed in the XOR
color. (
Refer to page 4-8.)
• REP (replace)
The colors specified in the [Color] tab window are used. (
4-11.)
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
4-4
Refer to page
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
Chapter 4 Lamp
♦ [Character] Tab Window
4
[Lamp] Dialog
[No. 0 to No. 3]
A maximum of four lines of text can be placed in one lamp. Clicking in a text
entry field brings up the text entry cursor. Enter text within the X size of the
lamp part.
When [REP] is chosen for [Draw Mode], different text can be used for
ON/OFF/P3/P4/P5/P6/P7/P8. Change the lamp review and set the desired text.
[Char. Prop.]
The text property can be set for each text line. Set the text property, and
enter the text for the [No. *] field. The contents are described as follows:
• [Char. Type]
Select from the following four text styles.
Normal: Plain typeface is used.
1/4:
8 × 8 dots
* Available for one-byte characters only
Bold:
Bold typeface is used. (The enlargement factor must be “1 : 1.”)
Shadow: Shadowed typeface is used.
• [Foreground]/[Background]
Select character colors.
Foreground color
1234
Background color
4-5
Chapter 4 Lamp
• [ Transparent]
Check the box if you want to use transparency for the text background.
Transparent
Transparent
Background color
Foreground color
Foreground color
1234
1234
• [ Italic]
Check the box if you want to use italics.
Example: [ Italic] (= no italics)
[ Italic] (= italics)
12345
12345
• [Rotate] (Normal/L90°/180°/R90°)
When rotating the text, choose an option from [Normal], [L90], [180] and
[R90].
A
A
A
A
• [Direction] (RGT/DW/LFT/UP)
Choose a text alignment direction.
12345
54321
RGT
LFT
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
UP
DW
• [Enlarge] (X, Y: 1 to 8)
Specify enlargement factors for X and Y.
[Text]
Text can be selected from the text file. Clicking [Text] brings up the file
reading dialog. Select the desired text file. (
Refer to Chapter 3 in the
Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Centering]
The text in a lamp will be center-aligned.
The text can also be center-aligned by selecting [Edit] → [Align] → [Switch/lamp
Centering]. (
Refer to Chapter 1 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Copy Characters]
The text and its property of the OFF (or ON/P3/P4/P5/P6/P7/P8) lamp are
copied to the ON lamp (P3 to P8).
4-6
Chapter 4 Lamp
♦ [Color] Tab Window
Part file: Std.V7P / Std.V6P (No. 0001 to 0003)
Parts_j.V7P / Parts_j.V6P (No. 0000 to 0003)
4
[Lamp] Dialog
[Frame Color] [ON Color] [OFF Color]
Specify the desired colors.
[Frame Type] (No Frame/Type 1/Type 2/Type 3)
It is possible to select part 0 to 3 without opening the part list by pressing the
[Parts Select] switch.
Part file: Std.V7P / Std.V6P (No. 0000, 0004 and later)
Parts_j.V7P / Parts_j.V6P (No. 0004 and later)
[ON/OFF/P1/P2/P3/P4/P5/P6/P7]
Select the tab and set the desired colors.
4-7
Chapter 4 Lamp
Draw Mode: XOR
Part file: Std.V7P / Std.V6P (No. 0001 to 0003)
Parts_j.V7P / Parts_j.V6P (No. 0000 to 0003)
♦ Character
When setting text on the lamp, the same text is displayed for OFF and ON. Set
the text for [No. 0 to 3] in the [Character] tab window.
♦ Color
• OFF frame color / ON color / OFF color
Specify the desired colors in the [Color] tab window. The specified colors are
used. (
Refer to page 4-7.)
• OFF text color
Specify the desired colors by pressing the [Char. Prop.] button in the
[Character] tab window. The specified colors are used. (
Refer to page
4-5.)
• ON frame color
It is not possible to specify the frame color when the lamp is ON. It is
automatically determined by XOR operation.
ON color
XOR
OFF color
XOR = ON frame color
Frame color
• ON text color
It is not possible to specify the text color when the lamp is ON. It is
automatically determined by XOR operation. The text during ON is the same
as that during OFF.
4-8
Chapter 4 Lamp
ON color
XOR
OFF color
XOR = ON text color
Text color
This is the case with text graphics placed on the screen.
Example:
♦ OFF color: yellow
ON color: red
Frame color: white
Frame color to be used when the lamp is turned on:
XOR
green C
ON color (red) B
XOR
(for setting)
Magenta = Frame color when lamp ON
Frame color (white) D
B
(for setting)
D
Bla Blu
R Mag Gre C
Y
W
Bla Bla Blu
R Mag Gre C
Y
W
W
Y
Blu Blu Bla Mag R
R
R Mag Bla Blu
Mag Mag R
C Gre Gre C
A
Gre
Blu Bla
C
Gre
Y
W Gre C
W
Y
Y
W Bla Blu
W
Y
C
C
Y
Y
W Gre C
W
W
Y
C
C
Gre
R Mag
Blu Bla Mag R
R Mag Bla Blu
Gre Mag R
Blu Bla
C
♦ OFF color: yellow
ON color: red
OFF text color: blue
Text color to be used when the lamp is turned on:
OFF color (yellow) A
(for setting)
ON color (red) B
(for setting)
XOR
green C
XOR
Light blue = Text color when lamp ON
OFF text color (blue) D
D
(for setting)
B
Bla Blu
R Mag Gre C
Y
W
Bla Bla Blu
R Mag Gre C
Y
W
W
Y
Blu Blu Bla Mag R
R
R Mag Bla Blu
Mag Mag R
C
Gre Gre C
C
A
C
Gre
Blu Bla
C
Gre
Y
W Gre C
W
Y
Y
W Bla Blu
W
Y
Y
Y
W Gre C
W
W
Y
C
C
Gre
R Mag
Blu Bla Mag R
R Mag Bla Blu
Gre Mag R
Blu Bla
C
Bla: black Blu: blue R: red Mag: magenta Gre: green C: cyan Y: yellow W: white
4-9
Draw Mode: XOR
OFF color (yellow) A
(for setting)
4
Chapter 4 Lamp
Part file: Std.V7P / Std.V6P (No. 0000, 0004 and later)
Parts_j.V7P / Parts_j.V6P (No. 0004 and later)
♦ Character
When setting text on the lamp, the same text is displayed for OFF and ON.
Set the text for [No. 0 to 3] in the [Character] tab window.
♦ Color
• OFF color
Specify the desired colors in the [Color] (OFF) tab window. The specified
colors are used. (
Refer to page 4-7.)
• ON color
The color specified in the [Color] (ON) tab window and the OFF color
(explained above) are XORed. Check the color with the preview image.
• P3 to P8 color
As with the ON color, the color specified in the tab window and the OFF color
are XORed.
This is the case with text graphics placed on the screen.
♦ Note on XOR
The V7 series (32k colors) and the V6 series (128 colors) use different color
palettes; therefore, if the same colors are set, the XOR color may not be the
same except for the basic eight colors.
4-10
Chapter 4 Lamp
Draw Mode: REP
Part file: Std.V7P / Std.V6P (No. 0001 to 0003)
Parts_j.V7P / Parts_j.V6P (No. 0000 to 0003)
4
Draw Mode: REP
♦ Character
When placing text on a lamp in “REP” draw mode, the following two manners
are available.
Display of different text when the lamp is ON and OFF:
• OFF text
Set the text for [No. 0 to 3] in the [Character] (OFF) tab window.
• ON text
Set the text for [No. 0 to 3] in the [Character] (ON) tab window.
Stop
Lamp OFF
[Character type: Normal]
Run
The text property can be set as shown.
Lamp ON
[Character type: Bold]
Display of the same text when the lamp is ON and OFF:
• OFF text
Set the text for [No. 0 to 3] in the [Character] (OFF) tab window.
• ON text
Set nothing in the [Character] (ON) tab window. The OFF text is displayed
on the lamp when the lamp is ON.
Error
Error
4-11
Chapter 4 Lamp
♦ Color
• Frame color (ON/OFF), ON color, OFF color
Specify the desired colors in the [Color] tab window. The specified colors are
used. The same frame color is used when the lamp is ON and OFF.
(
Refer to page 4-7.)
• OFF text color
Specify the desired color in the [Character] (OFF) tab window. The specified
color is used. (
Refer to page 4-5.)
• ON text color
Specify the desired color in the [Character] (ON) tab window. The specified
color is used.
Part file: Std.V7P / Std.V6P (No. 0000, 0004 and later)
Parts_j.V7P / Parts_j.V6P (No. 0004 and later)
Almost the same as part No. 0 to 3 (
Different points:
Refer to page 4-11.)
• ON frame color/ON color
Specify the desired colors in the [Color] (ON) tab window. The specified
colors are used. A color different from the OFF color can be set.
• For P3 to P8, the specified colors are shown in the preview image.
♦ Notes on REP
• When the OFF text color and the ON color are the same, the text cannot be
shown when the lamp is turned on.
• When text is entered as graphics, it is not displayed when the lamp is turned
on. Once the lamp is turned on, the text is not displayed unless the screen is
changed.
Place text graphics.
RUN
Initial OFF state
ON state
OFF state
RUN
RUN
The text is not displayed when the lamp is once turned on.
The text is displayed by opening the screen again.
4-12
Chapter 4 Lamp
Other Notes
• The number of lamps
A maximum of 768 lamps (192 lamps with V606) can be created on one
screen. (
Refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
• When placing two or more lamps on one screen, do not allow them to
overlap each other. If it is unavoidable to do so, note the following point
when creating the screen.
M0 = 0
M0 = 0
M0
REP
XOR
M1 = 0
M1 = 0
M1
REP
XOR
REP
XOR
M1 = 0
M1 = 0
M1
REP
XOR
M0 = 0
M0 = 0
M0
REP
XOR
M1 = 1
M1 = 1
M1
REP
XOR
M0 = 1
M0 = 1
M0
REP
XOR
M1 = 1
M1 = 1
M1
REP
XOR
* When XOR is selected, the
overlapping section is shown
in the XOR color.
* When REP is selected, the part
that changes last (0 → 1 or 1 → 0)
is displayed on top.
When M0 = 0 in the above, the
lamps are shown as below.
M0 = 0
M0
REP
M1 = 1
M1
REP
4-13
Other Notes
M0 = 1
M0 = 1
M0
4
Chapter 4 Lamp
Please use this page freely.
4-14
Chapter 5 Data Display
Data Display
Outline
The “data display” function allows the MONITOUCH V series to display data in
the PLC memory in real time. This function can indicate data in numerals
(numerical data display), in characters (character display), or in the form of
messages (message display). The V series also has the function to display
tabulated data (table data display).
5
Outline of Numerical Data Display
PLC memory
SYSTEM
F1
.................
F2
F3
12345
12345
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
V series
PLC
• It is possible to display data in a different color when it exceeds or falls short
of the specified range. This setting can easily attract the operators’ attention
to the situation.
Target
100
Count
80
When the count exceeds the
target, the count number color
is changed.
Target
100
Count
150
• It is possible to calculate data read from the PLC in MONITOUCH, and to
display its result on the MONITOUCH screen.
PLC memory
.................
MONITOUCH executes the following
calculation to read data “789” and
displays the result.
[−1000] + [789] × [1] = −211
SYSTEM
F1
F2
-211
789
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
V series
PLC
5-1
Outline
• Numerical data read from PLC is displayed in real time on the MONITOUCH
screen in any of the following formats: DEC (w/o sign); DEC (w/ −sign); DEC
(w/ +/−sign); HEX (hexadecimal); OCT (octal); BIN (binary) and [Real
Number (floating decimal point)].
Chapter 5 Data Display
• In addition to using of “numerical data display” ([Num. Data Display])
independently, it can also be linked with another part. For example, in order
to indicate data as a percent in the statistic graph as shown below, it is
necessary to link [Num. Data Display] with [Stat. Graph]. Then % data
automatically reflects changes along with the data in the statistic graph.
Production Ratio
Result
%
Product A
350 42.94%
Product B
209 25.64%
Product C
156 19.14%
Product D
100 12.26%
Stat. Graph
Num. Data Display
Linked
Outline of Character Display
• Data read from the PLC is displayed in the form of characters on the
MONITOUCH screen in real time. ANK codes are put into one-byte
characters, and Shift JIS codes are put into two-byte characters in case of
Japanese.
PLC memory
SYSTEM
F1
.................
F2
F3
ABCDE
ABCDE
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
F5
F6
F7
POWER
V series
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
F4
PLC
• In addition to using of “character display” ([Char. Display]) independently, it
can also be linked with another part. For example, when a character key set
up in the entry mode is pressed, the character is entered in the [Char.
Display] part specified as “entry target.” This is possible by linking [Char.
Display] with [Entry Mode].
Text Entry Screen
5-2
A
F
K
Character display (entry target)
ABCDEFGH
Text A
Text B
Text C
Text D
abcdefgh
Linked
OPQRSTUV
opqrstuv
O
T
U
Y
a
e
j
o
t
x
<-- -->
UP DW
B
G
K
P
Z
b
f
k
p
u
y
C
H
L
Q
V
#
c
g
l
q
v
z DEL BS
D
I
M
R
W
%
c
h
m
r
w
* +BK -BK
E
J
N
S
X
&
d
i
n
s ENTER CLEAR
Keys created in the entry mode
Character display works as the entry target
for characters entered through the keys created
in the entry mode.
Chapter 5 Data Display
Outline of Message Display
• Required messages should be registered within MONITOUCH preliminarily.
When a message number is specified in the PLC memory, the corresponding
message is displayed on the MONITOUCH screen in real time.
Message Editing
AAAAAA
BBBBBB
CCCCCC
DDDDDD
EEEEEE
FFFFFF
GGGGGG
HHHHHH
I I I I I I
J J J J J J
KKKKKK
No.20
QQQQQQ
PLC memory
SYSTEM
.................
No.0
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
No.7
No.8
No.9
No.10
F1
F2
KKKKKK
10
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
F3
F4
F5
5
F6
F7
POWER
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
V series
Outline
PLC
• One-line message can be displayed in any position desired.
AAAAAA
JJJJJJ
DDDDDD
Outline of Table Data Display
• Multiple data can be displayed in tabular form with ease.
• You can choose any from [Num. Data Display], [Char. Display], [Message
Display] and [Text in Drawing] for data display.
• Property modification for multiple data displays is possible at one time.
• Average, maximum, minimum, and total values can be displayed.
• Table data display can be set as the entry target in the entry mode.
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
Average
1
100
150
120
130
200
140
2
120
100
180
190
200
158
3
130
120
160
100
150
132
4
50
60
40
150
20
64
5-3
Chapter 5 Data Display
Num. Data Display
[Num. Display] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Memory]
Data contained in the specified memory address is displayed in numerals on
the screen.
5-4
Chapter 5 Data Display
♦ [Type] Tab Window
[Display Function]
• [No]
Data in [Memory] is displayed as is.
• Options other than [No]
The numerical data display part works as specified when it is linked with
other parts. For more information, refer to the section of the linked part.
Display Function
Attached Data
Linked Part
See:
No
−
−
This chapter
Entry Display
Max. Display
Min. Display
−
Entry Target
Order
Stat. Graph % Display
No. in Stat. Graph
Entry mode
(numerals)
Chapter 7
Statistic graph
Chapter 8
−
Trend sampling
Data sampling
Bit sampling
Chapter 10
Memory Card No.
Memory Card File No.
Memory Card Record No.
−
Memory Card
Chapter 25
Sample Buffer Mean Display
Sample Buffer Max. Display
Sample Buffer Min. Display
Sample Buffer Total Display
Sample Buffer Word No.
Sample Buffer No.
Trend sampling
Data sampling
Chapter 10
Digital Switch
Move up/down the figure
Switch
Chapter 3
[Order]
This is valid when [Entry Target] is selected for [Display Function]. (
more information on the entry target, refer to “Chapter 7 Entry Mode.”)
[Digits]
Specify the number of digits for numerical
data display. Depending on the [Display
Type] selection, the available data range
varies as shown on the right. If the
decimal point is included in numbers, it
does not need to be counted.
Example: 99.9 → 3 digits
Num. Data Display
Sample Count Display
Sample Time Display
5
For
Display
Type
Digits
Decimal
Point
DEC
1 to 10
0 to 9
HEX
1 to 8
−
OCT
1 to 11
−
BIN
1 to 32
−
If a value exceeding the set number of digits is keyed in:
Model
DEC
HEX/OCT/BIN
Display
−−−
Numbers from the right
−−−
010
Ex.: Data Length: 1-Word
Digits:
3
Entered value: 1010
5-5
Chapter 5 Data Display
[Decimal Point]
Specify the decimal place. When no decimal point is required, set “0.”
[Display Type]
Select the code for displaying data that is read in the code specified by [Input
Type].
• DEC (w/o sign)
n
n+1
MSB
LSB
High-order word
Low-order word
1 word: 1 to 5 digits
(0 to 65535: decimal)
2 words: 1 to 10 digits
(0 to 4294967295: decimal)
• DEC (w/ −sign)
n
n+1
MSB
LSB
High-order word
Low-order word
1 word: 1 to 5 digits
(−32768 to 32767: decimal)
2 words: 1 to 10 digits
(−2147483648 to 2147483647: decimal)
• DEC (w/ +−sign)
n
n+1
MSB
LSB
High-order word
Low-order word
1 word: 1 to 5 digits
(−32768 to +32767: decimal)
2 words: 1 to 10 digits
(−2147483648 to +2147483647: decimal)
• HEX
n
n+1
MSB
16
7
LSB
16
6
16
5
16
4
16
3
16
2
16
1
160
1 word: 1 to 4 digits
(0 to FFFF: hexadecimal)
2 words: 1 to 8 digits
(0 to FFFFFFFF: hexadecimal)
5-6
Chapter 5 Data Display
• OCT
n+1
n
MSB
8
7
LSB
8
6
8
5
8
4
8
3
8
2
8
1
80
1 word: 1 to 6 digits
(0 to 177777: octal)
2 words: 1 to 11 digits
(0 to 37777777777: octal)
• BIN (binary)
n+1
n
MSB
LSB
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23
22 21 20 19 18 17 16
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Num. Data Display
1 word: 1 to 16 digits
(0 to 11111111111111111: binary)
2 words: 1 to 32 digits
(0 to 11111111111111111111111111111111: binary)
[Input Type]
Choose the code to be used when reading from the PLC memory.
• BCD
• BIN
• FLOAT (floating decimal point): IEEE 32 Bit Single Precision Real
Number Type
Range: ±9.9E−32 to ±9.9E32
The final number will be rounded off.
[FLOAT] (floating point) is dealt with as [IEEE 32 Bit Single Precision Real Number
Type]. With the PLC that uses other type, real number cannot be used because the
values may not be displayed correctly. Check the PLC manual.
[Data Length]
Choose data length for the memory to be used.
[1 word]: word
[2 word]: double-word
Depending on the [Display Type] selection, the available range of data varies.
Refer to the following list for selection.
5-7
Chapter 5 Data Display
• [Display Type] and available ranges
Code
[
1-word Range
2-word Range
DEC (w/o sign)
0 to 65535
0 to 4294967295
DEC (w/ −sign)
−32768 to 32767
−2147483648 to 2147483647
DEC (w/ ±sign)
−32768 to +32767
−214748648 to +2147483647
HEX
0 to FFFF
0 to FFFFFFFF
OCT
0 to 177777
0 to 37777777777
BIN
0 to 1111111111111111
0 to 11111111111111111111111111111111
Zero Suppress]
Choose whether or not to use the zero suppress function. When using the
zero suppress function, check the box ( ).
Example: For “000123”:
Space
[
[
Zero Suppress] (flush right) →
123
Zero Suppress]
→ 000123
[Flush L]/[Flush R]
This setting is valid when [ Zero Suppress] is checked. Choose either
flush-left or flush-right for aligning numbers.
Example: When “123” is shown in a 5-digit data display area:
Flush-left → 123
Flush-right →
123
[ Specify Range]
Data in [Input Range] that the PLC has
read is automatically converted into
[Display Range] that is set. It is possible to
eliminate correction program of the data
that the PLC has read when displaying
temperature, rotation speed, etc.
PLC
V series
4000
100
0
0
[Input Range]
Specify the input data range on the PLC side.
[Display Range]
Specify the data range that is displayed on MONITOUCH.
If data in the PLC memory × the maximum value of [Display Range] is greater
than double-word, it cannot be displayed correctly.
Example: Num. Data Display
When data in the PLC memory address D100 is “2000” with [Input
Range: 0 to 4,000] and [Display Range: 0 to 100], “50” is displayed on
MONITOUCH.
5-8
Chapter 5 Data Display
Example: Entry mode
When “25” is entered through the keypad with [Input Range: 0 to 4,000]
and [Display Range: 0 to 100], “1,000” is written to the PLC memory
address D100.
Note on use in entry mode
When this is used in entry mode, some error may arise. If the input range is
wider than the display range, the entered value is displayed correctly.
Input Range > Display Range
Input value (entered by keys)
[Display Range]
The input value is correct.
Input Range < Display Range
The input value is not correct.
PLC
Input value (V6)
Input value (entered by keys)
PLC
[Input Range]
[Display Range]
[Display Range]
[Input Range]
Input value (V6)
[Display Range]
10000
10000
100
2500
100
250
25
0
0
25
0
0
10000
100
2
0
200
5
0
[Detail] tab window for the [Num. Data Display] part
• [Use Operation]
The result of performing the operation to the entered value is displayed.
Use this item when adding an offset to the entered value.
• [Alarm]
The displayed value is compared with the maximum and minimum values.
Example:
With [Input Range: 0 to 4000], [Display Range: 0 to 50], [Alarm/Max.: 40] and
[Alarm/Min.: 10], the upper limit alarm is given when data in the PLC memory
address D100 is “3200” and the lower limit alarm is given when it is “800.”
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window
Using the following macro command, the numerical data display property can be
changed.
[CHG_DATA] command
Also, the numerical data display can be displayed or erased using the following macro
command.
[DSP_DATA] command
Refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
5-9
Num. Data Display
When comparing the input range with the display range, remove the decimal
point from the display range.
Example: With [Input Range: 0 to 10000] and [Display Range: 0.00 to
500.00], the display range is converted into “0 to 50000”; since the
input range < the display range, the entered value may not be
converted correctly.
Chapter 5 Data Display
[Char. Type]
Select from the following four text styles.
Normal: Plain typeface is used.
1/4:
8 × 8 dots
* Available for one-byte characters only
Bold:
Bold typeface is used. (The enlargement factor must be “1 : 1.”)
Shadow: Shadowed typeface is used.
[
Transparent]
Check the box if you want to use transparency for the text background.
Transparent
Transparent
Background color
Foreground color
Foreground color
1234
1234
With the V6 series:
• Part where transparency should not be used
If the [ Transparent] is checked, renewed data overlaps with the old. If the
[ Transparent] is unchecked, the old data is cleared by the background color and
then data is drawn in the foreground color.
Transparent
Transparent
Background color
Foreground color
Foreground color
1234
1234
When data is changed:
5678
1234
When data is changed:
5678
• Part with a painted box on the background
If the [ Transparent] box is checked, the old data is cleared by the painted box
and the data is drawn in the foreground color. Therefore, the new data can be
drawn while the old data does not remain.
Transparent
Transparent
Painted box
Painted box
Background color
Foreground color
1234
When data is changed:
5678
Foreground color
1234
When data is changed:
5678
When [Shadow] is chosen for [Char. Type], transparency cannot be set. However,
drawing is performed in the same way as [ Transparent]. If no painted box is on
the background, the new data overlaps with the old.
In the case of a numerical data display part with painted box, it is recommended that you
specify the box color for the background color ([Char. Prop.] tab window in the [Num.
Display] dialog), and to uncheck [Transparent]. With transparency, flickering will occur
when the displayed data changes. Also the display speed will decrease.
5-10
Chapter 5 Data Display
[
Italic]
Check the box if you want to use italics.
Example: [ Italic] (= no italics)
[ Italic] (= italics)
12345
12345
[Char. Size] (1-Byte/2-Byte)
Choose one-byte or two-byte for numerals.
[Rotate]
When rotating the text, choose an option from [Normal], [L90], [180] and
[R90].
A
A
A
A
[Direction]
Choose a text alignment direction.
54321
RGT
LFT
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
UP
DW
Spacing]
The distance between numerals can be specified
in the unit of dots (0 to 64).
9 6
Num. Data Display
[
12345
5
Spacing
[Enlarge] (X, Y: 1 to 8)
Specify enlargement factors for X and Y.
[Foreground]/[Background]
Select character colors.
Foreground color
1234
Background color
5-11
Chapter 5 Data Display
♦ [Detail] Tab Window
[
Use Operation]
Check this box ( ) for calculating data in [Memory] set in the [Main] tab
window in MONITOUCH and for displaying its results. When this box is
checked, the following setting items become active.
• Enter the desired
offset value.
• Constant
Data read from memory area specified
for [Memory] in [Main] tab window
• Enter the desired multiplier of divisor.
• Constant
Select x or / (÷)
“Offset value” is like an origin position from which operation of memory data is started.
For example
Y
Offset
Y = 100 + 2X
100
Offset
0
X
Example: Data read from PLC is “789.”
• [BCD] is chosen for [Input Type], but negative numbers should be indicated.
(Negative number in the BCD format does not exist.)
Choose either [DEC (w/ −sign)] or [DEC (w/ +/−sign)] for [Display Type].
Offset value
[0]
Or [−1000]
+ read data [×]
+ (789)
[×]
+ (789)
[×]
multiplier
[−1]
[1]
= data displayed
= −789
= −211
• Example of multiplication
Offset value
+ read data [×]
[1000]
+ (789)
[×]
[0]
+ (789)
[×]
multiplier
[1]
[100]
= data displayed
= 1789
= 78900
• Example of division with decimal point
When “2” is entered for [Decimal Point] in the [Type] tab window, data read
into MONITOUCH is “7.89.”
Offset value
+ read data [÷] divisor
= data displayed
[0]
+ (7.89)
[÷] [100]
= 0.0789
Data is rounded down to the decimal place, and “0.07” is indicated.
5-12
Chapter 5 Data Display
• Example of division without decimal point
Offset value
+ read data [÷] divisor
= data displayed
[0]
+ (789)
[÷] [−100]
= −7.89
Data is rounded down to the decimal place, and “−7” is indicated.
Offset value
+ read data [÷] divisor
= data displayed
[200]
+ (789)
[÷] [100]
= 207.89
Data is rounded down to the decimal place, and “207” is indicated.
When mathematical operations are used as shown above, their results are
displayed on the screen. Therefore, check the setting for [Display Type],
[Digits], [Decimal Point], etc.
[
Alarm]
[If you want to use a different color of data that exceeds or falls short of the
specified range, check the [ Alarm] box. When it is checked, [Max.] and
[Min.] options become active.
• [Max. Color] (Foreground/Background)
Select the desired color for the maximum value color to be displayed when
data exceeds the range. When [B] is pressed, data flashes in the selected
color.
• [Min.]
Set a minimum value. When the alarm value is fixed, specify a constant. If
you want to change the alarm value, select the PLC memory.
• [Min. Color] (Foreground/Background)
Select the desired color for the minimum value color to be displayed when
data exceeds the range. When [B] is pressed, data flashes in the selected
color.
If [Entry Target] is chosen for [Display Function] in the [Main] tab window,
checking the [Alarm] box changes the settings of [Max.]/[Min.] into those for
limiting the range for numerical data entry. Data in these setting items
determines the available numerical data range. For more information on
numerical data entry, refer to “Chapter 7 Entry Mode.”
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
5-13
Num. Data Display
• [Max.]
Set a maximum value. When the alarm value is fixed, specify a constant. If
you want to change the alarm value, select the PLC memory.
5
Chapter 5 Data Display
Character Display
[Char. Display] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Memory]
Data contained in the specified memory address is displayed in characters
on the screen.
Processing varies depending on the one-byte or two-byte character.
One-byte character: 1/2 word (= 1 byte)
ANK code
Two-byte character: 1 word (= 2 bytes)
Shift JIS code
Example: Character display [Memory: D500], [Bytes: 6]
When inputting D500: H3231, D501: H3433 and D502: H4241, the
characters “1234AB” are displayed on MONITOUCH.
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
1234AB
F4
F5
D500
D501
D502
5-14
F6
H3231
H3433
H4241
F7
POWER
Chapter 5 Data Display
When inputting D500: H3231, D501: H0033 and D502: H4241, the
characters “1234” are displayed on MONITOUCH. Note that the
characters after the null (00) code are not displayed when inputting null
(00) code. When you want to insert a space, input the space code (20).
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
SYSTEM
F1
F2
123
F3
F4
F5
D500
D501
D502
H3231
H0033
H4241
F6
F7
POWER
5
♦ [Type] Tab Window
[Display Function]
• Options other than [No]
The character display part works as specified when it is linked with other
parts. For more information, refer to the section of the linked part.
Display Function
Attached Data
Linked Part
See:
This chapter
No
−
−
Entry Display
−
Entry mode (character)
Entry Target
Order
Entry mode (character)
Chapter 7
Sample Status Display
−
Bit sampling
Chapter 10
Memory Card Name
Memory Card File Name
Memory Card Record Name
−
Memory card mode
Chapter 25
Entry mode (character)
Chapter 7
Password Entry
Password 0 (to 3)
[Order]
This is valid when [Entry Target] is selected for [Display Function].
(
For more information on the entry target, refer to “Chapter 7 Entry
Mode.”)
[Bytes]
Specify the number of characters to be displayed. One character of the
alphabet occupies one byte. The maximum available number of one-byte
characters on a screen depends on the models of MONITOUCH. (Refer to
the Hardware Specifications Manual.)
[Flush L]/[Flush R]
Choose either flush-left or flush-right for aligning characters.
5-15
Character Display
• No
Data in [Memory] is displayed as is.
Chapter 5 Data Display
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window
Set the text property. For more information on setting items, refer to “[Char.
Prop.] Tab Window” (page 5-9).
♦ [Detail] Tab Window
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
[
5-16
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
JIS/ASCII] (1-Byte/2-Byte)
Use this item when screen data of the GD-80 series is converted into the V
series format. (
Refer to the File Conversion Manual.)
Chapter 5 Data Display
Message Display
[Message Display] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
5
[Memory]
One word is occupied by one message number. The message that
corresponds to data contained in the specified memory address is displayed
on the screen.
To call up a message, specify the number in absolute addresses. The
available address range is 0 to 6143. (
For more information on absolute
addresses, refer to “Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message).”)
Register messages in message editing. (
For information on message
editing, refer to Chapter 4 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window
Set the text property. For more information on setting items, refer to “[Char.
Prop.] Tab Window” (page 5-9).
♦ [Detail] Tab Window
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
[
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
JIS/ASCII] (1-Byte/2-Byte)
Use this item when screen data of the GD-80 series is converted into the V
series format. (
Refer to the File Conversion Manual.)
5-17
Message Display
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Chapter 5 Data Display
Table Data Display
Table Data Display Area
♦ [Table Data Display] Dialog
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
\
[Line No.]
Specify the number of lines of the table data display part.
[Column No.]
Specify the number of columns of the table data display part.
[
Ruled Line Display]
Check the box when ruled lines should be displayed. When displaying ruled
lines, check the box ( ).
[Ruled Line Color]
Specify the color of ruled lines in the table data display part.
[Background]
Specify the color of the table data display part.
[Order]/[Item Select]/[Inc. Direction]
This is valid when [Entry Target] is selected for [Display Function].
(
Refer to “Chapter 7 Entry Mode.”)
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
5-18
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
Chapter 5 Data Display
[Table Data Display] (Num. Display) Dialog
For more information on editing the table data display, refer to Chapter 2 in the
Reference Manual (Operation).
♦ [Type 2] Tab Window
5
Table Data Display
[Display Function]
• No
Data in [Memory] is displayed as is.
• Entry Target
Use this setting in the entry mode. (
Refer to “Chapter 7 Entry Mode.”)
• Mean Display, Max. Display, Min. Display, or Total Display
The average, maximum, minimum or total of the specified line (or column) is
calculated on MONITOUCH and is displayed.
[
Memory Inc.]
This option becomes active only when multiple
data cells are selected. Specify the direction
for memory allocation.
[Memory]
Specify the top memory address.
[Flush Left]/[Flush Right]/[Center]
When [ Zero Suppress] is checked, these
options become active. Select the desired one
for data alignment.
Memory: D200
Memory Inc.: (checked) DW
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
The memory addresses that
correspond to the selected data
display cells are changed.
12345 12345 12345
12345 D200 D203
12345 D201 D204
12345 D202 D205
12345 12345 12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
[Start X/Y] [End X/Y]
This option becomes active when [Mean Display], [Max. Display], [Min.
Display], or [Total Display] is chosen for [Display Function].
Specify the range of cells for calculation.
5-19
Chapter 5 Data Display
Example:
Cell addresses are allocated as follows to the table data display part (for
numerical data display) consisting of five lines and three columns.
Selected
X:1,Y:1
X:1,Y:2
X:1,Y:3
X:1,Y:4
X:1,Y:5
X:2,Y:1
X:2,Y:2
X:2,Y:3
X:2,Y:4
X:2,Y:5
X:3,Y:1
X:3,Y:2
X:3,Y:3
X:3,Y:4
X:3,Y:5
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
Mean value display for the selected data
Display Function: Mean Display
Start: X: 2, Y: 1, End: X: 2, Y: 4
For more information on other setting items, refer to page 5-4.
[Table Data Display] (Char. Display) Dialog
For more information on editing the table data display, refer to Chapter 2 in the
Reference Manual (Operation).
♦ [Type 2] Tab Window
[
Memory Inc.]
This option becomes active only when multiple data cells are selected.
Specify the direction for memory allocation.
[Memory]
Specify the top memory address.
For more information on other setting items, refer to page 5-14.
5-20
Chapter 5 Data Display
[Table Data Display] (Message Display) Dialog
For more information on editing the table data display, refer to Chapter 2 in the
Reference Manual (Operation).
♦ [Type 2] Tab Window
5
Table Data Display
[
Memory Inc.]
This option becomes active only when multiple data cells are selected.
Specify the direction for memory allocation.
[Memory]
Specify the top memory address.
For more information on other setting items, refer to page 5-17.
5-21
Chapter 5 Data Display
[Table Data Display] (Text in Drawing) Dialog
For more information on editing the table data display, refer to Chapter 2 in the
Reference Manual (Operation).
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window
[Char.]
Specify the desired text.
[Char. Place]
Choose from [Flush Left], [Flush Right], and [Center] for character alignment.
For more information on other setting items, refer to “[Char. Prop.] Tab Window”
(page 5-9).
5-22
Chapter 5 Data Display
Notes
Notes on placing data display parts on switch or lamp parts are given.
When Placing a Data Display Part on A Switch or Lamp Part
It is recommended to create the screen under the following conditions.
[Condition 1] Switch/Lamp
Draw Mode: REP
1234
[Condition 2] Data Display
Lamp OFF
Use parts in the following part files.
Part file: Std.V7P / Std.V6P (No. 0000 to 0001)
Parts_j.V7P / Parts_j.V6P (No. 0000 to 0009)
1234
Lamp ON
If the above conditions are not met, the parts may not be displayed correctly.
When the above conditions are met, the parts can be displayed correctly with
multiple data display parts.
1234
1234
Lamp OFF
1234
1234
Lamp ON
When Placing a Data Display Part on Switch or Lamp Parts
Due to the part property, the parts cannot be displayed correctly.
Draw Mode: REP
1234
Lamp OFF
1234
The data display part is
hidden under the lamp.
Lamp ON
Draw Mode: XOR
1234
1234
Lamp OFF
Lamp ON
The XOR color is displayed.
5-23
Notes
When Placing Data Display Parts on A Switch or Lamp Part
5
Chapter 5 Data Display
Please use this page freely.
5-24
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
Message Display (Relay/Message)
On the V series, previously registered permanent text (= message) of a certain
model can be displayed or switched on the screen, depending on the specified
message number and whether or not the bit is set.
How to Display Messages
The message display function varies depending on your purpose and use.
Message Display
What is the command
method for the display?
Only display the current
status.
What is the order of the
display?
Specify the number of the message.
What is the configuration of the display?
Leave behind the previous
status as past history.
Display a one line message in
multiple locations.
What is the position of the
display?
Display a multi-line
message in one area.
Bit sampling
Message mode
See Chapter 10.
Priority order
Relay mode
See
page 6-3.
Occurrence
order
Relay sampling
How to Display Messages
Based on bit setting and resetting.
What is the configuration of the display?
6
Fix
Data display’s
message display
Occurrence
order
See page 6-20.
Graphic library’s data
display
See Chapter 10.
See Chapter 5.
See Chapter 9.
6-1
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
Relay Mode
• This is the function for displaying or erasing messages on the screen by
setting or resetting bits. When multiple bits are set, the messages are
displayed in priority order.
• The detail display (=sub-display) of messages can be displayed at the same
time. (Relay sub) The sub-display can be either a text display, or a graphic
(picture) display.
• The sub-display can be shown on one screen. (Screen call)
Turn the D100 bit 5 on.
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
SYSTEM
F1
F2
Error !!
D100
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
The applicable message to bit 5
of the D100 is displayed.
Message Mode
This is the function for displaying messages on the screen by specifying the
number of a message. The display configuration of the message can be divided
in several different ways.
Message mode
What is the format of the
display?
Display line by line.
What is the configuration of
the display?
Display the registered
message continuously.
Display the registered
message separately.
Page block
Direct block
[Type: Page]
[Action Select: Message]
[Type: Direct]
[Action Select: Message]
[Type: Page]
[Action Select: Block]
[Type: Direct]
[Action Select: Block]
See page 6-20.
6-2
Display in blocks.
What is the block type?
See page 6-21.
See page 6-21.
See page 6-22.
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
Relay Mode
Outline
• This is the function for displaying or erasing messages on the screen by
setting or resetting bits. When multiple bits are on, the messages are
displayed in priority order (refer to page 6-6).
• If multiple bits are set and the applicable messages are not restored in the
screen display area, the messages can be scrolled through using the [Roll
Up] and [Roll Down] switches.
Bit 1 of D100 is set (ON).
RUN
. . .
. . .
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Bits 0, 2 and 3 of D100 are set (ON).
RUN
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
D100
D100
BBBBBB
6
AAAAAA
BBBBBB
CCCCCC
Relay Mode
AAAAAA
BBBBBB
CCCCCC
DDDDDD
DDDDDD
Press the Roll Up switch.
It is scrolled down for
screen.
• When a bit is reset, the corresponding message disappears from the screen,
and other messages are moved up.
BBBBBB
CCCCCC
AAAAAA
BBBBBB
CCCCCC
When the line of the message (‘AAAAAA’ above) disappears by resetting the bit (OFF),
the other lines are moved up.
• The detail display (= sub-display) of messages can be displayed at the same
time. The sub-display can be either a text display, or a graphic (picture)
display. For each 1 bit of relay mode data, a maximum of four sub-displays
can be connected. (Relay sub)
A tank error
Selected message
B tank error
C tank error
Instructions related to
the above message
An error is detected in
tank C.
Stop the machine
immediately, and
check around the tank.
A
B
C
Illustration related to
the above message
6-3
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
• Also, it is possible to link a screen display to the message and to call it up
when the bit is set. (Screen call)
In response to bits (ON) in PLC,
the corresponding messages are
displayed on the screen.
The screen related message
(ex. B-line data) is displayed.
B-Line Data
A-line data
B-line data
D-line data
No. 1 servo
No. 2 servo
No. 3 servo
No. 1 motor
No. 2 motor
No. 3 motor
G-line data
From the displayed messages,
press on the message for which you
want to bring up related screen.
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
Relay Mode Setting Procedure
•
Item
Message
Group No. 0 (to 23)
Message No. 0 (to 255)
* For information on how to register messages, refer to “Chapter 4 Registration Items” in the
Reference Manual (Operation).
•
Screen Edit
[Relay Mode] icon
Relay mode tool bar
Page
6-9
Page
6-11
Page
6-11
Page
6-16
Registering Messages
Required messages should be registered in the “message edit” area in advance.
“Message edit” is a different edit area from the screen edit window.
The messages registered in the message edit area are used in either message
mode or data display (= message display), not only in relay mode.
For information on how to register messages as well as the composition of the
message edit area, refer to “Chapter 4 Registration Items” in the Reference
Manual (Operation).
6-4
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
[Relay] Dialog
This is a dialog that must be set when using relay mode. It is displayed when
you click on the [Detail] icon on the relay mode tool bar.
6
[Division No.]
Set a division number not registered in another mode. Usually, the division
number currently being edited (displayed in the upper right corner of the
screen) is automatically specified.
[Memory]
Specify the command memory address used to display a registered
message on the screen. The memory addresses are allocated to messages
by bits as many as [Executing Relays] (see the following section) from the
top memory address on.
[Start Message GNo. and No]
Set the top message group number and message (line) number, registered
in the message edit area, of the message that you will display in relay mode.
Starting from this message, as many messages as specified for [Executing
Relays] are allocated sequentially in 1-bit increments to memory addresses
from [Memory].
6-5
Relay Mode
♦ [Main] Tab Window
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
Priority in displaying messages
Priority is given in displaying messages in relay mode. This is based on message
numbers that are registered in message editing. The smaller numbers have a higher
priority. This is the case for group numbers as well as message numbers. When
messages are displayed on the screen, those of higher priority are displayed above.
Example:
Priority
High
Small
A tank error
B tank error
C tank error
A line stop
B line stop
C line stop
M10
M11
M12
M22
M23
M24
Occurrence order display
There is another way to display some messages in the order of occurrences instead of
priority. This is called “relay- sampling.”
For more information, refer to “Chapter
10 Sampling.”
[Execution Relays] (1 to 512)
Specify the number of relays (total number of bits for messages) to be used
in this mode. The maximum available number is 512.
[Action Area]
Choose from [Area], [Switch] or [Lamp] for specifying the place where the
message should be displayed on the screen.
Area:
Switch:
Lamp:
Shows messages on display area parts placed on screen.
Shows messages on switch parts placed on screen. Switches
are set in [Function: Mode]. Each switch has [Display Order]
as an auxiliary item where you can specify which relay
message to display on which switch.
When you do not set [Display Order], the messages are
displayed in the same order that the switches were placed.
Shows messages on lamp parts placed on screen. Lamps are
set in [Function: Mode]. As with switches, each lamp is set
with the auxiliary item [Display Order].
[Lines per Relay] (1 to 24)
This option is valid when [Area] is chosen for [Action Area]. Specify the
number of lines to be linked with one relay (= one bit).
6-6
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
[Sub-action]
• None
Choose [None] when using relay mode only.
• Sub-display
Choose this option when you want to relate a supplemental display with one
bit of messages set up in relay mode (relay messages). Set relay-sub mode
as a linked mode.
• Screen Call
Choose this option when you want to call up a screen (for detailed
information, for example) related to the 1-bit relay message that is displayed.
Select [Item] → [Screen Block Edit] and make the setting as a linked item.
- Block No
When [Screen Call] is chosen for [Sub-action], this option becomes
active. Specify the top screen block number corresponding to the relay
message.
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window
[
[
6
Plain typeface
Bold typeface to be used for emphasis
Typeface with shadow
Transparent]
Transparency for messages can be chosen.
When making the message transparent, check the box (
Italic]
Messages can be italicized.
When italicizing the message, check the box (
Relay Mode
[Char. Type]
Normal:
Bold:
Shadow:
).
).
[Enlarge X/Y] (Setting range: X: 1 to 8, Y: 1 to 8)
(In the case of Gothic [Point] (8 to 72))
This is valid when [Area] is chosen for [Action Area]. Specify factors for
enlarging the message text in the display area part. When “1” is specified for
[Y], Y size equals one-byte character size.
[Foreground Color]/[Background Color]
Set the character color for the message that will be displayed.
6-7
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
♦ [Detail] Tab Window
[
Relay Info. Out]
Choose whether data of the message displayed or selected in relay mode
should be output to the PLC. If you want to output data, check the box, and
specify the desired top memory address.
No:
Relay data output memory
Yes:
Relay data output memory Top memory n
Memory addresses are allocated as shown below.
Relay Info Output Memory
Contents
n
RLYCT
n+1
SELNO
n+2
RLYNO
• n (RLYCT: total number of ON relays)
The number of bits currently set to ON is written.
• n + 1 (SELNO: selected relay No.)
When [Sub-display] is chosen for [Sub-action] in the [Main] tab window, the
priority number of the relay message among those being displayed (starting
from #1) is output.
From the priority:
Priority No. 1 =
Priority No. 2 =
Priority No. 3 =
Priority No. 4 =
Priority No. 5 =
A
B
G
O
X
A
B
G
O
X
A
B
G
O
X
A
B
G
O
X
A
B
G
O
X
A
B
G
O
X
n+1 = 4
Priority
When [Memory] is specified in the [Main] tab window, memory addresses are allocated
to each message consecutively. The memory bit number with the greatest priority is the
smallest number, and as the bit number of memory allocated to the message increases,
the priority decreases.
When [None] is chosen for [Sub-action], the ranking of priority (starting from
“1”) of the top message among those displayed is output.
6-8
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
• n + 2 (RLYNO: ON relay No.)
When [Sub-display] is chosen for [Sub-action] in the [Main] tab window, the
ordinal number of the highlighted message among messages displayed in
relay mode (regarding the start message number as “0”) is written.
n+2 = [13]
No. 1 =
No. 6 =
No. 9 =
No. 13 =
No. 14 =
B
G
J
N
O
B
G
J
N
O
B
G
J
N
O
B
G
J
N
O
B
G
J
N
O
B
G
J
N
O
Start message
Priority No. 0 =
Priority No. 1 =
Priority No. 2 =
Priority No. 3 =
Priority No. 4 =
Priority No. 5 =
Priority No. 6 =
Priority No. 7 =
Priority No. 8 =
Priority No. 9 =
Priority No. 10 =
Priority No. 11 =
Priority No. 12 =
Priority No. 13 =
Priority No. 14 =
a a a a a a
b b b b b b
c c c c c c
A A A A A A
B B B B B B
CCCCCC
DDDDDD
E E E E E E
F F F F F F
GGGGGG
HHHHHH
I I I I I I
J J J J J J
K K K K K K
L L L L L L
MMMMMM
NNNNNN
OOOOOO
P P P P P P
Message for
Relay mode
6
[Process Cycle]
Set a cycle for the V series to read the PLC data while it is communicating
with the PLC. For more information, refer to “Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”
Display Area Parts
♦ Outline of Display Area Parts
When settings are made in the [Main] tab window of the [Relay] dialog for
[Action Area: Area], you must also set display area parts. Depending on
whether or not the bit is set, the messages on screen will be shown on display
area parts. However, there will be no function if only display area parts are
placed on screen. There must be a setting that makes an association with the
original [Relay] dialog.
Association is performed by [Division]. If you set display area parts with the
same division number as the [Relay] dialog, it is recognized as a display area
part for use in the relay mode.
6-9
Relay Mode
When [None] is chosen for [Sub-action], the ordinal number (counting the
start message number as “0”) of the top message among those displayed is
output.
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
♦ Note When Placing Display Area Parts
The size of the display area parts placed on screen can be changed. In the relay
mode, the lines of the messages displayed on screen vary depending on the Y
size of the display area part. Please be careful when setting the size.
A minimum of [Lines per Relay] × [Enlarge: Y] lines must be secured for the Y
size of display area parts.
When facilitating Y size adjustment of the display area part, select [Display
Environment] (or [Change All Display Environment]) from the [Display] menu,
and check [ Message Dsp.] in the [Display Environment] dialog. You can see
how the message is displayed within the display area part.
When a part is placed, double-click the part, or select the part and click the
[Prop. Change] icon. The [Mode Display Area] dialog is displayed for more
settings.
♦ [Mode Display Area] Dialog
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as the division number specified in the original
[Relay] dialog. It will then be associated with relay parts.
[Area Prop.] Foreground / Background / Tile
Set the properties in the display area.
6-10
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
Message Scroll Up/Down
If all the messages to be displayed cannot be held in the display range, the
messages that are not shown can be displayed on the screen by scrolling up or
scrolling down. Use the switch parts.
♦ Notes on Setting Switch Parts
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as the one specified in the [Relay] dialog of
the link location so that you can determine which mode is linked to the
roll-up/roll-down switch.
[Function]
This option determines the function of the switch. Select [Function: Roll
Up/Roll Down]. If the switch is one that was selected from the relay mode
tool bar, the default for [Function] will be [Roll Up] or [Roll Down].
6
To Display Relay Messages on Switches or Lamps
A tank error
B line stop
B tank error
C line stop
C tank error
A line stop
♦ [Relay] Dialog Settings
[Action Area]
Select [Switch] (or [Lamp]).
When [Switch] or [Lamp] is chosen for [Action Area], [Lines per Relay] and
[Enlarge] options are fixed to “1.”
6-11
Relay Mode
A message based on a set bit can be displayed not only in display area parts,
but can also be displayed on the switches or lamps placed on the screen. The
[Relay] dialog settings and switch parts (or lamp parts) are necessary for [Action
Area: Switch (or Lamp)].
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
♦ Switches for Display
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as the one specified in the [Relay] dialog of
the link location.
[Function]
Select [Function: Mode]. If the switch is one that was selected from the relay
mode tool bar, the default will be [Function: Mode]. Set [Display Order] as an
auxiliary setting item.
[Display Order]
When messages are to be displayed on the switches, specify the display
order (priority) for each switch. According to the display order, relay
messages are held in the switches.
♦ For [Action Area: Lamp]
Click on the [Lamp] icon from the relay mode tool bar, and place it on the screen
just as you did for switches. This lamp will automatically have the setting of
[Function: Mode]. Please note the following points when making lamp part
settings.
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as the one specified in the [Relay] dialog of
the link location.
[Function]
Select [Function: Mode]. If the lamp is one that was selected from the relay
mode tool bar, the default will be [Function: Mode]. Set [Display Order] as an
auxiliary setting item.
[Display Order]
When messages are to be displayed on the lamps, specify the display order
(priority) for each lamp. According to the display order, relay messages are
held in the lamps.
6-12
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
Displaying Detailed Explanation to Messages
(= Relay-sub function)
It is possible to link relay messages that are displayed by setting bits with
detailed explanation using the relay-sub function. Original relay mode settings
are necessary.
[Sub-action: Sub-display] must be selected in the [Relay] dialog.
♦ Outline of Relay-Sub Mode
• Relay-sub mode must be used together with relay mode. Text or graphics
can be called up for one bit of relay mode. For example, this function is
useful for displaying detailed explanation or illustrations corresponding to an
error message.
A tank error
B tank error
Message by bit ON
= Relay mode
C tank error
A
C
B
• A maximum of four sub-displays can be set up for one-bit of data. Therefore,
supplemental explanations, additional messages or easy-to-see graphics
can be displayed at one time.
A tank error
Selected message
B tank error
C tank error
Instructions related to
the above message
An error is detected in
tank C.
Stop the machine
immediately, and
check around the tank.
A
B
C
Illustration related to
the above message
6-13
6
Relay Mode
Instructions related to the
message shown on the left
= Relay-sub mode
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
♦ Relay-sub Mode Setting Procedure
or
Page Block
Item
Direct Block
Block No. 0 (to 1023)
Block No. 0 (to 1023)
or
Item
Graphic Library
Group No. 0 (to 9)
Graphic No. 0 (to 255)
* For information on how to register page blocks, direct blocks and graphic library, refer to
“Chapter 4 Registration Items” in the Reference Manual (Operation).
Screen Edit
[Relay-sub] icon
Relay-sub mode tool bar
Page
6-17
Screen Edit
[Relay Mode] icon
Page
6-17
Page
6-15
Relay mode tool bar
Page
6-9
Page
6-11
Page
6-11
Page
6-16
♦ Registering the Sub-display Data
The sub-display data must be registered as page blocks, direct blocks or graphic
library. Each edit area is available separately from the screen edit window.
For information on how to register page blocks, direct blocks and graphic library,
refer to “Chapter 4 Registration Items” in the Reference Manual (Operation).
6-14
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
♦ [Relay-sub] Dialog
The setting that makes an association between relay mode and relay-sub mode
can be made in the [Relay-sub] dialog. Click the [Detail] icon on the relay-sub
tool bar. The [Relay-sub] dialog is displayed.
6
[Division No.]
Set a division number not registered in another mode. Usually, the division
number currently being edited (displayed in the upper right corner of the
screen) is automatically specified.
[Link Division No.]
Relay-sub mode can only work when it is linked with relay mode. Set up the
same division number as the corresponding relay mode. With this setting,
the relay-sub mode is linked with the relay mode.
[Block]
Choose a form of sub-display from the following options:
• Page Block
Use [Page Block] to display messages.
• Direct Block
Use [Direct Block] to display messages.
• Graphic Library
Use [Graphic Library] to display graphics.
[Block No.]
This option becomes active when [Page] or [Direct] is chosen for [Block].
Specify the top block number for assigning one page block or direct block to
one-bit data. This top block number corresponds to the top message
number of the relay messages. The later blocks correspond to the
consecutive relay messages.
6-15
Relay Mode
[Main] Tab Window
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
[Graphic Library GNo. & No.]
This option becomes active when [Graphic Library] is chosen for [Block].
Specify the group number and the number of the top graphics for assigning
graphics to one-bit message in relay mode. This top graphic number
corresponds to the top message number of the relay messages. The later
graphics correspond to the consecutive relay messages.
[Char. Prop.] Tab Window
These are the setting items that are active only when [Page Block] or [Direct
Block] is selected for [Block].
[Type]/[ Transparency]/[ Italic]/[Foreground/Background Color]
For more information on these setting items, refer to page 6-7.
[Enlarge] (Setting range: X: 1 to 8, Y: 1 to 8)
Set the size of the displayed characters.
♦ Setting for “Sub-display” in the [Relay] Dialog
Take the following notes on the setting items described below.
[Action Area]
You can choose as desired: [Area], [Switch] or [Lamp]. When [Area] is
chosen, the switch function is automatically provided to the display area part
where sub-display is to be held. This is valid only when [Sub-display] or
[Screen Call] is chosen for [Sub-action].
Display Area Parts Switch Function
To call up the contents of the sub-display in relay-sub mode when the relay message is
shown in the display area, it is necessary to choose a 1-bit relay message with the
cursor. For the V series, the switch function is automatically furnished for display area
parts. Thus, if you directly press the place where the message is being displayed, the
cursor will move to that location. You can also make selections using the
roll-up/roll-down switches.)
(Relay)
A tank error
B tank error
C tank error
(Relay-sub)
An error is detected in
tank C.
Stop the machine
immediately, and
check around the tank.
[Sub-action]
Choose [Sub-display]. The message displayed in relay mode is equipped
with a display in relay-sub mode.
6-16
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
♦ Display Area Part for Relay-sub Mode
Messages and graphics registered for displays in relay-sub mode must be
displayed in dedicated display area parts.
For more information on the procedure of creating this display area part, refer to
page 6-9.
♦ Roll Up/Roll Down Switch for Relay-sub Mode
This is an auxiliary switch only active when [Block: Page Block/Direct Block] is
set in the [Relay-sub] dialog. It works as a roll-up/roll-down switch only used
when the sub-display messages exceed the bounds of the display area.
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as the one specified in the [Relay] dialog of
the link location so that you can determine which roll-up/roll-down switch is
linked to which mode.
6-17
Relay Mode
[Function]
This option determines the function of the switch. Select [Function: Roll
Up/Roll Down]. If the switch is one that was selected from the relay-sub
mode tool bar, the default for [Function] will be [Roll Up] or [Roll Down].
6
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
Calling Screens (Screen-call)
♦ Outline of Screen-call Function
Register the associated contents of a relay message to be displayed in advance.
When a relay message is selected, the screen containing those associated
contents is displayed. This function is called “screen-call.” You can create,
register, and call up more detailed contents on the screen.
In response to bits (ON) in PLC,
the corresponding messages are
displayed on the screen.
The screen related message
(ex. B-line data) is displayed.
B-Line Data
A-line data
B-line data
D-line data
No. 1 servo
No. 2 servo
No. 3 servo
No. 1 motor
No. 2 motor
No. 3 motor
G-line data
From the displayed messages,
press on the message for which you
want to bring up related screen.
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
Screens to be called up are ordinary screen displays. Therefore, you can set as
many parts as desired.
Control box emergency stop
E-line target
C tank error
Control Box Emergency
EMERGENCY
STOP button is
pressed on the
control box.
Reset the button.
6-18
C Tank Error
A
B
E-Line Target
C
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
000
000
000
000
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
♦ [Relay] Dialog for Screen-call
[Action Area]
You can choose as desired: [Area], [Switch] or [Lamp]. When [Area] is
chosen, the display area part is automatically equipped with the switch
function. This is applied only when [Screen Call] or [Sub-display] is chosen
for [Sub-action].
Display Area Parts Switch Function
When you have shown the relay message in the display area through the screen call
function, display area parts are automatically furnished with the switch function. When
you directly press the location where the message is displayed, the screen-call function
is activated and the screen changes.
[Sub-action]
Choose [Screen Call]. Set [Screen Block] as an auxiliary setting item.
[Screen Block]
This option becomes active when [Screen Call] is chosen for [Sub-action].
Specify the top block number from which “screen blocks” should be started.
♦ Screen Block Editing
- A group of screen displays should be prepared for relay mode. These
screen displays are re-organized into the order of relay messages, which
is called “screen blocks.” Screen blocks are assigned to relay messages
one by one.
- The same functions can be set on the screen used in [Screen Block] as
can be set with a normal screen. However, when using message mode
(using [Page Block] or [Direct Block]), graphic mode, or the data block
area mode on the screen, you must set the top number of the
corresponding message, graphic, or data block in the original relay
message.
• Screen block editing
For more information, refer to “Chapter 4 Registration Items” in the
Reference Manual (Operation).
6-19
Relay Mode
• Outline of screen blocks
When [Screen Call] is chosen for [Sub-action] in the [Relay] dialog, screen
blocks must be specified.
6
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
Message Mode
Outline
Displays in message mode can be illustrated as follows:
Message mode
What is the format of the
display?
Display line by line.
What is the configuration of
the display?
Display in blocks.
What is the block type?
Display the registered
message continuously.
Display the registered
message separately.
Page Block
Direct Block
[Type: Page]
[Action Select: Message]
[Type: Direct]
[Action Select: Message]
[Type: Page]
[Action Select: Block]
[Type: Direct]
[Action Select: Block]
A
See page 6-20.
B
See page 6-21.
See page 6-21.
C
D
See page 6-22.
♦ How to Specify the Message Number
If you set [Action Select: Message] in the message mode, you must specify the
number of the message that you will display.
A [Type: Page]
Specify the line number of the top message that you will display. Several
lines of the message of which number you specified are continuously
displayed within the area at the top of the screen.
For more information, refer to page 6-24.
Message editing
RUN
. . .
. . .
STOP
No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8
Control box emergency stop
Operation box emergency stop
Turn-over count
Count stop
Pusher error
4 lines
Middle stopper error
Saddle stop during ascending
Saddle stop during final ascending
Carry roller start
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
"3" for D100
D100
Size
(4 lines)
3
Count stop
Pusher error
Middle stopper error
Saddle stop during ascending
= No. 3
= No. 4
= No. 5
= No. 6
Four lines from start messages No. 3 (to
message No. 6) are displayed on the screen.
6-20
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
B [Type: Direct]
One memory is automatically allocated to every one line in the message
display area. Specify the message number that you will display based on the
allocated memory. A message specified by the memory address is
displayed on the screen.
For more information, refer to page 6-24.
Message editing
No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8
Control box emergency stop
Operation box emergency stop
Turn-over count
Count stop
Pusher error
Middle stopper error
Saddle stop during ascending
Saddle stop during final ascending
Carry roller start
RUN
. . .
. . .
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
D100
D101
D102
Size :
3 lines
2
8
4
for the 1st line
for the 2nd line
for the 3rd line
D100
D100
Turn-over count
= No. 2
D101
D101
Carry roller start
= No. 8
D102
D102
Pusher error
= No. 4
♦ How to Specify the Block Number
If you set [Action Select: Block] in the message mode, specify the registered
[Page Block] or [Direct Block] number of the message that you will display.
C [Type: Page]
Register the message that was previously registered in the message edit
area as [Page Block]. The called page block is displayed on the screen. To
display page block on the screen, there are two ways: with an internal
command, or with an external command.
For more information, refer to page 6-25.
Message group No.3
No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8
No. 9
No.10
No.11
Page block No. 0
Control box emergency stop
Control box emergency stop
EMERGENCY STOP button is
pressed on the control box.
Reset the button.
EMERGENCY STOP button is
pressed on the control box.
Reset the button.
Operation box emergency stop
EMERGENCY STOP button is
pressed on the operation box.
Reset the button.
EMERGENCY STOP button is
pressed on the operation box.
Reset the button.
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
"0" for D100
Page block No. 0
Control box emergency stop
D100
0
EMERGENCY STOP button is
pressed on the control box.
Reset the button.
6-21
Message Mode
Message number commands are
allocated to three addresses.
6
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
D [Type: Direct]
Register the message that was previously registered in the message edit
area as [Direct Block]. The called direct block is displayed on the screen. To
display direct block on the screen, there are two ways: with an internal
command, or with an external command.
For more information, refer to page 6-25.
Message group No. 2
No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8
No. 9
Monitouch
General Specifications
Item
Contents
Hardware Specifications
Input power AC85 ~ 235
Display color
16 colors
Display area 640 x 480 dots
FUNC switch 8 pcs
Switch
H24 x W40
No.21
No.22
Printer port 1 port
Comm. port RS232C/RS422
Direct block No. 0
Direct block No. 1
Direct block No. 2
Hardware Specifications
General Specifications
No. 1
Switch
H24 x W40
No. 9
Display color
16 colors
No. 6
No.22 Comm. port RS232C/RS422
No. 5
Input power AC85 ~ 235
. . .
RUN
. . .
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Direct block No. 0
"0" for D100
. . .
. . .
. . .
D100
General Specifications
Switch
H24 x W40
Display color
16 colors
Comm. port RS232C/RS422
Input power AC85 ~ 235
0
Message Mode Setting Procedure
Item
Message
Group No. 0 (to 23)
Message No. 0 (to 255)
Item
Page Block
or
Block No. 0 (to 1023)
Direct Block
Block No. 0 (to 1023)
* For information on how to register messages, page blocks and direct blocks, refer to “Chapter 4
Registration Items” in the Reference Manual (Operation).
Screen Edit
[Message Mode] icon
Message mode tool bar
Page
6-26
6-22
Page
6-27
Page
6-27
Page
6-23
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
Registering Messages
Required messages should be registered in the “Message Edit” area in advance.
The message that was previously registered in the “Message Edit” area should
be registered as [Page Block] or [Direct Block] when [Block] is selected for
[Action Select].
For information on how to register messages, page blocks and direct blocks,
refer to “Chapter 4 Registration Items” in the Reference Manual (Operation).
[Message] Dialog
This is a dialog that must be set when using message mode. It is displayed
when you click on the [Detail] icon on the message mode tool bar.
6
Message Mode
6-23
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Set a division number where no mode has been registered. Usually, the
division number currently being edited (displayed in the upper right corner of
the screen) is automatically specified.
[Action Area]
Choose from [Area], [Switch] or [Lamp] for specifying the place where the
message should be displayed on the screen.
Area:
Switch:
Lamp:
Shows messages on display area parts placed on screen.
Shows messages on switch parts placed on screen. Switches
are set in [Function: Mode]. Each switch has [Display Order]
as an auxiliary setting item. You can specify which message
line to display on which switch.
When you do not set [Display Order], the messages are
displayed in the same order that the switches were placed.
Shows messages on lamp parts placed on screen. Lamps are
set in [Function: Mode]. As with switches, each lamp is set
with the auxiliary item [Display Order].
[Type]
Select [Page] or [Direct]. The format of the message that you display varies
depending on the combination with [Action Select].
[Action Select]
Select the format of the message that you display. The display format varies
depending on whether you selected [Page] or [Direct] for [Type].
• Message
[Type: Page]
Use [Memory] (discussed later) to specify the line number of the top
message that you will display. Several lines of the message of which
number you specified are continuously displayed within the area at the
top of the screen.
[Type: Direct]
One memory is automatically allocated to every one line in the message
display area. Specify the message number that you will display based on
the allocated memory. A message specified by the memory address is
displayed on the screen.
• Block
[Type: Page]
Page blocks are displayed on the screen. Either an internal or external
command can be used. (Refer to “[Command]” on the next page.)
[Type: Direct]
Direct blocks are displayed on the screen. Either an internal or external
command can be used. (Refer to “[Command]” on the next page.)
6-24
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
[Command]
This option becomes active when [Block] is selected for [Action Select].
Select how to call up blocks.
• Internal
The page block or direct block display can be changed with the [Function:
Plus Block/Minus Block/Block Call] switch placed on the screen.
• External
Directly specify the page block or direct block number using [Memory], and
display the corresponding block.
[Message GNo]
This option becomes active when [Message] is selected for [Action Select].
For more information on absolute addresses for message editing, refer to “Chapter 4
Registration Items” in the Reference Manual (Operation).
• [ Message GNo] checked
Specify the registered group number for the message you will display on the
screen. The messages that can be displayed are limited to messages from
the specified group.
[Memory]
When [Message] is chosen for [Action Select], or when [Block] and [External]
are chosen, memory area must be secured. This is the command memory
for displaying messages by specifying the message number or block
number. Contents are shown below:
MSB
Memory n
LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Message No. 0 to 6143
or Block No. 0 to 1023
The number of words used from the top of the [Memory] address varies
based on the [Message] dialog setting.
• [Type: Page] and [Action Select: Message]
→ 1 word
• [Type: Direct] and [Action Select: Message]
→ The words are based on the display area’s Y size divided by the
character enlargement factor value.[Memory] is allocated in sequential
order at the top.
• [Action Select: Block] and [Command: External]
→ 1 word
6-25
Message Mode
• [ Message GNo] unchecked
Specify [Absolute Address] for the message you will display. Messages in
multiple groups as well as one group can be displayed.
6
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
[Initial Block]/[Max. Block]/[Min. Block]
These options must be specified when [Block] and [Internal] are chosen for
[Action Select] and [Command], respectively.
• Initial Block
This is the block to be displayed at first when the page or direct blocks are
called up on the screen.
• Max. Block
This is the greatest number of page or direct blocks to be used in the
message mode.
• Min. Block
This is the smallest number of page or direct blocks to be used in the
message mode.
[Process Cycle]
Set a cycle for the V series to read the PLC data while it is communicating
with the PLC. For more information, refer to “Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window
For more information, refer to page 6-7.
Display Area Parts
When settings are made in the [Main] tab window of the [Message] dialog for
[Action Area: Area], you must also set display area parts. The message is
displayed in the display area.
Display area parts cannot work just by being placed. By establishing a link with
the [Message] dialog, they can work as a part for message mode.
* Association is performed by [Division]. If you set display area parts with the
same division number as the [Message] dialog, it is recognized as a display area
part for use in message mode.
For more information on the display area part, refer to page 6-9.
6-26
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
To Display Messages on Switches (or Lamps)
A message displayed in message mode can be shown not only in display area
parts, but also in the switches or lamps placed on screen.
Set the [Message] dialog in [Action Area: Switch (or Lamp)]. Set the switches or
lamps placed on screen as [Function: Mode]. By setting them with the same
division number, switch parts (or lamp parts) are recognized as areas to be used
with message mode.
For more information, refer to page 6-11.
Other Switches that can be Used in Message Mode
6
The following switches are auxiliary switches for message mode.
These switches are valid when you select [Action Select: Block] in the
[Message] dialog. Use when the page block or direct block messages displayed
on the screen extend off the area. Scroll through the block currently being
displayed.
♦ Plus Block, Minus Block, Block Call
These switches are valid when you select [Action Select: Block] and [Command:
Internal] in the [Message] dialog. Use when switching the page block or direct
block displayed on the screen.
6-27
Message Mode
♦ Roll Up, Roll Down
Chapter 6 Message Display (Relay/Message)
Please use this page freely.
6-28
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Entry Mode
Outline
• When writing numerical data or characters (ANK, Shift JIS code, etc.) to the
specified memory addresses, you must set the entry mode.
• Entry mode allows you to enter numerical data and characters on the same
screen.
The difference between numerical data entry and characters entry is that the
data display of the entry targets will be as follows:
For numerical data: → Numerical data display parts
For characters:
→ Character display parts
Entry Screen
0
Number 1
Number 2
Max. value
9999
Min. value
0
Value entered
0
0
0.0
7
8
9
UP
Number 4
0.00
4
5
6
DW
AAAA
1
2
3
CLR
0
.
+/-
ENT
Outline
Number 3
Text 1
7
• The following items must be set for entry mode:
- Numerical data, character display, or table data display parts as entry
targets
- Switch parts to be used for entry (= Keypad)
- The [Entry] dialog for establishing a link between the numerical data
display parts and the character display parts of the entry targets and the
switches as entry keys.
• You can display the keypad only when it is necessary.
(Place the keypad on the overlap, refer to page 7-35.)
• You can move the cursor to only necessary data display parts.
(Item Select:
refer to page 7-37.)
• You can create a password entry screen easily using character display parts.
(Password Entry:
refer to page 7-43.)
7-1
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Entry Mode Usage
Entry mode can be used in several different ways depending on the data entry
methods, data entry targets, editing procedure, etc. The following illustrates the
usage of the entry mode. For more information, refer to the pages indicated
below.
Entry mode
What is the data entry method?
Write data input directly with the entry key.
What is the data display target?
Data properties, read timing, etc. are
controlled by PLC.
Type: Direct
See page 7-7.
On the base screen or
overlap
On the data block area
Type: Block
See page 7-6.
Type: Data Display
See page 7-3.
Where is the keypad
placed?
Placed on the base
screen, and always
displayed.
Placed on the overlap,
and displayed when
necessary.
See page 7-20.
See page 7-35.
Special functions
Password Entry
See page 7-43.
7-2
Data entry for specified
data display only
See page 7-37.
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Direct Data Entry for Data Display Parts
(= [Type: Data Display])
Data can be entered and changed for numerical data, character, or table data
display parts placed on the screen directly through the keypad.
When the Entry Target is a Numerical Data Display Part:
• Numerical data entry (keypad mode)
The keypad for entering numerical data should be placed on the screen and
numerical data display parts must be used for entry targets. When numerical
data is entered through the keypad on the screen, it is written directly to
memory.
Num. Display
1111
Value entered
Char. Display A A A A
2222
7
8
9
UP
4
5
6
DW
1
2
3
CLR
0
Data of D100 is
changed from “1111”
to “2222.”
D100
2222
7
RUN
. . .
. . .
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Direct Data Entry for Data Display Parts (= [Type: Data Display])
Setting:
Memory:
D100
Digits:
4
Display type: DEC
(w/o sign)
PLC memory
Pressing the ENT key
writes the entered data
into the PLC memory.
Entry Screen
ENT
The keypad works as the
tool to enter numerals.
PLC
♦ Setting Items
• [Part] → [Entry]
New:
Existing:
Entry Dialog See page 7-8.
Min. Display See page 7-30.
Max. Display See page 7-30.
Entry Display See page 7-29.
Entry Target (Num. Display) See page 7-26.
Keypad See page 7-20.
Be sure to set.
Set if necessary.
7-3
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
When the Entry Target is a Character Display Part:
• When the entry target is a character display part, the keypad operates as a
character entry key. The character codes entered from the keypad are
written directly to the PLC memory. The following character codes are used:
One-byte characters → ANK (ASCII)
Two-byte characters → Shift JIS code
• You can enter any character with placing the keypad such as PC’s keyboard.
♦ Setting Items
• [Part] → [Entry]
New:
Existing:
Entry Dialog See page 7-8.
Entry Display See page 7-29.
Entry Target (Num. Display) See page 7-26.
Keypad See page 7-20.
Be sure to set.
Set if necessary.
7-4
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
When the Entry Target is a Table Data Display Part:
• Numerical data or characters can be entered for a table when a table data
display part is used. The keypad can be used to enter numerals for the
numerical data display parts, and to enter characters for the character
display parts.
• For table display parts, the [Function: Move Cursor R] or [Function: Table
Move +] is enabled for the switch setting.
Entry Screen
UP
<Value entered
145
No. Current Target
->
The cursor moves
horizontally.
DW
Limit
1
162
170
150
7
8
9
-
2
644
800
600
3
151
140
100
4
5
6
+
4
758
900
600
1
2
3
CLR
5
60
50
20
0
ENT
7
Table data display part
Direct Data Entry for Data Display Parts (= [Type: Data Display])
♦ Setting Items
• [Part] → [Entry]
New:
Existing:
Entry Dialog See page 7-8.
Min. Display See page 7-30.
Max. Display See page 7-30.
Entry Display See page 7-29.
Keypad See page 7-20.
Be sure to set.
Set if necessary.
• [Part] → [Data Display] → [Table Data Display]
Entry Target (Numerical Data Display Part /Character Display Part)
See page 7-26.
7-5
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
How to Change Over Entry Targets (= [Type: Block])
When there are too many display parts to be displayed on the screen at one
time, data blocks can be used. Place the data block area on the screen.
Register the entry targets in the “data block.” Many entry targets can be
displayed by switching the block No.
Data block area
Data Block No. 2
V4T
Entry Screen
9955
V4C
8844
Data
Block No. 1
V4B
7733
Data 1
1111
V4W
6622
Data 2
Data2222
Block No. 0
V4S
5511
Data 3 Number 13333
0
Data 4 Number 24444 0
Number 3
Number 4
Text 1
0.0
0.00
Data Block No.
0
Number 1
Number 2
0
Number 3
0.0
Number 4
0.00
AAAA
Text 1
AAAA
UP
DW
Max. value
9999
Min. value
0
Entered value
0
7
8
9
UP
4
5
6
DW
1
2
3
CLR
0
.
+/-
ENT
Data block change switches
♦ Setting Items
• [Part] → [Entry]
New:
Existing:
Entry Dialog See page 7-8.
Min. Display See page 7-30.
Max. Display See page 7-30.
Entry Display See page 7-29.
Entry Target (Num. Display) See page 7-26.
Data block area See page 7-31.
Keypad See page 7-20.
Be sure to set.
Set if necessary.
• [Part] → [Data Block Area] See page 7-31.
* The same as the data block area in the [Entry] item bar above.
• [Item] → [Data Block] → [Data Block Edit]
(Data Block Edit:
refer to Chapter 4 in the Reference Manual
(Operation).)
7-6
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
[Type: Direct]
The entry format, the number of digits, the decimal point position, etc. are
externally commanded via the memory address. Numerical data is written to the
information output memory addresses “n + 2” and “n + 3.” Characters are
written to the information output memory addresses starting from “n + 2.”
♦ Setting Items
• [Part] → [Entry]
New:
Existing:
Entry Dialog See page 7-8.
Entry Display See page 7-29.
Keypad See page 7-20.
Be sure to set.
Set if necessary.
7
Data Reading Steps
Data is read using the following steps.
B: [Information output memory]
A
The entry format, the number of digits, the decimal point position, etc. are specified via
the addresses of “n” (command memory) and “n + 1.”
B
The entry display part for the specified entry format, the number of digits, and the decimal
point position, etc. becomes active.
B
Check that bit 14 (input) of “n” (information output memory) is set (ON).
Enter the desired data through the keypad and press the ENT key.
B
Check that bit 15 (writing completed) of “n” (information output memory) is set (ON).
Also, check that the data is written to “n (information output memory) + 2” and “n + 3.”
B
The data in “n (information output memory) + 2” and “n + 3” is read.
B
Reset (OFF) bit 15 (writing completed) of the address “n” (information output memory). *
A
Set (ON) bit 15 (clear) of the address “n” (command memory).
Check that the entry display part indicates “0.”
A
Reset (OFF) bit 15 (clear) of the address “n” (command memory).
Check that the entry display part becomes active again.
* Once bit 15 of the address “n” (information output memory) is set (ON), it is not reset automatically.
7-7
[Type: Direct]
A: [Command memory]
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Entry Dialog Setting
Type: Data Display/Block
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.] (0 to 255)
Specify the division number. In one division, only one entry mode can be
registered. The parts to be used in entry mode must be placed in the same
division. (
For more information about the division number, refer to
Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
A maximum of four entry modes are available on one screen (the base screen and
overlaps 0 to 2).
[Type]
• Data Display:
Enter data on the data display (Display Function: Entry Target) placed on the
base screen or overlaps though the keypad.
• Block:
Enter data on the data display (Display Function: Entry Target) placed on the
data blocks though the keypad.
[Command Memory]
This is used for controlling entry mode. The contents depend on the
selection of [Internal] or [External] for [Input Item Select].
7-8
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
[
Use Writing Enabled Bit]
Unchecked
The status of [Command Memory] (writing enabled, bit 15) is ignored.
Keypad entry is always available.
Checked
Bit 15 of [Command Memory] (writing enabled) determines whether or
not the keypad is enabled.
• [Input item select: Internal]
LSB
MSB
Command
memory n
15 14 13 12
0
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
Entry area selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Cursor movement
0: Manual
1: Automatic
Writing enabled/disabled
0: Writing disabled
1: Writing enabled
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
When bit 13 is [1], select the entry area (0 to 3).
Bit No.
Type
1
0
Data Display
0
0
Base
Data block area No. 0
Block
0
1
Overlap 0
Data block area No. 1
1
0
Overlap 1
Data block area No. 2
1
1
Overlap 2
Data block area No. 3
7
0:
The cursor is moved to the areas in the following order:
1. on the base screen
2. on overlap 0
3. on overlap 1
4. on overlap 2
1:
The cursor can be moved in the specified area only.
The area is specified by bits 0 and 1.
Entry Dialog Setting
- Entry area selection (bit 13)
Select the movement area when moving the cursor by pressing the
Up/Down switch.
- Cursor Movement (bit 14)
This bit determines whether or not to move the cursor automatically to
the next display part after pressing the ENT key.
0:
1:
The cursor remains in the same position when the ENT key is
pressed.
The cursor moves to the next display part when the ENT key is
pressed.
7-9
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
- Writing enabled/disabled (bit 15)
This bit is available when [ Use Writing Enabled Bit] is checked.
0:
Disabled
Only the switches for [Function: Roll Up/Roll Down] are enabled.
When other keys are pressed, an error buzzer sounds.
1:
Enabled
Entry keys work normally.
• [Input Item Select: External]
LSB
MSB
Command
memory n
15 14 13 12 11
0
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
Data display: Selection order (0 to 255)
Table data display: Selection order (0 to 255)
Entry area selection (0 to 3)
Bit No.
Entry target data
selection
0: Data display
1: Table data display
Writing enabled/disabled
0: Writing disabled
1: Writing enabled
Type
11
10
Data Display
0
0
Base
Data block area No. 0
Block
0
1
Overlap 0
Data block area No. 1
1
0
Overlap 1
Data block area No. 2
1
1
Overlap 2
Data block area No. 3
* This address becomes active when bit 12 of command
memory “n” is set (1) (= Entry target is Table data display)
MSB
Command
memory n
LSB
15 14 13 12 11
0
0
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
Column selection (1 to 25)
Line selection (1 to 20)
The following PLC manufacturers use BCD code:
OMRON: C series, SHARP: JW series, FUJI: H series, KOYO: S series
- Data display number (selection order) (bits 0 to 9)
Bit 12 of “n” (command memory) is set “0.”
The order number of data display (Function: Entry Target) is specified.
Bit 12 of “n” (command memory) is set “1.”
The order number of table data display is specified.
The number of bits to be used depends on the code (DEC or BCD).
DEC: Bits 0 to 7
BCD: Bits 0 to 9
- Entry area selection (bits 10 and 11)
The area placed the entry target is selected by bits 10 and 11.
7-10
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
- Entry target selection (bit 12)
The entry target is chosen.
0: Data display part
1: Table data display part
- Writing enabled/disabled (bit 15)
This bit is available when [ Use Writing Enabled Bit] is checked.
This bit determines whether or not the keypad is enabled.
0: Keypad is disabled. When pressed, an error buzzer sounds.
1: Keypad works normally.
- Line selection/Column selection (n + 1)
These bits become active when bit 12 of command memory “n” is set (1).
Cursor is displayed on the designated line Nos. 1 to 20 and column Nos.
1 to 25.
[Info. Output Memory]
The V series writes the entry mode status. The contents to be written
depend on the setting of [ Lines/Columns Output] in the [Detail] tab
window of the [Entry] dialog.
• When [
Lines/Columns Output] is unchecked
MSB
Command
memory n
LSB
15 14 13 12
0
7
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
Entry Dialog Setting
Data display number (selection order: 0 to 255)
Entry area selection (0 to 3)
Input
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Writing completed/not completed
0: Writing not completed
1: Writing completed
n+1
15 14 13 12
0
0
Bit No.
Type
11
10
Data display
0
0
Base
Data block area No. 0
Block
0
1
Overlap 0
Data block area No. 1
1
0
Overlap 1
Data block area No. 2
1
1
Overlap 2
Data block area No. 3
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
Block No. (0 to 1023)
n+2
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Entered data
n+m
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
7-11
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
• When [
Lines/Columns Output] is checked
LSB
MSB
Command
memory n
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
Data display number (selection order: 0 to 255)
Entry area selection (0 to 3)
Entry target data
selection
0: Data display
1: Table data display
Input
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Writing completed/not completed
0: Writing not completed
1: Writing completed
n+1
15 14 13 12 11
0
0
Bit No.
Type
11
10
Data Display
0
0
Base
Data block area No. 0
0
1
Overlap 0
Data block area No. 1
1
0
Overlap 1
Data block area No. 2
1
1
Overlap 2
Data block area No. 3
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
Column selection (1 to 25)
n+2
15 14 13 12 11
0
0
Block
Line selection (1 to 20)
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
Block No. (0 to 1023)
n+3
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Entered data
n+m
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
The following PLC manufacturers use BCD code:
OMRON: C series, SHARP: JW series, FUJI: H series, KOYO: S series
- Data display number (selection order) (bits 0 to 9)
The order number of the selected entry target or table data display is
written.
The number of bits to be used depends on the code (DEC or BCD).
DEC: Bits 0 to 7
BCD: Bits 0 to 9
- Entry area selection (bits 10 and 11)
The selected entry area is written.
7-12
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
- Entry target selection (bit 12)
This bit becomes active when [Lines/Columns Output] is checked in the
[Detail] tab window of the [Entry] dialog.
0: Data display part is selected
1: Table data display part is selected
- Input (bit 14)
The input status of the entry mode is displayed on the top screen (of the
base screen or overlap 0 to 2).
0: Input is not possible.
1: Input is possible.
- Writing completed (bit 15)
When the ENT key is pressed, data is written to memory, and this bit is
set to “1” (ON). This bit remains set (ON) until the cursor moves to a
different data display part.
- Line number/Column number (n + 1)
This bit becomes active when [ Lines/Columns Output] is checked in
the [Detail] tab window of the [Entry] dialog. The line and column
numbers of the selected table data cell are output.
- Block number
These bits become active when [Block] is chosen for [Type]. The block
number currently displayed is written.
The number of characters here is based on one-byte codes. Two one-byte characters
occupy one word. Therefore, the number of words occupied can be calculated by
dividing the number of characters by 2. If there is a remainder, it occupies one word.
Ex.: 3 characters = 2 words
[
Reverse]
The data display part currently selected by the cursor as the entry target is
reversed.
When [Enlarge Y] of the [Entry Target] data display is more than [4] (64 dots),
the [Reverse] is not displayed normally.
[Target Memory]
When the ENT key is pressed, the target memory of the data is specified.
• Direct
Memory for the entry target
• Output Memory (= [Info. Output Memory])
Numerical data entry: [Info. Output Memory] n + 2, n + 3
Character data entry: [Info. Output Memory] n + 2 to (The number of byte/2)
word
7-13
Entry Dialog Setting
- Entered data
When [Output Memory] is chosen for [Target Memory], data is written.
Numerical data entry: 2 words are used
Character data entry: (The number of bite/2) words are used.
7
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
[Input Item Select]
Determine the method of the data display part (entry target) selection.
• Internal
Up/Down switches (↓/↑) are used for selection and cursor movement. The
same division number must be specified for the Up/Down switches (↓/↑) and
in the [Entry] dialog.
• External
The command memory address is used for specifying the data display
number, the entry area, and the entry target data.
[
GD80 Compatible]
This is used when screen data files of the GD-80 series have been
converted into files for the V series.
(
For more information, refer to the File Conversion Manual.)
♦ [Detail] Tab Window
[
Use Graphic]
This option lets you to use graphics for entry keys.
Note
When using the graphic library for placing characters on entry keys, [XOR] must be
chosen for [Draw Mode] in the [switch] dialog.
If it is not possible to place all the desired characters (numerals, characters in upper and
lower cases, etc.) on one keypad, register these characters as graphics in the graphic
library, and change them over on the keypad as required.
• [When [ Use Graphic] is checked:
[Start Graphic GNo. & No.]/[End Graphic GNo. & No.]
Specify the range of graphics to be used in the entry mode. The graphics
can be changed using the switches for [Function: Graphic Library] or
[Function: Plus Block/Minus Block].
7-14
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
[
Default to 0]
This is enabled when a data display part as an entry display is placed.
• When [ Default to 0] is checked:
The following data is used for the default entry display after pressing the
ENT key:
Numerical data entry → 0
Character entry
→ space
• When [ Default to 0] is unchecked:
The data in the entry target is indicated in the entry display.
[
Lines/Columns Output]
This option is enabled when the entry target is table data display. (
more information, refer to page 7-27.)
[Process Cycle]
Set the process cycle. (
Process Cycle.”)
For
For more information, refer to “Appendix 2
7
Entry Dialog Setting
7-15
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
When [Direct] is Chosen for [Type]:
This is not available for a table data display.
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.] (0 to 255)
Specify the division number. In one division, only one entry mode can be
registered. The parts to be used in entry mode must be placed in the same
division. (For more information about Division Number, refer to Chapter 2 in
the Reference Manual (Operation).)
A maximum of four entry modes are available on one screen (the base screen and
overlaps 0 to 2).
[Type]
• Direct
The entry format, the number of digits, the decimal point position, etc. are
externally commanded via the memory address. Enter data to [Info. Output
Memory] through the keypad.
The number of words occupied
Numerical data entry:
[Info. Output Memory] n + 2, n + 3
Character data entry:
[Info. Output Memory] n + 2 to as many words as
there are characters are used.
7-16
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
[Command Memory]
The entry format, the number of digits, the decimal point position, etc. are
specified.
LSB
MSB
Command
memory n
15 14 13 12
0
0
0
1: Clear
n+1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Entry format
0: DEC (w/o sign)
1: DEC (w/ −sign)
2: DEC (w/ +− sign)
3: HEX
4: OCT
5: BIN
6: TEXT
Write format
0: DEC
1: BCD
15 14 13 12
0
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
Decimal point
BCD: 0 to 7
DEC: 0 to 9
• Write format (bit 4)
Specify data format to be used for
writing data to “n (information output
memory) + 2 and later.” Note that
when BCD is chosen, “0” is entered for
negative values.
7
Bit No.
Entry format
02
01
00
0
0
0
DEC (w/o sign)
0
0
1
DEC (w/ −sign)
0
1
0
DEC (w/ +− sign)
0
1
1
HEX
1
0
0
OCT
1
0
1
BIN
1
1
0
TEXT
• Clear (bit 15)
This bit is used for clearing the data
from the entry display part.
0:
The data indicated in the entry display part remains.
1:
Entering “0” clears the current numerical data.
Entering a space (ANK 20H) clears the current characters. Entry is
prohibited.
The following PLC manufacturers use BCD code:
OMRON: C series, SHARP: JW series, FUJI: H series, KOYO: S series
• Digits for entry (n + 1 bits 0 to 7)
Specify the number of digits for entry. “0 to 80” can be specified. The
number of required bits depends on the code (DEC or BCD).
DEC: Bits 0 to 6
BCD: Bits 0 to 7
7-17
Entry Dialog Setting
• Display format (bits 0 to 2)
Specify data format to be used for
entry.
Digits for entry
BCD: 1 to 8
DEC: 1 to 10
HEX:
1 to 8
OCT:
1 to 11
BIN:
1 to 32
TEXT: 1 to 80
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
• Decimal point (n + 1 bits 8 to 11)
Specify the decimal point position. Up to 10 digits can be displayed in DEC
(
refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display”). Therefore “0 to 9” can be specified.
[Info. Output Memory]
The V series writes the entry mode status.
LSB
MSB
Info. output
memory n
15 14 13 12 11
0
0
0
Input
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
Write format
0: DEC
1: BCD
1: Writing completed
n+1
15 14 13 12 11
0
0
0
0
0
Entry format
0: DEC (w/o sign)
1: DEC (w/ −sign)
2: DEC (w/ +− sign)
3: HEX
4: OCT
5: BIN
6: TEXT
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
Decimal point
BCD: 0 to 7
DEC: 0 to 9
n+2
0
15 14 13 12 11
Digits for entry
BCD: 1 to 8
DEC: 1 to 10
HEX:
1 to 8
OCT:
1 to 11
BIN:
1 to 32
TEXT: 1 to 80
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Entered data
n+m
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
• Entry format, write format (bits 0 to 2 and 4)
Data specified in the command memory address is written.
The number of characters here is based on one-byte codes. Two one-byte characters
occupy one word. Therefore, the number of words occupied can be calculated by
dividing the number of characters by 2. If there is a remainder, it occupies one word.
Ex.: 3 characters = 2 words
• Input (bit 14)
Input status is written. Bit 14 of the entry mode for the area (base screen or
overlap 0 to 2) being placed at the top is set (1). For the remaining areas, bit
14 is reset (0).
0:
Input is not possible.
1:
Input is possible.
7-18
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
• Writing completed (bit 15)
When the ENT key is pressed, this bit is set to “1” (ON).
• Digits for entry, decimal point (n + 1 bits 0 to 7 and 8 to 11)
Data specified in the command memory address is written.
• Entered data (n + 2 to n + m)
Write entry data when the ENT key is pressed.
The number of words occupied
Numerical data entry:
[Info. Output Memory] n + 2, n + 3
Character data entry:
[Info. Output Memory] n + 2 to as many words as
there are characters are used.
♦ [Detail] Tab Window
Set these options as explained in [Type: Data Display].
Refer to page 7-14.
7
Entry Dialog Setting
7-19
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Entry Keys (Keypad)
A number of keys are required for entering numerals and characters in entry
mode. There are three methods as described below.
• Choose and place the desired keypad part from the parts file. (
page 7-20.)
• Set and place the necessary entry switches one by one. (
page 7-21.)
Refer to
Refer to
• Use the graphic library
If it is not possible to place all the desired characters on one keypad, register
these characters as graphics in the graphic library, and change them over on
the keypad as required. You can save the number of screens and switches.
(
Refer to page 7-22.)
Placement from the Parts File
For more information on the placement method, refer to Chapter 2 in the
Reference Manual (Operation).
♦ Notes
[Division No.]
Be sure to specify the same division number as in the [Entry] dialog.
(
For more information about the division number, refer to Chapter 2 in
the Reference Manual (Operation).)
7-20
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Set and Place the Switches One by One
1. Open the [Switch] dialog.
2. [Main] tab window
[Division No.]
Be sure to specify the same division number as in the [Entry] dialog.
(
For more information about Division Number, refer to Chapter 2 in
the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Function]
Set the necessary functions. (
page 7-25.)
Refer to the switch function list on
7
Entry Keys (Keypad)
3. [Characters] tab window
[No.0 - 3]
Set the desired numerical/character data. In the case of character data,
written code depends on whether it’s two byte or one byte. For the other
setting items, refer to “Chapter 3 Switch.”
4. Place the keypad on the screen.
7-21
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Use the Graphic Library for Character Entry Key
Select the switches from the parts files [Parts_j.V7P / Std.V7P] (V7 series) and
[Parts_j.V6P / Std.V6P] (V6 series).
♦ Placement of the Character Entry Switches
1. Open the [Switch] dialog.
2. [Main] tab window
[Division No.]
Be sure to specify the same division number as in the [Entry] dialog.
(
For more information about the division number, refer to Chapter 2
in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Drawing Mode]
Be sure to select [XOR].
[Function]
Be sure to select [Character Entry].
3. [Character] tab window
[No.0 - 3]
Keep the fields blank. For the other setting items, refer to “Chapter 3
Switch.”
7-22
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
♦ Graphic Library Edit
1. [Item] → [Graphic Library]
The [Graphic Library] dialog is displayed.
2. Input [Start Graphic No.] set in the [Detail] Tab Window of the [Entry] dialog.
The screen of Graphic Library Edit is displayed.
3. Select [Display] → [Display Environment] → [Detail]. Set the screen placed
character entry switches by checking the [Base Screen Dsp.].
4. Place the text in drawing on the displayed switches.
If text is placed out of the switches, the character entry function becomes
invalid. (
For centering, refer page 7-24.) The offset position must be
placed on the upper left corner of the screen.
1. Place character entry keys on the base screen.
7
2. Open [Start Graphic GNo. No.] window
3. Display the base screen.
Entry Keys (Keypad)
4. Place the text in drawing
on the switches.
5. Place the characters up to [End Graphic GNo. No.].
(
For more information on “Graphic Library Edit,” refer to Chapter 4 in
the Reference Manual (Operation).)
7-23
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Character Centering (Use graphic library)
Center the text on the graphic library to place it in the center of the switches.
1. While open the screen edit, click [Display
Environment] in the [Display] menu.
The [Display Environment] dialog is
displayed.
2. Check [
Graphic Library].
3. Click [Key Dsp. No.].
4. Set [Start Graphic No.] used for entry mode.
5. Click [OK], then go back to the screen edit.
The set graphic library is displayed on the screen.
6. Select all switches with click & drag.
7. Click [Centering of Switch Lamp] from the [Align] in the [Edit] menu.
Centering is completed.
8. Repeat the steps from 3 to 8 until [End Graphic].
7-24
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Switch Functions List
Switch functions available on keypad are as follows:
Switch repeat function = Holding down the switch repeats the switch operation.
For more information, refer to “Appendix 1 Internal Memory” (page A1-1).
Function
Char. Entry
Attached data
None
Action
Numeral or character codes are entered.
Write
None
Entered data is written to the specified memory address.
Clear
None
Entered data is cleared.
Toggle Sign
None
Entered sign is inverted (for numerical data entry).
Space
None
One-byte space is entered (for character entry).
Backspace
None
The character before the cursor is deleted (for character entry).
None
The character of the current cursor position is deleted (for character entry).
+1
None
The number at the current cursor position is increased by one (for
numerical data entry).
−1
None
The number at the current cursor position is decreased by one (for
numerical data entry).
←
None
The cursor is moved to the left.
→
None
The cursor is moved to the right.
↑
None
The entry target is moved to the data display part, which is decreased by
one.
↓
None
The entry target is moved to the data display part, which is increased by
one.
»
None
The entry target is moved to the area, which is increased by one.
«
None
The entry target is moved to the area, which is decreased by one.
Graphic
Library
GNo.
No.
The specified graphic is displayed.
Plus block
None
The block/graphic number is increased by one.
Minus block
None
The block/graphic number is decreased by one.
Move Cursor R
None
The cursor is moved to the right in a table data display part.
Move Cursor L
None
The cursor is moved to the left in a table data display part.
Table Move +
None
When there are multiple table data display parts, the cursor is moved to the
table, which is increased by one.
Table Move −
None
When there are multiple table data display parts, the cursor is moved to the
table, which is decreased by one.
7-25
7
Entry Keys (Keypad)
DEL
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Entry Target (Numerical Data/Character/
Table Data Display Part)
Set and place the numerical data, character, and table data display part, which
will display the data entered through the keypad.
In the case of Numerical Data/Character Display Part
The following describes important setting items when the entry target is
numerical data display parts or character display parts. For the other setting
items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display.”
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Specify the desired division number. (
For more information about the
division number, refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Memory]
Specify the desired memory address. When pressing the ENT key, the data
is written directly to this address.
♦ [Type] Tab Window
[Display Function]
Select [Entry Target]. A link with the entry mode is established.
[Order]
This is an ordinal number to select and recognize the entry target. This
option becomes active when [Entry Target] is chosen for [Display Function].
• Select [Input Item Select: Internal] in the [Entry] dialog.
The cursor is moved by the value of the ordinal number. The ordinal
number of the entry target selected by the cursor is written in [Info.
Output Memory].
• Select [Input Item Select: External] in the [Entry] dialog.
The cursor is displayed on the entry target of the specified ordinal
number from [Command Memory] and output to [Info. Output Memory].
♦ Placement
Place the set numerical data display part on the screen. You can place it
anywhere on the base screen or overlaps 0 to 2.
7-26
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
In the case of Table Display Part
The following describes important setting items when the entry target is table
data display parts. For the other setting items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display.”
For how to edit table data display, refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual
(Operation).
♦ [Table Data Display] Dialog
When using the special function of the table data display, the division number must be
different from that of the entry mode. For more information, refer to page 7-28.
[Order]
When there are multiple table data display parts, determine the selection
order number.
[
Item Select]
This option becomes active when [Internal] is chosen for [Input Item Select]
in the [Entry] dialog. Check this option when moving cursor to only the
selecting entry targets.
[Inc. Direction] (RGT/DW)
This option becomes active when bit 14 (cursor move) of the address “n”
(command memory) in the [Entry] dialog is set ON. Set the direction of
cursor movement when the switch [Function: Write] is pressed. When
pressing the switch of [Function: DW/UP], the cursor is moves down.
♦ Placement
Click [OK] in the above dialog. Table data display part is placed on the screen.
You can place it anywhere on the base screen or overlaps 0 to 2.
7-27
7
Entry Target (Numerical Data/Character/ Table Data Display Part)
[Division No.]
Specify the division number.
(
For more information about the division number, refer to Chapter 2 in
the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
The following describes the setting of each data element within the table data
display part.
♦ [Type 1] Tab Window
Select [Num. Display] for the numerical data entry, and select [Char. Display] for
character entry.
♦ [Type 2] Tab Window
[Display Function]
Select [Entry Target].
A link with the entry mode is established.
[Memory]
Specify the desired memory address.
When pressing the ENT key, the data is written directly to this address.
Special Function for Table Data Display
When cells in the top line of a table are specified as text (created from [Draw] and [Text])
displays, the top line has the switch function. When press the top line, cursor moves to
the top entry target cell in the table.
Same as these
switches
Entry Screen
No. Current Target
Limit
1
162
170
150
2
644
800
600
3
151
140
100
4
758
900
600
5
60
50
20
Value entered
10
No.
A
B
C
D
1
10
425
700
1615
2
52
754
100
1554
3
45
433
300
Table Move +
1225
Table Move -
UP
<- ->
DW
7
8
9
-
4
5
6
+
2
3
CLR
1
0
ENT
Pressing the top line moves the cursor to the top entry
target cell in the table.
The above function is not effective when the same division number is chosen for table
data display parts and the entry mode, nor is it effective when table data display parts
are placed in data blocks ([Type: Block] is set in the [Entry] dialog).
7-28
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Entry Display
When setting data display part, [Entry Display] must be chosen for [Display
Function]. The data entered through keypad is displayed temporarily. When the
ENT key is pressed, it is written to the entry target memory. If this part has not
been set, data entered through keys is indicated directly in an entry target.
Notes on setting of entry displays are provided below. For the other setting
items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display.”
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Be sure to specify the same division number as in the [Entry] dialog.
(Division number:
Refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual
(Operation).)
♦ [Type] Tab Window
[Display Function]
Be sure to select [Entry Display].
[Decimal Point]
When the entry targets have the same settings of [Digits] and [Decimal
Point], enter the same value of [Decimal Point] for the entry display.
In the case that the settings of [Digits] and [Decimal Point] differ for each
entry target:
When there are entry targets for which [Decimal Point] is set, specify “1” for
the entry display. When there is no entry target for which [Decimal Point] is
set, specify “0” for the entry display.
[Display Type]
When the entry targets have the same setting of [Display Type], specify the
same for the entry display. When the setting of [Display Type] differs for
each entry target, choose the setting for the greatest number of digits.
7-29
7
Entry Display
[Digits]
The number of digits set for entry display must be greater than that of the
entry target. If not, the data for the entry target exceeding the maximum
number of digits for the entry display cannot be held in the entry display part.
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Entry Data Range
Minimum and maximum displays can be set only for numerical data entry.
They are not available for character display.
In the case that [Alarm] is set on the numerical data display part for entry target,
minimum and maximum data are displayed.
Notes on setting of minimum and maximum displays are provided below.
For the other setting items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display.”
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Be sure to specify the same division number as in the [Entry] dialog.
(Division number:
Refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual
(Operation).)
♦ [Type] Tab Window
[Display Function]
Be sure to select [Max. Display] or [Min. Display].
[Digits]
The number of digits set for entry data range (minimum or maximum display)
must be greater than that of the entry target. If not, data for the entry target
exceeding the maximum number of digits for entry data range cannot be
entered.
[Decimal Point]
When the entry targets have the same settings of [Digits] and [Decimal
Point], enter the same value of [Decimal Point].
In the case that the settings of [Digits] and [Decimal Point] differ for each
entry target:
When there are entry targets for which [Decimal Point] is set, specify “1” for
the entry display. When there is no entry target for which [Decimal Point] is
set, specify “0.”
[Display Type]
When the entry targets have the same setting of [Display Type], specify the
same. When the setting of [Display Type] differs for each entry target,
choose the setting for the greatest number of digits.
7-30
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Data Block
Place the data block area on the screen. Register the entry targets in the “data
block.” Many entry targets can be displayed by switching the block No. A
maximum of four data blocks are available on one screen. If you set four data
blocks on the base screen, you cannot set any more data blocks on the overlaps
0 to 2.
Data block area
Data Block No. 2
V4T
Entry Screen
9955
V4C
8844
Data
Block No. 1
7733
Data 1
1111
V4W
6622
Data 2
Data2222
Block No. 0
V4S
5511
Data 3 Number 13333
0
V4B
Data 4 Number 24444 0
Number 3
Number 4
Text 1
0.0
0.00
Data Block No.
0
Number 1
Number 2
0
Number 3
0.0
Number 4
0.00
AAAA
Text 1
AAAA
UP
DW
Max. value
9999
Min. value
0
Entered value
0
7
8
9
UP
4
5
6
DW
1
2
3
CLR
0
.
+/-
ENT
Data block change switches
Data Block
Setting Items
• [Part] → [Data Block Area]
New:
Existing:
7
[Data Block] Dialog See page 7-32.
Data block change switches See page 7-34.
Display area See page 7-34.
Be sure to set.
Set if necessary.
• [Item] → [Data Block] → [Data Block Edit]
Register entry target on [Data Block Edit]. (Data Block Edit:
Chapter 4 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
refer to
7-31
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
[Data Block] Dialog
♦ [Main1] Tab Window
[Division No.] (0 to 255)
Specify division number. Only one data block area can be set in one
division. (
For more information about the division number, refer to
Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Command]
Specify the command methods for changing over the data block to be
displayed.
• Internal
Data blocks are changed over by the switch for [Function: Plus
Block/Minus Block/Block Call]. The division numbers set for the block
change switch and the [Data Block Area] dialog must be the same to
make the switch valid.
• External
Specify block No. for [Block No. Read Mem.].
[Block No. Read Mem.]
This option becomes active when [External] is chosen for [Command].
Specify a memory address for [Block No. Read Mem.].
[Initial Block] [Min. Block] [Max. Block]
These options become active when [Internal] is chosen for [Command].
• Initial Block: The block number to be displayed first after the screen is
opened.
• Min. Block: The minimum number of the block numbers to be displayed
for these options respectively.
• Max. Block: The maximum number of the block numbers to be used for
these options respectively.
7-32
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
♦ [Main2] Tab Window
[
Info. Output Memory]
• Checked
The block number currently being displayed is written.
[
Item Select]
• Checked
An item select memory address can be specified.
7
[
GD80 Compatible]
This is used when screen data files of the GD-80 series have been
converted into files for the V series. (
For more information, refer to the
File Conversion Manual.)
[Order]
Up to four data block areas can be placed on one screen. When multiple
data blocks are placed, this option determines the data block order number.
[Process Cycle]
Set the process cycle. (
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”)
7-33
Data Block
[No. of Words]
[These options become active when [ Item Selection] is checked.
Be sure to set this option. (
For more information on item selection,
refer to page 7-37.)
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Display Area
Set the display area to display the entry target placed with [Data Block Edit].
♦ Notes
[Division No.]
Specify the same division number as in the [Data Block Area] dialog.
(Division number:
Refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual
(Operation).)
Switches
When [Internal] is chosen for [Command] in the [Data Block Area] dialog, data
block change switches are necessary.
♦ Notes
[Division No.]
Specify the same division number as in the [Data Block Area] dialog.
(Division number:
Refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual
(Operation).)
• [Function]
Plus Block/ Minus Block/ Block Call (
page 7-25.)
For more information, refer to
Data Block Edit (Entry Target)
An entry target must be placed in data blocks. They cannot be placed on the
base screen or overlaps 0 to 2.
7-34
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Placement of Keypad on Overlap
It is possible to place a keypad on an overlap while entry targets are placed on
the screen. The keypad can be displayed on the screen only when necessary.
• Normal (Overlap is not displayed)
Data Entry
Overlap No. 0
Num. Display 1
1111
7
8
9
UP
Num. Display 2
2222
4
5
6
DW
Num. Display 3
3333
1
2
3
CLR
0
.
+/-
Max.
ENT
9999
Min.
0
Enter
0
Overlap
• Entered (Overlap is displayed)
Data Entry
Overlap No. 0
Num. Display 1
1111
Num. Display 2
2222
Num. Display 3
3333
8
9
4
5
1
2
.
+/-
0
Max.
UP
7
8
9
6
DW
4
5
6
DW
3
CLR
1
2
3
CLR
ENT
0
.
+/-
Max.
9999
7
UP
ENT
9999
Min.
0
Min.
0
Enter
0
Enter
0
Overlap
Notes
Some parts must be set on an overlap and others must be set on the base
screen. Be sure to set properly. For the setting contents, refer to the following
reference pages.
♦ Setting on an overlap
•
•
•
•
[Entry] dialog (
Page 7-8)
Keypad (
Page 7-20)
[Entry Display] (
Page 7-29)
[Max. Display] and [Min. Display] (
Page 7-30)
The above parts must be placed in the same division.
♦ Setting on the base screen
• [Entry Target] (
Page 7-26)
7-35
Placement of Keypad on Overlap
7
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Overlap
Base screen
Data Entry
7
8
9
UP
4
5
6
DW
Num. Display 1
1111
1
2
3
CLR
Num. Display 2
2222
0
.
+/-
ENT
Num. Display 3
3333
Max.
9999
Min.
0
Enter
0
7
8
9
UP
4
5
6
DW
1
2
3
CLR
0
.
+/-
Max.
ENT
9999
Min.
0
Enter
0
Overlap
Overlap Calling and Deleting
When a keypad is placed on the overlap with entry mode, the overlap is deleted
by pressing the ENT key. Place the overlap call switch over each entry target.
Place an overlap call switch over this part.
Data Entry
Overlap No. 0
7
8
9
UP
4
5
6
DW
Num. Display 1
1111
1
2
3
CLR
Num. Display 2
2222
0
.
+/-
ENT
Num. Display 3
3333
Max.
9999
Min.
0
Enter
0
7
8
9
UP
4
5
6
DW
1
2
3
CLR
0
.
+/-
Max.
ENT
9999
Min.
0
Enter
0
The overlap is deleted by pressing the ENT key.
The following two methods are used to maintain the overlap after pressing the
ENT key.
• Set the internal memory address $s76 to a value other than [0].
(
For more information on the internal memory, refer to “Appendix 1
Internal Memory.”)
• Place the overlap call switch in a position separated from the entry targets.
Data Entry
Overlap No. 0
7
8
9
UP
4
5
6
DW
1
0
Max.
2
3
.
+/-
Num. Display 1
1111
CLR
Num. Display 2
2222
ENT
Num. Display 3
3333
9999
Min.
0
Enter
0
7
8
9
UP
4
5
6
DW
1
2
3
CLR
0
.
+/-
Max.
ENT
9999
Min.
0
Enter
0
Overlap
Overlap call switch
7-36
The overlap is not deleted by pressing the ENT key.
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Item Select Function
• The cursor can be moved to the specified entry targets only, or it can be
locked to prohibit entry target selection. These operations are set by the
“item select function.”
Entry Screen
9999
Min. value
0
Value entered
0
The cursor cannot move to
“Number 2” and “Text 1.”
0
Number 1
Number 2
Max. value
0
7
8
9
UP
Number 3
0.0
4
5
6
DW
Number 4
0.00
1
2
3
CLR
AAAA
0
.
+/-
ENT
Text 1
• The item select function becomes available when [Data Display] or [Block] is
chosen for [Type], and [Internal] is chosen for [Input Item Select] in the
[Entry] dialog.
Item Select Switch
When using an item select switch (for which [Item Select] is chosen for
[Function] in the [Switch] dialog), place it over each data display part (entry
target). Pressing the switch moves the cursor to the display part.
Item select switches ([Function: Item Select]) must be placed on the editing
layer (base screen or overlaps 0 to 2) for which the [Entry] dialog is set.
Otherwise, the switches do not work.
0
Value entered
0
0
7
8
9
UP
Number 3
0.0
4
5
6
DW
Number 4
0.00
1
2
3
CLR
0
.
+/-
ENT
Text 1
Switch
9999
Max. value
0
Number 1
Number 2
Max. value
AAAA
Pressing a switch moves the cursor to
the corresponding data display part.
7-37
7
Item Select Function
• For using the item select function, set the item select memory (
refer to
page 7-38), or use a switch for which [Item Select] is chosen for [Function] in
the [Switch] dialog (described as follows).
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Item Select Memory Setting
The entry target selection command is set by the item select memory address.
The memory address setting method depends on the type of the entry target and
the editing layers selected for placing the entry targets.
♦ When Entry Targets are Placed in Data Blocks:
• Placing on the base screen
[Edit] → [Screen Setting] →
[Screen Setting] dialog
- [ Item Select Memory]
Check [Item Select Memory].
The desired memory address
can be specified.
• Placing on Overlaps (Normal)
Double-click the overlap with entry targets.
→ The [Overlap (Normal)] dialog is displayed.
- [ Item Select]
Check [Item Select]. The desired memory address can be specified.
7-38
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
• Placing on Overlaps (Call or Multi)
[Overlap (Call)] or [Overlap (Multi)] dialog.
- [ Item Select]
Check [Item Select]. The desired memory address can be specified.
• Placing on Data Blocks
[Data Block Area] dialog → [Main 2] tab window
- [ Item Select]
Check [Item Select]. The desired memory address can be specified.
Item Select Function
- [No. of Words]
Specify [No. of Words] for the item select memory.
7
7-39
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
♦ When Entry Targets are Table Data Display Parts:
• [Table Data Display] dialog
[ Item Select]
Check [Item Select]. The desired memory address can be specified.
When the entry targets are table data display parts, for all placement areas
they can be set in the [Table Data Display] dialog.
7-40
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Contents of Item Select Memory
The memory addresses specified for [Item Select Memory] are linked with the
selection order of entry targets as shown below:
♦ For Numerical Data/Character Display Parts as Entry Targets
MSB
Command
memory n
n+1
LSB
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Bit number
Selection order of entry
targets
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
n+m
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
m × 16 + 15
Bit number
Selection order of entry
targets
m × 16
Ex.:
MSB
Item select memory n
LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Ignored
DW
UP
Selection
order No.
V4T
1111
0
V4C
2222
1
V4W
3333
2
V4B
4444
3
V4H
5555
4
0
1
0
1
0
1
7
Corresponding to
selection order
Item Select Function
Data Block No. 0
0
The entry target moves in the following order:
1111
3333
UP
5555
1111
7-41
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
♦ For Cells in Table Data Display Part as Entry Targets
Assignment depends on the number of lines of Table Data Display Part.
In this case, you need not be concerned with the selection order of data
display parts.
Line and column numbers of a table are fixed, irrespective of settings of cells.
When a table includes or does not include cells for entry targets, or when it
includes only cells for text (created from [Draw] and [Text]) displays, the line
and column numbers do not change.
• Table consisting of 1 to 16 lines
For a table consisting of 1 to 16 lines, one word is used for one line. The
total number of words: [the number of lines] words.
Line numbers
MSB
16
Item select
memory n
n+1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
LSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
n+m
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Bit number
Line 1
Bit number
Line 2
Bit number
Line “m”
• Table consisting of 17 to 20 lines
For a table consisting of 17 or more lines, 2 words are used for one line.
The total number of words: [2 × the number of lines] words.
MSB
Item select
memory
LSB
20 19 18 17
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n+1
n+3
n+q
7-42
LSB
Line
LSB
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n+2
n+p
Bit number
Line 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Bit number
Line 2
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Bit number
Line “m”
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Password Entry
It is easy to enter a password in the entry mode.
Ex.) Character display
Memory: D300
Display Function:
Password Entry
[Detail] menu
Password 0: 1999
Password 1: 1231
Password 2: (None)
Password 3: (None)
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
CLR
0
.
+/-
ENT
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
CLR
0
.
+/-
ENT
When entering “1999”
D300 = 0
When entering “1231”
D300 = 1
7
D300 = −1
When entering “2000”
Password Entry
Setting Items
[Part] → [Entry]
New:
Existing:
Entry dialog See page 7-8.
Character Display See page 7-44.
Keypad See page 7-20.
Entry dialog
Set the entry mode the same as the case of [Type: Data Display]. (
to page 7-8.)
Refer
7-43
Chapter 7 Entry Mode
Character Display (Password Entry)
Place the character display part to enter the password.
♦ [Type] Tab Window
[Display Function]
Select [Password Entry]. This adds setting items to the [Detail] tab window
for the password entry.
♦ [Detail] Tab Window
[Password]
It is possible to set password. (A maximum of 32 one-byte characters can be
entered.) Select [Fixation] to set fixed passwords. Select [Transformation]
to set variable passwords or to set five kinds or more passwords.
[Fixation]
Password 0 (to 3)
Set the password.
[Transformation] (V series only)
Password 0 (to 3)
Check this box and specify [Memory]. Set the password in this memory.
For the other setting items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display.”
How to Operate
• Enter the password through the keypad the same as the entry mode.
- Password matches:
Password number 0 (to 3) is stored in [Memory].
- Password does not match:
[−1] is stored in [Memory].
• The result stored in [Memory] will not be cleared until the next password is
entered. It should be cleared by the user when it is necessary.
7-44
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Graph Display
Outline
Data in the PLC memory can be displayed in a graph.
Changes in data can be visualized.
PLC memory
SYSTEM
F1
F2
.................
Types of Graphs
• Bar graph
• Pie graph
• Panel meter
• Statistic graph
(bar, pie)
• Trend graph
• Closed area graph
0
50
F3
F4
7000
run
STOP
100%
F5
F6
F7
POWER
V series
PLC
Bar Graph Outline
• Data in the memory address can be expressed in
a bar graph.
It is possible to extend the bar from the desired
standard point.
50
100
8
0
50
100
Outline
• When data in the PLC memory exceeds or falls
short of the range specified, the graph color can
be changed to alert the operator.
0
Standard point
As shown below, it is possible to indicate a bar graph in several colors.
8-1
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Pie Graph Outline
• Data in the specified memory address can be expressed in a pie graph,
extending the graph clockwise from the start point.
It is possible to extend the graph from the desired standard point.
Standard point
• When data in the PLC memory exceeds or falls short of the range specified,
the graph color can be changed to alert the operator.
It is possible to indicate a pie graph in several colors.
Panel Meter Outline
• Data in the specified memory address can be
expressed in the form of an analog meter.
• The indicator can be moved to the right or left.
• When data in the PLC memory exceeds or falls short
of the range specified, the indicator color can be changed.
8-2
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Statistic Graph Outline
• Percentages of data contained in multiple memory addresses can be
expressed in a statistic graph.
• Two types of statistic graphs are available: bar graph and pie graph.
1. Bar graph:
Horizontal bar (→) or vertical bar (↑)
2. Pie graph
%
15
25
20
10
30
Statistic graph
Linked
%
%
%
%
%
Numerical data
display
• One statistic graph can be divided into a maximum of eight sections.
• It is also possible to indicate percentages in numerals. The statistic graph
must be linked with numerical data display parts.
8
When displaying data in a line graph, the trend sampling function is also available.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 10 Sampling.”
Outline
Trend Graph Outline
• Data in consecutive memory
addresses can be expressed in a
line graph or rectangular waves.
• Subsidiary lines can be drawn for
easier recognition of data change.
• A maximum of 16 trends (lines)
can be displayed.
• Negative values can be used.
100
80
60
40
20
0
8-3
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Closed Area Graph Outline
• Changes in a closed area, such as a tank, can be expressed in a closed area
graph.
1234
• When data of an area exceeds or falls short of the range specified, the graph
color can be changed.
8-4
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Bar Graph
[Bar Graph] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Memory]
Data in this memory address is shown in the graph in real time. The data in
this address is called the “current value.”
8-5
8
Bar Graph
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Setting] Tab Window
[Data Length]
Choose either 1-word or 2-word for the data length of the specified memory.
[1-Word]: word
[2-Word]: double-word
[Type]
Choose either [Standard] or [Deviation].
Standard: The bar extends from the minimum value toward the maximum
value to the current value.
Deviation: Determine the standard value in the graph. The bar extends
from the standard value to the current value.
[Direction]
Choose from [RGT], [LFT], [UP], or [DW] to select the direction for drawing
the graph.
50
0
0
50
0
50
50
0
50
0
0
50
50
0
0
50
[Scale]
Specify the minimum and maximum values for the range of the graph.
Negative values can be entered.
[Target Value]/[Standard Value]
When [Standard] is chosen for [Type], the option name reads [Target Value].
When [Deviation] is chosen, it reads [Standard Value]. When the value
changes, choose the PLC memory; when it is fixed, choose [Constant].
* When checking [Alarm] in the [Alarm Setting] tab window, it is not necessary
to set [Target Value].
8-6
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Disp. Prop.] Tab Window
• Standard
• Deviation
In-area property
In-area property
Frame color
ON color
Current value
Target value
Target color
Frame color
ON color
Current value Target value
[Target Color]
This option becomes active when [Standard] is chosen for [Type] in the
[Setting] tab window.
* When checking [Alarm] in the [Alarm Setting] tab window, it is not necessary
to set this option.
[
Frame]
Choose whether or not to draw a frame around the bar graph. When this box
is checked ( ), a frame is drawn.
[Frame Color]
This option becomes active when the [
the desired color for the graph frame.
Frame] box is checked. Choose
[ON Color]
Choose colors to paint the bar to the current value. The [Background] option
becomes active when any tile pattern other than pattern 0 (extreme left) is
chosen for [Tile].
* When checking [Alarm] in the [Alarm Setting] tab window, it is not necessary
to set this option.
8-7
8
Bar Graph
[In-area Prop.]
Specify the colors inside the graph. The [Background] option becomes
active when any tile pattern other than pattern 0 (extreme left) is chosen for
[Tile].
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Alarm Setting] Tab Window
When showing scales, do not place scales in the
following position. There are some cases where
[Color] for [Mark Display] is different from the
setting color or is not displayed.
The mark is drawn by XORed color.
[
Horizontal
bar
Vertical bar
A
A
A
A = 2 dots
A
Alarm]
If you want to show the bar in a different color when data in the specified
memory address exceeds or falls short of the range specified, check this box
( ).
[Upper Value] [Lower Value]/[Range Value] [Standard Value]
When [Standard] is chosen for [Type] in the [Setting] tab window, these
options read [Upper Value] and [Lower Value]. When [Deviation] is chosen
for [Type], they read [Range Value] and [Standard Value].
• [Upper Value] [Lower Value]
[Lower Value] specifies the lower limit of data, and [Upper Value] specifies
the upper limit of data.
• [Range Value] [Standard Value]
[Standard Value] specifies the standard value. [Range Value] specifies a
data range from the standard value in both directions.
[
Mark Display]
Check this box (
using
marks.
) when you want to indicate the upper and lower limits
[Color]
When the [ Mark Display] box is checked, this option becomes active.
Choose the desired color for the mark.
8-8
Chapter 8 Graph Display
[Position]
When the [ Mark Display] box is
checked, this option becomes active.
Choose either [Top] (left) or [Bottom] (right)
for placing marks.
[
Separate Display]
The bar is shown in separate colors: [Lower Color], [Range Color], and
[Upper Color] specified in [Alarm Color] tab window when this option is
checked ( ). (
Refer to page 8-10.)
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
♦ [Alarm Color] Tab Window
8
Bar Graph
[Upper Color]
Color to be used when the current value exceeds the upper limit
[Lower Color]
Color to be used when the current value falls short of the lower limit
[Range Color]
Color to be used between the upper and lower limits
For each option, choose the desired colors for [Foreground] and [Background].
The [Background] option becomes active when any tile pattern other than
pattern 0 (extreme left) is chosen for [Tile].
8-9
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Alarm Setting 2] Tab Window
When [ Alarm] is checked in the [Alarm Setting] tab
window, this tab is displayed. Specify it when you want to
display more than three colors of alarm setting.
The contents of this tab window are the same as the
[Alarm Setting] and [Alarm Color] tab windows.
5-color alarm display
Upper 2 color
Upper color
Range color
* When [Deviation] is selected, this setting cannot be
specified; only 3-color alarm display is possible.
Lower color
Lower 2 color
Examples with Alarm Setting
• [Type: Standard], [Alarm] (checked)
Lower
color
Range
color
Upper
color
In-area
property
[Direction: →]
Single color use
50
150
Current value
Separate color use
250
Lower value
350
450
Upper value
50
150
Current value
With marks
250
350
Lower value
450
Upper value
50
150
250
150
250
Lower
value
50
Current
value
150
350
50
Upper
value
250
Lower value
450
150
250
Lower
value
350
450
Upper value
50
Current value
350
Current
value
150
Upper value
450
Upper
value
250
Lower value
450
Current value
Lower value
50
350
350
Upper value
450
Current value
• [Type: Deviation], [Alarm] (checked)
Lower
color
Range
color
Upper
color
In-area
property
[Direction: →]
Single color use
50
150
Separate color use
250
350
450
A
A
Standard value
Current value
A: Range
50
150
Current value
With marks
250
350
450
350
450
50
150
A
A
Standard value
A
Lower value
50
150
250
A
Current value
50
150
450
50
A
Standard value
250
A
A
Standard value
8-10
350
350
150
250
A
Current value
450
Current value
50
150
A
Standard value
250
A
A
standard value
250
350
450
Current value
350
A
Upper value
450
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Pie Graph
[Pie Graph] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
8
[Memory]
Data in this memory address is shown in the graph in real time. The data in
this address is called the “current value.”
8-11
Pie Graph
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Setting] Tab Window
[Data Length]
Choose either 1-word or 2-word for the data length of the specified memory.
[1-Word]: word
[2-Word]: double-word
[Type]
Choose either [Standard] or [Deviation].
Standard: The bar extends from the minimum value toward the maximum
value to the current value.
Deviation: Determine the standard value in the graph. The graph extends
from the standard value to the current value.
• Standard
• Deviation
Standard value
[Scale]
Specify the minimum and maximum values for the range of the graph.
Negative values can be entered.
[Target Value]/[Standard Value]
When [Standard] is chosen for [Type], the option name reads [Target Value].
When [Deviation] is chosen, it reads [Standard Value]. When the value
changes, choose the PLC memory; when it is fixed, choose [Constant].
* When checking [Alarm] in the [Alarm Setting] tab window, it is not necessary to
set [Target Value].
8-12
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Disp. Prop.] Tab Window
[In-area Prop.]
Specify the colors inside the graph. The
[Background] option becomes active when
any tile pattern other than pattern 0
(extreme left) is chosen for [Tile].
Frame color
8
Target value
ON color
Current value
* When checking [Alarm] in the [Alarm Setting] tab window, it is not necessary
to set this option.
[
Frame]
Choose whether or not to draw a frame around the bar graph. When this box
is checked ( ), a frame is drawn.
[Frame Color]
This option becomes active when the [
the desired color for the graph frame.
Frame] box is checked. Choose
[ON Color]
Choose colors to paint the bar to the current value. The [Background] option
becomes active when any tile pattern other than pattern 0 (extreme left) is
chosen for [Tile].
* When checking [Alarm] in the [Alarm Setting] tab window, it is not necessary
to set this option.
8-13
Pie Graph
[Target Color]
This option becomes active when
[Standard] is chosen for [Type] in the
[Setting] tab window. Specify the desired
foreground color for the target value.
In-area property
Target color
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Alarm Setting] Tab Window
When showing scales, do not place scales in the following position. There are some
cases that [Color] for [Mark Display] is different from the setting color or is not displayed.
The mark is drawn by XORed color.
Pie graph
A
A = Angle: 1/3, Radius r
[
+2 dots
Alarm]
If you want to show the graph in a different color when data in the specified
memory address exceeds or falls short of the range specified, check this
box.
[Upper Value] [Lower Value]/[Range Value] [Standard Value]
When [Standard] is chosen for [Type] in the [Setting] tab window, these
options read [Upper Value] and [Lower Value]. When [Deviation] is chosen
for [Type], they read [Range Value] and [Standard Value].
• [Upper Value] [Lower Value]
[Lower Value] specifies the lower limit of data, and [Upper Value] specifies
the upper limit of data.
• [Range Value] [Standard Value]
[Standard Value] specifies the standard value. [Range Value] specifies a
data range from the standard value in both directions.
[
8-14
Mark Display]
Check this box (
using
marks.
) when you want to indicate the upper and lower limits
Chapter 8 Graph Display
[Color]
When the [ Mark Display] box is checked, this option becomes active.
Choose the desired color for the mark.
[
Separate Display]
The bar is shown in separate colors: [Lower Color], [Range Color], and
[Upper Color] specified in [Alarm Color] tab window when this option is
checked ( ). (
Refer to examples on page 8-10.)
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
♦ [Alarm Color] Tab Window
[Upper Color]
Color to be used when the current value exceeds the upper limit (refer to
examples on page 8-10.)
[Lower Color]
Color to be used when the current value falls short of the lower limit (refer to
examples on page 8-10.)
[Range Color]
Color to be used between the upper and lower limits (refer to examples on
page 8-10.)
For each option, choose the desired colors for [Foreground] and [Background].
The [Background] option becomes active when any tile pattern other than
pattern 0 (extreme left) is chosen for [Tile].
8
Pie Graph
8-15
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Examples with Alarm Setting
• [Type: Standard], [
Lower
color
Range
color
Upper
color
Alarm]
In-area
property
• With marks
• Single color use
Current
value
Current
value
Current
value
Lower
color
Upper
color
Upper
color
Lower
color
Upper
color
Lower
color
Current
value
Upper
color
Lower
color
• Separate color use
Current
value
Current
value
Lower
color
Upper
color
Upper
color
• [Type: Deviation], [
Lower
color
Range
color
Upper
color
Lower
color
Upper
color
Lower
color
Current
value
Alarm]
In-area
property
A: Range
• Single color use
• With marks
Current
value
Upper
color
A
A
Lower
color
Upper
color
Current
value
A
A
Lower
color
Upper
color
Current
value
A
A
Lower
color
• Separate color use
Current
value
Upper
color
8-16
A
A
Lower
color
Upper
color
Current
value
A
A
Lower
color
Upper
color
Current
value
A
A
Lower
color
Current
value
A
Upper
color
A
Lower
color
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Panel Meter
[Panel Meter] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Memory]
Data in this memory address is shown in the graph in real time. The data in
this address is called the “current value.”
8-17
8
Panel Meter
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Setting] Tab Window
[Data Length]
Choose either 1-word or 2-word for the data length of the specified memory.
[1-Word]: word
[2-Word]: double-word
[Progress Direction]
Select the indicator’s moving direction.
Clockwise/Counterclockwise
[Scale]
Specify the minimum and maximum values for the range of the graph.
Negative values can be entered.
[Target Value]
Set the target value. When the value changes, choose the PLC memory;
when it is fixed, choose [Constant].
* When checking [Alarm] in the [Alarm Setting] tab window, it is not necessary to
set [Target Value].
8-18
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Disp. Prop.] Tab Window
[In-area Prop.]
Specify the colors inside the graph.
The [Background] option becomes
active when any tile pattern other
than pattern 0 (extreme left) is
chosen for [Tile].
Target color
In-area property
Frame color
Target
value
Current
value
8
Indicator color
* When checking [Alarm] in the [Alarm Setting] tab window, it is not necessary
to set this option.
[
Frame]
Choose whether or not to draw a frame around the panel meter. When this
box is checked ( ), a frame is drawn.
[Frame Color]
This option becomes active when the [
the desired color for the graph frame.
Frame] box is checked. Choose
[Indicator Color]
Choose the desired color for the indicator that shows the current value.
* When checking [Alarm] in the [Alarm Setting] tab window, it is not necessary to
set [Indicator Color].
8-19
Panel Meter
[Target Color]
Specify the desired foreground color
for the target value.
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Alarm Setting] Tab Window
[
Alarm]
If you want to show the indicator in a different color when data in the
specified memory address exceeds or falls short of the range specified,
check this box ( ).
[Upper Value] [Lower Value]
[Lower Value] specifies the lower limit of data, and [Upper Value] specifies
the upper limit of data.
[Color]
Choose the desired color for the mark.
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
♦ [Alarm Color] Tab Window
[Upper Color]
Color to be used when the current value exceeds the upper limit
[Lower Color]
Color to be used when the current value falls short of the lower limit
[Range Color]
Color to be used between the upper and lower limits
For each option, choose the desired colors for [Foreground] and [Background].
The [Background] option becomes active when any tile pattern other than
pattern 0 (extreme left) is chosen for [Tile].
8-20
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Examples with Alarm Setting
Lower
color
Range
color
Upper
color
Current value
250
200
Upper
value
Lower color
150
250
250
300
350
200
Lower
color
150
300
Upper
value
350
200
Lower
color
150
300
Upper
value
350
Current value
100
400
50
450
100
400
50
450
100
400
50
Current
value
450
8
Panel Meter
8-21
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Statistic Graph (Bar, Pie)
Setting Items
[Parts] → [Graph Display] → [Stat. Graph]
% display (page 8-24)
Statistic pie graph
Statistic bar graph
“% display” can be set in the following procedure.
[Parts] → [Data Display] → [Num. Data Display] → [Type] → [Display Function: Stat.
Graph % Display]
[Stat. Bar Graph] [Stat. Pie Graph] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Memory]
Specify the top memory address to be used for the statistic graph. Memory
in consecutive addresses is automatically allocated to the statistic graph.
The required number of words (memory) can be calculated using the
following equation:
Required memory = [Data Length] × [Split]
8-22
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Setting] Tab Window
[Direction]
Select t [Top] (vertical) or [Right] (horizontal) to select the direction for
drawing the graph.
* This option is not active for the statistic pie graph.
[Frame Color]
Choose the desired color for the statistic graph frame.
[Split] (2 to 8)
Specify the number of partitions.
The number of memory addresses to be allocated depends on this setting.
(
For the number of memory addresses to be used, refer to page 8-22.)
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
♦ [Data 0 (to 7) Prop.] Tab Windows
• These tab windows are for setting properties of the respective divisions of
the statistic graph.
• As many data properties as specified for [Split] can be set.
[Foreground] [Background] [Tile]
Choose the desired colors for draw properties, and choose the desired tile
pattern.
8-23
8
Statistic Graph (Bar, Pie)
[Data Length]
Choose data length for the memory to be used for the graph. The number of
memory addresses to be allocated depends on this selection.
(
For the number of memory addresses to be used, refer to page 8-22.)
[1-Word]: word
[2-Word]: double-word
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Numerical Data Display (% Display)
“% display” of data in the graph is available using numerical data display parts.
%
15 %
25 %
20 %
10 %
30 %
Statistic graph
Numerical data display
Linked
♦ Notes
[Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. Set the same division number as the one
specified for the statistic graph part. (
For information on the division
number, refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Type] Tab Window
[Display Function]
Select [Stat. Graph % Display].
[No. in Stat. Graph]
Specify the number set in the [Data Prop.] tab window for the statistic graph
part. If the number of divisions is “4,” four numerical data display parts (0 to
3) are required.
For more information on other setting items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display.”
8-24
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Trend Graph
[Trend Graph] Dialog
♦ Memory Setting for Trend Graph
Control memory: 1 word
Required memory per trend line
Required memory = [Data Length] × [Trends] (number of plot points)
♦ [Main] Tab Window
8
[Control Memory]
This is the memory area to be used for controlling the trend graph. The
allocation of memory is shown below.
Be sure to reset the bits not in use to “0” in the control memory.
LSB
MSB
Control memory
15 14 13 12
0
0
11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
2. Redraw (0 → 1)
1. Trend count (0 to 800)
3. Redraw after clear (0 → 1)
8-25
Trend Graph
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Chapter 8 Graph Display
1. Trend count
• Specify the trend count (the number of plot points to be displayed).
• When trend count is specified in the control memory, the trend graph is
drawn by reading data for the lines (Nos. 0 to 15) as specified in
respective tab windows. When the trend count increases, this operation
is repeated. (If it decreases, a different operation is made.)
2. Redraw
• Trend lines are redrawn at the edge of 0 → 1 by the specified trend
count.
• Drawing is performed over the previous one without clearing the trend
graph area.
3. Redraw after clear
• Trend lines are redrawn at the edge of 0 → 1 by the specified trend
count.
• Drawing is performed after clearing the trend graph area.
Notes on Redrawing
• When redrawing, choose either “2. Redraw” or “3. Redraw after clear.” Note
the difference of these options.
• If the interval between redrawing is too short, the trend graph may not be
redrawn even at the leading edge.
• Data once displayed in the trend graph cannot be changed unless the
redrawing command is given.
[
Use Link]
When this option is checked (
(
Refer to page 8-34.)
♦ [Setting 1] Tab Window
8-26
), [Link Division No.] becomes active.
Chapter 8 Graph Display
[
Use XY Parameters]
Choose whether or not to use XY parameters. Use XY parameters to set the
plot point pitch as desired.
• [ Use XY Parameters]
The pitch of plot points is automatically calculated within MONITOUCH. For
the relation between point pitch and memory allocation, refer to page 8-32.
• [ Use XY Parameters]
The pitch of plot points can be specified in units of dots from the trend graph
zero position. For the relation between point pitch and memory allocation,
refer to page 8-33.
Trend count: 6
Direction: →
Point pitch
Point
Coordinate origin
Maximum plot points = trend count
[
Draw with Rectangular Wave
Draw with Rectangular Wave
[Direction]
Choose from [RGT], [LFT], [UP], or [DW] to select the direction for drawing
the trend graph.
Y
Y
Coordinate origin
RGT direction
X
LFT direction
X
Y
X
UP direction
X
DW direction
Y
8-27
8
Trend Graph
Draw with Rectangular Wave]
When this option is checked ( ), the rectangular wave graph is displayed.
Select a solid line or dotted line for the line type
Chapter 8 Graph Display
[Trends] (3 to 800)
Specify the desired maximum number of plot points.
[Display in Area]
Set the inside colors of the trend graph. Select [Foreground], [Background],
and [Tile]. The [Background] option becomes active when any tile pattern
other than pattern 0 (extreme left) is chosen for [Tile].
[Setting All]
Use the [Setting All] function to set the same data for [Data Length], [Graph
Max. Value], and [Graph Min. Value] of trend line Nos. 0 to 15.
The [Setting All] function is used for trend lines for which [Trend Display] is
checked in their respective tab window Nos. 0 to 15.
1. Click tabs of [0] to [15], and check the [
Trend Display] option.
2. Open the [Setting 1] tab window. Click the [Setting] button next to
[Setting All]. The [Setting All] dialog is displayed.
3. Set the following items.
[Data Length]
Set the data length to be used for trend graph display.
[1-Word]: word
[2-Word]: double-word
[Graph Max. Value] [Graph Min. Value]
Specify the maximum and minimum values for data calculation.
4. Click [OK].
The specified [Data Length], [Graph Max. Value], and [Graph Min. Value]
are used for the selected trend line Nos. 0 to 15 where [ Trend Display]
is checked.
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
8-28
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Setting 2] Tab Window
When drawing two or more subsidiary lines or grids:
1. Draw the desired lines or grids in graphic library editing
window.
2. Go back to the screen edit window.
3. Click the trend graph (handles are shown). Click the [Change
the Setting of a Part Placed] icon.
4. The [Modify Part] window is displayed. Click the [Graphic Call] icon, and call the
graphic.
8
5. Close the [Modify Part] window, and go back to the screen edit window.
Upper Line Display] [ Lower Line Display]
It is possible to draw two lines for reference in the trend graph display area.
If you want to draw only one line, check either [ Upper Line Display] or
[ Lower Line Display] ( ). If you want to draw two lines, check both boxes
( ). If you do not need any lines, leave these boxes unchecked. When
[ Upper Line Display] and/or [ Lower Line Display] are checked, the
following options become active.
[Upper Value] (or [Lower Value])
Determine the position of the upper (or lower) line.
[Upper Color] (or [Lower Color])
Choose the desired color for the upper (or lower) line.
Direction: →
Upper line
Y
Lower line
0
X
8-29
Trend Graph
[
Chapter 8 Graph Display
[Data Length]
Choose data length for the memory to be used for the upper/lower line.
[1-Word]: word
[2-Word]: double-word
[Graph Max.] [Graph Min.]
Scales can be attached for reference of drawing the upper and lower lines.
Negative values can also be specified.
Ex.:
When drawing a subsidiary line in the center of the display area:
Set as shown below.
Max 2
[ Upper Line Display]
Upper/Lower Line Display
[Upper Value 1]
Either option can be used.
[Graph Max.: 2]
1
[Graph Min.: 0]
A line is shown in the center.
Min 0
[Graph Max.] and [Graph Min.] are used as reference for drawing lines, even if the trend
data range is from “0” to “1000.” Thus specifying “0,” “1,” and “2” as in the above
example is appropriate for attaching scales as reference for drawing the upper/lower
lines.
♦ [Setting 3] Tab Window
[
Upper Line 2 Display] [ Lower Line 2 Display]
Two lines are added to both upper line and lower line.
This tab window is available when [ Upper Line 2 Display] or [ Lower
Line 2 Display] is clicked. The properties like [Data Length] or [Graph
Max./Min.] are specified in the [Setting 2] tab window. The settings are the
same as the present [Upper/Lower Line] in the [Setting 2] tab window.
With upper/lower four lines
(Upper line 2)
(Upper line)
(Lower line)
(Lower line 2)
8-30
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [0] to [15] Tab Window
[
Trend Display]
A maximum of 16 trend lines can be drawn. In the tab window of the trend
line to be displayed, check the [Trend Display] option.
[Memory]
Data in this memory address is read for drawing the trend line. The number
of memory addresses varies depending on the setting for [Trends] in the
[Setting 1] tab window and [Data Length] explained below.
[Line Type & Point]
Choose the line type of the trend graph. Choose from 6 options for the line
type and 6 options for dots.
[Data Length]
Choose data length for one plot point.
[1-Word]: word
[2-Word]: double-word
[Graph Max. Value] [Graph Min. Value]
Specify the maximum and minimum values for the graph display range.
Do not specify the same value for both [Graph Max. Value] and [Graph Min. Value].
Doing so will result in an error. Be sure to set correctly. When specifying [Graph Max.
Value] or [Graph Min. Value] for the memory (other than [Constant]), the values will be
read and displayed at the timing of “redraw” or “redraw after clear.”
8-31
Trend Graph
[Line Color]
Choose the color of the line (or dots).
8
Chapter 8 Graph Display
[
Use XY Parameters]
The pitch of plot points is automatically calculated within MONITOUCH. It is
calculated as shown below.
Plot point pitch (dots)
= X size (dots) ÷ ([Trends] − 1)
(MONITOUCH adjusts the data so that no remainder will be left.)
D
Y
Y size
B
E
C
A
F
Point pitch
0
X
X size
Memory setting: n
n+0
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
n+m
Word
Point 0 data
Point 1 data
Point 2 data
Point 3 data
Point 4 data
Point 5 data
:
:
:
Point “m” data
n+0
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
n+m
Double-word
Point 0 data
Point 1 data
Point 2 data
:
:
:
:
:
Point “m” data
• Memory allocation
The memory allocation varies depending on the setting for [Trends] in the
[Setting 1] tab window and [Data Length] in the [0] to [15] tab window.
For example, in the case of [Trend: 11], [Memory: D100] and [Data Length:
1-Word], memory addresses D100 to D110 are used.
8-32
Chapter 8 Graph Display
[
Use XY Parameters]
• Pitch data (distance from the coordinate origin to each plot point) should be
specified in units of dots.
• Memory allocation
The memory allocation varies depending on the setting for [Trends] in the
[Setting 1] tab window and [Data Length] in the [0] to [15] tab window. The
memory for pitch data is allocated following each point.
3
1
4
5
2
0
Pitch data
Coordinate origin
For example:
[Trends: 11]
[Memory: D100]
[Data Length: 1-Word]
Memory addresses D100 to D121 are used.
8
n + 0 Point 0
Trend data
n + 1 Point 0
Pitch data
n + 2 Point 1
Trend data
n + 3 Point 1
Pitch data
n + 4 Point 2
Trend data
n + 5 Point 2
Pitch data
:
:
n + m Point “m”
Point “m”
Trend Graph
Memory setting: n
Data length: Word
Data length: Double-word
n + 0 Point 0
Trend data
n+1
n + 2 Point 0
Pitch data
n+3
n + 4 Point 1
Trend data
n+5
n + 6 Point 1
Pitch data
n+7
:
:
:
Data
Pitch data
n + m Point “m”
Point “m”
Trend data
Pitch data
8-33
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Asynchronous Display of Multiple Trend Graphs
All the trends on a trend graph are displayed to the same points at the same
time, because a trend graph has only one control memory.
If you want to display each trend with asynchronous timing, you have to bring up
the [Trend Graph] dialog → [Main] tab window → [ Use Link] (
page
8-26). It is possible to link two or more overlapping trend graphs and to give the
order of each control memory priority. For example, when drawing two trend
graphs as follows:
Division No.: 1
Control memory: D140
Division No.: 0
Control memory: D120
Process cycle: High speed
Use Link
Link division No.: 0
Process cycle: High speed
(= Master trend graph)
(= Slave trend graph)
1. D120 = H0009 (Trend count)
The master trend graph is drawn at 9
points.
8-34
2. D140 = K9 (Trend count)
The slave trend graph is drawn at 9
points.
3. D140 = K5 (Trend count)
D120 = H8007
(Redraw after clear & trend count)
Change the trend count to 5 points in the slave
trend graph, and send the change & redraw after
clear commands from the master trend graph at
the same time.
The 5 points of the slave trend graph are drawn.
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ Notes on Setting
1. When linking two or more trend graphs, you have to regard one trend graph
as “Master,” and the other trend graph(s) as “Slave.” When setting the slave
trend graph, check [ Use Link] and specify the [Link Division No.] as the
same number as the master trend graph. Both the [Redraw] and [Redraw
after clear] commands at the slave trend graph(s) are ignored and only the
commands from the control memory of the master trend graph become
acceptable.
2. All the trend graphs linked should be specified as [Process Cycle: High
Speed].
3. The area property setting and the upper/lower line setting are available only
in the master trend graph. The area property in the slave trend graph is not
displayed. The upper/lower lines in the slave trend graph are ignored.
4. Place the slave trend graph on the master trend graph using the [Move to
Front] or [Move to Back] icon. If the master trend graph is placed on the
slave trend graph, linking these two graphs may not be executed normally.
When the graphs are overlapped, the
graph area is displayed in blue.
8
Trend Graph
In-area property: Blue
(= Master trend graph)
In-area property: Light blue
(= Slave trend graph)
8-35
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Closed Area Graph
[Closed Area Graph] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Memory]
Data in this memory address is shown in the graph in real time. The data in
this address is called the “current value.”
[Direction]
Choose from [RGT], [LFT], [UP], or [DW] to select the direction for drawing
the graph.
[Data Length]
Choose either 1-word or 2-word for the data length of the specified memory.
[1-Word]: word
[2-Word]: double-word
[Scale]
Specify the minimum and maximum values for the range of the graph.
Negative values can be entered.
8-36
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Display Property] Tab Window
[Area Property]
Specify the colors inside the graph. The
[Background] option becomes active
when any tile pattern other than pattern
0 (extreme left) is chosen for [Tile].
Current value
8
ON color
* When checking [Alarm] in the [Alarm Setting] tab window, it is not necessary
to set this option.
8-37
Closed Area Graph
[ON Color]
Choose colors to paint the bar to the
current value. The [Background] option
becomes active when any tile pattern
other than pattern 0 (extreme left) is chosen for [Tile].
In-area propert
Chapter 8 Graph Display
♦ [Alarm Setting] Tab Window
[
Alarm]
If you want to show the closed area graph in a different color when data in
the specified memory address exceeds or falls short of the range specified,
check this box ( ).
[Upper Value] [Lower Value]
[Lower Value] specifies the lower limit of data, and [Upper Value] specifies
the upper limit of data.
[
8-38
Separate Display]
The bar is shown in separate colors: [Lower Color], [Range Color], and
[Upper Color] specified in [Alarm Color] tab window when this option is
checked ( ).
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Lower
color
Range
color
Upper
color
In-area
property
[Direction: ↑]
Single color use
Upper
value
Lower
value
Upper
value
Current value
Upper value
Current
value
Lower
value
Lower value
Current
value
Separate color use
Upper
value
Upper
value
Lower
value
Current
value
Lower
value
Current value
Upper value
Lower value
Current
value
For a closed area graph containing a part as shown below, the [Separate Display] option
is not available.
8
Closed Area Graph
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
♦ [Alarm Color] Tab Window
[Upper Color]
Color to be used when the current value exceeds the upper limit
[Lower Color]
Color to be used when the current value falls short of the lower limit
[Range Color]
Color to be used between the upper and lower limits
For each option, choose the desired colors for [Foreground] and [Background].
The [Background] option becomes active when any tile pattern other than
pattern 0 (extreme left) is chosen for [Tile].
8-39
Chapter 8 Graph Display
Notes
• When a tile pattern (other than tile pattern “0”) is used for screen background
or overlap display area, the closed area graph may not be drawn correctly.
Likewise, when the closed area graph is placed on a graphic using a tile
pattern, it may not be drawn correctly either.
Example:
On the editor
On the MONITOUCH
Tile “3” is used for screen
background.
• When the line color used for the closed area graph is the same as the screen
background color, it cannot be drawn.
8-40
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
Graphic Display
The MONITOUCH can display or change a variety of pre-registered graphics on
the screen based on bit activation and the graphic number specification.
Displaying Graphics
The graphic display function can be used in a variety of ways depending on
one’s purpose.
Graphic display
What is the command method
for the display?
Based on bit setting and
resetting.
What is the configuration
of the display?
Specify the graphic number.
What is the display mode?
Fix
Move
Change over with an
internal switch.
Graphic mode
[Command: Internal]
See page 9-2.
See page 9-2.
Graphic mode
[Command: External]
(with parameters)
Displaying Graphics
Graphic mode
[Command: External]
9
See page 9-2.
Display as parts.
Lamp parts
See
Chapter 4.
Display only when
the bit is activated.
Graphic relay
[Type: 1 Graphic]
See page 9-8.
Display a picture when
the bit is activated and
deactivated.
Graphic relay
[Type: 2 Graphic]
See page 9-8.
9-1
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
Graphic Mode
Outline
• The registered graphics or texts can be brought up by specifying the graphic
number. [Command: External]
“5” in D200
run
STOP
SYSTEM
Graphic No. 5
F1
F2
F3
D200
5
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Graphic No. 5 is displayed.
• When graphics or texts are displayed by specifying the graphic number, it is
possible to animate or transform them.
If you want to animate or transform graphics or texts, set up parameters for
these items in the graphic library. When parameters are set, the required
memory addresses are allocated for animation and transformation.
(
For information on setting parameters, refer to Chapter 4 in the
Reference Manual (Operation).)
run
stop
D200
D201
D202
Graphic No. 0 is displayed
when D200 = 0.
0
Specify “100” in D202 (Y coordinate).
run
STOP
D200
D201
D202
0
0
100
Memory for X
Memory for Y
The graphic Moves by 100
dots in the Y direction.
9-2
100 dots
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
• It is possible to give commands for showing graphics or texts using internal
switches. [Command: Internal]
Graphic No. 6
Graphic No. 5
Press the [Plus Block] switch.
Graphic No. 6 is displayed.
Graphic No. 4
Graphic No. 5
Press the [Minus Block] switch.
Graphic No. 4 is displayed.
Setting Items
Item
Graphic Library
Graphic Library Edit
9
Refer to Chapter 4 in the Reference Manual (Operation).
Parts
Graphic Display
Graphic mode tool bar
Graphic Mode
New:
Existing:
Graphic See page 9-4.
Switch See page 9-7.
Display area See page 9-6.
Be sure to set.
Set if necessary.
9-3
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
[Graphic] Dialog
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Command]
Choose the commanding method of displaying the graphics (diagrams, texts,
etc.) registered in the graphic library.
• Internal
Change the graphic display using internal switches placed on the screen
(= [Plus Block], [Minus Block] switches, etc.). When this method is used,
it is not possible to move or transform the graphics.
• External
The graphic number is specified from the external unit (PLC) and is
displayed on screen. Specify the command memory. When [External] is
chosen, the graphics can be moved or transformed.
[Process Cycle]
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”
♦ [Command: Internal]
[Initial Graphic GNo. & No.]
Specify the graphic (group number and
graphic number) to be displayed first
when the relevant screen is opened.
The initial graphic must be located
between the min. and max. graphics.
[Max. Graphic GNo. & No.]
Specify the graphic (group number and
graphic number) of the greatest
number among those to be displayed
on the screen.
[Min. Graphic GNo. & No.]
Specify the graphic (group number and
graphic number) of the smallest
number among those to be displayed
on the screen.
9-4
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
♦ [Command: External]
[Memory]
Set the memory used to specify the
registered graphic number.
The specified graphic number varies
depending on the [ Graphic] setting
described below.
The contents of memory are shown
below.
MSB
Memory n
LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
[
[
Graphic]: Graphic No. 0 to 255
Graphic]: Graphic No. 0 to 2559
MSB
n+1
LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
(When parameters are set)
9
For parameter No. 0
Example:
• The following parameters are set up for the graphic in the graphic library.
[Action: Animate]
[Center X: Incremental + Input Parameter No. 1]
[Center Y: Incremental + Input Parameter No. 2]
• The following settings are made in the [Graphic] dialog:
[Command: External]
[Memory: D300]
[Parameter: 2 (because parameter No. 1 and No. 2 are set)]
From the above settings, memory is allocated as shown below:
D300
Graphic number specification memory
D301
Center X coordinate change memory
D302
Center Y coordinate change memory
2 words are secured
because “2” is specified
for [Parameter].
9-5
Graphic Mode
[Parameter]
Parameters are required when moving or transforming the graphics. Specify
the total number of parameters provided to the graphics you are going to use
in graphic mode. From this total and parameter numbers, memory allocation
is determined. (
For information on setting parameters, refer to Chapter
4 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
[
Graphic]
• [ Graphic]
Set the [GNo] (Group number = 0 - 9). The graphic displayed on the screen
is limited to a graphic within the specified group number. Specify a graphic
number (0 - 255) in one group in memory.
• [ Graphic]
Specify the graphic number to be displayed as [Absolute Address]. It is thus
possible to select graphics from more than one group. The range of the
graphic numbers specified in [Memory] is from 0 to 2559.
Absolute addresses of the graphic numbers are as shown below:
Groups are specified separately
Group No.
Graphic No.
0
0000 to 0255
1
0000 to 0255
2
0000 to 0255
3
0000 to 0255
4
0000 to 0255
5
0000 to 0255
6
0000 to 0255
7
0000 to 0255
8
0000 to 0255
9
0000 to 0255
Absolute address
Group No.
Graphic No.
(None)
0000 to 0255
0256 to 0511
0512 to 0767
0768 to 1023
1024 to 1279
1280 to 1535
1536 to 1791
1792 to 2047
2048 to 2303
2304 to 2559
Display Area Parts
Display area parts are the areas where graphics are displayed in graphic mode.
With [Command: Internal], you must display graphics in display area parts.
With [Command: External], it is possible to display graphics without display
area parts. However, there are instances when the previous picture remains
even after the picture is changed.
♦ [Mode Display Area] Dialog
[Parts Select]
Select display area parts from the parts file.
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as that in the [Graphic] dialog. It thus
becomes associated with the parts used in graphic mode.
[Area Prop.] (Foreground color/background color/tile)
It is possible to change inside properties in display area parts.
[
9-6
Display Area Transparent]
This option is not used in graphic mode. Do not check this option.
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
♦ Changing the Display Area Size
The placed display area part must be adjusted to fit the graphic mode display
area size. The [Offset] location in the graphic library fits in the upper left corner
of the display area part on screen. Considering this position, determine the size
of the display area part.
Screen edit
Graphic library edit
Display area part
OFF
OFF
The offset mark is aligned with the top left
corner of the display area part.
Switch
Switches can be used for changing the graphics. You must select [Command:
Internal] in the [Graphic] dialog.
♦ Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as that in the [Graphic] dialog.
9
[Function]
The following switches can be used.
• [Minus Block]
Switches to the previous graphic.
• [Block Call]
Set the [Block No.] as an auxiliary setting item. (In this case, because
this is the graphic mode, this means a graphic number as [Absolute
Address].) (Refer to page 9-6.) When this switch is pressed, the graphic
of which number you specified is called up.
Graphic No. 5
Graphic No. 6
Press the [Plus Block] switch.
9-7
Graphic Mode
• [Plus Block]
Switches to the next graphic.
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
Graphic Relay Mode
Outline
The graphics or texts registered in the graphic library can be displayed or erased
according to bit activation. There are two types of graphic relay mode.
• [Type: 1 Graphic]
When a bit is set (ON), the corresponding graphic is displayed; when it is
reset (OFF), it is erased.
run
When bit 1 of D200 is activated ...
stop
The picture corresponding to bit
1 is displayed on the screen.
On the screen
D200
• [Type: 2 Graphic]
Two graphics are assigned to one bit. When the bit is set (ON), the ON
graphic is displayed; when it is reset (OFF), the OFF graphic is displayed.
Bit 1 of D200 is deactivated.
D200
On the screen
The OFF graphic is displayed on the screen.
9-8
Bit 1 of D200 is activated.
D200
The ON graphic is displayed when bit 1 is activated.
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
• It is possible to animate or transform both [1-Graphic] and [2-Graphic]
graphics or texts. If you want to animate or transform graphics or texts, set
up parameters for these items in the graphic library. When parameters are
set, the required memory addresses are allocated for animation and
transformation. (For information on setting parameters, refer to Chapter 4 in
the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Bit 1 of D200 is activated.
Specify “100” in D201.
run
run
stop
stop
D200
D201
D200
Memory for X
coordinate
100
The graphic moves 100 dots in the X direction.
Setting Items
To use graphic relay mode, follow the procedure described below.
Item
Graphic Library
Graphic Library Edit
Refer to Chapter 4 in the Reference Manual (Operation).
Parts
Graphic Relay
Graphic mode tool bar
9
New:
Graphic See page 9-10.
Graphic Relay Mode
Existing:
Display area See page 9-15.
Be sure to set.
Set if necessary.
9-9
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
[Graphic Relay] Dialog
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Memory]
Specify the command memory that is used to display the registered graphics
or texts on the screen. Here, graphics starting from [Start Graphic GNo &
No] are automatically allocated to the bits of the memory. Memory allocation
varies depending on the setting for [Type], [Number of Relays] and
[Parameter] described in the next section. For more information, refer to the
explanation for [Start Graphic].
[Type]
Select how you will display graphics.
• [1-Graphic]
When the memory bit is set (ON), the corresponding graphic is displayed;
when it is reset (OFF), the graphic disappears.
• [2-Graphic]
When the memory bit is set (ON), the ON graphic is displayed; when it is
reset (OFF), the OFF graphic is displayed. A graphic is always displayed
whether the bit is set or reset.
[Mode]
Select the display mode when changing the graphics at bit activation or
deactivation. When [2-Graphic] is chosen for [Type], this option becomes
active. In the case of [Type: 1 Graphic], the mode is fixed to [XOR].
9-10
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
• [XOR]
When the bit is reset (OFF), the OFF graphic is displayed. When it is set
(ON), the OFF graphic is cleared, and the ON graphic is drawn. When the
bit is reset again, the ON graphic is cleared, and the OFF graphic is drawn.
When the bit is reset (OFF),
the OFF graphic is displayed.
When the bit is set (ON), the
OFF graphic is cleared, and
the ON graphic is drawn.
When the bit is reset (OFF)
again, the ON graphic is
cleared, and the OFF graphic is
drawn.
With XOR setting, the graphic color is XORed with the colors of the base screen (display
area). Therefore, the graphic is displayed in the base color that has been XORed,
rather than the color specified during editing.
Graphic library edit
When it is displayed on the screen
(background: blue):
Ellipse in solid color
Foreground color: Yellow
[Foreground color: Yellow] of the ellipse and
[Blue] of the screen are XORed into white.
9
For more information on XORed colors, refer to page 9-17.
9-11
Graphic Relay Mode
The V7 series (32k colors) and the V6 series (128 colors) use different color
palettes; therefore, if the same colors are set, the XORed color may not be the
same except for the basic eight colors.
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
• [REP]
When the bit is reset (OFF), the OFF graphic is displayed. When it is set
(ON), the ON graphic is drawn over the OFF graphic. When the bit is reset
again, the OFF graphic is drawn over the ON graphic. The graphics are not
XORed with the base screen and are displayed in original colors.
When the bit is reset (OFF),
the OFF graphic is displayed.
When the bit is set (ON),
the ON graphic is drawn
over the OFF graphic.
When the bit is reset (OFF)
again, the OFF graphic is
drawn over the ON graphic.
However, note that the previous graphic remains on the screen when the next
graphic is drawn.
To clear the previous graphic, place a box in a solid color a little larger than the graphic.
Graphic library edit
Graphic No. 0 (ON graphic)
Graphic No. 1 (OFF graphic)
(Front)
Circle in solid color
Color: as desired
(Back)
Box in solid color
Color: (same as the base screen)
(Front)
Circle in solid color
Color: as desired
(Back)
Box in solid color
Color: (same as the base screen)
When one graphic is drawn over another and a box in a solid color is drawn, the new
graphic is displayed over the box. As a result, the previous graphic is cleared.
Screen
When the bit is reset (OFF), the OFF graphic is displayed.
As the result, the OFF graphic is
cleared, and the ON graphic is drawn.
When the bit is set (ON),
The box on the back
is drawn over the
OFF graphic.
Then the circle on the front is drawn over it.
Even with [REP] setting, the graphic color is XORed if [Animate] is chosen for
[Action] under [Parameter].
9-12
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
[Start Graphic GNo & No]
Specify the top graphic library group number and the graphic number.
Memory allocation varies depending on the setting for [Type] and [Number of
Relays].
Example: [Memory: D200], [Start Graphic: GNo. 0 No. 3]
• [Type: 1-Graphic]
MSB
Bit No. of D200
LSB
15 14 13 12 11
Graphic No. 0
graphic No.
(Bit ON)
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
15 14 13 12 11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
Bit 8 of D200 is activated: Graphic No. 11 is displayed.
Bit 3 of D200 is activated: Graphic No. 6 is displayed.
• [Type: 2-Graphic]
MSB
Bit No. of D200
Graphic No. 0
graphic No.
(Bit ON)
LSB
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11
(Bit OFF)
9
7
5
3
30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10
8
6
4
Bit 4 of D200 is
Bit 9 of D200 is
OFF:
ON:
OFF:
ON:
Graphic No. 12 is displayed.
Graphic No. 11 is displayed.
Graphic No. 22 is displayed.
Graphic No. 21 is displayed.
[Number of Relays] (1 to 512)
Specify the number of relays (the total number of bits assigned for graphics)
to be used.
• [Type: 1-Graphic]
MSB
Bit No. of D200
15 14 13 12
Graphic No. 0
graphic No.
(Bit ON)
LSB
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
[Number of Relays: 12]: It is possible to assign 12 graphics to these bits.
• [Type: 2-Graphic]
MSB
Bit No. of D200
Graphic No. 0
graphic No.
(Bit ON)
15 14 13 12
LSB
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
[Number of Relays: 12]: It is possible to assign 24 graphics to these bits.
9-13
Graphic Relay Mode
Example: Memory: D200], [Start Graphic: GNo. 0 No. 0],
[Number of Relays: 12]
9
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
[Parameter]
Parameters are required when moving or transforming graphics. Specify the
total number of parameters provided to the graphics you are going to use in
graphic mode. From this total and parameter numbers, memory allocation is
determined.
Example:
[Memory: D200]
[Type: 1-Graphic]
[Start Graphic: GNo. 1 No. 4]
[Number of Relays: 20]
[Parameter: 4]
From the above settings, memory is allocated as shown below:
D200
For graphic relay motion (16 relays)
D201
For graphic relay motion (4 relays)
D202
For parameter No. 1
D203
For parameter No. 2
D204
For parameter No. 3
D205
For parameter No. 4
Total: 20 = number of relays
MSB
LSB
Bit No. of D200
15 14 13 12
Graphic No. 1
graphic No.
(Bit ON)
19
1
17
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
16 15 14 13 12
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
16 bits (relays)
Bit No. of D201
Graphic No. 1
graphic No.
(Bit ON)
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
23 22 21 20
[Number of Relays: 20]
It is possible to assign 20 graphics to 16 bits in
D200 and 4 bits in D201.
[Process Cycle]
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”
9-14
4 bits (relays)
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
Display Area Parts
When using a display area part in Graphic Relay mode, it is possible to change
the graphic display position easily. The [Offset] location in the graphic library fits
in the upper left corner of the display area part on a screen.
Graphic library
Display area part
Screen No. 0
Screen No. 6
Even if no display area part is placed, graphic relay mode works normally. In
this case, the display location of the graphics are the same as in the graphic
library.
♦ [Mode Display Area] Dialog
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as that in the [Graphic Relay] dialog. It thus
becomes associated with the parts used in graphic mode.
[Area Prop.] (Foreground color/background color/tile)
Set the properties in the display area.
Display Area Transparent]
When checking this item, the property of the display area part becomes
transparent. It is useful to avoid the condition where the background on the
base is hidden by the display area part.
[Mode Display Area] dialog
[
[
Display Area Transparent]
Display Area Transparent]
[ Display Area Transparent] is available for the display area parts that have
the area properties only (for example, No. 0 of both [Parts_e.v6p] and
[Std.v6p]).
9-15
Graphic Relay Mode
[
9
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
Graphic Colors
Display Modes
When graphics are displayed on the screen, there are two types of display
modes.
• XOR Graphic colors are XORed with the colors of the base screen.
• REP Original graphic colors are shown.
This is determined by the settings for the mode or parameters. Refer to the
following tables.
Graphic mode
Graphic library edit
Graphic registration
Graphic mode
Screen edit
Parameter
[Action: Replace]
Parameter
[Action: Animate]
Command: Internal
REP
XOR
Command: External
REP
XOR
Graphic relay mode
Graphic library edit
Graphic registration
Graphic
relay mode
[Type: 1-Graphic]
Screen edit
[Type: 2-Graphic]
Parameter
[Action: Replace]
Parameter
[Action: Animate]
XOR
XOR
Mode: XOR
XOR
XOR
Mode: REP
REP
XOR
When the graphics to be displayed are [Paint] graphics, they cannot be
displayed in XORed colors.
When a pattern with [Transparent Color] is used, the graphic can be displayed with
[Mode: XOR]. For more information, refer to page 9-18.
9-16
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
XORed Colors
When graphic colors are XORed with the colors of the base screen, the following
colors take effect. This color is called “XORed color.”
XORed colors of basic eight colors are shown below.
All the codes for basic eight colors are the same for the V series. For other codes,
different codes are used for the V7 and V6 series.
Graphic colors (basic eight colors)
Colors on the base
screen (basic eight
colors)
Black
Blue
Red
Magenta
Green
Cyan
Yellow
White
Black
Black
Blue
Red
Magenta
Green
Cyan
Yellow
White
Blue
Blue
Black
Magenta
Red
Cyan
Green
White
Yellow
Red
Red
Magenta
Black
Blue
Yellow
White
Green
Cyan
Red
Blue
Black
White
Yellow
Cyan
Green
Magenta
Magenta Magenta
Green
Green
Cyan
Yellow
White
Black
Blue
Red
Cyan
Cyan
Green
White
Yellow
Blue
Black
Magenta
Red
Yellow
Yellow
White
Green
Cyan
Red
Magenta
Black
Blue
White
White
Yellow
Cyan
Green
Magenta
Red
Blue
Black
XOR Operation
Each color has its identification code as given below:
Color
Code HEX
Black
0000
Blue
001F
Red
7C00
7C1F
Green
03E0
Cyan
03FF
Yellow
7FE0
White
7FFF
9
Graphic Colors
Magenta
“A color is XORed with another color” means that each number of color codes are
XORed.
Example:
XORed color of blue and white
Blue
0000000000011111 (001F)
White 0111111111111111 (7FFF)
XOR ↓
Yellow 0111111111100000 (7FE0)
9-17
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
Canceling the XOR Display (Transparent Pattern)
Normally, because things like [Animate] that took place on the graphic display
were all XORed, it was impossible to display colors on the screen in the same
colors that you initially created them in (when the colors were other than black).
Additionally, because the XORed color was affected by the base color, when
animation was performed on multiple background colors, the color changed
whenever the background did.
Original pattern
The original color
is affected by the
background color.
CHECKER
The original color is
affected by the
background color.
When a transparent pattern is used for animation, colors can be displayed just
as they were originally created.
Transparent color
Original pattern
Displayed without
being affected b the
background color.
CHECKER
Displayed without being affected b the
background color.
For this function, be sure to check [With Transparent] for the pattern.
9-18
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
Screen Edit
You must make a setting in the [Transparent] dialog on the pattern edit window.
“Transparent” means that when a pattern is placed on the screen, locations not
necessary for display are hidden so that the pattern can be displayed in the actual
registered rectangle size. Only one “transparent” color can be used for a single pattern.
For example, for a pattern like the one below, the perimeter color is set as
“transparent.” Consequently, when this pattern is displayed on the screen, the
perimeter is transparent, and what is actually displayed in the perimeter is the
background color.
Transparent color
Pattern
When the pattern is displayed
on the screen:
(
With Transparent:
Red)
Red
Black
Greenish
brown
Background
♦ Transparent Setting
Go to [Transform] → [Transparent Color Setting] on the pattern edit window.
The [Transparent] dialog is displayed. Check [ With Transparent] and select
the color to be transparent.
9
9-19
Canceling the XOR Display (Transparent Pattern)
For more information on editing the pattern, refer to Chapter 4 in the Reference
Manual (Operation).
Chapter 9 Graphic Display
♦ Notes
• Pattern Edit
The following limitations apply when using a transparent color for the pattern.
V7 series/V612/610/608
V606/V606i
4,088 dots
4,088 dots
1 pattern size
Maximum per screen
64
32
Total size per screen
256 kbytes
64 kbytes
* Pattern size = X size × Y size
* Total size = Pattern size × 2 (bytes)
80 dots
50 dots
80 × 50 = 4,000 < 4,088 dots
[With Transparent] valid for this pattern
If this limit is exceeded, transparent setting is automatically rendered inactive
and the registered color of the pattern is XORed with the background before
it is displayed.
• [Graphic] mode
You must set [Command: External] in the [Graphic] dialog. When you want
to change and display several types of graphics, it is recommended that you
place display area parts.
• [Graphic Relay] mode
- [Type: 1-Graphic]
Depending on whether the transparent pattern is displayed, it is possible
for the display that is usually XORed to be displayed in its registered
color.
- [Type: 2-Graphic], [Mode: XOR]
It is necessary to set [Type: 2-Graphic] when changing between two
types of graphics. In this case, be sure to set [XOR] for [Mode]. If you
set a transparent pattern to be displayed in [REP], there is a possibility
that it will not be displayed normally.
When using the transparent patterns for animation function of graphic or
graphic relay mode, overlapping the patterns on each other may make the
display abnormal. Overlapping the transparent pattern is not recommended.
When the moving transparent pattern for animation is overlapped on the
placed one for drawing, the display is normal.
9-20
Chapter 10 Sampling
Sampling
Outline
The MONITOUCH V series incorporates buffering areas. During
communication, data received from the PLC memory can be logged in the
buffering area, and be displayed using sampling mode explained in this chapter.
PLC data logged in the buffering area
of MONITOUCH is displayed.
Buffering area
Buffer No. 0
Buffer No. 1
Buffer No. 2
Buffer No. 3
Buffer No. 4
Buffer No. 5
Buffer No. 6
Buffer No. 7
Buffer No. 8
Buffer No. 9
Buffer No. 10
Buffer No. 11
Maximum capacity: 32 k words
12 divisions possible
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Sampling Mode Types
Sampling mode
What is the data format?
Message
10
• Data (numerical data or text)
• Temperature control/PLC2Way table data
What is the configuration of the display?
What is the configuration
of the display?
Leave behind the previous
status as past history.
Display in a graph.
Display data (or text).
Relay sampling
Bit sampling
Trend sampling
Data sampling
See page 10-5.
See page 10-4.
See page 10-2.
See page 10-3.
Display the time of
occurrence and
cancellation.
Alarm display
See page 10-5.
10-1
Outline
Only display the current
status.
Chapter 10 Sampling
Trend Sampling
Menu
Sampling (Trend)
400
00
Graph
Return
Page
UP
Page
DOWN
Roll
UP
Roll
DOWN
Print
Reset
• Data stored in the specified buffering area can be expressed in a trend graph
(line graph) or rectangular waves.
• A maximum of 16 trend lines can be displayed in one display area part.
• When data is updated, so is the graph in real time.
• Sampling data is saved in the specified buffering area of the V series even
after the screen display has been changed.
• Sampling data is retained until the user clears the buffering area. However, if
data is stored in the internal buffer, it is cleared in the following cases: when
the power is turned off, when the Main Menu screen is displayed or when the
RESTART macro command is executed.
♦ Setting Items
• [System Setting] → [Buffering Area Setting] (
• [Parts] → [Sampling] → [Trend Sampling] (
10-2
Refer to page 10-9.)
Refer to page 10-19.)
Chapter 10 Sampling
Data Sampling
Menu
Sampling (Data)
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8
102
111
108
106
113
111
115
113
118
150
156
159
145
148
140
153
142
158
191
196
199
198
188
180
193
183
198
250
255
254
253
252
251
248
253
248
303
310
311
312
313
314
315
313
313
408
410
412
411
407
406
411
403
418
515
526
533
555
548
521
569
577
598
787
712
742
798
742
739
746
786
741
Roll
DOWN
Print
Graph
Return
+ Block
- Block
Roll
UP
Reset
• Data stored in the specified buffering area can be expressed in a numerical
data or text form.
• A maximum of 16 data can be displayed in one display area part.
• When data is updated, so is the graph in real time.
• Sampling data is saved in the specified buffering area of the V series even
after the screen display has been changed.
• Sampling data is retained until the user clears the buffering area. However, if
data is stored in the internal buffer, it is cleared in the following cases: when
the power is turned off, when the Main Menu screen is displayed or when the
RESTART macro command is executed.
♦ Setting Items
• [System Setting] → [Buffering Area Setting] (
• [Parts] → [Sampling] → [Data Sampling] (
Refer to page 10-9.)
Refer to page 10-31.)
10
Sampling Mode Types
10-3
Chapter 10 Sampling
Bit Sampling
Menu
Sampling (Bit)
Graph
Return
< ON / OFF >
Counts 6
< ON >
06-04 11 : 32 : 10
A Tank Temperature Up
< OFF >
06-04 11 : 33 : 15
A Tank Temperature Up
< ON >
06-04
11 : 40 : 25
C Tank Temperature Down
< OFF >
06-04
11 : 50 : 13
C Tank Temperature Down
< ON >
06-04 11 : 55 : 25
B Tank Temperature Down
< OFF >
06-04 11 : 59 : 55
B Tank Temperature Down
+ Block
- Block
Roll
UP
06-04 11 : 59 : 55
Roll
DOWN
Display
Change
Print
Reset
Display
Order
Change
• Messages triggered by bit activation (ON/OFF) as well as time information
are stored in the buffering area and are displayed on the screen.
• When data is updated, so is the graph in real time.
• Sampling data is saved in the specified buffering area of the V series even
after the screen display has been changed.
• Sampling data is retained until the user clears the buffering area. However, if
data is stored in the internal buffer, it is cleared in the following cases: when
the power is turned off, when the Main Menu screen is displayed or when the
RESTART macro command is executed.
♦ Setting Items
• [System Setting] → [Buffering Area Setting] (
10-4
Refer to page 10-9.)
• [Item] → [Message] → [Message Edit] (
Reference Manual (Operation).)
Refer to Chapter 4 in the
• [Parts] → [Sampling] → [Bit Sampling] (
Refer to page 10-44.)
Chapter 10 Sampling
Relay Sampling
Menu
Sampling (Relay)
BBBBBBBBBBBBB
CCCCCCCCCCCC
AAAAAAAAAAAA
Roll
UP
Display
Order
Change
Roll
DOWN
• Messages triggered by bit activation (ON) as well as time information are
displayed in the order of occurrence.
• The message disappears when the corresponding bit is reset (OFF). Only
errors that are currently occurring can be seen.
• This sampling method indicates the current status without logging in the
buffering area.
♦ Setting Items
• [System Setting] → [Buffering Area Setting] (
• [Item] → [Message] → [Message Edit] (
Reference Manual (Operation).)
Refer to page 10-9.)
Refer to Chapter 4 in the
• [Parts] → [Sampling] → [Relay Sampling] (
Refer to page 10-56.)
10
Alarm Display
Menu
Sampling (Alarm)
2nd roller error
1st sensor error
2nd sensor error
Graph
Return
+ Block
- Block
Roll
UP
16:15:43 16:21:12
16:15:51 16:21:54
16:15:52 16:21:55
Roll
DOWN
Display
Change
DEL
Reset
Display
Order
Change
10-5
Sampling Mode Types
• Messages triggered by bit
activation (ON/OFF) as well
as time information are
stored in the buffering area
and are displayed on the
screen. In addition to the
same function as bit
sampling, the following
functions are available.
Chapter 10 Sampling
• The occurrence time and cancellation time are displayed in one line. It is
also possible to make calculations to determine time lag, occurrence
frequency, total time, etc.
• Occurrence time and cancellation time
Occurrence Time
2nd roller error
1st sensor error
2nd sensor error
Cancellation Time
02/11/15 16:15:43 02/11/15 16:21:12
99/11/15 16:15:51
99/11/15 16:15:52
If an error is not reset, an asterisk (∗) is displayed instead of the time.
• Time Lag Display
Time Lag Display
2nd roller error
1st sensor error
2nd sensor error
000:00:08
000:00:01
The alarm occurrence time lag is displayed.
• Total Frequency of Occurrence Display
Occurrence Frequency
2nd sensor error
1st sensor error
2nd roller error
1
3
5
Errors that occur less frequently are displayed at the top and errors
that occur more frequently are displayed at the bottom.
Errors with the same frequency are displayed in order of occurrence
with the most recent one at the top.
• Total Time of Occurrence Display
2nd sensor error
1st sensor error
2nd roller error
Total Time of Occurrence
000:00:41
000:00:42
000:00:50
The total length of time when each error is occurring is displayed.
Errors that occur for a short time are displayed at the top and errors
that occur for a long time are displayed at the bottom.
Errors of the same total time are displayed in order of occurrence
with the most recent one at the top.
• Occurrence Time Display
2nd roller error
1st sensor error
2nd roller error
Occurrence Time
000:01:50
000:00:42
The length of time when each error is occurring is displayed.
Errors are displayed in order of occurrence with the most recent one
at the top.
10-6
Chapter 10 Sampling
• It is possible to display errors with distinction between the “first cause” and
“others.” When monitoring bit activation (ON/OFF), you will notice that the
setting of a bit (first cause) causes secondary and tertiary bits to be set as
well. When this occurs, it is possible to distinguish which bit was set first and
which bits were set after, and thus it is possible to specify which bit is the first
cause bit.
Normal operation bit (* To be reset when an error occurs)
ON
Error No. 1 bit (first cause)
OFF
Error No. 2 bit
OFF
Error No. 3 bit
OFF
It is possible to distinguish between error No. 1 and other errors.
Example: When a belt conveyor error occurs:
2. 1st sensor error
3. 2nd sensor error
(Advance direction)
1. 2nd roller error (first cause) = conveyor stop
Errors 2 and 3 are triggered by error 1.
In this case, error 1 is called “first cause.”
S: Normal operation bit (∗To be reset when an error occurs)
ON
10
A1: 2nd roller error bit (first cause)
OFF
Sampling Mode Types
A2: 1st sensor error bit
OFF
A3: 2nd sensor error bit
OFF
To show the above in a circuit diagram ...
A1
A2
A3
S
By marking the first cause with an asterisk (∗) when the error messages are
displayed, you can distinguish the first cause error from the other errors.
First cause mark
2nd roller error
1st sensor error
2nd sensor error
02/11/15 16:15:43
02/11/15 16:15:51
02/11/15 16:15:52
10-7
Chapter 10 Sampling
• It is possible to choose whether or not to save in the buffer depending on the
message. This is useful when messages in multiple modes are displayed
together.
• Messages can be deleted by pressing the [DEL] key. The record is saved in
the buffer.
Occurrence Time
2nd roller error
1st sensor error
2nd sensor error
UP
DW
Cancellation Time
02/11/15 16:15:43 02/11/15 16:21:12
02/11/15 16:15:51 02/11/15 16:21:54
02/11/15 16:15:52 02/11/15 16:21:55
+
-
RET
Display
Change
DEL
RESET
When the [DEL] key is pressed, the selected
message is deleted.
• Information about the alarm display (operation result) in auto operation time
or operation rate is stored in MONITOUCH internal memory using a macro
command.
♦ Setting Items
• [System Setting] → [Buffering Area Setting] (
• [Item] → [Message] → [Message Edit] (
Reference Manual (Operation).)
• [Parts] → [Sampling] → [Alarm Display] (
10-8
Refer to page 10-9.)
Refer to Chapter 4 in the
Refer to page 10-62.)
Chapter 10 Sampling
Buffering Area
• The “buffering area” is the area where sampling data is saved. The buffering
area can be set by selecting [System Setting] → [Buffering Area Setting].
• The maximum capacity of the buffering area is 32 k words. For the SRAM or
CF card, the available capacity varies depending on the setting or card
capacity.
• The buffering area can be partitioned into 12 sections (buffers). Buffers in
the buffering area can store data sampled in different methods.
• It is possible to select a storage medium from the V series internal buffer,
SRAM and CF card.
Buffering area
For trend sampling
Buffer No. 0
Buffer No. 1
Buffer No. 2
Buffer No. 3
Size:
Maximum 32 k words
(Internal buffer)
12 divisions possible
Buffer No. 4
Buffer No. 5
Buffer No. 6
Buffer No. 7
Buffer No. 8
Buffer No. 9
Buffer No. 10
Buffer No. 11
For bit sampling
Occur
Reset
Occur
Occur
Reset
Reset
Occur
Reset
08-03
08-03
08-03
08-03
08-03
08-03
08-03
08-03
12:30:15
13:00:55
14:28:34
14:30:26
15:10:05
15:10:07
18:09:19
20:55:42
Mode error
Mode error
Memory error
CPU error
Memory error
CPU error
Power error
Power error
10
Buffering Area
10-9
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Buffering Area Setting] Dialog
♦ Info. Output Memory
This is valid for all buffers No. 0 to 11. Data in the buffering area is written in this
memory address.
• Used number of words
The used number of words varies depending on the setting. (1 to 3 words)
Info. Output Memory
Contents
n
Sampling buffer data No. 0 to 3
n+1
Sampling buffer data No. 4 to 7
n+2
Sampling buffer data No. 8 to 11
• Memory contents:
[Info. Output Memory] = n
MSB
LSB
15 14 13 12
Info. output memory F1
n
n+1
n+2
D
Buffer No. 3
Buffer No. 7
Buffer No. 11
T:
D:
F0:
F1:
10-10
F0
T
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
F1 F0
D
Buffer No. 2
Buffer No. 6
Buffer No. 10
Input trigger is output.
Specified buffer contains data.
Specified buffer is 90% full.
Specified buffer is full.
T
F1 F0
D
Buffer No. 1
Buffer No. 5
Buffer No. 9
T
F1 F0
D
Buffer No. 0
Buffer No. 4
Buffer No. 8
T
Chapter 10 Sampling
♦ [0] to [11] Tab Window
[
Use Sample Buffer]
When the [Use Sample Buffer] option is checked, the following options
become active.
When the buffer is not used, uncheck the option.
The active options are explained below.
[
Memory Designation]
• Unchecked:
Sampling memory addresses are allocated consecutively from the read
area.
• Checked:
The memory address for sampling data can be specified.
When this option is checked, a read from the PLC occurs more frequently than when it is
not checked, and the processing speed may be slowed down. To increase the
processing speed, uncheck this option.
• When [Memory Designation] is unchecked ( ):
Sampling memory addresses are allocated following the sampling control
memory (read area “n + 3” and later).
Buffer No. 0 - 3
n
n+1
Read area
n+2
n+3
Sample control
n+4
n+5
n+6
n+7
Sampling data
n+8
Buffer No. 4 - 7
n
n+1
Read area
n+2
n+3
Sample control
n+4
n+5
n+6
n+7
Sampling data
n+8
Buffer No. 8 - 11
n
n+1
Read area
n+2
n+3
Sample control
n+4
n+5
n+6
n+7
Sampling data
n+8
n: Read area
10
Buffer No. 0 - 3
n
n+1
Read area
n+2
n+3
Sample control
Desired
address
Buffer No. 4 - 7
n
n+1
Read area
n+2
n+3
Sample control
n+4
Desired
address
Sampling data
Buffering Area
• When [Memory Designation] is checked ( ):
The memory address for sampling data can be specified.
Buffer No. 8 - 11
n
n+1
Read area
n+2
n+3
n+4
Sample control
n+5
Desired
address
Sampling data
Sampling data
n: Read area
10-11
Chapter 10 Sampling
Sample Control Memory
Sampling control memory is automatically allocated for a maximum of 3 words following
the read area “n + 3” (specified in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog from the [System
Setting] menu) by checking the [ Use Sample Buffer] option in the [Buffering Area
Setting] dialog. Regardless of the setting for [Memory Designation], sample control
memory is allocated following read area “n + 3.”
MSB
sample control memory
= Read area
n+3
n+4
n+5
LSB
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
U
S
S
R
Buffer No. 3
Buffer No. 7
Buffer No. 11
T
U
R
Buffer No. 2
Buffer No. 6
Buffer No. 10
T
U
S
R
Buffer No. 1
Buffer No. 5
Buffer No. 9
T
U
S
R
T
Buffer No. 0
Buffer No. 4
Buffer No. 8
R: Reset
When this bit is set (1), data in the specified buffer is cleared and no sampling
occurs. When this bit is reset (0), sampling is started. (This is not so when [Relay
Sample] is selected for [Sampling Method].)
T:
Trigger
This is valid only when [Bit Synchronize] is selected for [Sampling Method]. Data is
sampled from the specified buffer at the edge of [0 → 1].
S: Normal operation bit
This is valid only when [Alarm Function] is selected for [Sampling Method]. This bit
controls the alarm display. When an error bit is reset, this bit is set. When an error
bit is set, this bit is reset. The first error bit that is set while this bit is reset is
recognized as the “first cause” error, and can be distinguished from the other errors.
(
For more information on the alarm function, refer to page 10-62.)
U: Sampling bit/ Start bit
Use Start Bit] is checked other than [Sampling Method: Alarm Function]:
When [
Sampling is started when this bit is set (ON) and is stopped when this bit is reset
(OFF).
[Sampling Method: Alarm Function]
This bit remains set from the start to the end of sampling.
* When this bit is not set, no error message is displayed if the error bit is
set.
* The number of words allocated for the sample control memory depends on
the number of buffers to be used. (Refer to the illustration for [Memory
Designation] on the previous page.)
Use Sample buffer area is not checked, memory addresses from
When [
“n + 3” can be used for other purposes.
* Be sure to reset the bits not in use to “0” in the sample control memory.
10-12
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Sampling Method]
The following six options are available. Data is sampled in the selected
method, and can be displayed in the corresponding sampling mode.
Sampling Method
Corresponding sampling mode
Bit Synchronize
Data sampling
Constant Sample
Trend sampling
Bit Sample
Bit sampling
Relay Sample
Relay sampling
Alarm Function
Alarm display
Temp. Control Net/PLC2
Temperature control network/PLC2
• Bit Synchronize
Data is sampled at the edge of 0 → 1 of bits (specified as “T: trigger”) in the
sample control memory.
Applicable sampling mode: Trend sampling, trend sampling
ON/OFF edge of corresponding bits
of each buffer
MSB
LSB
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
U
S
S
R
T
U
R
T
U
S
R
T
U
S
R
T
Sample control memory
= Read area
n+3
n+4
n+5
Buffer No. 3
Buffer No. 7
Buffer No. 11
Buffer No. 2
Buffer No. 6
Buffer No. 10
Buffer No. 1
Buffer No. 5
Buffer No. 9
Buffer No. 0
Buffer No. 4
Buffer No. 8
• Constant Sample
Data is sampled at the specified intervals (= [Sampling Time]).
Applicable sampling mode: Trend sampling, trend sampling
• Bit Sample
Data is sampled at the ON/OFF edge of each bit.
Applicable sampling mode: Bit sampling
10
• Alarm Function
Data is sampled as controlled with the normal operation bit and the sampling
bit and at the ON/OFF edge of each bit.
Applicable sampling mode: Alarm display
• Temp. Control Net/PLC2
Data for temperature control network/PLC2Way table is sampled at regular
intervals.
Applicable sampling mode: Temperature control network/PLC2
(
Refer to the Temperature Control Network Manual and the V7 Series
Hardware Specifications Manual.)
10-13
Buffering Area
• Relay Sample
Data is sampled at the ON edge of each bit. When the bit is reset (OFF),
data is removed from the buffering area. In the buffering area, data of the
ON bits are stored.
Applicable sampling mode: Relay sampling
Chapter 10 Sampling
[No. of Words] (128 words maximum)
Specify the number of words to be sampled.
As many addresses as the specified number of words must be allocated.
When [Bit Sample] or [Relay Sample] is chosen for [Sampling Method], one
word corresponds to 16 bits.
n
n+1
Read area
n+2
Memory allocation example
[
Buffer No. 0
Memory Designation]
[No. of Words: 3]
[
Buffer No. 1
Memory Designation]
[No. of Words: 2]
n+3
Sample control memory
n+4
n+5
Memory for sampling with buffer No. 0
n+6
n+7
n+8
Memory for sampling with buffer No. 1
.
.
.
1. Only the result up to 32 words is written to internal memory address $s177 to 435
(sample buffer word operation.)
2. When [Multi-link 2] or [Temp. CTRL/PLC2Way] is selected on the V606, a maximum
of 32 words is available only for alarm display.
[Sampling Time] (0 to 65535 sec)
Specify the desired interval for sampling. When “0” is specified for [Sampling
Time], sampling is made at every cycle. Set the desired interval in seconds
to perform sampling regularly.
Sampling at extremely short intervals (“0,” “1,” etc. is specified for [Sampling Time])
increases the number of PLC data reading times. Depending on screen data, the
processing speed of the V series may be slowed down. In this case, it is recommended
that the [ Memory Designation] option be unchecked. (Refer to page page 10-11.)
[No. of Samples]
Specify the number of times for storing sampling data in the buffering area.
Specify a number greater than that of displayable lines that can be held in the display
area of sampling mode for [No. of Samples]. Otherwise, the linked switches (Roll-Up,
Reset, etc.) will become invalid.
[Store Target]
Specify an address for storing sampled data.
• Internal Buffer (Maximum capacity: 32 k words)
Sampled data is stored in the internal buffer within the V series. It is cleared
when the V series is in the STOP mode (the power is turned off, the Main
Menu screen is displayed).
10-14
Chapter 10 Sampling
• SRAM
Sampled data is stored in the SRAM area. Data is retained when the V
series is in the STOP mode (the power is turned off, the Main Menu screen is
displayed). The following SRAM areas are available.
- V7 series:
Built-in SRAM
Option V7EM-S
Option REC-MCARD SRAM (CREC)
- V6 series (option):
REC-MCARD (CREC/ built-in card interface)
V6EM/RS, V6EM/RSi
Built-in SRAM (only for V609E)
[Output File No.] (0 to 15)
Set the file number in the SRAM area.
(
Refer to “Chapter 22 Data Logging.”)
• CF Card
Sampled data is stored in the CF card. Data is retained when the V series is
in the STOP mode (the power is turned off, the Main Menu screen is
displayed). This option can be selected for the V7 series and V608CH.
[Output File No.] (0 to 15)
Set the file number in the SRAM area.
(
Refer to “Chapter 22 Data Logging.”)
[Full Processing]
This option determines what happens when the specified number of
samplings has been exceeded.
• Stop
Sampling stops when the specified number of samplings has been
exceeded.
10
[ Use Operation]
This is valid only when [Bit Synchronize] or [Constant Sample] is selected for
[Sampling Method]. When the mean, maximum, minimum or total value of
data stored in the buffering area should be indicated on the screen, check
this option. (
Refer to page 10-27 and page 10-41.)
[Message GNo]
This is valid only when [Alarm Function] is selected for [Sampling Method].
Specify the group number for messages that are to be displayed when the
error bit is set or reset. Memory addresses are allocated sequentially
beginning from line 0 of the specified message group number.
10-15
Buffering Area
• Continuous
Sampling continues while discarding old sampling data when the
specified number has been exceeded.
Chapter 10 Sampling
[
Use Start Bit]
This is valid only when an option other than [Alarm Function] is selected for
[Sampling Method]. You can control sampling start, stop, and restart.
Sample control memory [U: operation bit] (bits 03, 07, 11, 15)
ON: Sampling start
OFF: Sampling stop
MSB
LSB
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
U
U
S
R
T
S
R
T
U
S
R
T
U
S
R
T
Sample control memory
= Read area
n+3
n+4
n+5
Buffer No. 3
Buffer No. 7
Buffer No. 11
Buffer No. 2
Buffer No. 6
Buffer No. 10
Buffer No. 1
Buffer No. 5
Buffer No. 9
Buffer No. 0
Buffer No. 4
Buffer No. 8
[Use WAV]
This is valid only when [Bit Sample] or [Alarm Function] is selected for
[Sampling Method]. Sound is replayed at the ON edge of the error bit.
(
Refer to “Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function.”)
[Replay Consecutively]
This option becomes active when the [ Use Sound] box is checked.
Sound is continuously replayed when the error bit is set (ON). (
Refer
to “Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function.”)
[Use E-Mail]
This is valid only when [Bit Sample], [Relay Sample] or [Alarm Function] is
selected for [Sampling Method]. E-mail is sent when the alarm bit is set or
reset.
• [Receiver’s]
Set the mail address of the receiver. (
E-Mail.”)
10-16
Refer to “Chapter 27
Chapter 10 Sampling
Buffering Area Capacity
Depending on the setting for [Sampling Method] and [Store Target], the buffering
area size should vary. Calculate the required size as below.
• Storage target: Internal buffer (32 k words maximum)
(Unit: words)
Sampling method
Bit Synchronize
Calculation
(No. of Words + 2) × No. of Samples
Constant Sample
(No. of Words + 2) × No. of Samples
Bit Sample
3 × No. of samples
Relay Sample
48 × No. of Words
Alarm Function
3 × No. of samples
Temp. CTRL/PLC2Way
(No. of Words * + 2) × No. of Samples
* [No. of Words] for the temperature control network/PLC2Way table refers to
the number of words for the memory used for the temperature control
network/PLC2way table number that is set for [Table No.] in the [Buffering
Area Setting] dialog.
• Storage target: SRAM/ CF card
Refer to “Chapter 22 Data Logging.”
10
Buffering Area
10-17
Chapter 10 Sampling
Buffering Area Setting Example
Set up buffers as given below:
Buffer No. 0
[Info. Output Memory: D500]
[ Use Sample Buffer]
[ Memory Designation]
[Sampling Method: Bit Sample]
[No. of Words: 2]
[Sampling Time: 0] sec
[No. of Samples: 1000]
[Storage Target: Internal Buffer]
[Full Processing: Continuous]
Buffer No. 2
[
Buffer No. 3
[ Use Sample Buffer]
[ Memory Designation]
[Sampling Method: Constant Sample]
[No. of Words: 8]
[Sampling Time: 1] sec
[No. of Samples: 1500]
[Storage Target: Internal Buffer]
[Full Processing: Continuous]
[ Use Operation]
Buffer No. 1
[ Use Sample Buffer]
[ Memory Designation]
[Sampling Method: Relay Sample]
[No. of Words: 3]
[Sampling Time: 0]sec
Buffer No. 4
[ Use Sample Buffer]
[ Memory Designation]
[Sampling Method: Bit Synchronize]
[No. of Words: 4]
[No. of Samples: 500]
[Storage Target: Internal Buffer]
[Full Processing: Continuous]
[ Use Operation]
Use Sample Buffer]
Memory addresses are allocated following [Read Area] n + 3 as shown below.
n+3
n+4
n+5
n+6
n+7
n+8
n+9
n + 10
n + 11
n + 12
n + 13
n + 14
n + 15
n + 16
n + 17
n + 18
n + 19
n + 20
n + 21
Sample control memory
Sample control memory
Buffer No. 0
Data 0 (Bits 0 to 15)
Data 1 (Bits 16 to 31)
Buffer No. 1
Data 0 (Bits 0 to 15)
Data 1 (Bits 16 to 31)
Data 2 (Bits 32 to 47)
Buffer No. 3
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Buffer No. 4
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Buffer sizes used are shown below:
Buffer No. 0 = 3 × 1000 = 3000
Buffer No. 1 = 48 × 3 = 144
Buffer No. 3 = (8 + 2) × 1500 = 15000
Buffer No. 4 = (4 + 2) × 500 = 3000
10-18
Total 21,144 words
Chapter 10 Sampling
Trend Sampling
Setting Items
New:
Existing:
Double-click the display area.
Be sure to set.
Set if necessary.
Switch See page 10-29.
Trend sampling See page 10-19.
Sample time display See page 10-26.
Sample count display See page 10-26.
Mean display, max. display, min. display, or total display See page 10-27.
When displaying data in a line graph, the trend graph function is also available.
Trend Sampling
♦ [Main] Tab Window
10
[Buffer No.]
Specify the desired buffer number. (
Refer to page 10-9.) The memory
address specifying the data for sampling depends on this buffer number.
[Refer to Buffer Use]
Clicking this option brings up the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog for the buffer
number specified for [Buffer No.]. The set data can be rechecked or
modified.
* For trend sampling, check that [Bit Synchronize] or [Constant Sample] is
chosen for [Sampling Method].
10-19
Trend Sampling
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (For information on the division number, refer to
Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Chapter 10 Sampling
♦ [Setting 1] Tab Window
[
Draw with Rectangular Wave]
When this option is checked ( ), the rectangular wave graph is displayed.
Select a solid line or dotted line for the line type
Draw with Rectangular Wave
Draw with Rectangular Wave
[Direction]
Choose from [RGT], [LFT], [UP], or [DW] to select the direction for drawing
the graph.
Y
Y
Coordinate origin
[RGT]
X
[LFT]
Y
X
X
[UP]
X
[DW]
Y
[Trends]
Specify the desired maximum number of plot points (scales along the X
axis). The setting range varies depending on the V series model.
320 × 240 dots: 3 to 320
640 × 480 dots: 3 to 640
800 × 600 dots: 3 to 800
* Do not specify a value larger than the X size (dots) of the selected trend
sampling part. Trend lines will not be drawn correctly.
10-20
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Display in Area] (Foreground, Background, Tile)
For the inside of the trend sampling area, choose the desired foreground and
background colors and tile pattern. The [Background] option becomes active
when any tile pattern other than pattern 0 (extreme left) is chosen for [Tile].
[
Pen Recorder Type]
Check this option when using the pen recorder type display.
Example: Trend sampling setting
Direction:
RGT
Trends:
11
Pen Recorder Type
Pen Recorder Type
Newest data
Newest data
• No. of Samples < Trends
The newest data move from left to right.
• No. of Samples > Trends
Newest data at the right
Newest data always at the right
[Setting All]
When setting the same data for [Data Length], [Graph Max. Value] and
[Graph Min. Value] of trend line Nos. 0 to 15 where [ Trend Display] is
checked, it is convenient to use this function to set in a batch.
[Setting All] Setting Procedure
1. Click the tabs of [0] to [15] in the [Trend Sampling] dialog, and check the [
Display] box.
Trend
2. Open the [Setting 1] tab window. Click the [Setting] button next to [Setting All]. The
[Setting All] dialog is displayed.
• [Graph Max. Value] [Graph Min. Value]
Specify the maximum and minimum values for each trend line. (
page 10-23.)
Refer to
3. Set the above options.
4. When setting has been completed, click [OK]. The specified [Data Length], [Graph
Max. Value], and [Graph Min. Value] are used for the selected trend line Nos. 0 to 15
where [ Trend Display] is checked in the respective tab window.
10-21
Trend Sampling
• [Data Length] (1 to 2)
Choose either [1-Word] or [2-Word] for data length.
10
Chapter 10 Sampling
♦ [Setting 2] Tab Window
Set the options for drawing subsidiary lines.
Graph Max.
Upper Value
Lower Value
Graph Min.
[
Upper Line Display] [ Lower Line Display]
If you want to draw only one line, check either [ Upper Line Display] or [
Lower Line Display]. If you want to draw two lines, check both boxes.
[Upper Value] [Lower Value]
Determine the positions of the upper/lower value lines.
[Upper Color] [Lower Color]
Choose the desired colors for the upper/lower value lines.
[Data Length]
Choose either [1-Word] or [2-Word] for data length of the specified memory
address of the upper/lower value lines.
[Graph Max.] [Graph Min.]
Scales can be attached for reference of drawing the upper and lower lines in
the trend sampling area. A negative value can be specified.
* Do not specify the same value for both [Graph Max.] and [Graph Min.]. Doing so
will result in an error.
♦ [Setting 3] Tab Window
Add the drawing subsidiary lines.
Upper Line 2
[ Upper Line Display] [ Lower Line
Display]/[Upper Value 2] [Lower Value 2]
Same as those in the [Setting 2] Tab
Window
Upper Line
Lower Line
Lower Line 2
[Data Length] and [Graph Max./Min.] in the
[Setting 2] tab window are used as well.
10-22
Chapter 10 Sampling
♦ [0] to [15] Tab Window
These tab windows include options for setting up drawing properties and
maximum/minimum values for each trend line.
[
Trend Display]
When this box is checked, the options for drawing properties become active.
These options are described as follows:
[Line Color]
Choose the color of the trend line.
[Line Type & Point]
Choose either a solid line or a dotted line. Choose from 6 options for the line
type and 6 options for dots.
[Data Length]
Choose either [1-Word] or [2-Word] for data length of the trend data memory.
[Graph Max. Value] [Graph Min. Value]
Specify the maximum and minimum values for sampling data.
* When specifying [Graph Max. Value]/[Graph Min. Value] as memory (except
[Constant]), the graph max./min. values is reflected at the same time when the
graph is displayed or the macro command [TREND_REFRESH] is executed.
(
For information on TREND_REFRESH, refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”)
10-23
Trend Sampling
* Do not specify the same value for both [Graph Max. Value] and [Graph Min.
Value]. Doing so will result in an error.
10
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Sample Buffer Word No.]
In regard to the words entered for [No. of Words] in the [Buffering Area
Setting] dialog, specify the word address to be referred to for displaying
sampled data.
Example:
“8” is specified for [No. of Words] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog.
When you want to sample data of the 3rd word in the buffering area, specify
“2” for [Sample Buffer Word No.].
[Data Length: 1-Word]
[Data Length: 2-Word]
Address
Address
1st word
0
1st word
2nd word
1
2nd word
3rd word
2
3rd word
4th word
3
4th word
5th word
4
5th word
6th word
5
6th word
7th word
6
7th word
8th word
7
8th word
0
2
4
6
In this example, the same address should be specified for either data length
even if the setting for [Data Length] in the [Trend Sampling] dialog is not the
same.
10-24
Chapter 10 Sampling
Trend Sampling Area and Plot Points
The V series calculates the size of the point pitches for drawing a trend graph as
follows:
Point pitch (dots) = X size (dots) ÷ ([Trends] − 1)
(The minimum unit of point pitch is “1 dot.”)
D
Y
B
Y size
E
C
A
F
Point pitch
0
X size
X
Example1: Suppose the following trend sampling:
X size:
270 (dots)
[Trends]:
10
270 (dots) ÷ (10 − 1) = 30
The point pitch is “30.”
When the size of the trend graph part is adjusted after setting of [Trends], the
adjustment is performed so that there is no remainder. If the value for [Trends] is
changed after the trend graph part is placed and changed in size, there may be a
remainder. The dots of the remainder will be specified as the blank area.
Example2: Suppose the following trend sampling:
X size:
278 (dots)
[Trends]:
50
278 (dots) ÷ (50 − 1) = 5 ... Remainder 33
The point pitch is “5,” and the remainder “33” is the X size of the blank area.
Y size
0
Trend Sampling
Y
Blank area
Point pitch
X size
10
X
The X size of a trend sampling area can be checked easily by selecting [Item List] from
the [Display] menu.
10-25
Chapter 10 Sampling
Data Display Function for Trend Sampling
♦ Sample Count Display
The total number of data sampled or the ordinal number of the selected data
element among those sampled can be indicated. (
For information on
selection with the cursor, refer to page 10-29.)
Normal
When selected:
This number indicates the amount of
data which has been trend-sampled.
This number indicates the ordinal
number of selected data.
5
99
• Notes
[Division No.]
Specify the same division number as the trend sampling part.
[Display Function]
Choose [Sample Count Display].
For more information on other setting items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data
Display.”
♦ Sample Time Display
This function can indicate the last sampling time or that of the selected data
element. (
For information on selection with the cursor, refer to page
10-29.)
Normal
When selected:
06-04 11 : 50 : 13
This is the
sampling time
of the data
sampled last.
Direction: →
06-04 11 : 33 : 15
This is the
sampling time of
the selected data.
Direction: →
• Notes
[Division No.]
Specify the same division number as the trend sampling part.
[Display Function]
Choose [Sample Time Display].
10-26
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Digits]
Depending on the setting for [Digits], the sampling time is indicated in the
following format:
Less than 8 digits
No display
From 8 digits up to 14 digits hour : minute : second
15 digits or greater
month - date, hour : minute : second
For more information on other setting items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data
Display.”
♦ Sample Buffer Mean, Min., Max. and Total Displays
The mean, minimum, maximum, and total data of sampled data in the buffering
area can be displayed. Calculation is performed in the V series and the result is
stored in double-word. Results are stored in the V series only, and can be
displayed on the screen.
Mean
Max.
Min.
Total
782
864
559
5049
The calculated result of one
sampled data is displayed.
The mean, minimum, maximum, and total data of sampled data can be stored in the
internal memory. For more information, refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
• Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Specify the same division number as the trend sampling part.
[Display Function]
Choose from [Sample Buffer Mean Display], [Sample Buffer Max.
Display], [Sample Buffer Min. Display], or [Sample Buffer Total Display].
[Sample Buffer Word No.]
Specify the word address in the buffer used for calculation. This option is
the same as [Sample Buffer Word No.] in the [Trend Sampling] dialog.
[Sample Buffer No.]
Specify the buffer number for sampled data display. This option is the
same as [Buffer No.] in the [Trend Sampling] dialog.
When the data of [Sample Buffer Mean Display], [Sample Buffer Max.
Display], [Sample Buffer Min. Display], or [Sample Buffer Total Display] should
be displayed, check [ Use Operation] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog
for the buffer number specified for calculation. Otherwise, calculation and
data display will not be carried out correctly.
10-27
Trend Sampling
[Digits]
Data within 2 words can be displayed correctly. Determine the number of
digits based on the data in the target buffer.
10
Chapter 10 Sampling
• Notes on Mathematical Operations
- Calculations are performed based on the data sampled from the start
until the present. When [Continuous] is chosen for [Full Processing] in
the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog, the actual calculated result may
disagree with the value displayed on the screen.
- If a result exceeds 2 words after calculation of [Sample Buffer Mean
Display] or [Sample Buffer Total Display], an overflow occurs and correct
data may not be obtained. (Overflow: the state where data exceeds two
words)
- When sampled data is stored in a memory card via a card recorder
CREC ([SRAM] is chosen for [Store Target] in the [Buffering Area Setting]
dialog), and also when [ Use Operation] is checked in the [Buffering
Area Setting] dialog, it will take a longer time to change from the STOP →
RUN mode. This is because data read operations from CREC are
performed for calculation. During data read operation, the message
“Sample-Operation Working” is displayed on the screen, and bit 15
(sampling calculation) of [I/F Memory] (n) in the [Memory Card Setting]
dialog is set (ON).
The same condition may occur when removing or inserting the memory
card.
It will not take time in read operations when storing sampling data
through the card interface without CREC.
At start-up
Check
Sample-Operation Working
Mean
Max.
Min.
Total
782
864
559
5049
It will take a longer time
to show these results.
10-28
Chapter 10 Sampling
Switches for Trend Sampling
When displaying sampled data, scrolling, resetting, etc. can be performed by
setting a switch.
♦ Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. Specify the same division number as the trend
sampling part. (
For information on the division number, refer to
Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Function]
Set the switch function. The following switch functions are available with
trend sampling.
Function
Contents
Roll Up
Scrolls by one data element toward the most recent entry. If all data
cannot be held in the graph, one data element at a time scrolls into
view.
Roll Down
Scrolls by one data element toward the oldest entry. If all data cannot
be held in the graph, one data element at a time scrolls into view.
Plus Block
Scrolls by one page toward the most recent entry.
Minus Block
Scrolls by one page toward the oldest entry.
Graph Return
Returns to the most recent graph display when it is pressed while
flashing. Flashing is canceled as well as the selection.
Reset
When the switch is pressed once, it is turned on. Pressing it again
within 2 seconds clears the buffering area. Sampling restarts
immediately after clearing. If not pressed again within 2 seconds, the
switch is turned off, and resetting is nullified.
10
Trend Sampling
10-29
Chapter 10 Sampling
♦ Sampled Data Display By Switches
The page of the newest trend sampling data is shown when the trend sampling
screen is display. To allow operators to view hidden data elements, [Roll Up],
[Roll Down], [Plus Block], [Minus Block], and [Graph Return] switches are used.
The switches work as described below:
1. Press the [Roll Up], [Roll Down], [Plus Block], or [Minus Block] switch.
2. A dotted vertical line is drawn at the center of the graph. (This dotted line is
called a cursor.) The [Graph Return] switch flashes alternately between
ON/OFF colors.
Menu
Sampling (Trend)
Cursor
Counts 5
Graph
Return
06-04 11 : 50 : 13
Page
UP
Page
DOWN
Roll
UP
Roll
DOWN
Reset
3. When the sampling count/time display is set up as described in “Data
Display Function for Trend Sampling,” the count number or the sampling
time of the selected data element is indicated. (If no data element is
selected, the total number of samplings or the last sampling time is
indicated.)
4. Pressing the flashing [Graph Return] switch returns the graph display to the
most recent display.
The data specified by the cursor can be displayed in numerals. Use a macro command
in this case. For more information, refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
10-30
Chapter 10 Sampling
Data Sampling
Setting Items
New:
Existing:
Data sampling See page 10-31.
Switch See page 10-29.
Sample time display See page 10-40.
Be sure to set.
Set if necessary.
Sample count display See page 10-40.
Display area See page 10-34.
Mean display, max. display, min. display, or total display See page 10-41.
[Data Sampling] Dialog
[Buffer No.]
Specify the desired buffer number.(
Refer to page 10-9.) The memory
address specifying the data for sampling depends on this buffer number.
[Refer to Buffer Use]
The setting for [Buffer No.] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog can be
rechecked or modified. Click this button. The [Buffering Area Setting] dialog
where the buffer number is specified is displayed.
* For data sampling, check that [Bit Synchronize] or [Constant Sample] is chosen
for [Sampling Method].
10-31
10
Data Sampling
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Message to Print]
Sampled data stored in the buffer can be printed out in the form of data
sampling. The header line can be printed when it is registered as a message
on the message edit window. Specify the group and line numbers of the top
message.
Registering Messages
• The specified top message is indicated as the header line. If you want to use two or
more lines for the header, delimit the line using one-byte “\.” (“\” is not printed.)
• The header line is printed on top of each page.
• On the line following the header, specify the positions to indicate counts, time, and
sampled data. Settings can be made by one-byte “C,” “T,” and “0” to “7.”
C:
T:
0 to 15:
Print position of count
Print position of time
Print position of data No. 0 to 15
The positions of C, T and 0 to 15 depend on the types of [Sampling Count Display],
[Sampling Time Display] and [Data Sampling]. If these numerical data displays are
specified with [ Zero Suppress] and [ Flush R], the positions of the lower digits of
these numerical data displays are the standard against the printing position. If these
numerical data displays are specified with [ Zero Suppress] and [ Flush L], the
positions of the upper digits of these numerical data displays are the standard against
the printing position. And in case of [ Zero Suppress], the data is printed without
zero suppress.
[
[
Zero Suppress]
Flush L]
C
↓
0
T
↓
0
0
↓
12345
1
↓
12345
* The count and the time are not printed when [Sample Count Display] and
[Sample Time Display] are not placed on a screen, even if [C] and [T] are
specified on the message edit window.
Example: Register messages in line No. 0 of group No. 2.
[ Zero Suppress]
[
Flush L]
Message GNo. 2 edit
Title
Print position
Sampling
Count
T
C
Time
-------- Line 1 -------No. 1
No. 2
1
0
-------- Line 2 --------\
No. 3
No. 4
2
3
It is printed as shown below.
10-32
Sampling
Count
1
2
3
4
Time
06-04 13:14:20
06-04 13:34:20
06-04 13:54:20
06-04 13:74:20
-------- Line 1 -------No. 1
No. 2
1234
4562
2457
2346
1240
6548
4563
7683
-------- Line 2 --------\
No. 3
No. 4
1111
224
3464
456
5648
984
6713
777
50
06-04 15:14:20
9997
8127
8764
265
Chapter 10 Sampling
Print Method
• Press the [Function: Sample Print] switch.
• Set the bit for the print command memory.
[
Print Command Memory]
When print command is given externally, check this box. Specify the
command memory.
MSB
LSB
15 14 13 12
Memory n
0
0
0
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Printout (0 → 1)
Be sure to reset the bits not in use to “0” in the print command memory.
10
Data Sampling
10-33
Chapter 10 Sampling
Sampling Display Area
This is the area where sampling data is displayed.
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. Specify the same division number as in the
[Data Sampling] dialog. (
For information on the division number, refer
to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Foreground] [Background] [Tile]
Choose colors for the sampling display area. The [Background] option
becomes active when any tile pattern other than pattern 0 (extreme left) is
chosen for [Tile].
10-34
Chapter 10 Sampling
♦ [Detail] Tab Window
In one sampling display area, up to 16 data can be displayed. Properties can be
set for each data display.
Numerical data display and also character display parts can be set. Check the
desired number, and the [Data] or [Char] button becomes active. Clicking [Data]
brings up the [Data] dialog, and clicking [Char.] brings up the [Text] dialog.
[Data] Dialog
• [Type] Tab Window
10
Data Sampling
10-35
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Digits]
Depending on the [Display Type] selection, the available data range
varies as shown below. If the decimal point is included in numbers, it
does not need to be counted.
Example: 99.9 → 3 digits
Display Type
Digits
Decimal Point
DEC
1 to 10
0 to 9
HEX
1 to 8
−
OCT
1 to 11
−
BIN
1 to 32
−
[Decimal Point]
Specify the decimal place. When no decimal point is required, set “0.”
[Display Type]
Select the code for displaying data that is read in the code specified by
[Input Type]. The available codes are DEC (w/o sign), DEC (w/ −sign),
DEC (w/ +/− sign), HEX, OCT, and BIN.
[Input Type]
Choose the code to be used when reading from the PLC memory.
[BCD], [DEC]
[Data Length]
Choose either [1-Word] or [2-Word] for the data length of the specified
memory.
[Display Type] and available ranges
Display Type
DEC (w/o sign)
1-word Range
0 to 65535
2-word Range
0 to 4294967295
DEC (w/ −sign)
−32768 to 32767
−2147483648 to 2147483647
DEC (w/ ±sign)
−32768 to +32767
−214748648 to +2147483647
HEX
0 to FFFF
0 to FFFFFFFF
OCT
0 to 177777
0 to 37777777777
BIN
0 to 1111111111111111
0 to 11111111111111111111111111111111
* Depending on the [Display Type] selection, the available range of data
varies. In particular, for data close to the border between [1-Word] and
[2-Word], double-check the display range.
[Zero Suppress]
When using the zero suppress function, check the box. If you check this
box, the following options become active.
[Flush R]/[Flush L]
Choose either flush-left or flush-right for aligning numbers.
[Sample Buffer Word No.]
In regard to the words entered for [No. of Words] in the [Buffering Area
Setting] dialog, specify the word address to be referred to for displaying
sampled data. For more information, refer to the trend sampling example
on page 10-24.
10-36
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Sample Count]
This option is to be used for data converted from the GD80 series.
Do not use any data other than converted data. (
Refer to the File
Conversion Manual.)
• [Char. Prop.] Tab Window
[Char. Type]
Choose from [Normal], [1/4], [Bold] or [Shadow].
Normal: One-byte or two-byte characters are used for numerals in
the plain typeface.
1/4:
8 × 8 dots size
* Available for one-byte characters only
Bold:
Bold typeface is used.
Shadow: [Background] is used as shadow of [Foreground].
[Foreground]/[Background]
Choose the desired foreground and background colors of numerals.
[
Transparent] [ Italic]
If you want to use transparency or italics, check the corresponding box.
[Char. Size]
Choose either 1-byte or 2-byte characters for displaying numerals.
Characters can be sized up to 1 × 1.
• [Detail] Tab Window
[ Use Operation]
Check this box for calculating data in the V series and for displaying its
result. When [ Use Operation] is checked, the mathematical operation
items (offset value, multiplication [×]/ division [÷], multiplier or divisor)
become active.
“Offset” is:
like an origin position from which operation of
memory data is started.
Y
Y = 100 + 2X
0
X
* When mathematical operations are used as shown above, their results are
displayed on the screen. Therefore, check the setting for [Display Type],
[Digits], [Decimal Point], etc.
Alarm]
If you want to use a different color for data that exceeds or falls short of
the specified range, check the [Alarm] box.
[Max.] and [Min.]
When [ Alarm] is checked, enter [Max.] and [Min.] values.
10-37
Data Sampling
100
Offset
[
10
Offset
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Max. Color Foreground/Background] [Min. Color Foreground/Background]
Select the desired colors for the maximum value (to be displayed when
data exceeds the range) and for the minimum value (to be displayed
when data falls short of the range). When [B] is pressed, data flashes in
the selected color.
[Text] Dialog
• [Type] Tab Window
[Bytes]
Specify the number of characters to be displayed. One character of the
alphabet occupies one byte.
[Flush R]/[Flush L]
Choose either flush-left or flush-right for aligning characters.
[Sample Buffer Word No.]
In regard to the words entered for [No. of Words] in the [Buffering Area
Setting] dialog, specify the word address to be referred to for displaying
sampled data. For more information, refer to the trend sampling example
on page 10-24.
• [Char. Prop.] Tab Window
Characters can be sized up to 1 × 1.
[Char. Type]
Choose from [Normal], [1/4], [Bold] or [Shadow]. For more information
on the typeface, refer to page 10-37.
[
10-38
Transparent]
Transparency for characters can be chosen. When making the
characters transparent, check the box.
Chapter 10 Sampling
[
Italic]
Italics for characters can be chosen. When making the characters Italic,
check the box.
[Foreground]/[Background]
Select character colors. When [ Transparent] is checked, the
[Background] option is not active.
♦ Size Setting of Sampling Display Area Part
It is possible to check how many lines can be held in the sampling display area.
Set the following items.
1. Select [Display] → [Display Environment].
The [Display Environment] dialog is displayed.
2. Click the [Grid] tab to set the following items.
[ Grid Dsp.]
[Grid Type: 1-Byte]
The one-byte character grids are shown. The
sampling display area can be enlarged or reduced in
units of dots. Consider the number of sampled data
and lines for display.
Display position can be moved horizontally by selecting one section of data. When
handles are shown, the data can be dragged to the right or left. If you want to move it
beyond the display area, enlarge the sampling display area.
It is possible to show the data display number at the bottom left corner to identify each
data in the sampling display area.
10
When one section of data is selected (handles are shown), clicking the [Delete] icon
deletes the sampling display area. Keep this in mind to avoid unnecessary deletion.
10-39
Data Sampling
• Setting Position
Select [Display] → [Display Environment] → [Display Environment] dialog. Specify
the division number for [DIVNo.] in the [Detail] tab window.
Chapter 10 Sampling
Data Display Function for Data Sampling
♦ Sample Count Display
The total number of data sampled or the ordinal number of the selected data
element among those sampled can be indicated. The procedure for selection
with the cursor is explained in the following section, “Switches for Data
Sampling.”
Normal
When selected:
This number indicates the amount of
data which has been sampled.
5
This number indicates the ordinal
number of selected data.
2
102
111
108
106
113
150
156
159
145
148
191
196
199
198
188
250
255
254
253
252
303
310
311
312
313
408
410
412
411
407
515
526
533
555
548
102
111
108
106
113
150
156
159
145
148
191
196
199
198
188
250
255
254
253
252
303
310
311
312
313
408
410
412
411
407
515
526
533
555
548
Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Specify the same division number as in the [Data Sampling] dialog.
[Display Function]
Choose [Sample Count Display].
For more information on other setting items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display.”
♦ Sample Time Display
This function can indicate the last sampling time or that of the selected data
element. The procedure for selection with the cursor is explained in the
following section, “Switches for Data Sampling.”
Normal
When selected:
This is the sampling time of the data
sampled last.
This is the sampling time of the
selected data.
06-04 11 : 50 : 13
102
111
108
106
113
10-40
150
156
159
145
148
191
196
199
198
188
250
255
254
253
252
303
310
311
312
313
408
410
412
411
407
515
526
533
555
548
06-04 11 : 33 : 15
102
111
108
106
113
150
156
159
145
148
191
196
199
198
188
250
255
254
253
252
303
310
311
312
313
408
410
412
411
407
515
526
533
555
548
Chapter 10 Sampling
Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Specify the same division number as in the [Data Sampling] dialog.
[Display Function]
Choose [Sample Time Display].
[Digits]
Depending on the setting for [Digits], the sampling time is indicated in the
following format:
Less than 8 digits
No display
From 8 digits up to 14 digits
hour : minute : second
15 digits or greater
month - date, hour : minute : second
For more information on other setting items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display.”
♦ Sample Buffer Mean, Min., Max. and Total Displays
The mean, minimum, maximum, and total data of sampled data in the buffering
area can be displayed. Calculation is performed in the V series and the result is
stored in double-word.
The mean, minimum, maximum, and total data of sampled data can be stored in the
system memory ($s). For more information, refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
Mean
Max.
Min.
Total
106
113
102
102
111
108
106
113
150
156
159
145
148
191
196
199
198
188
250
255
254
253
252
303
310
311
312
313
408
410
412
411
407
515
526
533
555
548
530
The calculated result of one
sampled data is displayed.
10
[Display Function]
Choose from [Sample Buffer Mean Display], [Sample Buffer Max. Display],
[Sample Buffer Min. Display] or [Sample Buffer Total Display].
[Digits]
Data within 2 words can be displayed correctly. Determine the number of
digits based on the data in the target buffer.
[Sample Buffer Word No.]
Specify the word address in the buffer used for calculation. This option is the
same as [Sample Buffer Word No.] in the [Data Sampling] dialog.
10-41
Data Sampling
Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Specify the same division number as the data sampling part.
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Sample Buffer No.]
Specify the buffer number for sampled data display. This option is the same
as [Buffer No.] in the [Data Sampling] dialog.
When the data of [Sample Buffer Mean Display], [Sample Buffer Max.
Display], [Sample Buffer Min. Display], or [Sample Buffer Total Display] should
be displayed, check [ Use Operation] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog
for the buffer number specified for calculation. Otherwise, calculation and
data display will not be carried out correctly.
Notes on Operations
Refer to page 10-28.
Switches for Data Sampling
When displaying sampled data, scrolling, resetting, etc. can be performed by
setting a switch.
♦ Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. Specify the same division number as the trend
sampling part. (
For information on the division number, refer to
Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Function]
Set the switch function.
The following switch functions are available with data sampling.
Function
10-42
Contents
Roll Up
Scrolls by one data element toward the most recent entry. If all data
cannot be held in the graph, one data element at a time scrolls into
view.
Roll Down
Scrolls by one data element toward the oldest entry. If all data cannot
be held in the graph, one data element at a time scrolls into view.
Plus Block
Scrolls by one page toward the most recent entry.
Minus Block
Scrolls by one page toward the oldest entry.
Graph Return
Returns to the most recent graph display when it is pressed while
flashing. Flashing is canceled as well as the selection.
Reset
When the switch is pressed once, it is turned on. Pressing it again
within 2 seconds clears the buffering area. Sampling restarts
immediately after clearing. If not pressed again within 2 seconds, the
switch is turned off, and resetting is nullified.
Sample Print
Outputs all data stored in the specified buffer to the printer.
Chapter 10 Sampling
♦ Sampled Data Display By Switches
The first page of the data sampling graph is shown if the screen display is shifted
during sampling. To allow operators to view hidden data elements, [Roll Up],
[Roll Down], [Plus Block], [Minus Block], and [Graph Return] switches are used.
The switches work as described below:
1. Press the [Roll Up], [Roll Down], [Plus Block], or [Minus Block] switch.
2. A data element at the middle of the display area is selected. (A cursor
appears.) The [Graph Return] switch flashes alternately between ON/OFF
colors.
Menu
Sampling (Data)
Counts 5
102
111
108
106
113
111
115
113
118
Graph
Return
06-04
150
156
159
145
148
140
153
142
158
Page
UP
191
196
199
198
188
180
193
183
198
250
255
254
253
252
251
248
253
248
Page
DOWN
303
310
311
312
313
314
315
313
313
408
410
412
411
407
406
411
403
418
515
526
533
555
548
521
569
577
598
Roll
UP
Roll
DOWN
11 : 50 : 13
787
712
742
798
742
739
746
786
741
Print
Out
Reset
The data specified by the cursor can be displayed in numerals. Use a macro command
in this case. For more information, refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
3. When the sampling count/time display is set up as described in “Data
Display Function for Data Sampling,” the count number or the sampling time
of the selected data element is indicated. (If no data element is selected, the
total number of samplings or the last sampling time is indicated.)
10-43
Data Sampling
4. Pressing the flashing [Graph Return] switch returns the graph display to the
most recent display.
10
Chapter 10 Sampling
Bit Sampling
Setting Items
New:
Existing:
Bit sampling See page 10-44.
Status display See page 10-51.
Sample time display See page 10-50.
Sample count display See page 10-50.
Be sure to set.
Set if necessary.
Switch See page 10-52.
Display area See page 10-49.
[Bit Sampling] Dialog
♦ [Main 1] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Buffer No.]
Specify the desired buffer number. (
Refer to page 10-9.) The memory
address specifying the data for sampling depends on this buffer number.
10-44
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Refer to Buffer Use]
The setting for [Buffer No.] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog can be
rechecked or modified. Click this button. The [Buffering Area Setting] dialog
where the buffer number is specified is displayed.
* For bit sampling, check that [Bit Sample] is chosen for [Sampling Method].
[Start Message GNo. and No]
Register messages connected to bits in the specified buffer on the message
edit window. Specify the group and line numbers of the top message.
(
For information on message editing, refer to Chapter 4 in the
Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Display in Area]
When bringing up the contents of bit sampling, bit activations (ON/OFF) can
be indicated at the extreme left. Choose from [No], [TYPE0] or [TYPE1].
• No
The status is not displayed.
06-04 11 : 32 : 10 A Tank Temperature Up
06-04 11 : 33 : 15 A Tank Temperature Up
06-04 11 : 40 : 25 C Tank Temperature Down
06-04 11 : 50 : 13 C Tank Temperature Down
• TYPE0
ON and OFF are indicated in one-byte characters.
<ON>
Display in Area [TYPE0]
06-04 11 : 32 : 10 A Tank Temperature Up
<OFF>
06-04 11 : 33 : 15 A Tank Temperature Up
<ON>
06-04 11 : 40 : 25 C Tank Temperature Down
<OFF>
06-04 11 : 50 : 13 C Tank Temperature Down
• TYPE1
- When [TYPE1] is chosen, the [Start Message GNo. & No.] option
becomes active. Specify the group and line numbers of the start
message. The start message number is used for bit ON, and the
following message is used for bit OFF.
Example: [Start Message GNo. and No.: 1 & 0]
Message GNo. 1 edit
No. 0
No. 1
Occur
Reset
Display in Area (TYPE1)
Occur
06-04
11 : 32 : 10
A Tank Temperature Up
Reset
06-04
11 : 33 : 15
A Tank Temperature Up
Occur
06-04
11 : 40 : 25
C Tank Temperature Down
Reset
06-04
11 : 50 : 13
C Tank Temperature Down
10-45
10
Bit Sampling
- Two different messages for bit ON (“ON” for [TYPE0]) and OFF
(“OFF” for [TYPE0]) can be set as desired. Register the text on
message edit window, and display the text corresponding to the
ON/OFF status of the bit.
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Status Display]
The status display indicates which contents are being shown: bit ON, bit OFF
or bit ON/OFF.
• No
The status is not displayed.
Status Display (No)
06-04 11 : 32 : 10 A Tank Temperature Up
06-04 11 : 33 : 15 A Tank Temperature Up
06-04 11 : 40 : 25 C Tank Temperature Down
06-04 11 : 50 : 13 C Tank Temperature Down
• TYPE0
ON/OFF, ON and OFF are indicated in one-byte characters.
<ON / OFF>
<ON>
Status Display (TYPE0)
06-04 11 : 32 : 10 A Tank Temperature Up
<OFF> 06-04 11 : 33 : 15 A Tank Temperature Up
<ON>
06-04 11 : 40 : 25 C Tank Temperature Down
<OFF> 06-04 11 : 50 : 13 C Tank Temperature Down
• TYPE1
When [TYPE1] is chosen, the [Start Message GNo. & No.] option
becomes active. Depending on the specified number, the status
messages will be shown on the screen. The start message number is
used for ON/OFF. The following message is used for ON, and the next
message is used for OFF.
Example: [Start Message GNo. and No.: 1 & 3]
Message GNo. 1 edit
Occur/Reset
No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
Occur
Reset
Occur/Reset
Occur
Reset
Status Display (TYPE1)
Occur
06-04
11 : 32 : 10
A Tank Temperature Up
Reset
06-04
11 : 33 : 15
A Tank Temperature Up
Occur
06-04
11 : 40 : 25
C Tank Temperature Down
Reset
06-04
11 : 50 : 13
C Tank Temperature Down
A character display part is used for the status display. Unless a character
display part ([Display Function: Sample Status Display]) that links the [Bit
Sampling] dialog is placed, no status display is available. (
For
more information on the character display part, refer to “Chapter 5 Data
Display.”)
10-46
Chapter 10 Sampling
♦ [Main 2] Tab Window
[
Time Display]
When indicating the sampling time, check this box. It is indicated in the
following format: day, hour: minute: second. The number of characters is 15
(one-byte).
When time display is selected:
When time display is not selected:
Fixed to 15 one-byte characters
Occur
06-04 11 : 32 : 10
A Tank Temperature Up
Occur
A Tank Temperature Up
Reset
06-04 11 : 33 : 15
A Tank Temperature Up
Reset
A Tank Temperature Up
Occur
06-04 11 : 40 : 25
C Tank Temperature Down
Occur
C Tank Temperature Down
Reset
06-04 11 : 50 : 13
C Tank Temperature Down
Reset
C Tank Temperature Down
hour : minute : second
month − day
[
10
Real Time Print]
For more information, refer to page 10-55.
• ON-OFF
Indicates ON/OFF of all bits sampled.
• ON
Indicates ON of the bits sampled.
• OFF
Indicates OFF of the bits sampled.
[
Print Command Memory]
When printing should be started externally, check this box. (For more
information, refer to page 10-54.)
10-47
Bit Sampling
[Initial Status Display]
This option determines the status display to be used when the screen is
opened.
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Priority Display]
Choose the message display order in bit sampling.
Chronological Display:
Messages are displayed in order of
occurrence from old to new.
From Newest:
Messages are displayed in order of
occurrence from new to old.
♦ [Char. Prop. ON/OFF] Tab Window
[ON Foreground/Background] [OFF Foreground/Background]
Specify the foreground and background colors for messages to be used
when a bit is set and reset.
[
Transparent]
Select whether or not to make the characters transparent. When making the
characters transparent, check the box.
[Char. Type]
Normal: One-byte or two-byte characters are used in the plain typeface.
Bold:
Bold typeface is used.
Shadow: Shadowed typeface is used.
Characters can be sized up to 1 × 1.
[
10-48
Italic]
If you want to use italics, check the box.
Chapter 10 Sampling
Display Area Parts
This is the area where sampling data is displayed.
♦ Notes on Placement
The size of the display area parts placed on screen can be changed. The size of
the characters is fixed to “1.” Consider the number of characters to be displayed
when determining the size of the part.
The one-byte character grids are useful to determine the display area part size.
(
For information on grid display, refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference
Manual (Operation).)
♦ [Mode Display Area] Dialog
[Display in Area]
Choose colors for the display area part. The [Background] option becomes
active when any tile pattern other than pattern 0 (extreme left) is chosen for
[Tile].
[
Display Area Transparent]
This is invalid for bit sampling. Uncheck this option.
10-49
10
Bit Sampling
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as that in the [Bit Sampling] dialog. (
For
information on the division number, refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference
Manual (Operation).)
Chapter 10 Sampling
Data Display Function for Bit Sampling
♦ Sample Count Display
The total number of data sampled or the ordinal number of the selected data
element among those sampled can be indicated.
The procedure for selection with the cursor is explained in the following section,
“Switches for Bit Sampling.”
Normal
This indicates the total number
of messages logged.
4
When selected:
This is the ordinal number of the selected
message amount those logged.
2
<ON>
06-04 11 : 32 : 10
A Tank Temperature Up
<ON>
06-04 11 : 32 : 10
A Tank Temperature Up
<OFF> 06-04 11 : 33 : 15
A Tank Temperature Up
<OFF> 06-04 11 : 33 : 15
A Tank Temperature Up
<ON>
06-04 11 : 40 : 25
C Tank Temperature Down
<ON>
06-04 11 : 40 : 25
C Tank Temperature Down
<OFF> 06-04 11 : 50 : 13
C Tank Temperature Down
<OFF> 06-04 11 : 50 : 13
C Tank Temperature Down
Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as that in the [Bit Sampling] dialog.
[Display Function]
Choose [Sample Count Display].
For more information on other setting items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display.”
♦ Sample Time Display
This function can indicate the last sampling time or that of the selected data
element. The procedure for selection with the cursor is explained in the
following section, “Switches for Bit Sampling.”
Normal
When selected:
This is the last sampling time.
06-04 11 : 50 : 13
<ON>
06-04 11 : 32 : 10
This is the sampling time of
the selected data.
06-04 11 : 33 : 15
A Tank Temperature Up
<ON>
06-04 11 : 32 : 10
A Tank Temperature Up
<OFF> 06-04 11 : 33 : 15
A Tank Temperature Up
<OFF> 06-04 11 : 33 : 15
A Tank Temperature Up
<ON>
06-04 11 : 40 : 25
C Tank Temperature Down
<ON>
06-04 11 : 40 : 25
C Tank Temperature Down
<OFF> 06-04 11 : 50 : 13
C Tank Temperature Down
<OFF> 06-04 11 : 50 : 13
C Tank Temperature Down
Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as that in the [Bit Sampling] dialog.
[Display Function]
Choose [Sample Time Display].
10-50
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Digits]
Depending on the setting for [Digits], the sampling time is indicated in the
following format:
Less than 8 digits
No display
From 8 digits up to 14 digits
hour : minute : second
15 digits or greater
month - date, hour : minute : second
For more information on other setting items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display.”
♦ Sample Status Display
The sample status display indicates which contents are being shown: bit ON, bit
OFF, or bit ON/OFF. This function is defined by the [Status Display] option in the
[Bit Sampling] dialog (page 10-46). The position or property of this area is set in
the [Char. Display] dialog as a character display part linked with bit sampling.
The content of this display area is shown.
<ON / OFF>
<ON>
06-04 11 : 32 : 10
A Tank Temperature Up
<OFF> 06-04 11 : 33 : 15
A Tank Temperature Up
<ON>
06-04 11 : 40 : 25
C Tank Temperature Down
<OFF> 06-04 11 : 50 : 13
C Tank Temperature Down
Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as that in the [Bit Sampling] dialog.
[Display Function]
Choose [Sample Status Display].
For more information on other setting items, refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display.”
10-51
10
Bit Sampling
[Bytes]
This setting depends on the setting for [Status Display] in the [Bit Sampling]
dialog
When [No] is chosen, the sampling status display function becomes invalid.
When [TYPE0] is chosen, enter “8” for [Bytes].
When [TYPE1] is chosen, enter the number of bytes required for messages
for bit ON/OFF.
Chapter 10 Sampling
Switches for Bit Sampling
When displaying sampled data, scrolling, resetting, etc. can be performed by
setting a switch.
♦ Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as that in the [Bit Sampling] dialog.
[Function]
Set the switch function. The following switch functions are available with bit
sampling.
Function
10-52
Contents
Roll Up
Scrolls by one data element toward the most recent entry. If all data
cannot be held in the graph, one data element at a time scrolls into
view.
Roll Down
Scrolls by one data element toward the most recent entry. If all data
cannot be held in the graph, one data element at a time scrolls into
view.
Plus Block
Scrolls by one page toward the most recent entry.
Minus Block
Scrolls by one page toward the most recent entry.
Graph Return
Returns to the most recent graph display when it is pressed while
flashing. Flashing is canceled as well as the selection.
Display
Change
Changes over the status display for ON, OFF, or ON/OFF.
Sample Print
Outputs all data stored in the specified buffer to the printer.
Reset
When the switch is pressed once, it is turned on. Pressing it again
within 2 seconds clears the buffering area. Sampling restarts
immediately after clearing. If not pressed again within 2 seconds, the
switch is turned off, and resetting is nullified.
Display Order
Change
Changes over data display order: in order of occurrence (from old to
new) or in the reverse order (from new to old).
Chapter 10 Sampling
♦ Sampled Data Display By Switches
The first page of the bit sampling graph is shown if the screen display is shifted
during sampling. To allow operators to view hidden data elements, [Roll Up],
[Roll Down], [Plus Block], [Minus Block], and [Graph Return] switches are used.
Also the [Display Change] switch for the status display change and the [Display
Order Change] switch for data display order change are available.
The switches work as described below:
1. Press the [Roll Up], [Roll Down], [Plus Block], or [Minus Block] switch.
2. A data element at the middle of the display area is selected. (The cursor is
highlighted. The [Graph Return] switch flashes alternately between ON/OFF
colors.
3. When the sampling count/time display is set up as described in “Data
Display Function for Bit Sampling,” the count number or the sampling time of
the selected data element is indicated. (If no data element is selected, the
total number of samplings or the last sampling time is indicated.)
4. When the sample status display is set up as described in “Data Display
Function for Bit Sampling,” the display contents can be changed by the
[Display Change] switch. (When the screen is opened, the contents
specified for [Initial Status Display] in the [Main 2] tab window of the [Bit
Sampling] dialog are displayed.)
Menu
Sampling (Bit)
< ON / OFF >
Counts 3
< ON >
06-04 11 : 32 : 10
A Tank Temperature Up
< OFF >
06-04 11 : 33 : 15
A Tank Temperature Up
< ON >
06-04
11 : 40 : 25
C Tank Temperature Down
< OFF >
06-04
11 : 50 : 13
C Tank Temperature Down
< ON >
06-04 11 : 55 : 25
B Tank Temperature Down
< OFF >
06-04 11 : 59 : 55
B Tank Temperature Down
Example:
[Status Display: TYPE1]
< ON/OFF >
< ON >
< OFF >
Display
Change
06-04 11 : 40 : 25
10
Graph
Return
+ Block
- Block
Roll
UP
Roll
DOWN
Display
Change
Print
Reset
10-53
Bit Sampling
Display
Order
Change
Chapter 10 Sampling
Print
Bit sampling data can be printed. There are two print types: “sample print” that
prints all data in the buffer, and “real time print” that prints the selected data only
during sampling.
♦ Sample Print
All the data in the buffer is printed.
Print Timing
• When the [Function: Sample Print] switch is pressed
• When bit 15 (print command memory) is set (0 → 1) (
on the print command memory, refer to page 10-47.)
For information
MSB
LSB
15 14 13 12 11
Memory n
0
0
0
0
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Printout (0 → 1)
Be sure to reset the bits not in use to “0” in the print command memory.
Every ON/OFF information is saved in the buffering area.
It is also possible to print the currently displayed status.
For the V6 series, this is available with program ver. 1.450 or later.
Setting
Select [System Setting] → [Unit Setting] → [Environment Setting].
Check [ Print out Bit Sampling as Displayed].
10-54
0
Chapter 10 Sampling
♦ Real Time Print
Each time a bit status changes, the change is printed. The sampling messages
are continuously printed out.
Setting
Bring up the [Main 2] tab window of the [Bit Sampling] dialog.
[
Real Time Print] (Refer to page 10-47.)
Check this option.
[
Time Display]
Time data is not printed if this option is not checked. If checked, the
messages are printed with time data.
[Initial Status Display] (ON-OFF/ON/OFF)
Specify the bit of which activation triggers a real time print. When [ON-OFF]
is selected, data is printed each time a bit changes from ON to OFF or from
OFF to ON. When [ON] is selected, data is printed at the ON edge of each
bit: when [OFF] is selected, data is printed at the OFF edge.
* The display status is not related to real time print.
Example: [ Time Display]
[ Real Time Print]
[Initial Status Display: ON−OFF]
1)
SYSTEM
Printing ON
message of a bit
F1
Bit Sampling
F2
F3
F4
1 bit = ON
F5
F6
F7
1)
POWER
2)
2)
SYSTEM
Bit Sampling
F1
Printing OFF
message of a bit
Printing ON message
of two bits
<OFF> 08-20 13 : 25 : 40
Short of empty palette
<OFF> 08-20 14 : 05 : 13
Saddle stop during ascending
<ON>
Control box emergency stop
08-24 16 : 59 : 54
<OFF> 08-24 17 : 01 : 05
Control box emergency stop
<ON>
08-24 17 : 01 : 05
Operation box emergency stop
<ON>
08-24 17 : 01 : 05
Pusher error
F2
F3
1 bit = OFF
2 bits = ON
F4
F5
F6
F7
10
POWER
Real Time
* Be sure to set different buffer numbers.
When setting four or more bit sampling modes with [ Real Time Print], or
setting the same buffer number on the [Bit Sampling] dialog, the error message
“Data has some error.” is displayed.
10-55
Bit Sampling
Limitations
It is possible to use a maximum of 4 bit sampling modes with [
Print].
Chapter 10 Sampling
Relay Sampling
Setting Items
New:
Existing:
Relay sampling See page 10-56.
Switch See page 10-58.
Display area lamp See page 10-58.
Be sure to set.
Be sure to set one.
Display area switch See page 10-58.
Display area See page 10-58.
Set if necessary.
[Relay Sampling] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
Options included in the [Main] tab window of the [Relay Sampling] dialog are
almost the same as those in the [Relay] dialog. Only different options are
explained here. For more information on other setting items, refer to “Message
Display (Relay/Message).”
10-56
Chapter 10 Sampling
Options Different from Relay Mode
[Buffer No.]
Specify the desired buffer number. The memory address bit specifying the
data for sampling depends on this buffer number.
[Refer to Buffer Use]
The setting for [Buffer No.] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog can be
rechecked or modified. Click this button. The [Buffering Area Setting] dialog
where the buffer number is specified is displayed.
* For relay sampling, check that [Relay Sample] is chosen for [Sampling
Method].
[Memory] [Executing Relays] (in the relay mode)
The [Memory] and [Executing Relays] options are not included in the [Relay
Sampling] dialog. But the data for the options can be set in the same way as
relay mode. This is determined by specifying a buffer number in the
[Buffering Area Setting] dialog. A memory address can be specified by
checking [ Memory Designation] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog.
When an address is specified, the message specified for [Start Message
GNo. & No.] corresponds to the bit in the address. The number of executing
relays is determined by the setting of [No. of Words] in the [Buffering Area
Setting] dialog. For more information, refer to “Differences between Relay
Mode & Relay Sampling (page 10-59).”
[
Time Display]
When this box is checked, the occurring time can be displayed with the
message. For more information, refer to page 10-63.)
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window
Set the properties of characters to be displayed. Options in the window are the
same as those in the [Relay] dialog. Refer to “Chapter 6 Message Display
(Relay/Message).”
10
♦ [Detail] Tab Window
[
[Priority Display]
Choose the message display order in relay sampling.
Chronological Display:
Messages are displayed in order of
occurrence from old to new.
From Newest:
Messages are displayed in order of
occurrence from new to old.
10-57
Relay Sampling
Relay Info. Out]
This is the same as the one included in the [Relay] dialog. Refer to “Chapter
6 Message Display (Relay/Message).”
Chapter 10 Sampling
Display Area
This is the area where the sampling message is displayed.
Select the display area, switch or lamp.
Notes on Placement
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as that in the [Relay Sampling] dialog.
Switches for Relay Sampling
When displaying sampled data, scrolling, resetting, etc. can be performed by
setting a switch.
♦ Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as that in the [Relay Sampling] dialog.
[Function]
Set the switch function. The following switch functions are available with
relay sampling.
Function
10-58
Contents
Roll Up
Scrolls by one data element toward the most recent entry. If all data
cannot be held in the graph, one data element at a time scrolls into
view.
Roll Down
Scrolls by one data element toward the most recent entry. If all data
cannot be held in the graph, one data element at a time scrolls into
view.
Mode
This switch becomes available when [Switch] is chosen for [Action
Area] in the [Relay Sampling] dialog. The display area part is changed
to the area for message display.
Display Order
Change
Changes over data display order: in order of occurrence (from old to
new) or in the reverse order (from new to old).
Chapter 10 Sampling
Differences between Relay Mode & Relay Sampling
♦ Message Display
Different order of display
• Relay mode
In relay mode, messages are displayed in order of priority. (A smaller
message number has priority.)
• Relay sampling
In relay sampling, messages are displayed in order of occurrence.
Example: If the following bits are set in
order:
D100 Bit 0 = ON
Bit 1 = ON
Bit 5 = ON
Bit 3 = ON
Bit 2 = ON
Bit 4 = ON
Menu
Relay Mode
AAAAAA
BBBBBB
FFFFFF
DDDDDD
CCCCCC
EEEEEE
Roll
UP
Roll
DOWN
Message group
High priority
D100 Bit 0 =
Bit 1 =
Bit 5 =
Bit 3 =
Bit 2 =
Bit 4 =
Bit 5 =
Bit 6 =
Bit 7 =
Bit 8 =
Bit 9 =
Bit 10 =
No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8
No. 9
No. 10
AAAAAA
BBBBBB
CCCCCC
DDDDDD
EEEEEE
FFFFFF
GGGGGG
HHHHHH
I I I I I I
J J J J J J
KKKKKK
Bit 20 =
No. 20
QQQQQQ
Menu
Relay Sampling
AAAAAA
BBBBBB
FFFFFF
DDDDDD
CCCCCC
EEEEEE
Roll
UP
Roll
DOWN
Time display
• Relay mode
The occurrence time cannot be displayed.
10
• Relay sampling
The occurrence time can be displayed with the message.
Relay Sampling
Fixed to 15 one-byte characters
06-04 11 : 33 : 15 AAAAAA
06-04 11 : 33 : 15 BBBBBB
06-04 11 : 33 : 15 FFFFFF
06-04 11 : 33 : 15 DDDDDD
06-04 11 : 33 : 15 CCCCCC
06-04 11 : 33 : 15 EEEEEE
month − day
hour : minute : second
10-59
Chapter 10 Sampling
♦ Setting Procedure
[Memory] and [Executing Relays]
For assigning registered messages to bits in the PLC memory, the top memory
address as well as the number of executing relays for determining the number of
bits are set as follows.
• Relay mode
Specify the desired memory address directly for [Memory] in the [Relay]
dialog. As many memory bits as execution relays are assigned
automatically from the specified memory.
Example:
[Memory]:
D100
[Start Message GNo. and No.]: 0 & 0
[Executing Relays]:
40
[Relays per Line]:
1
With the above setting, messages are assigned to D100, D101, and D102.
MSB
LSB
D100 bit No.
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Message No.
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
MSB
LSB
D101 bit No.
15 14 13 12
Message No.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
MSB
D102 bit No.
LSB
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
Message No.
• Relay sampling
The memory address is specified by [Buffer No.].
- When [ Memory Designation] is not checked, the memory addresses
following the sampling control memory are used for the start memory.
Buffer No. 0 - 3
n: Read area
10-60
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
n+6
n+7
n+8
Buffer No. 4 - 7
Read area
Sample control
Sampling data
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
n+6
n+7
n+8
Buffer No. 8 - 11
Read area
Sample control
Sampling data
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
n+6
n+7
n+8
Read area
Sample control
Sampling data
Chapter 10 Sampling
- When [ Memory Designation] is not checked, the specified memory is
used for the start memory.
Memory bits are automatically assigned by the unit of words from the start
memory.
Example:
[Buffering Area Setting] dialog
[ Memory Designation]:
[No. of Words:
[Relay Sampling] dialog
[Buffer No.]:
[Start Message GNo. and No.]:
[Relays per Line]:
D100
3
0
0&0
1
When set up as shown above, bits in D100, D101, and D102 are assigned,
and 48 relays (number of words × 16) are used for execution.
MSB
LSB
D100 bit No.
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Message No.
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
MSB
LSB
D101 bit No.
15 14 13 12 11
Message No.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
MSB
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
LSB
D102 bit No.
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Message No.
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
Setting of processing cycle
• Relay mode
Choose from [Refresh], [High Speed], or [Low Speed] for [Process Cycle] in
the [Detail] tab window of the [Relay] dialog.
10-61
Relay Sampling
• Relay sampling
Specify the desired cycle time for [Sampling Time] in the [Buffering Area]
dialog. When “0” is specified, it is read at every cycle. When the desired
interval is set, read operation is performed at the specified intervals.
10
Chapter 10 Sampling
Alarm Display
Setting Items
New:
Existing:
Alarm display See page 10-62.
Switch See page 10-65.
Be sure to set.
Display area See page 10-65.
Set if necessary.
[Alarm Display] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Specify the division number.
(
For information on the division number, refer to Chapter 2 in the
Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Buffer No.]
Specify the desired buffer number. (
Refer to page 10-9.) The memory
address specifying the data for sampling depends on this buffer number.
[
10-62
Display Only First Cause]
Check this option when displaying first cause errors only.
Chapter 10 Sampling
[
Display Mark to First Cause]
When this is checked, first cause errors are marked on the left with an
asterisk (∗).
[
Display Screen] [Screen No.]
When this is checked, it is possible to set the screen number. The [Screen
No.] is linked in consecutive order beginning with the top message of
[Message GNo.] set in [Buffering Area Setting]. When an error occurs and
you touch the displayed error message, the screen changes to the linked
screen number. This function is useful for making detailed explanations of
error contents.
Set [Screen No. 5].
Press “1st sensor error” directly beneath the
top message.
[Screen No. 6] (the screen following screen
No. 5) is displayed.
1st sensor error
2nd roller error
1st sensor error
2nd sensor error
UP
DW
16:15:43 16:21:12
16:15:51 16:21:54
16:15:52 16:21:55
+
-
RET
[Display Mode]
[Occurrence Time]/[Cancellation Time]/[Time Lag Display]
[Total Frequency of Occurrence Display]/[Total Time of Occurrence
Display]/[Occurrence Time Display]
Time information attached to an error message varies, depending on which
mode is selected. For [Time Lag Display] and [Total Time of Occurrence
Display], the display is in units of time.
[Date Display]
This setting is valid when [Only Date] or [Date and Time] is selected for
[Calendar Condition].
Select the date display format.
[Time Display]
Select the time display format. The selection items will vary slightly
depending on whether [Occurrence Time] and [Cancellation Time] or [Time
Lag Display] and [Total Time of Occurrence Display] are selected in [Display
Mode].
10-63
10
Alarm Display
[Calendar Condition]
[Only Date]/[Only Time]/[Date and Time]
This setting is valid when [Occurrence Time] or [Cancellation Time] is
selected in [Display Mode].
Select default (when the screen is opened) for the date and time display
condition.
Chapter 10 Sampling
[Display Order]
The meaning of “display order” varies depending on what is selected in
[Display Mode].
• Chronological Order
When [Occurrence Time], [Cancellation Time], or [Time Lag Display] is
selected in [Display Mode], older errors are displayed at the top and
recently occurring errors are displayed at the bottom. When [Total
Frequency of Occurrence Display] or [Total Time of Occurrence Display]
is selected in [Display Mode], smaller totals are displayed at the top and
larger totals are displayed at the bottom.
• Newest Order
When [Occurrence Time], [Cancellation Time], or [Time Lag Display] is
selected in [Display Mode], recently occurring errors are displayed at the
top and older errors are displayed at the bottom. When [Total Frequency
of Occurrence Display] or [Total Time of Occurrence Display] is selected
in [Display Mode], larger totals are displayed at the top and smaller totals
are displayed at the bottom.
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window
[Char. Type]
Choose from [Normal], [Bold] or [Shadow].
Normal: One-byte or two-byte characters are used for numerals in the
plain typeface.
Bold:
Bold typeface is used.
Shadow: [Background] is used as shadow of [Foreground].
[
Transparent] [ Italic]
If you want to use transparency or italics, check the corresponding box.
[Foreground]/[Background]
Choose the desired foreground and background colors of numerals. The
[Background] option becomes active when any tile pattern other than pattern
0 (extreme left) is chosen for [Tile].
[Char. Size]
Choose either 1-byte or 2-byte characters for displaying numerals.
Characters can be sized up to 1 × 1.
10-64
Chapter 10 Sampling
Display Area
This is the area where sampling message is displayed.
♦ Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as that in the [Alarm Display] dialog.
[Display in Area]
Choose colors for the sampling display area. The [Background] option
becomes active when any tile pattern other than pattern 0 (extreme left) is
chosen for [Tile].
[
Display Area Transparent]
This is invalid for alarm display. Uncheck this option.
Switches for Alarm Display
♦ Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Set the same division number as that in the [Alarm Display] dialog.
[Function]
Set the switch function. The following switch functions are available with
alarm display.
Function
Contents
Scrolls up by one data element toward the most recent entry. If all data cannot be held
in the graph, one data element at a time scrolls into view.
Roll Down
Scrolls down by one data element toward the oldest entry. If all data cannot be held in
the graph, one data element at a time scrolls into view.
Plus Block
Scrolls up by one page toward the most recent entry.
Minus Block
Scrolls down by one page toward the oldest entry.
Graph Return
Returns to the most recent graph display when it is pressed while flashing. Flashing is
canceled as well as the selection.
Display
Change
This switch is valid when [Date Only] or [Time Only] is selected for [Calendar Condition]
on the alarm display. Pressing this switch changes between the date and time display.
Reset
When the switch is pressed once, it is turned on. Pressing it again within 2 seconds
clears the buffering area. Sampling restarts immediately after clearing. If not pressed
again within 2 seconds, the switch is turned off, and resetting is nullified.
Display Order
Change
Changes over data display order: in order of occurrence (from old to new) or in the
reverse order (from new to old).
DEL
Deletes the selected message from the display area. Only valid when [Occurrence
Time] or [Cancellation Time] is selected for [Display Mode].
10-65
10
Alarm Display
Roll Up
Chapter 10 Sampling
Other Function
It is possible to “memorize” data depending on the significance of the message.
Example:
Line 1 stop bit
OFF
Line 1 maintenance bit OFF
When “Memorize” is selected for the bit for “Line 1
stop” and the bit for “Line maintenance”:
Line 1 stop
Line 1 maintenance
Line 1 stop
Line 1 maintenance
Line 1 stop
15 : 42 : 20
15 : 43 : 59
15 : 44 : 20
15 : 46 : 00
15 : 46 : 30
15 : 43 : 50
15 : 44 : 10
15 : 45 : 50
15 : 46 : 20
15 : 47 : 20
When “Memorize” is not selected for the bit for “Line 1 maintenance,”
activations of this bit are not logged. Consequently, they are not
displayed.
Occurrence time
Line 1 stop
Line 1 stop
Line 1 stop
15 : 42 : 20
15 : 44 : 20
15 : 46 : 30
Reset time
15 : 43 : 50
15 : 45 : 50
15 : 47 : 20
• Setting Position
Select [Item] → [Message Edit] window. Then click [Display Change] from
the [Display] menu.
Whether or not to show numbers or relay numbers as
well to “memorize,” select [No.], [Relay No.] or
[Memorize] from the [Display] menu. (Refer to the
figure on the right.)
10-66
Chapter 10 Sampling
Alarm Display Internal Memory ($s)
The internal memory associated with the alarm display is shown below.
* A macro command [SET_BUFNo] must be executed to output the information
below into system memory.
Address ($s)
Contents
436
Auto Operation Time (L)
437
Auto Operation Time (H)
438
Auto Operation Stop Time (L)
439
Auto Operation Stop Time (H)
440
Program Stop Time (L)
441
Program Stop Time (H)
442
No. of Stops
(8)
443
Rate of Operation (XX.X)
(4)
456
Buffer No. 0 = 11 Normal operation bit
(6)
Buffer No. 0 = 11 Sampling bit
(7)
(1)
(2)
(5)
457
458
(1) Auto Operation Time ($s436, 437)
= normal operation bit set time & sampling bit set time
(2) Auto Operation Stop Time ($s438, 439)
= normal operation bit reset time & sampling bit set time
(3) Total Time of Operation
= (1) + (2)
(4) Rate of Operation ($s443)
= (1)/(3) × 100
* A decimal point value to the first position is entered for $s443.
10
Example: $s443 = The rate of operation for 585 is [58.5].
(5) Program Stop Time ($s440, 441)
= Sampling bit reset time
U3
U2
Sampling monitored
Sampling monitored
Sampling bit (U)
OFF
t1
Normal operation bit (S)
OFF
T1
t2
T2
T3
T4
Error bit
OFF
(1) = T1 + T2 + T3 + T4
(2) = t1 + t2
(3) = 1. + 2.
(4) = 1./3. × 100
(5) = U1 + U2 + U3
It is recommended that you use the [Time Display] item to display these times on the
screen. (
Refer to page 10-70.)
10-67
Alarm Display
U1
Chapter 10 Sampling
(6) Buffer No. 0 = 11 Normal operation bit ($s456)
The normal operation bit status of buffer numbers 0 to 11 is written.
MSB
$s456
LSB
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
S
0
0
0
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
No. 11
No. 10
No. 9
No. 8
No. 7
No. 6
S
S
S
Buffer No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
Normal
operation bit
(7) Buffer Nos. 0 to 11 Sampling bit ($s458)
The sampling bit status of buffer numbers 0 to 11 is written.
MSB
$s458
LSB
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
U
0
0
0
U
U
U
U
U
No. 11
No. 10
No. 9
No. 8
No. 7
No. 6
U
U
U
U
U
U
Buffer No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
Sampling bit
(8) No. of stops ($s442)
The number of stops (normal operation bit OFF) during sampling is written.
Command in Bits for Alarm Display
Bit allocation varies depending on whether [Memory Designation] in the
[Buffering Area Setting] dialog is checked or not.
• [ Memory Designation]
[Read area: D00000] [Buffer No: 0]
[ Memory Designation]
[Write Area: D00050] [Sampling Method: Alarm Function] [No. of Words: 3]
10-68
Chapter 10 Sampling
(Only for buffer numbers that are used)
Read Area n
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
n+6
n+7
D00000
D00001
D00002
D00003
D00004
D00005
D00006
D00007
Sample Control Memory Read Area n + 3 = D00003
Read area
MSB
Sample control
Sampling data
(3 words =
[No. of Words: 3])
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
U
S
R
T
U
S
R
T
U
S
R
T
U
S
R
T
Buffer No. 3
Buffer No. 2
Buffer No. 1
Buffer No. 0
Read Area n + 4 = D00004
n + 5 = D00005
n + 6 = D00006
Sampling Data Memory
Sampling stop
(Example: Lunch break)
D00003-03 : Sampling bit (U)
(1)
Sampling bit ON
1.
(2)
Error bit ON
D00003-02 : Normal operation bit (S)
Sampling monitoring
Sampling monitoring
OFF
ON
4.
2.
&
D00004-12 : Error bit
Normal operation bit OFF
2.
OFF
(3)
D00005-04 : Error bit
All error bits OFF
OFF
D00006-00 : Error bit
3.
Normal bits ON
(4)
OFF
• [Memory Designation]
[Read area: D00000] [Buffer No: 0] [Memory Designation: D00100]
[Write Area: D00050] [Sampling Method: Alarm Function] [No. of Words: 2]
(Only for buffer numbers that are used)
Read Area n
n+1
n+2
n+3
Memory n
Designation
D00000
D00001
D00002
D00003
D00100
D00101
Sample Control Memory Read Area n + 3 = D00003
Read area
MSB
Sample control
Sampling data
(2 words =
[No. of Words: 2])
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
U
S
R
T
U
S
R
T
U
S
R
T
U
S
R
T
Buffer No. 3
Buffer No. 2
Sampling Data Memory
Buffer No. 1
Buffer No. 0
Memory Designation n = D00100
10
n + 1 = D00101
D00003-03 : Sampling bit (U)
Sampling bit ON
1.
(2)
Error bit ON
D00003-02 : Normal operation bit (S)
Sampling monitoring
Sampling monitoring
Alarm Display
(1)
Sampling stop
(Example: Lunch break)
OFF
ON
4.
2.
&
Normal operation bit OFF
D00100-01 : Error bit
2.
OFF
(3)
All error bits OFF
D00100-11 : Error bit
OFF
D00101-03 : Error bit
(4)
Normal bits ON
3.
OFF
The first bit to be set while the normal bit is reset is recognized as the first
cause. However, if a bit is reset once and then set again, it is not considered a
first cause.
10-69
Chapter 10 Sampling
Time Display Items
When using this item, the time information stored in the system memory ($s)
about [Alarm Display] can be displayed easily.
Setting Procedure
Click the [Time Display] icon. The [Time Display] dialog is displayed.
[Division No.]
Specify the division number where the [Time Display] part is placed.
[Display Mode]
Select [Convert seconds into hhh:mm:ss].
For more information on the calendar display, refer to “Chapter 11 Time
Display/Calendar.”
[Memory]
Specify the address where seconds data is stored.
* The address is secured from the top memory in consecutive two-word
increments.
The range of the value specified for [Memory] is from 0 to 3599999 seconds
(= 999:59:59). If this range is exceeded, the time display will not be shown
normally.
[Time Display]
Select [100:30] or [100:30:20].
Example: [Display Mode: Convert seconds into hhh:mm:ss]
[Memory: D100]
[Time Display: 100:30:20]
D100 = 9045 (D101 = 0)
9045 sec. = 150 min. 45 sec. = 2 hrs. 30 min. 45 sec.
Therefore, “002:30:45” is displayed.
Example of Time Display Item
For example, when an error occurs and the $s438 to 439 (= auto operation stop
time) macro is used for numerical display, it is entered as “$s438 = 5320.” When
the [Convert seconds into hhh:mm:ss] is set for the [Time Display] item, “$s438
= 001:28:40” is displayed, making it easy to see that it took “1 hr. 28 min. 40
sec.”
10-70
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
11
Outline
Time Display/Calendar
Outline
The “calendar” part is used to show the “year, month, day, hour, minute, second,
day of the week” on the screen. Depending on the calendar data to be used, the
setting and correction methods vary. Refer to the following table.
SYSTEM
F1
04/1/2002
17:50:30
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
PLC Calendar
V Series Calendar
No Calendar
User Format
• Time display
or
• Calendar
• Time display
or
• Calendar
• Time display
SRAM calendar setting
Calendar memory
setting
Time display format
setting
At power-up
The PLC calendar is
automatically read and
displayed.
The V series calendar is
displayed.
V7:
2002/4/1 9:0:0 is
displayed.
V6:
1998/5/5 9:0:0 is
displayed.
Data in the memory set
for the time display part
is read and displayed.
Operation in
RUN mode
V series CPU clock
V series CPU clock
V series CPU clock
Auto correction
The PLC calendar is
automatically read when
the date is changed.
Correction
• Correct the PLC
calendar and set the
bit in the read area.
or
• Macro: SET_CLND
Backup at
power-off
×
Part
Setting Items
• Time display
or
• Calendar
−
−
• Main Menu screen
or
• Macro: SET_CLND
• PLC calendar:
• V series calendar:
• No calendar:
• User Format:
−
• Set the calendar
memory and set the
bit in the read area.
×
−
−
×
Calendar that the PLC retains in the CPU
Calendar in the V series
This is not available with the V6 series if SRAM cassette
(V6EM/RS, V6EM/RSi) is not used.
V6 series without PLC calendar or SRAM cassette
Calendar in the user-defined format created in the PLC
11-1
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
[Time Display] Part
• Select [Part] → [Time Display].
The time display part cannot show the day of the week. To show the day of
the week, use the calendar part.
[Time Display] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Specify the division number where the [Time Display] part is placed.
(
For information on the division number, refer to Chapter 2 in the
Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Display Mode]
• Calendar display
• Convert seconds into hhh:mm:ss
This section explains the case where [Calendar Display] is selected for [Display Mode].
When [Convert Seconds into hhh:mm:ss] is selected, refer to page 10-70.
[
Use System Calendar]
• When this option is checked ( ):
The part uses data of the PLC calendar, the V series calendar or calendar
memory for calendar display. It is possible to select the display format and
change the character size easily.
• When this option is not checked ( ):
The part uses the calendar in the user-defined format.
The time display format setting is required. (
Refer to page 11-8.)
11-2
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
[Calendar Condition] [Date Display] [Time Display]
Set the display condition for each of these items.
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window
[Char. Type]
• Normal: One-byte or two-byte characters are used for numerals in the
plain typeface.
• Bold:
Bold typeface is used. (This is available only when X :1, Y : 1 is
set for [Enlarge].)
[ Italic]
When showing characters in Italics, check the box.
[Char. Size]
Select [1-Byte] or [2-Byte].
180
R90
1998
L90
1998
8
9
9
1
Normal
1
9
9
8
[Rotate]
When rotating the text, choose an option from [Normal], [L90], [180] and
[R90].
[Direction]
Choose from [RGT], [LFT], [UP], or [DW] to select the direction for
characters.
RGT
LFT
UP
DW
1996
1996
6
9
9
1
1
9
9
6
[Spacing]
The distance between characters can be
specified in the unit of dots (0 to 64).
9 6
Spacing
[Enlarge X/Y]
Specify enlargement factors (1 to 8) for X and Y.
[Foreground Color] / [Background Color]
Select character colors.
Foreground color
1234
Background color
11-3
11
[Time Display] Part
[Memory]
This option should be set when using the calendar in the user-defined
format. Data in the memory is read as described in “[Time Display Format]
Dialog” (page 11-8).
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
[Calendar] Part
Calendar parts consist of areas of “hour, minute, and second,” areas of “year,
month, and day,” and areas of two-level display. Additionally, there is an area for
punctuation marks like “:” and “-.”
Display on the Computer
YY or YYYY
MM
DD
hh
mm
ss
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
SUN
Day of the week
(Displayed as registered)
[Calendar] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. One calendar part is allowed per division.
(
For information on the division number, refer to Chapter 2 in the
Reference Manual (Operation).)
♦ [Year] [Month] [Day] [Hour] [Minute] [Second] Tab Window
The year in Western calendar and the hour (0 to 24) are displayed. Click the tab
and set the following items to show the calendar data on MONITOUCH.
[
11-4
Display]
Check the box.
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
* Available for one-byte characters only
• Bold:
Bold typeface is used. (The enlargement factor must be
“1 : 1.”)
• Shadow: Shadowed typeface is used.
A
[
Foreground color
Background color
Transparent]
Check the box if you want to use transparency for the text background.
Transparent
Transparent
Background color
Foreground color
1996
1996
[
Italic]
Check the box if you want to use italics. Check this box to show characters
in italics.
Example:
No italics
Italics
1996
1996
[Direction]
Choose from [RGT], [LFT], [UP], or [DW] to select the direction for
characters.
RGT
LFT
UP
DW
1996
1996
6
9
9
1
1
9
9
6
[Spacing]
The distance between characters can be
specified in the unit of dots (0 to 64).
9 6
Spacing
L90
180
R90
1998
8
9
9
1
Normal
1998
1
9
9
8
[Rotate]
When rotating the text, choose an option from [Normal], [L90], [180] and
[R90].
[Char. Size]
Select [1-Byte] or [2-Byte].
11-5
11
[Calendar] Part
[Char. Type]
Choose from [Normal], [1/4], [Bold] or [Shadow].
• Normal: One-byte or two-byte characters are used for numerals in the
plain typeface.
• 1/4:
8 × 8 dot characters are used.
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
[Digits]
This option applies to “year” only. Select either two digits or four digits to
indicate the year.
Example: Two digits indicate the year 2002 as “02,” four digits, as “2002.”
[Foreground Color] / [Background Color]
Select character colors.
[
Foreground color
1234
Background color
Zero Suppress]
Choose whether or not to use the zero suppress function. Check this box
when using the zero suppress function. This is not valid when four-digit
display is selected for [Digits] in the [Year] tab window.
Example: To show “1”:
With zero suppress
→ 1
Without zero suppress → 01
[Flush L] / [Flush R]
This setting is valid when [ Zero Suppress] is checked. Choose either
flush-left or flush-right for aligning numbers.
Example: To show “1”:
Flush-left
→
Flush-right
→
1
1
in two-digit display
♦ [Week] Tab Window
Select this tab when showing the day of the week.
[Display]
Check the box. Settings are made just as they are for the [Year], [Month],
[Day], [Hour], [Minute] or [Second] tab window.
♦ [Day-of-Week Message Setting] Tab Window
It is possible to choose how to express the days of the week. This tab window is
available when [Display] is checked on the [Week] tab window.
Check the days of the week to be displayed.
Sunday . . . . No display
Monday . . . . Display
Enter the desired text. A maximum 13 one-byte characters can be used.
11-6
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
11
SRAM/Clock Setting
SRAM/Clock Setting
This option should be set when using the calendar built in the V series.
The calendar data can be retained even when the power is turned off.
• [System Setting] → [SRAM/Clock Setting] dialog
Be sure to set a backup battery. For more information on the battery, refer to
the V7 Hardware Specifications Manual.
Calendar Memory Setting
Make this setting when the PLC is not equipped with the calendar function and
the V6 series is not equipped with the SRAM cassette.
• [System Setting] → [Comm. Parameter] dialog
Set the memory used for setting calendar data for [Calendar].
Memory Allocation
Memory
n
Contents
Year
(BCD 0 to 99)
n+1
Month
(BCD 1 to 12)
n+2
Hour
(BCD 0 to 23)
n+3
Minute(s) (BCD 0 to 59)
n+4
Day
n+5
Second(s) (BCD 0 to 59)
(BCD 1 to 31)
11-7
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
Time Display Format Setting
Calendar data format can be set. This is useful when the calendar in the
user-defined format is retained in the PLC.
Set [Display Mode: Calendar Display] and [
time display part.
Use System Calendar] for the
[Time Display Format] Dialog
• Select [Time Display Format] from the
[System Setting] menu. Check [
Format].
Specify
[Number of Reading] (1 to 6)
Read the data of the specified words by
this item from the top address specified
by [Memory] in the [Time Display] dialog.
[Data End]
Select [WORD] or [BYTE] for data end
when reading data from the PLC.
• Word
[0000]
to
[0005]
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
−−−−−−
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute(s)
Second(s)
(0 to 99)
(1 to 12)
(1 to 31)
(0 to 23)
(0 to 59)
(0 to 59)
• BYTE
[0000]
to
[0002]
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute(s)
Second(s)
11-8
5
4
(0 to 99)
(1 to 12)
(1 to 31)
(0 to 23)
(0 to 59)
(0 to 59)
3
2
1
0
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
11
[Code Type]
• BCD/DEC
Select [BCD] or [DEC] for code type when reading data from the PLC.
Time Display Format Setting
[0000] to [0005]
• Year / month / day / hour / minute / second
Specify the contents of data for each memory.
♦ Example of Time Display Item
Example 1:
[Time Display] dialog
[Time Display Format]
Display Mode: Calendar display
Memory:
D100
Specify Format
Number of Reading: 3
Data End:
WORD
Code Type:
BCD
0000:
Month
0001:
Day
0002:
Hour
run
stop
SYSTEM
F1
F2
D100
D101
D102
1-Feb 10
2
1
10
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Example 2:
[Time Display] dialog
[Time Display Format]
Display Mode: Calendar display
Memory:
D100
Specify Format
Number of Reading:
Data End:
Code Type:
0000:
0001:
2
BYTE
BCD
Month day
Hour minute
run
stop
SYSTEM
F1
F2
D100
D101
0201
1040
1-Feb 10 : 40
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
11-9
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
Correcting Calendar Data
Correct calendar data that has become different from the actual time. The
setting method varies depending on the part selected. Check the table on page
11-1 and correct the data appropriately.
Correcting Calendar Data with Bits in the Read Area
PLC with Calendar Function
1. Correct time-data in the calendar memory of the PLC as described in the
PLC manual.
2. Set bit 11 (calendar setting) (0 → 1) of read area “n” that is set in the [Comm.
Parameter] dialog. The V series reads calendar data from the PLC.
PLC without Calendar Function
1. Write correct time-data in the memory specified for [Calendar] in the [Comm.
Parameter] dialog that is selected from the [System Setting] menu.
2. Set bit 11 (calendar setting) (0 → 1) of read area “n” that is set in the [Comm.
Parameter] dialog. The set calendar data is read.
Example:
Calendar memory: D100 to 106
Read area
D0 to 2
(1) Set data.
D100 = 2002
D101 = 4
D102 = 10
D103 = 12
D104 = 30
D105 = 0
(2) Set bit 11 of D0 of read area.
D100 2002
4
D101
10
D102
12
D103
30
D104
0
D105
04/01/02
09:00:00
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
run
stop
D0
Calendar readout
D100 2002
D101
4
D102
10
D103
12
D104
30
D105
0
POWER
11-10
04/10/02
12:30:00
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
11
Correcting with Macro Command
Using a macro command, time data of the calendar can be corrected.
2. Set from the top memory address in order: year, month, day, hour, minute,
and second.
3. Execute the SET_CLND macro command as the ON macro of a switch, etc.
The calendar data in the memory is written. The set calendar data is read.
Example: To correct the PLC calendar:
(1) Internal memory
$u0000 to 0005 are used.
$u0
$u1
$u2
$u3
$u4
$u5
0
0
0
0
0
0
02/01/00
10:40:00
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
(2) Set data.
$u0000 = 2002
$u0001 = 4
$u0002 = 1
$u0003 = 15
$u0004 = 0
$u0005 = 30
$u0 2002
4
$u1
1
$u2
15
$u3
0
$u4
30
$u5
02/01/00
10:40:00
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
(3) Execute the macro command.
[ON Macro Edit]
SYS (SET_CLND) $u0000
$u0 2002
4
$u1
1
$u2
15
$u3
0
$u4
30
$u5
02/01/00
10:40:00
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Rewrite the PLC calendar.
run
stop
Calendar
February 1, 2002
10 : 40 : 00
April 1, 2002
15 : 00 : 30
Calendar readout
$u0 2002
4
$u1
1
$u2
15
$u3
0
$u4
30
$u5
02/01/02
15:00:30
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
11-11
Correcting Calendar Data
1. Secure six words in the memory addresses that are not used.
Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar
Correcting on the Main Menu Screen
Calendar data can be set on the “SRAM/Clock” screen that can be displayed
from the Main Menu screen. For the setting procedure, refer to Chapter 2 in the
V7 Hardware Specifications Manual.
11-12
Chapter 12 Memo Pad
12
Memo Pad
Outline
Outline
The “memo pad” provides the following functions.
Memo pad function cannot be used with the V6 matrix type.
• Message board function
The message board function is available for leaving daily messages in a
workshop, etc. This is particularly useful for exchanging messages among
operators working in shifts.
• Pen input
Message entry is made simple by writing on the screen directly with the
special pen.
• Up to 8 memo pad areas
Memo pad areas are common to every screen. Up to 8 memo pad areas are
available.
• Saved in the SRAM area
When a memo pad area is secured in the built-in or separate SRAM area,
data is retained even after the power is turned off.
• Also, it is possible to use the CF card to save memo pad data without using
the SRAM area.
Message Board
1-dot
Blue
Red
Pink
2-dot
Green
Delete
Area
Line
Pale
Blue
Yellow
White
Delete
All
Navy
Sky
Blue
Brown
12-1
Chapter 12 Memo Pad
Setting Items
[Memo Pad] dialog See page 12-2.
Switch See page 12-3.
Display area See page 12-2.
Be sure to set.
Set if necessary.
[Memo Pad] Dialog
This is a dialog that must be set when using the memo pad function.
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. Set a division number where no mode has
been registered. (
For information on the division number, refer to
Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Only one memo pad function can be used on one screen.
Display Area Parts
Set the memo pad area.
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. Set the same division number as the division
number specified in the [Memo Pad] dialog. (
For information on the
division number, refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[In-area Prop.]
Specify the color in the area.
[
12-2
Display Area Transparent]
This is valid in graphic-relay mode. Do not check the box.
Chapter 12 Memo Pad
Switches for Memo Pad Function
Notes on Switch Setting
12
[Function]
Set the switch function. The following switch functions are available with the
memo pad function.
Pen Color
V7: 32k colors
V6: 128 colors
Selects the pen color.
Pen Size
(1-dot / 2-dot)
Selects the pen thickness.
Line
Selects the pen state. This is an alternate switch.
ON: Straight line
OFF: Free
Delete Area
Deletes the selected memo pad area. This is an alternate switch.
ON: Deletes the area selected on the display area.
OFF: Delete disabled
Delete All
Deletes data from the current memo pad area.
Plus Block
Brings up the next memo pad area (up to 8).
Minus Block
Brings up the previous memo pad area (up to 8).
Block Call
Brings up the memo pad area of the specified number.
12-3
Switches for Memo Pad Function
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. Specify the same division number as the one
set in the [Memo Pad] dialog. (
For information on the division number,
refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Chapter 12 Memo Pad
Memo Pad Usage
Suppose that the following screen has been created.
1-dot
Blue
2-dot
Red
Delete
Area
Line
Pink
Green
Sky
Blue
Delete
All
Yellow
1. When the screen is opened first, the following settings are chosen as default.
Pen size: 1-dot
Pen color: White
Pen state: Free
To change the setting, press the corresponding switch and set the desired
option.
2. Write the desired message within the memo pad area.
Use the special pen for writing messages.
3. When deleting the written message, press the [Delete All] switch.
4. When deleting a part of the written message, press the [Delete Area] switch
(ON), and enclose the desired data. The enclosed data is deleted. On
completion, press the [Delete Area] switch to turn it off.
5. When writing a straight line, press the [Line] switch to turn it on. Moving the
pen on the memo pad area draws a straight line. To cancel the function to
draw straight lines, press the switch again to turn it off.
6. Pressing the [+] switch brings up a new memo pad area. (Up to 8)
Pressing the [−] switch brings up the previous memo pad area.
12-4
Chapter 12 Memo Pad
Memo Pad Data Storage Area
Memo pad area can be saved in the built-in RAM, SRAM area, and CF card.
Data saved in the RAM is cleared when MONITOUCH is turned off or when the
Main Menu screen is displayed. To retain data even when the power is turned
off, use the SRAM area or CF card.
SRAM*1
RAM
Built-in
Cassette
CF card
Model
All models
V7
V609E
V7EM-S, V6EM/RS,
V6EM/RSi
V7, V608CH
Capacity
(words)
64k
3,952
32,624
262,000
No limitation*2
*1 This is the maximum capacity available provided that the entire SRAM area is used
for the memo pad function. For the procedure of dividing the SRAM area, etc., refer
to “Chapter 1 System Setting.”
*2 It depends on the free capacity in the CF card.
Saving in RAM
No setting is required.
Saving in a CF Card
No setting is required. Insert the CF card into MONITOUCH. However, if the
memo pad area is set in the [SRAM/Clock Setting] dialog, data is stored in the
SRAM area.
Saving in SRAM
To save data in the SRAM area, it is necessary to make the setting in the
[SRAM/Clock Setting] dialog.
♦ [SRAM/Clock Setting] Dialog
[SRAM] (available with V7 only)
When using the built-in SRAM area,
select [Built-in]; when using a SRAM
cassette, select [Cassette].
[Store Area for Memo Pad]
Set the storage area size for the memo
pad function in the SRAM area. Refer
to the list on the previous page, and
set the appropriate size.
For more information on other setting
items, refer to “Chapter 1 System Setting.”
12-5
Memo Pad Data Storage Area
Memo Pad Storage Area Size
12
Chapter 12 Memo Pad
Timing in Saving Data
The memo pad data is saved in the memo pad area at the following timing.
• When the page is changed with the [Function: Plus Block/Minus Block]
switch
• When the screen is changed
• When the Main Menu is displayed (only for SRAM)
If data cannot be saved due to insufficient memory capacity, the memo pad
display area flashes with beeps. Reduce the memo data. The remaining
capacity of the memo pad area is stored in system memory addresses $s108
and 109.
Notes on SRAM Use
• If the power is shut down before data is saved, the data is deleted.
• If the power is shut down while data is being saved, the entire data may be
lost. The data save status is stored in system memory address $s720.
System Memory ($s)
Memo pad data is stored in system memory $s.
Address ($s)
106
107
Contents
Memory Type
Memo pad No. (0 to 7)
15
14 13
12
11
10
09
08 07
06 05 04
03
02 01
00
Page 0
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
Page 4
Page 5
0: Data not registered
1: Data registered
108
109
12-6
Page 6
Page 7
Remaining area for memo pad data (unit: bytes)
720
SRAM area save result
0: Normal save
1: Error in data. The previous data is cleared.
727
0: Save possible
1: Save impossible due to insufficient capacity
←V
Data is
written from
the V series.
Chapter 13 Macro
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Macro
Notes on Macro Commands
13
• The macro function is operated in the decimal system with signs.
• A maximum of executable lines in one macro is 160,000.
If the same macro command is executed repeatedly using a loop macro
command, etc. exceeding this number, the macro is forcibly terminated.
• When addresses in the PLC memory are specified for the MOV or BMOV
command, the MONITOUCH accesses the PLC memory every time it is
required; the processing speed may become slower. To solve this problem,
consider the following recommendation.
Example:
Line No. 0
Line No. 1
Line No. 2
Line No. 3
Line No. 4
D200 = $u200 (W)
D201 = $u201 (W)
D202 = $u202 (W)
D203 = $u203 (W)
D204 = $u204 (W)
In the above example, the MONITOUCH goes and writes data to D200 as
commanded in line No. 0, then goes and writes data to D201 as commanded
in line No. 1, and so on. Communications must frequently occur, which will
result in a prolonged processing time. To shorten the communications time,
give a BMOV command as shown below. The contents are the same as the
above macro commands with only one write operation.
Line No. 0
D200 = $u200 C: 5 (BMOV)
The processing speed is increased and the number of macro commands is
reduced. As described above, macro commands can be simplified when you
contrive to make these commands efficient to use.
13-1
Notes on Macro Commands
• Up to 1,024 lines (commands) can be set for one macro.
Chapter 13 Macro
Macro Set-up
The “macro” command is a function for composing programs with commands
unique to the V series. The macro commands are available with the following
parts.
• Screen
1) OPEN macro:
2) CLOSE macro:
3) CYCLE macro:
Executed once when the screen is opened.
Executed once when the screen is closed.
Executed repeatedly when the screen is open.
• Multi-overlap
1) OPEN macro:
2) CLOSE macro:
Executed once when the multi-overlap is opened.
Executed once when the multi-overlap is closed.
* OPEN/CLOSE macros cannot be used for call-overlap.
• Switch
1) ON macro:
2) OFF macro:
Executed once when the switch is pressed.
Executed once when the switch is released.
• Function Switch
1) ON macro:
2) OFF macro:
Executed once when the function switch is pressed.
Executed once when the function switch is released.
• Initial Macro
The initial macro that is created in “Macro Block” edit is executed once
before the V series starts communications with the PLC. (
Refer to
page 13-32.)
• Global Macro
The global macro that is created in “Macro Block” edit is executed when the
bit in the read area changes from 0 → 1 (leading edge). (
Refer to page
13-33.)
• Event Timer Macro
The event timer macro is executed regardless of the displayed screen, and
has the timer setting for specifying the interval of executing the macro
command. (
Refer to page 13-34.)
• Interval Timer
The interval timer is used to execute the macro command that is created on
the macro block edit window at intervals of the set time when the screen
equipped with the interval timer is displayed. (
Refer to page 13-35.)
• Macro Mode
Macro commands can be executed according to the status in the specified
memory addresses when the screen equipped with macro mode is
displayed. (
Refer to page 13-42.)
1) ON macro: Executed when the bit in the specified memory address
changes from 0 → 1 (leading edge).
2) OFF macro: Executed when the bit in the specified memory address
changes from 1 → 0 (falling edge).
13-2
Chapter 13 Macro
Macro Commands
Macro Command List
• Arithmetic Operations (Page 13-6)
Command Name
Contents
ADD
Addition
F0 = F1 + F2
SUB
Subtraction
F0 = F1 − F2
Multiplication
F0 = F1 × F2
DIV
Division
F0 = F1/F2
MOD
The remainder
F0 = F1%F2
Macro Commands
MUL
13
• Logical Operations (Page 13-7)
Command Name
Contents
AND
Logical product
F0 = F1 & F2
OR
Logical add
F0 = F1 | F2
XOR
Exclusive OR
F0 = F1 ^ F2
SHL
Shift left
F0 = F1 << F2
SHR
Shift right
F0 = F1 >> F2
• Statistic Operations (Page 13-8)
Command Name
Contents
MAX
Maximum
F0 = MAX (F1 C:F2)
MIN
Minimum
F0 = MIN (F1 C:F2)
AVG
Average
F0 = AVG (F1 C:F2)
SUM
Sum
F0 = SUM (F1 C:F2)
• Bit Operations (Page 13-9)
Command Name
Contents
BSET
BIT ON
F0 (ON)
BCLR
BIT OFF
F0 (OFF)
BINV
Bit inversion
F0 (INV)
• Conversion (Page 13-10)
Command Name
Contents
BCD
BCD convert
F0 = F1 BCD
BIN
BIN convert
F0 = F1 BIN
CWD
1 → 2 words
F0 = F1 D <- W
CVP
DEC → PLC convert
F0 = F1 PLC <-
CVB
PLC → DEC convert
F0 = F1 <- PLC
SWAP
MSB, LSB convert
F0 C:F1
CHR
Strings → CODE convert
F0 = “
CVFD
Real number → DEC convert
F0(D) <- F1(F) F2
CVDF
DEC → real number convert
F0(F) <- F1(D) F2
13-3
Chapter 13 Macro
• Transmit (Page 13-12)
Command Name
Contents
MOV
Transmit
F0 = F1
BMOV
Block transmit
F0 = F1 C:F2 (BMOV)
FILL
Transmit all
F0 = F1 C:F2 (FILL)
• Comparison (Page 13-13)
Command Name
Contents
CMP
Compare
IF(F0 = F1) F2
TST
Logical product comparison
IFZ(F0 & F1) F2
• FROM Area Backup (Page 13-15)
Command Name
Contents
FROM_RD
Reading data from the
FP-ROM
FROM_RD F0 F1
FROM_WR
Writing data to the FP-ROM
FROM_WR F0 F1
• Macro Operations (Page 13-13)
Command Name
Contents
CALL
Macro block call
CALL F0
JMP
Jump
JMP F0
LABEL
Label
LB F0
FOR
NEXT
Loop between FOR and
NEXT
FOR F0: NEXT
RET
Finish macro processing
RET
SWRET
Finish macro processing
SWRET
SWRET
WAIT
V4 series
• Printer (Page 13-16)
Command Name
Contents
MR_OUT
CR400 call processing
MR_REG
MR400 register processing
OUT_PR
Printer command processing
• Video
Command Name
Contents
VIDEO
Refer to Chapter 2.
VIDEO2
Refer to Chapter 18 (Not available with V6).
• Temperature Control Network (Refer to the Temperature Control Network
Manual.)
Command Name
13-4
Contents
TEMP_READ
Read the temperature controller data
TEMP_WRITE
Write to the temperature controller data
TEMP_CTL
Control of the temperature controller
Chapter 13 Macro
• Ethernet (Refer to the Hardware Specifications Manual or the Specification
for Communication Unit “Ethernet.”)
Command Name
Contents
SEND
Data transfer between networks
EREAD
Data reading between networks
EWRITE
Data writing between networks
• CF Card (Refer to “Chapter 23 CF Card” or the V608CH Specifications
Manual.)
Command Name
13
Contents
Hard copy
LD_RECIPESEL
Recipe data write
SMPL_BAK
Recipe data write (partially)
SMPL_CSV
Sampling file backup
SMPL_SAVE
CSV convert of sampling file
SV_RECIPE
Sampling data save
LD_RECIPE
CSV file creation
LD_RECIPESEL
Hard copy
Macro Commands
LD_RECIPE
• Others (Page 13-17)
Command Name
Contents
;
Comment
BRIGHT
Brightness
(Not available with V6)
PLC_ULR
Read from FA-M3
SYS
System call
TREND REFRESH
Variable
BRIGHT F0
13-5
Chapter 13 Macro
Arithmetic Operations
• ADD
The result of F1 plus F2 is moved to F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
ADD: Addition
F0 = F1 + F2
• SUB
The result of F1 minus F2 is moved to F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
F0
F1
F2
SUB: Subtraction
F0 = F1 − F2
• MUL
The result of F1 multiplied by F2 is moved to F0 (with plus or minus sign).
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
MUL: Multiplication
F0 = F1 × F2
• DIV
The result of F1 divided by F2 is moved to F0 (with plus or minus sign).
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
DIV: Division
F0 = F1 / F2
• MOD
The remainder of F1 divided by F2 is moved to F0 (with plus or minus sign).
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
F0
F1
F2
MOD: Remainder
13-6
F0 = F1 % F2
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
Chapter 13 Macro
Logical Operations
• AND
The result of F1 ANDed with F2 (16- or 32-bit operation) is moved to F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
13
F0 = F1 & F2
• OR
The result of F1 ORed with F2 (16- or 32-bit operation) is moved to F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
F0 = F1  F2
OR: Logical add
• XOR
The result of F1 XORed with F2 (16- or 32-bit operation) is moved to F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
XOR: Exclusive logical add
F0 = F1 ^ F2
• SHL
Result of F1 logical-shifted to the left (by the number specified in F2) is
moved to F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
SHL: Shift left
F0 = F1 « F2
• SHR
Result of F1 logical-shifted to the right (by the number specified in F2) is
moved to F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
SHR: Shift right
F0 = F1 » F2
13-7
Macro Commands
AND: Logical product
Chapter 13 Macro
Statistic Operations
• MAX
The greater number in the words from F1 and F2 is moved to F0. If F2 is a
memory address, the value in the memory address becomes the word count.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
MAX: Maximum F0 = MAX (F1 C : F2)
C: 512 words maximum
• MIN
The smallest number in words from F1 and F2 is moved to F0. If F2 is a
memory address, the value in the memory address becomes the word count.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
MIN: Minimum
F0 = MIN (F1 C : F2)
C: 512 words maximum
• AVG
The average in words from F1 and F2 is moved to F0. If F2 is a memory
address, the value in the memory address becomes the word count.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
AVG: Average
F0 = AVG (F1 C : F2)
C: 512 words maximum
• SUM
The sum in words from F1 and F2 is moved to F0. If F2 is a memory
address, the value in the memory address becomes the word count.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
SUM: Sum
13-8
F0 = SUM (F1 C : F2)
C: 512 words maximum
Chapter 13 Macro
Bit Operations
When the devices with non-bit-writable memory is used, the following operations
are employed:
1. One word specified by the bit is read.
2. The word that is read turns the bit ON, OFF, or inverts it, and then the word is
ORed.
13
3. The ORed word is written on the PLC.
• BSET
The memory bit located in F0 is set (ON).
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
Indirect
W Word
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
BSET: BIT SET
F0(ON)
• BCLR
The memory bit located in F0 is reset (OFF).
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
F0
F1
F2
BCLR: BIT reset
F0(OFF)
• BINV
The memory bit located in F0 is inverted.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
F0
F1
F2
BINV: BIT invert
F0(INV)
13-9
Macro Commands
Even if the bit in the same word from the sequence program is changed after
step 1 is performed, step 3 occurs and the word is written as it was in step 1.
Chapter 13 Macro
Conversion
• BCD
F1 binary data converted to BCD is moved to F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
BCD: BCD convert
F0 = F1 BCD
• BIN
F1 BCD data converted to binary data is moved to F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
F0
F1
F2
BIN: BIN convert
F0 = F1 BIN
• CWD
When the sign of F1 data is expanded, the double-word result is placed in
F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
CWD: 1 → 2 words convert
F0 = F1 D<-W
• CVP
F1 PLC-format data converted to binary data is placed in F0. This is
applicable to the PLCs of Yaskawa or Fuji.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
CVP: PLC convert
F0 = F1 PLC<-
• CVB
F1 binary data converted to the PLC-format data is placed in F0. This is
applicable to the PLCs of Yaskawa or Fuji.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
F0
F1
F2
CVB: BIN convert
13-10
F0 = F1 <-PLC
W Word
Chapter 13 Macro
• SWAP
The high- and low-order words are swapped and are placed in F0. F1
designates the number of words.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
13
SWP: LSB ← → MSB
F0 = C:F1(SWAP)
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
CHR: Strings → CODE convert
F0 = ‘string’
• CVFD
A real number (floating decimal point) is converted into the decimal number
(DEC).
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
CVFD: Real number → DEC convert
F2: Conversion scale (−32 to +32)
F0(D) <- F1(F) F2
• CVDF
A decimal number (DEC) is converted into the real number.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
CVDF: DEC → real number convert
F2: Conversion scale (−32 to +32)
F0(F) <- F1(D) F2
* Conversion scale
When “0.0001234567” is converted into a decimal number with F2 = +10, the
result is “1234567.” Specify the exponent of the value to be converted.
13-11
Macro Commands
• CHR
The characters located between the [‘ ’] are converted with the shift JIS code
and moved to F0.
Available Devices
Chapter 13 Macro
Transmit
• MOV
F1 is moved to F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
MOV: Transmit
F0 = F1
• BMOV
Words (4096 maximum) from F1 specified in F2 are transmitted in a block to
F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0*
F1*
F2
BMOV: Block transmit
F1 + 0
F1 + 1
F1 + 2
F2 word
Block transmit
F1 + F2
F0 = F1 C: F2(BMOV)
F0 + 0
F0 + 1
F0 + 2
* It is not possible to use the PLC
memory at both F0 and F1 at
the same time. Set the internal
memory for F0 or F1.
F0 + F2
• FILL
Words from F1 are moved to F0. F2 designates the number of words (4096
maximum).
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
F0
F1
F2
FILL: Transmit all
F2 word
Transmit all
F1
123
13-12
F0 = F1 C: F2(FILL)
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
F0 + 1
F0 + 2
F0 + 3
F0 + F2
Indirect
W Word
Chapter 13 Macro
Comparison
• CMP
If the comparison result of F0 and F1 satisfies the specified condition (with
signs), a jump to F2 label takes place.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
CWP: Compare
- Conditions
==
!=
<
>
<=
>=
IF(F0 (condition) F1)LBF2
Equal
Different
Less than
Greater than
Less than or equal to
Greater than or equal to
• TST
If the result of F0 ANDed with F1 is [0], a jump to F2 label takes place.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
TST: 0 Compare
- Conditions
IFZ: 0
IFZ: Other than 0
IFZ(F0 & F1)LBF2
Macro Operations
• CALL
The macro block specified in F0 is executed.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
F0
F1
F2
CALL: Macro block number designation
13
Macro Commands
F0
F1
F2
CALL F0
13-13
Chapter 13 Macro
• JMP
Unconditional jump to F0 label takes place.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
JMP: Unconditional jump
JMP LBF0
• LABEL (0 to 127)
The destination for [CMP], [TST] and [JMP] is specified.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
LABEL: Label No.
LABEL F0
• FOR/NEXT
Loop is conducted between FOR and NEXT by the number of times
(maximum 65,535) set in F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
FOR: FOR to NEXT
FOR F0
FOR 10
$u0000 = $u0000+1
FOR $u0100
$u0001 = $u0001 − 1
Loops the number of times
specified in memory
address $u0100
10 loops
NEXT
$u0002 = $u0000 + $u0001
NEXT
• RET
Macro processing is terminated. RET terminates the macro block which was
triggered by the CALL command, and returns to the original sequence.
• SWRET
SWRET is used in the switch ON macro, and it acts the same as RET. In
switch ON macro, the switch function is executed following execution of ON
macro. However, when a SWRET command is included in the ON macro,
macro processing is interrupted. After a switch function is executed, then the
macro after the SWRET command is executed.
13-14
Chapter 13 Macro
FROM
The remaining area of FP-ROM (flash memory) for screen data storage can be
sued as a data backup area of the PLC memory, internal memory or memory
card. A maximum of 16k words can be used as a data backup area.
* In this case, the available capacity for screen data is reduced by 128 kbytes.
• FROM_WR
Words (16k words maximum) from F0 specified in F1 are transmitted to
FP-ROM.
Available Devices
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
FROM_WR: Writing to FP-ROM
FROM_WR F0 F1
• FROM_RD
Words (16k words maximum) from FP-ROM specified in F1 are transmitted
to F0.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
FROM_RD: Reading from FP-ROM
FROM_RD F0 F1
1. Each FP-ROM allows 100,000 write operations.
(Each time the FROM_WR command is executed, it is counted as one
regardless of how many words are included.) Consequently, reduce the
number of write operations, such as reading backup data at power-up and
writing data for backup before turning the power off.
2. Do not execute the FROM_WR or FROM_RD command in each cycle
using CYCLE macro.
3. Writing to FP-ROM takes three to five seconds.
♦ Setting Position
Select [System Setting] → [Unit Setting] → [Environment Setting]. Check [
Use Internal Flash ROM as Back-up Area].
13-15
Macro Commands
Internal
Memory
13
Chapter 13 Macro
Printer
The following macro commands are used to send the command for the printer
connected to the V series.
• MR_OUT/MR_REG
This command can be used when Sato’s barcode printer MR-400 is
connected. For information on how to use this command, refer to “Chapter
15 Print.”
• OUT_PR
Data in F1 bytes are sent from the F0 memory to the printer.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
OUT_PR: Command output to printer
OUT_PR F0 F1
Example: Paper feed and auto cut are performed on the CBM (293)
printer.
CBM manual: Command table
Print and pitch paper feed: 1BH4AHn (paper feed n/360 in.)
Auto cutter drive partial cut: 1BH6DH
Code to be sent to the printer
1BH 4AH 96H 1BH 6DH
n=150
Macro
$u100=4A1BH
$u101=1B96H
Set in the little endian system.
$u102=006DH
OUT_PR $u100 5
* Little endian
When two or more byte data is transferred, it is divided into 1-byte unit. This divided
Available command varies depending on the printer model. The V series does
not check the validity of the command before transmitting the command.
Refer to the instruction manual of the printer and set the command correctly.
13-16
Chapter 13 Macro
Others
♦ Comment
• ( ; )Comment
This is treated as a comment line. No command processing is required.
♦ Brightness Adjustment
13
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
BRIGHT F0
F0
Maximum brightness
127:
Minimum brightness
~
0:
* When a low brightness is set, the lifetime of the backlight may be shortened.
Also, the backlight may not be turned on by turning the MONITOUCH off and
back it on with a low brightness.
♦ Trend Sampling
• TREND REFRESH
This macro command is valid only for trend sampling. When setting [Upper
Line Display] or [Lower Line Display] in a trend sampling, and specifying
[PLC Memory] as [Graph Max. Value] or [Graph Min. Value], it is necessary
to redraw the trend sampling display every time the value of [PLC Memory]
changes. This command makes a trend sampling redrawn to be displayed at
the newest value of [PLC Memory].
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
TREND REFRESH F0: F1
F0
Layer (0 to 3)
F1
Division No. (0 to 255)
13-17
Macro Commands
• BRIGHT
Brightness can be adjusted in 128 steps for TFT display of the V7 series
(except V708S/V708iS).
Available Devices
Chapter 13 Macro
♦ Read from User Log FA-M3
• PLC_ULR
This command is available only when using YOKOGAWA’s PLC, FA-M3. It
can read “User Log” in PLC side.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
F1
F2
PLC_ULR F0 F1
F0
F1
Definition of memory information 2 words
Storage target memory
When reading the number of registration of user log: 2 words
When reading user log: 9 words
F0 memory (→ V)
F0 + 0
F0 + 1
Higher: Port number (1 to 31)
Required only when [1:n] is selected for [Connection]
Lower: CPU No. −1 (0 to 3)
Example: Set “0” for CPU No. 1.
Define the data to read.
[−1]: Read the number of registrations in the user log.
[0]: Read the newest user log.
[1 to 63]: Read the “n”-th user log.
F1 memory (←V)
• When reading the number of registration of user log
F1 + 0
Number of registrations (DEC) *1
*1 The above value is also stored in special register Z105.
• When reading user log
F1 + 0
F1 + 1
F1 + 2
F1 + 3
F1 + 4
F1 + 5
F1 + 6
F1 + 7
F1 + 8
Header *2
[0]: Normal [−1] (HEX FFFF): Error
Year
(ASCII)
Month
(ASCII)
Day
(ASCII)
Hour
(ASCII)
Minute
(ASCII)
Second
(ASCII)
Main code
(DEC)
Sub-code
(DEC)
*2 When the data does not
exist in the user log
specified by [F0 + 1] or
communication has some
error, the value [−1] is
stored.
Example: In the case of 99/10/19 11:20:34 +1 +23, the format is shown
below.
F1 + 0
F1 + 1
F1 + 2
F1 + 3
F1 + 4
F1 + 5
F1 + 6
F1 + 7
F1 + 8
13-18
0
HEX 3939 (=99)
HEX 3031 (=10)
HEX 3931 (=19)
HEX 3131 (=11)
HEX 3032 (=20)
HEX 3433 (=34)
DEC 1
DEC 23
Chapter 13 Macro
♦ System Call
Expression
Action
F0 F1
According to information taken from the MONITOUCH, an action
specified in F0 is requested to the MONITOUCH through the
internal memory specified in F1.
Clicking the F0 box brings up the following system call list.
Contents
*1 *2
Screen number setting
*1
Multi-overlap setting
*1
Overlap On/Off
*1 *2
Overlap position setting
Get the message from the message group
Get the X and Y coordinates on the circumference
Buzzer ON/OFF
Get the system time
Start the timer
Check the time of the timer
Get the calendar
Calendar setting
Get buffer information
Get sampled data
Get the cursor point of sampling
Get alarm function information
Display/not display the data display (=numerical data)
Change the property of the data display (=numerical data)
Print out the data sheet
For analog RGB input type
For analog RGB input type
Backlight control
Re-connect
Contrast adjustment (STN display)
Change language
Get FL-Net information
Deadman switch use/non-use (V608CH)
• Interrupt via serial port
• Network selection of A link + Net10 communication
Macro Commands
System Call
SET_SCRN
SET_MOVLP
OVLP_SHOW
OVLP_POS
GET_MSG
GET XY
SET_BZ
GET TIME
STA_TIME
CHK_TIME
GET_CLND
SET_CLND
SET_BUFNO
GET_SMPL
GET_SCUR
GET_BUF
DSP_DATA
CHG_DATA
STA_LIST
RGB_CHG
SET_RGB
SET_BKLT
RESTART
CONTRAST
CHG_LANG
GET_STATUS_FL
SET_DSW
OUT_ENQ
13
*1 • These macros cannot be executed as initial macro or screen OPEN/CLOSE macro.
• Moreover, these system calls are not immediately executed, but rather, are
executed when the entire macro has been completed.
*2 • This is not available with screen OPEN macro.
• SET_SCRN
Set the screen number that will be displayed.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(SET_SCRN)F1
F1 + 0
Screen number designation
Screen number to be displayed
13-19
Chapter 13 Macro
• SET_MOVLP
Display a multi-overlap. (Multi-overlap set-up is limited to an internal
command.) When making the displayed multi-overlap off by a macro
command, use the next item, [OVLP_SHOW].
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(SET_MOVLP)F1
F1 + 0
F1 + 1
F1 + 2
F1 + 3
Multi-overlap setting
Overlap number to be displayed
Multi-overlap number
X coordinate for overlap placement
Y coordinate for overlap placement
• OVLP_SHOW
This command is available in both a normal overlap and a call overlap.
(Also, only the OFF command is available for a multi-overlap specified to an
internal command.) When executing the ON/OFF command for the overlap,
the overlap is turned ON/OFF.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(SET_MOVLP)F1
F1 + 0
F1 + 1
Overlap ON/OFF
Overlap number to be displayed
0:OFF 1:ON
• OVLP_POS
This command is available for a normal overlap, a call overlap and a
multi-overlap specified to an internal command. Set the overlap position.
Select [System Setting] → [Unit Setting] → [Overlap]. The coordinates can
be selected in units of lines, columns, or dots. (
For information on
columns and lines, refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
F1
(OVLP_POS)F1
13-20
Overlap position change
F1 + 0
Overlap number to be moved
F1 + 1
Destination coordinate X
F1 + 2
Destination coordinate Y
Indirect
W Word
Chapter 13 Macro
• GET_MSG
Use shift JIS code to store a message from the message group at the top of
F1+1 memory.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Memory
Card
Constant
Indirect
W Word
13
F1
Message → Internal memory
(GET_MSG)F1
Message number to be loaded
F1 + 1
Target memory number
• GET_XY
Calculate X/Y coordinates from radius, angle and center coordinates.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Memory
Card
Constant
Indirect
W Word
F1
(GET_XY)F1
XY coordinates on the circumference (absolute)
F1 + 0
Radius
F1 + 1
Angle (0.1-degrees)
F1 + 2
Center coordinate X
F1 + 3
Center coordinate Y
F1 + 4
Result of calculation,
coordinate X (←V)
F1 + 5
Result of calculation,
coordinate Y (←V)
Result of calculation
Coordinates XY
Center coordinate
Angle
0
Radius
• SET_BZ
This macro command controls the buzzer of the V series. The buzzer setting
at the software is available only on the initial connection.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Memory
Card
Constant
Indirect
W Word
F1
(SET_BZ)F1
Buzzer control
F1 + 0
Set action
0: Normal
1: Error
2: Change buzzer type
F1 + 1
0: Standard
1: Short
2: None
*
* This area is valid only when [F1 + 0] is “2.”
13-21
Macro Commands
F1 + 0
Chapter 13 Macro
• GET_TIME
This command obtains timer value which progresses +1 by 10 msec. after
turning on the V series. The timer value is data in double-word without signs.
The time in the double-word format is located in F1.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(GET_TIME)F1
F1 + 0
F1 + 1
Get 10 msec system time
Count in double-word without signs
• STA_TIME/CHK_TIME
STA_TIME starts the timer. The 10 msec-interval system clock is used for
the timer. Time-up is checked using CHK_TIME. Time base is in the
10-msec. increments.
Timers can be set with ease using the interval timer (page 13-35).
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(STA_TIME/CHK_TIME)F1
F1 + 0
Time-up flag (←V)
F1 + 1
Timer type
F1 + 2
Time-up time
F1 + 3
Timer start time (←V)
Timer setting
Execute STA_TIME after setting the timer type and the time-up time. The
system takes the present system time as the “timer start time” and clears the
time-up flag to “0.” CHK_TIME checks for time-up, referring to the timer start
time and the time-up time. When the time-up occurs, “1” is located in the
time-up flag. Executing CHK_TIME makes it possible for the system to
recognize that a time-up has occurred.
In the case of [Timer Type: 1], the “timer start time” is updated each time a
time-up occurs.
Updated timer start time = previous timer start time + time-up time
Through the above processing, the timer is automatically managed, thus it
works as a precise interval timer.
In the case of [Timer type: 0], it is necessary to execute STA_TIME to clear
the timer start time to “0.”
* Timer type 1
When CHK_TIME detects a time-up, “1” will be set, and “timer startg time”
will be updated. When no time-up is detected, “0” will be set.
13-22
Chapter 13 Macro
Example: Create pluses at 500-msec intervals.
Increment $u00210 at 500-msec intervals.
OPEN macro
$u00201 = 1 (W)
$u00202 = 50 (W)
SYS (STA_TIME)
CYCLE macro SYS (CHK_TIME)
IF ($u00200) ! = 0)
RET
;
LB00
$u00210=$u210+1
500 msec
$u00200
$u00200
LB00
13
Macro Commands
500 msec
Set the timer type.
time-up time 500 msec
500 msec
• GET_CLND
Get the calendar data.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(GET_CLND)F1
Get calendar data
F1 + 0
Year (4 digits)
F1 + 1
Month
F1 + 2
Day
F1 + 3
Hour
F1 + 4
Minute
F1 + 5
Second
F1 + 6
Day of the week (valid with V4, invalid with V6)
• SET_CLND
Set eight words in F1 for the use of system calendar. When the PLC with
calendar function is connected, the PLC calendar can also be set.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(SET_CLND)F1
Set calendar data
F1 + 0
Year (4 digits or 2 digits, V4 fixed to 4 digits)
F1 + 1
Month
F1 + 2
Day
F1 + 3
Hour
F1 + 4
Minute
F1 + 5
Second
F1 + 6
Day of the week (invalid due to auto calculation in the V series)
F1 + 7
PLC port number (for 1: n connection)
13-23
Chapter 13 Macro
• SET_BUFNO
Average, maximum, minimum, and total of sampling buffers are stored in
system memory addresses $s180 to 434. (
For information on the
system memory, refer to “Appendix 1 Internal Memory.”) Set the buffer
number at system memory address $s177 before executing the command.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(SET_BUFNo)F1
F1 + 0
Buffer number setting
Buffer No. 0 to 11
• GET_SMPL
This command stores 1 sampling data in the user memory.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(GET_SMPL)F1
F1 + 0
F1 + 1
F1 + 2
Get sampling data
Sample buffer number
Sampling number
Top memory number “n” of storage target*
* Top memory number “n” of storage target
The format of the stored data varies depending on the sampling method.
- [Bit Synchronize] [Constant Sample] [Temp. CTRL/PLC2Way]
Time data
Buffer data of the
specified sampling
number
Time data 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n+0
Time data 0
n+1
n+2
Time data 1
Sampling data
n+m
Sampling data
Month: 1 to 12
Day: 1 to 31
Hour: 0 to 23
Time data 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Minute & second (unit: seconds)
[Time data 1] ÷ [60] = [A] Remainder [B]
[A]: Minute
[B]: Second
- [Bit Sample]
n+0
n+1
n+2
Time data 0
Time data 1
Sample bit number
Same as those of [Bit Synchronize]
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0: OFF
1: ON
Sample bit number
- [Relay Sample] (possible to set the ON information only)
n+0
n+1
n+2
Time data 0
Time data 1
Sample relay number
Same as those of [Bit Synchronize]
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Fixed to “0”
13-24
Sample relay number
Chapter 13 Macro
- [Alarm Function]
n+0
n+1
n+2
Time data 0
Time data 1
Sample bit information
Time data (double-word)
Time data 1
Time data 0
The Greenwich time from Jan. 1, 1970 is stored.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Bit number (0 to 511)
1: Power OFF after an alarm occurred
13
1: [DEL] key pressed
1: First cause
0: Cancel
1: Occurring
* It is not possible to use this command with [Sampling Method: Alarm
Function].
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(GET_SCUR)F1
Sampling cursor point
F1 + 0
Window number
Window number
F1 + 1
DIV No. 0 to 255
0: Base
F1 + 2
Cursor state (←V)
1: Overlap 0
F1 + 3
Cursor point (←V)
2: Overlap 1
F1 + 4
Cursor address (←V)
3: Overlap 2
[F1+0], [F1+1]
Set the window number and division number which are set with sampling
mode.
[F1+2]
Stores the cursor display status.
[0]:
The cursor is not displayed.
[F1 + 3], [F1 + 4] store the newest sampling information.
[1]:
The cursor is displayed.
[F1 + 3], [F1 + 4] store the cursor information.
[F1+3]
This address stores the value used for the GET_SMPL sampling number.
[F1+4]
Used for comparing whether or not the cursor point taken is the same as
the previous cursor point. If the cursor point is not changed but the
address of the cursor is changed, data to be taken is changed. If the
cursor point is changed but the address of the cursor is not changed,
data to be taken is not changed.
13-25
Macro Commands
• GET_SCUR
This command stores the cursor point shown in sampling mode. When the
cursor is not displayed, the newest sampling point is stored.
Chapter 13 Macro
• GET_BUF
This macro command obtains the number of the message that is used for
alarm display and has no “memorize” setting.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(GET_BUF)F1
Get alarm mask information
Message group number
F1 + 1
Alarm mask information (corresponding to each message line) (←V)
F1 + 1
Bit 0:
Message line 0
Bit 1:
Message line 1
Bit 2:
Message line 2
~
F1 + 0
F1 + 16
~
F1 + 16
Bit 15:
Message line 255
When the message group number is set in the [F1 + 0] memory, the masked
message numbers are stored in [F1 + 1] to [F1 + 16].
• DSP_DATA
This command makes numerical data displayed/not displayed. This applies
to all the numerical data in the corresponding division number.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(DSP_DATA)F1
Display/not display of numerical data display
F1 + 0
Window No. 0 to 7
F1 + 1
DIV No. 0 to 255
F1 + 2
0: Non-display
1: Display
• CHG_DATA
This command changes the property of numerical data.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(CHG_DATA)F1
13-26
F1 + 0
Window No. 0 to 7
F1 + 1
DIV No.0 to 255
Numeric data display property change
F1 + 2
Display type
F1 + 3
Foreground color/ background color
F1 + 4
Digits/Decimal point
Chapter 13 Macro
- Window number (0 to7) is:
0: Base
1: Overlap No. 0
2: Overlap No. 1
3: Overlap No. 2
4: Data block No. 0
5: Data block No. 1
6: Data block No. 2
7: Data block No. 3
13
- Foreground color: bit 0 to 7
3: HEX
4: OCT
5: BIN
Background color: bit 8 to 15
Foreground color
Background color
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0 to 127 colors
0 to 127 colors
Blink
Blink
- Digits:
Bit 0 to 7
If the digits are 0 or 33 or greater, they
cannot be changed.
- Decimal point:
Bit 8 to 15
If it is 11 or greater, the decimal point
cannot be changed.
The number of colors selectable with the CHG_DATA command is limited to “128 colors
+ blink” if the screen data is created with 32K colors.
When using this command, use the DSP_DATA command mentioned above.
Example:
Change data display properties of DIV No. 1 of the base screen.
Type
Digits
Character color:
DEC → HEX
4 digits → 3 digits
White→ Green Use the following macro commands:
$u0031=1 (w)
$u0032=0 (w)
SYS (DSP_DATA) $u30
$u0021=1 (w)
$u0022=3 (w)
$u0023=H0004
→
→
→
→
→
→
SYS (CHG_DATA) $u20
$u32=1
SYS (DSP_DATA) $u30
→
→
→
DIV No. 1
Non-display
Numerical data display non-display
DIV No. 1
Type HEX
Foreground color: green, background color:
black
Display property change
Display
Display of numerical data display
• STA_LIST
This command prints out data sheets. For more information, refer to
“Chapter 14 Data Sheets.”
• RGB_CHG / SET_RGB
These commands are available only when using the V series of analog RGB
input type. For more information about it, refer to Specification of Analog
RGB Input.
13-27
Macro Commands
- Display type
0: No sign 1: With signs 2: With sign (+)
Other display types are not changed.
Chapter 13 Macro
• SET_BKLT
This is the macro command that controls the backlight. It is available when
an option other than [ON] is set for [Backlight].
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(SET_BKLT)F1
F1 + 0
F1 + 1
Backlight control
Set action 0: OFF 1: ON 2: Backlight OFF time change*1
Backlight OFF time (unit: sec) *2
*1 “0” or “1” is valid for action when an option other than [ON] is set for [Backlight].
“2” is valid for action when [Auto 1] or [Auto 2] is set for [Backlight]. The setting
at the software is available only on the initial connection.
*2 This area is valid only when [F1 + 0] is “2.”
Do not use this command in the CYCLE macro, interval timer or event timer
macro that is executed repeatedly. Also, the setting of turning the backlight
ON at the ON macro of a switch should be avoided because pressing a
switch is one of the conditions for backlight ON.
• RESTART
This command re-connects the V series after the time specified by the F1
memory has elapsed.
F1 range: 0 to 60 (sec)
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(RESTART)F1
Re-connect
When the RESTART macro command is executed, data in the internal memory is lost.
• CONTRAST
This command is used to adjust contrast on the user screen instead of the
SYSTEM switch. Contrast adjustment is available only with STN displays.
At the start-up, the setting that is made last is valid.
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(CONTRAST)F1
F1 + 0
F1 + 1
Contrast adjustment
0: UP 1: DOWN 2: CENTER
UP/DOWN width (invalid when [F1 + 0] = “2”) *1
*1 100 levels of UP/DOWN width setting are possible. When CENTER is selected,
50 levels each for UP and DOWN are available.
13-28
Chapter 13 Macro
• CHG_LNG
This is the macro command that selects the display language. For more
information, refer to “Chapter 29 Language Selection.”
• GET_STATUS_FL
This command is used to obtain the FL-net information. For more
information, refer to the Specifications for Communication Unit FL-Net
separately provided.
• OUT_ENQ
Available Devices
F0
Internal
Memory
Command
name
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F1
(OUT_ENQ)F1
Interrupt for Serial Port
F1 + 0
ENQ No (10H to 2FH)
F1 + 1
Transfer data format 0: Numerical data 1: Characters
F1 + 2
The number data to be transferred
F1 + 3
Top address number
F1 + 4
0: Non-wait
1: Wait
Example:
F1 + 1 = 1: Bytes
F1 + 1 = 0: Words
Next macro execution
Next macro execution on completion of transmission
When the character display ($u200) is “ABCD”:
The data is sent to the host.
F1 + 0
F1 + 1
F1 + 2
F1 + 3
F1 + 4
Data received
at the host
F1 + 1 = 0 (numerical data)
$u00100 = 0010H
$u00101 = 0
$u00102 = 2
$u00103 = 200
$u00104 = 0
SYS(OUT_ENQ) $u00100
↓
F1 + 1 = 1 (characters)
$u00100 = 0010H
$u00101 = 1
$u00102 = 4
$u00103 = 200
$u00104 = 0
SYS(OUT_ENQ) $u00100
↓
3431343234333434H
41424344H
Network Selection for A Link + Net10 Communication
F1 + 0
Always ON
F1 + 1
Network selection: 2
F1 + 2
System code
F1 + 3
Network number
This macro command should not be used in anything except OPEN macro of
screen setting. If it is used, the network will change as soon as it is executed
and a communication error will occur.
13-29
13
Macro Commands
• SET_DSW
This command determines whether or not to use the deadman switch of
V608CH. For more information, refer to the V608CH Specifications Manual
separately provided.
Chapter 13 Macro
Indirect Memory Designation
Indirect memory should be set in the internal user memory.
Indirect Memory Setting
• Internal memory
PLC memory (less than 16 bits)
Temperature control memory
(less than 16 bits)
• PLC memory (16 bits to 32 bits)
Temperature control memory (16
bits to 32 bits)
15
n+0
n+1
MSB
Model
8
7
LSB
Memory type
Memory number (address)
n+2
Expansion code
Bit designation
n+3
00
Port number
15
n+0
MSB
Model
8
7
LSB
Memory type
n+1
Memory number (address), lower
n+2
Memory number (address), higher
n+3
Expansion code
Bit designation
n+4
00
Port number
- Model, memory type (HEX)
Model
Internal
memory
$u
$s
$L
$LD
00
16 bits
01
32 bits
81
16 bits
03
32 bits
83
PLC memory
Temperature
control memory
Memory type
00
01
02
03
The memory type depends on the memory used. Refer to
the Hardware Specifications Manual and set the type number
of the memory.
The memory type depends on the memory used. Refer to
the Temperature Control Network Manual and set the type
number of the memory.
- Expansion code
Set when the SPU memory slot number of a Mitsubishi PLC and a
Yokogawa PLC CPU number are specified.
Example:
Mitsubishi
for Slot No. 0: 00
Mitsubishi
for Slot No. 1: 01
Yokogawa: for CPU No. 1: 00
Yokogawa: for CPU No. 2: 01
- Port number
1 : 1, multi-link:
Multi-drop:
Temperature controller:
13-30
0
Not used
Set the PLC port number.
Set the temperature controller port number.
0
Chapter 13 Macro
• Memory card
15
n+0
MSB
02H
8
7
LSB
File number
n+1
Word address in the record
n+2
Record number
0
- File number, word address in the record, record number
Refer to the memory map included in “Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode.”
When accessing a word from the PLC memory, the word in n + 2 is usually “0”
even for memory that does not use an expansion code.
Example: Accessing a Mitsubishi PLC D165
(Macro)
$u100 = 0100H
Model: 01 (PLC memory)
$u101 = 0165
Memory No.: 165
$u102 = 0000
Expansion code: No
$u200 = *$u100
(Result of execution)
Data in D165 is transferred to $u200.
Memory type: 00
When accessing the bit-writable memory, such as the Mitsubishi M Relay, the
following setting is necessary.
Memory number = M (address)/16
Example: To access M20:
(Macro)
$u100 = 0106H
Model: 01 (PLC memory) Memory type: 06
$u101 = 0001
Memory No = 20 ÷ 16 = 1...4
$u102 = 0000
Expansion code: No
$u200 = *$u100
(Result of execution)
Data in M16 to 31 is transferred to $u200.
Bit 4 of $u200 becomes the bit for M20.
13-31
13
Macro Commands
For Yokogawa or Yaskawa PLCs, specify a value of “memory number address
− 1.”
Example: Address
400 → 399
25
→ 24
Chapter 13 Macro
Initial Macro
This is the macro command that is executed once before the V series starts
communications with the PLC.
Setting Items
• [System Setting] → [Macro Setting] → [General]
• [Item] → [Macro Block Edit] (
Refer to Chapter 4 in the Reference
Manual (Operation).)
Macro Setting
♦ [General] Tab Window
[Initial Macro]
Set the macro block number to be executed. When no initial macro
command is to be executed, set “−1” (default).
13-32
Chapter 13 Macro
Global Macro
The “global macro” is executed when the bit is set regardless of the screen
displayed.
Setting Items
Macro Setting
♦ [General] Tab Window
[Global Macro Memory]
Set the memory address where the macro block number to be executed is
contained.
Macro Execution
The global macro execution bit is bit 8 of read area “n + 1.”
The macro command is executed at [0 → 1] edge. (
read area, refer to “Chapter 1 System Setting.”)
For information on the
13-33
13
Global Macro
• [System Setting] → [Macro Setting] → [General]
• [Item] → [Macro Block Edit] (
Refer to Chapter 4 in the Reference
Manual (Operation).)
Chapter 13 Macro
Event Timer Macro
The “event timer macro” is executed at regular intervals regardless of the screen
displayed.
For information on the screen process cycle, refer to “Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”
Setting Items
• [System Setting] → [Macro Setting] → [Event Timer Macro]
• [Item] → [Macro Block Edit] (
Refer to Chapter 4 in the Reference
Manual (Operation).)
Macro Setting
♦ [Event Timer Macro] Tab Window
[Event Timer No.] ( 0 to 7)
A maximum of eight event timer macro
commands can be set. Check the box
when setting.
[Cycle Time (Sec)] (0 to 3600)
The macro command is executed each
time the specified time has elapsed from
the start of communications.
[Macro No.]
Set the macro block number to be
executed.
Notes
1. When multiple timers for event timer macro commands are up at the same
time:
The smaller number of [Event Timer No.] has priority in execution. The next
event timer macro command is executed after the previous event timer
macro command has been completed.
Event timer macro No. 0
Event timer macro No. 1
CYCLE macro
2. When accessing the same PLC memory address in some event timer macro
commands:
The processing ability of macro commands will be improved if you set event
timer macro No. 0 that reads from the internal memory address and make
other event timer macro commands refer to this internal memory address.
Basically, to improve the processing ability of macro commands, reduce the
number of times that access to a PLC memory address is repeated.
13-34
Chapter 13 Macro
Interval Timer
The interval timer has the following functions.
• When the screen has been opened, the specified macro block is executed at
intervals of the set time.
Screen opening
13
Time-up time
Time
Macro being executed
• When the specified bit is set (ON), the specified macro block is executed at
intervals of the set time. (This function is valid only while the bit is set.)
The desired bit being set (ON)
Memory
Time-up time
Time
Macro
Macro being executed
• The specified macro block is executed once when the set time has elapsed
after opening the screen or setting the specified bit.
Time-up time
Time
Macro
Macro being executed
The desired bit being set (ON)
Memory
Time-up time
Time
Macro
Macro being executed
13-35
Interval Timer
Macro
Chapter 13 Macro
Setting Items
• [Part] → [Interval Timer] → Interval timer setting
• [Item] → [Macro Block Edit] (Refer to Chapter 4 in the Reference Manual
(Operation).)
Interval Timer Setting
* [Time-up Time] might not be correct according to the contents of the screen.
[Division No.]
Specify the division number.
Set a division number where no mode has been registered. (
For
information on the division number, refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference
Manual (Operation).)
[Macro Block No.]
Specify the macro block number to be executed at intervals of the time set
for [Time-up Time]. (
For information on macro blocks, refer to Chapter
4 in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Time-up Time] (× 100 msec)
Set the time interval to execute the specified macro block. The macro block
is executed at intervals of the time set for [Time-up Time] after the screen is
opened. When “0” is specified for [Time-up Time], the macro block is
executed at every cycle.
When [ Start Mem. Designation] is checked, the timer remains off even after
the screen has been opened and the time set for [Time-up Time] has elapsed.
(Refer to the following explanation.)
[
13-36
Start Mem. Designation]
Check this box when specifying the start memory.
While the start memory bit is “1”: The macro block is executed each time
[Time-up Time] has elapsed.
While the start memory bit is “0”: The macro block is not executed without
counting [Time-up Time].
Chapter 13 Macro
• [
Start Mem. Designation]
Screen opening
Time-up time
Time
Macro
Macro block number
• [
13
Start Mem. Designation]
Bit ON
Bit OFF
Interval Timer
Start memory
Time-up time
Time
Macro
Macro block number
[
Stop Timer after Execution of Macro]
Check this box when executing the macro block only once. The timer is
stopped when the macro block has been executed after [Time-up Time] has
elapsed.
[ ON Macro Block No.]
Check this box when executing the macro block at the start of the interval
timer. Specify the macro block number to be executed. When the macro
block is executed depends on the setting for [ Start Mem. Designation].
• [ Start Mem. Designation]
When the interval timer starts immediately after the screen is opened, the
ON macro block is executed.
Time-up time
Time
Macro
Macro block number
Execution of ON macro block
Different macro blocks
• [ Start Mem. Designation]
The ON macro block is executed when the start memory bit is set to “1.”
Start Memory
Bit ON
Bit OFF
Time-up time
Time
Macro
Macro block number
Different macro blocks
Execution of ON macro block
13-37
Chapter 13 Macro
[
OFF Macro Block No.]
This option is valid when [ Start Mem. Designation] is checked. Check this
box when executing the macro block at the edge of [1 → 0] of the start
memory. Specify the macro block number to be executed.
Start memory
Bit ON
Bit OFF
Time-up time
Time
Macro
Macro block number
Execution of OFF macro block
Execution of ON macro block
Different macro blocks
This option is useful for clearing the internal memory, etc. that is used for a macro
command.
[Process Cycle]
Set a cycle for the V series to read the PLC data while it is communicating
with the PLC. (
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”)
13-38
Chapter 13 Macro
Interval Timer Examples
♦ (1) Screen Change Switch that must be Held Down for Five Seconds
Screen No. 1
Screen No. 1
13
Output memory for switch
OFF
Interval Timer
Hold down for five seconds.
M100 = ON
Time-up Time = 5 seconds.
Time
Macro
Execution of macro block No. 0 = Screen No. 1 call
Screen Edit (Example: Screen No. 0)
• Switch
[Output memory: M100]
[Output Action: Momentary]
• Interval timer mode
[Division No.: 0]
[Macro Block No.: 0]
[Time-up Time: 50] (= 5 seconds)
[
Start Mem. Designation: M100]
[
Stop Timer after Execution of Macro]
[
ON Macro Block No.]
[ OFF Macro Block No.]
[Process Cycle: Low Speed]
Pressing the switch sets M100 (ON). In five seconds, macro block No. 0 is executed.
Macro Block Edit (Example: Macro Block No. 0)
Line No. 0
$u00100 = 1
Line No. 1
SYS (SET_SCRN) $u00100
The above command is a system call command to bring up screen No. 1.
With the above setting, the screen display is not changed even if the switch on
screen No. 0 is pressed. It changes to screen No. 1 only when the switch is held
down for five seconds.
13-39
Chapter 13 Macro
♦ Graphic Movement on the Screen
When the switch is pressed, a graphic from the graphic library is displayed. At
the same time the graphic displayed at the left corner of the screen starts to
move to the right. Pressing the switch clears the graphic. When the graphic is
displayed again, it appears in the same position as displayed last, and starts to
move to the right.
Output memory for switch
$u100-00 = ON
OFF
The graphic is displayed on the screen.
$u100-00 = ON
Graphic relay
Macro
Macro block No. 1 = Executed at every cycle
Change the X parameter of the graphic.
Screen Edit
• Graphic relay mode
[Division No.: 0]
[Memory: $u100-00]
Type: 1-Graphic]
[Start Graphic GNo & No: 0 & 0]
• Interval timer mode
[Division No.: 1]
[Macro Block No.: 1]
Time-up Time: 0]
[
Start Mem. Designation: $u100-00]
[Number of Relays: 1]
[
Stop Timer after Execution of Macro]
[Parameter: 1]
[
ON Macro Block No.]
[Process Cycle: Low Speed]
[ OFF Macro Block No.]
[Process Cycle: Low Speed]
• Switch
[Output Memory: $u100-00]
[Lamp Memory: $u100-00]
[Output Action: Alternate]
Pressing the switch sets or resets $u100-00.
(Interval timer)
When $u100-00 is set (ON), graphic No. 0 in group No. 0 is displayed and macro
block No. 1 is executed at every cycle.
(Graphic relay)
Since [Parameter] is set in the graphic relay mode, $u101 becomes the memory for
the parameter.
13-40
Chapter 13 Macro
Graphic Library Edit (Example: GNo. 0 & No. 0)
Place the following graphic on the screen, and specify the X parameter.
Graphic No. 0 in group No. 0
Pattern No. 0
Parameter Setting
[Action: Animate]
[Start X: Incremental + 1]
(Incremental input in the
minus direction 1)
13
Interval Timer
Macro Block Edit (Example: Macro Block No. 1)
Line No. 0
$u00101 = $u00101 + 1(W)
Line No. 1
IF ($u00101 = 640) LB00 (W)
Line No. 2
RET
Line No. 3
LB00:
Line No. 4
$u00101 = 0(W)
The above is the setting for a macro block to modify the X parameter for the graphic
start point. When the count on the X-axis has been increased to 640 dots (maximum),
the count is cleared and then is increased again. The graphic is moved from the right to
the left by this process.
Transfer the above screen data to the V series for check.
13-41
Chapter 13 Macro
Macro Mode
Macro mode can be set for screens and multi-overlaps. The macro mode is a
function that activates the ON macro or OFF macro when the corresponding bit
of the PLC memory changes from 0 → 1 (leading edge) or from 1 → 0 (falling
edge), respectively. However, when the screen (multi-overlap) is opened, they
are executed in the level state. (
Refer to [Execute OFF Macro at Start]
(page 13-43).) A maximum of 32 each of ON/OFF macros can be set using the
consecutive bits.
Setting Items
• [Part] → [Macro] → Macro mode setting
Macro Mode Setting
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. Set a division number not registered in another
mode. (
For information on the division number, refer to Chapter 2 in
the Reference Manual (Operation).)
[Memory]
Set the memory that triggers the macro command.
[Number of Relays] (1 to 32)
Specify the number of bits that trigger the macro command. The relay
number specified here is common to both the ON macro and OFF macro.
Example:
13-42
[Number of Relays: 10] allows a maximum of 10 ON macros and
10 OFF macros. In this case, 10 bits must be allocated for
[Memory].
Chapter 13 Macro
[Execute OFF Macro at Start]
This item is valid when a screen or a multi-overlap that contains macro mode
is open.
• [ Execute OFF Macro at Start]
When the bit of [Memory] is ON, the ON macro is executed; when it is OFF,
the OFF macro is executed.
13
• [ Execute OFF Macro at Start]
The ON macro is executed when the bit of [Memory] is ON.
1. To edit an ON macro, enter a number in the text field on the right of [ON
Macro...].
2. Click [ON Macro...] to open the editing screen. Click the [Close] icon to
return to the [Macro] dialog.
[OFF Macro ...]
The same number of OFF macros as specified for [No. of Relays] can be set.
1. To edit an OFF macro, enter a number in the text field on the right of
[OFF Macro...].
2. Click [OFF Macro...] to open the editing screen. Click the [Close] icon to
return to the [Macro] dialog.
[Process Cycle]
Select the desired process cycle. (
Cycle.”)
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process
13-43
Macro Mode
[ON Macro ...]
The same number of ON macros as specified for [No. of Relays] can be set.
Chapter 13 Macro
Please use this page freely.
13-44
Chapter 14 Data Sheets
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Data Sheets
Outline
The data sheet function makes it possible to print out the PLC data (numerical
data and characters) just transferred to MONITOUCH and displayed on the
screen during communications with the PLC. This function also makes it
possible to print out the data that is not shown in the V series display.
SYSTEM
F1
F2
Data sheets are printed. The printed
data sheets show the PLC data when
printing is initiated.
F3
F4
F5
PLC
F6
Print
F7
A Line
POWER
B Line
C Line
D Line
Setting the bit for “Output Data Sheets”...
E Line
F Line
The V Series can print out data sheets
showing the current PLC data. Setting the
bit for “data sheets” prints the data sheets.
Printer
The print screen is formatted in [Data Sheet] in the V series screen data file.
Line or box
A Line
B Line
Data display
(Numerical data)
C Line
D Line
E Line
Data display
(Characters)
F Line
For information on data sheet editing, refer to “Chapter 4 Registration Items” in the
Reference Manual (Operation).
14-1
Outline
V series
run
Stop
14
Chapter 14 Data Sheets
Printing Data Sheet
There are two methods for printing data sheet.
Command from Read Area
Bit 9 of [Read Area] “n + 1” is the data sheet output bit. Data sheet is printed at
[0 → 1] edge.
♦ Printing Procedure
1. Specify the data sheet number to be the top page for [Memory] “n” in the
[Data Sheet Page Setting] dialog. (
Refer to Chapter 4 in the Reference
Manual (Operation).)
2. Specify the number of output pages for [Memory] “n + 1.”
When [Memory] “n + 1” is “0,” the printer will not print any data sheet.
3. Set bit 9 of [Read Area] “n + 1” from 0 → 1.
4. Data sheet is printed.
Example:
Read area = D0000
Top page setting memory = D0010
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
(3)
run
stop
PLC
D000
D001
D002
(1)(2)
D009
D010
D011
Bit 9 of read area “n + 1”
= data sheet output [0 → 1]
leading edge
(4) Data sheet No. 3 is printed.
Data sheet No. 3
A Line
B Line
3
1
C Line
D Line
E Line
D010: Top page setting memory = 3
D011: Output pages = 1
14-2
Chapter 14 Data Sheets
Macro Command
Use the STA_LIST macro command to print data sheet.
• STA_LIST
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
F0
PLC
Memory
Memory
Card
Constant
Indirect
W Word
Command
name
F1
(STA_LIST)F1
14
Data sheet print-out
Print start data sheet number
F1 + 1
Data sheet pages to be printed
Printing Data Sheet
F1 + 0
♦ Printing Procedure
1. Set the data sheet number to be the top page for [F1 + 0] memory.
2. Set the output pages for [F1 + 1] memory.
3. Execute the STA_LIST macro command.
4. Data sheet is printed.
Example:
To print data sheet No. 3 with F1 = $u100:
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
(4) Data sheet No. 3 is printed.
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Data sheet No. 3
A line
(1) $u100 = 3
(2) $u101 = 1
(3) STA_LIST $u100
Top page setting
Number of output pages
Macro execution
B line
C line
D line
E line
14-3
Chapter 14 Data Sheets
If a data sheet number of data sheet that is not yet stored, a sheet with that number
cannot be printed.
Example: Read area = D0000
Top page setting memory = D0010
Data sheet No. 10
No. 11
No. 12
Data sheet No.10
Data sheet No.11
Data sheet No.12
A Line
A Line
B Line
C Line
B Line
D Line
C Line
E Line
D Line
F Line
E Line
G Line
F Line
H Line
G Line
I Line
H Line
J Line
I Line
No. 13
No. 14
Data sheet No.14
A Line
B Line
A Line
If data sheet pages are set as shown on the left:
C Line
B Line
D Line
C Line
E Line
D Line
F Line
E Line
G Line
F Line
H Line
G Line
I Line
J Line
H Line
J Line
I Line
J Line
D0010 (Top page setting memory) = 10
D0011 (Output pages) = 5
Bit 9 (data sheet output) of D0001 [0 → 1] leading edge
Data sheet No. 10 to 12 and 14 can be printed. The
page that is not stored, No. 13, is ignored, and four
pages are output.
Data sheet No.10
No.11
A Line
PLC
run
stop
No.12
B Line
A Line
C Line
B Line
A Line
D Line
C Line
B Line
E Line
D Line
C Line
A Line
F Line
E Line
D Line
B Line
G Line
F Line
E Line
C Line
H Line
G Line
F Line
D Line
I Line
H Line
G Line
E Line
I Line
H Line
F Line
J Line
I Line
G Line
J Line
H Line
Data sheet No.14
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
J Line
F6
F7
POWER
I Line
J Line
Printed Data Sheet
All characters and lines on the data sheet screen are handled as text.
Consequently, the printed data sheet looks differently from the one on the V-SFT
editor screen.
Example: If the following data sheet is
created on the V-SFT editor:
The following data sheet will be
printed out:
No. 0 Data
No. 0 Data
No. 1 Data
No. 1 Data
No. 2 Data
No. 2 Data
No. 3 Data
No. 3 Data
Example: When [Use Character
Graphic Print] is checked:
No. 0 Data
No. 1 Data
No. 2 Data
The following data sheet will be
printed out:
No. 0 Data
No. 1 Data
No. 2 Data
No. 3 Data
No. 3 Data
No. 0 Data
No. 1 Data
No. 2 Data
No. 3 Data
14-4
No. 0 Data
No. 1 Data
No. 2 Data
No. 3 Data
Chapter 15 Print
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Print
Outline
When the V series is in RUN mode, the displayed screen or the internal buffer
information can be printed.
For information on available printers, refer to the V7 Hardware Specifications
Manual.
15
1) Hard copy
Outline
copy
F1
F2
F4
F3
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
copy
2) Sample print
Bit sampling
Data sampling
F1
F2
F4
F3
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
<OFF> 08-20 13:25:40
<OFF> 08-20 14:05:13
<ON> 08-24 16:59:54
<OFF> 08-24 17:01:05
<ON> 08-24 17:01:05
<ON> 08-24 17:01:05
Short of empty palette
Saddle stop during ascending
Control box emergency stop
Control box emergency stop
Operation box emergency stop
Pusher error
3) Data sheet
A
B
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
C
D
E
F
15-1
Chapter 15 Print
Printer Setting
• [System Setting] → [Printer Setting]
[Main] Tab Window
Set the printer that is connected to the V series.
[Type]
Choose the control code of the printer to be connected.
PR201 Monochrome / PR201 Color / ESC-P Monochrome / ESC-P Color
/ HP Deskjet Color / CBM292/293 / MR-400
When “PR201 Color” or “ESC-P Color” is selected, the 32k- or 128-color
screen is printed in 16 colors.
[
Output the Bit in Printing]
When the V series receives a print command, [0 → 1] is output at the start of
data transmission and [1 → 0] is output at the end of transmission. However,
if the print data is not much, the signal may not be output. When this box is
checked, the bit is always output regardless of the data size.
Bit 10 of write area “n + 1”
MSB
LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Write area “n + 1”
0
0
0
0
0
0
0: End (standby)
1: Print data transferring
Bit 1 of internal memory $s16
MSB
LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
$s16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0: End (standby)
1: Print data transferring
15-2
Chapter 15 Print
[Port]
Select the port where the printer cable is connected.
• Parallel Port (Printer Port)
Select this option when connecting the printer using parallel interface.
The printer port of the V series is used.
• Serial Port (MJ Port)
Select this option when connecting the printer using serial interface.
[Refer to Modular]
Choose MJ1 or MJ2 provided on the backside of the V series.
Wide
Tall
A
A
[Print Direction]
Choose the paper direction to print the screen.
Wide/ Tall
When [Tall] is selected, the screen is printed
with 90° rotated.
[MR400 I/F Memory]
This option becomes active when the barcode printer MR-400 is selected.
Set this memory address when using an external command for printing. The
allocation of memory is shown below.
MR400 I/F Memory
Contents
n
Control memory
n+1
Format table number specification memory
(Call setting: 1 to 256)
• Control Memory (n)
MSB
LSB
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Print command
0: Standby
1: Printing
* This is automatically reset when
printing has been completed.
• Format table number specification memory (n + 1)
Set the number of the format table (call) to be printed.
It is possible to specify the format call number using the MR_OUT macro command and
print the table. (
Refer to page 15-15.)
15-3
Printer Setting
[Reversed Image]
Rev.:
White and black are reversed.
Norm.:
Printed as shown on MONITOUCH
15
Chapter 15 Print
[Serial Port] Tab Window
This option becomes active when [Serial Port] is chosen in the [Main] tab
window. Set communication parameters to be used for the printer serial
interface and the MJ port of the V series.
[Baud Rate]
Specify the baud rate.
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 76800 / 115K BPS
[Parity]
Set the parity.
None / Odd / Even
[Data Length]
Set the data length.
7 bits / 8 bits
[Stop Bit]
1 bit / 2 bits
15-4
Chapter 15 Print
Hard Copy
The currently displayed screen can be printed.
copy
F1
F2
F4
F3
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
copy
Use the [Function: Hard Copy] switch.
15
Sample Print
Bit sampling
Data sampling
F1
F2
F4
F3
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
<OFF> 08-20 13:25:40
<OFF> 08-20 14:05:13
<ON> 08-24 16:59:54
<OFF> 08-24 17:01:05
<ON> 08-24 17:01:05
<ON> 08-24 17:01:05
Short of empty palette
Saddle stop during ascending
Control box emergency stop
Control box emergency stop
Operation box emergency stop
Pusher error
Data Sheet Print
Data set for data sheet can be printed. For information on the data sheet
setting, refer to “Chapter 14 Data Sheets.”
A
B
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
C
D
E
F
15-5
Hard Copy
The internal buffer data of sampling can be printed. For the printing procedure,
refer to “Chapter 10 Sampling.”
Chapter 15 Print
Sato’s Barcode Printer MR400
This setting is required when connecting Sato’s barcode printer MR400 and
printing barcodes.
Read the instruction manual and command reference book for Sato’s barcode
printer MR400 series before using this function.
Memory Card
To use this function, a memory card is required for MR400. For the memory
card type and mounting procedure, refer to the instruction manual for the MR400
series.
Card Slot Number Setting and Memory Card Formatting
To enable the use of memory cards, set the memory card slot number and
format the memory card on MR400.
Memory card formatting is the same as floppy disk initialization.
1. Turn off the power to MR400, and insert a memory card into the card slot on
the backside of MR400.
2. Hold down the LINE key on the front of MR400, and turn the power on.
“USER MODE” is displayed on the front panel.
3. Press the LINE key and FEED key at the same time. “ADVANCED MODE”
is displayed.
4. Press the LINE key and FEED key at the same time again. “CARD MODE”
is displayed.
5. Press the FEED key until “CARD DRIVE NO/ 1 2” is displayed. Set the
memory card slot number. Press the LINE key to select, and press the
FEED key to determine.) This drive number is the memory card slot number.
6. Press the FEED key to determine the options. Select “YES” for “CARD
FORMAT/ YES NO” and format the memory card. If no error is given,
formatting is successfully done.
7. To quit “CARD MODE,” turn the printer off.
• When screen data is transferred after editing the MR400 format table
(register), formatting is required. In addition to the above formatting
procedure, it is possible to format the memory card by outputting the control
command of MR400 from the V series. (
Refer to Example 1 (page
15-14).)
15-6
Chapter 15 Print
Format Table Types
There are two types of format tables. When the MR-400 commands are
registered in this table, desired format or data can be printed.
2D code printing is not supported at present.
♦ MR400 Format Table (Register)
Set the print format.
The format used in the format table includes settings for digits, position, typeface,
barcode, etc. for MR400.
Field No.3
Field No.1
Field No.2
Field No.3
0123456789012
1 2 3 4 5
123456
ABCDEFGHI
Write these settings on the memory card using the MR_REG macro command.
Once they are written on the memory card, it is not necessary to repeat this step
until the register setting is changed.
♦ MR400 Format Table (Call)
Use the format (register setting), and change the print data. Set the storage
target, type, etc. of the changed data.
4953103125773
5 5 5 5 5
66666
MONITOUCH
Print the data using the MR_OUT macro command.
15-7
Sato’s Barcode Printer MR400
Field No.1
Field No.2
15
Chapter 15 Print
Format Table (Register Setting)
• [System Setting] → [MR400 Format Table] → [Register Setting]
The format table (register setting) allows settings from No. 1 to 128.
[OK]
The format table setting is ended.
[Cancel]
The format table editing is canceled.
[Copy]
The currently open format table is copied into the specified table.
[Jump]
The specified format table is opened.
[Back]
The previous format table number is opened.
[Next]
The following format table is opened.
15-8
Chapter 15 Print
♦ Setting Example
To print in the following format:
Field No.1
Field No.2
Field No.3
1 2 3 4 5
123456
• Description in Escape Sequence
<A>
<Data send start>
<CC> 2
15
<Card slot> Slot number
<YS>, 1 0
<Format register> Format register number
Match this number to the
register setting number.
<Field register> Field number, print digits
<V> 1 0 <H> 5 0
<Vertical print position> dots <horizontal print position> dots
Data registered
for field No. 1
<B> 2 0 2 0 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
<Barcode> barcode type, bar width enlargement, bar top/bottom size (dots), data
</N>, 2, 5
<V>1 0 0 <H> 5 0 <L> 0 2 0 2 <P> 2
Data registered
for field No. 2
<X22>, 1 2 3 4 5
<X22 characters> data
</N>, 3, 6
<V> 2 0 0 <H> 3 0 0 <L> 0 1 0 1 <P> 2
Data registered
for field No. 3
<X2 2>, 1 2 3 4 5 6
<Z>
<Data send end>
15-9
Sato’s Barcode Printer MR400
</N>, 1, 1 0
Chapter 15 Print
• Description on the Format Table
Match these
numbers.
<X22>, 12345
Escape sequence
1BX22, 12345
Escape sequence
(HEX display)
\1BX22, 12345
Format table
The escape character (ESC) at the top of the escape sequence is expressed as “< >” on
MR400 and as “1B(H)” in hexadecimal notation. In the format table, “\” denotes
hexadecimal data. Consequently, “1B(H)” is shown as “\1B.”
15-10
Chapter 15 Print
MR400 Format Table (Call Setting)
• [System Setting] → [MR400 Format Table] → [Call Setting]
The format table (call setting) allows settings from No. 1 to 128.
Format table number
Field number
15
Sato’s Barcode Printer MR400
[Memory Card Slot]
No.1 / No.2
Select the card slot drive number set on MR400.
[Memory]
Check the box when each field data is stored in the memory.
[OK]
The format table setting is ended.
[Cancel]
The format table editing is canceled.
[Copy]
The currently open format table is copied into the specified table.
[Jump]
The specified format table is opened.
[Back]
The previous format table number is opened.
[Next]
The following format table is opened.
15-11
Chapter 15 Print
♦ Setting Example 1
To print “ABCDE” in field No. 1:
♦ Setting Example 2
To print data stored in memory in field No. 2:
Check [ Memory] of field No. 2. Press the [Detail] button to bring up the
[Detail] dialog.
• Select [Text] for [Type].
[Memory]
Specify the top memory address where print data is stored.
[Bytes]
The specified number of bytes is output from the address specified for
[Memory].
Example: To print “ABCDEF” in one-byte characters, specify as shown
below in the Shift JIS code.
[
15-12
D 100
4241HEX
D 101
4443HEX
D 102
4645HEX
Add Start/End Code]
Make the setting when using barcode type “CODE 39.” (
page 15-15.)
Refer to
Chapter 15 Print
• Select [Num.] for [Type].
When [Num.] is selected, binary data is converted into characters (JIS code).
Example:
When “0100 (BIN)” is set in D100, characters 0100 (= “100”) is printed.
15
[Digit]
Specify the number of digits for the display type.
[Decimal Point]
Specify the number of decimal places.
[Display Type]
Choose from DEC-, HEX, OCT, DEC or BIN. When [DEC-] is selected,
data is shown in decimal notation with ± signs.
[Zero Suppress]
Choose whether or not to use the zero suppress function. When [Zero
Suppress] is checked, the suppressed zero is filled with spaces.
[Data Length]
Choose data length for the memory to be used.
[Character]
Choose one-byte or two-byte characters.
[
Add Start/End Code]
Make the setting when using barcode type “CODE 39.”
(
Refer to page 15-15.)
15-13
Sato’s Barcode Printer MR400
[Memory]
Data contained in the specified memory address is printed in numerals.
Chapter 15 Print
Macro
Macro commands can be used for writing data of format tables (register/call
setting) to MR400 or for printing.
♦ [MR_REG]
Data of format table (register setting number) set for F1 is written on the memory
card.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
MR_REG: Execution of MR400 format table register setting number
MR_REG F1
Example 1:
When the following commands are set in No. 22:
When the MR_REG 22 macro command is executed, the memory card is
formatted.
Example 2:
When the following commands are set in No. 1:
Execute the MR_REG 1 macro command as the ON macro of a switch.
First:
The format is registered on the memory card for MR400.
Second: The registered data is printed and the format can be checked.
15-14
Chapter 15 Print
♦ [MR_OUT]
Data of the format table (call setting number) set for F1 is printed.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC
Memory
Constant
Memory
Card
Indirect
W Word
F0
MR_OUT: Execution of MR400 format table call setting number
MR_OUT F1
Example 1:
When the MR_OUT 50 macro command is executed:
Data of the MR400 format table (call setting No. 50) is printed.
15
♦ Barcode Type “CODE 39”
CODE 39 has “*” at the beginning and the end of each barcode.
Setting in [MR400 Format Table (Register Setting)]
Set the number of digits including “*” for format registration. For example, in the
following case, set “2” (10 characters + 2).
15-15
Sato’s Barcode Printer MR400
When the format table is created, set “*” in the following two positions.
Chapter 15 Print
Setting in [MR400 Format Table (Call Setting)]
• Select [Text] for [Type].
[Bytes]
Specify the number of bytes including “*.”
[ Add Start/End Code]
Checked:
“*” is not included in data in [Memory].
Not checked:
“*” is included in data in [Memory].
• Select [Num.] for [Type].
[ Add Start/End Code]
Checked:
“*” is not included in data in [Memory].
Not checked:
“*” is included in data in [Memory].
15-16
Chapter 16 Barcode
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Barcode
Outline
The V series reads barcode data, converts the necessary data into ASCII code
and writes them in the PLC memory. With this feature, all information in the
barcode is transferred to the PLC immediately. Also, the V series can show the
read barcode data on the screen.
PI !
SYSTEM
4902
5803
0244
7
F1
Code No.
4902580302474
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
16
F7
POWER
PLC
Barcode reader
The V series reads barcode
data and transfers it to the
PLC.
• Connect the barcode reader to modular jack 1 (or 2) of the V series.
• With the V7 series, it is possible to connect a 2D code reader for data
read/write operations.
• Note on Connection
Depending on the barcode reader type, the applicable connecting cable
differs. Please prepare an appropriate conversion cable on your own.
(
Refer to page 16-6.)
16-1
Outline
• There is no handshake communication between them. (The barcode reader
is not synchronized with the V series.)
Chapter 16 Barcode
Barcode Setting
In the [Barcode Setting] dialog, set up the protocol for communication between
the barcode reader and the MONITOUCH. Refer to the barcode reader’s
manual, and set correctly.
[Barcode Setting] Dialog
Select [System Setting] → [Barcode Setting]. The [Barcode Setting] dialog is
displayed.
[ Use Barcode]
Check this box when using the barcode reader. The following options
become active.
[Refer to Modular]
The [Modular Jack] dialog is displayed. Choose modular jack 1 (or 2) for
barcode reader connection.
[Type]
Select the type of barcode reader from the following options.
1. JAN (UPC, EAN)
2. ITF (Interleaved 2 of 5)
3. CODABAR (NW-7)
4. CODE39
5. ANY (2D code: available with the V7 series only)
[Baud Rate]
Choose a baud rate.
2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200BPS
[Parity]
Set the parity.
None / Odd / Even
16-2
Chapter 16 Barcode
[Check Digit]
Set the check digit.
None / Not Delete / Delete
[I/F Memory]
Specify the top memory address where barcode data, etc. is stored.
(
Refer to “Memory Detail” (page 16-4).)
Bit Length]
Set the bit length.
7 bits / 8 bits
[Stop Bit]
Set the stop bit.
1 bit / 2 bits
[Terminator]
Set the terminator.
STX/ETX / CR•LF
[
16-3
16
Barcode Setting
Use Start/End Code]
This option becomes active when [CODE 39] is chosen for [Type].
Set the processing of start/end code “*” when reading barcodes.
• Checked:
Data with start/end code is saved in [I/F Memory].
• Not checked:
Data without start/end code is saved in [I/F Memory].
Chapter 16 Barcode
♦ I/F Memory
The allocation of I/F memory is shown below:
• Type: JAN/ITF/CODABAR/CODE39
• Type: ANY
Memory
Contents
Memory
n
Flag / number of data read
n+1
Contents
n
Flag
n+1
Flag / number of data read
n+2
Data read
Data read
n+m
n+m
1. Flag / number of data read
• Type: JAN/ITF/CODABAR/CODE39
n
15 14 13 12
11 10
0
0
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
(2) Reading complete
(3) Number of data read
(Bytes 0 to 256)
(1) Communication error
Be sure to reset the bits not in use to “0.”
• Type: ANY
n
15 14 13 12
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(2) Reading complete
(1) Communication error
n+1
(3) Number of data read (bytes: 0 to 2048)
1) Communication error (bit 14)
When an error has occurred in the communication between the barcode
reader and MONITOUCH, bit 14 shows “1.” Check parameter settings
on the barcode reader and the V-SFT editor and also check cable
connection.
2) Reading complete (bit 12)
When data from barcode reader is received and written to the I/F
memory, bit 12 (reading complete) shows “1.” Check that the bit is set,
and receive the next data. To read next barcode data, reset the bit to “0”
when the data has been read.
3) Number of data read
The number of bytes read by the barcode reader is written.
2. Data read
Barcode data is converted into ASCII code and is stored in these areas.
As many as the bytes read are stored.
(“0” (null code) is attached to the last.)
16-4
Chapter 16 Barcode
Barcode Setting Example
Follow these steps to display barcode data received from the PLC on the
screen:
Read
“4902580302474.”
PI !
The barcode number is shown here.
4
0247
5803
4902
“4902580302474” is
written from D0111.
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
Code No.4902580302474
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
PLC
Barcode reader
• Setting Procedure
Set the [Barcode Setting] and [Character Display] dialogs.
1. Select [System Setting] → [Barcode Setting]. The [Barcode Setting]
dialog is displayed.
Refer to the barcode reader’s manual, and set the items in the [Barcode
Setting] dialog correctly. (
Refer to page 16-2.) In this example,
specify “D0110” for [I/F Memory].
• Notes on Setting
1) In this example, specify “D111” for [Memory] for the character display
part because barcode data is stored from “n + 1” (“n + 2” for 2D
code).
2) Specify the number of bytes of barcode data for [Byte].
I/F memory of barcode setting
D0110
Read
“4902580302474.”
PI !
4
0247
5803
4902
This is “13” because 13
bytes are used.
Flag / number of bytes read
D0111
H3934
D0112
H3230
D0113
H3835
D0114
H3330
D0115
H3230
D0116
H3734
D0117
H0034
Data read
Character display memory D0111
Barcode reader
SYSTEM
F1
F2
Code No.4902580302474
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
16-5
Barcode Setting Example
2. To show the contents of the barcode data that was read, create a
character display. When you click on the [Character Display] icon, the
[Character Display] dialog is displayed. Set the items in the dialog.
(
Refer to “Character Display” in “Chapter 5 Data Display.”)
16
Chapter 16 Barcode
Connecting MONITOUCH and Barcode Reader
This section explains the connection between the V series modular jack (MJ1/2)
and the barcode reader.
• Modular Jack Pin Arrangement and Signal Name
The pin numbers and signal names are shown in the following diagram.
MJ1/2
Pin No.
Signal Name
Contents
1
+SD/RD
RS-485 + data
2
−SD/RD
RS-485 − data
3
+5V
4
+5V
External +5 V
MAX 150 mA
5
0V
6
0V
7
RD
RS-232C receive data
8
SD
RS-232C send data
12345678
MONITOUCH side
SG
12345678
• Hakko Electronics’ cable (V6-BCD)
Length: 2 m
With modular plug
Brown:
Red:
Orange:
Yellow:
+5V
0V
RD
SD
12345678
• Notes on Connection
For barcode readers with CTS/RTS control, it may be necessary to install a
jumper between CTS and RTS to maintain proper operation.
- For a barcode reader used with V4 (former version of MONITOUCH):
Perform the wiring shown in the diagram below.
PIN No
Signal
1
CTS
2
RXD
3
TXD
4
RTS
*
Orange: RXD
Yellow: TXD
* Install a jumper
between CTS and RTS.
5
6
7
SG
8
9
16-6
Red: 0V
Brown: +5V
+5V
Special Functions
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
Animation (V7 Only)
The V7 series allows you to create animation easily. This chapter describes the
detail of the animation function.
Note that you cannot use the animation function with model V708C.
Outline
• When the bit is set ON, the picture is displayed. When the bit is set OFF, the
picture is cleared. You can easily set motion both in the case of animating a
static frame and in the case of changing its position.
Bit is ON
Bit is OFF
17
Outline
1 frame
• The target graphic is created with dots in the [Frame Edit] area. For
example, you can load bitmap data and use it for animation easily.
17-1
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
• When transparent color is set, you can make the animation image opaque to
the background color and display the picture exactly as you registered it.
In this case, even animation images are overlapped, the color will not be
reversed and the display will not be corrupted.
It doesn’t react with the background color.
No problem even when images are overlapped.
• You don’t need to create a complicated program on the PLC for the
animation function. Because you can use the settings on V7 series to create
animation easily, you can create interesting screens such as screen saver or
logo display without imposing a burden on the architect.
Setting Items for Animation
Item
Animation
Animation No. 0 (to 1023)
Frame No. 0 (to 1022)
* For how to register animation, refer to page 17-4.
Screen Edit
[Animation] icon
[Animation] dialog
Page 17-9
17-2
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
Structure of Animation
For example, when you make an animation as shown below, the screen data is
configured as in the following illustration:
1. Walking sideways
Animation No. 0
2. Walking forwards
Animation No. 0
- Animation No. 1
(= register a panel to use 2)
Frame: No. 2 - No. 3
Seconds to replay: 1 second
(Changing frame No. 2 and
No. 3 and display in 1
second)
17
Register Frame No. 0 and No. 1
in accordance with the setting of
animation No. 0.
Frame No. 0
Frame No. 1
Register Frame No. 2 and No. 3
in accordance with the setting of
animation No. 1.
Frame No. 2
Frame No. 3
The picture of
walking forwards
• Setting animation on the screen
Page 17-9
Start the animation setting by clicking the [Animation] icon.
Set up which PLC memory should display the registered animation and
which locations on the screen are available for its movement.
17-3
Structure of Animation
• Registration of animation ([Item] → [Animation])
Page 17-4
- Animation No. 0
(= register a panel to use 1)
Frame: No. 0 - No. 1
Seconds to replay: 1 second
(Changing frame No. 0 and
No. 1 and display in 1
The picture of
walking sideways
second)
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
Registration of Animation
Images for the animation are defined and registered with [Animation] function of
the [Item] menu. You can define and register the number of image panels and
set the animation speed to check the actual playing image.
[Animation] Area
Select the [Animation] function from the [Item] menu. The [Animation] window is
displayed as shown.
♦ Setting Procedure
1. Right-click the tree [Animation], then select the [Add] item.
2. The [Animation VIEW] dialog is displayed as shown.
It starts from the [Animation No. 0] setting.
17-4
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
[Animation No.] (0 - 1023)
Animation number which you are editing currently is displayed. You can
change the animation number by clicking the up/down arrow buttons.
You can also enter the number directly without using the buttons.
[ Use]
Animation number is set by checking this box. To clear the setting,
uncheck this box.
[Start Frame No.]/[End Frame No.] (0 - No. 1022)
Set the scope (number) of the frames for this animation.
Frame
It means each panel to be used for animation.
Register with dot drawing.
Frame No. 0
Frame No. 1
Frame No. 2
Frame No. 3
For how to register frames, refer to page 17-7.
[Seconds to Replay] (×100 msec)
Set the switching cycle (speed), when you switch and display the frames
that you specified with [Start Frame No.] and [End Frame No.].
Ex:
Registration of Animation
[Start Frame No.]
[5]
[End Frame No.]
[9]
[Seconds to Replay]
[30] (×100 msec)
Animation is switched as shown below.
17
Frame No.5 Frame No.6 Frame No.7 Frame No.8 Frame No.9
30 × 100 msec = switches in 3 seconds
In the case of consecutive play, it repeats after 3 seconds.
[Test] field
After registering the frames, you can check the actual motion of
animation. For more information, refer to page 17-8.
3. When the settings are completed, click the [Close] button. Go back to the
[Animation] window.
17-5
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
4. Double-click [Animation]. All folders that you defined in step 2 are displayed.
To go back to the [Animation VIEW] dialog, right-click the corresponding
[Animation No. xxxx] folder, then click [Property].
5. By double-clicking each [Animation No. xxxx] folder, all the frame folders you
set are displayed.
17-6
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
Right-click Menu
The menu depends on which folder you right-click in the [Animation] window.
[Animation] folder
[Animation No. xxxx] folder
[Frame No. xxxx] folder
17
Registration of Animation
Frame Edit
Double-click the [Frame No. xxxx] folder within [Animation No. xxxx] on the
[Animation] window. The [Frame Edit] window is displayed.
Double-click
17-7
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
You can register up to 1023 frames (0 - 1022).
The frame has limitations for size, etc. For more information, refer to page
17-19.
For how to edit and register frames, refer to “Chapter 4 Registration Item” in the
Reference Manual (Operation).
To Check the Registered Contents:
After you complete editing and registering the frame, you can check the actual
motion of the animation with the [Animation VIEW] dialog.
Right-click [Animation No. xxxx] on the [Animation] window, then click [Property].
The [Animation VIEW] dialog is displayed.
♦ [Test] Field
[PLAY]
If you click this button, the set frame is displayed with in the time of [Seconds
to Replay].
[PAUSE]
Click this button to pause during playing.
[STOP]
Click this button to stop the display status during playing or pausing.
[
17-8
Repeatedly Playback]
When you use the [PLAY] button, it is played only once. By checking this
box, the set frame is played consecutively.
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
[Animation] Dialog
The image for each registered animation number needs to be set up in the
[Animation] dialog on the screen to define the range of movement and the
memory addresses needed to display images. Click the [Animation] icon on the
screen edit. The [Animation] dialog is displayed.
17
[Animation] Dialog
[Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
You can register one animation in one division.
An animation can be set only on the base screen. Note that you cannot
register it on overlaps.
[Command Memory]
This memory is to display the registered animation number on the screen.
The content of memory is as follows.
MSB
LSB
15 14 13 12
11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Animation displayed/ not displayed (1)
System reserved (Set [0])
Play Pause/Resume (2)
Move Pause/Resume (3)
(1) Animation displayed/not displayed (Bit 0)
When this bit is set [1] (ON), the image of the corresponding animation
number is displayed. When you reset it to [0] (OFF), the image is
cleared.
17-9
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
(2) Play Pause/Resume (Bit 1)
By setting this bit ON, the animation which is currently playing is paused.
By resetting this bit to OFF, it resumes.
Playing
Pause playing
Set the bit 1 to ON
Frames are switched in
accordance with the setting of
animation number.
Pause while displaying the
frame at the point when the bit 1
was set ON
This bit becomes active only when the bit 0 (animation displayed/ not
displayed) is set ON.
(3) Move Pause/Resume (Bit 2)
By setting this bit ON, the animation which is currently moving is paused.
By resetting this bit to OFF, it resumes.
When you select the movement by animation table ([ Use Animation Table] is
checked), the animation resumes moving from the position where animation was
paused.
Set the bit 2 to ON
= Move Pause
Reset the bit 2 to OFF
= Move Resume
Reset the bit 2 to OFF
Moving
When you specify coordinates with command memory ([ Use Animation Table] is
unchecked), the animation resumes moving from the position according to the
command memory value.
Reset the bit 2 to OFF
Moving
Set the bit 2 to ON
= Move Pause
Reset the bit 2 to OFF
= Move Resume
It resumes from the position of the coordinates specified
in memory when the bit 2 was reset to OFF.
This bit becomes active only when the bit 0 (animation displayed/ not
displayed) is set ON.
17-10
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
[
Replay Animations Consecutively]
Set the play of the defined animation number whether only once or
consecutively.
[
Use Animation Table]
Select whether or not to use animation table to specify an animation number
or a position to display. It is recommended that you use an animation table if
you control all motion on the V series. If you specify an animation number or
moving positions with memory, you cannot use an animation table.
If you check [ Use Animation Table], set up on the [Animation Table] tab
window. (Refer to page 17-12.) If you uncheck [ Use Animation Table],
the following items are available to set up.
• Animation No.
[ Specify with Memory]
If you uncheck this box, specify the animation number to use for [No.]. If
you check this box, set the memory to specify the animation number.
• Coordinates
[ Specify with Memory]
If you uncheck this box, specify the [X] and [Y] coordinates (dot unit) to
display the animation in the coordinates field. If you check this box, set
the memory to specify the location coordinates for X and Y respectively.
17-11
17
[Animation] Dialog
[Process Cycle] (Refresh/ High Speed/ Low Speed)
Set the cycle to read a division into the PLC from the V7 series when the V7
series is communicating with the PLC. For more information, refer to
“Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
[Animation Table] Tab Window
This tab window becomes active when you check [Use Animation Table] from
the [Main] tab window.
When you control animation on the V7 series only, this animation table allows
you to create an animation easily. You can set up to 16 tables for each
animation. When you select a tab number, each setting items are displayed.
[
Use]
Check this box if you use the animation table of the number you selected.
The following setting items become active.
[Animation No.]
Specify the division number to display.
[
Use Sound]
You can play animation while playing a sound file (extension [*.WAV]).
Check this box if you want to use a sound. The following setting items
become active.
[WAV File No.]
Specify the file number of the sound file to be linked.
For information on the sound files available to use, refer to “Chapter 20 Sound Replay
Function.”
[
17-12
Play Sound Continuously]
Check this box if you want to play the sound all the time when the animation
is played.
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
[
Move]
Check this box if you want to move the animation. If you uncheck this box,
the animation is displayed in the coordinates location that you specified in
the fields of [Coordinates] within the [Display] field. If you check this box, the
following setting items become active.
[Movement Pattern]
[None]:
Move on a straight line path.
[Circle (clockwise):
Move on a clockwise circle path.
[Circle (counterclockwise): Move on a counterclockwise circle path.
[Point Count] (In the case of [Movement Pattern: None]: 2 - 32)
[Split]/[ Make it Circle] (In the case of [Movement Pattern: Circle (clockwise/
counterclockwise)]: 2 - 31)
Set the number of the coordinate points or the number of the circumference
partitions.
Ex.: In case of a straight line
Point count: 6
Ex.: In case of a circle
Split: 20
1
19 20
1
2
18
3
3
17
2
16
4
4
5
17
5
15
6
14
7
13
12
9
6
The following [Display] field describes how to specify the coordinates to
move an animation.
♦ [Display] Field
[Seconds to Replay]/[Seconds to Move] (×100 msec)
If you uncheck [ Move], set the time that animation keeps playing in a
display position. If you check [ Move], set the time that the selected
animation number moves.
[Item]/[Coordinates]
If you check [ Move] mentioned above, the items [Item] and [Coordinates]
become active according to the contents you set for [Movement Pattern]. To
set [Coordinates], you can enter a numerical value directly through the
keyboard. You can also use the mouse to specify the moving positions.
(Refer to page 17-14.)
[
New]
This setting is available when you use the mouse to specify the coordinates.
(Refer to page 17-14.) If the coordinates have not been set yet, this box is
checked. If the coordinates have already been set, this box is not checked.
17-13
[Animation] Dialog
11 10
8
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
[Specify the Coordinates by Mouse]
[ New] is checked:
Click this button, the mouse cursor as shown below is displayed.
When you select [None] for [Movement Pattern], click the desired points on
the screen as if you are drawing straight lines. The coordinates are defined
in order. Double-click to determine the points, the former dialog is displayed.
[Point Count] is automatically set according to the number of times you
clicked.
2
Start point
Click
4
Click
Click
Click
3
Double-click
End point
Mouse specifying is automatically finished when you reach the 32nd point.
When you select [Circle] for [Movement Pattern], the drawing method varies
depending on if you check [ Make it Circle] or not.
• [
Make it Circle] is checked:
: Start point
: End point
• [ Make it Circle] is unchecked:
The path is drawn with an arc.
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
: Start point
: End point
By right-clicking, the former [Animation] dialog is displayed.
17-14
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
• [ New] is unchecked:
Click this button to select the movement path of the coordinates that are
already placed on the screen. You can change points by dragging. By
right-clicking, the former [Animation] dialog is displayed.
To confirm the path on the editor:
Select [Display Environment] or [Change All Display Environment] from the [Display]
menu. The [Display Environment] dialog is displayed. See the [ Display Path of
Animation] item in the [Detail] tab window.
17
Path of animation
If you uncheck this box, all lines are removed.
17-15
[Animation] Dialog
Check this box and click [OK]. The drawing straight line, continuous straight line, circle,
or arc is displayed on the former screen.
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
Notes on Animation
About Transparency
You can hide a part of the picture in the animation frame you registered.
The background
can be seen
through the frame.
The background
can be seen
through the frame.
♦ Transparent Color Setting
1. Select [Animation] from the [Item] menu, then open the [Frame Edit] window
(refer to page 17-7).
2. Paint out non-display area of each frame using a different color from the
color of the display area.
Ex.:
Paint the part which you don’t want to
display with [Red].
3. Select [Transparent Color Setting] from the [Transform] menu. Check
[ With Transparent] and select the same color which you used to paint the
non-display area out in step 2.
Red
This makes the non-display area the transparent color. When you display
the frame on the screen, the background can be seen though the
non-display area.
17-16
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
♦ Transparent Color Setting for the Screen
There are various transparent colors available for each frame of animation.
However, one of them is already set for the screen due to the system structure.
Default color is as shown below.
If you use this color for the area you want to display, that area will not be shown
and the background will be displayed.
The same color as [Transparent
Color] for the screen
On the V7 screen
The color is [Transparent
Color] of the frame.
17
In this case, you need to use the different transparent color from the one for the
screen.
Follow the steps below.
1. Open the screen on which the animation is displayed.
2. Select [Display Environment] or [Change All Display Environment] from the
[Display] menu. The [Screen Setting] dialog is displayed.
3. Click the [Animation] tab to open its window. Select the desired transparent
color.
Select a color that you did
not use in the frame.
17-17
Notes on Animation
The area of the frame, which uses the
transparent color of the screen, is not displayed.
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
Structure of Layers
You can place an animation only on the base screen.
Although animation is placed on the base screen, it actually exists in a different
area. The figure below explains the screen structure.
(4) Video (only one display channel)
(3) Animation
(5) Overlap
(Superimpose)
(1) Base or video
(more than one display channel)
(2) Overlap or video
(more than one display channel)
As shown in the figure above, when you display the overlap while displaying an
animation, be sure to set “with superimpose” for the overlap to be displayed.
If you set “without superimpose,” animation is displayed over the overlap.
Only one overlap can be displayed on the one screen even if you set “with
superimpose.”
Note that when a video, which displays only one channel, is set on the same
screen as an animation, the video is displayed over the animation.
17-18
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
Limitations
• Frame size limit
If the capacity of each frame is less than or equal to 128 kB, up to 800 dots
(width) × 600 dots (height) is available.
• Maximum number of the motion
You can set up to 256 animation dialogs for each screen. However, the
maximum number of animations you can display simultaneously is 64. Even
if you set the bit ON, any animation after the 65th is not displayed.
• Registration of animation
An animation can be set only on the base screen. You can not place it on an
overlap.
• To display animation with high speed:
When you display animation with high speed, the size and numbers of
frames you can use for each screen are limited.
Per one frame
Size: Width (W) × Height (H) = less than or equal to 9,600 dots
Ex.: 120W × 80H = 9600 dots
120 dots
17
80 dots
Per one frame
The number of frames (Max): 32
(When you display the same frame simultaneously on the same
screen, the number of frames is count as one.)
Note that you need to follow the both limitations to display animation with
high speed.
17-19
Notes on Animation
* The limitation of the frame color is the same for [32k colors],
[128 colors], [16 colors] and [8 colors].
Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only)
Example of the Animation Setting
The following describes the animation as shown below.
Display by setting the bit 0 of D100 to ON
(V7 series models: VGA)
Moving sideways in 10 seconds
(0 , 50)
(400 , 50)
Moving
lengthways in 8
seconds
(400 , 480)
When it reaches here, the picture is no longer displayed.
The registration of the animation number and the setting of the [Animation]
dialog on the screen are as shown below:
• Registration of animation ([Item] → [Animation])
- Animation No. 0
(= register panels to move sideways)
Frame: No. 0 - No. 1
Seconds to replay: 1 second
(Changing frame No. 0 and No. 1 and display in 1
second)
- Animation No. 1
(= register panels to move lengthways)
Frame: No. 2 - No. 3
Seconds to replay: 1 second
(Changing frame No. 2 and No. 3 and display in 1
second)
Register Frame No. 0 and No. 1
in accordance with the setting of
animation No. 0.
Frame No. 0
Frame No. 1
The picture of
walking sideways
Register Frame No. 2 and No. 3
in accordance with the setting of
animation No. 1.
Frame No. 2
Frame No. 3
The picture of
walking forwards
• Setting animation on the screen
[Main] tab window
[Animation Table] tab window
[Command Memory: D100]
[0] tab window
[1] tab window
[
Replay Animations Consecutively]
[Animation No. 0]
[Animation No. 1]
[
Use Animation Table]
[
Move]
[Movement Pattern: None] [
[Point Count: 2]
17-20
Move]
[Movement Pattern: None]
[Point Count: 2]
[Seconds to Move: 100] (×100 msec)
[Seconds to Move: 60] (×100 msec)
[Coordinates] [X0 : 0]
[Y0 : 50]
[X1 : 400]
[Y1 : 50]
[Coordinates] [X0 : 400]
[Y0 : 50]
[X1 : 400]
[Y1 : 480]
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
ó
Video Display (V7i Only)
You can display video by connecting the video input model (V7i) to a unit
(option) which supports video input.
The video input supported unit for model V7i is as follows:
• EU-00 (video input + sound output)
The V7 series (standard type) does not support the video input.
For information on video display for the V6 or V6 compatible, refer to “Chapter 2 Overlap.”
Outline
Easy Display by Connecting to Video
• Display NTSC/PAL signals (VGA) on the screen of the V7i.
You can display a video screen easily by simply setting the video display
items.
18
Outline
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Display an image from the connected video input on the
MONITOUCH screen
• Video display is available both on the VGA type (V710iT only) and the SVGA
type (V7xxiS).
Note that the SVGA type takes a little longer to display video than the VGA type.
18-1
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Superimpose
When you display an ordinary operation screen (such as switches or text) that
you created on an overlap, over the video display, you can make the operation
screen transparent so as not to obscure the video display. (Superimpose)
Overlap
(With superimpose)
Video display
Up to Four Channels are Available to Display Simultaneously
When you switch the channels during only one channel is displayed, use [Video Display]
on the overlap. For more information, refer to “Chapter 2 Overlap.”
• You can display up to four channels on one screen. (Select: 1/2/4 channel)
• Two or four channels take a little longer to display than one channel.
However, you can adjust the process speed by specifying the display priority.
(Specify Display Priority)
Ex.1: Four channels display
Ex.2: Two channels display
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
F1
F1
F2
F2
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
F5
F6
F6
F7
POWER
18-2
F7
POWER
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Snap Function
You can capture a video image, which is currently displayed, as a still image.
You can save the still image into a CF card. Double-click on the video screen or
execute “snap” with the macro command. There are two snap functions.
• Single Snap
Import one video image, which is currently displayed, when executing
“snap.”
Video
SYSTEM
Snap the image displayed currently.
(Save the image into a CF card
when it is inserted into the V series)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Execute “snap”!
POWER
• Strobe Snap
When executing “snap,” import a video by copying a number of frames (16
frames in total) similar to strobe photography.
Strobe snap the image displayed currently.
(Save the image into a CF card when it is
inserted into the V series)
Outline
Video
18
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Execute “strobe snap”!
POWER
16 frames in total (each frame 160 × 120 dot size)
18-3
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
JPEG Display
You can display a snap image, which was saved into a CF card as a JPEG file,
on the screen again. If you execute snap when using a CF card, the “snap”
image is automatically saved as a JPEG file into a certain folder on the CF card.
It is called and displayed by using [JPEG Display] item on the screen.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7 Only).”
Change screen
Video
Snap image
SYSTEM
CF card
SYSTEM
F1
F1
F2
F2
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
F5
96MB
F7
CompactFlash Card
96MB
CompactFlash Card
F6
F6
F7
Save
POWER
POWER
The snap image stored in the CF card. JPEG file is
displayed by using JPEG display function.
Double-click Operation
By double-clicking the video image displayed, you can set up a desired action to
be performed.
Ex.: Enlarged display
Video
POWER
Double-click on the screen
18-4
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
F1
F1
F2
F2
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
F5
F6
F6
F7
F7
POWER
The display is enlarged.
(By double-clicking once again, the former size is restored.)
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Setting Items for Video Display
System Setting
Screen Edit
Video Setting
(Page 18-5)
[Video] icon
Video tool bar
Page 18-6
Page 18-13
Page 18-13
Video Setting
Set up the dialog as shown below.
18
[Video Input] ([NTSC]/[PAL])
Select the type of the video input signal to be used.
[Limitation of Snap Files at AUTO] (0 - 255)
If you select [AUTO] to save video snap images into a CF card, the images
are automatically saved with consecutive numbers. (Refer to page 18-12.)
You can specify the maximum number to be saved.
[When Exceeding the Limitation of Snap File] ([Stop]/[Continuous])
Set the processing rule when you exceed the [Limitation of Snap Files at
AUTO] mentioned above.
[Stop]:
Snap action stops.
[Continuous]: Images are saved and overwritten continuously, with starting
from the fist name.
For more information, refer to page 18-12.
18-5
Setting Items for Video Display
To set up this dialog, you can also start by selecting the [Video] icon, the [Detail] icon,
the [Video] dialog, then the [Video Setting] button.
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
[Video] Dialog
[Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
You can place one [Video Display] item in one division. This setting is
necessary to establish a link with display area part to display the video.
[Display] Tab Window
[Display Channel Count]
Specify the number of the channels, which are connected to the V7i, to be
displayed on the display area parts linked to the [Video Display] item.
Display size per channel should be set with [Display Size].
• [Display Channel Count: 1]
160 × 120
320 × 240
640 × 480
640 × 240
• [Display Channel Count: 2]
160 × 120
320 × 240
• [Display Channel Count: 4]
160 × 120
18-6
320 × 240
640 × 480
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
[Channel Select] ([Area 1]/[Area 2]/[Area 3]/[Area 4])
Specify the display areas and the channels to be displayed. The area to be
set depends on the number of [Display Channel Count] mentioned above.
• [Display Channel Count: 1]
• [Display Channel Count: 2]
Area 1
Area 1
• [Display Channel Count: 4]
Area 2
or
Area 1
Area 2
Area 1
Area 3
Area 4
Area 2
[Display Size] ([160*120]/[320*240]/[640*480]/[640*240])
Select the display dot size for one channel. The origin of the size is the top
left corner of the display area part which is placed on the screen.
To change the display size while the video is displaying, use [Enlarge] display function
(640 × 480 dot is fixed) or “Video Display” on the overlap. For more information on
“Video Display” by overlap, refer to “Chapter 2 Overlap.”
Ex.
18
[Display Channel Count: 1] [Display Size: 320*240]
320
[Video] Dialog
240
Area 1
[Display Channel Count: 2] [Display Size: 320*240]
240
320
320
Area 1
Area 2
For more information on display area parts, refer to page 18-13.
• Display area part is not displayed on the V7i. It is placed to define the
video display position on the editor.
• If you select the bigger size than the screen, a part of the image will be cut
off on the V7i.
18-7
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
[Movement] Tab Window
[Movement at the Double Click Timing]
You can perform the following action by double-clicking on the currently
displayed video image.
When the number of [Display Channel Count] is [2] or more, double-clicking
works for one channel only.
• [None]
There is no action.
• [Specify Display Priority (Focus Designation)]
This item becomes active when you specify [2] or more for [Display Channel
Count] under the [Display] tab window. When 2 or 4 channels are displayed
on the same display area, display speed is the same for each channel,
unless you check [ Specify Display Priority].
CH1
CH2
Normally, it is displayed with the same
number of frames.
Check [Specify Display Priority (Focus Designation)] and double-click either
channel. That channel is displayed preemptively (= a higher number of
frames and faster display speed than the other channels).
CH1
CH2
CH1
Double-click
CH2
Display of the double-clicked channel
is prioritized (= the number of frames
increases). Display speed of CH1
decreases (= the number of frames
decreases).
• [Enlarge/Resize]
You can enlarge the image by double-clicking (size: 640 × 480 dots) and
restore it by double-clicking again.
Video
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
F1
F1
F2
F2
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
F5
F6
F6
F7
F7
POWER
Double-click the image you want to enlarge
18-8
POWER
The double-clicked image is enlarged
(By double-clicking again, it is restored to its former size.)
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
• [Single Snap]
Execute “snap” by double-clicking. When an image is being imported, the
video is displayed as a still image. It is released when the import is
completed.
• [Strobe Snap]
Execute “strobe snap” by double-clicking. (The strobe images are displayed
and remained as still images.) By double-clicking again, it is restored to its
former size.
Strobe Snap
Import the target video by copying a number of frames similar to strobe photography.
The image of the copied frames is displayed on the full screen of the MONITOUCH.
The image contains 16 strobe snap shots (160 × 120 dot size each). 16 shots are
processed as one image (640 × 480 dots).
Strobe snap order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
When executing a “strobe snap,” other operations or macros are not available.
Wait until the strobe snap has completed.
18
[Centering]
[Top Right]
[Bottom Left]
Video enlarged display
Video enlarged display
Video enlarged display
18-9
[Video] Dialog
[Enlarged Display Position] ([Centering] [Top Right] [Bottom Left])
This option becomes active when you use SVGA models (V712iS, V710iS,
V708iS) for video display. If you perform enlarged display (by
double-clicking or using macro [ZOOM]), a part of the base screen is shown
because the video display size will be 640 × 480 dots on the SVGA models.
In this case, specify the display position.
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
[
: Priority displaying
Specify Display Priority]
This setting is effective when you place several video displays on the screen.
Displaying multiple video images takes longer than displaying one video
image. With this setting, you can give one channel priority to display faster
than the other channels. Display priority is only available one channel per
screen.
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
[Display Channel Count: 4]
Specify Display Priority: CH2]
[
CH1
CH2
[Display Channel Count: 1]
Specify Display Priority: CH1]
[
[Display Channel Count: 1]
Specify Display Priority]
[
[
Display Operation Screen When Clicking (Superimpose)]
When you use this function, you cannot use [Movement at the Double Click
Timing] mentioned above.
By checking this box, the specified overlap is displayed over the video
display when you click the video image. If you set [Superimpose] for the
overlap to be called, you can display it for the operation screen while
displaying the video image. (For information on “Superimpose,” refer to
page 18-18.)
• [Overlap No.]
Specify the number of overlap to be displayed.
You cannot call multi-overlap. Only normal and call-overlap are available.
18-10
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
[Snap] Tab Window
Snap and CF card
When a CF card is inserted in the V7i, snap and strobe snap images are stored into the
CF card. When you insert the CF card into the V7i, the following folders are created for
the screen data only.
CF Card
Dat0000 (Access folder)
Bitmap
Card
Dsp
Font
Hdcopy
Jpeg
Memo
Recipe
Sample
Snap
Sram
Wav
Webserv
* You can set up a desired name for
the access folder for each screen
data file.
Test (Access folder) *
Demo (Access folder) *
The snapped images are saved in the [Snap] folder with the file name of “VDxxxxx.jpg”
(0 to 32767).
18
For both single snap and strobe snap, the images are stored as one JPEG file.
[Video] Dialog
VD00000.jpg
VD00005.jpg
Saving to the files varies depending on whether you select [Auto Designation] or
[Custom] for [Snap File Name] in the [Snap] tab window. For more information, refer to
the next page.
18-11
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
[Snap File Name]
This setting becomes active only when a CF card is inserted in the V7i.
• [AUTO Designation] (0 - 254)
If you select this option, snap files are saved automatically with consecutive
numbers starting from “VD00000.jpg.” When [Limitation of Snap Files at
AUTO] ([System Setting] → [Video Setting]) is set as well, existing files are
overwritten and saved with starting back at “VD00000.jpg.”
• [Custom] ([File No.]) (0 - 32767)
Be sure to specify the file number. The snap file is saved into the specified
“VDxxxxx.jpg” file. If the specified file has a data, the snap file is overwritten
and saved.
If you select [AUTO], files are automatically created up to the number that you specified
in the [Limitation of Snap Files at AUTO] field ([System Setting] → [Video Setting]). If
you select [Custom], you can write image data only into the number of files you
specified.
Ex.: Set as shown below:
• [Snap File Name: AUTO Designation]
[Limitation of Snap Files at AUTO: 10]
Created with
consecutive
numbers
VD00000.jpg
VD00001.jpg
VD00002.jpg
• [Snap File Name: Custom]
[File No.: 30]
VD00030.jpg
When exceeding
the limit,
overwritten from
the first file.
Always
overwritten to
the specified
file.
VD00008.jpg
VD00009.jpg
When the screen data has both snap settings of [AUTO] and [Custom], set the file
number, under [Custom], in the range of [Limitation of Snap Files at AUTO] and not
exceeding the maximum file number [32767].
When [Auto] is set, the number you snapped last is stored in the system memory $s932
(Refer to page 18-14.).
[Exposure Intervals] (× 100 ms)
This setting is effective when you execute “strobe snap.”
Specify the speed of continuous snap.
JPEG Display
The snap image stored in a CF card can be displayed on the V7i again by using the
[JPEG Display] function. For more information, refer to “Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7
Only).”
18-12
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Display Area
Display area part is required for video display. By placing it in the same division
as the [Video] dialog, it is linked as the display area for the video display.
Notes When Placing
The size of the display area is automatically calculated by the editor from
[Display Size] and [Display Channel Count] that are set in the [Video] dialog.
The display area is automatically resized and placed.
Switches
There are two switches for video display. To identify which video display item is
linked to a switch, use the same division number for the [Video Display] dialog
and for each [Switch].
Function
Pause *1
Restart
Attachment
setting
Contents
Auto *3
Make the prioritized channel display a still image. *2
CH1 to CH4
Make the specified channel display a still image.
Auto *3
Release the static status of the prioritized channel display *2
CH1 to CH4
Release the static status of the specified channel display.
18
18-13
Display Area
*1 Enlarged display is not available when pausing.
*2 The operation is not performed when more than one channel is displayed and the
display priority is not set.
*3 For the display priority with [AUTO] selected, refer to page 18-17.
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Macro
By using macro, you can set up the movement of the video screen and color
adjustment. When not setting macro, the video screen is displayed with default
values.
Contents of the Default for the Video Screen
Items
Types
Brightness
Contrast
Default value
0 (Dark) to 31 (Bright)
16
0 (Weak) to 31 (Strong)
16
0 (Light) to 31 (Deep)
16
Color strength
The status of video display is output in the system memory ($s) of the internal
memory. The contents of output are as follows:
Address
Contents
$s910
Video CH1 Brightness
$s911
Video CH1 Contrast
$s912
Video CH1 Color strength
$s913, 914
(System reserved)
$s915
Video CH2 Brightness
$s916
Video CH2 Contrast
$s917
Video CH2 Color strength
$s918, 919
(System reserved)
$s920
Video CH3 Brightness
$s921
Video CH3 Contrast
$s922
Video CH3 Color strength
$s923, 924
(System reserved)
$s925
Video CH4 Brightness
$s926
Video CH4 Contrast
$s927
Video CH4 Color strength
$s928, 929
(System reserved)
$s930 (Video status)
Video status
$s931
(System reserved)
$s932
AUTO file number
$s933
Focus CH number (Display Priority)
$s934
CH number of the display area touched
• $s930 (Video status)
15 14 13 12
0
0
0
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1: Snapping
1: Video board error occurred
System reserved (Set [0])
1: Snap file are full
*Bit 0 (Snapping)
When saving to a CF card, VGA (640 × 480 dots) size takes about 4 to 5 seconds.
18-14
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
• $s932
This is active when you select [AUTO Designation] in the [Snap] tab window.
The file number which was snapped last is stored. For more information on
[AUTO Designation], refer to page 18-12.
• $s933
The channel number (1 to 4), which is prioritized currently, is stored. If
nothing is prioritized, “−1” is stored.
• $s934
The channel number (1 to 4), which you touched in the display area, is
stored. As a default, “1” is stored.
Macro Setting
The available macro command in video display items is the type [VIDEO2].
Display the [Line] dialog on the macro window. Click the [Command] button.
The [Command] dialog is displayed. Select [VIDEO2] in the [Command] field,
then click [OK].
18
Macro
The macro command [VIDEO] is available only the case of overlap [Type: Video].
For more information, refer to “Chapter 2 Overlap.”
If you press the [F0] button, macro commands of [VIDEO2] are displayed.
18-15
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
When selecting a command:
• SNAP ([Auto]/[CH(1 to 4)], [File No. (AUTO/0 to 32767)])
Performs a single snap. When you use a CF card, you can specify the
method to store the snap image. This command is ignored when video is not
displayed on the screen.
• STROBE ([Auto]/[CH(1 to 4)], [File No. (AUTO/0 to 32767)])
Performs a strobe snap. When you use a CF card, you can specify the
method to store the snap image. This command is ignored when video is not
displayed on the screen.
• RE_SIZE
Restores the size of the video screen which was enlarged by double clicking
on video display, using the ZOOM macro command, or by a strobe snap.
The size is restored by double-clicking on the enlarged video display.
• ZOOM ([AUTO]/[CH(1 to 4)])
Enlarges the video screen (640 × 480 dots). If this command is performed
continuously, the previous action is automatically cleared.
• BRIGHT ([AUTO]/[CH (1 to 4)], [BRIGHT(0 to 31)]) Adjusts the brightness of
the video image.
• CONTRAST ([AUTO]/[CH(1 to 4)], [CONTRAST(0 to 31)])
Adjusts the contrast of the video image.
• COLOR ([AUTO]/[CH(1 to 4)], [COLOR(0 to 31)])
Adjusts the color of the video image.
• VIDEO-INF ([AUTO]/[CH(1 to 4)], [SAVE]/[DEFAULT])
You can save the status of the video currently displayed or restore it to the
default display. If you select [SAVE], the display status saved by the [SAVE]
command is kept even if a power failure occurs. When you display video
again, the status will be the same as the previous one. If you perform
[Default], the status is restored to the default.
• PAUSE ([Auto]/[CH(1 to 4)])
Pauses the video display of the channel that you specified. You cannot
make a size change while paused.
• RESTART ([Auto]/[CH(1 to 4)])
Restarts the video display that is paused by PAUSE.
• DELETE (File No. (0 to 32767))
Deletes a JPEG file (File name: VDxxxxx.jpg) saved in a CF card by the
snap function.
18-16
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
When specifying memory:
The contents of the setting are as follows:
Available devices
Internal
memory
PLC memory
Constant
Memory Card
Indirect
F0
Video 2 MEMORY F0
F0 memory
n
n+1
n+2
Command
name
Command
No.
Command No.
CH No./File No.
Setting Value
CH No./File No.
Setting Value
SNAP
0
1 to 4 (CH) −1 (AUTO)
0 to 32767 (File No.)/−1 (AUTO)
STROBE
1
1 to 4 (CH) −1 (AUTO)
0 to 32767 (File No.)/−1 (AUTO)
RE_SIZE
2
ZOOM
3
1 to 4 (CH) −1 (AUTO)
0 to 2 (Centering/Top Right/ Bottom
Left: at SVGA only)
BRIGHT
4
1 to 4 (CH) −1 (AUTO)
0 to 31
CONTRAST
5
1 to 4 (CH) −1 (AUTO)
0 to 31
COLOR
6
1 to 4 (CH) −1 (AUTO)
0 to 31
VIDEO_INF
7
1 to 4 (CH) −1 (AUTO)
0: SAVE, 1: DEFAULT
PAUSE
8
1 to 4 (CH) −1 (AUTO)
RESTART
9
1 to 4 (CH) −1 (AUTO)
DELETE
10
0 to 32767 (File No.)
About AUTO
When setting macro, you can set [AUTO] for the channel number (CH) and the
file number.
1. When the display is zoomed, the commands are performed for the
zoomed channel.
2. When the display priority is set, the commands are performed for the
prioritized channel.
3. When either 1 or 2 is not applied, the operation depends on the number
of displayed channels: if only one channel is displayed, the commands
are performed for the displayed channel; if multiple channels are
displayed, the commands are not performed.
• File number is set to [AUTO]:
[SNAP] [STROBE]
The commands are incremented starting from [0] when no file exists, or
starting from the maximum number when some files exist. When reaching
the number of limitation, the commands are not performed anymore if you
set [Stop] for [When Exceeding the Limitation of Snap File]. If you set this to
[Auto], the commands are performed starting back to [0].
For more information on [Limitation of Snap Files at AUTO] and [When Exceeding the
Limitation of Snap File], refer to page 18-5.
18-17
Macro
• Channel number is set to [AUTO]:
[SNAP] [STROBE] [RESIZE] [ZOOM] [BRIGHT] [CONTRAST] [COLOR]
[VIDEO_INF] [PAUSE] [RESTART]
18
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Superimpose (Overlap)
For example, when a video is displayed on the full screen (640 × 480 dots) of the
V710iT (VGA), you cannot operate the switches, etc., on the screen. To operate
the switches while displaying the video, you can call overlap with “superimpose”
on the video display.
Overlap
(With superimpose)
Video display
If you display overlap without “superimpose” on the video display, the video image is
static.
• “Superimpose” is available for any overlap (Normal/ Multi/ Call).
• By setting [Blend Value] in the [Superimpose Setting] tab window, you can
adjust the transparent level of the overlap.
* Note that you can set the transparent color and blend value on the screen
only. You need to set the blend value, etc., on the actual displayed screen,
when overlap is multi or call that is registered under the multi-overlap
([Item]).
18-18
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Setting Procedure
• There is a setting item [ Superimpose] in the [Overlap] dialog.
[Superimpose] is set by checking this box.
• In the case of normal overlap on the screen, if you check [ Superimpose],
the [Superimpose Setting] button becomes active. Click the [Superimpose
Setting] button. The [Screen Setting] dialog is displayed.
For call-overlap or multi-overlap, click [Screen Setting] from the [Edit] menu that you set
[Call] or [Multi], then click the [Superimpose Setting] tab.
[Transparent Color]
When you use the superimpose function, one color is always transparent
when the overlap is displayed on the video display. This is due to the system
structure. You need to specify that color. To avid displaying the video image
transparent, set one color that you do not use on the overlap.
Color
Video
Overlap
(superimpose)
If you use the color (ex. black) which is
set as [Transparent Color] on the overlap
(ex. switch off color), the background
(ex. video display) is displayed as is.
18-19
Superimpose (Overlap)
The same dialog as above
18
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
[Blend Value] (0 (Light) to 255 (Deep))
Set the blend ratio of the overlap to the video display. When the blend value
is closer to [0], overlap is displayed faintly. The overlap becomes more
visible as you increase blend value closer to [255]. [255] is the same status
as without “superimpose.”
Only one type of this setting is available for one screen. You cannot change
the setting for each overlap.
Calling Methods
♦ The Same as Usual Overlap:
The calling method of [ Superimpose] (checked) is the same as
[ Superimpose] (unchecked). The calling method varies depending on the
type of overlap (normal, call, multi). Refer to the calling methods for each type
(Chapter 2).
♦ Calling from the Video Items:
Depending on the setting of the video display items, you can call overlap with
“superimpose” by clicking the video display.
Note that the method above only available for [Normal] or [Call] overlap.
Click the [Detail] icon of the video display item to be clicked. The [Video] dialog
is displayed. Click the [Movement] tab to set the following.
[
Display Operation Screen When Clicking (Superimpose)]
By checking this box, the specified overlap is displayed when you click the
video image.
• [Overlap No.]
Specify the number of overlap to be displayed.
18-20
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Notes
• Only one overlap with “superimpose” is available for a screen.
If you display multiple overlaps with “superimpose” simultaneously, only the
first displayed overlap becomes active.
• You cannot set the video display items on the overlap with “superimpose.”
To place the video display items on the overlap, set to without “superimpose”
(uncheck [Superimpose]).
18
Superimpose (Overlap)
18-21
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Settings for the Video Menu Window
You can set the default overlap screen easily. This screen has functions for the
picture adjustment (brightness, contrast, and color) and snap.
Setting Procedure
(Open the screen you display the video menu on.)
•
Tool
Add Video Menu
Set [Call] overlap automatically on the opened screen.
Add the video menu automatically to the multi-overlap No. xxxx.
•
Multi-overlap Edit
Video menu window
No. xxxx
Change the design and the size.
When changing the
design of the video
menu
Within [Part] auxiliary tool box
•
Screen Edit
[Overlap (Call)] dialog
[Overlap] icon
[MLIB Placement] button
Change the placement
position.
When changing the
display position of the
video menu
Setting to call the video menu:
•
Screen Edit
Video tool bar
[Video] icon
Detail
or
•
Screen Edit
[Movement] tab window
Display Operation Screen When
Clicking (Superimpose)
[Switch] icon
[Function: Overlap]
(Movement): ON/ ALT
[Overlap No.]
Setting to make the video menu transparent (superimpose):
•
Screen Edit
Edit
Screen Setting
[Superimpose Setting] tab window
Transparent Color
Blend Value
18-22
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
[Tool] Menu Setting
The video menu is used for the setting to create overlap parts in the
multi-overlap edit automatically and to call it as a [Call] overlap. You can register
the video menu under the [Tool] menu.
1. Open the screen you display the video menu on.
2. Select [Add Video Menu Video] from the [Tool] menu. The [Add Video Menu]
dialog is displayed as shown below.
3. Specify the desired multi-overlap number and click [OK]. The confirmation
dialog is displayed as shown below.
Multi-overlap edit number
Screen edit overlap number
In the [Part] auxiliary tool box on the screen, the [Call] overlap icon with the
overlap number, displayed in the confirmation dialog in step 3, is registered.
On the top left corner, “MLIB” mark is displayed to indicate the overlap
placement position.
The video menu is registered as an overlap part of [Multi-overlap Edit]. For
more information, refer to the next page.
18-23
Settings for the Video Menu Window
4. Click [OK]. The registration is completed.
18
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Confirming the Registered Video Menu
The set video menu is registered on the multi-overlap edit. Open the
multi-overlap edit specified in step 3 above. The following video menu is
registered.
You can freely change a design, size, or color for an overlap. Editing method is
the same as usual for overlap, switch, or draw items. For more information,
refer to the Reference Manual (Operation).
Calling Methods
There are two methods to call the registered video menu.
♦ Clicking the video display
You can display the video menu by simply clicking the display area when the
video is displayed.
For more information, refer to page 18-20.
♦ Calling with switches or an external command
Calling method is the same as when the call-overlap is set.
For more information, refer to page 18-18.
Superimpose Setting
The registered video menu is set with “superimpose.” To change the blend
value or transparent color, review the [Superimpose Setting] tab window in the
[Screen Setting] dialog on the screen edit.
For more information, refer to page 18-18.
18-24
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Notes and Limitations on Video Display
Placement
• You can place up to four video display items on one screen.
• You can set the video display items on both the base screen and overlap.
However, if you place it on overlap and place the display area part on the top
left of the overlap, the overlap “SYSTEM switch” (refer to “Chapter 2
Overlap”) becomes invalid.
You cannot place the video display items on the overlap with “superimpose.”
♦ V710iT (VGA type)
• When you display animation and video simultaneously, the animation is
displayed on top of the video, if only one channel is displayed or if two or
more channels are displayed while performing enlarged display (or running
the [ZOOM] macro command) or snap (both single and strobe). The video is
on top of the animation, during importing a snap image, if it is a single snap,
or until the strobe display is released, if it is a strobe snap.
When you display two or more channels of video, the animation is displayed
on top of the video.
Animation
Video (1ch display)
18
Notes and Limitations on Video Display
Video (2ch display)
18-25
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
• If only one channel of video ([Display Size] is 640 × 240 dots) is displayed on
the screen, do not use an overlap with “superimpose” or an animation
display because the video display will be corrupted.
MENU
With superimpose
Run
Test
Monitor
Setting
Error
Help
In this status, the video display will be corrupted when you display an
overlap with “superimpose.”
• If only one channel of video ([Display Size] is [320 × 240 dots] or [160 × 120
dots]) is displayed on the screen, do not use an overlap with “superimpose”
and an animation display simultaneously because the video display will be
corrupted.
With superimpose
MENU
Run
Test
Monitor
Setting
Error
Help
In this status, the video display will be corrupted when you display animation.
18-26
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
♦ V7xxiS (SVGA type)
When you display animation and video simultaneously, usually the animation is
displayed on top of the video. However, if you perform enlarged display (or run
the [ZOOM] macro command) or snap (both single and strobe) when the video
display is enlarged display (or the [ZOOM] macro command is run) or when two
or more channels are displayed, the video is displayed on top of the animation.
The video is on top of the animation, during importing a snap image, if it is a
single snap, or until the strobe display is released, if it is a strobe snap.
Animation
Overlap
Video
18
Notes and Limitations on Video Display
18-27
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Display Speed
Display speed depends on the type of V7i and display methods.
VGA type (V710iT only) takes a little longer than SVGA type (V7xxiS) to display
video. Display speed decreases as the number of channels increases for either
type.
The following describes the speed for each type and display method. The
display speed settings are explained with “ : Fast,” “ : Medium,” “ : Slow,”
and “−: Stopped.”
♦ V710iT (VGA type)
: Fast
: Slow
×: Stopped
−: (No relation with the display)
• 1ch display
• 1ch display + overlap (superimpose)
• 1ch display + overlap (is not displayed on the video)
• 1ch display + overlap (is not displayed on the video)
A
• 1ch display (base screen) + 1ch display (overlap: is not displayed over the video on the base)
B
×
• 2ch (or more) display + overlap (superimpose)
• 2ch (or more) display
Enlarged display (ZOOM) or strobe snap
18-28
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
A: If an overlap is displayed over the video display on the base screen, the
video becomes a still image and the video display function stops.
* However, if you “superimpose” the overlap on the video, the video will not
be stopped and maintains the same display speed.
Stopped
If the overlap is on top
of the video display, the
video becomes a still
image.
MENU
Run
Test
Monitor
Setting
Error
Help
B: If one channel video display is set on the base screen and a video display
item is placed on the overlap, the video is displayed at high speed until
overlap is displayed.
High speed display at this point
18
At this point, both video channels are
displayed at low speed.
Overlap ON
18-29
Notes and Limitations on Video Display
When the overlap is displayed, as long as the overlap is not displayed on the
video display of the base, the number of frames decreases and is displayed
at slow speed as two channels display.
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
♦ SVGA type (V7xxiS)
: Fast
: Slow
×: Stopped
−: (No relation with the display)
• 1ch display
• 1ch display + overlap (superimpose)
• 1ch display + overlap (is not displayed on the video)
• 1ch display + overlap (is not displayed on the video)
A
• 1ch display (base screen) + 1ch display (overlap: is not displayed over the video on the base)
B
×
• 2ch (or more) display + overlap (superimpose)
• 2ch (or more) display
Enlarged display (ZOOM) or strobe snap
18-30
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
A: If an overlap is displayed over the video display on the base screen, the
video becomes a still image and the video display function stops.
* However, if you “superimpose” the overlap on the video, the video will not
be stopped and maintains the same display speed.
B: If a one channel video display is set on the base screen and a video display
item is placed on the overlap, the video is displayed as one channel display
until overlap is displayed.
When the overlap is displayed, as long as the overlap is not displayed on the
video display of the base screen, the display speed decreases as two
channels display.
* 3-channel display is slower than 2-channel, 4-channel display is slower than
3-channel because the number of frames decreases.
Display Priority
You can specify the display priority when placing multiple video displays on the
screen. (Specify Display Priority)
Specify the channel number that you want to have priority in the [Specify Display
Priority] field of the video display item. If multiple video display items are set on
one screen, the display priority is assigned to the video display that was
registered on the screen last, or to the video display that was displayed last.
CH1
18
The video display registered
(placed) last is prioritized.
[Display Channel Count: 1]
Specify Display Priority: CH1]
[
Notes and Limitations on Video Display
CH2
[Display Channel Count: 1]
Specify Display Priority: CH2]
[
18-31
Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only)
Please use this page freely.
18-32
Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7 Only)
JPEG Display (V7 Only)
You can display a JPEG file stored in a CF card on the V series. You can also
capture a video display image as a JPEG file and display it.
Note that a CF card is always required for JPEG display.
JPEG display is not available for the V708C model.
Use the [JPEG Display] item to display a JPEG file.
Outline
Easy Display of JPEG File
• Store the prepared JPEG file into a CF card and simply insert the CF card
into the V7 series. The V7 series reads the JPEG file and displays the target
file according to the setting on the screen.
19
Note that a JPEG file of large size takes a little longer to display the image.
Outline
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
JPEG file
F4
CF card
F5
96MB
CompactFlash Card
The JPEG file that stored in the CF
card is displayed on the screen.
F6
F7
POWER
V7 series
19-1
Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7 Only)
• You can access a JPEG file by specifying its file name or file number. You
can also specify the file number on the PLC.
D100 = 5
D100 = 2
RUN
JP00005.JPG is displayed.
STOP
Error
JP00005.JPG is displayed.
PLC
SYSTEM
F1
F1
F2
F2
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
96MB
F6
CompactFlash Card
96MB
CompactFlash Card
Read data from
the CF card
Error
SYSTEM
F5
F6
F7
F7
POWER
POWER
• You can set a JPEG image as wallpaper for the background on the V7
series.
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
CF card
F6
F7
96MB
CompactFlash Card
JPEG file
POWER
V7 series
Specify a JPEG file stored in
the CF card as the wallpaper.
Displaying Video Image as JPEG File
• You can display a video image, which is stored in a CF card, as a JPEG file
using the snap function.
Video
SYSTEM
F1
F2
CF card
F3
F4
Display the video
image on the screen
96MB
CompactFlash Card
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Execute
“snap”!
Store the image in
the CF card.
JPEG
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
96MB
CompactFlash Card
F5
F6
F7
POWER
• Specifying a file number and specifying file number on the PLC are available.
19-2
Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7 Only)
Setting Items for JPEG Display
To display the prepared JPEG file:
•
•
Prepare a JPEG file
Screen Edit
Store into \V6W\JPEG.
[JPEG Display] icon
JPEG display tool bar
or
Page 19-4
Page 19-6
Page 19-5
Edit
•
File
Screen Setting
CF Card Manager
Wallpaper Setting
(Page 19-7)
Write (screen data) into CF card
To display video image:
•
System Setting
•
Screen Edit
Video Setting
(Page 18-6)
19
[Video] icon
Video tool bar
Setting Items for JPEG Display
Page 18-6
Page 18-13
Page 18-13
•
Screen Edit
[JPEG Display] icon
JPEG display tool bar
Page 19-9
Page 19-10
Page 19-9
19-3
Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7 Only)
Displaying the Prepared JPEG File
JPEG file Available to Display
• When specifying file number:
JPxxxxx.JPG (xxxxx: 0 to 32767)
• When specifying file name:
xxxxxxxx.JPG (xxxxxxxx: 8 one-bite alphanumeric characters)
Store the JPEG file into \V6W\JPEG folder, which was created when the V-SFT
was installed.
[JPEG Display] Dialog
[Division No.]
You can place one [JPEG Display] item in one division. This setting is
necessary to establish a link with display area part to display the JPEG file.
[
Memory]
Check this box to assign the file number to a specific memory address. This
is useful to make a JPEG display variable. The JPEG file name format is
[JPxxxxx.JPG]. “xxxxx” is recognized as the number.
JP00001.JPG
JP00000.JPG
JP00002.JPG
In the case of [Memory: D100]
JP00002.JPG is displayed.
D100=2
RUN
STOP
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
JPEG
PLC
F1
F2
F2
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
F5
F7
96MB
19-4
SYSTEM
F1
CompactFlash Card
96MB
CompactFlash Card
[
JPEG
SYSTEM
F6
POWER
JP00000.JPG is displayed.
D100=0
F6
F7
POWER
Video Snap File Display]
Check this box to display a video image. Uncheck this box to display a
prepared JPEG file.
Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7 Only)
[File No.] (JP) / [File Name]
This setting is effective when [ Memory] is unchecked. The specified file
number or file name is displayed. When you select [File No.], the target file
is of the type “JPxxxxx.JPG (xxxxx: 0 to 32767).” When you select [File
Name], the target file is of the type “xxxxxxxx.JPG (xxxxxxxx: 8 one-byte
alphanumeric characters).” Specify the file number or file name of JPEG that
you want to display.
[Process Cycle]
Set the cycle to read data into the PLC from the V series when the V series is
communicating with the PLC.
For more information, refer to “Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”
Display Area
Display area part is required for JPEG display. By placing it in the same division
as the [JPEG Display] dialog, it is liked as the display area for the JPEG file.
♦ Notes When Placing
Display area needs to be large enough to display the JPEG file. When the
display area is smaller than the JPEG file, part of the file is cut off.
When display area is bigger than the JPEG file, a part of the display area is
shown. It is recommended that you make the display area color match the
background color.
Size is the same
19
Size is larger than JPEG file
Use a color that matches the background.
19-5
Displaying the Prepared JPEG File
Size is smaller than JPEG file
Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7 Only)
Switches
There are 4 switches for JPEG display. To identify which video display item is
linked to a switch, use the same division number for the [Video Display] dialog
and for each [Switch].
Attachment
setting
Contents
Target file
Plus block
−
Call the JPEG file with the next number of the file
currently displayed.
JPxxxxx.JPG
Minus block
−
Call the JPEG file with the previous number of
file currently displayed.
JPxxxxx.JPG
Call the JPEG file with the specified number.
JPxxxxx.JPG
Function
File calling
(JP/ VD file) No.
* The [Function: File delete] switch is available only for video image JPEG file
(VDxxxxx.JPG).
CF Card Manager
When you complete setting the JPEG display, transfer the screen data file to the
V series. Then write the necessary data (JPEG file) to a CF card with the CF
card manager and insert the card into the V series.
For the procedure for writing a JPEG file using CF card manager, refer to “Chapter 23
CF Card (V7 Only).”
When you complete writing the JPEG file to the CF card, insert the CF card into
the V series.
SYSTEM
F1
By [Transfer] of V-SFT
F2
V7 series
F3
F4
F5
Screen data file
F6
F7
POWER
JPEG file
(within \V6W\JPEG)
96MB
19-6
CompactFlash Card
By [CF Card Manager] of V-SFT
CF card
Insert to V7
Completed
Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7 Only)
Displaying as Wallpaper
JPEG file Available to Display
xxxxxxxx.JPG (xxxxxxxx: 8 one-bite alphanumeric characters)
Store the JPEG file into the \V6W\JPEG folder, which was created when the
V-SFT was installed.
[Wallpaper Setting] Tab Window ([Screen Setting] Dialog)
To use as wallpaper, select the [Wallpaper Setting] tab window in the [Screen
Setting] dialog (from the [Edit] menu).
[
Use Wallpaper]
Check this box to use wallpaper.
The following setting items become active.
19
You can also use pattern as wallpaper. For more information, refer to “Chapter 2 Screen
Composition” in the Reference Manual (Operation).
[File name]
Enter the name of the JPEG file.
[Specify Position]
• [Display Center]
19-7
Displaying as Wallpaper
[File Type] (Pattern / JPEG)
Select [JPEG] to specify the JPEG file.
Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7 Only)
• [Tile]
• [Display Corner] (Top left/ Bottom left/ Top right/ Bottom right)
Click [OK] to complete the setting. The wallpaper image is displayed on the
screen.
CF Card Manager
When you complete setting the wallpaper, transfer the screen data file to the V
series. Then write the necessary data (JPEG file) to a CF card with the CF card
manager and insert the card into the V series.
For the procedure for writing a JPEG file using CF card manager, refer to “Chapter 23
CF Card (V7 Only).”
When you complete writing the JPEG file into the CF card, insert the CF card
into the V series.
SYSTEM
F1
By [Transfer] of V-SFT
F2
V7 series
F3
F4
F5
Screen data file
F6
F7
POWER
JPEG file
(within \V6W\JPEG)
96MB
19-8
CompactFlash Card
By [CF Card Manager] of V-SFT
CF card
Insert to V7
Completed
Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7 Only)
Displaying Video Image
JPEG file Available to Display
VDxxxxx.JPG (xxxxx: 0 to 32767)
The video image, snapped by video display function, is automatically stored in
\SNAP within a CF card.
[JPEG Display] Dialog
[Division No.]
You can place one [JPEG Display] item in one division. This setting is
necessary to establish a link with display area part to display the JPEG file.
[
Memory]
Check this box to assign the file number to a specific memory address. This
is useful to make a JPEG display variable. The JPEG file name format is
“VDxxxxx.JPG.” “xxxxx” is recognized as the number.
[
Video Snap File Display]
Check this box. It automatically recognizes that files with the “VDxxxxx.JPG”
format only are displayed.
[File Specify File No.] (VD)
This setting is effective when [ Memory] is unchecked. The specified file
number is displayed. The target file is the type of “VDxxxxx.JPG (xxxxx: 0 to
32767).” Specify the file number of JPEG file that you want to display.
[Process Cycle]
Set the cycle to read data into the PLC from the V series when the V series is
communicating with the PLC. For more information, refer to “Appendix 2
Process Cycle.”
19
Displaying Video Image
Display Area
For more information, refer to page 19-5.
19-9
Chapter 19 JPEG Display (V7 Only)
Switches
There are 4 switches for JPEG display. To identify which video display item is
linked to a switch, use the same division number for the [Video Display] dialog
and for each [Switch].
Attachment
setting
Contents
Target file
Plus block
−
Call the JPEG file with the next number of the file
currently displayed.
VDxxxxx.JPG
Minus block
−
Call the JPEG file with the previous number of
file currently displayed.
VDxxxxx.JPG
Call the JPEG file with the specified number.
VDxxxxx.JPG
Delete the JPEG file which is currently displayed.
VDxxxxx.JPG
Function
File calling
File delete
19-10
(JP/ VD file) No.
−
Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function
Sound Replay Function
Outline
Replay a WAV file by setting the bit ON/OFF.
An external speaker is necessary to replay a WAV file.
Supported Type
• V7i + Option Unit (EU-0
)
You can replay sounds with the following linking functions:
• Local Replay (Replay per screen)
- Sound Item
- Animation
• Global Replay (Replay by setting the sampling bit)
- Bit sampling
- Relay sampling
- Alarm function
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
20
Outline
20-1
Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function
WAV File
WAV File Format
The following is the format of WAV files that can be replayed on the V7i:
PCM method
• Sampling rate: 8 kHz
• Quantized bit: 8 bits
• Monophonic
[File Size]
When transferring as a part of screen data: 128 kB or less
When saving to a CF card: No limit
WAV File Name
The following is the name format of WAV files that can be read by the V7i:
Only files with the following name format can be replayed.
WA
.WAV
(
: 0000 to 1023)
WAV file
WAV Folder
Save the WAV file to the \V6W\WAV folder, which was created when the V-SFT
was installed. The WAV file is transferred when transferring screen data.
Save here.
When using a CF card, use the CF Card Manager. The WAV file is not
transferred to the CF card by screen data transfer. (Refer to page 20-10.)
20-2
Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function
Sound Item
Replay sound for each screen.
Setting Items
• [Part] → [Sound] → [Sound] dialog setting
• Saving a WAV File (
Refer to page 20-2.)
[Sound] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[Division No.]
Specify the division number. (
Manual (Operation).)
20
Refer to Chapter 2 in the Reference
[
Replay Consecutively]
Check this box when you want to consecutively replay the WAV file you set in
the [Replay Sequence] tab window. (
Refer to page 20-4.)
[Sound Priority]
If you set multiple sound items for a screen, set the replaying priority. When
multiple bits are set ON simultaneously, the WAV file which has higher
priority item is replayed. However, when a WAV file linked to sampling is
replayed, the sound item stops being replayed because sampling has a
higher priority.
20-3
Sound Item
[Memory] (use bit 1)
Specify the memory address that you use to replay/stop the WAV file you set
in the [Replay Sequence] tab window. (
Refer to page 20-4.)
Replay [0 → 1]
Stop [1 → 0] (Stop even when the file is replaying.)
Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function
♦ [Replay Sequence] Tab Window
Select the WAV file to replay by setting the memory bit ON in the [Main] tab
window.
[
0] to [ 15]
Check the same number of boxes as the files to replay. Register the WAV
file number to replay by setting the memory bit ON in the [Main] tab window.
You can replay up to 16 WAV files consecutively. (
For information on
the WAV file number, refer to page 20-2.)
[File No.]
Select this when the file number of the WAV files to replay is fixed. Specify
the WAV file number. (
For information on the WAV file number, refer to
page 20-2.)
[Memory]
Select this to change the WAV file to be replayed. Specify the memory
address to store the WAV file number.
Be sure to set [Sound Setting] when you selected [Memory] in the [Replay
Sequence] tab window. Refer to page 20-9.
♦ [Detail] Tab Window
[Process Cycle]
Set the process cycle. (
20-4
Refer to “Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”)
Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function
Setting Example
Set the [Sound] dialog as shown below:
[WAV File]:
[Contents]
WA0000.WAV: Error
WA0001.WAV: occurred
WA0002.WAV:
WA0003.WAV: × ×
WA0004.WAV:
PLC memory
.. ...
D100
3
20
M 0-15
...
Error × ×
occurred.
Sound Item
ON
information
run
stop
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
PLC memory
.. . ..
D100
2
M 0-15
...
Error
occurred.
ON
information
run
stop
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
20-5
Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function
Replaying a WAV File Linking to Animation
When using an animation table, you can replay a WAV file which is linked to the
animation function. However, when a WAV file linked to sampling is replayed,
animation stops being replayed because sampling has a higher priority. For
more information on animation, refer to “Chapter 17 Animation (V7 Only).”
Setting Items
• [Animation] function
• Saving a WAV File (
Refer to page 20-2.)
[Animation] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
[
Use Animation Table]
Check this box.
♦ [Animation Table] Tab Window
[0 to 15]
Check the tab of the table number
to replay sound.
[
Use Sound]
Check this box.
[WAV File No.]
Specify the WAV file number.
(
For information on the WAV
file number, refer to page 20-2.)
[
20-6
Play Sound Continuously]
Check this box when you want to
consecutively replay the sound
file you set on [WAV File No.].
Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function
Replaying a WAV File Linking to Sampling
If [Sampling Method] is the bit sample/relay sample/alarm function, you can
replay a WAV file according to the bit set to ON/OFF.
Setting Items
• [Item] → [Message] → [Message Edit] (
Refer to page 20-8.)
• [System Setting] → [Buffering Area Setting] → [Buffering Area Setting] dialog
(
Refer to page 20-7.)
• Sampling Setting (bit sample/relay sample/alarm function)
(Sampling:
Refer to “Chapter 10 Sampling.”)
• Saving a WAV File (
Refer to page 20-2.)
Buffering Area Setting
Select the number of the buffering area to replay a sound and set the following:
For more information on other settings, refer to “Chapter 10 Sampling.”
20
Use WAV]
Check this box.
[
Replay Consecutively]
Check this box when you want to consecutively replay the WAV file that you
set on the [Message Edit] window.
20-7
Replaying a WAV File Linking to Sampling
[
Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function
Message Edit
In the [Message Edit] window, register messages corresponding to abnormal
bits and set sound files for the messages.
If the [Message Edit] window looks different from the figure above, select [Display
Change] from the [Display] menu.
[Sound]
Check the box for message to replay sound.
[WAV File No.]
Specify the WAV file number. (
refer to page 20-2.)
For information on the WAV file number,
[Sound Priority]
Set the priority to replay a WAV file. When multiple bits to replay a sound are
ON simultaneously, the WAV file that has a higher priority is replayed.
Ex. 1:
In the setting on the figure above, if the bits that have the same priority are ON, the
sound file whose bit was set ON later is replayed.
D8-00
D8-01
WA0001.WAV
WA0002.WAV
Ex. 2:
In the setting on the figure above, if the bits that have different priority are ON, the sound
file whose bit has a higher priority is replayed.
D8-14
D8-15
D8-01
WA0002.WAV
WA0005.WAV
WA0006.WAV
20-8
Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function
Sound Setting
Check if you want to transfer all WAV files in the \V6W\WAV folder when
transferring screen data.
• [System Setting] → [Sound Setting] → [Sound Setting] dialog
Be sure to check this box when you clicked the [Sound] icon (on [Part] auxiliary tool
box), then selected [Memory] in the [Replay Sequence] tab window.
Output of Sound Information ($s)
Sound information is output to internal memory ($s).
• Address $s1000
This memory stores the time period (second) until replaying a WAV file is
completed.
20
Sound Setting
20-9
Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function
Saving a WAV File to a CF Card
A WAV file is usually transferred to MONITOUCH as a part of screen data.
When transferring a WAV file, you must note that there are the following
limitations:
• The screen data capacity decreases.
• The WAV file capacity should be 128 kB or less.
You can, however, save the WAV file to a CF card rather than as screen data.
CF card setting is necessary for the above mentioned.
CF Card Setting
• Select [CF Card Setting] from the [System Setting] menu.
[
Store WAV Files to CF Card]
Check this box.
For more information on other settings, refer to “Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only).”
Saving to a CF Card
To save to a CF Card, use the CF card manager. (
Card (V7 Only).”)
20-10
Refer to “Chapter 23 CF
Chapter 21 Recipe Function
21
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F7
Recipe Function
What is Recipe Function?
There are various limitations, such as capacity, to keep necessary data on the
PLC all the time. By setting a data storage area on the V series itself, or using
an accessory of the V series as an external storage device for the PLC, the
necessary data can be read and written when needed. This function is called
“Recipe Function.”
Types
The V series has four recipe functions:
•
•
•
•
Recipe function by CF card
Memory manager function
Data management by non-volatile memory ($L, $LD) of SRAM
Backup function using the Flash ROM area
Recipe Function by CF Card (V7 Only)
Using the macro command, you can read and write CSV format files, which you
created on Windows, etc.
Manage the data in CSV format.
RUN
STOP
disc
You can read and
write data on the
CF card.
Data No.
5
SYSTEM
F1
RESET
96MB
CompactFlash Card
Puroduction dataA 5516
Puroduction dataA-1 4450
Puroduction dataA-2 5465
Puroduction dataA-3 8845
Puroduction dataA-4 6548
Puroduction dataA-5 7894
Puroduction dataA-6 5478
set value1
set value2
set value3
set value4
set value5
545
889
65
548
55
PLC
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
You can also transfer
data from the CF card
to the PLC or write the
data from the PLC to
the CF card.
POWER
V7 series
For more information, refer to “Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only).”
21-1
What is Recipe Function?
F6
POWER
Chapter 21 Recipe Function
Memory Manager Function
You can retrieve necessary data from SRAM or a CF card when required. You
can also record data from the PLC into SRAM or a CF card. The SRAM area or
CF card can be divided into up to 16 files. Each file can be divided into up to
4,095 records. Data is stored in each record.
One file can be divided into up
to 4,095 records.
A maximum of 16 divisions
is available.
File 0
File 1
One record can contain up to
4,096 words.
Record 0
Record 1
Data 0
160
Record 2
Data 1
491
Record 3
Data 2 3209
Data 3
File 2
D100
160
D101
491
D102 3209
D103
200
run
D104 8821
200
stop
SYSTEM
File 3
Record 4093
File 4
Record 4094
Data 4 8821
F1
F2
Memory Card
Mode
File 5
F3
F4
F5
F6
Record 0
F7
PLC
POWER
Record 1
File 14
File 15
Record 2
Record 3
Record 4
Data 0 3000
Data 1 120
V series
Data 2 7700
D450 3000
D451
120
D452 7700
Memory card
or internal SRAM
or SRAM cassette
or CF card
For more information, refer to “Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode.”
Data Management by Non-volatile Memory ($L, $LD) of SRAM
You can keep non-volatile (= can retain data) internal memory ($L/$LD) in a
SRAM cassette (model: V7EM-S, V6EM/RS, V6EM/Rsi, capacity: 512 kB) or
internal SRAM to retain data even when a power failure occurs.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 24 SRAM.”
Backup Function using the Flash ROM Area
Using the macro command, you can back up data in the Flash ROM area, which
is used for screen data storage.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 13 Macro.”
21-2
Chapter 22 Data Logging
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
Data Logging
F5
F6
F7
POWER
22
Outline
Outline
• All data stored in the internal buffer of the V series by sampling (refer to
“Chapter 10 Sampling”) is lost if a power failure occurs. However, if you
store sampling data in “SRAM” or on a “CF card” instead of the internal
buffer, the data is maintained even though a power failure occurs.
RUN
STOP
Effective in sampling mode
Trend Sampling
SYSTEM
F1
Sampling data from the PLC is
stored on a CF card.
PLC
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
16MB
h
s
la
tF
c
a
p
m
o
C
CF card
Power
F7
POWER
V series
Even when a power failure
occurs, data remains on the
memory card.
or internal SRAM
or SRAM cassette
or CREC
• The settings and import procedures depend on the data storage target.
• You can also import the sampling data stored in “SRAM” or a “CF card” and
use this data for other applications. When you store the data in SRAM, use
Hakko Electronics’ Memory Card Editor (model: M-CARD SFT). When you
store the data on a “CF card,” you can not only use Memory Card Editor, but
also macro to convert the data into the CSV file format on the V7 series.
This allows you to edit the data immediately using text editing software or
Excel, etc., if the CF card is read from your personal computer.
22-1
Chapter 22 Data Logging
Storage Target
Types
Data logging is a supported function when SRAM or a CF card is available on
the V series. The following are the type of SRAM and CF card that are available
on the V series:
• CF card
Purchase a commercial version of CF cards. (For information on the
recommended CF card type refer to page 22-5.)
• SRAM cassette (model: V7EM-S, V6EM/RS, V6EM/RSi)
Capacity is 512 kB.
* When using a FROM cassette (model: V7EM-F, V6EM/4, V6EM/4i), you
cannot use a SRAM cassette.
• Built-in SRAM
In the V7 series, 64 kB of SRAM is built-in. In V609E30M, 8 kB of SRAM is
built-in. You need to install a battery for both models.
• SRAM memory card (model: REC-MCARD SRAM)
You need to specify the capacity. 256 kB, 512 kB, 1 MB, 2 MB, and 4 MB
types are available. Depending on the types of the V series, you could use a
memory card by itself or you may need a card recorder (model: CREC) in
addition.
The following table lists V series models and available storage targets.
( : available ×: unavailable
: available only for specified models)
MONITOUCH models
V7
Standard
V612/V610
SRAM Memory
Card
CF Card
(+ CREC)
(V6EM/RS)
×
×
(V6EM/RS)
×
×
(V6EM/RS)
×
×
With a Memory
Card Socket
(+ CREC)
(+ CREC)
V606i
(+ CREC)
×
(+ CREC)
* Available only for V609E30M
22-2
Built-in
(V7EM-S)
V606
V609E
Cassette
(+ CREC)
V608
V608CH
SRAM
×
(V6EM/RSi)
×
×
(64 kB)
×
×
×
×
×
(8 kB)*
×
Chapter 22 Data Logging
How to Recognize a Storage Target:
Because there are several types of SRAM and a CF card that are available for
the V7, the storage target is recognized by the setting. The storage target
setting depends on the available functions and the types of V series. Refer to
the following tables:
22
• V7
Storage Target
System Setting
Buffering
Area Setting
Modular Jack
SRAM/Clock Setting
Store Target
Memory Card
Memory Card
Emulation Area
Internal Buffer
−
SRAM
SRAM
×
SRAM
×
SRAM Cassette
Store Target
−
−
Internal Buffer
−
−
CREC
(SRAM Memory Card)
SRAM Cassette
×
Built-in SRAM
SRAM
×
×
×
(Error)
CF Card
−
−
−
CF Card
SRAM Cassette
Store Target
• V612/V610
System Setting
Buffering
Area Setting
Modular Jack
SRAM/Clock Setting
Store Target
Memory Card
Memory Card
Emulation Area
Internal Buffer
−
−
−
Internal Buffer
−
−
CREC
(SRAM Memory Card)
×
×
Memory Card Socket
(SRAM Memory Card)
SRAM
SRAM
×
SRAM
×
SRAM
×
SRAM Cassette
×
(Error)
SRAM Cassette
Store Target
• V608/V606i
System Setting
Buffering
Area Setting
Modular Jack
SRAM/Clock Setting
Store Target
Memory Card
Memory Card
Emulation Area
Internal Buffer
−
−
−
Internal Buffer
−
−
CREC
(SRAM Memory Card)
SRAM
SRAM
×
SRAM
×
SRAM
×
SRAM Cassette
×
×
(Error)
×
(Error)
22-3
Chapter 22 Data Logging
• V609E
System Setting
Buffering
Area Setting
Modular Jack
SRAM/Clock Setting
Store Target
Memory Card
Memory Card
Emulation Area
Internal Buffer
−
SRAM
SRAM
×
SRAM
×
SRAM Cassette
Store Target
−
−
Internal Buffer
−
−
CREC
(SRAM Memory Card)
×
Built-in SRAM
×
(Error)
×
♦ Setting Items
[Modular Jack]
Select [Modular] from the [System Setting] menu. When you set [Memory
Card] to either [Modular Jack 1] or [Modular Jack 2] in the [Modular Jack]
dialog, you can use the SRAM memory card with the CREC (card recorder).
[SRAM/Clock Setting]
Select [SRAM/Clock Setting] from the [System Setting] menu. When you
check [ Memory Card Emulation Area] in the [SRAM/Clock Setting] dialog,
you can use the built-in SRAM or a SRAM cassette. Be sure to specify
[Number of Words].
For more information on the SRAM/clock setting and the SRAM cassette setting, refer to
“Chapter 24 SRAM.”
[Buffering Area Setting]
Select [Buffering Area Setting] from the [System Setting] menu. The
[Buffering Area Setting] dialog is displayed. Set [Store Target] to [SRAM] or
[CF Card]. Either SRAM or CF card is recognized as the storage target.
For more information on each setting item for the buffering area, refer to “Chapter 10
Sampling.”
22-4
Chapter 22 Data Logging
CF Card and SRAM Area
CF Card
22
♦ Memory Capacity
Manufacturer
Model
Capacity
TDK
TC032HS
32 MB
Kodak
KPCN-32
32 MB
SanDisk
IO Data
CF Card and SRAM Area
The recommended cards (CompactFlashTM compliant CF cards) and their
capacities are as shown below.
SDCFB-64-505
64 MB
PCCF-H128MS
128 MB
PCCF-xxxMS
(xxx: 16, 32, 48, 64, 96, 128, 192)
16 to 192 MB
♦ Lifetime
There is a limitation on the number of times you can write to a CF card. Note
that you can write to a CF card about 300,000 times.
SRAM or SRAM Cassette
♦ Memory Capacity
• The capacity of the SRAM area that is built in the V7 is 32 k words (64 kB).
• If you install a SRAM cassette into the V7 or V6, the capacity of the SRAM
area could be 256 k words (512 kB).
• The capacity of the SRAM area that is built in the V609E is 4 k words (8 kB).
The following table shows the memory capacity of each type of SRAM.
SRAM Area
Header Area (128 words)
Header Area (1024 words)
Memory Card Emulation Area
Header Area (16 words)
Storage Area for Memo Pad
Header Area (32 words)
Non-volatile Word Memory Area
$L
V7 built-in type: 32 k words
SRAM cassette: 256 k words
V609E:
4 k words
: Use in the memory
manager/data logging
function
Header Area (32 words)
Non-volatile Double Word Memory Area
$LD
In SRAM, a certain number of words are always used for “header information.”
Besides, each area always has “header information.” The area where you can
use the memory card mode is the “Memory Card Emulation Area.” You do not
need to count the capacity of the header information of any area you do not set.
For more information on memory capacity calculation, refer to “Chapter 24
SRAM.”
22-5
Chapter 22 Data Logging
♦ Lifetime
The SRAM area depends on the lifetime of the battery. The lifetime of the
battery is about 5 years. To learn if the voltage of the battery has decreased,
check system memory $s167.
MSB
$s167
LSB
15 14 13 12
11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1: FROM 2 Mbyte (V6)
2: FROM 4 Mbyte (V6)
3: SRAM 512 kbyte (V6/V7)
4: FROM 8 Mbyte (V7)
Memory cassette information reserved
(Set: 0)
0: The battery is normal.
1: The voltage of the battery has decreased.
2: The battery is not installed.
Memory cassette information reserved
(Set: 0)
SRAM Memory Card
♦ Memory Capacity
256 kB, 512 kB, 1 MB, 2 MB, and 4 MB types are available. The area used as
the header information is in the same location as each memory card.
0
Card information
Header information (1024 words)
1023
1023
1024
1024
File information
File 0
File 1
File 2
Size of all files
File 3
File 4
File 15
♦ Lifetime
The SRAM area depends on the lifetime of the battery. The lifetime of the
battery depends on the capacity. Contact your local distributor. To learn if the
voltage of the battery has decreased, select [System Setting], [Memory Card
Setting], then [I/F Memory] (Refer to “Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode”).
22-6
Chapter 22 Data Logging
Calculation of File Size
(Unit: word)
Data File
Bit Synchronize
(The number of words +2) × Sampling times
Constant Sample
(The number of words +2) × Sampling times
Bit Sample
3 × Sampling times
Alarm function
3 × Sampling times + 15 + The number of words × 96
Temp. Control
Net/PLC2
*1
(The number of words +2) × Sampling times
*1 The “number of words” for Temp. Control Net/PLC2 is equal to the number of words
of memory used in [Temp. CTRL/PLC2 Way Table [No.] specified in the [Buffering
Area Setting] dialog ([Table No.]).
*2 Relay sampling cannot be used for buffering files.
22-7
22
CF Card and SRAM Area
Buffering File*2
(Bytes of record name ÷ 2 + The number of data) × The number of
records
Chapter 22 Data Logging
When Storing to a CF Card:
This section describes setting items for data logging. It assumes that you have
already set the sampling mode. For more information on the sampling mode,
refer to “Chapter 10 Sampling.”
Setting Procedure
Setting items are as follows:
•
System Setting
Buffering Area Setting
No. 0 (to 11)
Use Sample Buffer
No
Yes
•
System Setting
Store Target
CF Card
Output File No.
n (0 to 15)
Automatically
set [Type] of the
same number.
Memory Card Setting
No. 0 (to 15)
I/F Memory
Type
•
System Setting
Buffering File
CF Card Setting
Use Cache
No
Yes*
Yes
Format Buffering Area Automatically
* Depending on the save timing, you need to set the [SMPL_SAVE]
macro command.
•
Part
No
Switch
Function: CF Card Format (Buffer)
*1
*1
When using this switch, only Smpxxxx.bin files in the \Sample folder on the CF
card are formatted. Note that the whole CF card is not formatted. However, when
the data file format by the memory manager function is different even if the
sampling format is the same, you need to perform [Function: Card Format] in the
memory card mode. Otherwise, sampling is not performed. In the card format,
both the data file and the sampling file are formatted.
When importing the imported sampling data into your personal computer:
•
Macro
Attribute Table
22-8
This setting is necessary when
the sampling format is different.
SMPL_CSV
(Auto Creation)
Chapter 22 Data Logging
Buffering Area Setting and Memory Card Setting
When using a CF card, be sure to select [Store Target: CF Card] in the [Buffering
Area Setting] dialog. The editor recognizes [Output File No.] that you specify,
identifies [No.] of the appropriate [Memory Card Setting], and automatically sets
[Type: Buffering File].
22
When writing data into a CF card, you should collect data into a “cache” in the V
series. This is because a CF card has a limitation on writing times. When the
cache is full or only when needed, you can write all data in the cache into a CF
card at once. To do this, select [CF Card Setting] from the [System Setting]
menu.
When Storing to a CF Card:
Cache Setting
For more information on cache, refer to “Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only).”
Setting and Importing Procedures on the V Series
To start data logging, perform the following procedures on the V series:
Connect the V series to the PLC.
[
Format Buffering Area Automatically]
Sampling format is the same.
[
Format Buffering Area Automatically]
Sampling format is different.
Perform auto-formatting.
Perform formatting.
Start sampling.
Immediately after running, sampling is possible and data logging begins.
* When importing data to a CF card as a CSV file
Perform the [SMPL_CSV] macro command.
♦ Note
• Unless you reset a CF card, the data stored on a CF card is saved.
(Except when you format a CF card.)
• When you remove a CF card from the V7 series, sampling is temporarily
stopped and data is not imported. If sampling data is displayed on the
screen, the data is lost. When you reset a CF card, the history of data
imported in the past is displayed and sampling begins again.
22-9
Chapter 22 Data Logging
♦ Formatting
If the format of the CF card that you inserted is different and you select [CF Card
Setting] from the [System Setting] menu and check [Format Buffering Area
Automatically], a sampling file is automatically formatted when inserting the CF
card. If a sampling file (Smpxxxx.bin) already existed, it is overwritten. If you
select [CF Card Setting] from the [System Setting] menu and uncheck
[ Format the Buffering Area Automatically], you need to press the [Function:
CF Card Format (Buffer)] switch and format the sampling file.
* However, when you set not only sampling files but also data files for the
memory manager function to a CF card, if the data file format is different,
sampling will not begin. In this case, you need to press the [Function: Card
Format] switch to format both data files and the sampling files.
[Differences between the [ CF Card Format] Switch and the [Card Format] Switch
[The [ CF Card Format] switch is available only for sampling files. When using this
switch, the V series checks the sampling format. If the format is different, only sampling
files (Smpxxxx.bin) whose formats are different are formatted.
Therefore, when you press this switch, if a sampling file that has the same format exists
and it is under sampling, you do not need to clear data. (Note that this switch causes a
beep whether or not a file is formatted.) If you use the memory manager function (refer
to “Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode”) as well as sampling files, the recipe data used in
the memory manager function is not formatted by this switch. Note that the memory
manager function is not displayed until the sampling format matches. When the format
matches, the memory manager screen also works correctly.
Meanwhile, when using the [Card Format] switch, whether or not the format matches, all
data in the [CARD] folder of a CF card, including sampling files and the memory
manager function, is formatted and reset (cleared).
Importing Data
There are two ways to import sampling data from a CF card into your personal
computer.
♦ When Using Macro:
You can convert sampling data to the CSV format by executing the
“SMPL_CSV” macro command on the V series. If this CF card is read from your
personal computer, you can edit the data immediately using text editing software
and Excel, etc. For more information on macro, refer to “Chapter 23 CF Card
(V7 Only).”
♦ When Using Memory Card Editor:
You can import data using the “Memory Card Editor” software (M-CARD SFTE)
by converting sampling files (BIN files) which are imported into a CF card as
*mcd files. Convert files using the V-SFT “CF Card Manager.” For more
information on conversion procedure, refer to “Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only).”
22-10
Chapter 22 Data Logging
When Storing in Built-in SRAM or SRAM Cassette:
This section describes setting items for data logging. It assumes that you have
already set the sampling mode. For more information on the sampling mode,
refer to “Chapter 10 Sampling.”
When Storing in Built-in SRAM or SRAM Cassette:
Setting Procedure
Setting items are as follows:
•
System Setting
Buffering Area Setting
No. 0 (to 11)
Use Sample Buffer
No
Yes
•
System Setting
Store Target
SRAM
Output File No.
n (0 to 15)
Automatically
set [Type] of the
same number.
Memory Card
No. 0 (to 15)
I/F Memory
Type
•
System Setting
Buffering File
SRAM/Clock Setting
Memory Card Emulation Area
No
Yes
•
Screen Edit
No. of Words
[Memory Card Mode] icon
Memory card mode tool bar
Detail (Memory Card)
Main
Division No.
Format Switch
22
Memory
Buffering Area Setting and Memory Card Setting
When using built-in SRAM or a SRAM cassette, be sure to select [Store Target:
SRAM] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog. The editor recognizes [Output File
No.] that you specify, identifies [No.] of the appropriate [Memory Card Setting],
and automatically sets [Type: Buffering File].
22-11
Chapter 22 Data Logging
Formatting Built-in SRAM or a SRAM Cassette
When using built-in SRAM or a SRAM cassette, be sure to format twice.
The first formatting is to initialize SRAM on the [Main Menu] screen of the V
series. Perform this format to reserve [Memory Card Emulation Area] that you
set in [SRAM/Clock Setting] from the [System Setting] menu.
Perform the second format when the V series is in RUN mode with the PLC. In
this case, you need to place the [Function: Card Format] switch on the screen in
the memory card mode.
♦ The First Format: Initialization
([SYS] key + [F1] key) and the Main Menu screen are displayed to put the V
series into STOP mode.
When pressing the [SRAM/Clock] or [Cassette Control] switch, the screen
changes to the format SRAM screen. Format the SRAM on this screen.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 2 MONITOUCH Operations” in the V7
Hardware Specifications Manual.
Unless you perform the initialization, the message “Data has some error.
Error: 161 (or 163)” appears on the screen and you cannot run the V series.
If you change the setting in [SRAM/Clock Setting], you need to reformat. In
this case, data is lost.
♦ The Second Format: Formatting in the Memory Card Mode
After the initialization, unless you format SRAM into the contents you set in the
[Memory Card Setting] dialog, you cannot use it.
Therefore, you need to set items in the [Memory Card] dialog in the memory
card mode and use the [Function: Card Format] switch.
Only [Function: Card Format] switch allows you to format SRAM in the
memory card mode.
If you change the settings in [Memory Card Setting] and [Buffering Area
Setting], you need to reformat. In this case, data is lost.
If the setting in the [Memory Card] dialog and the [Function: Card Format] switch
are set to the same division, you do not need to set to the same screen as data
logging.
For more information on the setting items in the [Memory Card] dialog, refer to
“Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode.”
22-12
Chapter 22 Data Logging
Setting and Importing Procedures on the V Series
To start data logging, perform the following procedures on the V series:
22
Transfer screen data to the v series.
Stop the V series (Display the Main Menu screen) and format
SRAM.
Connect the V series to the PLC.
Format the memory card mode.
Open the screen where you set the format switch (memory card
mode) and press the format switch.
Start sampling.
Immediately after formatting, sampling is possible and data logging
begins.
♦ Note
Unless you reset or reformat SRAM, the data stored in SRAM is saved.
(However, if the battery of SRAM is low, data could be lost.)
Importing Data
To import the sampling data imported into a SRAM memory card into your
personal computer, use the reading software “Memory Card Editor” (model:
M-CARD SFT).
For more information on using Memory Card Editor, refer to M-CARD SFTE
Operations Manual.
22-13
When Storing in Built-in SRAM or SRAM Cassette:
Perform the initialization formatting.
Chapter 22 Data Logging
When Storing to CREC:
This section describes setting items for data logging. It assumes that you have
already set the sampling mode. For more information on the sampling mode,
refer to “Chapter 10 Sampling.”
Setting Procedure
Setting items are as follows:
•
System Setting
Modular Jack
Modular Jack 2 (Modular Jack 1)
•
System Setting
Memory Card*
Buffering Area Setting
No. 0 (to 11)
Use Sample Buffer
No
Yes
•
System Setting
Store Target
SRAM
Output File No.
n (0 to 15)
Automatically set
[Type] of the same
number.
Memory Card Setting
No. 0 (to 15)
I/F Memory
Type
•
Screen Edit
Buffering File
[Memory Card Mode] icon
Memory card mode tool bar
Detail (Memory Card)
Main
Division No.
Format Switch
Memory
* When you insert a SRAM memory card into a memory card socket (supported by V610/V612 option type), instead of
using CREC, you do not need the settings listed above.
Buffering Area Setting and Memory Card Setting
When using a SRAM memory card (CREC/memory card socket), be sure to
select [Store Target: SRAM] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog. The editor
recognizes [Output File No.] that you specify, identifies [No.] of the appropriate
memory card setting, and automatically sets [Type: Buffering File].
22-14
Chapter 22 Data Logging
Memory Card Mode
When using a SRAM memory card (CREC/memory card socket), unless you
format the SRAM memory card into the contents you set in [Memory Card
Setting], you cannot use it. Therefore, you need to set items in the [Memory
Card] dialog in the memory card mode and use the [Function: Card Format]
switch.
If you change the settings in the [Memory Card Setting] dialog and [Buffering
Area Setting], you need to reformat. In this case, data is lost.
If the setting in the [Memory Card] dialog and the [Function: Card Format] switch
are set to the same division, you do not need to set to the same screen as data
logging. For more information on the setting items in the [Memory Card] dialog,
refer to “Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode.”
Setting and Importing Procedures on the V Series
To start data logging, perform the following procedures on the V series:
Connect the V series to the PLC.
Perform formatting.
Open the screen where you set the format switch (memory card
mode) and press the format switch.
Start sampling.
Immediately after formatting, sampling is possible and data logging
begins.
♦ Note
• Unless you reset or reformat a SRAM memory card, the data stored on a
SRAM memory card is saved. (However, if the battery of SRAM is low, data
could be lost.)
• When you remove a SRAM memory card from the V series, sampling is
temporarily stopped and data is not imported. If sampling data is displayed
on the screen, the data is lost. When you reset a memory card, the history of
data imported in the past is displayed and sampling begins again.
22-15
When Storing to CREC:
Only [Function: Card Format] switch allows you to format SRAM in the
memory card mode.
22
Chapter 22 Data Logging
Importing Data
To import the sampling data imported into a SRAM memory card into your
personal computer, use the reading software “Memory Card Editor” (model:
M-CARD SFTE). For more information on using Memory Card Editor, refer to
the M-CARD SFTE Operation Manual.
22-16
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
CF Card (V7 Only)
23
For more information on the CF card functions that are supported by the
V608CH (handy type), refer to “Specifications for V608CH.”
Outline
Outline
Connection
In the V7 series, a CF card interface is implemented as standard. A CF card
supports various functions.
RUN
STOP
Trend sampling
SYSTEM
F1
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
PLC
F2
F3
Insert a CF card.
F4
96MB
CompactFlash Card
Reading/writing data
is supported.
F5
F6
F7
POWER
V7 series
If you insert an unformatted CF card into the V7 series and put the V7 in the RUN
(communicate) mode or if you switch the “Main Menu” screen to the “Card Transfer”
screen in the STOP mode, the following folders are automatically created in the CF
card. (Example: When inserting a CF card into the V7 that contains the screen file of the
access folder [Dat0000])
CF Card
Dat0000 (access folder)
Bitmap
Card
Dsp
Font
Hdcopy
Jpeg
Memo
Recipe
Sample
Snap
Sram
Wav
Webserv
For more information on each folder, refer to page 23-9.
23-1
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Functions
You can use the following functions with a CF card.
• Saving multiple screen data (
Refer to page 23-11.)
You can exchange screen data when needed by saving multiple screen data
on a CF card.
CF card
SYSTEM
F1
96MB
CompactFlash Card
A
B
C
F2
F3
Screen data B
F4
F5
F6
F7
Multiple screen data can be saved.
You can select necessary screen data
and transfer it to the V7 series.
POWER
V7 series
• Auto uploading of screen data (
Refer to page 23-14.)
By simply inserting a CF card into the V series, the contents in it are
automatically recognized. You can display the screen data files on the CF
card on the V7 series. You can exchange screen data easily.
• Saving sampling data (Data Logging) (
Refer to page 23-16.)
You can save the history data such as errors and numeric values. If you
convert the stored sampling data to a CSV file using the macro command,
you can edit the data easily using application software such as Excel.
You can edit it on your PC.
RUN
STOP
disc
RESET
Read data from
the CF card.
Trend sampling
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
96MB
CompactFlash Card
Sampling data
is written.
F5
F6
F7
POWER
V7 series
23-2
PLC
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
• Transferring recipe data (
Refer to page 23-22.)
Using the macro command, you can read and write CSV files, which you
created on Windows, etc.
Manage data as a CSV file.
RUN
STOP
disc
RESET
Read and write
data on a CF
card.
Data No.
5
SYSTEM
F1
5516
4450
5465
8845
6548
7894
5478
Set value1
Set value2
Set value3
Set value4
Set value5
545
889
65
548
55
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
You can also transfer
data from the CF card
to the PLC or write the
data from the PLC to
the CF card.
POWER
V7 series
• Transferring recipe data by the memory manager function (
Refer to
page 23-27.)
You can also transfer recipe data by the V6 compatible memory manager
function. This is recommended if you are familiar with the existing methods
or if you use Memory Card Editor.
• Storing a pattern (Bitmap) file (
Refer to page 23-29.)
When using many patterns in a screen data file, the file size will be large. If
you use a CF card and save the pattern data to the CF card, you can refer to
patterns from the CF card and display them. This method saves the capacity
of the screen data.
• Storing JPEG data (
Refer to page 23-31.)
You can display JPEG data on the V7 series screen. Be sure to store the
JPEG data to be displayed on a CF card.
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
CF card
F5
96MB
CompactFlash Card
JPEG file
You can display the JPEG file stored
on the CF card on the screen.
F6
F7
POWER
V7 series
23-3
Outline
96MB
CompactFlash Card
Production dataA
Production dataA-1
Production dataA-2
Production dataA-3
Production dataA-4
Production dataA-5
Production dataA-6
23
PLC
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
• Saving a video image (
Refer to page 23-33.)
In a V7 series that supports the video display function, you can save an
image captured from video as a still image using the snap function.
The saved image data is stored on a CF card as JPEG data.
Video
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
CF card
F4
96MB
CompactFlash Card
Save the video
image on the
CF card.
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Execute
“snap”!
V7 series
Save the displayed image on the CF card.
(JPEG file)
• Saving a screen image (
Refer to page 23-33.)
You can store a screen image on a CF card as JPEG data by using the
macro command (In the V708C, you can store it as a BIN file). When it is
difficult to connect to the printer at a production site, you can save the screen
images on a CF card and print them all at once later with your personal
computer.
You can manage and print it on your PC.
Trend sampling
Save an image for printing using the macro command.
disc
RUN
STOP
Trend sampling
SYSTEM
F1
RESET
F2
F3
F4
96MB
CompactFlash Card
F5
F6
Trend sampling
F7
POWER
Import into the CF
card as JPEG data.
23-4
V7 series
PLC
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
• Backing up memo pad data (
Refer to page 23-34.)
When using the memo pad function, you can save memo pad data even
when the V7 series is turned off. You can also convert the saved memo pad
data to a Bitmap file using the screen editor.
Using the macro command, only language fonts are changed.
The rest of the screen data is kept as is.
disc
RESET
Store required fonts on
the CF card in advance.
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
F1
F1
F2
F2
F3
F3
F4
F4
96MB
F6
CompactFlash Card
96MB
CompactFlash Card
F5
F5
F6
F7
F7
POWER
POWER
Japanese
Chinese (Simplified)
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
F1
F1
F1
F2
F2
F2
F3
F3
F3
F4
F4
F4
F5
F7
POWER
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Japanese
96MB
F6
CompactFlash Card
96MB
F6
CompactFlash Card
96MB
CompactFlash Card
F5
F7
POWER
Korean
Chinese
23-5
23
Outline
• Multi-language display selection (
Refer to page 23-35.)
If you register texts that were edited in a required language as screen data,
you can easily switch between languages on the V7, such as between
Japanese and Chinese (Simplified) or among Japanese, Korean, and
Chinese. You need to store required fonts on a CF card. When using the
macro command to order switching, the target language is read from a CF
card and displayed.
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
• Storing a sound (WAV) file (
Refer to page 23-38.)
In the V7i, you can output sound by importing a sound (WAV) file into screen
data. When importing a WAV file into screen data, screen data requires the
capacity to store the WAV file. If you import the WAV file into a CF card, you
can reduce the amount of screen data capacity required.
When the play sound bit is ON, the sound file is called
from the CF card and played.
Import the sound file from your personal computer.
SYSTEM
Alarm Display
F1
The safety plug
is not correctly
installed.
disc
Safety plug
F2
F3
F4
F5
RESET
CF card
F6
96MB
CompactFlash Card
F7
Speaker
POWER
WAV file No. 0
WAV file No. 1
WAV file No. 2
• Backing up SRAM data (
Refer to “Chapter 2 MONITOUCH Operations”
in the V7 Hardware Specifications Manual.)
If you use built-in SRAM or a SRAM cassette, you can back up SRAM data
on a CF card to avoid the data loss when switching the SRAM battery.
• Web server (
Refer to “Chapter 28 Web Server.”)
You can monitor the contents of data and images displayed on the V7i, from
a Web browser on your personal computer connected to the V7 series by a
LAN. Store the files to be accessed from a Web browser on a CF card in
advance.
disc
LAN
96MB
CompactFlash Card
F1
SYSTEM
POWER
23-6
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
RESET
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Before Using the CF Card Function
Recommended CF Cards
You can use CompactFlashTM compliant CF cards. The recommended cards
are as follows:
Manufacturer
TDK
Model
23
Capacity
32 MB
Kodak
KPCN-32
32 MB
SanDisk
SDCFB-64-505
64 MB
IO Data
PCCF-H128MS
128 MB
PCCF-xxxMS
(xxx: 16, 32, 48, 64, 96, 128, 192)
16 to 192 MB
Required Environment
♦ When Connecting to Your Personal Computer:
To store data from your personal computer on a CF card, or to insert a CF card
and check its contents, you need a CF card reader/writer connected to the
personal computer on which the V-SFT editor was installed.
Import data from the CF card into your
PC using the CF card reader/writer.
disc
RESET
CF
RM
96MB
CF card reader/writer
CF card
23-7
Before Using the CF Card Function
TC032HS
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
♦ When Connecting to the V7 Series:
In the V7 series, CF card interfaces are implemented as standard.
All you need to prepare is a CF card.
Trend sampling
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
Insert a CF card.
F4
96MB
CompactFlash Card
Reading/writing data
is supported.
F5
F6
F7
POWER
V7 series
Notes
When using a CF card, note on the following:
• If there should be a disk error and you cannot read/write data, you can scan
the disk in Windows to restore the disk data. If you still cannot restore the
disk data, you need to format the CF card. (For more information on
scanning the disk or operating Windows, refer to the Windows manual.)
• Back up your data periodically. This will protect you in the case the above
error occurs and you cannot restore data.
• If you turn off or reset the V7 series or insert/remove the CF card, during
access to the CF card, the data on the CF card could be corrupted. Check
that you are not transferring data to the CF card before inserting/removing a
CF card in the RUN mode.
* However, you can insert/remove the card on the “Main Menu” screen.
• You can write to a CF card about 300,000 times.
If you write to a CF card in a short cycle, it can reduce the card’s lifetime.
When using a CF card to save sampling data, be aware of the sampling time.
(
Refer to page 23-19.) Be sure to always avoid writing to a CF card
with the CYCLE macro command.
• Note that the amount of the data to be written should not exceed the memory
capacity of the CF card. Especially when you use functions to write data
from the V7 series to a CF card, such as saving screen data, screen images,
or recipe data, you need to be careful about the capacity limit of the CF card.
For more information on checking the free CF card space, refer to page
23-54.
• If the screen data for which the CF card function is used is on the V7 series,
be sure to insert the CF card before operating the screen.
23-8
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Contents of a CF Card
When writing screen data from your personal computer to a CF card or writing
data from the V7 series to a CF card, folders are automatically created on a CF
card. The following table shows each folder name, files created in the folder,
and the contents:
23
CF card
Dat0000 (Access folder: You can set this with any name you choose)
Contents
File Name
Data
Direction
Refer to
Bitmap
Store the pattern (bitmap) data to save screen data
capacity.
Bmpxxxx.bin
V7 ← CF
Page 23-29
Card
Write the recipe data created by the memory manager
function (V6 compatible) from the V7.
Mcmhead.bin
Mcmxxxx.bin
V7 ← CF
V7 → CF
Page 23-27
Dsp
Read or write screen data.
Dsp0000.bin
V7 ← CF
V7 → CF
Page 23-11
Font
Store a Gothic font or multi-language to save screen
data capacity.
xxxxx.ftd
V7 ← CF
Chapter 29
Hdcopy
Write a screen image in the JPEG file format from the
V7 (V708C only: BIN file).
Hdxxxx.jpg
Hdxxxx.bin
V7 → CF
(V7 ← CF) *1
Page 23-33
Jpeg
Store a JPEG file displayed on the screen (except
V708C).
xxxxx.jpg
Jpxxxxx.jpg
V7 ← CF
Page 23-31
Memo
Store the contents of the memo pad written on the V7.
Memxxxx.bin
V7 → CF
(V7 ← CF) *2
Page 23-34
Recipe
Read or write recipe data.
Recxxxx.csv
V7 ← CF
V7 → CF
Page 23-22
Sample
Store the data logging history.
Smpxxxx.bin
Smpxxxx.csv
V7 → CF
(V7 ← CF) *2
Page 23-16
Snap
Store an image snapped from video.
Vdxxxxx.jpg
V7 → CF
(V7 ← CF)
*1
Page 23-33
*2
Sram
Store the backup data of SRAM data.
Srm0000.bin
V7 ← CF
V7 → CF
Page 23-40
Wav
Store a WAV file for sound output to save screen data
capacity.
Waxxxx.wav
V7 ← CF
Page 23-38
Webserv
Store a file to access from a Web browser.
*.sht, *.html
*.text, etc.
V7 ← CF
Chapter 28
*1
*2
Only when using on a Web server.
Only for the files created on the V7 series.
Dspdef (Folder for auto uploading screen data: fixed folder name)
Folder Name
(Fixed)
Dsp
Contents
When setting the dipswitch on the V7 series and
inserting a CF card, it automatically reads the screen
data in this folder.
File Name
Data
Direction
Refer to
Dspdef.bin
V7 ← CF
Page 23-14
(Other folders are the same as the “access folder.”)
23-9
Contents of a CF Card
Folder Name
(Fixed)
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Access Folder Name Setting
The name of the access folder that is created on a CF card is the folder name
you specified in the screen data file. To specify the name, select [CF Card
Setting] from the [System Setting] menu. (Max: 8 one-byte alphanumeric
characters)
23-10
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Saving Multiple Screen Data
You can exchange screen data when needed by saving multiple screen data on
a CF card.
This section describes how to read/write data between your personal computer and a
CF card. For more information on writing data from a CF card to the V7 series and
reading from the V7 series to a CF card, refer to the V7 Hardware Specifications
Manual.
Follow the steps below.
1. Start the V-SFT editor.
2. Select [CF Card Manager] from the [File] menu. The following dialog is
displayed:
3. Specify the drive where the CF card is inserted and click [OK]. The CF Card
Manager will start.
What is the CF Card Manager?
The CF Card Manager is an application that allows you to write the data used in the V7
series to a CF card or to convert the data into each file format after importing the data
stored on a CF card. For more information, refer to page 23-48.
23-11
Saving Multiple Screen Data
Writing from a PC to a CF Card
23
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
4. Select [Write to CF Card] from the [File] menu. The [Write to CF Card] dialog
is displayed.
[File to be Converted]
Click [Refer] and select the file you write to the CF card. The file
extension is [*.V7].
[File Comment of BIN File]
Enter texts when annotating on the screen data file (Dsp0000.bin: BIN
file) written to the CF card.
[
Use Default Loading]
Check this box when you perform “Auto Uploading of Screen Data”
(
Refer to page 23-14.).
5. When completing the setting, click [OK]. The screen data file is saved as
“Dsp0000.bin” (BIN file) in the [Dsp] folder of the user folder on the CF card.
When writing multiple screen data to a CF card, folders are configured as follows:
CF card
Dat0000 (Access folder)
Bitmap
Card
Dsp
Dsp0000.bin
Font
Hdcopy
.....
File01 (Access folder)
Bitmap
Card
Dsp
Dsp0000.bin
Font
Hdcopy
.....
23-12
Screen data file
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Reading from a CF Card to a PC
The screen data written from the V7 series to a CF card can be imported into
your personal computer. You need to convert the data because the data is
written in the BIN file format. Follow the steps below.
1. Start the V-SFT editor.
2. Select [CF Card Manager] from the [File] menu. The dialog for specifying
the CF card drive is displayed.
4. Make sure that the “Dsp0000.bin” file (BIN file) is in the [Dsp] folder in the
user folder where the screen data is written from the V7 series.
5. Right-click [Dsp0000.bin] in step 4. The following drop-down menu is
displayed. Click [Put BIN File Back].
6. The following dialog is displayed. Specify the folder to save in and the file
name and click [Save].
Importing the screen data file is completed.
23-13
Saving Multiple Screen Data
3. Specify the drive where the CF card is inserted and click [OK]. The CF Card
Manager will start.
23
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Auto Uploading of Screen Data
By simply inserting a CF card into the V7 series, the screen data file in the CF
card is automatically written to the V7 series. You can exchange screen data
easily.
Writing from a PC to a CF Card
Follow the steps below.
1. Start the V-SFT editor.
2. Select [CF Card Manager] from the [File] menu. The dialog for specifying
the drive is displayed.
3. Specify the drive where the CF card is inserted and click [OK]. The CF Card
Manager will start.
What is the CF Card Manager?
The CF Card Manager is an application that allows you to write the data used in the V7
series to a CF card or to convert the data into each file format after importing the data
stored on a CF card. For more information, refer to page 23-48.
4. Select [Write to CF Card] from the [File] menu. The [Write to CF Card] dialog
is displayed.
5. For [File to be Converted], click [Refer] and select the file (extension [*.V7])
to be uploaded automatically.
6. Be sure to check [
Use Default Loading].
7. When completing the setting, click [OK].
♦ Storage Target on a CF Card
The data for auto uploading on a CF card is stored, not in the user folder, but in
the [Dsp] folder in the [Dspdef] folder as follows:
Storage target:
File name:
23-14
\Dspdef\Dsp
Dspdef.bin (BIN file format)
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Operation on the V7 Series
After storing data on the CF card, import the data into the V7 series following the
steps below.
1. Turn off the V7 series.
2. Set the DIPSW1 switch on the V7 series to ON.
23
3. Insert the CF card into the V7 series.
♦ Notes on Writing
• When using the screen data file for auto-uploading, you can store only one
data file per CF card.
• If you remove a CF card after auto-uploading and reset the power, the
message “Insert CF Card in V7.” is displayed. You cannot start the V7 series
correctly. Insert the CF card or set the DIPSW1 dipswitch to OFF. Then
reset the power.
• Once auto-uploading has been performed, all screen data that was written to
the V7 series (including I/F drivers, fonts, etc.,) is changed into screen data
for auto-uploading. Note that the data that was written to the V7 series is
overwritten and lost even if you remove the CF card and reset the DIPSW1
switch to OFF.
23-15
Auto Uploading of Screen Data
4. Turn on the V7 series. The message “Loading from CF Card.” is displayed
on the V7 series for a while. Then the screen data stored on the CF card is
written to the V7 series.
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Saving Sampling Data (Data Logging)
You can save the history data such as errors and numeric values. If you convert
the stored sampling data to a CSV file using the macro command, you can edit
the data easily using application software such as Excel.
Screen Data File Setting
♦ Setting Items
Setting items are as follows:
•
System Setting
Buffering Area Setting
No. 0 (to 11)
Use Sample Buffer
No
Yes
•
System Setting
CF Card
Output File No.
n (0 to 15)
Memory Card Setting
No. 0 (to 15)
I/F Memory
Type
•
Store Target
System Setting
Buffering File
Automatically set [Type]
of the same number.
CF Card Setting
Use Cache
No
Yes*
Format Buffering Area Automatically
Yes
* Depending on the save timing, you need to set the [SMPL_SAVE]
macro command.
•
Part
No
Switch
Function: CF Card Format (Buffer)
*1
For more information on the
difference between the [Function:
CF Card Format (Buffer)] switch
and the [Function: Card Format]
switch, refer to“Chapter 22 Data
Logging” (page 22-10).
*1
This setting is necessary when the
sampling format is different.
When using this switch, only Smpxxxx.bin files in the \Sample folder on the CF card
are formatted. Note that the whole CF card is not formatted. However, when the data
file format by the memory manager function is different even if the sampling format is
the same, you need to perform [Function: Card Format] in the memory card mode.
Otherwise, sampling is not performed. In the card format, both the data file and the
sampling file are formatted.
When importing the imported sampling data into your personal computer:
•
Macro
SMPL_CSV
Attribute Table
(Auto Creation)
What is an Attribute Table?
To convert a BIN format file to the CSV file format, information about the display type
and word/double word is required. Therefore, you need to set this information in
[Attribute Table] of the V-SFT editor. However, if you store sampling data on a CF card,
the required attribute table is automatically created when setting the [SMPL_CSV]
macro command. For more information on the attribute table, refer to page 23-40.
23-16
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
♦ Available Macro Commands
• [SMPL_SAVE]
Use this command to store sampling data stored in the cache area on a CF
card when needed. For more information on cache, refer to page 23-19.
Storage Target:
File Name:
\Sample
Smpxxxx.bin (xxxx = 0 - 11: Buffer No.)
• [SMPL_BAK]
Use this command to back up the sampling data (\Sample\Smpxxxx.bin) on
the CF card.
\Sample\ (Date folder)
Ex.:
When backing up the data on 2002/4/2:
Store the backup file in the \Sample\020402 folder. If a
sample folder with that name already exists, create one
with a new name such as “\Sample\020402~1.”
File name:
Smpxxxx.bin (xxxx = 0 - 11: Buffer No.)
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC memory
Constant
Memory Card
Indirect
F0
SMPL_BAK F0
F0
Buffer number
• [SMPL_CSV]
Use this command to convert the sampling data (\Sample\Smpxxxx.bin) on
the CF card to a CSV file and store it in the same storage target.
Storage target:
File name:
\Sample
Smpxxxx.csv (xxxx = 0 - 11: Buffer No.)
(xxxx is the same BIN file number before conversion.)
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC Memory
Constant
Memory Card
Indirect
F0
SMPL_CSV F0
F0
Buffer number
When importing sampling data from the CF card using Excel, etc., be sure to
execute the [SMPL_CSV] macro command on the V7 series.
23-17
Saving Sampling Data (Data Logging)
Storage target:
23
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Operation on the V7 Series
When inserting a CF card and put the V7 series in the RUN mode, sampling
data is ready to be stored automatically.
When data is written to a CF card is determined by the cache setting of the
screen data file.
For more information, refer to “Cache.”
♦ Note
• Unless you reset sampling, sampling data stored on the CF card is saved.
(Except when you format a CF card.)
• When you remove the CF card from the V7 series, sampling is temporarily
stopped and data is not imported. If sampling data is displayed on the
screen, the data disappears. When you reset a CF card, the history of data
imported in the past is displayed and sampling begins again.
• When the format of the CF card that you inserted is different, if you check
[ Format Buffering Area Automatically] ([System Setting] → [CF Card
Setting]), the sampling file (“Smpxxxx.bin” in the \Sample) is automatically
formatted when inserting the CF card. If the sampling file “Smpxxxx.bin”
already exists, it is overwritten. If you select [CF Card Setting] from the
[System Setting] menu and uncheck [ Format the Buffering Area
Automatically], you need to press the [Function: CF Card Format (Buffer)]
switch and format the sampling file.
* However, when you set not only sampling files but also data files for the
memory manager function to a CF card (
refer to page 23-27), if the data
file format is different, sampling will not begin.
In this case, you need to press the [Function: Card Format] switch to format
both the data files and the sampling files.
For more information on the difference between the [Function: CF Card Format (Buffer)]
switch and the [Function: Card Format] switch, refer to “Chapter 22 Data Logging” (page
22-10).
23-18
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Cache
♦ Cache Function
When selecting [CF Card Setting] from the [System Setting] menu and checking
[ Use Cache], cache memory is prepared for each buffer number. Because
sampling data is temporarily saved in this buffer memory until the conditions of
the outputing to a CF card are established (refer to “Conditions of Output to a CF
Card” mentioned later), it is possible to reduce the number of times you write to
the CF card.
If you turn off the power or remove a CF card, the data is lost because cache
is volatile memory. Be sure to execute the [SMPL_SAVE] macro command to
save cache memory data before turning off the power or removing a CF card.
♦ Adjustment of Cache Size
The sampling buffer size is determined by [Sampling Method], [No. of Words],
and [No. of Samples] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog. (Refer to “Chapter
10 Sampling.”) The interval time to output to a CF card is determined by
[Sampling Time] and [No. of Samples]. Taking these into consideration, you
need to adjust the cache size and reduce the number of writing. You can specify
the cache size in the range of 256 to 2048 words.
Supplemental Information
Lifetime of CF Card About 300,000 write operations
• Write operations: every 5 minutes, when operating for 24 full hours:
About 3 years
• Write operations: every 3 minutes, when operating for 24 full hours:
About 1.8 years
23-19
23
Saving Sampling Data (Data Logging)
There is a limit on the number of times you can write to a CF card because of the
limitations of the flash memory that is used. This limit effects the individual
sectors (512 bytes) rather than the entire card. When a CF card has reached
this limit, you cannot access a file (or a portion of the file) that includes the bad
sector. Note that if you often overwrite a CF card when sampling, you will
shorten the usable lifetime of the card and you may not be able to access some
files.
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
♦ Cache Action
• Cache Size > Sample Buffer Size
- Constant Sample
1 sample:
No. of samples:
Cache size:
8 word (No. of sample words 6 + 2)
30 times
256 words
1
2
Sample buffer size
8 × 30 = 240 words
Cache size
256 words
240
When the number of samples has
reached its maximum, save 240 words
to a CF card. When the cycle of sample
is 10 seconds, save to a CF card once
per 300 seconds (5 minutes).
• Cache Size < Sample Buffer Size
- Constant Sample
1 sample:
No. of samples:
Cache size:
8 word (No. of sample words 6 + 2)
50 times
256 words
1
2
Cache
The first time
256 words
Sample buffer size
8 × 50 = 400 words
256
Cache
The second time
144 words
When the number of samples has
reached its maximum, save 256 words
to a CF card. When the sampling buffer
is full, save 144 words to a CF card.
These actions will be repeated.
♦ Alarm Sample
In the alarm sample, information about “operation time,” “occurrence frequency,”
and “occurrence time” is also stored. These data is always stored in the different
memory from cache memory. When the conditions of output from the cache to a
CF card are established, it is output to a CF card with the cache data.
23-20
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
♦ Conditions of Output to a CF Card
1. When the specified cache is full
2. When [No. of Samples] in the buffering area setting has reached its
maximum
3. When executing the [SMPL_SAVE] macro command
23
4. When executing the [SMPL_CSV] macro command
5. When pressing the [Function: Reset] switch in the sampling mode
7. When changing the RUN mode to the STOP mode (Main Menu screen)
In the case 3 and 7, all data in the buffering area (No. 0 - 11) is saved to a CF
card. In other cases, the data in each buffering area only is saved to a CF
card. In the case 5 and 6, the reset contents are output to the “Smpxxxx.bin”
file and the data just before the reset is automatically stored in the backup
folder (refer to page 23-17).
How to Import to Your Personal Computer
There are two ways to import sampling data from a CF card into your personal
computer.
♦ When Creating a CSV File:
You can convert sampling data to the CSV format and save it by executing the
[SMPL_CSV] macro command on the V7 series. The “Smpxxxx.csv (xxxx = 0 11: Screen No.)” file is created in the \Sample folder on the CF card. You can
check the data, by opening this file using Excel, etc., on your personal computer.
♦ When Using Memory Card Editor:
You can import data using Hakko Electronics’ “Memory Card Editor” by
converting a BIN file, which is imported into a CF card, to a [*mcd] file. Convert
files using the “CF Card Manager.” For more information on the procedures,
refer to page 23-28.
23-21
Saving Sampling Data (Data Logging)
6. When the [R: Reset] bit in sample control memory is ON
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Transferring Recipe Data
Using the macro command, you can read and write CSV files, which you created
on Windows, etc.
CF Card → V7 Series
Write the CSV file data in the \Recipe folder on the CF card to internal memory in
the V7 series.
♦ Importing All Contents of a CSV File
• Preparation of a CSV File
On your personal computer, you need to prepare for the CSV file to be
imported and save it to the CF card that you use on the V7 series.
Storage target:
File name:
\Recipe
Recxxxx.csv (xxxx = 0 - 9999)
Check the number of words of data that exists in the target CSV file before
using a CF card.
• Setting Items on the Screen Data File
•
Macro
•
System Setting
LD_RECIPE
(Auto Creation) *
Attribute Table
No.
Item
Recipe
When importing a CSV file, be sure to set [Attribute Table].
For more information on the setting items, refer to page 23-45.
• Available Macro Commands
[LD_RECIPE]
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC Memory
Constant
F0
F1
LD_RECIPE F0 F1
23-22
F0
Target memory address
F1
CSV file number
Memory Card
Indirect
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
• Importing Example
When importing all contents of the Rec0001.csv file into $u200 and later:
↓
Execute the [LD_RECIPE $u200 1] macro command
Data Management
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F6
F7
96MB
CompactFlash Card
POWER
CF Card
Dat0000 (Access folder)
Bitmap
Card
Dsp
Font
Hdcopy
Jpeg
Memo
Recipe
Rec0000.csv
Write data from
the CF card.
Rec0001.csv
Rec0002.csv
Sample
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
10000
10001
10002
10003
10004
10005
10006
23
Transferring Recipe Data
F5
$u200
$u201
$u202
$u203
$u204
$u205
$u206
$u207
$u208
$u209
$u210
$u211
$u212
$u213
$u214
$u215
$u216
$u217
$u218
$u219
$u220
$u221
$u222
$u223
$u224
$u225
$u226
$u227
$u228
$u229
$u230
$u231
$u232
$u233
$u234
♦ Importing a Part of the Contents of a CSV File
Specify the column and line (defined in the attribute table) in the CSV file in the
\Recipe folder on the CF card. Write the data to the internal memory in the V7
series.
• Preparation of a CSV File
On your personal computer, you need to prepare for the CSV file to be
imported and save it to the CF card that you use on the V7 series.
Storage target:
File name:
\Recipe
Recxxxx.csv (xxxx = 0 - 9999)
Check the number of words of data that exists in the target CSV file before
using a CF card.
23-23
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
• Setting Items on the Screen Data File
•
Macro
•
System Setting
LD_RECIPESEL
(Auto Creation) *
Attribute Table
No.
Item
Recipe
* When importing a CSV file, be sure to set [Attribute Table]. For more
information on the setting items, refer to page 23-45.
• Available Macro Commands
[LD_RECIPESEL]
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC Memory
Constant
Memory Card
F0
F1
LD_RECIPESEL F0 F1
F0
Target memory address
F1
Memory for specifying the source CSV file
F1 Memory
23-24
n
CSV file number
n+1
Start line number
n+2
Start column number
n+3
Line number
n+4
Column number
Indirect
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
• Importing Example
When importing a part of the contents of the Rec0001.csv file on the CF card into internal memory $u300:
$u100 = 1 (File No. 1)
$u101 = 2 (Start line No. 2)
$u102 = 3 (Start column No. 3)
$u103 = 2 (Line No. 2)
$u104 = 3 (Column No. 3)
LD_RECIPE $u300 $u100
Data Manegement
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
96MB
CompactFlash Card
CF Card
$u300
$u301
$u302
$u303
$u304
$u305
12
13
14
102
103
104
23
F6
F7
Transferring Recipe Data
Dat0000 (Access folder)
Bitmap
Card
Dsp
Font
Hdcopy
Jpeg
Memo
Recipe
POWER
Write some data
from the CF card.
Column No. (1 -)
Rec0000.csv
Rec0001.csv
Rec0002.csv
Line
No.
(1 -)
Sample
CF Card ← V7 Series
Save the data in internal memory in the V series to the \Recipe folder on the CF
card as a CSV file. (You do not need to prepare for a CSV file in advance.)
• Setting Items on the Screen Data File
•
Macro
•
System Setting
SV_RECIPE
(Auto Creation) *
Attribute Table
No.
Item
Recipe
* When creating a CSV file, be sure to set [Attribute Table]. For more
information on the setting items, refer to page 23-45.
23-25
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
• Available Macro Commands
[SV_RECIPE]
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC Memory
Constant
Memory Card
Indirect
F0
F1
F2
SV_RECIPE F0 F1 F2
F0
Source memory address
F1
No. of words
F2
Target CSV file number
• Storage Target on a CF Card
When executing this macro command, a CSV file is saved in the following
folder on a CF card:
Storage target:
File name:
\Recipe
Recxxxx.csv (xxxx = 0 - 9999)
• Importing Example
When saving 5 words of data from internal memory $u500 to the Rec0002.csv file on the CF card:
SV_RECIPE $u500 5 2
96MB
CompactFlash Card
CF Card
Dat0000 (Access folder)
Bitmap
Card
Dsp
Font
Hdcopy
Jpeg
Memo
Recipe
Rec0000.csv
Rec0001.csv
Rec0002.csv
Sample
23-26
Data Management
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
$u500
$u501
$u502
$u503
$u504
111
222
333
444
555
F6
F7
POWER
Write internal memory
data to the CF card.
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Transferring Recipe Data by the Memory Manager Function
This is a recipe function using the V6 compatible memory manager function.
Screen Data File Setting
Setting items are as follows:
•
System Setting
23
Memory Card Setting
No. 0 (to 15)
Type
•
Screen Edit
Data File
[Memory Card Mode] icon
Memory card mode tool bar
[Detail] icon
Each Part
(Display Area, Edit/Select switch)
Switch
[Function: Card Format]
Be sure to format once according to the
memory card setting before using.
For more information on the memory card setting and the memory card mode,
refer to “Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode.”
Operation on the V7 Series
You can transfer data when inserting the CF card into the V7 series and
formatting it by pressing the [Function: Card Format] switch in the RUN mode.
♦ Storage Target on a CF Card
The memory manager data on the CF card is stored in the following folder:
Storage target:
File name:
\Card
Mcmhead.bin (BIN file format)
Mcmxxxx.bin (xxxx: Memory card setting No. 0 - 15)
23-27
Transferring Recipe Data by the Memory Manager Function
I/F Memory
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
How to Import to Your Personal Computer
To check the data file on your personal computer, you need Hakko Electronics’
Memory Card Editor [M-CARD SFTE].
V-SFT
Convert a BIN file to a MCD file using the CF Card Manager
Convert the “Mcmhead.bin” file to the [*.mcd] file.
The “Mcmhead.bin” file and the “Mcmxxxx.bin” file are combined and
converted to the “Mcmhead.mcd” file.
M-CARD SFT
Open a MCD file.
Open the “Mcmhead.mcd” file.
You can check the data file.
M-CARD SFT
Edit and save a MCD file.
You can convert the MCD file to the CSV file or read the CSV file.
You can also overwrite the data using Memory Card Editor.
V-SFT
Convert a MCD file to a BIN file using the CF Card Manager.
Divide the “Mcmhead.mcd” file into the “Mcmhead.bin” file and the
“Mcmxxxx.bin” file and convert them.
V7 series
Set the CF card into the V7 series.
Read the data file.
For how to convert from “Mcmhead.bin” to “Mcmhead.mcd,” or from
“Mcmhead.mcd” to “Mcmhead.bin” and “Mcmxxxx.bin,” refer to page 23-50. For
more information on Memory Card Editor, refer to the M-CARD SFTE Operation
Manual.
23-28
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Storing a Pattern (Bitmap) File
When using many patterns for the screen data file, the screen data might require
a large amount of memory. If you use a CF card and save the pattern data to the
CF card, you can refer to patterns from the CF card and display them. You can
save screen data capacity.
23
Screen Data File Setting
•
System Setting
CF Card Setting
Range of Patterns to be Saved to CF Card
(Top) No.
(End) No.
Importing to a CF Card
Follow the steps below.
1. Select [CF Card Manager] from the [File] menu. The following dialog is
displayed:
23-29
Storing a Pattern (Bitmap) File
Setting items are as follows:
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
2. Specify the drive where the CF card is inserted and click [OK]. The CF Card
Manager will start.
What is the CF Card Manager?
The CF Card Manager is an application that allows you to write the data used in the V7
series to a CF card or to convert the data into each file format after importing the data
stored on a CF card. For more information, refer to page 23-48.
3. Select [Write to CF Card] from the [File] menu. The [Write to CF Card] dialog
is displayed.
4. For [File to be converted], click the [Refer] button and select the [*.V7] that
you want to write to the CF card.
5. When completing the setting, click [OK].
♦ Storage Target on a CF Card
Pattern data is stored in the following folder on the CF card:
Storage target:
File name:
\Bitmap
Bmpxxxx.bin (xxxx: Pattern No.)
Operation on the V7 Series
Insert the CF card, where the pattern data is stored according to the procedure
mentioned above, into the V7 series. When displaying the screen, the stored
pattern data appears.
23-30
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Storing a JPEG Data
You can display JPEG data on the V7 series screen. Be sure to store the JPEG
data to be displayed on a CF card.
Screen Data File Setting
23
Setting items are as follows:
• Store the JPEG file in the \V6W\JPEG folder.
Storing a JPEG Data
♦ [JPEG] Folder
Save the JPEG file to the \V6W\JPEG folder, which was created when the
V-SFT editor was installed.
♦ JPEG File Name
The following is the name of a JPEG file that can be read on the V7i:
When specifying the number:
Jpxxxxx.JPG (xxxx: 0 - 32767)
When specifying the file name: xxxxxxxx.JPG (xxxxxxxx: 8 one-byte
alphanumeric characters)
Importing to a CF Card
Follow the steps below.
1. Select [CF Card Manager] from the [File] menu. The following dialog is
displayed:
23-31
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
2. Specify the drive where the CF card is inserted and click [OK]. The CF Card
Manager will start.
3. Select [Write to CF Card] from the [File] menu. The [Write to CF Card] dialog
is displayed.
4. For [File to be Converted], click the [Refer] button and select the [*.V7] file,
where the JPEG display function is used.
5. When completing the setting, click [OK].
♦ Storage Target on a CF Card
The JPEG file is stored in the following folder on the CF card:
Storage target:
File name:
\Jpeg
Jpxxxxx.jpg or xxxxxxxx.jpg
Operation on the V7 Series
Insert the CF card, where the JPEG file is stored according to the procedure
mentioned above, into the V7 series. The JPEG file on the CF card is displayed
in the RUN mode.
23-32
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Saving a Video Image
In a V7 series that supports the video display function, you can save an image
captured from video as a still image using the snap function. The saved data is
stored on a CF card as JPEG data.
Only “V7i” among the V7 series supports the video display function. To use the video
display function on the V7i, you need to install the option unit “EU-00” on the V7i.
The video image is stored in the following folder on the CF card:
Storage target:
File name:
\Snap
VDxxxxx.jpg (xxxx = 0 - 32767)
For both single snap and strobe snap, the images are stored as one JPEG file.
Saving a Screen Image
You can store a screen image as a JPEG file using the macro command.
Available Macro Commands
[HDCOPY]
Save the screen image displayed on the V series as a JPEG file to the CF
card by executing this macro command.
Storage target:
File name:
\Hdcopy
Hdxxxx.jpg (except V708C)
Hdxxxx.bin (V708C)
(xxxx = 0 - 1023: Screen No.)
* If the same file already exists, overwrite it.
In the V708C, the image is stored as a BIN file. You can convert it to a Bitmap file using
the CF card manager to utilize as image data. For more information, refer to page
23-48.
23-33
Saving a Video Image
Storage Target on a CF Card
23
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Backing up Memo Pad Data
When using the memo pad function, you can save memo pad data even when
the V7 series is turned off.
Operation on the V7 Series
When inserting the CF card and using the memo pad in the RUN mode, the
memo pad data is automatically stored on the CF card.
When selecting [SRAM/Clock Setting] from the [System Setting] menu and
checking [ Store Area for Memo Pad], the memo pad data is stored in SRAM
or a SRAM cassette even when inserting the CF card into the V7 series.
♦ When to Save:
The following explains when data should be written to the CF card:
• When switching the memo pad display using the [Function: Plus Block],
[Function: Minus Block], or [Function: Block Call] switch
• When switching the screen
• When switching from the RUN mode to the [Main Menu] screen
Storage Target on a CF Card
The memo pad data is stored in the following folder on the CF card:
Storage target:
File name:
\Memo
Memxxxx.bin (xxxx = 0 - 7: Memo pad page number)
You can convert the saved memo pad data (Memxxxx.bin) to a Bitmap file using the CF
Card Manager. For more information on the conversion, refer to page 23-50.
23-34
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Multi-Language Display Selection
If you register texts that were edited in a required language as screen data, you
can easily switch between languages on the V7, such as between Japanese and
Chinese (Simplified) or among Japanese, Korean, and Chinese. You need to
store required fonts on a CF card. When using the macro command to order
changing, the target language is read from a CF card and displayed.
23
Screen Data File Setting
Setting items are as follows:
•
System Setting
Font Setting
[Dialog] tab window
Changing Characters: (2 or more)
Font
Language 1 (to Language x): (Each font)
Initial Displayed Language
•
Item
Multi-Languages
Register languages other than Language 1.
For more information on the multi-language setting, refer to “Chapter 29
Language Selection.”
♦ Available Macro Commands
• [CHG_LANG]
To change the initial displayed language, which is specified in the screen
data file, to another language, execute this macro command.
Available Devices
Internal
Memory
PLC Memory
Constant
Memory Card
Indirect
F1
SYS(CHG_LANG) F1
F1
Language number (0 - 7)
23-35
Multi-Language Display Selection
♦ Setting Items
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Importing to a CF Card
Follow the steps below.
1. Select [CF Card Manager] from the [File] menu. The following dialog is
displayed:
2. Specify the drive where the CF card is inserted and click [OK]. The CF Card
Manager will start.
What is the CF Card Manager?
The CF Card Manager is an application that allows you to write the data used in the V7
series to a CF card or to convert the data into each file format after importing the data
from CF card. For more information, refer to page 23-48.
23-36
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
3. Select [Write to CF Card] from the [File] menu. The [Write to CF Card] dialog
is displayed.
23
5. When completing the setting, click [OK].
♦ Storage Target on a CF Card
The manual font of the Gothic font is stored in the following folder on the CF
card:
Fonts other than [Language 1] are stored.
Storage target:
File name:
\Font
Fnt_jpn.ftd (Japanese)
Fnt_jpn2.ftd (Japanese 32)
Fnt_eng.ftd (English/Western Europe)
Fnt_chn.ftd (Chinese (Simplified))
Fnt_twn.ftd (Chinese)
Fnt_kor.ftd (Korean)
Fnt006.ftd, Fnt0062.ftd (Gothic)
Fnt008.ftd, Fnt0082.ftd (English/Western Europe HK Gothic)
Fnt009.ftd, Fnt0092.ftd (English/Western Europe HK Times)
Operation on the V7 Series
Insert the CF card, where fonts other than Language 1 are stored according to
the procedure mentioned above, into the V7 series. Just after running, the initial
displayed language is displayed. By executing the macro command
([CHG_LANG]) and changing the screen, the target font is displayed.
23-37
Multi-Language Display Selection
4. For [File to be Converted], click the [Refer] button and select the [*.V7] file,
where the multi-language display selection is used.
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Storing a Sound (WAV) File
In the V7i, you can output sound by importing a sound (WAV) file into screen
data. When importing a WAV file into screen data, screen data requires the
capacity to store the WAV file. If you import the WAV file into a CF card, you can
reduce the amount of screen data capacity required.
Screen Data File Setting
Setting items are as follows:
•
Store the sound file in the \V6W\WAV folder.
•
System Setting
CF Card Setting
Store WAV Files to CF Card
♦ [WAV] Folder
Save the WAV file to the \V6W\WAV folder, which was created when the V-SFT
editor was installed.
V6w
Data
Jpeg
Parts
Tpa
Wav
WA0000.wav
WA0001.wav
WA0002.wav
Webserv
.....
♦ WAV File Name
The following is the name format of WAV files that can be read by the V7i:
WAxxxx.WAV (xxxx: 0 to 1023)
23-38
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Importing to a CF Card
Follow the steps below.
1. Select [CF Card Manager] from the [File] menu. The following dialog is
displayed:
23
What is the CF Card Manager?
The CF Card Manager is an application that allows you to write the data used in the V7
series to a CF card or to convert the data into each file format after importing the data
from CF card. For more information, refer to page 23-48.
3. Select [Write to CF Card] from the [File] menu. The [Write to CF Card] dialog
is displayed.
4. In the [File to be Converted] field, click the [Refer] button and select the
[*.V7] file, where the sound output function is used.
5. When completing the setting, click [OK].
♦ Storage Target on a CF Card
The sound (WAV) file is stored in the following folder on the CF card:
Storage target:
File name:
\Wav
Waxxxx.wav
Operation on the V7 Series
Insert the CF card, where the sound file is stored according to the procedure
mentioned above, into the V7 series. When playing sound in the RUN mode,
the sound file is referred from the CF card and sound is output.
23-39
Storing a Sound (WAV) File
2. Specify the drive where the CF card is inserted and click [OK]. The CF Card
Manager will start.
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Backing up SRAM Data
Operate from the V7 series. For more information, refer to “Chapter 2
MONITOUCH Operations” in the V7 Hardware Specifications Manual.
Web Server
For more information, refer to “Chapter 28 Web Server.”
Attribute Table
When using the following commands in the V7 series screen data file, be sure to
define the data you use in [Attribute Table].
• When using the macro command [SMPL_CSV]:
For more information on this macro command, refer to page 23-17.
• When using the macro command [LD_RECIPE], [LD_RECIPESEL], or
[SV_RECIPE]:
For more information on these macro commands, refer to page 23-24.
Attribute Table Window
♦ Start
Select [Attribute Table] from the [System Setting] menu. [CF Attribute] window is
displayed.
23-40
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
♦ Quit
Click the icon on the top left corner of the window and select [Close]. Or click
the [x] button on the top right corner of the window.
23
Attribute Table
[SMPL_CSV]
When using the [SMPL_CSV] macro command for the screen data file, the
required attribute setting for [SMPL_CSV] is automatically set when transferring
or saving the screen data file.
Ex.: When the following trend sampling is set:
Buffering Area Setting
[Buffer No.]
[Sampling Method]
[No. of Words]
[Store Target]
[Output File No.]
0
Constant sampling
2
CF card
2
Trend Sampling
[Data Length]
1
This means that trend sampling is stored
in the “Smp0000.bin” file.
CF Attribute No.
23-41
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
♦ To Check/Change the Setting:
To check or change the attribute setting that was automatically set, follow the
steps below.
1. Select the line to check/change.
2. Select [Attribute Setting] from the [Edit] menu. Or right-click and select
[Attribute Setting]. The [Attribute Setting] dialog is displayed. The displayed
dialog varies depending on the [Sampling Method] in the [Buffering Area
Setting] dialog.
• [Constant Sample], [Bit Synchronize], and [Temp. Control Net/PLC2]
[Format] tab window
The number of setting contents displayed is specified with [No. of
Words]. Select the type, the decimal, and the number of words.
[All Same]
Select all at once according to the current setting contents.
[Delete]
Set the current selecting item to the default ([DEC], [Decimal: 0],
[1 Word]).
[Set]
Changes in the selected item are updated and displayed in the
dialog.
23-42
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
[Display Type] tab window
Select the display type of date and time.
23
Attribute Table
• [Bit Sample]
[Display Type] tab window
Select the display type of date and time.
• [Alarm Function]
[Display Type] tab window
Select the display type of date and time.
3. When completing the setting, click [OK]. Return to the [CF Attribute] window.
23-43
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
♦ CSV File Examples
The following are CSV files created by executing the [SMPL_CSV] macro
command on the V7 series according to the attribute setting.
• [Bit Synchronize] and [Constant Sample]
CF Attribute No.
• [Bit Sample]
CF Attribute No.
• [Alarm Function]
CF Attribute No.
23-44
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
[LD_RECIPE/LD_RECIPESEL/SV_RECIPE]
When using the [LD_RECIPE], [LD_RECIPESEL], or [SV_RECIPE] macro
command, you need to set the attribute table.
When using the [LD_RECIPE], [LD_RECIPESEL], or [SV_RECIPE] macro command
for the screen data file, the required attribute setting is automatically set in the fixed
format when transferring or saving the screen data file.
When transferring or saving the screen data file, the following dialog is displayed:
Setting items are as follows:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1) Comment:
Set comment for each line.
(2) ITEM:
Select [RECIPE].
(3) ITEM No.:
Specify the CSV file number (0 to 9999).
(4) Sample Type:
(Blank)
(5) Registration No.:
Specify the number of data. This number is the column
number of the CSV files to be imported or written.
(6) No. of Words:
Automatically specified according to the setting in the
[Attribute Setting] dialog. (
Refer to page 23-47.)
(7) 0 to 4096:
Specify in the [Attribute Setting] dialog. (
page 23-47.)
Refer to
23-45
Attribute Table
If you click [Yes], the [CF Attribute] window is displayed and the fixed corresponding
items are set. If you click [No], the attribute table is not set automatically. You need to
set it manually.
23
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
♦ Registration Number
In case of the auto setting, [Registration No.] and [No. of Words] are fixed to
[10]. [Registration No.] is the number of columns in the CSV file.
Ex. 1:
When working with the following CSV file:
You need to change [Registration No.] to [5].
Ex. 2:
When importing the following data (1 word for each) as the exactly same
image by the [SV_RECIPE] macro command:
9 columns
10 lines
1184
7898
1856
1654
4484
1121
1523
1187
1165
1140
5545
6655
5585
5454
5748
5125
5546
5546
5120
5154
115
118
114
119
116
114
119
115
113
112
254
269
289
236
227
221
245
206
208
229
6000
6001
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6007
6008
6009
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
4484
1165
1189
5264
9848
1651
1195
6548
315
158
0
1111
2222
3333
4444
5555
6666
7777
8888
9999
4375
1565
2215
2314
1958
4987
8748
7895
1688
1951
Specify [9] for [Registration No.].
You don’t need to set the total number of words ([90] words in Ex. 2) nor the line number
([10] lines in Ex. 2).
23-46
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
♦ To Check/Change the Setting:
To check or change the attribute setting that was automatically set, follow the
steps below.
1. Select the line to check/change.
23
[Format] tab window
The number of setting contents displayed is specified with [No. of
Words]. Select the type, the decimal, and the number of words.
[All Same]
Select all at once according to the current setting contents.
[Delete]
Set the current selecting item to the default ([DEC], [Decimal: 0],
[1 Word]).
[Set]
Changes in the selected item are updated and displayed in the
dialog.
3. When completing the setting, click [OK]. Return to the [CF Attribute] window.
23-47
Attribute Table
2. Select [Attribute Setting] from the [Edit] menu. Or right-click and select
[Attribute Setting]. The [Attribute Setting] dialog is displayed.
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
CF Card Manager
The CF Card Manager is an application that allows you to write the data used in
the V7 series to a CF card or to convert the data into each file format after
importing the data from CF card.
Start and Quit
♦ Start
1. Start the V-SFT editor.
2. Select [CF Card Manager] from the [File] menu. The following dialog is
displayed:
3. Specify the drive where the CF card is inserted and click [OK]. The CF Card
Manager will start.
23-48
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
♦ Quit
Click the icon on the top left corner of the [CF Card Manger] window and select
[Close]. Or click the [x] button on the top right corner of the window.
23
When you perform each CF card function, you need to store data on the CF card
in advance. The CF card manager is required to write data to a CF card. Follow
the steps below.
1. Select [Write to CF Card] from the [File] menu. The [Write to CF Card] dialog
is displayed.
[File to be Converted]
Click [Refer] and select the file you write to the CF card. The file
extension is [*.V7].
[File Comment of BIN File]
Enter texts when annotating on the screen data file (Dsp0000.bin: BIN
file) written to the CF card.
[
Use Default Loading]
Check this box when you perform “Auto Uploading of Screen Data.”
(
Refer to page 23-11.)
2. When completing the setting, click [OK]. The screen data file is saved as
“Dsp0000.bin” (BIN file) in the [Dsp] folder of the user folder on the CF card.
At the same time, the specific extension is written to each folder on the CF
card according to the screen data file setting.
23-49
CF Card Manager
Writing to a CF Card
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Converting a File (BIN file) on a CF Card
Import the BIN file that is written to the CF card from the V7 series and convert it
to the recognizable file format. The following are the convertible BIN files.
File
Bmpxxxx.bin
Mcmhead.bin
Dsp0000.bin
Hdxxxx.bin
Memxxxx.bin
Storage Target
Folder
\Bitmap
\Card
\Dsp
\Hdcopy
\Memo
Extension After
Conversion
.bmp
.mcd
.v7
.bmp
.bmp
Follow the steps below.
1. Select the file to be converted.
2. Select [Put BIN File Back] from the [File] menu. Or right-click and select [Put
BIN File Back].
or
3. [Save As] dialog is displayed. Specify the desired file name and click [Save].
4. The converted file is created in the specified folder.
23-50
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
♦ Property of a BIN File
You can check information about each BIN file before conversion.
Ex.:
• Bmpxxxx.bin and Memxxxx.bin
The Bitmap image is displayed.
23
CF Card Manager
• Dsp0000.bin
You can check the file type or version in the [Detail] tab window.
• Other BIN Files
In the [General] tab window, the comment that you entered in the [File
comment of BIN file] field is displayed. ([File] → [Write to CF card])
23-51
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
Other Functions
♦ CF Card Copy
1. Select [CF Card Copy] from the [File] menu.
2. Specify the CF card drive and click [OK].
3. The following message is displayed. Click [OK].
4. Remove the CF card from your personal computer and insert the target CF
card. Click [OK].
5. The following message is displayed. Click [OK].
6. When copy is completed, the following message is displayed.
23-52
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
♦ Backing up a CF Card
You can back up data on a CF card. You can select the copy target folder.
1. Select [Back-up of CF Card] from the [File] menu.
23
Ex.: When saving in the My Document folder in the C drive:
3. Click [OK]. The following message is displayed.
4. Click [OK]. The data on the CF card is copied to the copy target. When copy
is completed, the following message is displayed.
5. Make sure that the data is copied correctly on the Explorer.
When copying data from a CF card to the hard disk, you can copy and paste it using the
Explorer.
23-53
CF Card Manager
2. When the [Copy Target Folder] dialog is displayed, click [Refer] and specify
the copy target folder.
Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only)
To Check the Status of the CF Card ($s):
Information about the status and the free space of the CF card inserted into the
V7 series is stored in the system memory ($s). The contents are as follows:
List
Address
$s497
$s498
$s499
Contents
The error status of the CF card
The free space of the CF card (kB)
Detail
• $s497
Output the access result to the CF card.
Output No.
Contents
4
The card is not installed
5
Format error
6
The card size is too small.
7
The card type is different.
12
Writing error
15
Disk error (failed to open)
16
Reading error
• $s498 to 499
Output the free space of the CF card (kB).
23-54
Memory Type
←V
Chapter 24 SRAM
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
SRAM
Outline
Depending on the type of V series, you can use a SRAM cassette (model:
V7EM-S, V6EM/RS, V6EM/RSi Capacity: 512 kB). Even if you do not use a
SRAM cassette, the V7 has 64 kB of capacity while the V609E30M has 8 kB of
capacity as built-in SRAM. This SRAM allows you to use the following backup
functions:
Outline
For more information on the types in which you can use a SRAM cassette or built-in
SRAM, refer to page 24-2.
• Memory Card Emulation Area
You can use this area as an external memory device (memory manager
function) for a PLC or for sampling data backup (data logging function).
• Internal Memory Backup
When the V series is turned off, all data in the internal memory ($u) is
cleared (set to [0]). You can keep the non-volatile (= can retain data) internal
memory ($L/$LD) area in SRAM to retain data even when a power failure
occurs.
• Saving the Memo Pad
If you use the memo pad function, data on the memo pad is lost when the V
series is turned off. Therefore, the V series allows you to back up data on
the memo pad into SRAM.
RUN
STOP
Trend sampling
SYSTEM
F1
F2
SRAM Cassette or Built-in SRAM
F3
PLC
F4
Memory Card Emulation Area
F5
F6
Storage Area for Memo Pad
Power
F7
POWER
Non-volatile Memory Area
V series
24
Even when a power
failure occurs, data
in SRAM remains.
Unless you install the battery, you cannot use the backup function when the
power is OFF.
By installing the battery, in the V7 series, V609E30M, and V608CH, you can use the
clock function as well as the backup function mentioned above (Note that in the
V608CH, you can use only the clock function). For more information, refer to “Chapter
11 Time Display/Calendar.”
24-1
Chapter 24 SRAM
SRAM Supported Types
The following table shows the types of the V series in which you can use a
SRAM cassette (model: V7EM-S, V6EM/RS, V6EM/RSi Capacity: 512 kB) or
built-in SRAM:
MONITOUCH Type
V7
SRAM
Cassette
(V7EM-S)
Built-in
Clock Function
(64 kB)
V612/V610
(V6EM/RS)
×
(V6EM/RS)
V608
(V6EM/RS)
×
(V6EM/RS)
×
V606
V606i
(V6EM/RSi)
V608CH
×
V609E
×
×
×
×
(V6EM/RSi)
×
(8 kB) *
*
* Available only for V609E30M
SRAM Setting Procedure
To set up SRAM, select [SRAM/Clock Setting] from the [System Setting] menu.
24-2
Chapter 24 SRAM
SRAM Memory Capacity
• The capacity of the SRAM area that is built in the V7 is 32 k words (64 kB).
• If you install a SRAM cassette into the V7 or V6, the capacity of the SRAM
area could be 256 k words (512 kB).
• The capacity of the SRAM area that is built in the V609E is 4 k words (8 kB).
Contents in the SRAM Area
The following shows the contents in the SRAM area:
24
SRAM Area
Header Area (128 words)
A
Memory Card Emulation Area
Header Area (16 words)
B
Storage Area for Memo Pad
Header Area (32 words)
C
Non-volatile Word Memory Area
$L
D
Non-volatile Double Word Memory Area
$LD
The Maximum Number of
Available Words
V7 built-in type: 32,640 words
SRAM cassette: 262,016 words
3,968 words
V609E:
Header Area (32 words)
♦ The Maximum Available Size by Function
The following table shows the maximum available size for the area (A to D)
without the header information of each function and the total of the maximum
available size:
SRAM Types
V7 Built-in type
SRAM Cassette
V609E
A
Memory Card Emulation Area
31,616 words
260,992 words
2,944 words
B
Storage Area for Memo Pad
32,624 words
262,000 words
3,952 words
C
Non-volatile Word Memory Area
32,608 words
261,984 words
3,936 words
D
Non-volatile Double-word Memory Area
32,608 words
261,984 words
3,936 words
A + B + C + D + Each Header Area
(Total of available size)
32,640 words
262,016 words
3,968 words
Function
24-3
SRAM Memory Capacity
Header Area (1024 words)
Chapter 24 SRAM
♦ Calculation of Size
In SRAM, a certain number of words are always used for “header information.”
Also, the “header information by function” is saved.
SRAM Area
Header Area (128 words)
Header Area (1024 words)
A
Memory Card Emulation Area
Header Area (16 words)
B
Storage Area for Memo Pad
C
Non-volatile Word Memory Area
$L
Header Area (32 words)
Header Area (32 words)
D
Non-volatile Double Word Memory Area
$LD
• Calculation of Size (words)
= 128 + (A + 1024) + (B + 16) + (C + 32) + (D + 32)
You do not need to count the capacity of the header information of the area
which you do not select.
Ex. 1: When setting the following:
A [Memory Card Emulation Area: 40000]
B [Store Area for Memo Pad: 20000]
C [Nonvolatility Memory (Word): 40000]
D [Nonvolatility Memory (DWord): 40000]
128 + (1024 + 40000) + (16 + 20000) + (32 + 40000) + (32 + 40000) =
141232
141232 ≤ 262144 (256 k words)
141,232 words are used in SRAM. The rest can be supported by a
SRAM cassette.
Ex. 2: When setting the following:
A [Memory Card Emulation Area: 244448]
C [Nonvolatility Memory (Word): 16512]
128 + (1024 + 244448) + (32 + 16512) = 262144
262016 ≤ 262144 (256 k words)
262,016 words are used in SRAM. The rest can be supported by a
SRAM cassette.
Depending on how you use the memory card emulation area, the calculation of the area
size varies. For more information, refer to “Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode.”
24-4
Chapter 24 SRAM
Lifetime
The lifetime of the SRAM area depends on the lifetime of the battery. The
lifetime of the battery is about 5 years. To confirm the voltage level of the
battery, check system memory $s167.
MSB
$s167
LSB
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Memory cassette information reserved
(Set: 0)
0: The battery is normal.
1: The voltage of the battery has decreased.
2: The battery is not installed.
0
1: FROM 2 Mbyte (V6)
2: FROM 4 Mbyte (V6)
3: SRAM 512 kbyte (V6/V7)
4: FROM 8 Mbyte (V7)
24
Memory cassette information reserved
(Set: 0)
When using a SRAM cassette or built-in SRAM, be sure to format it on the Main
Menu screen of the V series before using it. For more information on formatting,
refer to “Chapter 2 MONITOUCH Operations” in the V7 Hardware Specifications
Manual.
Unless you format SRAM, the message “Data has some error. Error: 161 (or
163)” appears and you cannot run the V series.
24-5
Formatting SRAM (Initialization)
Formatting SRAM (Initialization)
Chapter 24 SRAM
Settings for Each Function
[SRAM/Clock Setting] Dialog
[
Use Built-in Clock]
Check this box when using the clock built in the V series. For more
information on time display, refer to “Chapter 11 Time Display/Calendar.”
[SRAM]
[Built-in]/[Cassette]
This setting is effective when using the V7 series. Select built-in SRAM or a
SRAM cassette (V7EM-S) to use.
24-6
[
Memory Card Emulation Area]
For more information, refer to page 24-7.
[
Storage Area for Memo Pad]
For more information, refer to page 24-8.
[
Nonvolatility Memory (Word)]/[Nonvolatility Memory (DWord)]
For more information, refer to page 24-9.
Chapter 24 SRAM
Memory Card Emulation Area
You can use this area as an external memory device (memory manager
function) for a PLC or for sampling data backup (data logging function).
You can use this function not only with SRAM but also with CREC (SRAM
memory card) or CF cards. Therefore, which accessory the data is stored in is
decided by the screen data setting and the accessories attached to the V series.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode,” “Chapter 22
Data Logging,” or “Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only).”
♦ Data Protection When a Power Failure Occurs
24
♦ Using Memory Card Editor (Option)
Using Memory Card Editor (option), you can read the data stored in the memory
card emulation area from your personal computer, edit data using a spreadsheet
software etc., or write the edited data to the memory card emulation area.
24-7
Settings for Each Function
When a power failure occurs during writing data to the memory card emulation
area, the data state just before a power failure is always saved in a buffering file,
but the data file is not guaranteed.
Chapter 24 SRAM
Storage Area for Memo Pad
Use this area to store the memo pad.
♦ Save Timing
The following explains when to save data on the memo pad into the [Store Area
for Memo Pad]:
• When switching a page using the [Function: Plus Block/Minus Block] switch
• When switching a screen
• When switching from the RUN mode to the Main Menu screen
If the size of data exceeds the area capacity to save, the display area of the
memo pad blinks and warns that you cannot save data ([1] is written to [$s727]).
Delete the memo to decrease the amount of data. You can check the rest of the
storage area of the memo pad in $s108 and $s109.
♦ System Memory ($s)
The following table shows system memory ($s) related to the storage area for
memo pad.
Address ($s)
108
109
Contents
Rest of the storage area for memo pad
720
0: The data was successfully saved
1: Data has some error. The previous contents are deleted.
727
0: Normal
Memory Type
←V
(Information is written
from the V series.)
1: There is not enough space to save
♦ Notes on Power Failure
When a power failure occurs, the data you wrote to the memo pad page
immediately before is lost. Also, when a power failure occurs during saving, all
the data on the memo pad could be lost. Check the saving status in system
memory $s720 when the V series is turned on.
24-8
Chapter 24 SRAM
Nonvolatility Memory (Word)/(DWord)
You can use the SRAM area as the non-volatile word memory area or the
non-volatile double-word memory area.
♦ Difference between Word and Double-word
The difference between word and double-word is whether the specified address
(= word) only is guaranteed or two words (double-word) from the address are
guaranteed when a power failure occurs. For more information, refer to “Data
Protection When a Power Failure Occurs” mentioned later.
Device Name
$L
TYPE *
Setting Range
Word Area
2
0 to 261983 (Max)
Double-word Area
3
0 to 261983 (Max)
* This is used when specifying $L or $LD indirectly by macro.
When specifying $L or $LD indirectly, specify the model as follows:
• $L/$LD0 to 65535: 00
MSB
LSB
n+0
00 (Model)
n+1
Memory No. (Address) Low-order
TYPE
n+2
00 (None)
Bit Designation
n+3
00 (None)
00 (None)
• $L/$LD65536 to 261983: 80
MSB
n+0
LSB
80 (Model)
TYPE
n+1
Memory No. (Address) Low-order
n+2
Memory No. (Address) High-order
n+3
00 (None)
Bit Designation
n+4
00 (None)
00 (None)
24
Settings for Each Function
$LD
Detail
♦ Non-volatile Memory Setting
When setting the non-volatile memory using the screen editor V-SFT, if you are
using the word memory area, select [$L] in the [Internal Memory]. If you are
using double-word memory, select [$LD]. The available range is the address
space you select.
24-9
Chapter 24 SRAM
♦ System Memory ($s)
The following table shows system memory ($s) related to non-volatile memory
(word and double-word):
Address ($s)
721
722
723
724
725
726
Contents
Memory Type
Writing result of $L address where data is written at last
[0]: Normal [1]: Error
$L address where data is written at last if $s721 is [1: Error],
when the power is on
Writing result of $LD address where data is written at last
[0]: Normal [1]: Error
←V
(Information is written
from the V series.)
$LD address where data is written at last if $s724 is [1: Error],
when the power is on
♦ Data Protection When a Power Failure Occurs
When a power failure occurs during writing data to $L or $LD, the data value just
before writing is guaranteed. (The data value just before writing is guaranteed
up to one word from the head (in case of $L) and up to two words from the head
(in case of $LD).) When writing texts or writing multiple words simultaneously
using the [BMOV] Macro command, the data value is not guaranteed.
* Use $LD to access two word data. Check system memory address $s721 to
$s726 to verify whether writing was successful or not.
Errors on the V series
For more information on errors on the V series related to SRAM, refer to
“Appendix 3 Error.”
24-10
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Memory Card Mode
Outline
The memory card mode is a supported function when SRAM or a CF card is
available on the V series. The SRAM and CF card types compatible with the V
series are described below.
• SRAM cassette (Model: V7EM-S, V6EM/RS, V6EM/RSi)
The storage capacity is 512 kbytes.
25
* When a flash ROM cassette (Model: V7EM-F, V6EM/4, V6EM/4i) is used,
SRAM cassette cannot be used at the same time.
Outline
• Built-in SRAM
The V7 series is equipped with 64-kbyte built-in SRAM; V609E30M is
equipped with 8-kbyte built-in SRAM. It is necessary to set a battery for
either device.
• SRAM memory card (Model: REC-MCARD SRAM)
Please specify the desired capacity. 256 kbytes, 512 kbytes, 1 Mbytes, 2
Mbytes or 4 Mbytes are available. Depending on the type of the V series, a
card recorder (model: CREC) may be required or memory cards may be
used directly.
• CF card
Use CF cards commercially available.
(For the recommended CF cards, refer to page 25-8.)
The MONITOUCH models and available storage media are shown below.
( : Available ×: Not available)
MONITOUCH Model
V7
Standard
V612/V610
V608
SRAM Memory
Card
CF Card
(V7EM-S)
(+ CREC)
(V6EM/RS)
×
×
(V6EM/RS)
×
×
(V6EM/RS)
×
×
With memory
card socket
(+ CREC)
(+ CREC)
V606i
(+ CREC)
V609E
Built-in
(+ CREC)
V606
V608CH
SRAM
Cassette
×
(V6EM/RSi)
×
(+ CREC)
×
×
(64 kbytes)
×
×
×
×
×
(8 kbytes) *
×
* Available only with V609E30M
For more information on the order of recognition of SRAMs, refer to page 25-5.
25-1
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
The memory card mode has two major functions: memory manager and data
logging.
Memory Manager Function
SRAMs or CF cards can be used as external storage media for the PLC. Data
can be written or read out at any time required. The memory card emulation
area of an SRAM or a CF card is divided into a maximum of 16 files. Each file is
divided into a maximum of 4095 records. Data is stored in each record.
One file can be divided into a
maximum of 4095 records.
Maximum 16 divisions
available
File 0
File 1
One record can contain up
to 4096 words.
Record 0
Record 1
Record 2
Record 3
Data 0
160
Data 1
491
160
D101
491
D102 3209
D103
Data 2 3209
Data 3
File 2
D100
200
run
D104 8821
200
stop
SYSTEM
File 3
File 4
Record 4093
Data 4 8821
Record 4094
File 5
F1
Memory card
mode
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Record 0
F7
PLC
POWER
Record 1
Record 2
File 14
File 15
Record 3
Record 4
Data 0 3000
Data 1
120
Data 2 7700
V series
D450 3000
D451
120
D452 7700
Memory card
Or built-in SRAM
or SRAM cassette
or CF card
It is possible to store records in a block from the PLC into an SRAM area or a CF
card, or to read them from an SRAM area or a CF card to the PLC. Since a
large capacity of data can be stored, it is not necessary to allocate memory in
the PLC for storage purpose.
When a CF card is used, the recipe function can be used without using the memory card
mode. For more information, refer to “Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only).”
25-2
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Data Logging Function
The data logging function is useful when sampling mode is used. When
sampling mode is set up without using memory cards, data in the buffering area
in the MONITOUCH V series is cleared if a power failure occurs. However, if
data is stored in memory card emulation area of the SRAM or CF card instead of
the buffering memory, it is kept intact even after a power failure.
For more information on the data logging function, refer to “Chapter 22 Data Logging.”
run
stop
Useful in sampling mode
25
Trend sampling
PLC
Sampling data is automatically
stored in “buffering file” in the
memory card.
Outline
Power supply
Format
Even if a power failure
occurs, data remains in
the memory card.
V series
Memory card
Or built-in SRAM
or SRAM cassette
or CF card
Before using a CF card, it needs formatting. For more information, refer to “Chapter 22
Data Logging.”
25-3
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Memory Card Editor
Using Hakko Electronics’ memory card editor M-CARD SFT, data stored in the
SRAM or CF card (by the memory manager or data logging function) can be
read by a personal computer, or data in the computer can be written to the
SRAM or CF card.
V series
Record 0
File 0
File 1
Record 1
Record 2
File 2
Memory card editor
D100
160
Data 0
160
D101
491
Data 1
491
D102 3209
Data 2 3209
Data 3
200
Data 4 8821
File 3
200
D103
SYSTEM
F1
Memory card
mode
D104 8821
F2
F3
F4
F5
File 4
File 5
Record 1
Record 2
Record 3
File 14
F6
Record 0
F7
POWER
Data 0
3000
Data 1
120
Data 2
7700
D450 3000
D451
Record 4
120
D452 7700
run
File 15
Memory manager function
PLC
Computer
Memory card
or SRAM cassette
For information on the usage of the memory card editor, refer to the M-CARD
SFTE Operation Manual.
25-4
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Recognition of Storage Media
The V7 series has multiple SRAMs that can be used in memory card mode and
is compatible with CF cards. These media are recognized for data storage
depending on the setting. The storage media setting procedure varies
depending on the V series model and available functions. Refer to the following
lists. ( : Setting available ×: No setting available −: Invalid)
Memory Manager Function
With the V7 series:
System Setting
Modular Jack
SRAM/Clock Setting
Memory Card
Memory Card Emulation Area
−
SRAM Cassette
Mounted
Storage Media
−
CREC
(SRAM memory card)
SRAM cassette
×
×
Built-in SRAM
×
−
CF card
Modular Jack
SRAM/Clock Setting
SRAM Cassette
Mounted
Storage Media
Memory Card
Memory Card Emulation Area
−
CREC
(SRAM memory card)
×
SRAM cassette
×
×
×
Memory card socket
(SRAM memory card)
Modular Jack
SRAM/Clock Setting
SRAM Cassette
Mounted
Storage Media
Memory Card
Memory Card Emulation Area
−
CREC
(SRAM memory card)
×
With V612/V610:
System Setting
−
With V608/V606i:
System Setting
−
×
SRAM cassette
With V609E:
System Setting
Modular Jack
SRAM/Clock Setting
Memory Card
Memory Card Emulation Area
−
×
SRAM Cassette
Mounted
Storage Media
−
CREC
(SRAM memory card)
−
Built-in SRAM
25-5
Recognition of Storage Media
×
25
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Data Logging Function
Refer to “Chapter 22 Data Logging.”
Setting Items
♦ Modular Jack
Select [Modular Jack] from the [System Setting] menu. Select [Memory Card]
for [Modular Jack 1] or [Modular Jack 2] in the [Modular Jack] dialog. The SRAM
memory card can be used with the card recorder (CREC).
♦ SRAM/Clock Setting
Select [SRAM/Clock Setting] from the [System Setting] menu. Select
[ Memory Card Emulation Area] in the [SRAM/Clock Setting] dialog. The
built-in SRAM or SRAM cassette can be used. Be sure to set for [Number of
Words].
For more information on the SRAM/clock setting and SRAM cassette setting, refer to
“Chapter 24 SRAM.”
♦ Buffering Area Setting
Select [Buffering Area Setting] from the [System Setting] menu. The [Buffering
Area Setting] dialog is displayed. Select [SRAM] or [CF Card] for [Store Target].
The SRAM or CF card is recognized as the storage media.
For more information on the setting items for the buffering area, refer to “Chapter 10
Sampling.”
25-6
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
SRAM and CF Card Area
SRAM or SRAM Cassette
♦ Memory Capacity
• The built-in SRAM area of the V7 series is 32 k words (64 kbytes).
• When an SRAM cassette is mounted on V7 or V6, an SRAM area of 256 k
words (512 kbytes) is secured.
• The SRAM area of V609E equipped with built-in SRAM is 4 k words
(8 kbytes).
The memory capacity of the SRAM area is shown below.
SRAM area
25
Header area (128 words)
Header area (1024 words)
V7 built in:
32 k words
SRAM cassette: 256 k words
V609E:
4 k words
Header area (16 words)
Memo pad storage area
: Available with memory
manager function
data logging function
Header area (32 words)
Non-volatile word memory area
$L
Header area (32 words)
Non-volatile double-word memory area
$LD
With SRAM, some words are used for header information. In addition, header
information is attached to each area. The area that is used in memory card
mode is the memory card emulation area. It is not necessary to consider the
capacity required for header information for the area where no data is stored.
For more information on the memory capacity, refer to “Chapter 24 SRAM.”
♦ Lifetime
The service life of the SRAM area depends on the battery life. A battery lasts for
about five years. To check whether the battery voltage is lowered or not, check
system memory address $s167.
MSB
$s167
LSB
15 14 13 12
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Memory cassette information reserved
(Set: 0)
0: Battery normal
1: Battery voltage drop
2: Battery not mounted
0
0
0
1: FROM 2 Mbyte (V6)
2: FROM 4 Mbyte (V6)
3: SRAM 512 kbyte (V6/V7)
4: FROM 8 Mbyte (V7)
Memory cassette information reserved
(Set: 0)
25-7
SRAM and CF Card Area
Memory card emulation area
For the area
map, refer to
page 25-9.
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
SRAM Memory Card
♦ Memory Capacity
256 kbytes, 512 kbytes, 1 Mbytes, 2 Mbytes or 4 Mbytes are available. The
header information area is common to all memory cards.
0
Card information
Header information (1024 words)
File information
1023
1023
1024
1024
File 0
File 1
File 2
File 3
Entire file size
File 4
:
:
:
File 15
♦ Lifetime
The service life of the SRAM area depends on the battery life. The battery
varies depending on the capacity. Consult your local distributor.
To check whether the battery voltage is lowered or not, select [System Setting]
→ [Memory Card Setting] → [I/F Memory], and check the corresponding
memory. For more information, refer to page 25-11.
CF Card
♦ Memory Capacity
The following cards (compliant with CompactFlashTM) are recommended.
Manufacturer
Type
Capacity
TDK
TC032HS
32 MB
Kodak
KPCN-32
32 MB
SanDisk
SDCFB-64-505
64 MB
I-O Data
PCCF-H128MS
128 MB
PCCF-xxxMS
(xxx: 16, 32, 48, 64, 96, 128, 192)
16 to 192 MB
♦ Lifetime
There is a limitation on the number of writing operations with the CF card. Each
CF card allows about 300,000 writing operations. Take note of this.
25-8
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Calculating the File Size
(Unit: words)
(The number of bytes of record name ÷ 2 + the number of data)
× the number of records
Data File
Bit synchronize
(the number of words + 2) × the number of sampling times
Constant sampling
(the number of words + 2) × the number of sampling times
Bit sampling
3 × the number of sampling times
Alarm function
3 × the number of sampling times + 15 + the number of words ×
96
Temperature control
network/PLC2
(the number of words + 2) × the number of sampling times
Buffering file
25
Memory Card Emulation Area Map
Type: Data file
0
Record name
(Max. 16 words)
Card information
Record No. 0
File information
Entire file size
1023
1024
Address 0
Data
(Max. 4096 words)
Address 4111 (Max.)
File 0
Size of file 0
File 1
Size of file 1
File 2
Size of file 2
File 3
Size of file 3
File 4
Size of file 4
Record name
(Max. 16 words)
Record No. 1
Data
(Max. 4096 words)
Record name
(Max. 16 words)
Record No. n
(Max. 4094)
Data
(Max. 4096 words)
Size of file 15
25-9
Memory Card Emulation Area Map
The memory card area and memory card emulation area except the header
information are allocated as shown below.
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Memory Card Mode Setting Procedure
•
System Setting
Memory Card Setting
I/F Memory
No. 0 (to 15)
Type
•
Screen Edit
Data File
Memory card mode tool bar
[Memory Card Mode] icon
Page 25-19
Page 25-18
Page 25-19
Page 25-20
(*)
Page 25-19
page 25-20
Page 25-16
* Before using memory card mode, it is necessary to initialize the SRAM or CF card that
is used as storage media. Use the [Function: Card Format] switch when initializing the
SRAM or CR card. If any setting for memory card mode has been changed, it is
necessary to initialize the SRAM or CF card again. Note that data in the SRAM or CF
card will be cleared when it is initialized.
In addition to the above, initialization or formatting may be required depending
on the storage media.
• To save data in the built-in SRAM or SRAM cassette:
Select [System Setting] → [SRAM/Clock Setting].
→ [ Memory Card Emulation Area]: Check the box.
→ [Number of Words]: Set the required capacity.
• To save data in the CREC (SRAM memory card):
Select [System Setting] → [Modular Jack].
→ [Modular Jack 1] or [Modular Jack 2]: [Memory Card]
• To save data in a CF card:
No special setting is required.
25-10
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Memory Card Setting
When memory cards are used, make the setting in the [Memory Card] dialog for
file divisions or definition. According to the setting in this dialog, the memory
card (or memory card emulation area) is formatted.
[Memory Card] Dialog
Select [Memory Card Setting] from the [System Setting] menu. The [Memory
Card] dialog is displayed.
25
Memory Card Setting
The following data should be set.
[I/F Memory]
The I/F memory is the memory address where the memory card status is
written. Specify the top memory address. The contents of memory are
shown below.
I/F Memory
n
Contents
CFM_STAT
n+1
CFM_ERRNo
n+2
CFM_CARDNo
n+3
CFM_FILENo
n+4
CFM_RECDNo
n+5
CFM_TRFIN
Regardless of memory card mode setting, the newest data is written into “CFM_STAT”
(n) and “CFM_ERRNo” (n + 1). Other memory addresses become effective only when
memory card mode is set up on the screen.
25-11
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
A. n (CFM_STAT)
MSB
LSB
15 14 13 12 11
0
0
0
0
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
Sample data operation
Bit No.
0
1 to 6
7
8 to 14
15
Contents
0
0
0
0
0
0
Battery voltage
Error
Description
Error
When an error related to the memory card has occurred, this bit is set to
“1” (ON). The error contents are stored in “CFM_ERRNo” (n + 1).
Not used
These bits must be reset to “0.”
Battery voltage
When the battery voltage of the memory card decreases, this bit is set
to “1” (ON). Replace the battery as soon as possible.
Not used
These bits must be reset to “0.”
Sample data
operation
This bit is active when [ Use Operation] is checked in the [Buffering
Area Setting] dialog for the data logging function. If operation of data in
the buffering area is being performed at the time of memory card data
reading, this bit is set to “1” (ON).
B. n + 1 (CFM_ERRNo)
When bit 0 of “CFM_STAT” (n) is set (an error has occurred), an error
number (for error contents) is stored in “CFM_ERRNo” (n + 1). Respective
error numbers indicate the following contents:
Error No.
Contents
1
There is an error in the memory card I/F board.
2
The memory card recorder is not connected.
3
An error has arisen during communication between the MONITOUCH
V series and the recorder.
4
No memory card is inserted.
5
Memory card format is different from the setting data.
(Or the memory card is not formatted.)
6
Memory card capacity is smaller than the setting data.
7
The memory card is not compatible.
10
Attempted to write to a memory card of FLASH ROM.
11
The memory card is write-protected.
12
There is an error in writing data to the memory card.
C. n + 2 (CFM_CARDNo)
The current memory card number is stored.
D. n + 3 (CFM_FILENo)
The selected or transferred file number is stored.
E. n + 4 (CFM_RECDNo)
The selected or transferred record number is stored.
25-12
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
F. n + 5 (CFM_TRFIN)
Formatting or data transferring condition between the MONITOUCH V series
(= SRAM area or CF card) and the PLC is stored. The allocation of memory
is shown below.
MSB
LSB
15 14 13 12 11
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Formatting (2)
Error (1)
Transferring from V series → PLC
Transferring from PLC → V series
(3)
Formatting (4)
Transferring from V series → PLC completed
Transferring from PLC → V series completed
Bit No.
1 to 8
25
Description
Error
When an error has occurred during formatting or
transferring, this bit is set to “1.” Bits for (2) “formatting” and
(3) “transferring” remain “1.” Bits for (4) “format completed”
or (5) “transferring completed” remain “0.”
Not used
These bits must be reset to “0.”
9
Formatting
While formatting, this bit is set to “1.”
10
Transferring from V series → PLC
While transferring, this bit is set to “1.”
11
Transferring from PLC → V series
While transferring, this bit is set to “1.”
12
Not used
These bits must be reset to “0.”
13
Formatting
When formatting has been completed, this bit is set to “1.”
14
Transferring from V series → PLC
completed
When transferring has been completed, this bit is set to “1.”
The file or record number transferred can be checked with
“CFM_FILENo” (n + 3) and “CFM_RECDNo” (n + 4). After
checking that transferring has been completed, reset bit 14.
15
Transferring from PLC → V series
completed
When transferring has been completed, this bit is set to “1.”
The file or record number transferred can be checked with
“CFM_FILENo” (n + 3) and “CFM_RECDNo” (n + 4). After
checking that transferring has been completed, reset bit 14.
25-13
Memory Card Setting
0
Contents
(5)
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
[Type]
Specify the types of files into which the memory card can be divided.
Choose from the following three options.
• [Not Used]
Files are not used.
• [Data File]
This is a file type required for the memory manager function.
• [Buffering File]
This is a file type required for the data logging function.
The following options become active when [Data File] is chosen for [Type].
[No. of Records] (1 to 4095)
Specify the number of records to divide a file.
[Bytes for Record] (0 to 32)
Specify the maximum number of characters for giving names to records.
When displaying or editing record names, refer to this number of bytes.
[No. of Data] (1 to 4096)
Specify the number of words to be recorded.
[Memory]
When transferring data from the memory card to PLC, specify the top
memory address for storing data in the PLC memory.
[
Use Temp. Control Net/PLC2Way]
This item becomes active when using the temperature control network or
PLC2Way function. For more information, refer to the related Instruction
Manual.
[Transfer Mode]
When transferring data between the memory card and PLC, the minimum
unit is a “record.” Choose either [Data Only] or [Data + Record Name].
One file has been created. When editing a file other than this, click the tab in the
[Memory Card] dialog and make the setting accordingly.
25-14
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Memory Card Setting Example
When the [Memory Card] dialog is set as the following example, the area
divisions in the memory card and their relationship with the PLC memory can be
illustrated as shown below:
File No. 0
[Type: Data File]
[No. of Records: 3]
[No. of Data: 5]
[Bytes for Record: 8]
[Memory: D130]
[ Use Temp. Control Net/PLC2Way]
[Transfer Mode: Data only]
File No. 1
[Type: Data File]
[No. of Records: 2]
[No. of Data: 2]
[Bytes for Record: 4]
[Memory: D505]
[ Use Temp. Control Net/PLC2Way]
[Transfer Mode: Data + Record Name]
25
File 0
Record 0
Data 0
PLC memory
Memory Card Setting
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Record 1
Data 0
D130
Data 1
D131
Data 2
D132
Data 3
Data 4
Record 2
File 0
Data 0
File 1
Data 1
File 2
Data 2
File 3
Data 3
File 4
Data 4
D133
D134
run
stop
PLC
File 5
File 1
Record 0 name
Record 0 name
File 14
File 15
Data 0
D505
D506
Data 1
D507
Record 1 name
D508
Memory for record
names
Memory for data
Record 1 name
Data 0
Memory card
Data 1
25-15
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Memory Card Mode
[Memory Card] Dialog
♦ [Main] Tab Window
A maximum of four memory card mode parts can be set per screen.
[Division No.]
In one division, only one memory card mode can be registered. Each of the
base screen and overlaps 0 to 2 can contain one memory card mode.
[Memory]
When editing or transferring data stored in the memory card between V
series and PLC, this memory address is used for controlling the process.
The allocation of memory is shown below.
Memory
n
Memory Name
Function
RCV_FLAG
Mode operation command
n+1
RCV_FILENo
File number designation
n+2
RCV_RECDNo
Record number designation
PLC → V
• A. n (RCV_FLAG)
MSB
LSB
15 14 13 12
0
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
Record name edit
prohibited
Record lock
File lock
File name edit prohibited
File selection
Card No./name edit prohibited
Quick selection
Transfer from V series → PLC
Format prohibited
Data transfer prohibited
Transfer from PLC → V series
Bit No.
Contents
Description
0
Record name edit prohibited
Record name edit is prohibited.
1
File name edit prohibited
File name edit is prohibited.
2
Card No./name edit
prohibited
Card number and name edit is prohibited.
3
Format prohibited
Memory card formatting is prohibited.
4
Data transfer prohibited
Data transfer between the memory card and the PLC is prohibited.
Not used
These bits must be reset to “0.”
8
Record lock
The use of [Record Select] switch is prohibited.
9
File lock
The use of [File Select] switch is prohibited.
5 to 7
25-16
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Bit No.
Contents
Description
10
File selection
In the display area part:
[0]: Only the files for [Type: Data File] are displayed.
[1]: All files are displayed.
11
Not used
This bit must be reset to “0.”
12
Quick selection
When bit 14 or bit 15 is set to “1,” while this bit is set, data is
transferred upon selection of a record in the V series.
13
Not used
This bit must be reset to “0.”
14
Transfer from V series →
PLC
Data is transferred from the V series (memory card) to PLC at the
edge of [0 → 1]. When transferring has been completed, bit 14 of
“CFM_TRFIN” (I/F memory n + 5) is set to “1.” After transfer, reset
this bit to “0.”
15
Transfer from PLC → V
series
Data is transferred from PLC to the V series (memory card) at the
edge of [0 → 1]. When transferring has been completed, bit 15 of
“CFM_TRFIN” (I/F memory n + 5) is set to “1.” After transfer, reset
this bit to “0.”
* When [Not Used] or [Buffering File] is chosen for [Type] of the specified file
number, the file number cannot be selected.
• C. n + 2 (RCV_RECDNo)
This bit is used to specify a record number from the PLC when bit 8 (record
lock) of “RCV_FLAG” (n) is set to “1.” Record numbers can be specified from
the PLC, not on the screen. Unlike a selection by the [Record Select] switch,
the record number specified is displayed on top of the display area.
[Key Display Location]
OVLP0 (= overlap 0)/OVLP1/OVLP2/BASE
When editing memory card number and name, file name, and record name,
choose where to place the entry keys from overlaps 0 to 2 or the base
screen. Only one place (base, overlap 0 to 2) can be chosen for the entry
keys.
[Process Cycle]
Set a cycle for the V series to read the PLC data while it is communicating
with the PLC. For more information, refer to “Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”
♦ [Char. Prop.] Tab Window
Set properties of characters for displaying file or record numbers or names in the
display area. For more information, refer to “Chapter 6 Message Display
(Relay/Message)” (page 6-7).
25-17
Memory Card Mode
• B. n + 1 (RCV_FILENo)
This bit is used to specify a file number from the PLC when bit 9 (file lock) or
bit 8 (record lock) of “RCV_FLAG” (n) is set to “1.” File numbers can be
specified from the PLC, not on the screen.
25
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Display Area Parts
Files and records stored in the memory card can be listed in the display area
part with the memory manager function. Use display area parts for displaying
files or records.
♦ Notes on Setting
The display area part must be linked with memory card mode to work as the
display area for the memory manager function. Association is performed by
[Division No.]. If you set display area parts with the same division number as the
[Memory Card] dialog, it is recognized as a display area part for use in the
memory card mode. For more information on the procedure of setting and
editing the display area part, refer to “Chapter 6 Message Display
(Relay/Message)” (page 6-9).
♦ Display Area Function
• Display of Files and Records
Files and records can be listed in the display area part. To scroll the hidden
part into view, use the Roll Up/Down switch or Plus/Minus Block switch with
the same division number.
• Selection of Files and Records
Press the desired file or record in the display area part to choose it. Since
the display area part is equipped with a switch function, pressing a file or a
record in the part allows its automatic selection. The Y size of each switch is
based on the Y enlargement factor specified for the characters in the display
area part.
Card No. 0
File No.
Card Name Hakko File Name
File Select
Record Select
25-18
0. Product Qty
1. Target Qty
2. SR-003
3. TU-008
File No. 3
Record
Card No. 0
Record
Card Name Hakko File Name TU-008
File Select
Record Select
0. TUA
1. TUB
2. TUC
3. TUD
4. TUE
5. TUF
6. TUG
Record
Record
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Data Display for Memory Manager Function
With the memory manager function, it is possible to show the memory card
number and name, file number and name, and record number and name on the
screen. For number display, use numerical data display parts; for name display,
use character display parts.
♦ [Memory Card No.] [Memory Card File No.] [Memory Card Record No.]
• Outline
The memory card, file, and record numbers in use or currently selected can
be indicated on the screen with the memory manager function.
Card No.
12
File Name
3
Target value
Record No.
6
Record Name
SDY-K
• Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Specify the same division number as in the [Memory Card] dialog.
[Display Function]
Set the numerical data display function. Choose from [Memory Card
No.], [Memory Card File No.], or [Memory Card Record No.]. When the
desired display function is clicked in the memory card mode tool bar, the
function is automatically chosen as default in the dialog to be opened.
[Digits]
• When [Memory Card No.] is chosen for [Display Function]:
The available card numbers are 0 to 255. Specify in the range of “1” to
“3.”
• When [Memory Card File No.] is chosen for [Display Function]:
The available file numbers are 0 to 15. Specify in the range of “1” to “2.”
• When [Memory Card Record No.] is chosen for [Display Function]:
The available record numbers are 0 to 4094. Specify in the range of “1”
to “4.”
If the number of digits less than the above is specified, figures will not be
shown correctly.
25-19
Memory Card Mode
Card Name ECM
File No.
25
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
♦ [Memory Card Name] [Memory Card File Name] [Memory Card Record Name]
• Outline
The memory card, file, and record names in use or currently selected can be
indicated on the screen with the memory manager function.
Card No.
12
Card Name ECM
File No.
File Name
3
Target value
Record No.
6
Record NameSDY-K
• Notes on Setting
[Division No.]
Specify the same division number as in the [Memory Card] dialog.
[Display Function]
Set the character display function. Choose from [Memory Card Name],
[Memory Card File Name], or [Memory Card Record Name]. When the
desired display function is clicked in the memory card mode tool bar, the
function is automatically chosen as default in the dialog to be opened.
[Bytes]
For card, file and record names, it is possible to specify within the range
of 0 to 32. Specify the number appropriate for card, file or record names.
* For record names, [Bytes for Record] is specified for each file in the
[Memory Card] dialog; therefore, select the greatest number of bytes for the
files.
Switches for Memory Manager Function
Switches for file or record selection in the memory card or data transfer from the
PLC to the memory card are available with the memory manager function.
♦ Switch Setting Procedure
The switches used in memory card mode are classified into two categories: the
ones exclusively used in memory card mode and those available in memory
card mode.
•
[Memory Card Mode] icon
Memory card mode tool bar
Format switch
Memory card switches
(1) (Refer to page 25-21.)
(2) to (8) (Refer to page 25-21.)
* [Function] is automatically set.
•
[Switch] icon
[Function]: (Set the desired function.)
* Be sure to set for [Function].
25-20
(9) to (13) (Refer to page 25-21.)
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Notes on Switch Setting
[Division No.]
Specify the same division number as in the [Memory Card] dialog.
[Function]
Set the switch function. The following switch functions are available in
memory card mode.
Card Format
Pressing this switch formats the memory card as specified in the [Memory Card]
dialog.
* This switch is required for the data logging function (except for CF card) as well.
(2)
File Select
When file names in the memory card are displayed, this switch starts flashing.
Pressing on a file name selects it.
(3)
Record Select
This switch is active when a file has been chosen.
Pressing this switch brings up record names in the display area. The switch starts
flashing. Pressing on a record name selects it. The switch keeps flashing.
(4)
Card No. Edit
Card Name Edit
Auxiliary setting item: multi-overlap number/ MLIB placement position
Press the corresponding switch when you want to start editing card numbers or
names. When the entry keys (entry mode) are placed on the base screen, the keys
can be used. When the entry keys (entry mode) are placed on an overlap, the
overlap is called up. At the same time, the keys can be used.
* The settings of the multi-overlap number and the MLIB placement position
become active only when the entry keys (entry mode) are placed on the
multi-overlap.
(5)
File Name Edit
Auxiliary setting item: multi-overlap number/ MLIB placement position
When this switch is pressed, it is turned on. At the same time, the [File Select] switch
starts flashing, indicating that a file can be selected. When a file is selected while the
[File Name Edit] switch is turned on, the file name can be edited using entry keys.
Pressing this switch turns it on, and pressing the switch again turns it off. (The
switch is not active during file name or record name editing.)
* The settings of the multi-overlap number and the MLIB placement position
become active only when the entry keys (entry mode) are placed on the
multi-overlap.
(6)
Record Name Edit
Auxiliary setting item: multi-overlap number/ MLIB placement position
When this switch is pressed, it is turned on. When a file is selected while the [Record
Name Edit] switch is turned on, the record name can be edited using entry keys.
Pressing this switch turns it on, and pressing the switch again turns it off. (The
switch is not active during file name or record name editing.)
* The settings of the multi-overlap number and the MLIB placement position
become active only when the entry keys (entry mode) are placed on the
multi-overlap.
(7)
Data Transfer
V > PLC
This switch is active only when a record in the memory card is selected.
The selected record is transferred from the memory card to the PLC. The data is
stored in the memory address specified for [Memory] in the [Memory Card] dialog.
(8)
Data Transfer
PLC > V
This switch is active only when a record in the memory card is selected.
Data is transferred from the PLC to the selected record. The data is transferred from
the memory address specified for [Memory] in the [Memory Card] dialog. The
number of data to be transferred is determined by [No. of Data].
(9)
Roll Up
Pressing this switch scrolls up file or record names one by one in the display area.
(10)
Roll Down
Pressing this switch scrolls down file or record names one by one in the display area.
(11)
Plus Block
Pressing this switch scrolls up pages of file or record names in the display area.
(12)
Minus Block
Pressing this switch scrolls down pages of file or record names in the display area.
(13)
Reset
When “11” or “12” is stored in the I/F memory address “n + 1” (specified in the
[Memory Card] dialog), pressing this switch clears the data in “n + 1.” (The error bit of
“n” remains set.)
25-21
25
Memory Card Mode
(1)
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
♦ Examples of Switch Operations
• [File Select] and [Record Select] switches
Flashing
0. Product Qty
1. Target Qty
2. SR-003
3. TU-008
0. TUA
1. TUB
2. TUC
3. TUD
4. TUE
5. TUF
6. TUG
File Select
Record Select
File names are displayed in the display
area while the [File Select] switch is
flashing.
File Select
Flashing
Record Select
Record names are displayed in the
display area while the [Record Select]
switch is flashing.
• [File Name Edit] switch
Flashing
File Select
File Select
File Name Edit
File Name Edit
0. Product
1. Target
2. SR-003
0. Product Qty
1. Target Qty
2. SR-003
File Name
A
E
I
M
When the [File Name Select] switch is
pressed, the [File Select] switch starts
flashing.
B
F
J
N
Product Qty
C
G
K
O
D
H
L
P
The file name can be edited
when a file is selected.
• [Record Name Edit] switch
Flashing
File Select
File Select
File Name Edit
File Name Edit
0. Product
1. Target
2. SR-003
0. TUA
1. TUB
2. TUC
Press the [Record Name Edit] switch.
(The switch is turned on.)
25-22
Record Name
TUA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
CR
The record name can be edited
when a record is selected.
(When the [Record Name Edit]
switch remains on.)
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Entry Key (Entry Mode) Setting
When using the memory manager function, card numbers and file names can be
edited on the screen. To enable the edit, the entry mode must be set.
Place entry keys on the base screen or an overlap. For an overlap, choose
[Normal], [Call], or [Multi] from the [Overlap Setting] dialog.
Entry keys can be placed in one location for one memory card mode.
♦ Placing Entry Keys on Multi-overlap
To allow operators to edit card numbers or file names (by pressing the [Card No.
Edit] or [File Name Edit] switch), an overlap in entry mode must be called. This
overlap is cleared when the editing has been completed. In this case, an
overlap in entry mode must be set in the multi-overlap edit window.
In multi-overlap editing:
Card No. Edit
Card No. 120
Card No.
120
Overlap No. 0=Multi-overlap
CR
Setting Procedure
•
[Overlap] icon
Multi-overlap Edit
[Editing layer change: OVLP0]
Overlap (Normal)
[Entry Mode] icon
Entry mode tool bar
Detail (Entry)
Main
Type: Memory Card
•
Screen Edit
•
Screen Edit
[Overlap] icon
[Memory Card Mode] icon
[Type: [Multi]
Overlap (Multi)
Memory card mode tool bar
25-23
Memory Card Mode
On the screen
25
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Setting in Multi-overlap Edit
After an overlap part has been placed, set entry mode on the overlap. The
following setting is required in entry mode.
[Detail]
Card No.
120
[Keypad]
[Entry Display]
CR
All of the above settings must be made. If any setting is omitted, the entry
mode does not work correctly. Take a note of this.
• [Keypad] icon (= entry keys)
Click the [Keypad] icon in the entry mode tool bar. Choose the desired part
and place it on the overlap.
* The same division number as in the [Entry] dialog must be used for all entry
key switches.
• [Entry Display] icon (= entry display)
Click the [Entry Display] icon in the entry mode tool bar. The pull-down menu
is displayed. To call up the overlap for number edit, choose [Numerical
Data]. To call up the overlap for name edit, choose [Character].
* The same division number as in the [Entry] dialog must be used for all entry
display parts.
When [Numerical Data] is chosen for the entry display part, the same
number of digits as specified for [Digits] for the memory card mode part must
be used. Likewise, when [Character] is chosen, the same number of bytes
as specified for [Bytes] for the memory card mode part must be used.
• [Entry] dialog
Set the dialog on the same editing layer and in the same division as entry
keys. Note the following points for setting.
[Division No.]
Specify the same division number as specified for entry keys and entry
display parts.
[Type]
Choose [Memory Card]. The entry mode for memory card mode is set
up.
25-24
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Setting on the Screen
The following two settings are necessary on the screen.
• [Overlap Setting]
To call up an overlap on the screen, an overlap setting must be made for the
screen. (Be sure to choose [Multi] for [Type].) For more information on the
overlap setting on the screen, refer to “Chapter 2 Overlap.”
These items are associated.
25
When [OVLP0 to OVLP2] is chosen for [Key Display Location] and [OK] is
clicked, the [Overlap (Multi)] dialog is automatically displayed. Set
appropriately, or if not required, click [Cancel].
- Switches for Memory Card Mode
[Card No. Edit] [Card Name Edit] [File Name Edit] [Record Name Edit]
When entry keys are placed on a multi-overlap, these four switches work
as “multi-overlap call switches.” Each switch must be equipped with a
multi-overlap number and an MLIB placement position. The setting
procedure of these switches is the same as used for a switch for
[Function: Multi-Overlap].
♦ Placing Entry Keys on Call-Overlap
The setting procedure is almost the same as that for placing on a multi-overlap.
Only the different points are explained.
Setting on the Screen
• [Overlap Setting]
Choose [Call] in the [Overlap Setting] dialog. An MLIB placement position
must be set.
For more information on the overlap setting on the screen, refer to “Chapter
2 Overlap.”
25-25
Memory Card Mode
• Memory Card Mode Setting
- [Key Display Location] in the [Memory Card] dialog
Choose from [OVLP0], [OVLP1], or [OVLP2], for which [Multi] is chosen
in the [Overlap Setting] dialog. Entry keys can be placed only in one
position. (It is not possible to use entry keys on both the base screen and
an overlap in one memory card mode.)
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
• Memory Card Mode Setting
- [Key Display Location] in the [Memory Card] dialog
Choose from [OVLP0], [OVLP1], or [OVLP2], for which [Call] is chosen in
the [Overlap Setting] dialog.
- Switches for Memory Card Mode
[Card No. Edit] [Card Name Edit] [File Name Edit] [Record Name Edit]
These four switches function as “call-overlap call switches.” The
auxiliary setting items - multi-overlap number and MLIB placement
position - are not valid.
♦ Placing Entry Keys on Normal Overlap
To allow operators to edit card numbers or file names (by pressing the [Card No.
Edit] or [File Name Edit] switch), an overlap in entry mode must be called. This
overlap is cleared when the editing has been completed. In this case, an
overlap in entry mode must be set on the screen.
Setting Procedure
•
Screen Edit
[Overlap] icon
[Editing layer change: OVLP0 to 2]
[Type: Normal]
[Entry Mode] icon
Overlap (Normal)
Entry mode tool bar
Detail (Entry)
Main
Type: Memory Card
•
Screen Edit
[Memory Card Mode] icon
Memory card mode tool bar
Setting on the Screen
• Registration of a normal overlap
Set entry mode for the overlap in the same setting procedure as that for a
multi-overlap.
• Memory Card Mode Setting
- [Key Display Location] in the [Memory Card] dialog
Choose from [OVLP0], [OVLP1], or [OVLP2], for which [Normal] is
chosen in the [Overlap setting] dialog.
When [OVLP0 to OVLP2] is chosen for [Key Display Location] and [OK] is
clicked, the [Overlap (Multi)] dialog is automatically displayed. Click [Cancel].
- Switches for Memory Card Mode
[Card No. Edit] [Card Name Edit] [File Name Edit] [Record Name Edit]
When entry keys are placed on an overlap, these four switches work as
“overlap call switches.” A multi-overlap number and an MLIB placement
position are included as auxiliary setting items. These auxiliary setting
items are not valid in this case.
25-26
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
♦ Placing Entry Keys on Base Screen
Entry keys become available by pressing the [Card No. Edit] or [File Name Edit]
switch. Entry mode and memory card mode are set on the same screen. The
following settings are required.
• Entry Mode Setting
Set entry mode. The setting procedure is the same as that for setting on an
overlap.
• Memory Card Mode Setting
Take the following notes on the setting items described below.
- [Key Display Location] in the [Memory Card] dialog
Select [Base].
- Switches for Memory Card Mode
[Card No. Edit] [Card Name Edit] [File Name Edit] [Record Name Edit]
Entry keys can be used by pressing these switches. The auxiliary setting
items - multi-overlap number and MLIB placement position - are not valid.
25
Memory Card Mode
25-27
Chapter 25 Memory Card Mode
Setting and Importing Procedures on the V Series
To start the memory manager function, perform the following procedures on the
V series:
Transfer screen data to the V series.
Connect the V series to the PLC.
Format the memory card mode.
Open the screen where you set the format switch
(memory card mode) and press the format switch.
Memory manager function ... Available
Immediately after formatting, the memory manager
function becomes available.
If the memory manager function does not work, check the status of [I/F Memory]
set in the [Memory Card Setting] dialog for the screen data file (refer to page
25-11), and take an appropriate action.
25-28
Chapter 26 Ethernet Function
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Ethernet Function
When you connect the V series to the Ethernet, you need to set up an IP
address/gateway. Be sure to consult with your network administrator.
Outline
The V series has four Ethernet functions as shown below. Depending on the V
series model or communication interface unit (CU-03), you may be only able to
use some of the V series Ethernet functions. Refer to the following table.
Functions
V series + Option
V7i series
(V7
i)
Screen Data
Transfer
PLC
Communication
E-Mail
Web Server
26
Internal LAN Port
×
×
CU-03
×
×
V6 series*1
CU-03
×
×
Outline
CU-03
V7 series
(V7
)
*1 Except V606, V609E, and V608CH.
Screen Data Transfer
You can download/upload screen data on your personal computer over the LAN.
(
Refer to “Chapter 5 Data Display” in the Reference Manual (Operation).)
V-SFT
MONITOUCH
LAN
MONITOUCH
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
26-1
Chapter 26 Ethernet Function
Ethernet Communication with PLC and Other V Series
You can connect the V series to the Ethernet interface of the PLC and to other V
series, allowing 10 Mbps of high-speed communication. Also, you can transfer
data to the V series from your personal computer if you create programs using
VB, etc. (
Refer to Chapter 4 in the Hardware Specifications Manual.)
• PLC Models
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
LAN
F1
SYSTEM
POWER
26-2
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
QnA Series, QnH Series
FA-M3, FA-M3R
Chapter 26 Ethernet Function
E-Mail
You can control if an e-mail is sent by setting the sampling error bit ON or OFF.
(
Refer to “Chapter 27 E-Mail.”)
E-mail
Mail Server
26
Ethernet LAN
Outline
ON
OFF
F1
Bit sampling
Relay sampling
Alarm function
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
26-3
Chapter 26 Ethernet Function
Web Server
You can monitor the internal memory of the V7i series, the PLC memory
connected to the V7i series, the temperature control memory, and the memory
card memory using a Web browser on a personal computer that is attached to
the LAN.
(
Refer to “Chapter 28 Web Server.”)
LAN
CF
F1
SYSTEM
POWER
26-4
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Chapter 27 E-Mail
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
E-Mail
When you connect the V7 series to the Ethernet to send e-mail, you need to
set up an IP address/gateway. Be sure to consult with your network
administrator.
Outline
E-mail is sent according to the status of the ON/OFF bit. If a problem occurs,
you will be notified of the fault even at a remote location.
• Supported type
V7i (Use internal LAN port.)
• Environment requirements
Mail server is on the LAN.
27
• Mode allowing you to send an e-mail
Sampling mode
(Bit sampling/relay sampling/alarm function)
Outline
E-mail
Mail Server
Ethernet LAN
ON
OFF
F1
Bit sampling
Relay sampling
Alarm function
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
27-1
Chapter 27 E-Mail
Setting Items
• E-Mail Setting (
Refer to page 27-3.)
• Receiver’s Mail Address Setting (
• Message Edit (
Refer to page 27-4.)
Refer to page 27-5.)
• IP Address/Gateway Setting (
Refer to page 27-2.)
IP Address/Gateway Setting
You need to set up an IP address/gateway to send an e-mail. If a gateway is not
set, “warning: 208” is displayed on MONITOUCH when you try to transfer screen
data.
When Using a Network Table:
When sending or receiving data over the Ethernet to or from other V series or
personal computers, you need to set up a network table. Using the network
table, set up all nodes with an IP address, plus the default gateway, to allow the
V series to communicate on the Ethernet. On the Main Menu screen of
MONITOUCH, specify the number from the network table that is your port
number setting.
(Network Table Setting:
Refer to Chapter 4 in the Hardware Specifications
Manual.)
(Main Menu Screen:
Refer to Chapter 2 in the Hardware Specifications
Manual.)
When Not Using a Network Table:
When you operate the V series by itself without sending/receiving data with the
other V series or personal computers on a network, and only send e-mail, you
do not need to set up a network table. In this case, set up an IP
address/gateway on the Main Menu screen of MONITOUCH.
(Main Menu Screen:
Refer to Chapter 2 in the Hardware Specifications
Manual.)
27-2
Chapter 27 E-Mail
E-Mail Setting
Select [Unit Setting] from the [System Setting] menu. The [Unit Setting] dialog is
displayed. Click the [E-Mail] tab.
[SMTP IP Address]
Set up the IP address of the mail server.
[Sender’s Mail Address]
Set up the sender’s mail address. It is recommended that you prepare a
special account only for the V7 on the mail server and set up its address.
[Subject]
Set up the subject. It is displayed in the “Subject” field in an incoming mail.
[Receiver’s Mail Address] (Max: 8)
Register receiver’s mail addresses. Register all mail addresses that you
send to from the V7i.
• [Add]
Register a new address.
• [Change]
Change the address which is currently selected.
• [Delete]
Delete the address which is currently selected.
27-3
E-Mail Setting
[Sender’s Name]
Set up the sender’s name. It is displayed in the “Sender” field in an incoming
mail.
27
Chapter 27 E-Mail
Receiver’s Mail Address Setting
Set up a receiver’s mail address in the buffering area. You can set up a
receiver’s address for each sampling.
Buffering Area Setting
This section describes the required settings for sending e-mail. For more
information on other settings, refer to “Chapter 10 Sampling.”
[
Use E-Mail]
Select the tab number of the buffering area setting to send an e-mail and
check this box.
[Receiver’s]
Set up a receiver’s address.
Receiver’s Mail Address
Set up a receiver’s address.
In the left window, registered mail addresses are displayed. Select the address
and click the [>>] button. The address is registered and displayed in the right
window.
[E-Mail Setting]
You can refer to the [E-Mail] setting in the [Unit Setting] dialog.
27-4
Chapter 27 E-Mail
Message Edit
In the [Message Edit] window, register messages corresponding to abnormal
bits and select a message to send.
• Select [Message] from the [Item] menu.
The [Message Edit] window is displayed.
Check the box in the [E-Mail] column of the message to send.
If the [Message Edit] window looks different from the figure above, select [Display
Change] from the [Display] menu. (Message Edit:
Refer to Chapter 2 in the
Reference Manual (Operation).)
27
The information on sent e-mail messages is output to system memory ($s).
• Address $s1005
If MONITOUCH receives send requests continually, the number (0 - 16) of
e-mail messages which are waiting to be sent is stored. The V7i can keep
up to 16 e-mail messages. Any more messages than 16 are truncated.
• Address $s1006
Error information on e-mail messages is stored.
Error No.
0
Contents
Normal
1
E-Mail address error
2
SMTP server logon error
3
SMTP server logoff error
27-5
Message Edit
System Memory ($s)
Chapter 27 E-Mail
Please use this page freely.
27-6
Chapter 28 Web Server
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Web Server
When you connect the V series to the Ethernet, you need to set up an IP
address/gateway. Be sure to consult with your network administrator.
• Supported Type
V7i (Use internal LAN port.)
• Required Item
A CF card which saves HTM file, etc., to be accessed with a Web browser.
Outline
• You can monitor the internal memory of the V7i, the PLC memory connected
to the V7i, the temperature control memory, and the memory card memory
using a Web browser on a personal computer that is attached to the LAN.
You cannot access it via the Internet. Refer to “Notes” (page 28-4).
28
Outline
LAN
CF
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
SYSTEM
POWER
28-1
Chapter 28 Web Server
• If you use a table data display, you can create a SHT file (
Refer to page
28-5.) with the V-SFT editor. You don’t need to create a file for monitoring.
(
Refer to page 28-6.)
- V-SFT screen
- Web browser screen
This SHT file is a simple file to display the table data display only. To
display titles or update the monitor automatically, you need to add titles or
the monitor auto update function respectively to the SHT file.
28-2
Chapter 28 Web Server
• Writing data to the V7i and monitoring are available from a Web browser.
Use the CGI function (MemAcs.cgi), which is built in the V7i. (
Refer to
page 28-11.) However, you need to create an HTM file in this case.
• You can save a screen shot and a video image into a CF card in JPEG
format with the V7i. Such JPEG data from the CF card can be displayed with
a Web browser. You can check the machine line status of a production site
from a remote monitoring room. (
Refer to page 28-16.)
28
Outline
28-3
Chapter 28 Web Server
Notes
Browser Setting
The web server function is available within a LAN only. You cannot access the
server via Internet using a global IP address. Be sure to uncheck [Automatically
Detect Settings] and [Use a Proxy Server for your LAN] in the LAN settings of
your Web browser.
Ex.:
In the case of Windows98 Internet Explorer:
1. Start Internet Explorer.
2. Select [Internet Options] from the [Tools] menu. The [Internet Options]
dialog is displayed.
3. Click the [Connections] tab.
4. Click the [LAN Settings] button in the [Local Area Network (LAN) Settings]
field. The [Local Area Network (LAN) Settings] dialog is displayed.
28-4
Chapter 28 Web Server
5. Uncheck [ Use a Proxy Server for your LAN] and [
Settings] and click [OK].
Automatically Detect
Files Available to Use on the Web Server
When you use the Web server function, access a CF card in the V7i from the
Web browser on your personal computer. The files you can access from the
Web browser are as follows:
Extension
MIME Type/Sub Type
Description
htm
text/html
HTML document
sht
text/html
SHT file (with SSI)
txt
text/plain
Text file
gif
image/gif
GIF image
jpg, jpe
image/jpeg
JPEG image
28
Notes
The files above should be created with the name using eight (8) or less
one-byte alphanumeric characters (0 to 9, A to Z) and an extension of 3
one-byte alphanumeric characters. If the file name or extension does not
follow this rule, you cannot access it from the browser.
SSI (Server Side Include)
This is one of the methods to insert dynamic information, such as the current time, into
an HTML document. It is notated as <!--#exec cgi="xxx.cgi"--> or <!--#echo
var="DATE_LOCAL"-->. A file that contains SSI is called SHT/SHTM file.
28-5
Chapter 28 Web Server
Table Data Display Monitor
You can monitor table data display on the V-series screen with a Web browser.
A SHT file, which is required for monitoring with a Web browser, can be created
with the V-SFT editor. You can create a monitor screen easily by using the table
data display.
Creating SHT Files
Create a SHT file using the V-SFT.
♦ Procedure
1. Place the table data display on the screen of the V-SFT editor.
2. Click the table data to make handles appear. For multiple table data
displays, create one by one in order.
3. Click [Edit] → [Table Data Display Editing] → [Make Browser File].
28-6
Chapter 28 Web Server
4. The [Browser File Setting] dialog is displayed. Enter the file name.
The file name above should be eight (8) one-byte alphanumeric characters (0
to 9, A to Z). You cannot access the file using other characters.
5. Two files are created in the “~\V6W\Webserv” folder, which was installed
when the V-SFT editor was installed.
• (File Name).sht
The file to be displayed in a Web browser.
• (File Name).txt
Table data file for table data display
Ex.:
28
When the file name is “AAA”
Table Data Display Monitor
6. Save the screen data.
You need to use a SHT file, because SSI is used for the monitoring function of
the table data display. An HTM file is not available.
28-7
Chapter 28 Web Server
Saving on a CF Card
Save the SHT file, which is created in the “~\V6W\Webserv” folder, into a CF
card then monitor it with a Web browser from your personal computer. Save the
file using CF card manager or using Explorer.
♦ When Using CF Card Manager:
1. Select [CF Card Manager] from the [File] menu of the V-SFT editor.
2. The [Select CF Card] dialog is displayed. Select the CF card drive.
3. “CF Card Manager” is started.
4. Click [File] → [Write to CF Card]. The [Write to CF Card] dialog is displayed.
Select the screen data to be written to the CF card.
5. The access folder is created in the CF card. At this point, the two SHT files
“
.sht” and “
.txt”, that were created in the “~\V6W\Webserv” folder,
are stored into the “\access folder\WEBSERV” folder of the CF card.
Note that all files in the “~\V6W\Webserv” folder are saved to the CF card in
this case. You need to delete the unnecessary files.
(CF Card Manger:
CF card setting of a
screen data file
28-8
Refer to “Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only).”)
Chapter 28 Web Server
♦ When Using Explorer:
1. Start Explorer on Windows.
2. Specify the CF card drive.
3. Select [CF Card Setting] from the [System Setting] menu. Check if the folder
name is set for [Access Folder Name].
(Access folder:
Refer to “Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only).”)
CF card setting of a
screen data file
• Folder name is set:
Copy the two SHT files “
.sht” and “
.txt,” that were created in the
“~\V6W\Webserv” folder, into the “\access folder\WEBSERV” folder of the
CF card.
28
1. Create new folder with the same name as “access folder” name.
2. Create “WEBSERV” folder in the “access folder” which is created in
step 1.
3. Copy the two SHT files “
.sht” and “
.txt”, that were created in
the “~\V6W\Webserv” folder, into the “\access folder\WEBSERV”
folder of the CF card.
Copy here.
28-9
Table Data Display Monitor
• Folder name is not set:
Chapter 28 Web Server
Accessing with a Web Browser
Access the V7i, in which a CF card is inserted, with a Web browser.
1. Start a Web browser on your PC on the Ethernet.
2. Specify the V7i IP address for [Address] and the SHT file as shown below.
http://(IP address)/WEBSERV/(file name).sht
3. The table data display is displayed on the Web browser.
IP address 192.168.1.51
SHT file name: AAA
http://192.168.1.51/WEBSERV/AAA.sht
• Access folder is a route on the Web server function.
• In this chapter, it assumes that the HTM file is stored in the Wevserv folder.
CF card
AAATEST (Access folder)
BITMAP
CARD
DSP
FONT
HDCOPY
JPEG
MEMO
RECIPE
SAMPLE
SNAP
SRAM
VD0000.jpg
VD0001.jpg
:
WAV
WEVSERV
DAT0000
28-10
CCC.htm
DDD.htm
AAA.sht
:
Chapter 28 Web Server
Memory Access
You can access (read/ write) to any of the internal memory of the V7i, the PLC
memory connected to the V7i, and the temperature control memory.
In this case, you need to set each parameter in the table (page 28-12) and
create an HTM (SHT) file for sending to the V7i. You can access (read/ write) to
the desired memory from this HTM (SHT) file by specifying the CGI function
(MemAcs.cgi) prepared in the V7i.
Memory Access Flowchart
The procedure of memory access is as follows:
PC
Web browser
(1) Specify the V7i’s IP
address and the HTM file
Send access memory
parameters
(8) Display the received
HTM file
V7i
(7) Send the HTM file to
the Web browser
(2) Receive
(6) Receive
(3) Start CGI
28
CGI
(5) Create and output
HTM file to display
access result
CGI Function (MemAcs.cgi)
“MemAcs.cgi” is a prepared CGI function to read or write memory of devices
connected to the V7i. Specify the parameters with the SHT file to start the CGI
function. The CGI recognizes whether to read or write according to the received
parameter values. For read, it sends a monitor table to the Web browser. For
write, it sends its writing result to the Web browser.
28-11
Memory Access
(4) Access to the internal or
PLC memory based on
the parameters
Chapter 28 Web Server
Memory Access Parameter List
The required parameters to start the CGI function (MemAcs.cgi) are as follows.
Enter “Parameter name” and “Parameter value” correctly. If the name or value is
wrong, MemAcs.cgi cannot recognize it, then an error occurs.
Parameter Name
Contents
W
MEM_ACSTYPE
Memory access type
0: Memory read
1: Memory write
MEM_MODEL
Memory model
0: User
1: PLC memory
2: Memory card memory
3: Temperature control memory
MEM_TYPE
Memory type Internal memory
MEM_ADDR
Memory address
Top memory address to be accessed (for 32-bit address)
MEM_EXP
Extension code
Set the required models only. Set “0” for others.
MEM_TRMNO
PLC station number in the case of multi-drop connection
MEM_WCNT
The number of words to be accessed
Data length 1 word: 1 to 128
Data length 2 words: 1 to 64
MEM_TBL_LINE
The number of lines of the table
×
MEM_TBL_COLMN
The number of columns of the table
×
MEM_UPDT_TIME
Update cycle (Unit: second) * No updates when it is “0.”
×
MEM_WR_DATA
Writing data
Set the data for the number of words, which is specified within
[MEM-WCNT] with delimiter “,” (comma).
MEM_WRTYPE
MEM_DSPTYPE
R
0: User
1: System
2: Non-volatile memory ($L)
3: Non-volatile memory ($LD)
PLC memory (Refer to Hardware Specifications Manual.)
Temperature control memory (Refer to the Temperature
Control Network.)
Memory Card Memory File No.
Writing data type
Memory display type
×
0: DEC
1: HEX
2: OCT
3: BIN
×
0: DEC
1: DEC (w/ − sign)
2: DEC (w/ +− sign)
3: HEX
4: OCT
5: BIN
×
1 to 32
×
×
MEM_KETA
Memory value display digit
MEM_DCPT
Memory value decimal point
0 to 10
MEM_DLEN
Memory data length
0: 1 word
1: 2 words
MEM_INPUT
Input Type
0: DEC
1: BCD
×
W: Used for memory write
R: Used for memory read
28-12
Chapter 28 Web Server
Memory Access Example
♦ Creating HTM Files
By using radio buttons or combo boxes, create a HTM file in which to set the
read/ write parameters and save it to the “~\V6W\Webserv” folder.
<Example>
<HTML>
<BODY>
Starting the entry form
Use this as is
<FORM METHOD="GET" ACTION="../MemAcs.cgi">
<DT>Way to Access Memory
<DD>
<INPUT TYPE="radio" NAME="MEM_ACSTYPE" VALUE=0 CHECKED>Read<BR>
<INPUT TYPE="radio" NAME="MEM_ACSTYPE" VALUE=1>Write
Radio button
<DT>Access Memory<DD>
<SELECT SIZE=1 NAME="MEM_MODEL">
<OPTION VALUE=0 SELCTED>Internal Memory
<OPTION VALUE=1>PLC Memory
<OPTION VALUE=2>Memory Card Memory
<OPTION VALUE=3>Temp. Control Memory
</SELECT>
Combo box
<DT>Memory Address
<DD>
<INPUT TYPE="text" SIZE=6 MAXLENGTH=20 NAME="MEM_ADDR" VALUE=100><BR>
28
Keyboard entry
Memory Access
<INPUT TYPE="submit" NAME="submitname" VALUE="Execute">
<INPUT TYPE="reset" VALUE="Clear">
Sending the entered data
</FORM>
<BR>
<FONT SIZE=4>|<A HREF="./index.htm">Return</A>|</FONT>
</BODY>
</HTML>
Memory access is not available with only
the above example. You need to create a
file to set all necessary parameters for read
(or write) while referring the parameter list
on page 28-12.
28-13
Chapter 28 Web Server
♦ Saving on a CF card:
Save the created HTM file on a CF card. For how to save, refer to page 28-8.
♦ Accessing with a Web Browser
Start a Web browser on your personal computer, then access to the CF card
which is inserted in the V7i. For how to access, refer to page 28-10.
1. The created HTM file is displayed.
28-14
Chapter 28 Web Server
2. Set access memory parameters in each entry field, then press [Write] button.
The V series creates the HTM file as shown below and send it to the Web
browser.
• Memory access type is “0: Memory Read”:
28
• Memory access type is “1: Memory Write”:
Memory Access
Message varies
depending on the access
result.
28-15
Chapter 28 Web Server
JPEG File Display
In the V7i, you can save a video image to the “CF card\access folder\SNAP”
folder, and a screen shot to the “CF card\access folder\HDCOPY” folder, both as
JPEG files. You can display the JPEG files with a Web browser on a Web
server.
You can display the JPEG files with or without using an HTM file. If you use the
HTM file, you need to create it first.
When Not Using a HTM file:
If you don’t use a HTM file, specify “Folder Name/ File Name” directly from the
Web browser to display a JPEG file.
Enter the following in the address field of the Web browser.
http://(IP address)/ (folder name)/ (file name).jpg
Ex.:
IP address 192.168.1.51
When displaying HD0000.jpg in the
“HDCOPY” folder:
http://192.168.1.51/HDCOPY/HD0000.jpg
28-16
Chapter 28 Web Server
When Using a HTM file:
If you use a HTM file, you can not display only a JPEG file, but also a title. By
using HTM refresh command, you can process periodic updates.
♦ Creating HTM Files
Ex.:
Display a video snap image on the Web browser, then create a HTM file to be
displayed while updating periodically.
<HTML>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="refresh" CONTENT="5;URL=DDD.htm">
Auto update command
Update cycle
File name to be displayed next
<HEAD><TITLE>JPEG Monitor</TITLE></HEAD>
Page title
<BODY>
<CENTER>
Title to be displayed on the top of the screen
<H1>No. 1</H1>
<P>
<IMAGE SRC="../SNAP/VD0000.jpg">
Image display
JPEG file store target/File name
</P>
</CENTER>
</BODY>
</HTML>
28
JPEG File Display
<HTML>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="refresh" CONTENT="5;URL=CCC.htm">
Auto update command
Update cycle
File name to be displayed next
<HEAD><TITLE>JPEG Monitor</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY>
<CENTER>
<H1>No. 2</H1>
Title to be displayed on the top of the screen
<P>
<IMAGE SRC="../SNAP/VD0001.jpg">
Image display
JPEG file store target/File name
</P>
</CENTER>
</BODY>
</HTML>
28-17
Chapter 28 Web Server
In the HTM file example on the previous page, the storage target is
“../SNAP/VD0000.jpg.”
This is specified with a relative path. Another method to specify the file is an absolute
path.
../SNAP/VD0000.jpg
File name
Access folder is a route on the Web server
function.
Specify the folder name
Move to the upper folder
It assumes that an HTM file is stored in the
Wevserv folder.
CF card
AAATEST (Access folder)
BITMAP
CARD
DSP
FONT
HDCOPY
JPEG
MEMO
RECIPE
SAMPLE
SNAP
SRAM
VD0000.jpg
VD0001.jpg
:
WAV
WEVSERV
DAT0000
CCC.htm
DDD.htm
AAA.sht
:
♦ Saving on a CF card:
Save the created HTM file on a CF card. For how to save, refer to page 28-8.
♦ Accessing with a Web Browser
Start a Web browser on your personal computer, then access to the CF card
which is inserted in the V7i.
Enter the following for [Address] of the Web browser.
http://(IP address)/WEBSERV/(File name).htm
28-18
Chapter 28 Web Server
Ex.:
IP address: 192.168.1.51
When displaying CCC.htm in the “WEBSERV” folder:
http://192.168.1.51/WEBSERV/CCC.htm
5 seconds later
28
JPEG File Display
5 seconds later
VD0000.jpg is displayed first. VD0001.jpg and VD0000.jpg are repeatedly
displayed in order, each for five seconds.
28-19
Chapter 28 Web Server
Please use this page freely.
28-20
Chapter 29 Language Selection
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Language Selection
You can change font and display it without changing the screen display on the V
series.
For more information on fonts (available fonts on the V series, editing methods for each
language, etc.), refer to “Appendix 1 Font” in the Reference Manual (Operation).
Outline
Multi-language Selection (for V7)
You can change languages using the same screen data file in the RUN mode.
• By using a CF card, you can change characters (Spanish ←→ Chinese
(simplified), Japanese ←→ Korean ←→ Chinese, etc.) without changing the
screen data.
Using the macro command, only language fonts are
changed. The rest of the screen data is kept as is.
disc
RESET
Store required fonts on the
CF card in advance.
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
F1
F1
F2
F2
F3
F3
F4
F4
96MB
F6
CompactFlash Card
96MB
CompactFlash Card
F5
F6
F7
F7
POWER
POWER
Chinese (Simplified)
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
F1
F1
F1
F2
F2
F2
F3
F3
F3
F4
F4
F4
F5
F7
96MB
F6
CompactFlash Card
96MB
F6
CompactFlash Card
96MB
CompactFlash Card
F5
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Japanese
Outline
Spanish
POWER
29
F5
F7
POWER
Korean
Chinese
• If you execute the [CHG_LANG] macro command and change the screen in
the RUN mode, the displayed language will be changed.
• Up to eight languages are available.
29-1
Chapter 29 Language Selection
Displayed Character Selection (V Series)
You can change the displayed characters using the same screen data file in the
RUN mode.
• Even if different languages use the same font, you can change characters,
such as German ←→ Italian, and display them.
The screen of Language 1
(English/Western Europe)
The screen of Language 2
(English/Western Europe)
Good Morning
Guten Morgen
German
English
• If you execute the [CHG_LANG] macro command and change the screen in
the RUN mode, the displayed language will be changed.
• Up to eight character strings are available.
Multi-language Screen (for V6)
You can register multiple languages using the same screen data file. However,
you cannot change the language in the RUN mode. Language change is
available by reloading the screen data setting in the target language for each
situation. When maintaining the screen data, you don’t need to manage multiple
screen data for each language.
disc
RESET
One screen data only
Change the setting of [Initial
Displayed Language], when
transferring.
[Initial Displayed Language: Korean]
Korean
29-2
[Initial Displayed Language: Chinese]
Chinese
Chapter 29 Language Selection
Language Selection Types and Fonts
Available languages vary depending on the type (four kinds) of language
selection.
V7 Series (Change in RUN mode)
♦ When Using a CF card (Multi-language selection):
Selectable fonts
You cannot exchange
fonts between the
upper and lower
tables.
Japanese
Japanese 32
English/Western Europe
Chinese
Chinese (Simplified)
Korean
Gothic
English/Western Europe HK Gothic
English/Western Europe HK Times
Selection examples
Japanese
→ Chinese
→
Spanish
(Japanese 32) (Chinese (Simplified)) (English/Western Europe)
→
Taiwanese
(Chinese)
Japanese
(Gothic)
Japanese
→
(Japanese 32)
Hangul
(Korean)
→
German
(English/Western Europe HK Gothic)
♦ When Not Using a CF Card (Displayed character selection):
Fonts
You cannot exchange
each font.
Target Character Examples
Japanese ← → English
Japanese
Japanese 32
Japanese ← → English
English/Western Europe
Each Western European Language ← → English
Chinese
Chinese ← → English
Chinese (Simplified)
Chinese (Simplified) ← → English
Korean
Korean ← → English
Gothic
Japanese ← → English
Each Western European Language ← → English
Each Western European Language ← → English
Language Selection Types and Fonts
English/Western Europe HK Gothic
English/Western Europe HK Times
29
V6 Series
♦ When Changing in RUN mode (Displayed character selection):
Fonts
You cannot exchange
each font.
Japanese
Target Character Examples
Japanese ← → English
Japanese 32
Japanese ← → English
English/Western Europe
Each Western European Language ← → English
Chinese
Chinese ← → English
Chinese (Simplified)
Chinese (Simplified) ← → English
Korean
Korean ← → English
Gothic
Japanese ← → English
English/Western Europe HK Gothic
Each Western European Language ← → English
English/Western Europe HK Times
Each Western European Language ← → English
29-3
Chapter 29 Language Selection
♦ When Changing Screen Data (Multi-language screen):
Selectable Fonts
You cannot exchange
fonts between the
upper and lower
tables.
Japanese
Japanese 32
English/Western Europe
Chinese
Chinese (Simplified)
Korean
Selection Examples
→ Chinese
→
Spanish
Japanese
(Japanese 32) (Chinese (Simplified)) (English/Western Europe)
Taiwanese
(Chinese)
Gothic
English/Western Europe HK Gothic
English/Western Europe HK Times
Japanese
(Gothic)
→
Japanese
→
(Japanese 32)
Hangul
(Korean)
→
German
(English/Western Europe HK Gothic)
Setting Procedure
The setting procedure varies depending on the selection method. Refer to each
reference page.
• Multi-Language Selection (for V7)
Below
• Displayed character selection (for V series)
Page 29-5
• Multi-Language screen
Page 29-5
Multi-Language Selection (for V7)
The settings are as follows:
* For how to change HK fonts, refer to page 29-18.
•
System Setting
Font Setting
Changing Characters:
[2] or more
Font Language 1 to n:
Select as desired
Initial Displayed Language: n
•
Item
Multi-Language
Edit for Language 2, etc.
or
System Setting
Multi-Language [n] setting
Font Setting
Export
CSV file edit (for Language 2, etc.)
System Setting
•
Macro
•
[File] menu
29-4
Font Setting
Import
CHG_LANG
CF Card Manager
Write (screen data) into CF card
Chapter 29 Language Selection
Displayed Character Selection (for V Series)
The settings are as follows:
•
System Setting
Font Setting
Changing Characters:
[2] or more
Font Language 1 to n:
Select the same font
Initial Displayed Language: n
•
Item
Multi-Language
Multi-Language [n] setting
Edit for Language 2, etc.
or
System Setting
Font Setting
Export
CSV file edit (for Language 2, etc.)
System Setting
•
Macro
Font Setting
Import
CHG_LANG
Multi-language Screen (for V6)
The settings are as follows:
* For how to change HK fonts, refer to page 29-18.
•
System Setting
Font Setting
Changing Characters:
[2] or more
Font Language 1 to n:
Select as desired
29
Initial Displayed Language: n
Item
Multi-Language
Setting Procedure
•
Multi-Language [n] setting
Edit for Language 2, etc.
or
System Setting
Font Setting
Export
CSV file edit (for Language 2, etc.)
System Setting
Font Setting
Import
(Data completed)
Immediately before transferring to the V6
•
System Setting
Font Setting
Initial Displayed Language: n ← Specify the displayed language
Transfer to the V6
29-5
Chapter 29 Language Selection
Multi-language Selection
Font Setting
Select [Font Setting] from the [System Setting] menu. The [Font Setting] dialog
is displayed.
The font setting procedure for the multi-language selection is as follows:
1. Specify the number of selectable languages for [Changing Characters].
(1 to 8)
2. Select the desired font.
Make sure that [Language 1] is displayed.
3. Click the arrow to display the drop-down menu. The number of languages,
which you specified for [Changing Characters], are displayed. Click
[Language 2].
Select the language number first.
Then, select the corresponding font.
4. Repeat step 3 for [Language n].
5. For [Initial Displayed Language], set the language (Language 1 to n)
displayed on the RUN mode screen when the V7 series is turned on.
6. Click [OK] to complete the settings.
29-6
Chapter 29 Language Selection
[Import]/[Export]/[ [ ] Provided]
Use these options when you edit multi-language with a CSV file. For more
information, refer to “Multi-language Edit/When Editing a CSV File.”
mentioned later.
Language 1 Edit
Language 1 is the language for the original screen data file. When you create
an ordinary screen, all text (texts in drawing, switch/lamp texts, message edit,
etc.,) that are related to the font are edited as Language 1.
Multi-language Edit
When you complete editing Language 1, edit the characters for Language 2, etc.
Edit the characters in Language 2 (etc.) which correspond to the original
characters in language 1. There are two editing methods.
♦ When Using the Multi-language Window:
Select [Multi-Languages] from the [Item] menu. The [Multi Languages [0]]
window is displayed.
29
Multi-language Selection
You can register up to 1,000 lines per window.
If you exceed 1,000 lines, you can continue on
the next window.
Language 1 is for display only.
Edit from Language 2.
The line number of the cell you put the
mouse is displayed on the status bar.
29-7
Chapter 29 Language Selection
If you click on the desired cell of Language 2, etc., the cursor for entering text
appears. Enter the characters that match the corresponding font. The length of
character strings in Language 2 should be about the same as in Language 1.
Length difference may cause the character strings to overlap or will unbalance
the screen.
Useful Editing Method
You can copy each edited language and paste it on the other fields.
• Copy
1. Open the [Multi Languages [0]] window.
2. Select [Copy] from the [Edit] menu. The following [Copy] dialog is
displayed:
[Language]
Select the source language.
[Start Line] (0 to (No. of the characters − 1))
Select the number of the start line to be copied.
[Copy Num] (1 to (No. of the characters − [Start Line]))
Select the number of the lines to be copied.
3. Click [OK] to copy.
If you don’t want to copy, click [Cancel].
29-8
Chapter 29 Language Selection
• Paste
1. Select [Paste] from the [Edit] menu. The following [Paste] dialog is
displayed:
[Language]
Select the target language to be pasted.
[Start Line] (0 to (No. of the characters − 1))
Select the number of the start line to be pasted.
2. Click [OK] to paste.
If you don’t want to paste, click [Cancel].
The characters for [Paste] are only the characters that are available to be
displayed in the target language.
♦ When Editing a CSV File:
This method is useful when you additionally register characters, which can be
displayed on your OS, to a file in which English is registered as Language 1.
29
Setting Procedure
2. Edit the CSV file by using application software such as Excel.
3. [System Setting] → [Font Setting] → [Import]
About [Export]
This function converts the screen data file, which is edited in Language 1, to a
CSV file. [If you check [ [ ] Provided] and perform [Export], it is converted with
“[” (before characters) and “]” (after characters). Select [Font Setting] from the
[System Setting] menu, then click [Export]. The dialog to specify the CSV file is
displayed. Specify the desired file name and click [Open].
29-9
Multi-language Selection
1. [System Setting] → [Font Setting] → [Export]
Chapter 29 Language Selection
When converted, characters are output to the CSV file in the following formats.
CSV file output format per item
Items
Format
Screen
SCRN[No]:[Layer]:[Item Name][DivNo.], [Language 1], [Language 2], ... [Language 8]
Message Group
MSG[Group No.]:[Line No.], [Language 1], [Language 2], ... [Language 8]
Graphic Library
GLIB[Group No.]:[No.],[ItemName], [Language 1], [Language 2], ... [Language 8]
Multi-overlap
MLIB[No.]:[ItemName][DivNo.], [Language 1], [Language 2], ... [Language 8]
Data Block
DBLK[No.]:[ItemName][DivNo.], [Language 1], [Language 2], ... [Language 8]
Data Sheet
DST[No.]:[ItemName], [Language 1], [Language 2], ... [Language 8]
Screen Library
SLIB[No.]:[ItemName][DivNo.], [Language 1], [Language 2], ... [Language 8]
No. → 0000 to 1023 (for Graphic Library: 000~255), Layer → Refer to Table 1,
Item Name → Refer to Table 2, DivNo. → 000 to 255,
Group No. → 00 to 23 (for Graphic Library: 0 to 9), Line No. → 000 to 255
Table 1 Layer
Item Display
Output Notation
Base
B00
Overlap 0
OV0
Overlap 1
OV1
Overlap 2
OV2
Table 2 Item Name
Item Display
Output
Notation
Screen
Graphic
Library
Multi-overlap
Data
Block
Data Sheet
Switch
SW
×
×
×
Lamps
LP
×
×
×
GLID
×
Calendar
CAL
×
Text in Drawing*
STR
Table Data
Display
Multi-Text in
Drawing*
* [DivNo] None
29-10
MSTR
×
×
×
×
Screen
Library
Chapter 29 Language Selection
When importing, the “[ ]” characters are automatically removed by the editor.
If you didn’t check [Provided], the following characters can not be imported
normally when you open it with CSV supporting software such as Excel.
Characters on V-SFT
Excel
(Format: Standard)
0123
123
+BK
Leading zeros are dropped.
It is not recognized as a
character string.
#NAME?
Ex.1: When converting the screen below to a CSV file by exporting and
opening it with Excel:
V series screen
Opened with Excel
Switch and Lamps
1
2
3
4
AUTO
MANUAL
RUN
STOP
Converting to
a CSV file.
NEXT
A
SCRN0000:B00:STR
SCRN0000:B00:SW000
SCRN0000:B00:SW000
SCRN0000:B00:SW000
SCRN0000:B00:SW000
SCRN0000:B00:SW000
SCRN0000:B00:LP000
SCRN0000:B00:LP000
SCRN0000:B00:LP000
SCRN0000:B00:LP000
Language 1
B
C
[Switch and Lamps] []
[AUTO]
[]
[MANUAL]
[]
[RUN]
[]
[STOP]
[]
[NEXT]
[]
[1]
[]
[2]
[]
[3]
[]
[4]
[]
Ex.2: When editing with the text editor:
CSV file
SCRN0000:B00:STR,[Switch and Lamps],[]
SCRN0000:B00:SW000,[AUTO],[]
SCRN0000:B00:SW000,[MANUAL],[]
SCRN0000:B00:SW000,[RUN],[]
SCRN0000:B00:SW000,[STOP],[]
SCRN0000:B00:SW000,[NEXT],[]
SCRN0000:B00:LP000,[1],
SCRN0000:B00:LP000,[2],
SCRN0000:B00:LP000,[3],
SCRN0000:B00:LP000,[4],
29
Conversion target character
After conversion
Examples (Before → After)
, (Comma)
Put ["] before and after the
characters.
abc, def → "[abc, def]"
" (Double-quotation)
Change ' to "".
Put ["] before and after the
characters.
abc "def" ghi →
"[abc ""def"" ghi]"
0x0d0x0a (Line feed)
Change "0x0d0x0a" to "0x0a."
(↵)
(↓)
Put ["] before and after the
characters.
abc "0x0d0x0a" def
↓
"[abc "0x0a" def]"
29-11
Multi-language Selection
Notes on Editing with a Text Editor after Exporting
The following characters are converted in the CSV (text) file as shown in the table
below:
Chapter 29 Language Selection
Characters in Unsupported Functions for Export
1. You cannot change the forms which are set for [Date Display] and [Time Display] in
the [Alarm Display] or [Time Display] dialogs. Also, you cannot change the
characters you set with the macro command [CHR (F0='Characters')].
2. Simulator
Although characters are displayed in the comment display of the switch and lamps,
only Language 1 is supported.
Editing a CSV file
Open the CSV file with Excel. Enter the characters in Language 2, which
correspond to the characters in Language 1, into the next cell. If you check
[ [ ] Provided] in the [Font Setting] dialog, enter the characters between “[” and
“].” The length of character strings in Language 2 should be about the same as
in Language 1. Length difference may cause the character strings to overlap or
will unbalance the screen.
Language 1
Opened with Excel
A
SCRN0000:B00:STR
SCRN0000:B00:SW000
SCRN0000:B00:SW000
SCRN0000:B00:SW000
SCRN0000:B00:SW000
SCRN0000:B00:SW000
SCRN0000:B00:LP000
SCRN0000:B00:LP000
SCRN0000:B00:LP000
SCRN0000:B00:LP000
B
[Switch and Lamps]
[AUTO]
[MANUAL]
[RUN]
[STOP]
[NEXT]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Characters of Language 2
C
D
Enter the characters between “[” and “].”
Do not edit the gray area. If you edit it, you cannot import the characters.
When editing is done, save it with Excel. The type of the file to be saved is
CSV (comma delimited) (*.csv). When saving, the message “*.csv may
contain features that are not compatible with CSV (Comma delimited). Do
you want to keep the workbook in this format?” appears. Click [Yes].
29-12
Chapter 29 Language Selection
About [Import]
Import a CSV file as the character set for the V series screen data file. When
importing, Language 1 is searched, then Language 2 is allocated in the same
characters. The characters of the imported CSV file are imported and registered
in the V series screen.
Select [Font Setting] from the [System Setting] menu, then click [Import]. The
dialog to specify the CSV file is displayed. Specify the CSV file which was
edited after exporting, then click [Open]. Import is executed.
Checking the Screen
During editing, you can check the image by displaying each language on the
screen.
♦ Checking Procedure
1. Select [Display Environment] or [Change All Display Environment] from the
[Display] menu.
The [Display Environment] dialog is displayed. Specify [Language] in the
[Detail] tab window.
29
[Language] (1 to (Number of selectable Languages))
Specify the language number to display.
Multi-language Selection
2. Click [OK]. The characters are displayed in the set language.
Ex.:
1
2
3
4
♦ Items Supported for Language Display (and Language Selection Display)
Screen, Graphic Library, Multi-overlap, Data Block, Message, Data Sheet,
Screen Library
29-13
Chapter 29 Language Selection
Macro Command [CHG_LANG]
• When immediately after the RUN mode is started, the language you set for
[Initial Displayed Language] of the [Font Setting] dialog is displayed.
• When you change the language in the RUN mode, you can perform
[CHG_LANG] in the [SYS] macro command. However, the timing of the
language change is the same as the timing of the screen change.
[CHG_LANG]
Available Devices
Internal
memory
F0
PLC memory
Constant
Memory Card
Indirect
W word
Command
name
F1
CHG_LANG: Language change
F1
SYS(CHG_LANG) F1
Language number (0 - 7)
Although the setting range for [Changing Characters] in the [Font Setting]
dialog and [Language] in the [Display Environment] dialog is [1] to [8], the
range of [CHG_LANG] is [0] to [7].
Ex.:
Set the displayed language using the ON macro of the screen change switch.
If you press the “Japanese” switch, the screen changes to the next screen, which
displays in Japanese. If you press the “Korean” switch, the screen changes to the next
screen, which displays in Korean.
Screen No. 0
Which language do you prefer?
Switch “Japanese”
• Function Screen No.1
• Use the ON macro
On macro edit
$u00100 = 0 (W)
SYS (CHG_LANG) $u00100
Japanese
Korean
Screen No. 1
29-14
Switch “Korean”
• Function Screen No.1
• Use the ON macro
On macro edit
$u00100 = 1 (W)
SYS (CHG_LANG) $u00100
Chapter 29 Language Selection
CF Card Manager
To perform a multi-language selection in the V series, you need to store the font
file for Language 2 (etc.) on a CF card. Then insert it into the V series.
♦ How to Store on a CF Card
The settings for Language 2 (etc.) are as follows:
1. In the V7 screen data file that you completed the multi-language setting,
select [CF Card Setting] from the [System Setting] menu. The [CF Card]
dialog is displayed.
2. Enter the desired folder name for [Access Folder Name].
(Max: 8 one-byte alphanumeric characters)
The V7 recognizes the font for its screen data by the folder name on the CF
card.
29
3. Save the V7 screen data file which you set step 2.
5. Select [CF Card Manager] from the [File] menu. The following dialog is
displayed:
29-15
Multi-language Selection
4. Insert the CF card into your personal computer.
Chapter 29 Language Selection
6. Specify the drive where the CF card is inserted and click [OK]. The CF Card
Manager will start.
What is the CF Card Manager?
The CF Card Manager is an application that allows you to write the data used in the V7
series to a CF card or to convert the data into each file format after importing the data
from CF card. For more information, refer to “Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only).”
7. Select [Write to CF Card] from the [File] menu. The [Write to CF Card] dialog
is displayed.
8. For [File to be Converted], click the [Refer] button and select the V7 screen
data file (extension [*.V7]) that you set the multi-language.
9. When completing the setting, click [OK].
29-16
Chapter 29 Language Selection
♦ Structure in the CF Card
Font is stored as shown below:
CF card
Dat0000 (= Access folder)
Bitmap
Card
Dsp
Font
Fnt_chn.ftd
Language 2, etc
Fnt_kor.ftd
Hdcopy
Jpeg
Memo
Recipe
Sample
Snap
Sram
Wav
Webserv
File01 (= Access folder)
Bitmap
Card
Dsp
Dsp0000.bin
Font
Hdcopy
...
Storage Target: \Font
File Name:
Fnt_jpn.ftd (Japanese)
Fnt_jpn2.ftd (Japanese 32)
Fnt_eng.ftd (English/Western Europe)
Fnt_chn.ftd (Chinese (Simplified))
Fnt_twn.ftd (Chinese)
Fnt_kor.ftd (Korean)
Fnt006.ftd, Fnt0062.ftd (Gothic)
Fnt008.ftd, Fnt0082.ftd (English/Western Europe HK Gothic)
Fnt009.ftd, Fnt0092.ftd (English/Western Europe HK Times)
29
By inserting this CF card into the V7 that you transfer the multi-language screen
data, the multi-language selection function becomes active.
29-17
Multi-language Selection
The font for [Language 1] is not stored.
Chapter 29 Language Selection
English/Western Europe HK Gothic and English/Western Europe HK
Times
In multi-language selection, you can change the fonts between [English/Western
Europe HK Gothic] and [English/Western Europe HK Times]. The setting
procedure is almost the same as the one for the multi-language selection with
[English/Western Europe], etc. (Refer to page 29-4.) However, when you use
[English/Western Europe HK Gothic] and [English/Western Europe HK Times]
(called “HK font”), see the setting notes below.
♦ Manual Font Setting
HK font has two types. One is set automatically and the other is set manually.
For more information, refer to “Appendix 1 Font” in the Reference Manual (Operation).
Select [Font Setting] from the [System Setting] menu. You can set the manual
font in the [Manual Font Setting] tab window.
Language 1
Language 2
29-18
Chapter 29 Language Selection
Note that the setting for each point of the Language 1 (English/Western Europe
HK Gothic) effects the setting of Language 2 (English/Western Europe HK
Times). If you change the setting for either one, the setting for the other will also
be changed.
All the settings are common to Language 2.
When you change the setting, Language 2 is
also changed.
♦ Auto Font
When operating the multi-language selection, auto setting font in Language 1 is
automatically transferred to the V series with the screen data. However, auto
setting font in Language 2, etc., is not recognized. For Language 2, etc., you
need to set the auto setting font as a manual setting font in the [Manual Setting
Font] tab window.
29
Multi-language Selection
29-19
Chapter 29 Language Selection
Displayed Character Selection
The setting procedure is almost same as the “Multi-Language Selection”
mentioned before. However, you cannot change the fonts because a CF card is
not used. Therefore, you need to specify the same font for [Language 1] and
[Language 2] in the [Font Setting] dialog.
Only one [Font] type you set is downloaded to the V series. You can check the
set font in the “FONT” field on the “Main Menu” screen.
Main Menu
V710iT
System Information
SYSTEM PROG. VER. 1.040
Screen Data
PLC T
2002-4 -1
FONT
VER.1.300/1.010/1.000
HK Gothic
MIT UBI HI A
i
li k
09:23:30
I/F DRV VER.1.210
MELSEC AnA/N/U
E
t
Font Setting
The setting procedure for the displayed character selection is as follows:
1. Specify the number of selectable languages for [Changing Characters].
(1 to 8)
2. Select the desired font. Make sure that [Language 1] is displayed.
3. Click the arrow to display the drop-down menu. The number of languages,
which you specified for [Changing Characters], are displayed. Click
[Language 2]. Select the same font as [Language 1].
4. Repeat step 3 for [Language n] (n = 2 to 8).
5. For [Initial Displayed Language], set the language (Language 1 to n (n = 2 to
8)) displayed on the RUN mode screen when the V7 series is turned on.
6. Click [OK] to complete the settings.
[Import]/[Export]/[ [ ] Provided]
Use these options when you edit multi-language with a CSV file. For more
information, refer to page 29-9.
29-20
Chapter 29 Language Selection
Language 1 Edit
Language 1 is the language for the original screen data file. When you create
an ordinary screen, all text (texts in drawing, switch/lamp texts, message edit,
etc.,) that are related to the font are edited as Language 1.
Edit for Language 2, etc.
When you complete editing Language 1, edit the characters for Language 2, etc.
Edit the characters in Language 2 (etc.) which correspond to the original
characters in language 1. Editing methods are the same as the ones for
multi-language selection. For more information, refer to page 29-7.
Checking Methods
During editing, you can check the image by displaying each language on the
screen.
♦ Checking Procedure
1. Select [Display Environment] or [Change All Display Environment] from the
[Display] menu. The [Display Environment] dialog is displayed. Specify
[Language] in the [Detail] tab window.
29
Displayed Character Selection
[Language] (1 to (Number of selectable Languages))
Specify the language number to display.
2. Click [OK]. The characters are displayed in the set language.
♦ Items Supported for Language Display (and Language Selection Display)
Screen, Graphic Library, Multi-overlap, Data Block, Message, Data Sheet,
Screen Library
Macro Command [CHG_LANG]
For more information, refer to page 29-14.
29-21
Chapter 29 Language Selection
Multi-language Screen
You can register multiple languages using the same screen data file.
However, you cannot change the language in the RUN mode.
Language change is available by reloading the screen data setting in the target
language for each situation. When maintaining the screen data, you don’t need
to manage multiple screen data for each language.
Editing Methods
The setting procedure is almost same as “Multi-Language Selection” mentioned
before. However, you cannot use the macro command. You need to load the
different data each time because language change is not allowed in the RUN
mode. Follow the steps below.
♦ How to Change the Data:
1. Open the screen data file on which you complete the multi-language
settings.
2. Select [Font Setting] from the [System Setting] menu. Set the language to
be displayed for [Initial Displayed Language].
Be sure to set [English] for the Main Menu screen.
3. Click [OK] to save the screen data.
4. Load the screen data. The screen data using the set initial display language
is loaded.
29-22
Appendix
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
A1
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F7
Internal Memory
The internal memory is memory in the MONITOUCH which is available to the
user. With this internal memory, the MONITOUCH can operate quickly because
it is not necessary to transfer to or receive data from the PLC.
Memory Type
There are two different types of internal memory.
• User memory ($u / $L / $LD)
This is the read/write memory that can be used freely.
Available range
$u:
0 to 16383 (16384 words)
$L:
User setting
$LD: User setting
• System memory ($s)
This is the read/write memory used by the system. This memory is used for
data communication to and from the MONITOUCH, and is mainly necessary
for macros. Do not use any unused area of this memory because it may be
employed as the system’s memory in the future.
Available range
$s:
0 to 1023 (1024 words)
Notes
1. The internal memory works with “DEC” no matter what numeric code is set in
the [Comm. Parameter] dialog.
(Except items for which the numeric code is specified individually.)
2. Character processing depends on how [Text Process] in the [Comm.
Parameters] dialog selected from the [System Setting] menu is set.
3. $u and $s are volatile memory. When the Main Menu screen is displayed or
the power is shut down (reset), data is erased.
4. $L and $LD are non-volatile memory. Data is retained if the power is shut
down. To use $L or $LD, it is necessary to use the SRAM area built in the V7
series or an accessory V7EM-S (V6EM/S or V6EM/RSi) and to make the
SRAM/clock setting.
A1-1
Memory Type
F6
POWER
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
System Memory
Contents in system memory $s are shown below.
Denotation of [Memory Type] in the list
• ←V
V7 writes data.
• →V
For user definition or setting
Address
0
Contents
Memory Type
←V
Screen number
1
2
Overlap 0
Display
3
Overlap 0
Display position X
0: OFF
4
Overlap 0
Display position Y
5
Overlap 0
Multi-overlap number
6
Overlap 1
Display
7
Overlap 1
Display position X
0: OFF
8
Overlap 1
Display position Y
9
Overlap 1
Multi-overlap number
10
Overlap 2
Display
11
Overlap 2
Display position X
12
Overlap 2
Display position Y
13
Overlap 2
Multi-overlap number
0: OFF
1: ON
1: ON
←V
1: ON
14
15
16
Printer status
17
Backlight status
←V
18
19
A1-2
20
Buffer 0
Number of buffers specified
21
Buffer 0
Number of buffers
22
Buffer 0
Number of buffers executed
23
Buffer 1
Number of buffers specified
24
Buffer 1
Number of buffers
25
Buffer 1
Number of buffers executed
26
Buffer 2
Number of buffers specified
27
Buffer 2
Number of buffers
28
Buffer 2
Number of buffers executed
29
Buffer 3
Number of buffers specified
30
Buffer 3
Number of buffers
31
Buffer 3
Number of buffers executed
32
Buffer 4
Number of buffers specified
33
Buffer 4
Number of buffers
34
Buffer 4
Number of buffers executed
←V
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Address
Contents
Buffer 5
Number of buffers specified
36
Buffer 5
Number of buffers
37
Buffer 5
Number of buffers executed
38
Buffer 6
Number of buffers specified
39
Buffer 6
Number of buffers
40
Buffer 6
Number of buffers executed
41
Buffer 7
Number of buffers specified
42
Buffer 7
Number of buffers
43
Buffer 7
Number of buffers executed
44
Buffer 8
Number of buffers specified
45
Buffer 8
Number of buffers
46
Buffer 8
Number of buffers executed
47
Buffer 9
Number of buffers specified
48
Buffer 9
Number of buffers
49
Buffer 9
Number of buffers executed
50
Buffer 10
Number of buffers specified
51
Buffer 10
Number of buffers
52
Buffer 10
Number of buffers executed
53
Buffer 11
Number of buffers specified
54
Buffer 11
Number of buffers
55
Buffer 11
Number of buffers executed
←V
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
Switch function
Repeat setting*1
65
Switch function
Repeat prohibited*1
66
Switch ON macro
Repeat setting*1
→V
67
68
69
70
71
72
Result of system call
73
Result of switch function
←V
74
75
76
Keypad overlap AUTO OFF
Prohibited
77
Exclusive function of overlap
Setting
A1
System Memory
35
Memory Type
→V
*1: Valid when switch ON macro is set
A1-3
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Address
Contents
Memory Type
78
79
80
Universal serial
Switch output 0
Output codes 0 to 15
81
Universal serial
Switch output 1
Output codes 16 to 31
82
Universal serial
Switch output 2
Output codes 32 to 47
83
Universal serial
Switch output 3
Output codes 48 to 63
84
Universal serial
Switch output 4
Output codes 64 to 79
85
Universal serial
Switch output 5
Output codes 80 to 95
86
Universal serial
Switch output 6
Output codes 96 to 111
87
Universal serial
Switch output 7
Output codes 112 to 127
88
Universal serial
Switch output 8
Output codes 128 to 143
89
Universal serial
Switch output 9
Output codes 144 to 159
90
Universal serial
Switch output 10
Output codes 160 to 175
91
Universal serial
Switch output 11
Output codes 176 to 191
92
Universal serial
Switch output 12
Output codes 192 to 207
93
Universal serial
Switch output 13
Output codes 208 to 223
94
Universal serial
Switch output 14
Output codes 224 to 239
95
Universal serial
Switch output 15
Output codes 240 to 255
←V
96
97
98
99
100
PLC calendar condition
101
Calendar writing to PLC
←V
→V
Setting
102
103
→V
104
PLC error handling during macro execution
105
($s104 is other than 0: Writing the result of error handling)
106
Memo pad
Displayed page number
107
Memo pad
Data
108
Memo pad
Remaining storage area (low-order) Unit: bytes
109
Memo pad
Remaining storage area (high-order)
110
Multi-link/ Multi-link 2 communication
Registered/ Unregistered
←V
Local port number
111
112
113
114
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 32 to 47)
115
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 48 to 63)
116
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 64 to 79)
117
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 80 to 95)
118
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 96 to 111)
119
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 112 to 127)
120
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 128 to 143)
121
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 144 to 159)
A1-4
←V
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Address
Contents
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 160 to 175)
123
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 176 to 191)
124
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 192 to 207)
125
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 208 to 223)
126
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 224 to 239)
127
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 240 to 255)
128
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 0 to 15)
129
When connecting 1 : n
PLC down information (port number 16 to 31)
←V
130
131
132
←V
Cycle time
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
Calendar
Year
161
Calendar
Month
162
Calendar
Day
163
Calendar
Hour
164
Calendar
Minute
165
Calendar
Second
A1
System Memory
122
Memory Type
←V
A1-5
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Address
Contents
166
Calendar
167
SRAM information
168
Greenwich time (low-order)
Memory Type
Day of the week
169
Greenwich time (high-order)
170
Overlap video
Selected channel number
171
Overlap video
Dithering
DITHER
172
Overlap video
Brightness
BRIGHT
173
Overlap video
Contrast
CONTRAST
174
Overlap video
Color strength
COLOR
←V
175
176
→V
177
Sample buffer number selection
178
Overflow flag
179
Overflow flag
180
Buffer
Word 0
Average (low-order)
181
Buffer
Word 0
Average (high-order)
Maximum (low-order)
182
Buffer
Word 0
183
Buffer
Word 0
Maximum (high-order)
184
Buffer
Word 0
Minimum (low-order)
185
Buffer
Word 0
Minimum (high-order)
186
Buffer
Word 0
Total (low-order)
187
Buffer
Word 0
Total (high-order)
188
Buffer
Word 1
Average (low-order)
189
Buffer
Word 1
Average (high-order)
Maximum (low-order)
190
Buffer
Word 1
191
Buffer
Word 1
Maximum (high-order)
192
Buffer
Word 1
Minimum (low-order)
193
Buffer
Word 1
Minimum (high-order)
194
Buffer
Word 1
Total (low-order)
195
Buffer
Word 1
Total (high-order)
196
Buffer
Word 2
Average (low-order)
197
Buffer
Word 2
Average (high-order)
Maximum (low-order)
198
Buffer
Word 2
199
Buffer
Word 2
Maximum (high-order)
200
Buffer
Word 2
Minimum (low-order)
201
Buffer
Word 2
Minimum (high-order)
202
Buffer
Word 2
Total (low-order)
203
Buffer
Word 2
Total (high-order)
204 to 211
Buffer
Word 3
Average, maximum, minimum, total
212 to 219
Buffer
Word 4
Average, maximum, minimum, total
220 to 227
Buffer
Word 5
Average, maximum, minimum, total
228 to 235
Buffer
Word 6
Average, maximum, minimum, total
236 to 243
Buffer
Word 7
Average, maximum, minimum, total
244 to 251
Buffer
Word 8
Average, maximum, minimum, total
A1-6
←V
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Address
Contents
Buffer
Word 9
Average, maximum, minimum, total
260 to 267
Buffer
Word 10
Average, maximum, minimum, total
268 to 275
Buffer
Word 11
Average, maximum, minimum, total
276 to 283
Buffer
Word 12
Average, maximum, minimum, total
284 to 291
Buffer
Word 13
Average, maximum, minimum, total
292 to 299
Buffer
Word 14
Average, maximum, minimum, total
300 to 307
Buffer
Word 15
Average, maximum, minimum, total
308 to 315
Buffer
Word 16
Average, maximum, minimum, total
316 to 323
Buffer
Word 17
Average, maximum, minimum, total
324 to 331
Buffer
Word 18
Average, maximum, minimum, total
332 to 339
Buffer
Word 19
Average, maximum, minimum, total
340 to 347
Buffer
Word 20
Average, maximum, minimum, total
348 to 355
Buffer
Word 21
Average, maximum, minimum, total
356 to 363
Buffer
Word 22
Average, maximum, minimum, total
364 to 371
Buffer
Word 23
Average, maximum, minimum, total
372 to 379
Buffer
Word 24
Average, maximum, minimum, total
380 to 387
Buffer
Word 25
Average, maximum, minimum, total
388 to 395
Buffer
Word 26
Average, maximum, minimum, total
396 to 403
Buffer
Word 27
Average, maximum, minimum, total
404 to 411
Buffer
Word 28
Average, maximum, minimum, total
412 to 419
Buffer
Word 29
Average, maximum, minimum, total
420 to 427
Buffer
Word 30
Average, maximum, minimum, total
Buffer
Word 31
Average, maximum, minimum, total
428 to 435
436
Alarm function
Auto operation time (low-order)
437
Alarm function
Auto operation time (high-order)
438
Alarm function
Auto operation stop time (low-order)
439
Alarm function
Auto operation stop time (high-order)
440
Alarm function
Program stop time (low-order)
441
Alarm function
Program stop time (high-order)
442
Alarm function
Number of stops
443
Alarm function
Rate of operation (XX.X)
←V
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
Alarm function
Normal operation bit
A1
System Memory
252 to 259
Memory Type
←V
A1-7
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Address
Contents
Memory Type
457
458
Alarm function
Operation program bit
460
Read area
n (RCVDAT)
461
Read area
n + 1 (SCRN_COM)
462
Read area
n + 2 (SCRN_No)
464
Write area
n (CFMDAT)
465
Write area
n + 1 (SCRN_COM)
466
Write area
n +2 (SCRN_No)
←V
459
←V
463
←V
467
468
Memory card number
469
Memory card name
470
Memory card file name No. 0
471
Memory card file name No. 1
472
Memory card file name No. 2
473
Memory card file name No. 3
474
Memory card file name No. 4
475
Memory card file name No. 5
476
Memory card file name No. 6
477
Memory card file name No. 7
478
Memory card file name No. 8
479
Memory card file name No. 9
480
Memory card file name No. 10
481
Memory card file name No. 11
482
Memory card file name No. 12
483
Memory card file name No. 13
484
Memory card file name No. 14
485
Memory card file name No. 15
←V
486
487
488
489
490
V608CH
Keyswitch/ deadman switch setting
491
V608CH
Answer-back of each switch
492
V608CH
Backup battery (V6H-RB) status
←V
493
494
495
496
497
CF card error status
498
CF card remaining capacity (low-order)Unit: kbytes
499
CF card remaining capacity (high-order)
500
A1-8
←V
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Address
Contents
Memory Type
A1
501
502
System Memory
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
Ethernet
Macro
Request wait
515
Ethernet
Macro
Request wait execution result
Ethernet
Status
←V
516
517
518
→V
519
520
Network table 0 status
521
Network table 1 status
522
Network table 2 status
617
Network table 97 status
618
Network table 98 status
619
Network table 99 status
620
FL-Net
Local node number
621
FL-Net
Local node
Area 1 data top address
622
FL-Net
Local node
Area 1 data top size
623
FL-Net
Local node
Area 2 data top address
Area 2 data top size
624
FL-Net
Local node
625
FL-Net
Host status
626
FL-Net
Protocol version
627
FL-Net
FA links status
628
FL-Net
Local node status
629
FL-Net
Status
630
FL-Net node table information
631
FL-Net node table information
632
FL-Net node table information
642
FL-Net node table information
643
FL-Net node table information
645
FL-Net node table information
646
FL-Net
←V
Refresh cycle time
A1-9
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Address
Contents
647
FL-Net
Node number
648
FL-Net
Host status
649
FL-Net
Area 1 data top address
650
FL-Net
Area 1 data size
651
FL-Net
Area 2 data top address
652
FL-Net
Area 2 data size
653
FL-Net
FA links status
654
FL-Net
Minimum allowable frame interval
Memory Type
←V
655
656
657
658
659
660
700
Language selection, display language number
←V
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
Built-in calendar information
Year
711
Built-in calendar information
Month
712
Built-in calendar information
Day
713
Built-in calendar information
Hour
714
Built-in calendar information
Minute
715
Built-in calendar information
Second
716
Built-in calendar information
Day of the week
←V
←V
717
718
719
720
SRAM
Memo pad save information
721
SRAM
Internal memory $L save result
722
SRAM
Internal $L newest write address (low-order)
723
SRAM
Internal $L newest write address (high-order)
724
SRAM
Internal memory $D save result
725
SRAM
Internal $LD newest write address (low-order)
726
SRAM
Internal $LD newest write address (high-order)
727
Memo pad save overflow
728
FROM_RD/FROM_WR macro execution result
A1-10
←V
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Contents
Memory Type
A1
←V
System Memory
Address
729
Temperature control network/PLC2Way
730
Temperature controller/PLC2Way
Port No. 00
Macro execution result
Status
731
Temperature controller/PLC2Way
Port No. 01
Status
732
Temperature controller/PLC2Way
Port No. 02
Status
758
Temperature controller/PLC2Way
Port No. 28
Status
759
Temperature controller/PLC2Way
Port No. 29
Status
760
Temperature controller/PLC2Way
Port No. 30
Status
761
Temperature controller/PLC2Way
Port No. 31
Status
762
Temperature control network/PLC2Way Constant read Interrupt
→V
763
Temperature control network/PLC2Way TEMP_RD/TEMP_WR macro forced
execution
→V
764
765
780
CF Card
BMP file load information (V7 and V608CH)
781
CF Card
JPEG file load information (V7)
782
CF Card
WAV file load information (V7)
783
CF Card
FONT file load information (V7)
784
CF Card
HTML file load information (V7)
←V
785
786
787
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
Modbus slave communication
Reference table number
801
Modbus slave communication
Reference memory setting
802
Modbus slave communication
Reference memory setting
803
Modbus slave communication
Reference memory setting
804
Modbus slave communication
Reference memory setting
805
Modbus slave communication
Reference memory setting
←V
806
807
808
809
A1-11
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Address
Contents
Memory Type
810
900
Touch switch status output
901
Touch switch X coordinate output
902
Touch switch Y coordinate output
←V
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
Video
CH1
Brightness
911
Video
CH1
Contrast
912
Video
CH1
Color strength
915
Video
CH2
Brightness
916
Video
CH2
Contrast
917
Video
CH2
Color strength
920
Video
CH3
Brightness
921
Video
CH3
Contrast
922
Video
CH3
Color strength
925
Video
CH4
Brightness
926
Video
CH4
Contrast
927
Video
CH4
Color strength
Video
Status
←V
913
914
←V
918
919
←V
←V
923
924
←V
928
929
930
←V
931
932
Auto File No.
933
Focus channel
934
Selected video area channel
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
A1-12
←V
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Address
Contents
Memory Type
A1
942
945
947
Sound replay
Remaining seconds
←V
1005
E-mail send
Send wait e-mails
←V
1006
E-mail send
Error information
←V
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1007
1008
1009
1010
1021
1022
1023
A1-13
System Memory
946
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
• Address $s0
Contains the current screen number.
• Address $s2 to 13
Contains the current overlap status.
n + 0 (Display status)
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
Overlap
0: None 1: Present
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Display status
0: Display 1: Non-display
n + 1 (X coordinate)
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
04
03
02
01
00
X coordinate display Dot: 0 to 799
Column/ line: 0 to 99
n + 2 (Y coordinate)
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
Y coordinate display Dot: 0 to 599
Column/ line: 0 to 29
n + 3 (Multi-overlap number)
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
01
00
Multi-overlap number
Other than multi-overlap [−1]
• Address $s16
Contains the current printer status.
n + 0 (Printer status)
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
0: Print standby
1: Printing
Printer status
0: READY 1: BUSY
• Address $s17
Contains the current backlight status.
n + 0 (Backlight status)
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
0: OFF
03
02
1: ON
• Address $s20 to 55
Contains sampling buffer conditions.
Buffer No. 0 to 11
A1-14
n+0
The number of samplings specified in the [Buffering
Area Setting] is contained.
n+1
The number of samplings located in the buffer (n + 0 ≥ n
+ 1) is contained.
n+2
The number of samplings executed is contained.
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
• Address $s64
It is possible to add the repeat function to the switch without repeat function.
Set a number other than [0] in the address $s64 for ON macro of the switch.
A1
• Address $s65
It is possible to prohibit the repeat function to the switch with repeat function.
Set a number other than [0] in the address $s65 for ON macro of the switch.
System Memory
• Address $s66
It is possible to repeat ON macro of the switch. Set a number other than [0]
in the address $s66 for ON macro.
Example:
Set ON macro of the switch as shown below.
$u100 = $u100 + 1
$s66 = 1
RET
While the switch is held down, $u100 is continuously incremented.
Before executing ON macro, the system clears addresses $s64 to 66 to [0].
For these addresses, set [1] as necessary. The switch repeat function is
prohibited when it is not possible even if the macro command is executed.
(Ex.: The block number has reached the maximum value by the “+ Block”
switch.)
• Address $s72
Contains the result of the macro command for system call.
[0]:
Normal termination
[Other than 0] (normally −1):
Error (ex.: the second screen setting)
• Address $s73
Contains the result of the switch function when the [SWRET] command is
used for ON macro of the switch.
[0]:
Normal termination
[Other than 0] (normally −1):
Error
Use this address when the next operation should vary depending on the
result of the switch function.
• Address $s76
If a keypad for entry mode is placed on an overlap, it is possible to turn OFF
the overlap with the [ENT] key of a keypad. To prohibit the above function,
use this memory address.
[0]:
Overlap AUTO OFF
[Other than 0]
Overlap AUTO OFF prohibited
For more information, refer to “Chapter 7 Entry Mode.”
• Address $s77
When a value other than [0] is set, the exclusive overlap function is set.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 2 Overlap.”
A1-15
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
• Addresses $s80 to 95
Use these memory addresses for universal serial communications.
<Setting Procedure>
1. Type: Universal serial
2. Designate these addresses as the switch output memory.
3. Switch action: Momentary
<Operation>
1. Both addresses and bits are converted to codes before loading them in
the system write memory (n + 2, n + 3).
2. If switch interrupt is enabled, it is executed.
• Address $s100, 101
These are the memory addresses related to calendar.
$s100: The calendar status of the PLC (with a built-in calendar) is written.
[0]: Normal
[1]: Error (The calendar information could not be read correctly.)
$s101: When $s100 = 1, calendar writing to the PLC is enabled or prohibited.
[0]:
Calendar writing prohibited
[Other than 0]: Calendar writing enabled any time
No error handling is performed even if an error is
detected.
• Addresses $s104, 105
Specify error handling to be performed when an error occurs during
reading/writing data to the PLC using a macro command via
communications.
Example:
When the indirect PLC memory is set for the writing target memory address
within the MOV command, a communication error will occur if the value in
the indirect PLC memory exceeds the range of the PLC memory. Use these
addresses to avoid such a communication error.
$s104: [0]:
When the write macro command is executed, the next command is
started without waiting for the result of the macro write command.
If an error occurs during writing, error handling is performed. The
error handling to be performed depends on the setting for [Comm.
Err. Handling] (Stop/Continuous) in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog.
[Other than 0]:
When the write command is executed, the next command is started
after receipt of the result of write operation.
If an error occurs during writing, error handling is not performed and
the result is stored in $s105. It will take a longer time compared with
the case where [0] is set.
$s105: When $s104 ≠ 0, the result of macro write error is stored.
[0]:
Normal
[Other than 0]: Error
A1-16
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
A1
• Addresses $s106 to 109
Information of memo pad is stored.
The page number (0 to 7) of the displayed memo pad is stored.
$s107:
The information whether data is registered or not in each page of
memo pad (maximum 8 pages) is stored.
14
12
13
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Page 0
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
Page 4
Page 5
Page 6
Page 7
0: Data not registered
1: Data registered
$s108, 109:
The remaining area for memo pad data is stored. (Unit: bytes)
• Address $s110
The local port number of the V series when selecting [Multi-Link] or
[Multi-Link2] for [Connection] is stored.
• Addresses $s128, 129, 114 to 127
When the connection mode is [1 : n], and time-out is detected in the
communication with the PLC, [1] is set at the related bit. After that, it is not
possible to communicate with the PLC on the same screen. When the
screen display changes, all bits in these addresses will be cleared to [0] to
enable communication with the PLC on the screen.
$s128
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
Port No. 15
03
02
01
00
Port No. 00
$s129
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
Port No. 31
03
02
01
00
Port No. 16
$s114
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
Port No. 47
03
02
01
00
Port No. 32
$s127
15
14
13
12
Port No. 255
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Port No. 240
A1-17
System Memory
15
$s106:
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
• Address $s132
The cycle time of the current screen is stored.
(Unit: 10 msec)
For more information on one cycle, refer to “Appendix 2 Process Cycle.”
• Addresses $s160 to 166
The calendar that is read from the PLC (V7 built-in calendar) at the start of
communications is stored.
• Address $s167
The information of add-on memory cassette (V7EM-, V6EM) is stored.
MSB
$s167
LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0: Not mounted
1: FROM 2Mbyte (V6)
2: FROM 4Mbyte (V6)
3: SRAM 512kbyte (V6/V7)
4: FROM 8Mbyte (V7)
0: Battery normal
1: Battery voltage drop
2: Battery not mounted
Memory cassette
information reserved
(Set: 0)
Memory cassette information reserved (Set: 0)
• Addresses $s168 to 169
The Greenwich time is stored.
• Addresses $s170 to 174
Information about the channel number used by the video window (overlap
video), brightness, contrast, color strength, etc. is written.
For more information, refer to “Chapter 2 Overlap.”
• Address $s177
The sample buffer average, maximum, minimum and total of the numerical
data display are stored in system memory $s180 to 435. Set the buffer
number here, and execute the SET_BUFNO macro command.
• Addresses $s178, 179
When the sample buffer total overflows after execution of the SET_BUFNO
macro command, the bits that correspond to sample words No. 0 to 31
become “1.”
$s178
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
Word 15
02
01
00
Word 00
$s179
15
14
13
Word 31
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
Word 16
• Addresses $s180 to 435
The result of the SET_BUFNO macro command execution is stored.
A1-18
00
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
• Addresses $s464 to 466
The information on the write area is stored. For more information on the
write area, refer to “Chapter 1 System Setting.”
• Addresses $s468 to 485
The memory card information (card No./ card name/ file name) is read from
or written to the memory (n).
Use the MOV macro command.
Read:
Write:
[n = $s468 (to 485)] is executed and the memory “n” is
monitored.
[$s468 (to 485) = n] is executed and data in the memory “n” (to
n + 16) is written into the memory card.
* Data of $s468 to 485 is always “0.”
Example:
1. $u100 = $s468
The memory card number (1 word) is written into $u100.
2. $u101 = $s469
The memory card name (32 characters) is written into $u101 to $u116.
(If the memory card name is less than 32 characters, 32 characters will
be written.)
3. $u117 = $s470
The memory card file name (32 characters) is written into $u117 to
$u132. (If the file name is less than 32 characters, 32 characters will be
written.)
• Addresses $s490 to 492
The information on V608CH is stored. (
V608CH.”)
Refer to “Specifications for
• Address $s497
The result of access to the CF card is output.
4
The card is not installed
6
The card size is too small.
7
The card type is different.
12
Writing error
15
Disk error (failed to open)
16
Reading error
• Addresses $s498 to 499
The remaining capacity of the CF card is stored in kbytes.
A1-19
A1
System Memory
• Addresses $s436 to 443, 456, 458
The information on the alarm function is stored. For more information, refer
to “Chapter 10 Sampling.”
• Addresses $s460 to 462
The information on the read area is stored. For more information on the read
area, refer to “Chapter 1 System Setting.”
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
• Addresses $s514 to 619
The setting and information on Ethernet communications are stored. For
more information, refer to the V7 Hardware Specifications and the
Specifications for Communication Unit Ethernet.
• Addresses $s620 to 654
The information on FL-Net communications is stored. For more information,
refer to the Specifications for Communication Unit FL-Net separately
provided.
• Address $s700
The displayed language number (0 to 7) for language selection is stored.
For more information on language selection, refer to “Chapter 29 Language
Selection.”
• Address $s720
When the SRAM area built in the V7 series or an accessory V7EM-S
(V6EM/S or V6EM/RSi) is used and the memo pad data is saved, the save
result is stored.
[0]: Normal
[1]: An error is found in data, data is deleted.
• Address $s721
When the SRAM area built in the V7 series or an accessory V7EM-S
(V6EM/S or V6EM/RSi) is used and the data is written to the internal
memory $L, the write result is stored.
[0]: Normal
[1]: Error
• Addresses $s722 to 723
When $s721 = 1 at the time of power-up, the $LD address of the last write
operation is stored.
• Address $s724
When the SRAM area built in the V7 series or an accessory V7EM-S
(V6EM/S or V6EM/RSi) is used and the data is written to the internal
memory $LD, the write result is stored.
[0]: Normal
[1]: Error
• Addresses $s725 to 726
When $s724 = 1 at the time of power-up, the $LD address of the last write
operation is stored.
• Address $s727
Whether the memo pad data capacity can be saved or not is stored.
[0]: Normal
[1]: Save area short
• Address $s728
The result of the FROM_RD/FROM_WR macro command execution is
stored.
[0]: Normal
[−1]: NG
A1-20
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
• Addresses $s780 to 784
The information on the CF card is stored. For more information, refer to
“Chapter 23 CF Card (V7 Only).”
• Addresses $s800 to 805
The information on Modbus slave communications is stored. For more
information, refer to the V7 Hardware Specifications Manual.
• Address $s900 (V7 series only)
The touch switch information is stored.
• Address $s901 (V7 series only)
The X coordinate of the touch switch that is pressed is stored.
• Address $s902 (V7 series only)
The Y coordinate of the touch switch that is pressed is stored.
• Addresses $s910 to 930, 932 to 934 (V7i only)
This is the area where video item information is stored. For more
information, refer to “Chapter 18 Video Display (V7i Only).”
• Address $s1000 (V7i only)
The remaining seconds for sound replay is stored. For more information,
refer to “Chapter 20 Sound Replay Function.”
• Addresses $s1005 to 1006 (V7i only)
The information on sending E-mail is output. For more information, refer to
“Chapter 27 E-Mail.”
A1-21
A1
System Memory
• Addresses $s729 to 763
The information on temperature control network or PLC2Way function is
stored. For more information on the temperature network, refer to the
Temperature Control Network or the V7 Series Hardware Specifications
separately provided.
Appendix 1 Internal Memory
Please use this page freely.
A1-22
Appendix 2 Process Cycle
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Process Cycle
A2
When displaying more parts in screen data, the display speed gets slower and
switch response may not be quick. In such a case, it is possible to speed up by
differentiating between data to be viewed in real time (high speed) and the
others (low speed). This setting is available at the [Process Cycle] option
included in each item dialog.
Process Cycle
The read timing from the PLC memory can be set.
The read area is set in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog.
(Refer to “Chapter 1 System Setting.”)
• Refresh
- One cycle when the screen is opened
- At the leading edge (OFF → ON) of bit 15 (data read refresh) in read
area (n + 1)
• High speed
- Every cycle
• Low speed
- Once every several cycles (
Refer to “Blocks” (page A2-2).)
- One cycle when the screen is opened
- At the leading edge (OFF → ON) of bit 15 (data read refresh) in read
area (n + 1)
Exceptions
1. Regardless of process cycle setting, all data is read from the memory at the
leading edge (OFF → ON) of bit 15 of the read area (n + 1) and when a
screen is opened. With this operation, all screen data is displayed on the
screen.
2. When [Internal] or [Memory Card] is chosen for [Memory], [High Speed] is
automatically applied for the process cycle.
A2-1
Process Cycle
The screen display speed in communications between the V series and the PLC
depends on the number of parts (mainly the number of memory addresses read
from PLC) placed on the screen.
Appendix 2 Process Cycle
♦ Processing in V Series
Processing in the V series is performed in the following order.
• The V series analyzes screen data to be read from the PLC, and reads them
in blocks of consecutive memory addresses.
Blocks
• All data is put into blocks for each process cycle.
(
Refer to “Process Cycle” (page A2-1).)
• Conditions for putting into blocks
- Data should not be more than 5 words apart.
- Data should be less than the number of words set for [Receive Slice Level]. (To
check [Receive Slice Level], select [Edit] → [Screen Setting].)
A group of data that satisfies the above two conditions is called a “block.”
The number of blocks varies depending on the memory used on the screen.
Example:
Receive Slice Level: 50
Memory used on the screen
D100
D101
D102
Consecutive number
< 5 words
50 words ≤ 50 words
Block 1
11 words ≤ 50 words
Block 2
1 words ≤ 50 words
Block 3
1 words ≤ 50 words
Block 4
D148
D149
D150
Not
used
4 words < 5 words
D155
Not
used
4 words < 5 words
D160
Not
used
9 words ≥ 5 words
D170
Not
used
D180
9 words ≥ 5 words
• With data set as high speed, all the blocks are read in one cycle.
• With data set as low speed, one block is read in one cycle. The next one
block is read in the following one cycle.
A2-2
Appendix 2 Process Cycle
Reading from
the read area
Reading from
the read area
Reading from
the read area
Reading
high-speed
block 1
Reading
high-speed
block 1
Reading
high-speed
block 1
Reading
high-speed
block 1
Reading
high-speed
block “m”
Reading
high-speed
block “m”
Reading
high-speed
block “m”
Reading
high-speed
block “m”
Reading
low-speed
block 1
Reading
low-speed
block 2
Reading
low-speed
block n
Reading
low-speed
block 1
1 cycle
1 cycle
1 cycle
1 cycle
A2
Process Cycle
Reading from
the read area
• When activation of bit 15 of read area “n + 1” is detected, all data is read in
the next cycle regardless of the setting.
Reading from
the read area
Reading from
the read area
Reading from
the read area
Reading from
the read area
Reading
high-speed
block 1
Reading
high-speed
block 1
Reading
high-speed
block 1
Reading
high-speed
block 1
Reading
high-speed
block “m”
Reading
high-speed
block “m”
Reading
high-speed
block “m”
Reading
high-speed
block “m”
Reading
low-speed
block 1
Reading
low-speed
block 2
Reading
low-speed
block 1
Reading
low-speed
block 1
1 cycle
1 cycle
Read area
n+1
bit 15
0 → 1 detection
Reading
low-speed
block “n”
1 cycle
Reading
refresh block
1
Reading
refresh block
“t”
1 cycle
Reading all data in this cycle
• Reading of the memory required for display and operation is performed at
the same time using two programs.
• Writing of switches, etc. is performed in the interval between reading blocks.
When a smaller value is set for [Receive Slice Level] in the [Screen Setting]
dialog, switch response become quick but the display speed may slow down.
Set up the most appropriate receive slice level using the cut-and-try method.
A2-3
Appendix 2 Process Cycle
• When considering the display speed of the screen, it is recommended to set
up a smaller slice level for a shorter scan time of the PLC, or a greater slice
level for a longer scan time.
The “scan time” means the length of time from when the PLC starts operation of ladder
program from step 0 until it executes step 0 again.
♦ One-cycle Processing
The PLC memory set for [Read Area] in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog is read
first. Next, data in the memory set for the items on the screen is read and
drawn. When operations of all the setting data have been performed, the screen
display is completed. This series of operations is called “one cycle.”
Refer to the illustration below.
Reading from
the read area
Reading from
the read area
Reading from
the read area
Cycle start
Reading
high-speed
block 1
Reading
high-speed
block 1
Reading
high-speed
block 1
n=0
Reading
high-speed
block “m”
Reading
high-speed
block “m”
Reading
high-speed
block “m”
Reading
low-speed
block 1
Reading
low-speed
block 2
Reading
low-speed
block n
1 cycle
1 cycle
1 cycle
NO
[Event Timer]
No. “n” present
YES
[Event Timer] No. “n”
Timer up
NO
YES
High-speed block 1 processing
[Event Timer]
No. “n” executed
High-speed block 2 processing
n=n+1
High-speed block 3 processing
n<8
YES
NO
1. PLC memory (screen setting) transfer
2. Transfer three words of read area to system
memory ($s460 and later)
Cycle macro execution
High-speed block “m” processing
Read area “n” (RCVDAT) processing
Low-speed block “n” processing
Read area “n + 1” (SCRN_COM) processing
Cycle end
Read area “n +2” (SCRN_No) processing
A2-4
Appendix 2 Process Cycle
Notes
• The write area is not shown in the above illustration because it is processed
at a cycle different from the read area.
• For one cycle that is executed when the screen is opened, data of all the
parts placed on the screen is read and the screen OPEN macro is executed;
consequently, processing is not the same as shown above.
To speed up the communications, try the following method.
♦ Conventions for Screen Creation
• Consecutively allocate the PLC memory addresses that are used for the
same screen.
↓
When the number of blocks decreases, the cycle time can be shorter.
• [Process Cycle] for each part
Set [Process Cycle] considering the entire amount of screen data, data type,
or functional properties.
Example:
- For data display parts where data is written by the V series in entry mode
without any changes from the PLC or for those that are hardly changed,
select [Refresh].
- Select [Low Speed] for data display parts where the display speed on the
V series need not be fast in response to data changes in the PLC.
- For data display parts that must be displayed in real time, select [High
Speed].
• Macro
When the macro function is used, reduce the number of accesses to the
PLC.
Example:
With [MOV] command:
Line No. 0 D200 = $u200 (W)
Line No. 0 D201 = $u201 (W)
Line No. 0 D202 = $u202 (W)
Line No. 0 D203 = $u203 (W)
Line No. 0 D204 = $u204 (W)
When the above is set, write operation to the PLC is performed five times.
However, when [BMOV] command is used:
Line No. 0 D200 = $u200 C:5 (BMOV)
Only one line is required. Write operation to the PLC is performed only once.
A2-5
If Communication Speed is Slow:
If Communication Speed is Slow:
A2
Appendix 2 Process Cycle
• Sampling
When the sampling function is used, uncheck [ Memory Designation] in
the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog, and set the memory of read area (n + 3)
or later as the sampling data memory.
↓
When the number of blocks decreases, the cycle time can be shorter.
• Multi-link/ Multi-link 2
When multi-link or multi-link 2 connection is used, set all the connected V
series in the RUN mode.
↓
This eliminates recovery confirmation access to the ports where
communications are not possible.
♦ Other Notes
• Baud rate setting (serial communications)
Increase the baud rate between the V series and the PLC. The V series
supports 115 Kbps maximum. Set the maximum baud rate that the PLC
supports.
• Ethernet communications
The baud rate available with Ethernet communications is 10 Mbps. Higher
communications than serial communications are available.
[PLCs compatible with Ethernet communications]
Mitsubishi
QnA series, QnH series
Yokogawa
FA-M3, FA-M3R
• On the PLC, set a shorter scan time for ladder program.
A2-6
Appendix 3 Error
SYSTEM
F1
F2
F3
F4
Error
F5
F6
F7
POWER
There are two different types of errors:
1. Errors displayed on the V series
2. Errors displayed on the PC when a screen is created
A3
Errors Displayed on the V7 Series
Errors Displayed on the V7 Series
There are five kinds of error messages displayed on the V series:
1. Communication error
2. Check
3. Warning
4. SYSTEM ERROR
5. Touch Switch is Active
Communication Errors
SYSTEM
Communication Error
Time-Out
Screen No. :
F1
Communication Error
Time-Out
F2
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
F5
F6
F6
F7
F7
* When you go to [Comm. Parameter], bring up the [Detail] tab
window and set [Continue] for [Comm. Error Handling], a
screen like the one shown below is displayed.
POWER
POWER
Error Message
Parity
Framing
Overrun
Check code
error
F1
Received code No. :
RETRY
Timeout
SYSTEM
F2
Contents
Although a request to send is given
to the PLC, no answer is returned
within the specified time.
An error occurred in parity check.
Although the stop bit must be [1], it
is detected as [0].
After one character is received, the
next character is received before
internal processing is completed.
The check code in the PLC
response was not correct.
Solution
Remarks
1. Check the communication parameters.
2. Check the cables and wiring.
1
3. Data may be disrupted because of noise.
Fix noise.
2
1. Check the cables and wiring.
1
2. Data may be disrupted because of noise.
Fix noise.
2
1. Check the communication parameters.
2. Check the cables and wiring.
1
3. Data may be disrupted because of noise.
Fix noise.
2
1. Check the communication parameters.
1
2. Data may be disrupted because of noise.
Fix noise.
2
1. Check the communication parameters.
1
2. Data may be disrupted because of noise.
Fix noise.
2
* If the above error messages are displayed on the V7 series without establishing
communication between V7 and PLC, test the solution of remark “1.”
If the error occurs suddenly in communication, test the solution of remark “2.”
A3-1
Appendix 3 Error
Error Message
Contents
Solution
Error code received
An error code was sent to the link unit
by the CPU of the PLC.
Examine the CPU error code and solve the
problem.
Break
The PIC’s SD (TXD) remains at the low
level.
Examine the connection between the PLC’s
SD (TXD) and the V7’s RD (RXD).
Invalid memory
(applicable to
Mitsubishi CPU)
You specified an address that exceeds
the memory range of the PLC that you
are linked to.
Check the type and range of memory that you
set.
Invalid CPU model
(applicable to
Mitsubishi CPU)
The PLC currently being supported
does not have a corresponding CPU.
Confirm whether or not the CPU that you are
using can be used with the V series.
Format
The code of the received data is invalid.
Check 1, 2, 3 described below.
Compare
(applicable to HIDIC
S10)
Transmission data and received data
are different.
Check 1, 2, 3 described below.
NAK
(applicable to
Allen-Bradley PLC)
A NAK code is received.
Check 1, 2, 3 described below.
TNS discrepant
(applicable to
Allen-Bradley PLC)
Transmitted TNS data and received
TNS data are not in agreement.
Check 1, 2, 3 described below.
Communication
error
An unclear communication error is
detected.
Check 1, 2, 3 described below.
Count error
(applicable to
Mitsubishi CPU and
Q link unit)
The expected data amount is different
from the count value.
Check 1, 2, 3 described below.
Command error
(applicable to
Mitsubishi CPU
/Q link unit)
The response code differs from the
expected code.
Check 1, 2, 3 described below.
Invalid cassette
(applicable to
Mitsubishi ACPU)
This cassette is not included in the
memory cassettes currently being
supported.
Contact your local distributor.
Password error
(applicable to
Mitsubishi QCPU)
The password is incorrect.
Contact your local distributor.
Check I/F driver
(for simulator
I/F driver)
Although a request to send is given to
the computer (simulator), no answer is
returned within the specified time.
If a simulator is not used, transfer the I/F
driver for PLC again.
Solution
1) Confirm link unit settings.
(After making settings, cut power to the PLC.)
2) Go to the editor (V-SFT) and confirm the settings in the [Comm.
Parameter] dialog in the [System Setting] menu.
3) If errors only occur from time to time, it is possible that there is a
noise-based communication error.
* If you still cannot solve the error even after following the suggestions above,
contact your local distributor.
A3-2
Appendix 3 Error
Error Messages for Network Communication
• Ethernet
Error Message
Contents
Ethernet Error: XXXX
The Ethernet status is saved at system
memory address $s518 and a code
other than “0” (normal) is received.
XXXX : Error No.
Solution
For the contents and solution to each error
number, refer to Chapter 4 of the Hardware
Specifications Manual.
A3
• MELSECNET/10
Contents
The I/F unit for NET/10 has an error.
Request Code Err
The request command from NET/10
has an error.
Request Data Err
The request data from NET/10 has an
error.
Word Writing to Sp.
Relay
(Mitsubishi A series)
Word writing to a special relay (M9000
and later) is attempted. (Note: Only bit
writing is possible for special relays
when connecting with NET/10.)
Errors Displayed on the V7 Series
Error Message
I/F Board Err
Solution
Contact your local distributor.
Do not attempt to perform word writing to
special relays.
• CC-LINK
Error Message
Contents
Solution
I/F Board Err
The I/F unit for CC-LINK has an error.
Contact your local distributor.
No. of Occupy
Setting Err
The number of occupy in [Comm.
Parameter] is different from the number
of occupy by switches.
Check the setting of the number of occupy.
Network I/O Access
Err
MONITOUCH is about to access
exceeding the set number of
input/output words.
Check the memory for the network I/O in the
screen data file.
Station Number Err
The port number set by a switch is not
within the setting range (1 to 64).
Specify the port number within the setting
range.
Word Writing to Sp.
Relay
Word writing to a special relay (M9000
and later) is attempted.
Do not attempt to perform word writing to
special relays.
* Only bit writing is possible for special
relays when connecting with
CC-LINK.
A3-3
Appendix 3 Error
• OPCN-1
Error Message
Contents
Solution
I/F Board Err
The I/F unit for OPCN-1 has an error.
Contact your local distributor.
Stat. No. out of range
The port number set by a switch is not
within the setting range (1 to 127).
Specify the port number within the setting
range.
Network Link Error
Cannot connect to the master station in
the network.
Check the condition of the master station
(PLC). Check the network connection.
Network I/O Access
Err
MONITOUCH is about to access
exceeding the set number of
input/output words.
Check the memory for the network I/O in the
screen data file.
Waiting for Reply
1. Less than “Max_int” time
(communication monitoring time for
salve station) set on the PLC for
OPCN-1 communications
2. Timeout on the V-SFT editor
(The timeout time can be set from
[System Setting] → [Comm.
Parameter] on the V-SFT editor.)
This error is indicated when the
above 1 and 2 are present.
When the “Max_int” time is too long (infinite,
for example) on the PLC, it is not possible to
know whether or not the response from the
PLC is correctly made.
This error message disappears when a
response from the PLC is received within the
“Max_int” time.
Word Writing to Sp.
Relay
(Mitsubishi A series)
Word writing to a special relay (M9000
and later) is attempted.
Do not attempt to perform word writing to
special relays.
* Only bit writing is possible for special
relays when connecting with OPCN-1.
• T-LINK
Error Message
Contents
Solution
T-LINK I/F Board Err
The I/F unit for T-LINK has an error.
Contact your local distributor.
Network I/O Access
Err
MONITOUCH is about to access
exceeding the set number of
input/output words.
Check the memory for the network I/O in the
screen data file.
Access denied by
Loader
V7 processing cannot be performed
because the PLC loader is being
accessed. (This error occurs during
program transfer from the PLC loader
for most cases.)
Wait for the PLVC loader to finish processing,
and press the [RETRY] switch on the V7
screen.
Communication Error
Received Code No.
36
The number of monitor registration
points is too small.
Correct the number of monitor registration
points. For monitor registration, refer to the
user manual of the PLC you are using.
• PROFIBUS-DP
Error Message
Timeout
A3-4
Contents
Solution
“Check” is displayed 2 or 3 seconds
before this error occurs when
connecting V7 and PROFIBUS-DP in
the RUN mode.
The setting for [Own Stat. No.] on V7 is
discrepant with that for [Address] for [V7
series] on the SIMATIC Manager. Check and
correct the setting.
A screen is displayed instantaneously
(= communications performed) before
this error occurs when connecting V7
and PROFIBUS-DP in the RUN mode.
The DB address set on the V7 screen may not
exist on the PLC (memory over). Check the
setting.
Appendix 3 Error
Check
SYSTEM
Communication Error
Check I/F driver
F1
Check
Check
F2
F3
F4
Screen No. Error
A3
F5
F6
F7
POWER
Contents
Solution
There is no setting for the received
screen.
The screen specified by the PLC has not
been registered.
An invalid screen number is set in the “n + 2”
memory of the read area.
Data has some error.
Error: XX (XX: XXX)
There is an error in the created screen
data.
For the contents and solution to each error
number, refer to “Error Details and Solutions.”
Communication error
Check I/F driver
Although a request to send is given to
the computer, no answer is returned
within the specified time.
The I/F driver for simulator (UNIPLC) is
transferred.
If you don’t use the simulator, uncheck [Use
Simulator] before transferring data.
♦ Error Details and Solutions
Use the item number and sub item number to confirm the location where the
error took place. Confirm error details with the error number and make
corrections.
Error : XX (XX : XXX)
(Warning)
Sub item number (Refer to page A3-6)
Item number (Refer to page A3-6)
Error number (Refer to page A3-7)
A3-5
Errors Displayed on the V7 Series
Error Message
Screen No. Error
Appendix 3 Error
• Item Numbers
The item number shows the editing screen or other place where the error is
detected.
0: Header
1: Network table
2: Buffering area
3: Barcode
4: Memory card
5: External character 16
6: External character 32
7: Message group
8: Dot pattern
9: Graphic library
10: Page block
11: Direct block
12: Screen block
13: Macro block
14: Data block
15: Data sheet page
16: Multi-overlap
17: Screen
18: Function switch
19: Screen library
20: Expansion data
21: Temperature Control Network
22: Expanded font
23: Alarm master data
24: SRAM cassette
25: Bitmap area
26: CF attribute table
27: Print format
28: Tag table
29: Slave communication memory table
30: WAV file table
31: Animation table
50: PLC program data check
70: No optional driver provided
90: Error detection in RUN mode
• Sub item numbers
The sub item number shows the number of the editing screen detecting the
error.
- For messages, the message group number is shown.
- For graphic library, the library linear number is shown.
Graphic group No. × 256 + No. in the group
A3-6
Appendix 3 Error
• Error numbers
Note:
Error numbers with “*” do not occur under the ordinary circumstance.
If any of these error is displayed, contact your local distributor.
V7
V6
Error No.
3
Contents
Remedies
Transfer the system program from the
V-SFT editor. If not solved, check the
V-SFT editor version and the system
program version and contact your local
distributor.
10
The I/F board and the communication
driver software do not match.
Check the driver and transfer again.
11
The PLC for data setting does not
match the I/F driver.
Check the PLC model and transfer the
I/F driver again.
12
The version of the I/F driver does not
match the version of data.
Check the V-SFT editor version and the
I/F driver version and contact your local
distributor.
13
The version of the I/F driver does not
match the version of the V series.
Check the I/F driver version and the
system program version and contact
your local distributor.
15
The display language of the V series
does not match the language used for
the created data.
Check the MONITOUCH model and the
language used for the created data.
17
Unknown network I/O No.
The I/O number exceeds the possible
range of use.
Reset to a number that falls in the
possible range of use.
18
When connected to “1 : n,” the read
area, write area, and calendar memory
settings are all made in the internal
memory.
Set the read area and the calendar
memory on the PLC.
20
The maximum 32K-word capacity for
the buffering area has been exceeded.
(Internal buffer)
Correct the data size so that the
buffering area falls within the 32 k
words limit.
21
The maximum 128-word capacity for bit
sampling has been exceeded.
Reduce the total number of words for
bit sampling to less than 128 words.
22
The buffer number specified in the
sampling mode has not been set.
Set the buffer number in the [Buffering
Area Setting] dialog under [System
Setting].
23*
Memory card file No. error
Contact your local distributor.
24
When [Store Target: SRAM/CF Card] is
selected in the [Buffering Area Setting],
the output file number can be set.
However, the set output file number
already exists. Or, [Type: Buffering
File] is not set in the [Memory Card
Setting] dialog though [Store Target:
SRAM/CF Card] is selected.
Check the output file number in the
[Buffering Area Setting] dialog, and set
correctly. Or, check the setting in the
[Memory Card Setting] dialog.
28
The modular function is set as the
same communication port as MJ1 and
MJ2.
Check the setting in the [Modular Jack]
dialog and set correctly.
30
31
The number of registered items is too
many.
Reduce the number of items.
A3-7
A3
Errors Displayed on the V7 Series
The screen data version does not
match the system program version of
MONITOUCH.
Appendix 3 Error
V7
A3-8
V6
Error No.
Contents
Remedies
32
The number of items that uses the
memory exceeds the available number.
Reduce the number of items.
33
The number of switches set on the
screen exceeds the maximum (V7
series/ V608/ V610/ V612: 768, V606/
V606i: 192). Overlap switches and
lamps are included in this number.
Reduce the number of switches and
lamps.
34
The items that use the memory
exceeds the available work memory.
Reduce the amount of data.
39
The amount of data for one screen
exceeds 256 kbytes (V6: 128 kbytes).
Reduce the amount of data.
40*
Group byte count error
41*
Recognition flag error
42*
Function ITEM error
43*
Function ITEM end error
44*
Group ITEM end error
45*
Offset range over
46
Memory setting error (Unavailable
memory/memory range over)
Check the memory setting.
47
The division number of the item limited
to setting on a screen library is
duplicated on a screen.
Check the division number and avoid
duplication.
52
Overlap No. error
A number other than 0 to 2 is set.
Check the overlap number and set
correctly.
53
In the setting for call-overlap, an
overlap number that is not registered in
multi-overlap edit has been specified.
Specify an overlap number registered
in multi-overlap edit.
54
The overlap occupies too much
memory capacity. (Refer to “Chapter 2
Overlap.”)
Reset the overlap data size.
55*
Multi-overlap header error
56*
Graphic undefined command error
57*
Graphic ITEM error
58*
Graphic execution error
59*
Switch function error
Contact your local distributor.
Contact your local distributor.
60
Switch operating area error
61*
Statistic graph % display No. over
Reset the switch operating area.
62*
Multi data over
63
The selection order number of data
blocks (a maximum of four) is
duplicated.
Check the data block selection order
number and set correctly.
64*
Data display element No. error
Contact your local distributor.
65
The scale or graph is not set correctly
in the settings for trend graphs or trend
sampling.
Correct the settings for both [Scale
Max. Value] and [Scale Min. Value] or
both [Graph Max. Value] and [Graph
Min. Value] in the dialog.
66*
Internal circle radius is 0.
67*
The number of trends ≤ 0
Contact your local distributor.
Contact your local distributor.
Appendix 3 Error
V7
V6
Error No.
Contents
Remedies
The display area is insufficient for the
area (lines) that is displayed by one
relay (one bit).
Check the [Lines/Relay] in the [Relay]
dialog and enlarge the display area if
necessary.
69
A pattern size larger than the screen
has been specified.
Re-set the pattern.
70
Data sheet: column/line over
Check the data sheet columns/lines,
and set correctly.
71
The parts for a closed area graph
exceed 64 kbytes (V606: 32 kbytes).
Reduce the size of the parts.
72
Bit sampling mode with [ Real Time
Print] are over 4. Or, there are more
than two bit sampling modes that have
the same [Buffer No] with [ Real
Time Print].
Specify the setting of [ Real Time
Print] according to the limits of setting.
If not solved, check the V-SFT editor
version and the system program
version and contact your local
distributor.
×
73
Video item setting number error
There are four or more vide items on
one screen. (including the screen
library)
Check the number of video items and
reduce the number.
×
74
Animation item is placed somewhere
other than the base screen (screen
library, etc.).
Place the animation item on the base
screen.
×
75
The screen data type is not consistent.
128-color data is transferred to
MONITOUCH of 32k colors.
Or, 32k-color data is transferred to
MONITOUCH of 128 colors.
Transfer the system program from the
V-SFT editor.
80*
Macro: undefined command error
Contact your local distributor.
81
Macro: FOR-NEXT command number
is wrong.
Correct the FOR-NEXT command.
82
Macro: There are two different
commands for the same label number.
Delete or correct the label command
being used for two different commands.
83
Macro: There is no destination label for
the jump.
Change or create the destination label.
84
Macro: Invalid memory
Change the macro.
85*
Macro: undefined system call
Contact your local distributor.
90
You attempted to use a screen library
that is not registered.
Check the screen library number.
91
Switch/lamp bitmap unregistered
Check the following points.
• No bitmap name is designated.
• The total of 3D parts exceeds 1023
(maximum).
• The part size is too large.
• There is no bitmap in the PARTS
folder.
92*
Multi-language initial display string No.
error
93*
Multi-language message group count
error
94
Multi-language selection string number
error
Contact your local distributor.
A3-9
A3
Errors Displayed on the V7 Series
68
Appendix 3 Error
V7
A3-10
V6
Error No.
Contents
Remedies
95
MR400 format table
String code error
There is an illegal code after “\” in the
string.
96
MR400 format table
String size error
The total size of the string is too large.
97
Multi-language font setting error
Transfer the first language font or
screen data again.
100
Universal serial
GD-80 compatibility is set in entry
mode.
Uncheck [GD-80 Compatible] in entry
mode.
101
Universal serial
System memory setting error
Check whether or not access to outside
the specified memory is attempted,
such as for macro indirect designation.
102
Connection type setting error
Check the setting for [Connection] in
the [Comm. Parameter] dialog.
103
Network I/O size setting error
Check the number of words set for [No.
of Works Setting for I/O] in the [Comm.
Parameter] dialog.
104
Network table setting error
Check the setting on the network table.
120
[Multi-Link] is not selected at [Modular
Jack 1 (or 2)] in the case of
[Connection: Multi-Link2].
[Select [Multi-Link] at [Modular Jack 1
(or 2)].
121
[Multi-link2] port number error.
The value for [Local Port] or [Total] is
out of the range of 1 to 4.
Set the value of [Local Port] or [Total]
within the range of 1 to 4.
130*
[Ethernet]
Network byte error
Contact your local distributor.
131
[Ethernet]
The local port is not set in the table.
Check the port number of the I/F unit,
and check that the local port is set on
the network table edit window.
132*
[Ethernet] [DNA]
The network table is not found or is not
the right one.
Contact your local distributor.
133
[Ethernet]
IP address No. error
Check the IP address on the network
table edit window.
134
[Ethernet]
Port No. error
Check the port number on the network
table edit window.
135
[FL-net]
FL-net data error
Check the setting for [FL-Net] in the
[Comm. Parameter] dialog.
140
[Temp. control network/PLC2Way]
The version of the temperature
control/PLC2Way driver does not
match the version of the system
program.
Check that the system program version
is compatible with the temperature
control network/PLC2Way function,
and if necessary, update the system
program version.
141
[Temp. control network/PLC2Way]
Multi-link 2 connection is set.
(communication parameter setting)
It is not possible to use multi-link 2
connection and temperature control
network/PLC2Way function at the same
time.
142
[Temp. control network/PLC2Way]
The temperature control/PLC2Way
driver is not found.
Transfer the temperature
control/PLC2Way driver.
Appendix 3 Error
V7
V6
Error No.
Contents
Remedies
[Temp. control network/PLC2Way]
The temperature control
network/PLC2Way table is not set.
Check the temperature control
network/PLC2Way table and set
correctly.
144
[Temp. control network/PLC2Way]
No modular setting is made.
Check the modular setting for the
temperature control network/PLC2Way
function.
145
[Temp. control network/PLC2Way]
The temperature control
network/PLC2Way table is duplicated.
Check that the table number is not
duplicated in the [Buffering Area
Setting] dialog, and set correctly.
146*
[Temp. control network/PLC2Way]
Temperature control network/PLC2Way
table setting memory error
Contact your local distributor.
147
[Temp. control network/PLC2Way]
The model of the temperature
controller/PLC2Way does not match
the driver.
Bring up the Main Menu screen →
[Extension], and check the version. If
necessary, transfer screen data or the
temperature control/PLC2Way driver.
155
FROM data unregistered
The default.dtm file is not transferred
when [ Use Internal Flash ROM as
Back-up Area] is checked in the [Unit
Setting] dialog.
Or no port number table is found
though [ Use Station Number Table]
is checked for temperature control
network.
When this item is checked, the screen
data capacity of the Main Menu screen
becomes 128 kbytes smaller than the
case when it is not checked. Check the
setting.
If the capacity is not reduced, contact
your local distributor.
156
Both [ Use Internal Flash ROM as
Back-up Area] in the [Unit Setting]
dialog and [ Use Station Number
Table] for the temperature control
network are checked.
It is not possible to use both functions
at the same time. Uncheck either item,
and transfer screen data again.
157
[Temp. control network/PLC2Way]
Port numbers in the port number table
are duplicated.
Be sure to avoid port number
duplication when the port number table
is changed by the FROM_WR macro
command.
160
The SRAM area size exceeds the
available range.
Cassette: 256 k words
Built-in:
32 k words
Check the setting in the [SRAM/Clock
Setting] dialog.
161
The SRAM area is not formatted.
Format the SRAM area on the
“SRAM/Clock” screen that can be
displayed from the Main Menu screen.
Check that the battery voltage is not
lowered.
162
Data in the SRAM area does not match
the system program version.
Check the system program version,
and contact your local distributor.
163
The setting in the [SRAM/Clock Setting]
dialog does not match the SRAM area
format.
Format the SRAM area on the
“SRAM/Clock” screen that can be
displayed from the Main Menu screen.
170
The ladder communication program
does not exist in the V series though
[Ladder Tool] is selected for [Modular
Jack] for the screen data.
When ladder transfer is not performed,
uncheck [Ladder Tool] for [Modular
Jack 1 (or 2)].
To perform ladder transfer, transfer the
“MelQHCpQ.lcm” program to the V
series.
A3-11
A3
Errors Displayed on the V7 Series
143
Appendix 3 Error
V7
Error No.
Contents
Remedies
171
The PLC model set for screen data
does not match the model of the ladder
communication program.
Transfer the ladder communication
program for the PLC model. (Available
with Mitsubishi QnHCPU port (Q) only)
172
A ladder communication program is
stored in the V series though [Ladder
Tool] is not set for [Modular Jack] for
the screen data.
Check [Ladder Tool] for [Modular Jack]
for the screen data.
173
A connection other than [1 : 1] is
selected in the [Comm. Parameter]
dialog though [Ladder Tool] is set for
[Modular Jack] for the screen data.
([1 : 1] must be selected for ladder
transfer.)
When ladder transfer is not performed,
uncheck [Ladder Tool] for [Modular
Jack 1 (or 2)].
To perform ladder transfer, select [1 : 1]
for [Connection] in the [Comm.
Parameter] dialog.
174
UNIPLC is set for the I/F driver.
(Ladder transfer is not supported on the
simulator.)
Uncheck [Use Simulator] in the
[Transfer] dialog before transferring the
screen data.
180
The MODBUS slave communication
program is not found.
Transfer the screen data again.
181
The slave communication program is
stored in the V series though [Modbus
Slave Table is not set for [Modular
Jack] for the screen data.
Select [Modbus Slave Table] for
[Modular Jack] for the screen data.
182
[Modbus Slave Table] and [V-Link] are
selected for [Modular Jack] for the
screen data.
It is not possible to use slave
communication and V-link connection
at the same time.
201*
Total byte count error
Contact your local distributor.
×
202
The setting of [System Setting] → [Unit
Setting] → [Touch Switch] is not
correct.
Select the touch switch type
appropriate for the V series.
×
203
An item that cannot be used in the
matrix switch type V6 (= memo pad
function) exists.
Delete the item (= memo pad).
204
Manual setting font is not transferred.
Strings equivalent to auto setting font
are displayed correctly, however, if not,
they are tentatively displayed in
12-point font.
Check the manual font setting, and
transfer the screen data again.
205
SRAM cassette is not mounted.
Attach the SRAM cassette.
Attach the option unit “EU-0
A3-12
V6
×
206
Option unit “EU-0
×
207
Option unit “EU-00” is not mounted.
Attach the option unit “EU-00.”
×
208
There is no gateway setting.
To use the e-mail function, be sure to
set gateway on the network table
(Ethernet).
” is not mounted.
.”
Appendix 3 Error
Warning
An error may be displayed on the Main Menu screen during data transfer.
This is a warning message. For information on the contents of warnings, refer to
“Error Details and Solutions” (page A3-5). Error No. 200 and later are warning
messages.
Warning message
V7
V710iT
Main Menu
System Information
Screen Data
Information
Size: 5832704
2002-4 -1 09:23:30
FONT
VER.1.300/1.000/1.000
HK Gothic
PLC Type : MITSUBISHI A Series link
Comment :
Main Menu
System Information
F1
SYSTEM PROG. VER. 1.520
Baud Rate : 19200
Data Lebgth : 7
Stop Bit : 1
Parity : Even
Send Delay : 0 msec
Screen Data
Information
Size: 5832704
Connection : 1:1
Signal Level : RS232C
PLC Stat.No. : 0
F4
Editor:MJ1
SRAM/Clock
Ethernet Information
Trans.Speed : 10BASE-T
Stat. No. : 192.168.1.68
PORT : 10000
MAC : 0050FF000035
Ethernet
Card
Menu
07 : 23 : 30
I/F DRV VER.1.210
MELSEC AnA/N/U
PLC Type : MITSUBISHI A Series link
Comment :
F5
Data has some error
Warning : 205
1998- 9- 1
FONT
VER.1.300/1.150/1.000
HK Gothic
F2
Error : Stop
Time-Out : 0.50 sec
Retry : 3
F3
Connection : 1:1
Signal Level : RS232C
PLC Stat.No. : 0
V610T21
SYSTEM
I/F DRV VER.1.210
MELSEC AnA/N/U
Errors Displayed on the V7 Series
SYSTEM PROG. VER. 1.000
A3
V6
Error : Stop
Time-Out : 0.50 sec
Retry : 3
Baud Rate : 19200
Data Lebgth : 7
Stop Bit : 1
Parity : Even
Send Delay : 0 msec
Data has some error
Warning : 205
F6
Card
Menu
Editor : MJ1
I/O Test
F7
I/O Test
POWER
SYSTEM ERROR
When a system error is detected, the following error screen is displayed.
SYSTEM
SYSTEM ERROR : 32
F1
F2
TEA : XXXXXXXX
R0 : XXXXXXXX
R4 : XXXXXXXX
R8 : XXXXXXXX
R12 : XXXXXXXX
EXPEVT : XXXXXXXX
R1 : XXXXXXXX
R5 : XXXXXXXX
R9 : XXXXXXXX
R13 : XXXXXXXX
SSR : XXXXXXXX
R2 : XXXXXXXX
R6 : XXXXXXXX
R10 : XXXXXXXX
R14 : XXXXXXXX
SPC : XXXXXXXX
R3 : XXXXXXXX
R7 : XXXXXXXX
R11 : XXXXXXXX
R15 : XXXXXXXX
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
POWER
ERROR : XX
1:
11:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
Watch dock timer error
Switch table error
Request for displaying full error
Memory allocation system error
General exceptions/MMU address system error
RTOS system error
Memory error
Inaccurate memory error
The source of the error could be one of the following three problems. Contact
your local distributor.
1. Program crash due to noise
2. Hardware problem
3. Bad program
A3-13
Appendix 3 Error
Touch Switch is Active
If the power is turned off while a touch switch is activated, the following error
screen is displayed. Remove your finger from the screen.
SYSTEM
F1
Check
F2
F3
F4
Touch switch is active
Keep hand off the screen.
F5
F6
F7
POWER
A3-14
Appendix 3 Error
Errors Displayed on the PC when a Screen is Created
When a rule is violated when creating a screen, the following type of message is
displayed. Correct the error as indicated by the message.
When you go to the menu bar and select [Tool] → [Error Check], an error list
and solution procedure is displayed if an error is found in the screen creation
data.
Example: When you attempt to set two modes in one division.
Error Check
Errors in the file can be checked during editing.
Select [Tool] → [Error Check] from the menu bar.
• When no error is found:
The “Error Check Complete” message is displayed.
• When an error is found:
An error list like the one shown below is displayed.
• Detail window:
When you select an item and double-click, the detail window is displayed.
Fix the problem as indicated.
Display details by double-clicking.
A3-15
Errors Displayed on the PC when a Screen is Created
Example: When you attempt to set multiple entry modes in one overlap layer or
the base screen.
A3
Appendix 3 Error
Please use this page freely.
A3-16
INDEX
INDEX
Symbols
$L ............................................................... 24-9, A1-1
$LD ............................................................. 24-9, A1-1
$s ..........................................................................A1-1
$u .........................................................................A1-1
Numerics
1-graphic ....................................................... 9-9, 9-13
2-graphic ....................................................... 9-9, 9-13
A
absolute address .................................................... 9-6
access folder name ............................................ 23-10
ADD ...................................................................... 13-6
alarm display ............................................. 10-5, 10-62
first cause ..................................................... 10-62
internal memory ........................................... 10-67
switch ........................................................... 10-65
time display item .......................................... 10-70
alternate
switch output action ......................................... 3-8
AND ...................................................................... 13-7
animation .............................................................. 17-1
animation table ............................................. 17-12
note .............................................................. 17-16
outline ............................................................ 17-1
registration ..................................................... 17-4
End Frame No. ........................................ 17-5
frame edit ................................................. 17-7
Seconds to Replay ................................... 17-5
Start Frame No. ....................................... 17-5
test ........................................................... 17-5
setting example ............................................ 17-20
structure ......................................................... 17-3
arithmetic operation .............................................. 13-6
asynchronous display ........................................... 8-34
attribute table ........................................... 23-16, 23-40
AUTO .............................................18-5, 18-12, 18-17
auto operation stop time ..................................... 10-67
auto operation time ............................................. 10-67
auto uploading of screen data ............................ 23-14
AVG ...................................................................... 13-8
B
Backlight ............................................................... 1-15
bar graph ................................................................ 8-5
deviation ........................................................... 8-6
separate display ............................................... 8-9
standard ........................................................... 8-6
standard value ................................................. 8-6
target value ...................................................... 8-6
barcode ................................................................ 16-1
barcode setting .............................................. 16-2
connection ...................................................... 16-6
setting example .............................................. 16-5
BCD .............................................................5-7, 13-10
BCLR ....................................................................13-9
BIN ...............................................................5-7, 13-10
BIN (binary) .............................................................5-7
BIN file ................................................................23-50
BINV .....................................................................13-9
bit operation (macro) .............................................13-9
bit sampling ................................................10-4, 10-44
Display in Area .............................................10-45
initial status display ......................................10-47
print command memory ................................10-47
priority display .............................................. 10-48
real time print ................................................ 10-55
Relay Info. Out .............................................10-57
sample print .................................................. 10-54
status display ................................................ 10-46
switch ...........................................................10-52
time display .................................................. 10-47
blend value .........................................................18-20
Blink/Flash ............................................................1-18
blocks ................................................................... A2-2
BMOV .................................................................13-12
BRIGHT ...................................................13-17, 18-16
brightness adjustment ......................................... 13-17
BSET ....................................................................13-9
buffering area ........................................................10-9
full processing .............................................. 10-15
info. output memory ......................................10-10
memory designation ..................................... 10-11
No. of Samples .............................................10-14
No. of Words ................................................ 10-14
sample control memory ................................10-12
sampling method ..........................................10-13
sampling time ...............................................10-14
Store Target .................................................10-14
Use Operation .............................................. 10-15
Buffering File .......................................................25-14
built-in clock ..........................................................24-6
Buzzer ...................................................................1-17
Bytes for Record .................................................25-14
C
cache .........................................................22-9, 23-19
calendar .......................................................11-1, 11-4
correction ...................................................... 11-10
calendar memory ..................................................11-7
CALL ................................................................... 13-13
call-overlap ...........................................................2-16
card format ................................... 22-10, 22-12, 22-15
i
INDEX
C
CF card (V7 only) ................................................. 23-1
attribute table ............................................... 23-40
auto uploading of screen data ...................... 23-14
backing up memo pad data .......................... 23-34
CF card manager ......................................... 23-48
content ........................................................... 23-9
data logging .................................................. 23-16
memory manager function ........................... 23-27
multi-language display selection .................. 23-35
outline ............................................................. 23-1
saving a screen image ................................. 23-33
saving a video image ................................... 23-33
saving screen data ....................................... 23-11
Storing a JPEG Data .................................... 23-31
storing a pattern (bitmap) file ....................... 23-29
storing a sound (WAV) file ........................... 23-38
transferring recipe data ................................ 23-22
CF card format .........................................22-10, 23-16
CGI function ........................................................ 28-11
character display .................................................. 5-14
check ....................................................................A3-5
Check Digit ........................................................... 16-3
Check I/F driver ....................................................A3-5
CHG_DATA ........................................................ 13-26
CHG_LANG .............................................23-35, 29-14
CHG_LNG .......................................................... 13-29
CHK_TIME ......................................................... 13-22
CHR .................................................................... 13-11
closed area graph ................................................. 8-36
CMP .................................................................... 13-13
COLOR ............................................................... 18-16
command memory .........................................7-8, 7-17
communication error .............................................A3-1
Comm. Parameter .................................................. 1-3
CompactFlash ...................................................... 23-7
comparison (macro) ............................................ 13-13
CONTRAST .............................................13-28, 18-16
control memory ..................................................... 8-25
conversion (macro) ............................................. 13-10
Convert seconds into hhh:mm:ss ....................... 10-70
CVB .................................................................... 13-10
CVDF .................................................................. 13-11
CVFD .................................................................. 13-11
CVP .................................................................... 13-10
CWD ................................................................... 13-10
D
data display ............................................................ 5-1
character display ............................................ 5-14
message display ............................................ 5-17
notes .............................................................. 5-23
Num. Data Display ........................................... 5-4
outline ............................................................... 5-1
table data display ........................................... 5-18
Data File ............................................................. 25-14
Data has some error. ............................................A3-5
ii
data logging ..................................... 22-1, 23-16, 25-3
area ................................................................22-5
CF card ...........................................22-5, 22-8
SRAM memory card ......................22-6, 22-13
SRAM or SRAM cassette ..............22-5, 22-11
outline .............................................................22-1
store target .....................................................22-2
data sampling ............................................10-3, 10-31
Message to Print ..........................................10-32
print command memory ................................10-33
Sample Buffer Word No. ..............................10-36
sample count ................................................10-37
switch ...........................................................10-42
data sheet .............................................................14-1
printing data sheet ..........................................14-2
data sheet print .....................................................15-5
DEC (w/ +−sign) ......................................................5-6
DEC (w/ −sign) ........................................................5-6
DEC (w/o sign) ........................................................5-6
DELETE ..............................................................18-16
deviation ........................................................8-6, 8-12
digital switch .........................................................3-28
DIO Memory .........................................................1-18
display area transparent .......................................9-15
displayed character selection ....................29-2, 29-20
DIV ........................................................................13-6
Draw Mode
REP ................................................................4-11
XOR ..................................................................4-8
DSP_DATA .........................................................13-26
Dspdef ................................................................23-14
E
Edit Model Selection .............................................1-14
E-Mail ...........................................................26-3, 27-1
End Frame No. .....................................................17-5
entry data range ....................................................7-30
entry display ..........................................................7-29
entry keys (keypad) ..............................................7-20
entry mode ..............................................................7-1
data block .......................................................7-31
entry data range .............................................7-30
entry dialog setting ...........................................7-8
entry display ...................................................7-29
entry keys (keypad) ........................................7-20
entry target .....................................................7-26
item select function .........................................7-37
outline ...............................................................7-1
password function ..........................................7-43
type
block ...........................................................7-6
data display ................................................7-3
direct ..........................................................7-7
usage ................................................................7-2
entry target ............................................................7-26
Environment Setting .............................................1-19
INDEX
E
error ......................................................................A3-1
check ..............................................................A3-5
communication error ......................................A3-1
SYSTEM ERROR ........................................A3-13
Touch Switch is Active .................................A3-14
Warning ........................................................A3-13
error check .........................................................A3-15
Ethernet function .................................................. 26-1
E-Mail ............................................................. 26-3
Ethernet communication with PLC and
other V series ................................................. 26-2
screen data transfer ....................................... 26-1
web server ..................................................... 26-4
event timer macro ...................................... 13-2, 13-34
exposure intervals .............................................. 18-12
F
FILL .................................................................... 13-12
first cause ........................................................... 10-62
Font Setting .......................................................... 1-20
FOR/NEXT ......................................................... 13-14
format ................................................................. 22-10
card format .............................22-10, 22-12, 22-15
CF card format ............................................. 22-10
initialization .................................................. 22-12
frame edit ............................................................. 17-7
FROM ................................................................. 13-15
FROM_RD .......................................................... 13-15
FROM_WR ......................................................... 13-15
Function Switch Setting ........................................ 1-23
G
gateway ................................................................ 27-2
GET_BUF ........................................................... 13-26
GET_CLND ........................................................ 13-23
GET_MSG .......................................................... 13-21
GET_SCUR ........................................................ 13-25
GET_SMPL ........................................................ 13-24
GET_STATUS_FL .............................................. 13-29
GET_TIME ......................................................... 13-22
GET_XY ............................................................. 13-21
global macro .............................................. 13-2, 13-33
graph display .......................................................... 8-1
bar graph .......................................................... 8-5
closed area graph .......................................... 8-36
outline .............................................................. 8-1
panel meter .................................................... 8-17
pie graph ........................................................ 8-11
statistic graph (bar, pie) ................................. 8-22
trend graph ..................................................... 8-25
graphic display ....................................................... 9-1
canceling the XOR display
(transparent pattern) ...................................... 9-18
graphic colors ................................................. 9-16
REP ......................................................... 9-16
XOR ......................................................... 9-16
graphic mode ................................................... 9-2
graphic relay mode .......................................... 9-8
graphic mode ..........................................................9-2
absolute address ..............................................9-6
command ..........................................................9-4
external ......................................................9-4
internal .......................................................9-4
parameter .........................................................9-5
graphic relay mode .................................................9-8
display area transparent .................................9-15
mode
REP ..........................................................9-12
XOR .........................................................9-11
number of relays .............................................9-13
parameter .......................................................9-14
type
1-graphic ..................................................9-13
2-graphic ..................................................9-13
H
hard copy ..............................................................15-5
HDCOPY ............................................................ 23-33
HEX ........................................................................5-6
high speed ........................................................... A2-1
HTM/HTML ...........................................................28-5
I
indirect memory designation ............................... 13-30
initial graphic ...........................................................9-4
initial macro ................................................13-2, 13-32
initial status display .............................................10-47
initialization ................................................22-12, 24-5
input item select
external ...........................................................7-10
internal ..............................................................7-9
internal memory ................................................... A1-1
memory type .................................................. A1-1
system memory ($s) ............................... A1-1
user memory ($u / $L / $LD) ................... A1-1
interval timer ..............................................13-2, 13-35
Start Mem. Designation ................................13-36
Stop Timer after Execution of Macro ............ 13-37
Time-up Time ...............................................13-36
IP address .............................................................27-2
item select function ...............................................7-37
J
JIS/ASCII .....................................................5-16, 5-17
JMP ..................................................................... 13-14
JPEG display (V7 only) .........................................19-1
prepared JPEG file .........................................19-4
video image ....................................................19-9
wallpaper ........................................................19-7
JPEG file display .................................................28-16
JPEG/JPEG ..........................................................28-5
K
keypad
placement on overlap .....................................7-35
iii
INDEX
L
LABEL ................................................................ 13-14
lamp ........................................................................ 4-1
Draw Mode
REP ......................................................... 4-11
XOR ........................................................... 4-8
[Lamp] dialog .................................................... 4-2
notes .............................................................. 4-13
number of notches ........................................... 4-3
outline ............................................................... 4-1
language selection ................................................ 29-1
displayed character selection ..............29-2, 29-20
multi-language screen .........................29-2, 29-22
multi-language selection .......................29-1, 29-6
setting procedure ........................................... 29-4
type and font .................................................. 29-3
LD_RECIPE ........................................................ 23-22
LD_RECIPESEL ................................................. 23-24
logical operation (macro) ...................................... 13-7
low speed .............................................................A2-1
M
macro .................................................................... 13-1
event timer macro ........................................ 13-34
global macro ................................................. 13-33
indirect memory designation ........................ 13-30
initial macro .................................................. 13-32
interval timer ................................................. 13-35
macro command
arithmetic operation ................................. 13-6
bit operation ............................................. 13-9
brightness adjustment ............................ 13-17
comment ................................................ 13-17
comparison ............................................ 13-13
conversion ............................................. 13-10
FROM .................................................... 13-15
logical operation ....................................... 13-7
macro operation ..................................... 13-13
printer ..................................................... 13-16
read from user log FA-M3 ...................... 13-18
statistic operation ..................................... 13-8
system call ............................................. 13-19
transmit .................................................. 13-12
macro command list ....................................... 13-3
notes .............................................................. 13-1
macro mode ...............................................13-2, 13-42
macro operation .................................................. 13-13
MAX ...................................................................... 13-8
max. graphic ........................................................... 9-4
MemAcs.cgi ........................................................ 28-11
memo pad ............................................................. 12-1
save timing ..................................................... 12-6
storage area ................................................... 12-5
switch ............................................................. 12-3
system memory .............................................. 12-6
memory card editor ............................................... 25-4
memory card emulation area .......................24-7, 25-9
iv
memory card mode ....................................25-1, 25-16
data logging function ......................................25-3
memory card editor ........................................25-4
memory card emulation area ..........................25-9
memory card setting .....................................25-11
memory manager function ..............................25-2
recognition of storage media ..........................25-5
setting procedure ..........................................25-10
SRAM and CF card area ................................25-7
Memory Expansion ...............................................1-15
memory manager function .........................23-27, 25-2
message display (data display) ............................5-17